PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2011

161

SOUTH CHINA SEA 

AND THE GULF OF THAILAND

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2011 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

THIRTEENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
2

Pub. 161

Preface

0.0 Pub. 161, Sailing Directions (Enroute) South China Sea and

the Gulf of Thailand, Thirteenth Edition, 2011, is issued for

use in conjunction with Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia. Companion volumes

are Pubs. 162, 163, and 164.

0.0 Digital Nautical Charts 3, 11 and 23 provide electronic chart

coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 05 February 2011, including Notice to Mariners No. 6 of 2011.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

DNC.portal

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain website.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational
3

 Pub. 161

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, however, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Canadian Hydrographic Service Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks.

0.0 Reports from United States naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.

0.0
4

Pub. 161

0.0SECTOR LIMITS—PUB. 161
Pub. 154 5

Conversion Tables

Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
Pub. 161 6

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 161 9

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Sector 1

The South China Sea—Central Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Sector 3

Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, Including HainanTao . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Sector 4

Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Sector 5

Vietnam—Central and South Coasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Sector 6

The Gulf of Thailand (Coasts of Cambodia and Thailand) and Malaysia—East Coast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1

Pub. 161

1. 

The South China Sea—Central Part

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 161

SECTOR 1 

THE SOUTH CHINA SEA—CENTRAL PART

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes the central part of the South

China Sea, from Pratas Reef to Scawfell Shoal, about 1,100

miles SW, including Dangerous Ground. The description is

from NE to SW. 

General Remarks

1.1 Winds—Weather.—Typhoons occur mostly from

July to November, but have developed at other times. Most are

found N of 15°N when passing through the South China Sea

and follow W to WNW track lines. Typhoons have been known

to form in the South China Sea and move on a NW to NE

course out of the area. 

1.1 Typhoons of the western North Pacific Ocean are tropical

cyclones and do not differ from the cyclonic storms of other

tropical waters. The winds of the typhoon blow

counterclockwise and incline toward the center of low

barometric pressure.

1.1 The Northeast Monsoon is much stronger and more

persistent than the Southwest Monsoon. Over the open sea the

Northeast Monsoon is rarely interrupted, while the Southwest

Monsoon is often weak and irregular. Winds from the E and

SE, which may last for 1 or 2 days, are usually the winds that

break the storm system.

1.1 The change from one monsoon season to another is not

abrupt, but takes place in a series of surges extending over a

period of 4 to 6 weeks. Transitional months may vary slightly

with latitude. The Northeast Monsoon starts earlier and lasts

longer in the N latitudes, and the Southwest Monsoon starts

earlier and lasts longer in the S part of the area.

1.1 Advance warning of an approaching tropical depression or

typhoon may be had by observing such items as swell,

barometric pressure, cloud cover, and squall activity.

1.1 Tides—Currents.—In the open sea, tidal currents are

overshadowed by the monsoon drifts. In the vicinity of the land

or on banks and shoals, the tidal currents must be considered.

Moreover, when near the banks and shoals, there is apt to be a

deflection of the monsoon currents as well as a marked

increase in velocities.

1.1 September is the transition month, commencing the SW set

of the Northeast Monsoon currents in the W areas of the South

China Sea. This current reaches its maximum velocity and

constancy in the months of December and January. The time of

the onset of the Southwest Monsoon varies, so that in some

years the transitional stage may be up to the middle of May. 

1.1 On the average the NE current of this monsoon attains its

greatest velocity and constancy from June to August.

1.1 The foregoing remarks are strictly averages for the entire

area. Some degree of variation is noted such as between the S

and N areas of the South China Sea, as well as between the E

and W portions. 

1.1 Also of profound effect on the current is the proximity of

tropical storms that will produce a marked difference from the

normal flow.

The South China Sea

1.2 The central portion of the South China Sea is entered

from the N through the Luzon Strait and Taiwan Strait, from

the S through the Singapore Strait, and from the E from the

Sulu Sea. This area is bounded on the E by the Philippines, on

the S by the island of Borneo, on the W by Vietnam, and on the

NW and N by China.

1.2 Care should be taken not to violate restricted waters or to

approach too closely to the shores of the countries bordering

the South China Sea without clearance from the proper

authorities. Additionally, jurisdictional disputes at times

involve the islands in the open sea area and may cause a

conflict should a vessel approach too closely.

1.2 The choice of routes and passages in the South China Sea

must take into consideration the monsoon season, as well as

the size and power of the vessel. 

1.2 Most dangers in the South China Sea are surrounded by deep

water, thus rendering soundings useless when approaching

them. The approach toward a danger should be made with the

sun astern so as to make shoal water or breakers readily

distinguishable.

1.2 It is considered only probable that all dangers have been

located, except in the areas indicated as unsurveyed on the

chart, and the positions of many dangers may be as much as 2

or 3 miles in error. Additionally, many reported dangers have

not been confirmed, hence their existence and exact location

are in doubt. It is prudent to give these types of dangers a wide

berth. With the exception of North Danger Reef, Tizard Bank,

and the W side of Pratas Reef, the central part of the South

China Sea has not been wire dragged.

1.2 Accurate fixes are essential before attempting any passages

that diverge from the recommended routes. All navigational

equipment should be exploited to the fullest extent; however,

navigators must depend mainly on lookouts aloft and favorable

weather when in the vicinity of reefs or possible dangers.

Vessels intending to enter lagoons should be assisted by lead

boats equipped to lay temporary buoys.

1.2 There are no ports, with the exception of some offshore

marine terminals, and only a few protected anchorages within

the limits of this sector.

1.2 Pipelines lead between structures within a field, between the

various fields, and to the shore collecting stations. Gas

pipelines contain high pressure flammable natural gas.

Navigation is restricted and anchoring or trawling is prohibited

in these areas. 

1.2 Vessels causing damage to a pipeline by anchoring or

trawling risk prosecution, fire hazard, and loss of buoyancy to

the vessel.

1.2 Floating or fixed drilling rigs may be encountered in some

areas covered by this publication. The emitted flares from these

structures may be seen from distances exceeding 20 miles. 

1.2 Buoys and lighted buoys associated with drilling operations

are frequently moored in the vicinity of the rigs. The positions
4 Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 

Pub. 161

of these rigs and buoys are subject to change, and where

known, the changes are promulgated by NAVAREA XI Radio

Navigational Warning Messages. 

1.2 Permanent platforms, structures, and buoys are usually

charted. These structures exhibit lights (Mo (U) 15 seconds)

and sound fog signals (Mo (U) 30 seconds). Numerous belowwater obstructions, some marked by buoys, lie in the gas fields. 

1.2 The limits of the gas fields are charted, but not all of the

features are contained within a field. Special care should be

exercised when navigating in the vicinity. Anchoring within a

gas field is prohibited, except where designated.

1.2 Fishing is a major industry and one of the main sources of

food in many countries bordering the South China Sea. There

is little evidence of fish migration, but certain grounds have

seasonal fishing due to their exposure to the Northeast

Monsoon and the Southwest Monsoon. Traps, seine and drift

nets, lines, lures, and bottom trawls are used. 

1.2 Sizes of craft vary from rowing or sailing boats (3m in

length), to larger, powered craft. In the coastal waters, the

fishing fleet may number from 3 to 50 vessels, with net and

line fishing out to the 10m curve, and trawling in deeper

waters.

1.2 Enormous fleets of fishing junks are met off the coast of

China. As a rule, the junks have their smallest sail forward.

Large trading junks have five masts, with two small sails aft. 

1.2 Chinese junks do not carry the regulation lights.

1.2 Vessels fishing for squid may be encountered in the vicinity

of the Taiwan Strait, principally from July to October. Bright

lights may be shown at night to attract the fish. 

1.2 Fish havens and Fish Aggregating Devices (FADS) are

generally established within 5 miles of the shoreline and are

markedly frequented by fishing vessels. Fish traps have been

reported well offshore despite their generally being set in fairly

shallow waters. Marine farms may be moored up to 30 miles

offshore and may be attended by service vessels. As their

placement may be temporary, they are not necessarily charted.

Pratas Island

1.3 Pratas Island (20°42'N., 116°43'E.), lying on the W

central edge of Pratas Reef, lies 160 miles SE of Hong Kong

and constitutes a danger to vessels en route between Manila

and Hong Kong or transiting the Taiwan and Singapore Straits.

1.3 Pratas Island is composed of sand, covered with scrubby

brush, and attains a height of about 12m to the top of the

vegetation. There is a small settlement with a weather station

located near the center of the E part of the island. 

1.3 Landing is possible on the S side of the E extremity of Pratas

Island. The shallow inlet at the W end of the island is

accessible to small boats only. A reef, which dries, extends off

the W side of the island with several detached coral patches

being found between this reef and the main reef to the NW.

1.3 Pratas Reef is a classic example of a coral atoll, being

roughly ring-shaped and about 13 miles in diameter. The

lagoon within the reef is coral-studded with depths of up to

about 16m. The N, S, and E sides uncover and are steep-to; the

W side has submerged dangers through which a channel leads

into the lagoon.

1.3 The lagoon entrance channel leads from a position about 3

miles S of the W end of Pratas Island in a NE direction for

about 4 miles. The channel is reported to have depths of over

2.7m, but crosses charted areas of lesser depth. Buoys and

range beacons mark the fairway. It is bordered on the N by a

white sand spit and passes to the SE of the ordnance dumping

area within the reef.

1.3 Several wrecks lie stranded on Pratas Reef. One of these

wrecks lies about 7.5 miles, bearing 050°, from the E extremity

of the island. A light is shown from a position near the SE

extremity of Pratas Island and an airfield control tower stands

about 0.5 mile WNW of the light. In hazy weather, the island is

seldom seen beyond 5 or 6 miles, and the breakers on the reef

may not be seen until within 1 mile.

1.3 In fair weather, anchorage in the swept area to the W of the

island is available to vessels with prior clearance. The

anchorage has various depths and a sandy bottom. A vessel of

light draft might anchor on the reef, in the middle of the

channel entrance, in a depth of 5.5m, or cross the reef and

anchor inside the lagoon.

1.3 Caution.—During the strength of the monsoons, vessels

should pass leeward of the reef because the currents invariably

set with the wind. The weather is frequently thick and hazy

near the reef and soundings give no warning of close approach

to it. A wide berth is recommended.

1.3 A 9.2m patch lies 3 miles WSW of the W end of the island. 

1.3 Currents and rips have been reported to be strong in the

sector extending 20 to 50 miles NW through NE and E of

Pratas Reef and are sometimes mistaken for breakers.

1.3 Circular ammunition dumping areas are located about 5.25

miles SW, 1 mile SW, and 1.75 miles SSE of the SE point of

Pratas Island.

1.4 Huizhou Oil Terminal (21°21'N., 115°25'E.)

consists of two offshore oil platforms and three tanker mooring

buoys 90 miles SE of Hong Kong. A platform and tanker

mooring buoy, which lies about 14 miles NE, are connected by

a submarine pipeline. 

1.4 Xijiang Terminal (21°18'N., 114°59'E.), developed 20

miles W of Huizhou Oil Terminal, consists of three offshore

tanker mooring buoys connected by a submarine pipeline.

Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot boards by helicopter no less

than 4 miles from the terminal. Vessels should notify agents

and the terminal with an ETA 96 hours, 72 hours, 48 hours, 24

hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival.

1.4 Caution.—Several well heads, with varying depths best seen

on chart, exist in the area around these terminals. 

1.5 Vereker Banks (21°00'N., 116°00'E.) consists of two

steep-to coral banks 45 miles NW of Pratas Reef. Heavy tide

rips and overfalls have been reported in this area. During the

month of February, the set of the current in the vicinity of the

banks varies between WSW and WNW. At times it sets to

windward although, with calms or light SW winds it sets

between SSE and ESE. Normal rates of drift are 0.2 to 1 knot.

1.5 North Vereker Bank has a least known depth of 11m (1972),

with general depths of 60 to 90m over the remainder of the

bank. About 2 to 3 miles of deep water separates North Vereker

Bank from South Vereker Bank, which has a least known depth

of 58m. 

1.5 A well head, with a depth of 4.1m, lies 30m off North

Vereker Bank and is charted. 
Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 5

Pub. 161

1.5 A well head, in a depth of over 100m, lies 28 miles N of

Vereker Banks, in position 21°38'N, 116°03'E. The associated

production platform and SPM form Lu Feng Terminal, which

is enclosed by a restricted area. Exploration for oil is taking

place in this vicinity.

1.5 Lan Shui Terminal (Liuhua Field) (20°50'N., 115°41'E.)

(World Port Index No. 57775) is a purpose-built Floating

Production Storage and Off-loading vessel (FPSO).

1.5 A restricted area extends a radius of 2 miles around Jiazi

Offshore Platform in position 21°22'15"N, 116°09'25"E. The

platform 3 miles N of it has been removed and the restricted

area withdrawn.

1.6 Saint Esprit Shoal (19°33'N., 113°03'E.) is an

isolated coral shoal, with a least depth of 10.8m, lying 35 miles

W of the customary track from Hong Kong. Strong rips have

been observed in the vicinity of the shoal. Currents generally

set with the wind.

1.6 Helen Shoal (19°12'N., 113°52'E.) lies 50 miles SE of Saint

Esprit Shoal and 15 miles E of the usual route from Hong

Kong. The shoal is steep-to, breaks in bad weather, and is

charted with a least depth of 10.2m. A depth of 18.3m has been

reported to lie 6 miles SE of the shoal.

1.6 Strong rips have been observed in the vicinity of Helen

Shoal, but upon further investigation deep water was found. 

1.6 The current is little affected by the shoal and usually sets

with the prevailing monsoon.

The Paracel Islands

1.7 The Paracel Islands (16°40'N., 112°20'E.) are made

up of the Amphitrite Group, the Crescent Group, and several

off-lying islands and coral reefs lying W of the main Hong

Kong-Singapore route. The islets are of low elevation; some

are covered with trees or vegetation. 

1.7 Navigation through the area presents little difficulty in fair

weather provided a good lookout is kept, preferably high on the

mast. Breakers are often visible on many of the reefs and

above-water rocks. The use of radar is encouraged as many

wrecks lying stranded on the surrounding reefs are radar

conspicuous. 

1.7 In poor weather, unless seeking anchorage, the Paracel

Islands should be avoided. Currents generally correspond to

the prevailing monsoon, but with a light wind, continually

change direction over the reefs attaining a rate of 2 knots.

Anchorages, though available, are mostly open and offer only

slight protection when leeward of the islands.

1.8 North Reef (17°06'N., 111°30'E.) is the

northwesternmost danger in the area. The reef is about 7 miles

long on its E-W axis, 2.5 miles wide at its broadest width, and

steep-to. Rocks break the surface all around the edge of the

reef and at certain times the breakers on the reef can be heard at

a considerable distance. A boat passage on the SW side of the

reef is marked on its E side.

1.8 North Reef is reported to be a good radar target, possibly due

to the breakers and wreckage on the reef.

The Amphitrite Group (16°53'N., 112°17'E.) is the

northeasternmost cluster of islands, reefs, and shoals in the

Paracel Islands and consists of two parts separated by a deep

channel 3.5 miles wide. The N portion has two main reefs

bisected by Zappe Pass. Several small islands stand on these

two reefs. 

1.8 The S portion consists of Woody Island and Rocky Island,

which lie upon a common reef.

1.8 Zappe Pass is about 0.5 mile wide between the reefs and has

a least known depth of 4.6m. It is available only for small craft

during favorable conditions. With a fresh breeze, breakers

extend across the pass and there is usually a strong current

running through it.

1.8 West Sand is a low sandy cay lying near the W extremity of

the northernmost reef. Tree Island (16°59'N., 112°16'E.) lies 4

miles E of West Sand and about 1 mile from the E extremity of

the reef. The island is covered with mangrove bushes,

surrounded by a white sand beach, and has a palm tree near its

center.

1.8 Tides—Currents.—Currents of 6 to 7 knots have been

reported E of the Amphitrite Group during springs.

1.9 North Island (16°58'N., 112°18'E.) lies 2 miles ESE

of Tree Island across Zappe Pass. A reef extends nearly 0.5

mile NW from North Island and 4 miles SE. Several small

buildings stand on the island. 

1.9 To the SE of North Island lie Middle Island, South Island,

and South Sand (16°56'N., 112°20'E.). Anchorage may be

taken, in depths of 20 to 29m, SSW of North Island and Middle

Island, over a bottom of sand. A depth of 20m lies 3 miles NE

of South Sand.

1.10 Woody Island (16°50'N., 112°20'E.) lies 9 miles SSE

of Tree Island in the Amphitrite Group; it is the southernmost

and largest of the islands. It is about 1 mile in length, covered

with trees, and surrounded by a white sand beach. Guano is

shipped from the island.

1.10 Aspect.—Two mooring buoys lie close N of Woody Island. 

1.10 In the vicinity of the settlement on the island are a square

tower, two temples, a meteorological station, and several large

buildings. On the S side of the island stands an observation

tower and four whip antennas situated about 0.3 mile N of this

tower. 

1.10 A light is shown from a white round stone tower with black

bands. Landing can be effected on the SW side of Woody

Island. This island is connected to Rocky Island to the NE by

an overhead cable. There are depths of 14.6m 5 miles SSE of

Woody Island.

1.10 Anchorage.—During S winds, anchorage can be taken in a

position about 0.5 mile from the reef fringing the N side of

Woody Island, in a depth of 24m, sand. In NE winds there is

good anchorage about 0.5 mile off the SW shore of Woody

Island, in 33 to 37m, sand.

1.10 Rocky Island, 14m high, lies on the same drying reef as does

Woody Island. There are a few houses on the S end and a

concrete pier on the N end of the island. 

1.10 Two red mooring buoys, No. I and No. II, lie outside the 20m

curve, 0.8 mile NW of Rocky Island. A depth of 14.6m exists

in approximate position 16°46'N, 112°21'E.

1.10 Iltis Bank (16°46'N., 112°13'E.), with depths of 10.6 to

14.8m, lies 7 miles SW of Woody Island. The bank is about 3

miles long, 1.5 miles wide, and is fairly steep-to.
6 Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 

Pub. 161

1.10 Caution.—Caution is advised when anchoring due to the

lack of shelter available and imperfect surveys of the area.

The Crescent Group

1.11 The Crescent Group consists of several low sand islets

and numerous reefs which form a crescent open to the S. They

lie 45 miles SW of the Amphitrite Group. 

1.11 The principal islands are covered with thick vegetation and

have been reported to be visible from 10 miles. The lagoon,

partly enclosed within the islands and reefs, is about 20 square

miles in extent and provides suitable shelter for most classes of

vessels.

1.11 Caution.—Navigation at night between the islets of this

group is dangerous.

1.12 The Duncan Islands (16°27'N., 111°43'E.) is actually

two coral islets joined by a sand spit and surrounded by a coral

reef that is steep-to. It lies on the SE horn of the crescent and is

separated from Drummond Island to the E by the SE lagoon

entrance channel which is deep and about 1.5 miles wide. A

rock, with a depth less than 1.8m, lies close SE of the E island.

1.12 Drummond Island, covered with mangroves and bushes, is

3m high and lies on the SW tip of a continuous reef that

extends NE about 4 miles, then curves NW about 4 miles to

Observation Bank.

1.12 Observation Bank constitutes the N extremity of the

Crescent Group. It is a sand cay on a reef about 2 miles long

oriented in a SE-NW direction. A detached reef extends about

3.2 miles WSW from the N end of the main reef. The area of

the lagoon within the bight of this detached reef and the reef

stretching NE and NW of Drummond Island is foul.

1.13 Pattle Island (16°32'N., 111°36'E.), 9m high, is

covered with brush and mangroves. A reef surrounding the

island extends about 1.7 miles NE. On either side of the reef

there is a clear channel. Boats can land at LW in a bight on the

S side of the island, taking care to avoid the rocks close to

shore. 

1.13 There is a large three-story building in the center of the

island with another large building close E. Atop the W building

is a skeleton tower surmounted by a flag staff. 

1.13 A prominent pylon stands about 0.1 mile WSW of the

buildings and a conspicuous shrine lies on the SW extremity of

the island. There is a meteorological station and a well from

which water is available on Pattle Island.

1.13 A rock jetty, 183m long, is usable by small boats and extends

from the E side of the island, terminating seaward in a small Thead. A red building is situated at the root of the jetty. Depths

alongside the face of the T-head range from 1.5 to 2.7m at HW.

1.13 The climate at Pattle Island is precarious after a rainfall,

when a noxious gas arises from the guano deposits.

1.13 Robert Island lies 2 miles SW of Pattle Island. It is 8m high,

fringed by a reef, and covered with vegetation. There is a

conspicuous observation tower on the S end of the island.

Landing can be effected on its E side and well water can be

obtained here. 

1.13 A bank, with depths of 4m and less, extends about 0.8 mile

N from Robert Island and another bank, with depths of 1 to 6m,

lies within 0.3 mile of the shore on the SE side.

1.13 Caution.—Anchorage is not recommended in the area due

to the coral bottom.

1.14 Antelope Reef (16°27'N., 111°35'E.), which partially

dires, forms the SW horn of the crescent. A sand cay is located

on the SE extremity of this reef.

1.14 The lagoon entrance, between Duncan Island and Antelope

Reef, is about 5 miles wide and deep. There is a 3.7m patch

and an 8.5m patch located 3.5 and 2.8 miles W, respectively, of

Duncan Island.

1.14 Anchorage.—There is a good choice of anchorages within

the lagoon to suit any prevailing conditions. Depths range from

7.3 to 12.8m over the coral heads to 20.1 to 47.6m in the more

open portions. There is good shelter during the Northeast

Monsoon, but a swell can develop during the strength of the

Southwest Monsoon. The tidal current in the SE entrance to the

lagoon has been observed to be about 1.5 knots, but within the

anchorage the tidal current is inappreciable.

1.14 Anchorage can be taken near the reef off the N side of

Duncan Island, in 18 to 27m, where there are broad patches of

sandy bottom.

1.14 Money Island (16°27'N., 111°30'E.), 6m high and brush

covered, lies at the W end of a reef which is separated from the

SW horn of the crescent by a channel about 1.5 miles wide.

Several sand cays lie E of Money Island on the same reef. The

island is reported to be a good radar target.

Reefs and Islands

1.15 Dido Bank (16°49'N., 112°53'E.), with a depth of

23m, is steep-to, with depths of 146m and more around it.

1.15 Lincoln Island (16°40'N., 112°44'E.) is the easternmost

island of the Paracel Islands and lies 40 miles W of the main

Hong Kong-Singapore route. The island is 5m high and brushcovered, about 1.25 miles long, and fringed by a drying reef. 

1.15 A tower stands on the NE end of the island; the NE face of

the island is bluff. It is reported that water can be found on

Lincoln Island and that the island is a good radar target.

1.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken leeward of Lincoln

Island about 0.5 mile offshore, in 18m, coral.

1.15 Caution.—Mariners are advised not to cross the bank which

extends 14 miles S, then 5 miles WSW from the SE end of the

island as it has not been completely examined. This narrow

coral bank is studded with rocks. A wreck, reported to be radar

conspicuous, lies stranded on the bank about 1.8 miles SE of

the SE extremity of the island. 

1.15 A 15.1m patch and a 13.2m patch lie about 1 mile S and 1.5

miles W, respectively, of the S end of this coral bank. Further

shoaling in this vicinity appears highly probable because of the

irregular bottom, with visible coral reefs running E and W. 

1.15 Another bank, with depths of less than 18m, extends about

1.2 miles NW from the island.

1.16 Pyramid Rock (16°35'N., 112°39'E.), 5m high and

cone-shaped, is located 7.2 miles SW of Lincoln Island. When

seen from a distance, this islet could be mistaken for a junk.

1.16 A 12m patch and 16.5m patch lie 6.5 miles and 10 miles

WSW, respectively, of Pyramid Rock in the area close N of

Neptuna Banks. Another patch of 20m lies 2 miles SSW of the

above 16.5m depth. 
Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 7

Pub. 161

1.16 Bremen Bank lies 15 miles N of Bombay Reef; it is 14.5

miles long and ENE-WSW oriented, having a least depth of

11.4m near its SW end. In 1954, the bank was reported to be

extending W.

1.16 Jehangire Reefs lie about 5 miles ENE of Bremen Bank.

There are three detached patches with the least depth being

12.8m on the SW part of the S patch. The depths among the

patches are very irregular.

1.16 Bombay Reef (16°02'N., 112°31'E.), the southeasternmost

known danger of the Paracel Islands, is a steep-to reef 10 miles

long E and W that surrounds a rock-strewn lagoon. The sea

breaks on the reef where there are several rocks awash, four

above-water rocks, and the remains of many old wrecks. The

stranded wreck on the NE extremity of the reef was reported to

be radar conspicuous up to 15 miles. A light is shown from the

SW extremity of this reef.

1.16 Caution.—Caution is necessary when navigating in the

vicinity of Bombay Reef.

1.16 There is a 1.2m bore at HW which resembles breakers on a

reef between Bombay Reef and Vuladdore Reef.

1.16 Vuladdore Reef lies about 35 miles NW of Bombay Reef. It

is 7 miles long, a little over 2 miles wide, and has a few rocks

above-water. At times, the sea breaks heavily over this reef.

1.16 Discolored water is reported (2008) to lie approximately 87

miles ENE of Bombay Reef light in position 16°38.1'N,

113°48.0'E. 

1.17 Discovery Reef (16°14'N., 111°40'E.) takes the form

of a large atoll lying about 20 miles WSW of Vuladdore Reef.

The reef is steep-to and marked by heavy overfalls. Several

above-water rocks lie on the reef which has barely 3.7m of

water over any part of it. Boats can enter the lagoon through

channels on the N and S sides of Discovery Reef, the narrower

channel being the one on the N side. A stranded wreck lies on

the S side of the reef.

1.17 Passu Keah (16°03'N., 111°46'E.) is a sand cay located on

the W end of a steep-to reef which is 5 miles long in an E-W

direction. It is located about 8 miles S of Discovery Reef.

1.17 Triton Island (15°47'N., 111°12'E.) is the southwesternmost

danger in the Paracel Islands. It is a sand cay about 3m high

and less than 1 mile in diameter. The surrounding reef is steepto, with at most 1.8m of water over it; it extends about 1 mile N

and NE and about 0.5 mile in other directions. The island is a

breeding place for birds. In 1986, a square white building was

reported to be conspicuous near the center of the island.

1.17 Caution.—Triton Island is extremely difficult to distinguish

when approaching the Paracel Islands from the SW. A wide

berth to the W is recommended. It has been reported that Triton

Island has not shown on radar when vessels have been as close

as 1 mile.

Macclesfield Bank

1.18 Macclesfield Bank (15°45'N., 114°20'E.) is a

submerged atoll about 75 miles long on its NE-SW axis and

about half that wide at its broadest part. Its W edge lies about

35 miles SE of the main Hong Kong-Singapore route.

1.18 Caution.—Caution should be exercised in the vicinity of

Macclesfield Bank. Although the bank can usually be seen

from aloft due to the fact that in heavy weather the sea along its

edge is high and confused, the W part of the reef and lagoon

have been only partially examined. Shoals other than those

charted may exist. It is recommended that vessels pass either

well W or E of the bank.

1.18 The coral rim of Macclesfield Bank, with an average width

of 3 miles, has depths of 11.8m at Pygmy Shoal on the NE end

of the bank and depths of 11.6 to 18m elsewhere. Many other

shoals lie around the rim with their depths best seen on the

chart. Within the lagoon, Walker Shoal is the shallowest known

danger, with a depth of 9.2m. 

1.19 Truro Shoal (16°20'N., 116°43'E.), with a depth of

18.2m, lies 110 miles E of Pygmy Shoal. In 1983, the position

of the shoal was reported to be doubtful.

1.19 Scarborough Reef (Scarborough Shoal) (15°08'N.,

117°45'E.) consists of a narrow belt of barely submerged reef

enclosing a lagoon. On the belt are scattered rocks which are

visible at a considerable distance. A score or more of these

rocks, standing 1.5 to 2.5m high, are found on the SW corner

of the reef with South Rock, the highest of these scattered

rocks, on its SE extremity. In 1986, the reef was reported to lie

2 miles N of its charted position. Scarborough Reef Light is

shown from the NE side of the reef.

1.19 Close N of South Rock is a channel about 0.2 mile wide with

general depths of 7.3 to 9.2m leading into the lagoon. 

1.19 This channel is encumbered with reef patches as shallow as

2.7m; the lagoon is almost completely filled with subsurface

coral heads at about 15m intervals.

1.19 A radar-conspicuous stranded wreck, used as a bombing

target, is located on the SE side of the reef in approximate

position 15°05'30"N, 117°50'00"E. Fishing vessels frequent

the reef.

1.19 The ruins of an iron tower stand close to the above channel

opening. A line of breakers marking the reef has been seen at a

distance of 10 miles. Currents in the vicinity of the reef vary

with the monsoons, setting NE during the Southwest Monsoon,

and in a W or NW direction during the Northeast Monsoon.

Dangerous Ground

1.20 In the SE part of the South China Sea lies an oblong

area about 52,000 square miles in extent, known as Dangerous

Ground. Dangerous Ground is a large area to the NW of the

Palawan Passage which is known to abound with dangers. No

systematic surveys have been carried out in the area, and the

existence of uncharted patches of coral and shoals is likely.

1.20 Sovereignty over some of the islands in Dangerous Ground

is subject to competing claims which may be supported by a

force of arms. Vessels are warned not to pass through this area.

1.20 The area is studded with sunken reefs and coral atolls awash.

The major axis of the area bears about 045°-225° for a distance

of 340 miles with a maximum breadth along its minor axis of

175 miles. For the approximate limits of Dangerous Ground,

the appropriate charts should be consulted.

1.20 Squalls frequently arise temporarily reducing visibility to

zero. The sea is usually a greenish-blue color with a

transparency to depths of 24 to 42m, and on clear days with the

sun behind the observer at an altitude of more than 30°, it is

possible to make out the bottom clearly at a depth of 29m. 

1.20 Sunken reefs may not show discoloration when the sun is
8 Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 

Pub. 161

low, the sea is mirror like, or the sky is overcast. Close to shoal

water, discoloration may not be apparent, but the flow of

currents against the wind may cause a belt of rips. 

1.20 Occasionally the presence of an atoll may be detected by

reflection of the discolored water on the underside of clouds

directly above it. At low tide, drying patches and rocks are

more easily located. With a gentle or moderate breeze, breakers

become visible, marking reefs awash.

1.20 Winds—Weather.—During the Northeast Monsoon, there

are very few squalls and these are of short duration. The

weather is comparatively dry and fair with prevailing winds

from the NE. Little or no swell was observed during the

Northeast Monsoon. When circumstances require, this is the

best season for navigating in the region of Dangerous Ground.

1.20 The onslaught of the Southwest Monsoon brings increasing

cloud cover and squall activity. The wind velocity ranges from

a dead calm to a strong breeze, becoming variable in direction. 

1.20 As the Southwest Monsoon gathers strength, the sea

becomes rough and the sky overcast. A fresh SW breeze,

accompanied by a moderate to rough SW sea and heavy rains,

prevails during the middle months of this monsoon. A

moderate SW swell may arise that is usually greater in the W

than in the E of Dangerous Ground. 

1.20 There are many days during the Southwest Monsoon when it

is impossible to obtain celestial observations. Considerable

atmospheric disturbance to long wave radio broadcasts may be

experienced. The high humidity may cause some damage to

radio apparatus.

1.20 Tides—Currents.—Accurate information on ocean currents

is not available in the region of Dangerous Ground.

1.20 Caution.—Throughout the area of Dangerous Ground,

vessels must rely heavily on seaman’s eye navigation and

should not normally enter the area other than in daylight. 

1.20 Radar is of little value. The reefs rise abruptly from ocean

depths, hence, soundings give no warning. An uncharted

sounding of less than 1,100m should at once call for extreme

caution. Difficulty may be experienced with celestial

observations because of false horizons. In April or May, during

fair weather, mirages are frequently encountered.

1.20 Vessels are cautioned not to enter the area other than in an

emergency. Little advantage can be had in deviating from the

recommended routes in the South China Sea to cross this area

in view of the extensive dangers to be encountered. Due to the

conflicting dates and accuracy of the various partial surveys of

Dangerous Ground, certain shoals and reefs may appear on one

chart, but not on another regardless of the scales involved. 

1.20 Charted depths and their locations may present considerable

error in the lesser known regions of this area. Avoidance of

Dangerous Ground is the mariner’s only assurance of safety.

1.21 North Danger Reef (11°25'N., 114°21'E.) is a steepto coral formation lying to the NW of Dangerous Ground. It is

about 8.5 miles long and encloses, but does not shelter, a

lagoon. This lagoon is remarkably flat in the inner portions

where it has been wire dragged to a depth of 18m, with the

exception of an isolated coral head, wire-dragged to a depth of

14.6m, in about the center of the lagoon. The surrounding reef

is shallow and variable in width. There are many dangers with

depths of less than 9.2m. All known dangers are plainly visible

in suitable conditions of light.

1.21 North Reef, at the NE end of North Danger Reef, dries in

patches. The sea breaks heavily on its weather side during the

Northeast Monsoon. North Pass separates North Reef from

North East Cay, but is recommended only for small craft

entering the lagoon.

1.21 North East Cay (11°27'N., 114°21'E.) is about 0.4 mile long

in a NE-SW direction and fringed by a drying reef extending

0.5 mile NE. It is 3m high, 91m across at its widest point, and

covered with shrubs. A light is shown close NE of North East

Cay. Shira Islet, a conspicuous hummock, lies about 0.2 mile

SE of the observation spot on the SE end of North East Cay.

1.21 Middle Pass separates North East Cay from South West Cay.

The pass is about 0.75 mile wide and has been wire dragged to

a depth of 6.4m in its middle part. 

1.21 Tidal currents, having a rate of about 1.8 knots, have been

experienced in this pass. 

1.21 South West Cay, located toward the SE part of a drying reef,

is thickly wooded. A mast stands near the center of the cay and

a gray metal tripod supports a radar reflector on the NE end of

South West Cay. Landings have been effected on the SE side of

the cay and are possible during the Southwest Monsoon. There

are a few buildings on the cay. The cay is marked by a light.

1.21 West Pass is divided into two parts. The N part lies between

Jenkins Patches and South West Cay and is wire dragged to

10m through its center to the lagoon. Jenkins Patches have a

least known depth of 3.7m and occasionally break. The S part

of West Pass separates Jenkins Patches from South Reef. This

pass is dragged to 8.4m and is about 0.5 mile wide.

1.22 South Reef (11°23.3'N., 114°17.9'E.), at the SW end

of North Danger, dries in patches. A rock, that dries 1m, stands

on the SE side of the reef. The sea breaks heavily on the

weather side of this reef during the Southwest Monsoon. Both

this reef and North Reef appear greenish-white and can be

easily distinguished in fine weather.

1.22 The remainder of the encircling reef, to the E then N of

South Reef to North Reef, contains two more passes and

several named shoals. 

1.22 South Pass, dragged to 8.5m, is about 0.5 mile wide and is

separated from East Pass by Sabine and Farquharson Patches.

East Pass, about 1.2 miles wide, has clear depths of 7.7 to

9.3m. Day Shoal, which always breaks in rough weather, and

Iroquois Ridge lie N and NW, respectively, of East Pass.

1.22 Tides—Currents.—The tides are almost entirely diurnal,

with a large diurnal inequality.

1.22 The currents near and within North Danger Reef seldom

exceed 1.5 knots. The currents appear to be mainly seasonal,

depending on the prevailing monsoon and there is very little

relation between the tides and the currents. Near the reef,

currents having rates of a little over 1 knot may be experienced,

with the direction depending on the prevailing wind.

1.22 Anchorage.—Ships have anchored about 0.5 mile S of

North East Cay during the Northeast Monsoon and 1.25 miles

SSE of South West Cay after proceeding through West Pass.

Throughout the lagoon there is good holding ground, coral

sand. There is little shelter, however, as the depths over the

sunken rim of the atoll are too great to restrict the seas.

1.22 Trident Shoal (11°28'N., 114°40'E.) is a submerged coral

atoll lying 16 miles E of North Danger Reef. A reef, awash, lies

at the N end of the shoal. Depths of 3.9m and 7.3m lie E and
Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 9

Pub. 161

W, respectively, of this drying reef. No entrance to the lagoon

can be recommended due to the lack of complete information

concerning the atoll.

1.22 Lys Shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, is steep-to and lies to

the SSW of Trident Shoal.

Thitu Island and and its adjacent reefs consist of several

dangerous patches upon two coral banks extending 12 miles in

an E-W direction and separated by a deep narrow channel.

1.23 Thitu Island (11°03'N., 114°17'E.) lies near the SW

part of a drying reef on the E end of the W of the two coral

banks. It is 4m high and overgrown with grass and scrub brush. 

1.23 A light is shown from the SW end of the island near a palm

grove and a well is found near the beach through the palms.

Occasionally, fishermen inhabit the island as it is possible to

effect a landing during the Northeast Monsoon in the middle of

the W side where there is an opening in the fringing reef. 

1.23 Anchorage can be taken outside the reef, about 1 mile SW of

the island, in a depth of 18m, from which position the reef is

visible.

1.23 The W reefs of Thitu Island are composed of several drying

reefs and shoal patches. A sand cay lies on one of these drying

reefs about 3.5 miles W of the island. Entrance to the lagoon

can be taken through the passage to the E of the sand cay, with

a least depth of 9m in the center of the channel. Many of the

surrounding reefs are marked by breakers.

1.23 The E reef, its W edge lying about 0.7 mile E of Thitu Island,

is a mass of drying coral and shoal water. This reef extends

about 4.5 miles in a NE direction.

1.23 Subi Reef (10°54'N., 114°06'E.) is located 14 miles SW of

Thitu Island. It dries, surrounds a lagoon, is steep-to, and

usually breaks. There is no apparent entrance into the lagoon.

1.23 Loaita Bank, comprised of shoals, reefs, an island, and two

sand cays that lie on the perimeter of a lagoon, is about 20

miles in length on its NE-SW axis which extends to the NW of

Dangerous Ground.

1.24 Loaita Island (10°41'N., 114°25'E.), 2m high, is on a

drying reef at the S edge of Loaita Bank. The island is covered

with mangrove, bushes, trees, and coconut palms.

1.24 Two reefs lie about 5 miles NW of Loaita Island, with a sand

cay on the N drying reef, and a stranded wreck marking the

reef to the SW. Between these reefs and the island are several

shoals, some with least depths of 5.5m. 

1.24 About 2.3 miles ENE of the island is a reef, which partially

dries, and 4.5 miles farther to the ENE, lies Lankiam Cay, a

sand cay in the middle of another drying coral patch. Two

drying reefs lie 3.2 miles ENE and 4.5 miles NE, respectively,

from Lankiam Cay.

1.24 Least depths of 7.3m have been found along the NW edge of

Loaita Bank, NW of the SW drying reefs of the bank. No

known depths of less than 11m are found N of a position about

1 mile N of the easternmost drying reef and for a distance of

about 7.5 miles along the E edge of the bank to its N extremity.

1.24 Anchorage can be taken on Loaita Bank with Loaita Island

bearing 260°, distant 0.4 miles. The reef is visible from this

position.

Tizard Bank, 30 miles S of Loaita Bank, is over 30 miles in

length. It consists of a lagoon bordered by shoals of irregular

depth, and by reefs which dry. There are islets on two of the

reefs and a sand cay on another. Several coral heads with

depths of 6.8 to 12.8m lie in the lagoon. Fishermen from

Hainan Dao visit the islands annually around December and

January, and leave at the commencement of the Southwest

Monsoon.

1.24 Caution.—There are several passes through the fringing

reefs and the lagoon within, each of which contain numerous

dangers which require local knowledge. 

1.24 These entrances should be used only under the most

favorable conditions of light, sea, and weather.

1.24 Depths of up to 3.7m less than charted can be expected over

the coral shoals and that the shapes of the drying reefs have

also changed considerably. Mariners should navigate with

extreme caution in this vicinity.

1.25 Namyit Island (10°11'N., 114°22'E.), on the S side of

Tizard Bank, about 12 miles S of Itu Aba, is 18m high and

covered with small trees and brush. It lies on a reef which

extends a little over 1 mile W and 0.5 mile E.

1.25 Gaven Reefs (10°12'N., 114°13'E.) is comprised of two

reefs which cover at HW and lie 7 miles W and 8.5 miles

WNW, respectively, of Namyit Island. They are the SW

dangers of Tizard Bank. The N of the two reefs is marked by a

white sand dune about 2m high.

1.25 Anchorage can be taken, in 13 to 18m, between Sand Cay

and the drying reef to the W. Vessels having local knowledge

can anchor in convenient depths within the various passes of

Tizard Bank, having due regard for conditions of wind and sea.

1.25 Caution.—An ammunition dumping ground lies about 6.7

miles N of Itu Aba Island.

1.26 Itu Aba Island (10°23'N., 114°22'E.), 2m high, lies

on the NW corner of Tizard Bank. It is surrounded by a reef

that usually breaks and on which a wreck lies stranded. The

island is covered with scrub brush and trees whose tops are

about 30m high. There are a few buildings, some in ruins, and a

tower-like structure on the island. A lookout mast stands near

the E end, and a concrete landing jetty, with a depth of 0.6m at

its head, near the SW end of Itu Aba Island.

1.26 A reef, which uncovers 0.6m, lies 2 miles E of Itu Aba

Island. A grass-covered sand cay, 3m high, lies on the reef rim

about 4 miles further to the E. There are a few trees between 5

and 10m high on the cay. 

1.26 Petley Reef, which dries 0.9m, is about 1 mile in extent and

lies on the N side of Tizard Bank. Eldad Reef, 7 miles ESE of

Petley Reef, is the easternmost drying reef of the group. The

reef is 4.5 miles long with the middle section having a depth of

about 1.2m, located at the NE end of the reef.

1.26 Western Reef (10°16'N., 113°37'E.) lies 36 miles W of

Gaven Reefs. It contains submerged rocks, with depths of 1.8

to 5.5m, is steep-to and dangerous.

1.26 Discovery Great Reef (10°01'N., 113°52'E.) is a long,

narrow atoll that lies with its N end about 18 miles SE of

Western Reef. The reef rim has several drying rocks on it of

which one, called Beacon Rock, stands on its S end. There is

no apparent entrance into the lagoon. This atoll is reported to

be visible at a distance of 9.5 miles from a height of 21m.

1.26 Discovery Small Reef (10°01'N., 114°01'E.), lying 10 miles

E of the S extremity of Discovery Great Reef, is a round, steepto, coral patch which dries.
10 Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 

Pub. 161

Dangerous Ground—East and North of Tizard

Bank and Loaita Bank

1.27 Menzies Reef (11°09'N., 114°48'E.) lies at the NE

end of a ridge of foul ground that is an extension of Loaita

Bank. It is awash at LW and the least depth on the reef, which

extends 13 miles SW, is 3.7m. 

1.27 Between the NE end of Loaita Bank and the SW end of the

reef extending from Menzies Reef is a narrow passage having a

least known depth of 32.9m.

1.27 West York Island (11°05'N., 115°00'E.) is covered with

trees and bushes and has some tall coconut palms on its S end. 

1.27 The reef fringing the island extends 1.25 miles farther off the

N side than elsewhere.

1.27 Irving Reef (10°52'N., 114°55'E.), located 12 miles SSW of

West York Island, dries in patches and encloses a small shallow

lagoon. A sand cay lies near the N end of the reef. A narrow

channel, with a least depth of 12.8m, separates Irving Reef

from a small reef to the WSW.

1.27 Southampton Reefs consist of Livock Reef (10°11'N.,

115°17'E.) and Hopps Reef, about 5 miles NE. Livock Reef,

the larger of the two, encircles a lagoon and has a few isolated

rocks on it which may be visible at HW.

1.27 Jackson Atoll (10°30'N., 115°45'E.) consists of a nearly

circular atoll about 6 miles in diameter enclosing a clear, deep

lagoon. Five reefs, each with drying patches, lie on the rim of

the atoll. There are four main entrances into the lagoon. 

1.27 The NE and E entrances are the deepest, each having a width

of about 1.2 miles and depths of 16.2 and 16.8m, respectively,

between the shoals.

1.27 Anchorage, with good holding ground, can be obtained

anywhere within the lagoon over a bottom of sand and coral,

but it provides no shelter during inclement weather.

1.28 Nanshan Island (10°44'N., 115°49'E.), 2m high, is

sandy and covered with course grass and a few coconut trees.

Fishermen frequent the island. Depths of 12.8 to 21.9m are

found S of Nanshan Island, however, there is a possibility of

there being less water than this in the vicinity.

1.28 Flat Island lies 5 miles N of Nanshan Island. It is a low,

sandy islet with a fringing reef extending about 2 miles NE and

SE from it.

1.28 A large bank, with reported but unconfirmed depths of 46m,

extends 8 miles SE from Flat Island and Nanshan Island.

Vessels engaged in fishing may be sighted on this bank.

1.28 Hopkins Reef (10°49'N., 116°05'E.) lies 15 miles E of Flat

Island and is steep-to, shoal, and breaks heavily. Baker Reef

and Iroquois Reef lie 7 miles SE and 12 miles SSE,

respectively, from Hopkins Reef. Both reefs have drying

patches. 

1.28 These three reefs mark the approximate W limit of Amy

Douglas Bank. Hirane Shoal, with a depth of less than 1.8m,

lies 18 miles NE of Baker Reef. There are many shoals and

reefs, with depths of less than 18m, between Hirane Shoal and

Baker Reef.

1.28 Hardy Reef, which dries and has a narrow strip of sand in the

middle, lies 31 miles S of Iroquois Reef.

1.28 Caution.—Directions can not be given concerning

Dangerous Ground E to Lord Auckland Shoal and N to Sandy

Shoal. The area is relatively unexamined, subject to conflicting

reports, and considered dangerous to navigation.

1.29 Sandy Shoal (11°02'N., 117°38'E.), the position of

which is doubtful, lies about 15 miles NNW of Seahorse Shoal.

1.29 Seahorse Shoal (10°50'N., 117°47'E.) is considered to be

part of Palawan Passage, being the N danger on its W side. It is

a pear-shaped reef about 8 miles long in a NNE direction and 3

to 4.5 miles wide. It has a least charted depth of 8.2m on the

reef and 31m in its lagoon. 

1.29 Between Seahorse Shoal and Lord Auckland Shoal, 35 miles

SW, lies a 16.5m patch in approximate position 10°38'N,

117°38'E that is sometimes referred to as Fairie Queen; its

position is doubtful.

1.29 Lord Auckland Shoal (10°20'N., 117°19'E.) has a least

depth of 14.6m and lies about 15 miles N of Carnatic Shoal; its

position is doubtful. Carnatic Shoal has a least depth of 6.4m

and lies just within the E edge of Dangerous Ground; its

position is also doubtful.

Dangerous Ground—South of 10°N

1.30 Half Moon Shoal (8°52'N., 116°16'E.) lies 26 miles

WSW of Royal Captain Shoal and consists of a narrow reef,

partially awash, that encloses a lagoon. The lagoon affords

good shelter to small craft and has an average depth of about

27m, although it contains several coral heads with depths of as

little as 0.3m. 

1.30 The entrance to the lagoon is on the SE side of the reef,

about 0.4 mile SW of the inclined rock, 1m high, lying on the E

side of the coral belt. The pass is about 200m wide and 12.8m

deep between the main reef to the S, and the sunken rock to the

N. During the strength of the Northeast Monsoon, entry may be

impossible. There is a tidal rise of about 1.2m over Half Moon

Shoal.

1.30 Bombay Shoal (9°26'N., 116°55'E.), located 47 miles SW of

Carnatic Shoal, consists of a steep-to reef which completely

encloses a lagoon. Depths of 29 to 33m, sandy bottom, are

found in the lagoon. On the reef are several rocks which dry

about 0.6m. Madagascar Rock, which dries 0.6m, lies near the

NE extremity of the reef. Two stranded wrecks lie on the NE

side of Bombay Shoal. There is a tidal range of about 1.2m

over the shoal. A NE flood current was observed in the vicinity

of Bombay Shoal.

1.31 Royal Captain Shoal (9°01'N., 116°40'E.) stands just

E of the charted limit of Dangerous Ground, about 27 miles

SW of Bombay Shoal. This shoal consists of a narrow

unbroken steep-to reef which encloses a lagoon. Depths of 27

to 31m, sand and coral, are found in the lagoon which is also

encumbered with coral heads. 

1.31 Although there is no entrance into the lagoon, small boats

can cross the reef at HW under favorable weather conditions.

Numerous coral heads and a few drying rocks are found on the

reef. Observation Rock, which dries 1.2m, lies on the NW

extremity of the reef and conspicuous stranded wrecks are

found on the SW and NW corners of the reef. A westerly set of

0.8 knot has been experienced in the vicinity of the shoal.

Investigator Northeast Shoal (9°10'N., 116°25'E.), located

19 miles NNE of Half Moon Shoal, is a coral atoll with an
Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 11

Pub. 161

enclosed lagoon. It dries in places and a few rocks may be

visible at the W end even at HW. 

1.31 The lagoon is probably accessible to boats at HW.

Anchorage has been taken off the W end of the shoal, in a

depth of 46m, about 0.2 mile from the edge of the reef.

1.31 Sabina Shoal (9°43'N., 116°36'E.) is a coral atoll 12 miles

long on its WNW-ESE axis enclosing a lagoon. On the E half

are a number of reefs awash and on the W portion depths over

the reef are 3.7 to 18.3m. Sabina Shoal provides unprotected

anchorage off its steep-to reef. Three rocks awash lie in an arc

from N to ENE, 6 to 8 miles off Sabina Shoal.

1.31 Caution.—Caution is advised as the shoal has not been

closely examined.

1.32 Boxall Reef (9°36'N., 116°10'E.), lying 18 miles SW

of Sabina Shoal, is an isolated drying reef. It contains neither a

lagoon nor any rocks of distinctive character.

1.32 Second Thomas Shoal (9°49'N., 115°52'E.) lies 35 miles W

of Sabina Shoal. It is 11 miles long N-S, and surrounds a

lagoon having depths of up to 27m which may be accessible to

small boats from the E. Drying patches are found E and W of

the reef rim.

1.33 Mischief Reef (9°55'N., 115°32'E.) is a circular coral

atoll about 4 miles in diameter. The reef, which is awash and

has several drying rocks, encloses an extensive lagoon

containing an average depth of 26m. The SW part of the lagoon

is free of dangers and affords good shelter, but the NE part is

encumbered with coral heads with depths of less than 1.8m.

Many of these heads are pinnacles, which are difficult to detect

even with good lighting conditions.

1.33 There are three entrances to the lagoon along the S and SW

sides of the atoll, two of which are boat channels.

1.33 South Entrance, the westernmost, has a navigable width of

37m and is 300m in length, with depths of over 18.3m. The

axis of the deepest water, clearly defined in good light by its

deep blue color, lies in a slight curve, approximately parallel to

the edge of the reef on the W side commencing in a direction of

about 005°, then curving N and terminating in a direction of

about 354°. The reef on the W side is steep-to and on the E side

is slightly shelving. Care is necessary since the tidal currents

are strong at times, and set nearly across the entrance. At neap

tides, a tidal current of 1.5 knots was observed. 

1.33 South Entrance is accessible to vessels under 91m in length.

Temporary buoys should be laid at the ends and middle of each

side to assist conning. Vessels should enter with good headway

keeping slightly W of the center of the deepest water.

1.33 Caution.—It was reported (1995) that the area within a 60

mile radius of Mischief Reef has been declared prohibited to

all vessels.

1.34 First Thomas Shoal (9°20'N., 115°57'E.) is 5 miles

long in an E-W direction. This reef, on which a few isolated

rocks about 1m high have been observed, dries and entirely

encloses a shallow lagoon.

1.34 Alicia Annie Reef (9°24'N., 115°26'E.) lies 26 miles W of

First Thomas Shoal with its axis in a N-S direction. The reef,

which dries, completely encloses a lagoon, however, there is no

entrance to it. At LW, the N and S ends of the atoll are well

above-water and the entire edge of the reef dries about 0.3m. 

1.34 At the N end, a spit which appears to be white sand, dries

1.2m. Several large and a few small rocks mark the SE corner

of the reef. The outer edge of the rim of the reef is steep-to and

breakers were observed on the NE side with a moderate NE

breeze.

Union Atoll (9°45'N., 114°25'W.), 70 miles WNW of Alicia

Annie Reef, extends in a NE-SW direction and encloses an

incompletely examined lagoon about 28 miles long and up to

7.5 miles wide. There are numerous entrances through the reefs

and an anchorage lies within. The rim of the atoll contains

numerous drying reefs and several small cays.

1.34 Johnson Reef (9°42'N., 114°17'E.), of brown volcanic rock

with white coral around the inner rim, is located at the SW end

of Union Atoll. Johnson Reef partly encloses a shallow lagoon

entered from the NE. The largest rock on the reef is about 1.2m

high. Several other rocks show above the water on the SE part

of the reef; the remainder of the reef is reported to be covered. 

1.34 Discolored water was reported (1992) to lie SW of Johnson

Reef in position 9°32.5'N, 114°02.0'E.

1.34 Collins Reef, a small reef with a coral dune at its SE part,

lies 1.5 miles NNW of Johnson Reef. It is separated from

Johnson Reef by a relatively deep channel with a coral bottom.

1.35 Sin Cowe Island (9°52'N., 114°19'E.), a reef-fringed

cay, 4m high, lies on the NW side of Union Atoll. There are

some buildings on the island and a beacon at its NE end.

1.35 Whitsun Reef (9°58'N., 114°39'E.) is triangular in outline

and lies at the NE end of Union Atoll. Rocks on the reef

uncover at LW and the reef is marked by breakers in winds of

moderate force.

1.35 Grierson Reef, a small cay lying 5 miles SW of Whitsun

Reef, is formed by sandy beaches with two black above-water

rocks to the S. 

1.35 The W lagoon is accessible only to small boats and has

depths of 5.5 to 14.6m interspersed with coral shoal heads. 

1.35 Lansdowne Reef, a shoal with a white sand dune, lies 6 miles

NE of Johnson Reef.

1.36 Bittern Reef (9°14'N, 113°40'E) is reported to be

circular in shape and to be of volcanic origin. It does not

contain a lagoon and is entirely covered with water. It is

considered very dangerous because no breakers show and its

sides are very steep-to. Its greatest diameter is estimated at less

than 0.5 mile. According to a Japanese survey, the least depth

on the shoal is 0.9m and the discoloration of Bittern Reef is

visible from the bridge for about 3.5 miles, and from the

masthead for about 4.5 miles with a high sun behind the

observer.

1.36 Allison Reef (Alison Reef) (8°50'N., 114°00'E.) is a drying

atoll-reef about 11 miles long in a general NW-SE direction

forming a lagoon which appears to be shallow and foul. It lies

with its W end about 13 miles SE of Pearson Reef. On the N

side in a position about 2.5 miles W of the W end there is an

entrance 0.35 mile wide with a depth of 9m. The side is strewn

with small rocks. At LW, some of these uncover about 0.9m. 

1.36 The S side consists of a number of isolated drying patches

between which there are narrow channels with depths of about

9m. At HW, Allison Reef does not uncover, but it can be

located by the breakers, which can be seen at a distance of 5 or

6 miles on a clear day. 
12 Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 

Pub. 161

1.36 Anchorage is possible off the SE and W ends of Allison

Reef, in a depth of 60m, or along its S side and off the N

entrance to the lagoon, in depths of 9m.

1.36 Cornwallis South Reef (8°45'N., 114°13'E.), 8 miles ESE

of Allison Reef, consists of a drying reef enclosing a lagoon

which is open to the S. 

1.36 The entrance is about 0.2 mile wide and contains several

coral patches. Depths of 9m are found within the lagoon, but it

has not been closely examined. There are some small drying

rocks on the SE side of the reef which breaks in a NE wind. 

1.36 Cornwallis South Reef remains identifiable at HW.

1.37 Pearson Reef (8°59'N., 113°42'E.) is a drying steepto atoll about 5 miles long in a WSW direction and 1 mile

wide. It encloses a lagoon to which there is no apparent

entrance. 

1.37 There is a sand cay on the NE extremity of the reef. On the

NW side of the reef is a stranded wreck. 

1.37 Anchorage can be taken 0.2 mile off the NE end of the reef,

in a depth of 27m.

Pigeon Reef (Tennent Reef) (8°52'N., 114°38'E,.), marked

by a light, is a triangular-shaped drying atoll completely

enclosing a lagoon which is accessible to boats at HW. There is

no entrance. The reef is brown in color and of volcanic origin

with a lining of white coral around the inside of the rim. 

1.37 Commodore Reef (8°22'N., 115°14'E.) is an atoll about 7

miles in length, and extends E and W lying about 47 miles SE

of Pigeon Reef. It dries 1.5m on its W end, and in patches

elsewhere around its circumference. The reef forms two

lagoons with a sand cay 0.5m high on the neck between them. 

1.37 The E lagoon has not been closely examined, but appears to

be shallow and full of rocks. The encircling reef is completely

covered at HW, except for the sand cay near the middle and a

rock 0.3m high at the E end.

1.38 Investigator Shoal (8°10'N., 114°40'E.), an irregular

atoll formation, lies with its E extremity about 25 miles SW of

the W end of Commodore Reef. The shoal, which extends in an

E-W direction for 18 miles with a width of 8 miles, is

surrounded by a coral reef on which there are a few drying

sections, but over the larger part of which there are depths of

5.5 to 18.3m. 

1.38 Large fishing vessels enter the lagoon in fine weather

through a channel near the middle of the N side of the reef to

anchor in depths probably over 46m, although little or no

shelter is provided by the atoll. 

1.38 The S side of the reef is steep-to with an apparent entrance at

its SE end that is 0.2 mile wide and 37m deep, except for two

patches with a depth of 11m. The W end of the reef breaks and

has a few isolated rocks which may be visible at HW. There are

two drying rocks on the S side of the shoal.

1.38 Currents, with velocities up to 1 knot, are reported on all

sides of Investigator Shoal.

1.38 Ardasier Reef (7°38'N., 113°56'E.) is the W extremity of

Ardasier Bank, which lies 14 miles NNE of Swallow Reef. 

1.38 This reef, which dries, encloses a shallow lagoon which is

probably accessible to boats at HW. The reef is steep-to except

on its E side, where it joins Ardasier Bank.

1.38 Ardasier Bank extends 37 miles ENE from Ardasier Reef. It

is surrounded by a fringe of coral, over which there are depths

of 3.7 to 18.3m. The depths in the center of the bank are

believed to be from 37 to 55m, though unexamined.

1.38 Fish aggregating devices may be encountered in the vicinity

of and SW of Ardasier Bank.

1.38 Tides—Currents.—Currents in the area S of Investigator

Shoal and Ardasier Reef appear to set to the W. 

1.38 Currents, with a velocity of up to 1 knot, are reported on all

sides of Ardasier Bank. The tides are diurnal, with a range of

about 1.5m.

1.38 Caution.—Vessels are advised to avoid the vicinity of

Ardasier Bank and navigate with caution, especially near the

middle of the N side where depths of 40 to 49m show no

apparent discoloration.

1.39 Erica Reef (Enloa Reef) (8°07'N., 114°08'E.), lying

WNW of the N end of Ardasier Reef, is an oval drying reef that

encloses a shallow lagoon. A few drying rocks lie on the E side

of Erica Reef and may show at HW. No entrance or anchorage

has been found.

1.39 Mariveles Reef (8°00'N., 113°56'E.), about 6 miles long in a

general NW-SE direction, lies about 7 miles W of Erica Reef.

It dries, encloses two lagoons, and has a sand cay 2m high on

the neck between the lagoons. A few isolated rocks may be just

visible at HW.

1.39 Dallas Reef (7°38'N., 113°48'E.) is about 5 miles long E-W

and dries entirely, enclosing a small lagoon. A line from Dallas

Reef to Barque Canada Reef marks a portion of the

approximate SW limit of Dangerous Ground.

1.39 Barque Canada Reef is a long narrow reef, nearly all of

which dries. It extends about 15 miles NE from a rock 4.5m

high in position 8°05'N, 113°14'E. 

1.39 The lagoon within the reef appears to be fairly deep, but is

inaccessible. At the NE end of the reef there is a group of rocks

2m high. This N part is not as steep-to as the S part and

temporary anchorage may be taken in favorable weather.

U.S.S. Pigeon Passage

1.40 In 1937, the U.S.S. Pigeon conducted a survey of

Dangerous Ground and developed a 10-mile wide channel

clear of dangers, except for a shoal patch charted 19 miles

SSW of Alicia Annie Reef. 

1.40 A deep-draft vessel might navigate the passage by day, in

comparative safety; under optimum conditions, the passage

might be negotiated at night.

1.40 Directions.—From position 8°40'N, 116°30'E, the

recommended track leads on a course of 291° for 208 miles to

position 9°55'N, 113°15'E, then on a course of 327° for 71

miles to position 10°55'N, 112°35'E.

1.40 Caution.—Caution should be exercised when using the

passage, as the shoal patch mentioned above lies about 3 miles

SSW of the track. Due to the nature of the area and the age of

the surveys for the passage, less water or dangers in addition to

those charted may exist.

1.40 Soundings of less than 1,100m are charted near the

recommended track SSE and SSW of Alicia Annie Reef.

Soundings of less than 1,280m are charted near the

recommended track S of Discovery Great Reef.
Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 13

Pub. 161

Islands and Reefs Southwest of Dangerous

Ground 

1.41 Fiery Cross Reef (North West Investigator Reef)

(9°35'N., 112°54'E.), marked by a light, is about 14 miles long

NE-SW, steep-to, and composed of coral patches, several of

which dry. The largest drying patch is located at the SW end of

the reef and supports a prominent rock, 1m high. With the

exception of this rock, the reef covers at HW. Breakers occur

on Fiery Cross Reef with even a slight swell and make it

visible from a distance of several miles. 

1.41 A dangerous wreck lies 4 miles SW of the NW extremity of

the reef.

1.41 Anchorage has been taken about 0.2 mile from the reef, with

the prominent rock bearing 062°, distant 0.7 mile, in a depth of

24m.

1.41 London Reefs consists of four reefs on a line between

Cuarteron Reef (8°54'N., 112°52'E.) and West Reef (8°51'N.,

112°11'E.). Caution is necessary when navigating in the

vicinity of London Reefs as they are all steep-to, rendering

soundings of little value. They should not be approached with

the sun ahead, as it becomes difficult to recognize the shoaling

water and breakers.

1.41 Cuarteron Reef is the easternmost of the London Reefs.

Several rocks, 1.2 to 1.5m high, lie on the N side of the reef. 

1.41 The shallow lagoon within the reef has no entrance.

1.41 Currents at Cuarteron Reef are apparently diurnal, their rise

being 1.8 to 2.1m. The tidal currents along its N side set W

during the flood and E during the ebb.

1.41 East Reef (8°50'N., 112°35'E.) encloses a lagoon with

depths of 7.3 to 14.6m and lies about 16 miles WSW of

Cuarteron Reef. Numerous coral heads encumber the lagoon. 

1.41 A sharp rock, 0.9m high, lies near the W end of the reef;

more rocks are visible at the E and S parts of the reef. East

Reef is marked by heavy breakers.

1.42 Central Reef (8°55'N., 112°21'E.) lies 14 miles NW

of East Reef. Although awash, it is not always marked by

breakers. At the SE part of the reef there is an entrance to a

shallow lagoon and at the E and SW ends of Central Reef lie

two small, white sand cays.

1.42 West London Reef (Hsi Chiao), the westernmost danger of

London Reefs, is marked by a light and has several detached

coral patches around its edges. The N side of the reef is marked

by breakers making it visible on the approach from the N, but

the S side is difficult to make out, especially in calm weather. 

1.42 There is a sand cay, 0.6m high, on the E side of the reef. A

lagoon, with depths of 11 to 14.6m but having many coral

heads, is enclosed by West Reef.

1.43 Spratly Island (Storm Island) (8°38'N., 111°55'E.),

grass covered, 2.4m high, flat and less than 0.5 mile in extent,

is located about 22 miles SW of West Reef, on the S end of a

coral bank over 1 mile long. 

1.43 The island has a margin of white sand and broken coral and

is surrounded by drying ledges and coral heads. A cairn, 5.5m

high, stands near its S point.

1.43 The E side of the island is steep-to, having depths greater

than 18m when beyond 0.1 mile from shore. Depths of less

than 14.6m and 5.5m extend 0.5 mile NE and N, respectively,

from the island. To the W and SW, depths of less than 5.5m are

found up to 0.2 mile off the island before the bottom falls away

steeply.

1.43 Tides—Currents.—A tidal rise and fall of 1.6m has been

reported at Spratly Island. The tidal current sets SW during the

rising tide at the NE of the bank, and from SE to NE during the

falling tide.

1.43 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken after gaining proper

clearance on the banks either NE or SW of the island.

Anchorage has been taken on the bank in a position about 0.6

mile NE of the island, in 18.3m, sheltered from SW winds.

1.43 Ladd Reef, 15 miles W of Spratly Island, is a drying reef 3

miles long and 1 mile wide. The reef encloses a lagoon which,

for all practical purposes, has no entrance. The reef is marked

by a light.

1.44 Amboyna Cay (Anbo Shozhoa) (7°52'N., 112°55'E.)

lies near the SW edge of the Dangerous Ground. This cay is

about 2m high with a sand beach, broken by coral, and rubble.

Coral ledges which partly dry and on which the sea breaks

when there is a swell, extend 0.2 mile offshore in places.

1.44 An obelisk, 3m high, stands on the SW part of the cay. The

cay is also marked by a light, which has a racon.

1.44 Coral banks, on which the sea breaks heavily, extend 0.5

mile NW and 1 mile NE from the island with depths of 7.3m to

a distance of over 0.3 mile offshore on the latter bank. A reef,

having depths of 3.7 to 4.6m, is reported to lie about 0.8 mile

NW of the cay. 

1.44 The W and SW part of Amboyna Cay is fringed by steep-to

reefs to a distance of 0.3 mile. The W and SW reefs gradually

shoal from depths of 7.6m at 0.2 mile offshore to 1.5m at 27m

offshore. About 0.1 mile S of the island, the fringing reef has a

depth of 7m.

1.44 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents, with a maximum rate of

1.5 knots, were observed near Amboyna Cay. The current sets

N on the rising tide and W on the falling tide.

1.44 Anchorage.—Vessels can obtain sheltered anchorage during

the Southwest Monsoon, in a depth of 9m, on the reef

extending NE from the cay. Additionally, it is reported that

anchorage can be taken farther to the NE, in 14.6m, with the

center of the cay bearing 224°, distant 1 mile. To the E, a

survey ship anchored, in 11.9m, about 0.4 mile from the center

of the island; to the W, anchorage can be taken, in 9.5m, with

the cay bearing about 109°, distant 0.3 mile.

1.44 Caution.—Caution is required when anchoring as the reefs

are extremely steep-to.

1.44 Swallow Reef, 60 miles SE of Amboyna Cay and formed of

a belt of coral surrounding a shallow lagoon, is 3.8 miles in

length, E and W, and 1.2 miles in width. At its E and SE part

are some rocks 1.5 to 3m high, the highest of which is in

position 7°23'N, 113°49'E. Breakers usually mark the reef; a

wreck lies stranded (1959) on its W end. By day, Swallow Reef

has been sighted at 8 miles. Swallow Reef is reported (1986) to

have extended in area.

1.45 Royal Charlotte Reef (6°57'N., 113°35'E.) lies 29

miles SSW of Swallow Reef and is nearly rectangular in shape

and about 1 mile long. Several boulders, 0.6 to 1.2m high, lie

near its SE side and some rocks, awash, lie on its NE side. An

area of foul ground surrounds Royal Charlotte Reef and
14 Sector 1. The South China Sea—Central Part 

Pub. 161

extends as much as 8 miles from the edge of the reef. Breakers

have been reported over this reef.

1.46 Anoa Natuna Marine Terminal (5°13.2'N.,

105°36.4'E.) is a Floating Production, Storage, and Offloading

(FPSO) vessel. 

1.46 Aspect.—A converted tanker is permanently moored to a

Single Point Mooring (SPM) buoy. A well head platform feeds

the FPSO through a pipeline and stands 1 mile NW of it. The

platform can be identified by its gas flare from a considerable

distance. The FPSO displays a white flashing Morse (U) light

at the bow and the stern, as well as a red flashing Morse (U)

light at the bow and the masthead.

1.46 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and the berthing master

boards vessels at the anchorage. Vessels berth at the terminal

during daylight only.

1.46 Regulations.—Indonesian Government regulations are

strictly enforced. The Indonesian flag should be flown by day

throughout the vessel’s stay at the terminal. Port facilities are

not available. However, emergency medical services can be

arranged.

1.46 Anchorage.—Anchorage is recommended within a radius of

0.75 mile from position 5°12'N, 105°38'E.

1.46 Caution.—A rectangular restricted area of 3 miles by 2

miles has been established surrounding the terminal. Vessels

are not allowed to enter a prohibited area within the restricted

area around the terminal without the berthing master on board. 

1.46 Anchoring within the restricted area is prohibited. There are

no facilities for bunkers, fresh water, provisions, or reception

of dirty ballast.

1.47 Rifleman Bank lies 70 miles W of Amboyna Cay,

with Bombay Castle, its N end, lying in position 7°56'N,

111°42'E. The bank extends 28 miles S from Bombay Castle

and has a maximum breadth of 15 miles, with many shallow

patches of sand and coral around its edges. A light, situated S

of Bombay Castle, marks the E side of the bank.

1.47 Bombay Castle has a depth of 3m and breaks in all but the

finest weather. Johnson Patch., with a depth of 7.3m, lies on the

W side of Rifleman Bank; Kingston Shoal, with a depth of

11m, lies at the S end; and Orleana Shoal, with a depth of

8.2m, lies on the E end. The remaining areas between and

within these shoals have depths of 7 to 82m, however, the

existence of undiscovered dangerous shoals in this area should

not be discounted.

1.48 Prince of Wales Bank (8°09'N., 110°30'E.) has a

least depth of 7.3m found on its W side. The bank is of coral

and its depths are very irregular. The bank is marked by a light

on its NE side.

1.48 Alexandra Bank, marked by a light and lying about 2 miles

SE of Prince of Wales Bank, has a least depth of 5.5m over

coral bottom that is distinctly visible.

1.48 Grainger Bank, with depths of 11 to 14.6m, lies about 16

miles SW of Alexandra Bank. The coral bottom of the bank is

visible over nearly all the bank. The bank is marked by a light.

1.48 Prince Consort Bank (7°55'N., 109°58'E.), 30 miles WNW

of Grainger Bank, has a least depth of 18m near its NW edge. 

1.48 The bottom is of sand and coral. Depths of 22 to 24m are

found on the W edge of the bank, which is marked by a light.

1.48 Vanguard Bank lies 30 miles SSW of Prince Consort Bank

and 60 miles SE of the main Hong Kong-Singapore route. 

1.48 The least depths found are two 16m patches near the N end

of the bank. Lights mark the N side of the bank.

1.48 An 18m shoal lies 10 miles SSE of the center of Vanguard

Bank. Another shoal, with a depth of 13m, lies 25 miles W of

the SW end of the same bank and a shoal with a depth of 7.5m

lies 10 miles SSW of the 13m patch. 

1.48 It was reported (1990) that a depth of 12.3m lies close W of

the 13m depth.

1.48 Lan Tay Gas Field lies 70 miles WNW of Vanguard Bank.

Restricted areas, each having a radius of 3 miles, lie centered

on the platforms and offshore installations established in

position 7°48'N, 108°12'E and position 7°35'N, 108°52'E,

respectively. 

1.49 Charlotte Bank (7°08'N., 107°36'E.) is the

southernmost danger on the W side of the main Hong KongSingapore route. The bank is about 4 miles in extent, with a

least depth between 8.5 and 11m. 

1.49 A depth of 33m lies 80 miles S of Charlotte Bank in position

5°47'N, 107°30'E.

1.49 Scawfell Shoal (7°18'N., 106°52'E.), lying about 45 miles

WNW of Charlotte Bank, has a least depth of 9.1m, coral, near

its center. 

1.49 A reef, 0.5 mile in diameter, lies in position 7°35'30"N,

106°24'00"E. Three dangerous wrecks, with depths of 29m,

20m, and 23m, lie SSW of this reef, at distances of up to 60

miles from the reef.
Pub. 161

2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
17

Pub. 161

SECTOR 2 

COAST OF CHINA—DAPENG JIAO TO DAJIN, INCLUDING HONG KONG AND MACAU

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SE coast of China between

Dapeng Jiao (Ta P’eng Chio), to the E of Hong Kong, and

Dajin. The description is ENE to WSW including Hong Kong,

Macau, the Zhujiang (Chu Chiang), the Xijiang (Hsi Chiang),

and the T’an Chiang. 

General Remarks

2.1 Winds—Weather.—The region covered by this

sector has distinct seasonal changes due to the effect of

monsoonal transition. The Northeast Monsoon blows from the

N through E from as early as September to as late as May, but

is strongest from October to March. The Southwest Monsoon

is usually felt from April to September. The transition months

occur during spring and fall.

2.1 During the winter, the area is subject to frequent outbreaks of

cold, dry air caused by the dominant Asian continental

anticyclone. Between January and March, temperatures fall

quite low and have reached freezing in the upper reaches of the

rivers and in the higher elevations of Hong Kong and the

mainland. December is generally the driest month of the year.

2.1 Spring marks the transition from the Northeast Monsoon to

the Southwest Monsoon. Temperatures fluctuate widely from

day to day, bringing cloudiness and increased precipitation,

along with coastal fog and drizzle. To the SW of Hong Kong,

the wind reaches Force 7 or more 3 or 4 days a month in April

and May.

2.1 Summer comes with the onset of the Southwest Monsoon.

Extensive precipitation and hot, humid weather prevail. June is

the wettest month of the year. Typhoons occur mostly between

July through September. These storms bring gales, high winds

and heavy rains. Squalls, including arch squalls, have been

reported as violent at times off the deltas of Hsi Chiang and the

Chu Chiang.

2.1 Autumn is usually sunny and dry. In the area to the E of the

deltas of Xi Jiang and Zho Jiang the wind reaches Force 7 or

more 6 or 7 days per month from October through January.

Autumn brings the transition from the Southwest Monsoon to

the Northeast Monsoon

2.1 Tides—Currents.—Offshore of the deltas to the Hsi Chiang

and the Chu Chiang, as well as seaward of Hong Kong, the

tidal current on the raising tide is governed principally by the

prevailing wind. With strong E winds, it sets WNW; with SW

winds it sets N. The tidal current on the falling tide sets mostly

in a SW direction.

2.1 The principal ocean currents are also caused by the

monsoons. The SW current caused by the Northeast Monsoon

is more persistent than the NE current of the Southwest

Monsoon.

2.1 At their strongest, these currents average about 1.5 knots.

During the transition of the monsoons, the currents become

quite variable in both speed and direction.

2.1 Local winds will also affect the currents. When a moderate

or strong wind has been blowing steadily in any general

direction for a day or more, a change in current speed and

direction can be expected. The effect of the wind in generating

a current is not immediate, nor does a reduction in wind speed

or change of wind direction result in an immediate cessation of

current. Although the wind may have ceased in one region, the

current may continue to flow as the result of winds in nearby

areas.

2.1 The coastline between Dapeng Jiao and Tung Lung Island,

17 miles SW, is extremely irregular and indented by numerous

bays and coves. Inland, lofty hills and rugged mountains

predominate throughout. With few exceptions, the mountains

rise abruptly from a shoreline whose near shore areas are

largely steep-to. At the head of several of the larger inlets, wide

margins of drying mud flats extend well off the coastline.

Offshore, the area is generally deep and largely clear of

dangers to navigation. Tai Pang Wan (Mirs Bay), with its

several inlets, is the largest body of water within the E portion

of the sector. Leung Shuen Wan Hoi (Rocky Harbor) and Ngau

Mei Hoi are smaller indentations in the coastline. These three

areas comprise the E portion of the Hong Kong New Territories

which extend to the N and E shores of Tai Pang Wan.

2.1 Between Tung Lung Island and Dajin Island, 73 miles WSW,

are the approaches to Hong Kong, the Zhu Jiang Kou, and the

Xijiang. This area is encumbered with numerous islands and

dangers which lie up to 22 miles seaward of a line joining Tung

Lung Island and Dajin Island. Victoria Harbor and Macau are

the two ports closest to the sea, while Huangpu and Ts’ang-wu

can be reached by lengthy river transits of the Zhu Jiang Kou

and Xijiang, respectively.

2.1 The Zhu Jiang Kou is entered to the E of Tai Yue Shan,

(which is located to the W of Hong Kong) or from sea via the

recommended route W of Wenwei Zhou, as is shown on the

chart. The proper clearances must be obtained from Chinese

authorities before attempting to navigate the river. The Xijiang,

whose branches form a common delta with the approaches to

the T’an Chiang, is entered from seaward between Dahengquin

Dao and Sanzan Dao. Modao Men, on the E side of the delta, is

the principal entrance. In its lower reaches, the W side of the

Xijiang is connected by several creeks with the T’an Chiang.

Yamen Wan is the entrance channel to the T’an Chiang.

2.1 Oil Field Development Areas.—Numerous structures

usually carrying lights, associated unlit objects, and submerged

obstructions, sometimes marked by buoys, exist in the Oilfield

Development Areas enclosed by pecked lines on the charts. As

these installations are not all charted, special caution should be

exercised by vessels navigating in the vicinity. The authorities

have established a 500m safety zone around each installation.

Vessels should not enter these zones.

2.1 Mine dangers.—The danger to surface ships from mines of

the 1939-1945 war is almost nonexistent. The risk to surface

navigation from these mines is now considered no greater than

normal navigational hazards. Despite the years, these mines

still continue to constitute a risk to ships anchoring, trawling,

or conducting sea bed operations.
18 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.1 Caution.—Numerous acts of piracy have been reported,

usually by small gangs of armed men in fast boats. Laden

vessels with low freeboard are particularly vulnerable.

2.1 On most banks fronting the shores of the coastal areas

covered in this volume, fishing stakes and enclosures are

encountered in depths of 5 to 10m, and sometimes in greater

depths, particularly near a tributary. These enclosures are

constructed of trees firmly driven into the banks, and interlaced

with branches, etc., and form a hazard to vessels navigating at

night in the area. These enclosures last for many years, and to

those with local knowledge are good landmarks.

2.1 Mariners are advised that these features are numerous off the

coast of Borneo and may also be encountered off any coastline

covered by this volume.

Dapeng Jiao to Tung Lung Island

2.2 Dapeng Jiao (22°27'N., 114°30'E.) is a reef-fringed

steep-sided point which, fronted by a low off-lying rock, rises

to a lofty summit close inland. It is the E entrance point of Tai

Pang Wan (Mirs Bay).

2.2 Anchorage.—Tai Pang Wan (Dapeng Wan) (Mirs Bay)

(22°32'N., 114°23'E.) is a large, sheltered body of water whose

regular E shoreline contrasts sharply with the W shore, which

is composed of extensive inlets and islet-sheltered anchorages.

Vessels seeking shelter from winds of the Northeast Monsoon

season anchor, in 12.8m, within Ping Chau Hoi, a roadstead

encumbered by fishing stakes, which lies between the

mainland and Ping Chau, a hilly well-populated island. Several

designated anchorage areas, best seen on chart, have been

established in Tai Pang Wan. The quarantine and pilotage

anchorage lies on the E side of the bay in position 22°24'N,

114°34'E. There are general depths of 18m throughout the bay. 

2.2 Caution.—A number of uncharted marks and buoys are

moored in the bay.

2.3 Gau Tau (22°28'N., 114°25.5'E.), a 26m high rock,

lies in the middle of the entrance to Tai Pang Wan 2.25 miles

NE of Tuen Tsui. A light is shown from Gau Tau.

2.3 A spoil ground, approximately 0.75 mile square, lies 1.5

miles N of Gau Tau Light.

2.3 Breaker Reef, which dries 1.5m at the center where the sea

generally breaks, lies 0.5 mile SW of Gau Tau Light. South

Gau, a detached islet 18m high and surrounded by foul ground,

lies 1.5 miles SW of Breaker Reef. A lighted beacon stands on

the edge of the rocks N of South Gau.

2.3 Tai Tan Hoi Hap (Long Harbor) (22°27'N., 114°21'E.) and

Chek Mun Hoi Hap (Tolo Channel) are two well-sheltered

inlets approached through deep-water channels passing NW

and S of Chek Chau (Port Island).

2.3 Caution.—A boom restricts Chek Mun Hoi Hap. The boom

lies about 0.5 mile W of Heung Lo Kok, the S entrance point of

Chek Mun Hoi Hap.

2.4 Chek Chau is a high steep-sided island 6 miles NNW

of Tai Lom Tsui, the rocky steep-to W entrance point of Tai

Pang Wan. Vessels anchor, in 9.2 to 14.6m, within Tai Tan Hoi

Hap, where they are sheltered from all but N winds which send

in a heavy swell. Vessels also enter Chek Mun Hoi Hap and,

passing NW of low-lying mid-channel dangers, proceed to the

entrance to Sha Tin Hoi (Tide Cove) (22°26'N., 114°13'E.)

where they anchor, in 5.9 to 7.4m, sheltered from all winds.

2.4 Double Haven (22°32'N., 114°18'E.) and Crooked Harbor

are two small deep-water roadsteads which, lying NW of the

entrance to Chek Mun Hoi Hap, are sheltered from most winds

by the high, steep-sided hills of the mainland and by a series of

hilly steep-sided off-lying islets. Crooked Harbor is

conveniently entered from the N. Double Haven is entered

from Crooked Harbor or through Wang Mun Hoi (Deep Pass),

a narrow deep-water passage in the NE part of the roadstead.

Vessels anchor, in 11 to 12.8m, mud, in either Double Haven or

Crooked Harbor. Care must be taken to avoid the submarine

cable and pipeline crossing the channel connecting the two.

2.4 Yantian (22°35'N., 114°16'E.) (World Port Index No.

57857) is located near Sha Tau.

2.4 There are depths in the channel of 16 to 22m. The depth of

water available in the harbor is 20m. The deep water approach

to these berths is along the recommended course steering 262°,

to the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 3.

2.4 There are eight container berths with alongside depths of 14

to 15.5m. Two additional berths to handle LPG tankers of up to

300m in length, with a maximum draft of 12.3m, are located at

the Sino-Benny Gas Terminal. 

2.4 Pilotage.—Pilots can be requested by calling Yantian Port

Control on VHF channel 16. The pilot boards in the Shenzen E

Port No. 5 Anchorage or in the Daya Wan No. 2 Quarantine

Anchorage.

2.5 Leung Shuen Wan Hoi (Rocky Harbor) (22°20'N.,

114°19'E.) is a deep-water well-sheltered area whose principal

seaward entrance lies between Sha Tong Hau Shan and Tiu

Chung Chau. Vessels seeking shelter from winds of the

Northeast Monsoon season anchor in mud in a position N of

Wok Tuk Pai, an isolated pinnacle rock about 1 mile N of Sha

Tong Hau Shan. During the Southwest Monsoon season, they

anchor in mud in a position N of Chi Chau, a small steep-sided

islet close E of Tiu Chung Chau.

Aspect.—The coastline between the W entrance point of Tai

Pang Wan and Tung Lung Island is extremely irregular and

indented by a large island-cluttered embayment which contains

the mostly landlocked water areas of Leung Shuen Wan Hoi

and Ngau Mei Hoi.

2.5 Pilotage.—Pilots for Leung Shuen Wan Hoi, Ngau Mei Hoi,

and Tai Pang Wan and its environs can be obtained at Victoria

Harbor, Hong Kong. 

2.6 Ngau Mei Hoi (Port Shelter) (22°20'N., 114°17'E.) is

a convenient roadstead lying within a large islet-cluttered body

of water which, having its principal entrance between Tiu

Chung Chau and the mainland coast SW, recedes well inland in

the shelter of surrounding steep-sided lofty hills. 

2.6 Ngau Mei Chau lies just within the entrance, while Kiu Tsui

Chau lies near the head. Vessels seeking refuge within Ngau

Mei Hoi anchor, in 14.6 to 16.4m, mud, in a position about 0.8

mile WNW of the N extremity of Ngau Mei Chau. They

anchor, in 11 to 12.8m, mud, within the N part of Sai Kung

Hoi, a largely landlocked roadstead between Kiu Tsui Chau

and the mainland to the W. Vessels having a moderate draft

proceed through the passage E of Kiu Tsui Chau and anchor, in
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 19

Pub. 161

7.4m, mud, in a position close N of the N extremity of the

island.

2.6 Caution.—A Firing Danger Area exists N of 22°16'N, and E

of Fo Shek Chau. When in use, the limits are marked by buoys

with red flags and the perimeter is patrolled by small craft.

2.7 Victor Rock (22°18'N., 114°26'E.) is an isolated

pinnacle rock with a depth of 5.5m and constitutes a danger to

vessels proceeding S and SW from Tai Pang Wan. The summit

of Tung Lung Chau aligned with the NW extremity of Hok

Tsai Pai lying close N of Pak Kwo Chau, bearing 245°, leads

0.5 mile NW of the rock. The summit of Nam Kwo Chau,

bearing 242°, leads clear of Victor Rock to the SE by 0.2 mile.

2.7 Kwo Chau Kwan To (Ninepin Islands) (22°16'N.,

114°21'E.) is a group of steep-to islands and reefs just N of the

E approach to Hong Kong. Pak Kwo Chau and Nam Kwo Chau

are the largest of the islands, with the latter being slightly

smaller, but of higher elevation with a height of 116m. The

islands are separated by Hoi Tam Hua, a channel 0.2 mile wide.

North Rock, an islet with a rock which dries 2m close N of it,

lies to the NE of Pak Kwo Chau. 

2.7 Tung Kwo Chau, 66m high and appearing like a sugarloaf

from the NW or SE, lies 1.2 miles E of Pak Kwo Chau. Islets

lie off the NE, W, and NW shores of Tung Kwo Chau.

2.7 North Rock and Tung Kwo Chau are covered by the red

sector of the light on the N end of Pak Kwo Chau, bearing

between 212° and 299°.

2.7 One Foot Rock (22°15'N., 114°22'E.), with a depth of 0.3m,

lies 0.7 mile S of Tung Kwo Chau. Fat Tong Point, the tip of

the peninsula 0.5 mile SW of Yi Bluff (22°16'N., 114°18'E.)

and in line with the S extremity of Nam Kwo Chau, bearing

278°, leads S of One Foot Rock.

2.7 Soundings are of little use in locating these dangers. Caution

is advised when approaching them, especially in adverse

weather.

Approaches to Hong Kong

2.8 Regulations.—Several IMO-approved Traffic

Separation Schemes have been established in the waters of, and

adjacent to, Hong Kong.

2.8 A mandatory Vessel Traffic Service is in effect for all vessels

entering Hong Kong. See paragraph 2.23, “Victoria Harbor

(Hong Kong)—Regulations” for details and reporting points.

2.8 Special regulations are in effect for vessels entering Hong

Kong. See paragraph 2.23, “Victoria Harbor (Hong Kong)—

Regulations” for details.

2.8 Directions.—The entrance channels normally used by vesels

calling at Hong Kong are approached from the E or SE. Vessels

approach through Lam Tong Hoi Hap (Tathong Channel),

which is the main channel leading into Hong Kong harbor from

SE, and extends from TCS No. 1 Lighted Buoy (22°13.2'N.,

114°14.0'E.) to Lei Yue Mun (22°17.1'N., 114°14.3'E.). 

2.8 Approach can also be made through the channel between Po

Toi Group and S of Hong Kong Island entering East Lamma

Channel; or an approach from Lema Channel (22°06'N.,

114°14'E.) leads into either East Lamma or West Lamma

Channel.

2.8 It is recommended that vessels stay at least 5 miles SE of

Jiapeng Liedao and Dangan Liedo, then pass the NE end of

Dangan Liedo keeping the same distance. When within 3 miles

S of Po Toi Island, proceed NW into East Lamma Channel.

2.8 The W approach is through Lantau Channel (22°08'N.,

113°54'E.), leading ENE into West Lamma Channel. The pilot

boarding area is in position 22°09'N, 113°50”E. 

2.8 The NW approach into the same channel is made from N of

Lantau Channel.

2.9 Po Toi Group (22°11'N., 114°16'E.) is a group of

islands and rocks centered 2 miles SE of Hong Kong.

2.9 Waglan Island (Wang Lan Island) (22°11'N., 114°16'E.),

the easternmost island of the group, consists of two rocky islets

separated by a narrow boat channel. Waglan Island lies within

a restricted area. The island is 30m high at its N end, and is

covered by green shrub or moss on the W face of its S end. The

cliff face, on the N side of the island, has been painted white

and the mark can be seen from W through N to E. The island is

reported be a good radar target from distances of up to 30

miles. 

2.9 A signal station is situated on Waglan Island. The station

may be contacted by VHF or visual signals may be exchanged.

Storm signals are displayed here.

2.9 A dangerous wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, lies 3.5 miles

SE of Waglan Island Light.

2.9 Sung Kong, steep and covered with small bushes, lies 0.9

mile W of Waglan Island. An islet, 27m high, lies close off the

NE end of Sung Kong. Fury Rocks, the highest being 4.5m, are

a group of rocks lying 0.3 mile NW of Sung Kong, with depths

of 12.8m to 24m in the fairway between. Foul ground extends

up to 0.1 mile off the rocks.

2.9 Caution.—Two wrecks, with reported depths of 19.9m and

23.5m, lie 0.8 and 0.5 mile NNW of Waglan Island Light,

respectively.

2.10 Po Toi Island (22°10'N., 114°16'E.), the

southernmost and largest of the group, is barren and rock

fringed in places, rising to 238m high at its NE part. The SE

extremity of the island was reported to be a good radar target at

25 miles.

2.10 Lo Chau Pak Pai (Castle Rock), 15m high and surrounded by

a narrow rocky ledge, lies 1.5 miles NW of the light on the S

extremity of Po Toi Island.

Waglan Island from N
20 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.10 Lo Chau Island (Beaufort Island), off the NW end of Po Toi

Island, is the closest of the group to Hong Kong. It is steepsided, rock-fringed in places, and rises to a flat 272m summit.

2.10 Caution.—An explosives dumping ground, best seen on the

chart, is located in the passage between Lo Chau Island and Po

Tai Island.

2.10 In addition to the dangerous wreck already described above,

three other dangerous wrecks lie at the E end of Lema Channel.

One is marked by a lighted buoy moored 4 miles ESE of Po

Toi; two are unmarked and lie 5 miles SE of Po Toi.

2.11 Dangan Liedao (Tan-Kan Lieh-Tao) (22°01'N.,

114°12'E.) is a chain of islands and rocks extending 14 miles in

a NE-SW direction. The four major islands of the chain are

separated by relatively deep, narrow channels.

Dangan Dao (Tan-Kan Tao) (22°02'N., 114°12'E.) is the

largest and northeasternmost island of the group. The E face of

the island was reported to be radar conspicuous at 30 miles. A

watch tower stands near the W end of the island, and some

prominent brick buildings stand on the NW side. Eddies are

charted off the NW end of the island.

2.11 Tan-Kan T’ou Wan is entered on the N side of Dangan Dao,

1.5 miles W of the island’s NE extremity. The bay affords

anchorage for small vessels, in 14.6m, good holding ground,

and affords shelter during the Northeast Monsoon. Er Zhou

(Erh Chou), 475m high, is the highest and most central of the

group. It lies close SW of Dangan Dao, and appears flat-topped

from most directions.

2.11 Round Island, 40m high, lies close N of the NE end of Er

Zhou. The island has four distinct peaks, the highest of which

rises to 377m.

2.11 Xidan Dao (Hsi-tan Tao) (21°58'N., 114°08'E.), 133m high

at its E end, is the southwesternmost island of the group.

Mosquito Rock, which breaks, lies 0.15 mile S of the SW end

of the island. Danuei Jiao (Iroquois Rock), a pinnacle with a

depth of 10m, lies 1.2 miles NW of the same point.

2.11 Taitami Channel (21°57'N., 114°06'E.) separates Dangan

Liedao from Jiapeng Liedao. The channel is about 4 miles

wide and 33 to 37m deep, with the exception of Lih-Sin P’ai, a

rock which breaks occasionally.

Jiapeng Liedao (Chia-P’eng Lieh-Tao) (21°52'N.,

114°00'E.) is a chain of rocks and islands extending 10 miles

SE from O-yen Shih to Wenwei Zhou.

2.11 O-yen Shih (21°56'N., 114°03'E.), 39m high, is a small islet

lying about 1 mile N of Beijian Dao (Pei-Chien Tao)

(21°53'N., 114°02'E.). On the SW end of Beijian Dao are two

conspicuous peaks that rise almost perpendicularly to a height

of 300m, and are known as Ass’s Ears. Several coves indent the

NE and S coasts of the island. Islets lie off the N, NE, E, and S

shore of the island. A high, white rock known as Kuei-T’ou

Shih lies off the E side of the island, and a rock awash lies

midway between it and the shore.

2.12 Miaowan Dao (Miao-Wan) (21°56'N., 114°01'E.), an

island 240m high, lies close SW of Beijian Dao. Two islets, the

highest being 62m high, lie close off the S end, and two sunken

rocks, of which the outer one breaks, lie off the NE end of

Miaowan Dao. Bai Pai (Pai-P’ai), 24m high, lies about 1 mile

off the W side of the same island.

2.12 Between Miaowan Dao and Wenwei Zhou lies a square area

encompassing six islands and islet clusters. These islands are

Ch’an Chou, 90m high, located at the NW of the square;

Huang-mao Chou, 66m high, 0.75 mile farther SW; P’ing

Chou, 27m high, 0.75 mile SE of Huang-mao Chou; Hung-sha

Chou, 66m high, about 0.5 mile NE of P’ing Chou; and Shih

Chou, 35m high, fringed with rocks. Shih Chou lies about 1

mile off Hung-sha Chou.

2.12 Wenwei Zhou (Wen-wei Chou) (21°49'N., 113°56'E.), 29m

high, is the southwesternmost island of the Jiapeng Liedao

group. Several sunken rocks lie up to 0.1 mile off the islet. A

light is shown and a racon transmits from the light on Wenwei

Zhou.

2.12 Caution.—Several dangerous wrecks lie in the approaches

to Zhujiang Kou. Wrecks lie about 3 miles and 10 miles WNW

of Wenwei Zhou Light. Another wreck lies approximately 13

miles WSW of Wenwei Zhou Light.

2.13 Wailingding Dao (Wai-ling-Ting) (22°06'N.,

114°02'E.) is a rugged island that rises to 343m near its center.

A natural boat harbor indents the W side of the island. Needle

Rocks, 1.5m high, lie close together about 0.15 mile SW of the

NW end of the island. Vessels should give a wide berth to the

dangerous rocks lying 0.8 mile E of the N extremity of this

island.

Sanmen Liedao (San-men Lie-tao) is a group of islands and

rocks centered 3 miles SSW of Wailingding Dao.

2.13 A spoil area is charted 3 miles N of Wailingding Dao.

2.13 Henggang Dao (Heng-Kang Chou) (22°02'N., 114°01'E.),

the southernmost island, has a rounded hill, 145m high, at its S

end, and a small drying reef on its E end. Chu-wan-t’ou, 72m

high, lies close N of Henggang Dao. A rock lies close N of

Chu-wan-t’ou.

2.13 Sanmen Dao (San-men) (22°03'N., 113°59'E.), 20m high,

lies 0.7 mile NW of Henggang Dao. A small bay indents the W

side of the island and affords anchorage to small vessels, in

depths of 11 to 18.3m, mud. Rocks lie off the N and NE coasts

of Sanmen Dao, between it and Sanmen Chou, about 0.5 mile

to the NE.

2.13 Hei Zhou (Hei Chou) is 100m high and the

northwesternmost island of the group. It lies 0.5 mile NW of

Sanmen Dao. A group of islets and rocks, the highest called

Yuangang, 45m high, lies within 0.3 mile NW of Hei Zhou,

and a sunken rock lies close SE of Hei Zhou.

2.13 Toulu Zhou (22°04'N., 113°56'E.), located 2 miles W of

Yuangang, is quite high and surrounded by rocks. 

2.13 Ai Zhou (22°03'N., 113°55'E.) is comprised of two islands,

separated by a narrow channel with a depth of 7.3m, that lie

about 2 miles SW of Toulu Zhou. To the W of the W island is a

rock that dries 1.2m, and to the N of the same island lies a

sunken rock. The E island rises to a height of 226m and has a

rock that dries 1.5m close off its N extremity.

Hong Kong Island

2.14 Hong Kong Island (22°16'N., 114°12'E.) reverted to

the People’s Republic of China and is no longer under British

jurisdiction as of July 1, 1997. Hong Kong is now considered a

Special Administrative Region of the People’s Republic of

China.

2.14 The island is 9 miles long and 6 miles wide at its greatest
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 21

Pub. 161

dimensions. It rises steeply from the sea to a central ridge of

hills with a height of over 549m in the NW part. The N shore

of the island is relatively smooth and forms the S shoreline of

Victoria Harbor while the W, S, and E sides of the island are

indented by numerous bays of varying sizes. As the island is

mountainous and rugged, land for building purposes is

obtained largely by reclaiming the surrounding bays or by

leveling hills. The natural vegetation is mostly grass and

bushes, with small trees in sheltered places. 

2.14 Hok Tsui (22°13'N., 114°16'E.) is the SE extremity of Hong

Kong Island. It is marked by a light and has two conspicuous

radio towers situated about 0.8 mile NW on Hok Tsui Shan

(d’Aguilar Peak). Close off its SE side lies a green islet, Kau

Pei Chau. Between Hok Tsui and Hak Kok Tau, a point 3.2

miles N, the island is indented with several small bays and

fronted by a few islets. These bays are rock-fringed and

suitable for use only by small craft.

2.14 Chai Wan (22°16'N., 114°15'E.), a bay with three bights,

extends between a position about 0.3 mile NW of Hak Kok Tau

Light and Pak Sha Wan at the SW of Lei Yue Mun 1.7 miles

farther NW. Portions of the bights within Chai Wan are

relatively shoal and foul. Numerous areas of construction and

reclamation are in progress in this area.

2.15 Tai Tam Bay (22°14'N., 114°14'E.) extends N into

Hong Kong Island about 2.5 miles between Hok Tsui and

Wong Ma Kok (Bluff Head). The bay is clear of dangers to 0.1

mile offshore and has depths of 11 to 14.6m in its outer part,

while gradually shoaling toward its head. Vessels anchor

within the bay, in 11m, mud, off the village situated at the head

of the bight at the NW part of the bay. Caution is advised when

anchoring within the bay, as numerous fishing stakes obstruct

the N part of it. A weather buoy is moored in the center of the

bay, approximtely 1.6 miles NE of Bluff Point Light. 

2.15 To the E of the light on Wong Ma Kok stands a satellite

tracking station with conspicuous dish aerials and radio masts.

About 0.2 mile N of the SW entrance point of the bay stands a

supplementary storm signal station.

2.15 Chek Chue Wan (Stanley Bay) (22°12'N., 114°12'E.) is the

bight indenting the island to the W of the Stanley Peninsula.

Chung Hom Kok is the W entrance point of the bay and is a

rocky barren promontory 128m high with a conspicuous

boulder at its summit. A prominent yellow mast, from which

storm signals are shown, stands at Chek Chue (Stanley), the

village at the head Chek Chue Wan.

2.15 Chung Hom Wan, to the NW of Chek Chue Wan, is fronted

by the island of Ngan Chau (Round Island) (22°13'N.,

114°11'E.). This island is fringed by a rock ledge with a few

drying patches and depths of less than 5.5m up to 0.2 mile

offshore. A light is shown from the S end of the Island.

2.15 Tsin Shui Wan (Repulse Bay) (22°14'N., 114°11'E.), a bay

entered 1 mile NNE of Ngan Chau, provides anchorage, in

10m, SW of the island of Tong Po Shan (Tung Ku Chau).

2.15 Sam Shui Wan (Deep Water Bay) is entered between Tong

Po factory standing with some conspicuous chimneys near it. A

small landing pier is situated at the head of the bay.

2.15 Caution.—Due to the existence of submarine cables in Sam

Shui Wan, anchoring is not advisable.

2.16 Heung Kong Tsai (Aberdeen Harbor) (22°15'N.,

114°11'E.) provides good shelter from a typhoon. From the E

side of Western Breakwater, reclaimed land forms the N shore

as far as Deep Pass Point, about 1 mile E. There are three

power cables which span overhead across the W entrance with

a vertical clearance of 27m, close E of the breakwater. A

submarine pipeline is laid 0.2 mile SW from the coast W of

Western Breakwater, from which a light is shown.

2.16 Three artificial islands are situated 0.3 mile S of the Deep

Pass Point; submarine cables lie between each island and

connect to the coast E.

Heung Kong Tsai Hoi Hap (Aberdeen Channel) leads N to

Heung Kong Tsai, between Hong Kong Island and Ap Lei

Chau. The channel is narrow and dangerous and is not

recommended.

2.16 The islands of Ap Lei Chau and Ap Lei Pai (22°14'N.,

114°09'E.) fill most of a bight indenting Hong Kong Island,

that extends from Sham Shui Kok to the NW entrance of Shek

Pai Wan, about 2.3 miles NW. Ap Lei Chau is steep and barren,

rising to 195m at Yuk Kwai Shan (Mount Johnston) at its Scentral part.

2.16 Assistance Rock, covered 2.7m, lies about 0.1 mile SW of

the bight on the SE extremity of Ap Lei Pai.

2.16 Heung Kong Tsai (Aberdeen Harbor) is entered through a

channel bound from the S by Fo Yeuk Chau, an island with an

arched roof building near its summit, and on the N by Hong

Kong, W of Pollux Rock.

2.16 The small harbor is well-sheltered, but used mostly by small

vessels and fishing craft, as the breakwater extending SSE into

the harbor from the N of Fo Yo Kok and the overhead cables

(vertical clearance 26.8m) E of the breakwater limit access to

Aberdeen Docks. Supplementary storm signals are shown from

the police station in Aberdeen.

2.16 Anchorage can be taken off the harbor entrance, in a depth of

9.2m, about 0.2 mile NNW of Fo Yo Kok.

2.16 Between Shek Pai Wan and Shek Tong Tsui, the W

extremity of Hong Kong Island 2 miles NW, the main island is

indented by Waterfall Bay, Kong Sin Wan (Telegraph Bay),

and Sandy Bay. The latter bay is almost completely reclaimed.

The coast is fringed with rocks within 0.3 mile of the shore.

2.17 Lamma Island (Pok Liu Chau) (22°12'N., 114°08'E.)

is a very irregularly shaped island with bays indenting it on all

sides. It is relatively steep-to and rises to about 350m high,

giving good radar returns from 12 miles. The hills on the island

present a barren appearance. Most of the fringing dangers lie

within 0.15 mile of the shore, the outermost being two rocks

that dry 0.6 and 2.1m off the NW extremity of the island.

2.17 Of the three large bays that indent the E coast of Pok Liu

Chau, only the southeasternmost is not used for anchoring, as it

is open to the swell from seaward.

2.17 Sok Kwu Wan (Picnic Bay), which nearly bisects the island

on its NE side, affords good anchorage for small vessels, in 11

to 12.8m. The bay is clear of dangers in its outer part. A

concrete jetty, 60m long with a depth of about 5.8m at its head,

projects NW from the S shore about 0.2 mile from the head of

the bay where a ferry landing is situated.

2.17 A prohibited area, marked by buoys, lies within the bay.

2.17 Luk Chau Wan indents the NE side of Pok Liu Chau to the

NW of Luk Chau, a small island about 68m high. The bay

provides good shelter during the Southwest Monsoon. 
22 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.17 Anchorage can be taken in Luk Chau Wan, in 9.2 to 11m,

good holding ground.

2.17 A submarine power cable crosses Luk Chau Wan between

positions 0.2 mile SSW and 0.6 mile WNW from the summit

of Luk Chau.

2.17 Ha Mei Wan (22°13'N., 114°06'E.) is the largest bay on the

W side of Lamma Island.

2.17 A powerplant, with two conspicuous chimneys, stands on

reclaimed land E of Po Lo Tsui (22°13'N., 114°06'E.). A jetty,

320m long, is situated W of the powerplant where coal carriers

berth. Hong Kong Electric Company can accommodate vessels

of up to 100,000 dwt with a maximum length of 264m. The

dock has a depth alongside of 16.5m. Approach to the berth is

made through a channel, 260m wide with a dredged depth of

15.7m, entered 1.75 miles S of Po Lo Tsui. The channel is

marked by lighted buoys. Anchoring off the jetty and the

turning area is prohibited.

2.17 A passenger jetty lies close NE of Po Lo Tsui.

2.18 Tsing Chau (Green Island) (22°17'N., 114°07'E.) lies

off the NW extremity of Hong Kong Island across Sulphur

Channel. The island is 91m high, rock fringed, shows a light

from its SW part. Green Island Cement Company operates a

facility having a pier able to accommodate vessels of up to

55,000 dwt, with a dredged depth alongside of 10m.

2.18 Ngong Shuen Chau (Stonecutters Island) (22°19'N.,

114°08'E.) is the S extremity of a peninsula created by

extensive and continuous land reclamation. A large basin

containing several jetties lies at the E end of Ngong Shuen

Chau. The basin has a least depth of 4.4m and is protected by

two lighted breakwaters which form the entrance on its NE

side. The basin is approached via Yau Ma Tei Fairway, which

leads N from Central Fairway at position 22°18'N, 114°09'E

and passes W of Kowloon, then NW to the NE of Ngong Shuen

Chau.

Tung Lung Island (22°15'N., 114°17'E.) lies across Tai Miu

Wan to the S of the mainland and E of Hong Kong Island. It is

over 230m high and very steep on its seaward side. A white

mark has been painted on the steep black cliffs of Lam Tong

Mei at the tip of the peninsula extending S from Tung Lung

Island. Nga Ying Pai, 3.7m high, is the outermost of a group of

rocks extending about 0.1 mile SW from the island. A light is

shown from this rock.

2.18 Tai Miu Wan (Joss House Bay) (22°16'N., 114°17'E.) is a

small bay bounded on the S by Tung Lung Island and on the N

by the mainland. Fat Tong Mun is the E entrance to the bay, but

is only usable by small craft as the W entrance is much more

accessible. Although anchorage is foul in the outer part of the

bay, small vessels can find good anchorage, in 10.1m, in its

inner part, with the N extremity of Tung Lung Island bearing

121° and the SE side of Tit Cham Chau, the larger of the two

islands in the NW entrance of the bay, bearing 238°. 

2.18 Fat Tong Chau (Junk Island), 98m high and covered with

grass and a few scattered trees, is located about 1 mile NNW of

Tit Cham Chau in the SE part of Tseung Kwan O. The island is

joined to the mainland by an extensive area of reclaimed land.

There are three islets off its S extremity, the largest of which is

marked by a light.

2.18 A shoal, with depths of 3m, lies between 0.2 and 0.4 mile

ESE of Fat Tong Chau Light. A submarine power cable crosses

the W entrance to Fat Tong Mun.

2.18 Tseung Kwan O (Junk Bay) (22°17'N., 114°16'E.) is a large

indentation of the mainland that is entered between Fat Tong

Chau and Lei Yue Mun Point, about 1.4 miles NW. This bay

shoals gradually toward its head where a considerable amount

of reclamation is being done. 

2.18 Caution.—Depths in Tseung Kwan O are considerably less

than charted N of a position 1.5 miles within the entrance. A

shoal, with a least depth of 3m, exists between 0.1 and 0.2 mile

NE of Lei Yue Mun Point.

2.18 A disused spoil ground extends about 0.1 mile seaward along

this part of the coast.

2.18 This bay provides good shelter during typhoons, and in

addition to the charted Dangerous Goods Anchorage, vessels

may anchor, in 8.2m and 7.3m, N and NE, respectively, of Fat

Tong Chau.

Hong Kong—Entrance Channels 

2.19 Lam Tong Hoi Hap (Tathong Channel) is the main

channel leading to the E entrance of Victoria Harbor. When

entered from seaward, the channel leads S of Tung Chau Lung

Island, NW between Lam Tong Mei and Hok Tsui, and NNW

between Hong Kong Island and the mainland to Lei Yue Mun.

2.19 A Traffic Separation Scheme has been established in Lam

Tong Hoi Hap, and is best seen on the appropriate chart. This

traffic scheme is IMO-adopted and Rule 10 of the International

Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) applies.

For details on Vessel Traffic Service Reporting Points, see

paragraph 2.23, “Victoria Harbor (Hong Kong)—Regulations.”

2.19 Tai Long Pai, a group of rocks, lies 1 mile SW of Nga Ying

Pai. Shoal water extends up to 0.1 mile off the light structure

situated on the rocks.

2.19 Bokhara Rocks (22°13'N., 114°16'E.) lie 1.3 miles S of Tai

Long Pai, on a bank with a least depth of 4.4m.

2.19 Lei Yu Mun (22°17'N., 114°14'E.) is the short, narrow pass

leading from the N end of Lam Tong Hoi Hap to the E entrance

of Victoria Harbor. It is about 0.2 mile wide, with depths of

over 18.3m lying 137m and 82m from the N and S sides,

respectively. It is well-marked by lights and clear of dangers.

2.19 Sheung Sz Mun (22°12'N., 114°15'E.) is a deep pass

leading between the mouth of Tai Tam Bay and the island of

Lo Chau. After passing Hok Tsui, westbound vessels should

round Wong Ma Kok, remaining N of Oliver Shoals and clear

of Chesterman Rock.

2.19 Chesterman Rock (22°11'N., 114°12'E.), marked by a

lighted buoy, has a least depth of 13.7m and lies 0.7 mile WSW

of Bluff Head.

2.19 Caution.—Mariners are advised to keep a safe distance

from Chesterman Rock and Oliver Shoals; rapids and irregular

shoals form in the area.

2.19 A wreck, with a least depth of 16.4m, lies in the inbound

lane of Tathong Channel TSS, 0.6 mile S of Tathong Point

Light.

2.20 Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap (East Lamma Channel)

(22°14'N., 114°08'E.) leads between Hong Kong Island and

Lamma Island in a NW direction to the W entrance of Victoria

Harbor. It is the most convenient route to the mooring buoy

berths in Victoria Harbor when approaching Hong Kong Island
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 23

Pub. 161

from the E or SE. The channel has fairway depths of over 18m.

2.20 A Traffic Separation Scheme governs traffic movements in

East Lamma Channel, which is best seen on the appropriate

chart.

2.20 Lamma Patch (22°15'N., 114°07'E.), with a depth of 7.5m,

lies to the NE of Pak Kok on the Traffic Separation Line and is

marked by buoys. A 14.6m patch lies in the outbound lane of

the scheme, 0.5 mile SE of Lamma Patch.

2.20 Caution.—Large concentrations of fishing vessels frequent

the approaches to Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap.

Dangan Shuidao (Lema Channel) is entered from the E

between Dangan Liedao and the Po Toi Group, or from the SW

between Dangan Liedao and Sannen Liedao. The channel has

depths of 18.3 to 36.6m, and is clear of dangers. 

2.20 Caution.—This channel has been closed to foreign shipping

by China.

2.21 Sai Pok Liu Hoi Hap (West Lamma Channel)

(22°11'N., 114°03'E.) is entered between the islands of Cheung

Chau on the W, and Lamma Island on the E. An extensive

bank, with a least charted depth of 6.4m, extends across the

islands mentioned above and is best seen on the chart.

2.21 Shek Kwu Chau (22°12'N., 113°59'E.) is the

southwesternmost island bordering West Lamma Channel. It

has two peaks, the higher one being on the NW end of the

island and 183m high. A group of drying rocks lie off the NW

shore. In 1993 shoal depths were reported 1 mile SSE and 1.8

miles SE of Shek Kwu Chau.

2.21 Cheung Chau, 2.5 miles ENE of Shek Kwu Chau, consists of

two hilly areas joined by a narrow neck of land that supports a

large fishing village. The hill to the N is about 109m high. A

conspicuous meteorological observatory and storm signal

station stand 0.3 mile NE of the S extremity of the island.

Storm signals are also displayed from another mast 0.5 mile

NE. The cliff face at the NE end of the island has been painted

white.

2.21 Cheung Chau Rock, which dries 2.1m and is marked by a

light, lies about 0.3 miles E of the E end of Cheung Chau.

2.21 Hei Ling Chau and Chau Kung To (22°16'N., 114°03'E.)

are two islands lying 3 miles N of Cheung Chau Rock. The

former is 188m high near its center with three rocks, the

highest 3.7m high, lying about 0.2 mile offshore abreast the S

part of the W coast of the island, while the latter is 105m high

at the cliff on its E side. Supplementary storm signals are

shown at the NW extremity of Hei Ling Chau. A conspicuous

pavilion stands on the NW extremity of the island. A typhoon

shelter, divided into designated mooring areas, is situated on

the SW side of Hei Ling Chau. Detached breakwaters, marked

by lights at the breakwater heads, protect the typhoon shelter. 

2.21 A shoal, with a depth of 3.5m, lies about midway between

Chau Kung To and Datum Rock to the NE.

2.22 Kau Yi Chau (22°17'N., 114°04'E.) rises steeply to

117m and is rock-fringed. It is the northernmost island on the

W side of West Lamma Channel. The area between this island

and Douglas Rock, which is awash at LWS and Siu Kau Yi

Chau (Sui Kau Island) about 1 mile W, is a dumping ground.

2.22 In 1984, a depth of 5m was reported to lie 0.4 mile N of

Douglas Rock.

2.22 An exposed wreck has been reported to lie off the E coast of

Kau Yi Chau, and a second wreck showing masts above water

lies 0.1 mile farther SE.

2.22 Peng Chau (22°17'N., 114°02'E.) and Tai Pak, close W, lie

between the previously mentioned islands and Tai Yue Shan.

Peng Chau is crescent-shaped and rises to a height of 46m in

the N and 107m in the S. These parts are joined by a low

isthmus that contains a lime works. The cove on the E coast is

shoal. A radio mast is conspicuous from the NE end of the

island.

2.22 West Lamma Channel continues N of a line between Kau

Yi Chau and Tsing Chau (Green Island) to Tsing Yi or Kap

Shui Mun. Pun Shan Shek (Bunsansiak Rock) is the

northwesternmost danger in the channel.

Hong Kong (Victoria) (22°18'N., 114°10'E.)

World Port Index No. 57840

2.23 Hong Kong harbor lies between the N side of Hong

Kong Island and the mainland of China. The harbor has an area

of about 23 square miles, with complete facilities for

oceangoing vessels of up to 110,000 dwt, including

shipbuilding and repairs. The limits of the harborare defined on

the E by a line between the lights marking the NW end of Lei

Yue Mun and on the W by a line from Shek Tong Tsui to the W

coast of Tsing Chau (Green Island), to the SE side of Tsing Yi,

then to the NW extremity of Tsing Yi and due N to the

mainland. 

Winds—Weather

2.23 The Northeast Monsoon normally begins during September.

It prevails from October until mid-March, but can persist until

May. The early winter is generally dry and sunny, with cloud

cover and rainfall becoming more prevalent after January.

Coastal fog and drizzle occur about 4 days a month in early

spring during breaks in the monsoon. Vessels can, on occasion,

find fair visibility in Lema Channel and East Lamma Channel

when Lam Tong Hoi Hap is fogbound.

2.23 The Southeast Monsoon can occur from mid-April until

September, but is not as strong as the Northeast Monsoon. This

season is generally rainy, hot, and humid.

2.23 Gales and typhoons can occur from May to November, but

typhoons are most likely to occur between July and September

and vessels should be prepared to seek shelter during this

period. Special moorings are equipped to handle vessels within

Victoria Harbor during typhoons.

2.23 When the visibility in Hong Kong waters, or its approaches,

is redued to less than two miles due to weather, the Vessel

Traffic Center, (MARDEP), will broadcast visibility reports

relevant to the major traffic routes on VHF channels 12, 14,

and 67; broadcasts will be made on the hour until visibility

improves. 

Tides—Currents

2.23 The tidal rise is 2.2m at springs, and 1.6m at neaps. 

2.23 Tidal currents in the fairway and harbor between Lei Yue

Mun and Tsing Chau set W with a rising tide and E with an ebb
24 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

 Stonecutter Bridge from S

Kowloon Ferry Terminal and KCR Clock Tower
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 25

Pub. 161

tide, changing direction at LW and HW. The currents are

reported (2007) to reach velocities of up to 1.5 knots. 

Depths—Limitations

Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap provides the deepest approach from

seaward to Victoria Harbor, and provides access to the deepwater berths at Tsing Yi Chau. Aside from Lamma Patch,

which has already been described in paragraph 2.20, the

channel shows a least charted depth of 16.5m to a point about

0.8 mile SSW of Tsing Chau (Green Island). From this point,

the channel traverses Kellett Bank, which will be described

later.

2.23 The controlling depth in Victoria Harbor is 11m through the

Northern Fairway and Lam Tong Hoi Hop.

2.23 Northern Fairway is the principal fairway for all merchant

ships entering Hong Kong harbor from W approaches; it has a

least depth of 10.1m. The channel connecting East Lamma

Channel with Northern Fairway runs W of the Western

Quarantine Anchorage, then E along the N limits of Dangerous

Goods Anchorage on the N section of Kellett Bank. Depths of

up to 2m less than charted have been reported (1996) in

Northern Fairway.

2.23 Anchoring is prohibited in this passage. The channel is

marked by Kellett Lighted Buoy, Quarantine Lighted Buoy,

and Northern No. 4 Lighted Buoy; the latter marks the W limit

of Northern Fairway. The channel then leads SE between

Northern No. 2 Lighted Buoy and Northern No. 3 Lighted

Buoy for a distance of 1.5 miles and enters into Central

Fairway.

2.23 Rambler Channel, located between Tsing Yi Chau and the

mainland E, provides access to some of the principal deepwater berths of the port. The N end of the channel is obstructed

by a bridge with a vertical clearance of 17m; passage N of the

bridge is not recommended for ocean-going vessels.

2.23 Tsing Yi, the area N of Tsing Yi Chau, is reached by passing

W and N of Tsing Yi Chau. Several oil berths are situated here.

2.23 The channel is dredged to a depth of 11.5m as far as the oil

terminal at the NE end of Tsing Yi.

2.23 The main container berths for the port are situated on the E

Victoria Harbor from W

Rambler Channel
26 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

side of Rambler Channel, at the Kwai Chung and Stonecutter’s

Island Container Port which consists of eight private terminals.

The Kwai Tsing Container Basin and its approach channel are

maintained to a depth of 15m. Each berth has a length

exceeding 300m and alongside depths of 12.2 to 14.5m. There

are a total of 19 container berths for ocean-going vessels in

Victoria Harbor. 

2.23 A bulk coal berth, situated on the W shore of Pok Liu Chau,

is approached from West Lamma Channel via a fairway

dredged to a depth of 15.5m in 1981. The jetty reportedly will

accept vessels up to 290m in length, with drafts of 13m.

2.23 Tuen Mun, a utility company terminal having facilities for

the handling of coal, can accommodate vessels up to 140,000

tons, with maximum drafts of 17m.

2.23 China Cement Company has three berths at Tap Shek Kok.

The main jetty, which can accommodate vessels up to 60,000

dwt, has a length of 270m, with an alongside depth of 14m.

The auxiliary jetty is 275m, with an alongside depth of 14m.

The third jetty is for lighters and has a depth of 4.5m.

2.23 There are grain terminals at Kennedy Town and Kwun Tong.

2.23 There are eight tanker berths, with lengths of 61 to 250m and

alongside depths of up to 18.3m. Vessels up to 110,000 dwt can

be accommodated at the terminal situated on Tsing Yi Island.

The Shell Terminal at Ap Lei Chau can accommodate vessels

up to 100,000 dwt with a maximum draft of 18.3m. Special

regulations are in effect for vessels proceeding to berths at

Tsing Yi or Kwun Tong.

2.23 Numerous wharves and piers intended for break bulk vessels

line the shores of Victoria Harbor. Depths alongside the various

piers vary between 5.3 and 10.5m.

2.23 Ocean Terminal consists of two passenger vessel berths,

each having a length of 380m, and a depth of 11.5m at the

outer berth and 9m at the inner berth.

2.23 There are ship repair and drydock facilities for vessels up to

150,000 dwt.

2.23 Southern Fairway is entered through Sulphur Channel,

which also merges into Central Fairway from the W, where

Northern Fairway joins in from NW.

2.23 A rock, which uncovers 1.2m, lies 0.1 mile S of White Point

(22°19.0'N., 114°08.4'E.). Another rock, with a depth of 1.8m,

lies 0.1 mile WSW of the same point.

2.23 Central Fairway and Hung Hom Fairway, which connect

with Eastern Fairway, pass through the central portion of

Victoria Harbor. Hung Hom Fairway shows a least charted

depth of 10m, while the other fairways possess greater depths.

2.23 The fairways in Hong Kong are usually very congested.

Particular caution should be exercised when navigating at the

junctions of fairways, particularly in the vicinity of position

22°19.0'N, 114°05.5'E, where traffic may converge from all

directions.

2.23 Special regulations are in effect for Central Fairway. See

“Regulations” for more information.

2.23 A bridge crosses the channel between Tsing Yi and

Stonecutters Island; vessels transiting the fairway are limited to

a maximum height of 68.5m. 

2.23 Lam Tong Hoi Hap and Lei Yue Mun provide access to

Victoria Harbor from the E. Lam Tong Hoi Hap has a least

charted depth of 11.5m off Fat Tong Chau, while Lei Yue Mun

is deep and clear of dangers. Caution is advised in Lei Yue

Mun, as the tidal currents within it may reach 3 knots. Vessels

navigating this route to Victoria Harbor are restricted in

masthead height, and are governed by special regulations due

to the operations of the airport charted about 3 miles NE of Lei

Yue Mun.

2.23 The W approaches to Victoria Harbor are obstructed by

Kellett Bank, which has depths of less than 5m in places. This

extensive shoal is crossed by three fairways, two of which are

dredged.

2.23 The S end of Kellett Bank is traversed by Southern Fairway,

which has a least charted depth of 7.3m.

2.23 There are mooring buoys situated over Kellett Bank. The

channel is entered via Lau Wong Hoi Hap (Sulphur Channel)

or North Green Island Fairway, which pass SE or N,

respectively, of Tsing Chau (Green Island). North Green Island

Fairway, which leads between Southern Fairway, close N of

Kennedy Town, and Western Quarantine and Immigration

Anchorage, should be used by shallow draft vessels only, as it

has a least charted depth of 5.4m.

Aspect

Victoria Harbor is widest along its W harbor limit and

narrows gradually E until the Kowloon Peninsula, projecting

from the mainland toward Hong Kong Island, where it reduces

its width to about 0.7 miles. Farther to the E, it widens slightly

until beyond Tsat Tsz Mui (North Point) where it narrows

again up to the E harbor limit at Lei Yue Mun. The N shore of

Hong Kong Island and the shores of the Kowloon Peninsula are

fronted by high buildings and backed by steep hills. Numerous

piers project into the harbor from the shores of the mainland as

well as from Hong Kong, Tsing Yi, and the other islands within

the harbor limits. The W portion of the harbor contains most of

the shore berths and mooring buoys, while the E portion is

filled by dockyards, a few piers and and wharves, the former

runway of the old international airport, and the Eastern

Fairway.

2.23 The highest point overlooking the harbor is Victoria Peak,

551m high, with a tower near its summit, located 0.8 mile SSW

of the Vessel Traffic Center (22°17.4'N., 114°09.0'E.). The S

side of the harbor is indented by Victoria Basin, Tung Lo Wan

(Causeway Bay), Quarry Bay, and Aldrich Bay, while the N

shore is indented primarily by Kowloon Bay, Hung Hom Wan,

and the Sam Shui Po area to the NE of Ngong Shuen Chau. 

2.23 Chimneys at the power plants on the S side of Tsing Yi and

about 0.5 mile WSW and 0.9 mile NNW, respectively, of North

Point are conspicuous. The white spire of St. Andrew’s Church

is situated close W of the Royal Observatory on the Kowloon

Peninsula. Close to the observatory stands a framework mast,

78m high, marked by a fixed red obstruction light.

2.23 Caution.—Dredging, reclamation, and construction works

are continuously underway throughout the harbor.

2.23 Do not confuse the obstruction light on the tower at the

Royal Observatory with the storm signals shown at that station.

2.23 The Macau Ferry Terminal is situated close NW of the signal

station. Vessels may not enter or maneuver in the close vicinity,

marked by buoys, of the terminal. Four sets of Traffic Control

Lights are shown near the W extremity of Outer and Inner

Piers at the ferry terminal, two on each pier. An outfall pipe

extends 0.2 mile NNE from a position 0.2 mile W of the

terminal. Positive identification of charted landmarks may be
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 27

Pub. 161

difficult at night due to the fact that the shores of the harbor are

ablaze with light.

Pilotage

Pilotage in Hong Kong is compulsory for the following

vessels:

1. Vessels of 3,000 grt or over.

2. Vessels of 1,000 grt or over proceeding to or from a

wharf (as specified in Part 1 of the First Schedule) or

container terminal (as specified in the Third Schedule of the

Dangerous Goods (Shipping) Regulations).

3. Vessels of 1,000 grt or over carrying dangerous goods

(as specified in IMO categories 1, 2, and 5).

4. Vessels of 1,000 grt or over proceeding to or from a

government mooring buoy.

5. Vessels of 300 grt or over, as follows:

a. Vessels unable to proceed under their own power,

maneuver with their own steering gear, or work with their

own anchors.

b. Vessels that have any part of the hull structure

removed or under repair which may affect the watertight

integrity of the vessel.

c. Vessels at risk of causing injury to persons or

damage to property, any other vessel, or the environment

by virtue of the condition of the vessel or the nature or

condition of the cargo.

6. Gas carriers as defined in Regulation 2 of the

Merchant Shipping (Safety) (Gas Carriers) Regulations.

7. All vessels 5,000 grt or over, navigating within the

port.grt or greater.

2.23 Pilot services are available 24 hours throughout the year.

2.23 Pilots embark and disembark at the N end of the traffic

separation scheme (TSS) in East Lamma Channel; near Ngau

Chau (Round Island), in East Lamma Channel, for vessels of

20,000 grt and over; off the turning buoy in Tathong Channel;

or off Lau Kok Tsui (Black Point) in Urmston Road. Vessels

are also met off the entrance to Chek Mun Hoi Hap (Tolo

Channel). The pilots monitor VHF channel 11.

2.23 Vessels using the South Western Approach requiring a pilot,

shall embark or disembark their pilot at Ngan Chau Pilot

Boarding Station.

2.23 Oil tankers anchoring in the Kau Yu Chau Dangerous Goods

Anchorage and hampered vessels entering and leaving through

Weat Lamma Channel shall embark and disembark their pilot

in the vicinity of Tsing Chau (Green Island).

2.23 Vessels may proceed directly to or from a pilot boarding

place or a specified anchorage, provided the arrival information

is delivered as required. 

2.23 Vessels should adjust their speed to arrive at the pilot

boarding station at the allocated boarding time and conform to

the speed of other vessels in the channel, not overtaking vessels

ahead unless directed to do so by the Vessel Traffic Center

(VTC).

2.23 Pilotage services may be restricted or suspended due to

adverse weather or impending typhoons. The VTC will notify

vessel traffic of restricted, suspended, or partial pilotage

services status made necessary by deteriorating weather

conditions. The VTC will announce the operational status of

the pilots on VHF channels 12, 14, 20, 67, and 74. During

periods of restricted or suspended pilotage, requirements for

compulsory pilotage may be waived, with the exception of

vessels transiting through Ma Wan Fairway, vessels berthing or

unberthing from government mooring buoys, and tanker

navigation. Vessels qualifying for exemption from compulsory

pilotage may enter, leave, or move within the port during these

periods at the master’s discretion, and subject to the following

conditions:

1. The vessel must be under normal operating

conditions.

2. The vessel must report to the VTC not less than 3

hours prior to moving, entering, or leaving port. Reports to

the VTC must include vessel’s particulars, such as length

and draft, estimated time of operation, and intended route.

The VTC may impose specific conditions for the safe

navigation of any vessel. 

Regulations

Pre-arrival Information.—All owners, agents, and masters

or persons-in-charge of all vessels are required to report their

arrival and movements of their vessels to the Vessel Traffic

Center (VTC), call sign “MARDEP,” when entering, leaving,

or moving in the waters of Hong Kong, unless they are exempt

under Hong Kong port regulations.

2.23 The owners, agents, or masters of these vessels which

participate in the VTS shall apply for permission to enter the

waters of Hong Kong by providing pre-arrival notifications to

the VTC through fax, not less than 24 hours before the

intended entry into the waters of Hong Kong from the sea or

river trade waters or immediately after leaving their last port of

call if the intended entry into the waters of Hong Kong is less

than 24 hours after leaving such port. Vessels which are not

participating in the VTS should also fax their Pre-Arrival

Notification (PAN) to the VTC.

2.23 The Pre-Arrival Notification (PAN) for all vessels should

state the following information:

1. Vessel’s name.

2. Call sign or MD reference number (a number

assigned to the vessel for the purpose of reporting arrival and

departure if visiting Hong Kong for the first time). 

3. Flag.

4. Type.

5. Gross registered tons.

6. Length overall (in meters).

7. Number of crew including master.

8. Purpose of call in Hong Kong and intended berth or

anchorage on arrival. 

9. Estimated maximum draft of vessel in meters upon

arrival.

10. Any defects affecting maneuverability of

seaworthiness, or special conditions of the vessel or its

cargo.

11. Quantities and categories of dangerous goods on

board including radioactive materials (insert “None” if

applicable).

12. Name of agent in Hong Kong (insert "None" if no

agent appointed and indicate whether an agent is to be

appointed or whether the master is to act as agent).

13. Name of master of vessel.
28 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

14. Intended pilot boarding station if pilot is required

(Note.—Pilots should be requested, through the agent, from

Hong Kong Pilots Association).

15. ETA (expressed as "YY/MM/DD/hh/mm") at

intended pilot boarding station.

16. Last port of call (state name of port and country or

territory).

17. Height to highest point of vessel in meters above

waterline on arrival.

18. Any other relevant information (if applicable).

2.23 Tankers should state the following information:

1. Vessel’s name.

2. Call sign.

3. Flag.

4. Length overall (in meters).

5. Maximum draft.

6. Present dwt.

7. Date keel laid.

8. Cargo type; quantity (in tons); and whether for

loading, discharging, transshipment, or transit.

9. ETA at intended pilot boarding position, special

anchorage, or berth in the waters of Hong Kong.

10. ETD from intended berth in the waters of Hong Kong.

11. Intended berth.

12. In the case of a vessel carrying liquefied gas in bulk,

details of any certificate of fitness with respect to that cargo,

including number, name of person or body issuing the

certificate, date of issue, date of latest survey and date of

expiration, and type of liquefied gas carried.

13. In the case of a vessel carrying more than 2,000 tons

of oil in bulk, details of any certificate of insurance, insuring

against risk of pollution with respect to that cargo, including

number, name of person or body issuing the certificate, date

of issue, and date of expiration.

14. In the case of a vessel carrying (or to carry) any

noxious liquid substances in bulk, details of any

International Pollution Prevention Certificate with respect to

that cargo, including number, name of person or body

issuing the certificate, date of issue, date of latest survey and

date of expiration, and indicating whether for loading,

discharge, transshipment, or transit.

15. Whether a MARPOL surveyor is required.

16. Whether a fixed inert gas system is fitted in the vessel.

17. Whether a fixed tank washing system is fitted in the

vessel tanks.

18. The category of the vessel as defined under

Regulation 13G of Annex 1 to MARPOL 73/78. 

19. Delivery date of the vessel. 

20. Compliance with the Condition Assessment Scheme

(CAS) and information concerning Protective Location (PL)

and Hydrostatic Balance Loading (HBL), if applicable. 

2.23 When permission to enter the waters of Hong Kong has been

granted, the master of the vessel shall provide initial reports to

the VTC on VHF channel 12 when the vessel is in the vicinity

of the seaward limits of the Vessel Traffic Service.

Vessel Traffic Service.—A Vessel Traffic Service, call sign

MARDEP, is mandatory for all vessels over 300 grt, is in effect

for the waters of Hong Kong. Those vessels participating in the

VTS are required to submit a Pre-Arrival Notification (PAN) to

the Vessel Traffic Center (VTC) 24 hours prior to entering

Hong Kong waters. Non-conventional vessels entering or

transiting the waters of Hong Kong are requested to send their

notification by facsimile (852-23594264) to the Harbor Patrol

Section (HPS) of the Marine Department not less than 24 hours

before entry into Hong Kong waters or before leaving the last

port of call. Vessels are required to contact MARDEP by VHF,

as follows: 

1. When entering the Eastern Approaches—VHF

channel 12.

2. Upon entering the Western Approaches—VHF

channel 67.

3. Within the harbor limits—VHF channel 14.

2.23 Once contact has been made and permission to proceed

granted, vessels should relay the following report when passing

the appropriate reporting points listed below:

1. Vessel’s name. 

2. Reporting point. 

3. Time of passing point.

4. Speed. 

2.23 The schemes established on W approach are, as follows:

1. North West Siu A Chau Traffic Separation Scheme

between Fan Lau Lighted Buoy and Siu A Chau Lighted

Buoy (22°12'00"N., 113°54'12"E.).

2. Precautionary Area No. 2, enclosing the junction of

North Cheung Chau Traffic Separation Scheme and South

Cheung Chau Traffic Separation Scheme, extends 1.25 miles

E from Siu A Chau Lighted Buoy.

3. North Cheung Chau Traffic Separation Scheme

extends from Precautionary Area No. 2, passing N of

Cheung Chau to a position 2 miles WSW of Tsing Chau

(Green Island). The separation line is marked by Southeast

Lantau Lighted Buoy, Adamasta Rock Lighted Beacon, and

Hei Ling Lighted Buoy.

4. South Cheung Chau Traffic Separation Scheme

extends between the same points as North Cheung Chau

Traffic Separation Sheme, but passes S of Cheung Chau. The

separation line is marked by Shek Kwu Chau Lighted Buoy

(22°10'48"N., 113°59'24"E.) and Cheung Chau Lighted

Buoy (22°11'48"N., 114°03'12"E.).

5. Precautionary Area No. 1 extends from the NE

extremities of North Cheung Chau Traffic Separation

Scheme and South Cheung Chau Traffic Separation Scheme

1 mile NE to Southeast Kau Yi Chau Lighted Buoy

(22°16'42"N., 114°05'30"E.).

2.23 All vessels with masthead or superstructure heights

exceeding 30m above sea level must contact MARDEP Hong

Kong when passing TCS1 Lighted Buoy and state the

following:

1. Vessel name.

2. ETA at Lei Yue Mun.

3. Maximum height of mast or superstructure above sea

level.

2.23 All vessels transiting the Western Approaches of Hong

Kong, N and S of Lantau Island, should contact MARDEP on

VHF channel 67.

2.23 All vessels should contact MARDEP on VHF channel 12

when passing Waglan Island and confirm the information in 1,

2, and 3 above.

2.23 All vessels should report when passing TCS4 Lighted Buoy
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 29

Pub. 161

to confirm ETA at Lei Yue Mun and request permission to

proceed.

2.23 All outbound vessels should establish contact with

MARDEP on VHF channel 14 prior to departure and provide

the following information:

1. Vessel name.

2. ETD.

3. Maximum height of mast or superstructure above sea

level.

4. Estimated time of singling up.

5. ETA at Lei Yue Mun.

2.23 Ten minutes prior to arrival at Lei Yue Mun, vessels should

contact MARDEP and obtain permission to proceed. If the

ETD or ETA Lei Yue Mun varies from that reported to

MARDEP, that vessel should immediately contact MARDEP

and obtain permission to proceed. Any vessel lacking VHF

capability should enter and depart via East Lamma Channel.

2.23 In order to reduce the risk of collision in the dredged cut N

of Tsing Yi Chau, the following regulations are in force:

2.23 Vessels entering from seaward and proceeding to Tsing Yi

shall inform MARDEP at least 1 hour in advance of the

vessel’s ETA at parallel 22°21'N. A vessel departing another

berth for Tsuen Wan shall inform MARDEP at least 1 hour

before departing the berth, as well as the vessel’s ETA at the

parallel mentioned above. An outbound vessel shall notify

MARDEP at least 1 hour before departing the dock. If a

vessel’s arrival at the latitude stated or departure from the dock

at Tsuen Wan varies more than 15 minutes from the ETA given

to MARDEP, priority may be given to another vessel.

2.23 Oceangoing vessels are advised not to transit Central

Fairway. Vessels having a valid reason to transit Central

Fairway should seek permission from the Vessel Traffic Center

(VTC).

2.23 Vessels intending to proceed directly to a berth from sea, or

to depart from a berth directly to sea, shall enter or leave

through the approach that is closest to its berth, as follows:

1. Lam Tong Hoi Hap (Tathong Channel)—berths to the

E of Macau Ferry Terminal Buoy MFT1.

2. Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap (East Lamma Channel) or Sai

Pok Liu Hoi Hap (West Lamma Channel)—berths to the W

of Macau Ferry Terminal Buoy MFT1.

2.23 Ocean-going vessels of less than 3,000 grt, which have

obtained permission to transit Central Fairway from the VTC,

are strongly recommended to employ a pilot.

2.23 The VTS Reporting Points are: 

1. Eastern Approaches—Lam Tong Hoi Hap (Tathong

Channel):

a. Lighted Buoy TCS1.

b. Lei Yeu Man. 

2. Southeastern Approaches—Tong Pok Liu Hoi Hap

(East Lamma Channel):

a. Waglan Island Light.

b. Lighted Buoy LCS1.

c. Lamma Patch.

d. Tsing Chau (Green Island). 

Note.—Vessels contacting MARDEP from Waglan Island

Light or the LCS-1 Lighted Buoy are to call on VHF channel

12.

Vessels contacting MARDEP from Lamma Patch or Tsing

Chau (Green Island) are to call on VHF channel 14.

3. Southeastern Approaches—Sheung Sze Mun:

a. Waglan Island Light.

b. Chesterman Lighted Buoy.

c. Lamma Patch.

d. Tsing Chau (Green Island).

4. Southwestern Approaches—Siu Pok Liu Hoi Hap

(West Lamma Channel):

a. Cheung Chau Lighted Buoy.

b. Shek Kok Tsui.

c. Tsing Chau (Green Island).

5. Western Approaches—Adamsta Channel:

a. Fan Lau Kok.

b. Adamsta Rock.

c. Shek Kok Tsui.

d. Tsing Chau (Green Island).

6. Western Approaches—N of Lantau Island:

a. Sha Chau.

b. Lighted Buoy CP1.

c. North West Ma Wan Traffic Light (southbound

only).

d. Approaching Tsing Ma Bridge (northbound only).

7. Northwestern Approaches:

a. Urmston Road pilot boarding position.

b. Lighted Buoy CP8.

c. Lighted Buoy CP1.

d. North West Ma Wan Traffic Light (southbound

only).

e. Approaching Tsing Ma Bridge (northbound only).

8. Kwai Chung Container Terminals.

2.23 Kwai Chung Marine Traffic Control Station (KCCS), a

substation of the Vessels Traffic Center. The KCCS monitors,

regulate, and coordinates all marine traffic within the Kwai

Chung Basin. The basin area consists of waters bounded on the

N by the Tsing Yi Bridge, on the S by a line joining the SW tip

of Stonecutters Island to the SE tip of Tsing Yi Island, and on

the E and W by the shoreline.

2.23 When a vessel is to the W of Kwai Chung Container

Terminal No. 8 it is required to contact “Kawi Chung Control”

on VHF channel 74, which is monitored 24 hours.

2.23 While vessel is in the KCCS service area VTS, participating

vessels or vessels engaged in special operations are required to: 

1. Maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF

channel 74.

2. Report to KCCS on VHF channel 74 before getting

underway, leaving their berth, when berthed or cease to be

underway and when entering or leaving the KCCS service

area.

2.23 Vessels not transiting the KCCS should avoid passing close

to its boundaries. Local craft and river trade vessels of less than

300 grt are not required to report to the VTC or KCCS,

however, while navigating in the KCCS service area, should as

far as practicable keep a listening watch on VHF channel 74,

give consideration to the safe navigation of other vessels, and

not impede the safe navigation of deep draft vessels underway

in the Kwai Chung Basin. Anchoring (except in emergency)

and fishing are prohibited in the KCCS service area.

2.23 For the purpose of directing traffic, guiding small vessels in

particular, a patrol launch is stationed in the KCCS service

area. In inclement weather, the patrol launch may be

suspended.
30 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.23 Vessels leaving or preparing to move within Hong Kong

waters should report the following information at least 1 hour

in advance, or, if subject to compulsory pilotage, then at least 3

hours in advance of departure:

1. Vessel’s name and nationality.

2. Type and grt.

3. Length and draft.

4. Status of machinery and steering equipment.

5. Whether pilot is required.

6. ETD.

2.23 MARDEP should be informed of the time and location of

pilot boarding or discharge; time, location, and estimated time

of next movement upon the vessel’s anchoring; and time of

casting off or weighing anchor.

2.23 Vessels experiencing any of the stated conditions below are

required to send an immediate report:

1. Any condition affecting navigation of the vessel,

including fire on board, defective propulsion or steering

equipment, excessive list, or inoperative VHF.

2. If any tow which vessel is towing cannot be controlled

or can be controlled only with difficulty.

3. Concentrations of fishing vessels.

4. Reduced visibility or other adverse weather

conditions.

5. Floating logs or other obstructions to navigation.

6. Any defect in a navigation aid.

7. Any defect on another vessel, likely to affect its

navigation.

2.23 Dangerous Cargo Regulations—The following extracts

concern dangerous cargo regulations:

1. It shall not be lawful for the master of any vessel

carrying explosives to anchor within 500m of any other

vessels or of any Government Explosives Depot without the

permission of the Director of Marine. Vessels engaged in the

transshipment of explosives shall show the International

Code of Signals flag B by day, and shall by night show an

all-round red light not less than 6m above the uppermost

deck. If engaged in the transshipment of petroleum products

having a flashpoint of less than 65.5°C, in lieu of the

International Code of Signals Flag B, shall fly by day a red

flag of not less than 1m square, with a white circular center

0.15m in diameter, at the foremast, and the International

Code of Signals hoist “SU7.” The above signals are to be

displayed until the Director of Marine is satisfied that the

holds are clean and ventilated

2. Vessels carrying dangerous goods, on arrival at Hong

Kong, must anchor in one of the prescribed Dangerous

Goods Anchorages, and must obtain permission from the

Director of Marine before going alongside or shifting berth.

3. Except with the permission of the Director of Marine,

no vessel carrying dangerous goods in category 5, classes 1,

2, or 3 shall enter or remain in that part of Hong Kong

Harbor which is bounded by:

i. To the East—by a line drawn from a position on

Hong Kong Island near Pak Kok (North Point)

(22°17'42"N., 114°11'54"E.) in a 334° direction to the

Kowloon Peninsula.

ii. To the West—

a. From position 22°16'36"N, 114°06'48"E, on

Hong Kong Island, in a 329° direction to the W side of

Tsing Chau (Green Island) and then on a bearing of

026° to the W side of Ngong Shuen Chau (Stonecutters

Island.

b. From position 22°19'24"N, 114°08'42"E, on the

E side of Ngong Shuen Chau, on a 000° bearing to the

mainland.

4. Except with the permission of the Director of Marine,

upon the hoisting of any local storm signal other than No. 1

or No. 3, every vessel having dangerous goods in categories

1 or 5 on board, shall proceed outside the harbor and remain

outside until such signal is lowered.

5. The oil wharves at Kwun Tong, Ap Lei Chau, and

Tsing Yi shall be berths to which vessels carrying dangerous

goods may proceed with the permission of the Director of

Marine; otherwise, such goods must be discharged or loaded

in one of the dangerous goods anchorages.

6. All vessels, with keels laid on or after April 12, 1972,

which are carrying chemicals in bulk, must be in possession

of a Certificate of Fitness, in accordance with the IMOadopted Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships

carrying dangerous chemicals in bulk, before such vessels

enter or leave Hong Kong waters.

7. All vessels, with keels laid on or after April 12, 1972,

which are carrying chemicals in bulk, must be in possession

of a Certificate of Fitness, in accordance with the IMOadopted Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships

carrying dangerous chemicals in bulk, before such vessels

enter or leave Hong Kong waters.

Storm Regulations.—The following extracts concern storm

regulations:

1. Every person in charge of a vessel shall comply with

the requirements of the Director of Marine, who may order

such vessel to anchor or secure in any place he may direct, or

prohibit anchoring or securing in any place, and who may

order the vessel to be removed to another place within the

region.

2. Anchoring without the permission of the Director of

Marine is prohibited in the approaches to the airport in

Kowloon Bay, except when a Typhoon Signal, other than No.

1 and No. 3, is hoisted.

3. Except with the prior permission of the Director of

Marine, no dead ship shall be anchored, moored, or secured

at any place within the waters of Hong Kong nor except with

such permission, shall any repairs be undertaken upon any

ship which is so anchored, moored, or secured which will

result in such ship becoming a dead ship. The expression

“dead ship” means any ship exceeding 50m in length, other

than a laid-up ship, which is unable to proceed under its own

power; unable to maneuver with its own steering gear;

unable to work its own anchors; or unable to maintain the

watertight integrity of the ship.

4. Upon a local storm warning signal being hoisted,

vessels at government buoys shall clear away anchors and

cables, and bring main engines to a state of readiness for full

power, and shall leave such buoys, if so directed.

5. Upon a local storm signal, other than No. 1 being

hoisted, vessels at government buoys not being special

typhoon moorings shall, within 2 hours, move to a typhoon

anchorage or to a special typhoon mooring. The Director of
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 31

Pub. 161

Marine may at his discretion order a vessel to leave a special

typhoon mooring.

6. Any ship within the waters of Hong Kong shall have

on board at all times such number of crew as, in the opinion

of the Director of Marine, is capable of carrying out all the

duties which may reasonably be required to ensure the safety

of the ship having regard to the circumstances pertaining

thereto. Masters or agents requesting a buoy are advised to

ascertain whether it is considered safe for use in typhoon

conditions.

7. Nothing in these regulations shall prevent any vessel

which is already at a typhoon buoy from shifting to an

anchorage if such is preferred.

More information on harbor moorings may be found at the

following website.

2.23 Vessels may be directed to secure to designated mooring

buoys in the event of severe weather. The majority of the

mooring buoys are established in the vicinity of Kellett Bank,

however, several mooring buoys are established E of Northern

Fairway, close S of Yau Ma Tei Anchorage; N of Wan Chai and

Causeway Bays; and in the central portion of To Kwa Wan.

Class A buoys are painted white with black numbers, and are

usable by vessels up to 183m in length. Class B buoys are

black with white numbers, and are suitable for vessels up to

137m in length. Class A buoys are moored in depths of 5.1 to

12m; Class B bouys are moored in depths of 4 to 8.5m. 

2.23 Vessels are required to moor using the ship’s anchor cable.

vessels may drop an anchor underfoot to lessen severe

sheering. The anchor should be so placed as not to impair the

efficiency of the mooring. Vessels must obtain permission to

moor through the Marine Department Port Formalities and

Dangerous Goods Office.

2.23 Reclamation projects may displace the mooring buoys from

their charted positions.

Hei Ling Chau Typhoon Shelter (22°14'N., 114°02'E.),

located W of Hei Ling Chau, is marked by lights and beacons

at its entrance. The E boundary is marked by dolphins. Vessels

are advised to stay to the W of the boundary dolphins and not

to use them for mooring. Fifteen mooring dolphins are located

inside the shelter area. 

2.23 Pollution.—The depositing of oil, rubbish, or other

substances on the waters or the port is prohibited.

2.23 No vessel shall emit smoke in such quantities as to be a

nuisance.

2.23 Reception facilities have been established on Tsing Yi Island

for oily and chemical wastes as required under the

International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from

Ships.

2.23 Speed Restrictions.—Vessels shall not exceed a speed of 10

knots within the harbor limits; the speed limit for vessels 60m

in length or over is 8 knots.

2.23 When underway in the entrance to or within a typhoon

shelter, the speed restriction for all vessels is 3 knots.

2.23 Search and Rescue.—The coastal radio station of the

Global Maritime Distress and Safety System serves as the

Maritime Rescue Coordination Centre for the waters of Hong

Kong. Maritime search and rescue operations are coordinated

by the Marine Department for Hong Kong and the area of the

South China Sea N of latitude 10°N and W of longitude 120°E,

excluding the immediate coastal waters of neighboring states.

Signals

Traffic Signals.—Traffic signals, consisting of three red

lights disposed vertically, are shown from signal towers

situated on Ha Pong, NW Ma Wan, and Hoi Mei Wan. These

signals are designed to control traffic when a vessel

constrained by draft is transiting Ma Wan Channel. There is a

local traffic control station at Ma Wan for the surveillance and

control of traffic in the Ma Wan Channel. 

2.23 Signal stations offering full communications facilities to

vessels transiting the waters of Hong Kong are located on

Waglan Island and at the Marine Department Headquarters.

They may be contacted via radio or visual signals 24 hours.

Weather signals are also shown from these stations.

2.23 Vessels entering/departing the port are required to identify

themselves to the signal station on Waglan Island or Tsing

Chau (Green Island). Initial contact with VTS may be made on

VHF channel 12. Vessels switch to VHF channel 14 at Lamma

Patch.

2.23 Vessels underway in any portion of the port shall identify

themselves to any government vessel or warship if challenged.

2.23 While underway by day, a vessel shall display its national

ensign, call sign, and well clear of any other hoist, the

appropriate berthing signal (listed below).

2.23 Any vessel to which the letters L or K is made, via sound

signal, flashing light, or signal hoist shall stop immediately and

shall not proceed until authorized to do so.

Berthing Signals.—Vessels are required to fly a signal by

day indicating destination. 

Hong Kong Harbour Moorings

http://www.mardep.gov.hk/en/pub_services/ocean/

moor.html

Hong Kong Berthing Signals

Signal Meaning

KC3 The wharf at Kwai Chung (Lot No. 3) 

belonging to Sealand Orient Ltd.

KC4

The wharf at Kwai Chung (Lot No. 4) 

belonging to Hong Kong International 

Terminals Ltd.

KC5 The wharf at Kwai Chung (Lot No. 5) 

belonging to Modern Terminals Ltd.

KC6

The wharf at Kwai Chung (Lot No. 6) 

belonging to Hong Kong International 

Terminals Ltd., S side.

KB Kowloon Bay, when approaching from W.

PS

The anchorage off NE coast of Tai Yue Shan 

known as Pun Shan Shek Dangerous Goods 

Anchorage.

WE Western Dangerous Goods Anchorage.

WQ Western Quarantine Anchorage.
32 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

Coastal Visibility Broadcasts for Hong Kong Waters.—

When visibility in any part of Victoria Harbor or the

approaches thereto is restricted by fog or mist to less than 2

miles, visibility reports are broadcast over Hong Kong Port

Radio on VHF channel 12 at 15 minutes after every hour until

such time as visibility has improved to more than 2 miles in all

areas. The VHF broadcasts may be supplemented by TTT

messages in some circumstances, particularly when visibility

conditions in the E and W approaches differ significantly.

2.23 Visibility reports cover the following areas:

1. Waglan Island and Po Toi Island (Wang Lang Island

and Po Toi Groupe).

2. Tathong Point (Lam Tong Mei).

3. Tathong Channel (Lam Thong Hoi Hap).

4. Kowloon Bay.

5. Bluff Head, Stanley Peninsula (Wong Ma Kok).

YT Yau Ma Tei Anchorage.

OA Yam O Bay Anchorage.

TA Tolo Harbor Anchorage.

SA Sham Shui Po Anchorage.

JA Junk Bay Anchorage.

SM Sham Shui Po Hard.

RH Rocky Harbor Anchorage.

NB Naval Base.

MW The wharf at Connaught Road West, known 

as Hong Kong-Macau Ferry Terminal.

A with a 

number Class A buoys.

B with a 

number Class B buoys.

N with a 

number Naval buoys.

TY Floating docks at Tsing Yi Island.

KW 

The wharves at Tsim Sha Tsui belonging to 

the Hong Kong and Kowloon Wharf and 

Godown Co. Ltd.

OT 

The Ocean Terminal at Tsim Sha Tsui 

belonging to the Hong Kong & Kowloon 

Wharf & Godown Co. Ltd. 

KT The wharf at Kwun Tong belonging to the 

Shell Co. of Hong Kong Ltd.

AP The wharf at AP Lei Chau belonging to the 

Shell Co. of Hong Kong Ltd.

TW The wharf at Tsuen Wan belonging to the 

Hong Kong Oil Company Ltd.

TW The wharf at Tsuen Wan belonging to Caltex 

Oil Hong Kong Ltd.

SW The wharf at Sham Tseng belonging to Hong 

Kong Breweries Ltd.

KD The wharves at Hung Hom belonging to 

Hong Kong United Dockyards Co. Ltd.

TD The wharf at Quarry Bay belonging to Hong 

Kong United Dockyards Co. Ltd.

TS The wharf at Quarry Bay belonging to the 

Taikoo Sugar Refining Co. Ltd.

NY The wharf at Ngan Ying Chau belonging to 

China Resources Co. Ltd.

MO The wharf at Tsing Yi Island belonging to 

Mobil Oil (Hong Kong) Ltd.

ET The wharf at Tsing Yi Island belonging to 

Peninsula Electric Power Co. Ltd.

Hong Kong Berthing Signals

Signal Meaning

PO The wharf at Tsing Yi Island belonging to 

Caltex Oil Hong Kong, Ltd.

EO The wharf at Tsing Yi Island belonging to the 

Esso Oil Company Ltd.

GO The wharf at Tsing Yi Island belonging to 

The Gulf Oil Company Ltd.

FO The wharf at Tsing Yi Island belonging to the 

China Resources Co.

KC1 The wharf at Kwai Chung (Lot No. 1) 

belonging to Modern Terminals Ltd.

KC2

The wharf at Kwai Chung (Lot No. 2) 

belonging to Hong Kong International 

Terminals Ltd.

CW China Resources Wharf, Chai Wan.

CM China Merchants Wharf, Kennedy Town.

FE Cement Wharf, Pok Liu Chau.

CO Caltex Wharf, Tsing Yi.

BA Kellett Bank Anchorage.

PA Sok Kwu Wan Anchorage.

LA Laid-up ship anchorage, N of Tai Yue Shan.

SD Lok On Pai desalination plant.

LE Hong Kong Electric Co. Wharf, Po Lo Tsui.

TE China Light and Power Co. Wharf, Tap Shek 

Kok.

AD Apple Floating Dock, Tsing Yi.

TC China Cement Co. Wharf, Tap Shek Kok.

WD Whampoa Floating Dock, Tsing Yi.

TD Taikoo Floating Dock, Tsing Yi.

YD1 Yiu Lian No. 1 Floating Dock, Tsing Yi.

YD2 Yiu Lian No. 2 Floating Dock, Tsuen Wan.

Hong Kong Berthing Signals

Signal Meaning
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 33

Pub. 161

6. Victora Harbor.

7. East Lamma Channel.

8. Tsing Chau (Green Island).

9. West Lamma Channel.

10. Cheong Chau Island.

2.23 The reports are broadcast in plain language in the following

manner:

Anchorage

Quarantine Anchorage.—Vessels may request advance

clearance and quarantine services by radio. These services are

available 24 hours at the Western Quarantine and Immigration

Anchorage. Services are provided at the Eastern Quarantince

and Immigration Anchorage from 0600 to 1800 daily. There

are several additional quarantine anchorages which are best

seen on the chart.

The two quarantine anchorages are situated within the waters

of the port. Eastern Quarantine Anchorage is situated S of the

airport, and has charted depths of 9.1 to 12.4m, mud, sand, and

gravel. Western Quarantine Anchorage is centered about 1 mile

S of Tsing Yi Chou, and offers depths of 7 to 18.7m, mud and

shells.

2.23 A disused explosives dumping ground close W of the SW tip

of the Tsing Yi extends into Ma Wan Fairway. The W side of

the fairway is bordered by Ma Wan Anchorage, with depths of

10.4 to 32.5m. Vessels with an air draft of greater that 41m are

not permitted within the designated anchorage areas located S

and W of Ma Wan Channel. A 6.8m shoal lies close N of Ma

Wan Anchorage.

2.23 Dangerous Goods Anchorage.—Six dangerous goods

anchorages are situated throughout the port area for vessels

carrying commodities listed as dangerous by the Director of

Marine. Western Dangerous Goods Anchorage adjoins the

Western Quarantine Anchorage, and has depths of 6.3 to 9.2m,

soft mud and shells. The anchorage is studded with mooring

buoys.

2.23 Kau Yi Chau Dangerous Goods Anchorage extends S

through W from the S shore of Kau Yi Chau. Reserved

Dangerous Goods Anchorage lies 1 mile E of Kau Yi Chau.

Both are best seen on the chart.

2.23 Tsuen Wan Dangerous Goods Anchorage is situated at the E

end of that channel, N of Tsing Yi Chau. Depths at the center

of the anchorage are 10 to 14.8m, but shoal patches lie at the

SE corner of the area, and shoal banks extend from the shore

on all sides. A Prohibited Anchorage Area lies at the S end of

the anchorage.

2.23 Tseung Kwan O Dangerous Goods Anchorage is situated 0.9

mile NW of Fat Tau Chau. The least charted depth here is 12m,

soft mud.

2.23 Rocky Harbor Dangerous Goods Anchorage (22°20'N.,

114°20'E.) is situated in Leung Shuen Wan Hoi, which has

already been described. The anchorage has charted depths of

7m, mud and requires local knowledge for its use.

2.23 Naval Anchorage.—A naval anchorage is charted just S of

Central Fairway and is best seen on the chart. Large naval units

often anchor N of Tsing Chau (Green Island), between the

Prohibited Anchorage and Kellett Bank. 

2.23 Typhoon Anchorage.—Anchorage on the N side of the

harbor is preferable during typhoon season as the Kowloon

Peninsula offers protection from NE winds. Along with several

mooring buoys, shelter for small craft during severe weather is

afforded by specially constructed Typhoon Shelter Harbors

situated throughout the Hong Kong area. The Director of

Marine should be contacted for details on these havens.

2.23 General Anchorage.—General anchorage is available in

Sham Shui Po Anchorage which is situated between the N

shore of Ngong Shuen Chau and Lai Chi Kok to the N and NE.

Yau Ma Ti Anchorage, SE of Ngong Shuen Chau, has depths

of 4.6 to 5.5m, but is available only to vessels up to 91.5m

long.

2.23 There are three Kellett Anchorages which lie SSE of Tsing

Yi. Kellett Anchorage No. 1 can handle one vessel up to 300m

in length, with a maximum draft of 11m. Kellett Anchorage

No. 2 can handle eight vessels up to 150m in length, with

maximum drafts of 6.5m. Kellett Anchorage No. 3 can handle

three vessels up to 180m in length, with maximum drafts of

9.5m.

2.23 The Sham Shui KOK Anchorages lie directly S of Siu Mo To

and E of the Hong Kong International Airport. Sham Shui

KOK Anchorage No. 1 can handle two vessels up to 180m in

length, with maximum drafts of 8m. Sham Shui KOK

Anchorage No. 2 can handle one vessel up to 180m in length,

with a maximum draft of 9m. 

2.23 Anchorages for vessels waiting to enter Hong Kong harbor

are designated at:

1. Southeast Lamma Anchorage—1.25 miles SE of

Yuen Kok Light (22°11'N., 114°09'E.).

2. South Lamma Anchorage—1.25 miles SSW of Yuen

Kok, for vessels carrying dangerous goods.

3. Southwest Lamma Anchorage—SW of Yuen Kok.

2.23 All the above anchorages offer a least charted depth of 20m,

soft gray mud with rocky bottom.

2.23 Prohibited Anchorage.—A prohibited anchorage fairway

has been designated on the W side of the harbor. It leads from

the N end of Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap (East Lamma Channel)

along the W side of Kellett Bank to Tsing Yi. Its limits are

charted.

2.23 A prohibited anchorage area for vessels with an air draft of

more than 41m has been established in the vicinity of Ma Wan,

as follows:

1. West limit—a line joining Ha Pang Light and Tai Yue

Shan at 114°01.7'E.

2. South limit—a line joining SW corner of Tsing Yi and

Tai Yue Shan at 22°19.6'N.

3. East limit—a line joining Ting Kau and Tsing Yi at

114°04.6'E.

2.23 A prohibited anchorage area has been established adjacent to

the Hong Kong Disneyland Theme Park. Anchorage is only

allowed if permitted by the Director of Marine. 

Visibility Report

Less than 0.1 mile Thick fog

Between 0.1 and 1 mile Restricted visibility

Between 1 and 2 miles Visibility in miles and tenths 

of a mile (e.g. 1.6 miles) 

Between 2 and 5 miles Moderate visibility 

Over 5 miles Good visibility 
34 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.23 Many other prohibited anchorage areas are situated

throughout the harbor; the charts are the best guide to their

limits and locations.

Directions

2.23 The entrance channels normally used by vessels calling at

Hong Kong are approached from the E or SE. Waglan Island

Light, steered for on a bearing between 243° and 330° leads

from seaward to a position where the Traffic Separation

Schemes through Lam Tong Hoi Hap or Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap

(East Lamma Channel) may be reached. 

2.23 If approaching Hong Kong from S of the usual shipping

lanes, vessels should keep at least 5 miles seaward of Jiapeng

Liedao and Dangan Liedao.

2.23 If bound for Lam Tong Hoi Hap from E, steer for the

appropriate lane of the Traffic Separation Scheme, keeping a

good lookout for traffic near the lane entrance.

2.23 If bound for Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap (East Lamma Channel)

from the SE, round the N end of Dangan Liedao at least 5 miles

off, taking care to avoid the dangerous wrecks charted about

6.7 miles E and 4.4 miles ESE of the light on Poh Toi Island.

Keeping a sharp lookout for traffic, pass no more than 1.5

miles S of Poh Toi Island, and proceed to the appropriate traffic

lane.

2.23 If bound for Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap (East Lamma Channel)

from the E, proceed as directed above, passing S of Waglan

Island and Poh Toi Island.

2.23 If bound for the bulk berth in Sai Pok Liu Hoi Hap (West

Lamma Channel), steer as directed for Tung Pok Liu Hoi Hap

(East Lamma Channel) until S of Poh Toi Island. Keeping an

eye out for traffic, steer to pass within 1 mile of Lamma Island.

Round the island’s S end, and proceed to the dredged channel

off the island’s W side. Except for a 10m patch located 0.2 mile

off the island’s SW extremity, the S end of Lamma Island is

generally clear of fringing dangers, with deep water close off.

The dredged cut to the dock is well marked.

2.23 The channels traversing Kellett Bank in the W approaches to

Victoria Harbor, though congested with moorings, are well

marked. The E approach through Lei Yue Mun has a greater

concentration of local craft, coupled with a narrow channel and

special regulations for passing the airport. A conspicuous

chimney bearing 299° serves as an excellent steering mark

when passing through Lei Yue Mun. Local authorities

recommend anchoring outside the fairway in the event of

reduced visibility, as passage through Lei Yue Mun is difficult

in adverse weather.

Channels Leading from Hong Kong to Zhujiang

Kou

2.24 Kap Shui Mun Fairway, and Ma Wan Fairway, to the

E of it, are two of the channels leading to the Zhujiang Kou

from the NW of Victoria Harbor. Kap Shui Mu Fairway is

entered between Pun Shan Shek and Tsing Yi and leads

between the NE end of Tai Yue Shan on the W and Tang Lung

Chau and Ma Wan on the E. This channel has depths exceeding

18.3m and even though narrow, may be used by local traffic if

the vessels do not exceed 10m in length, as it is the shorter

route leading to the passage between the N of Tai Yue Shan and

the mainland. Vessels greater than 10m in length can only

proceed in a SE direction, since Kap Shui Mun is designated a

special area.

2.24 The Kap Shui Mun Bridge, linking Ma Wan and Tai Yue

Shan, crosses Kap Shui Mun, with a maximum safe vertical

clearance of 41m. Vessels with an air draft of more than 41m

will not be allowed to transit the channel. Ma Wan Fairway

also has depths of over 18.3m and leads between the E sides of

Tang Lung Chau and Ma Wan and the W side of Tsing Yi.

2.24 A lighted buoy marks a 6.4m depth 0.5 mile ENE of Tang

Lung Chau Light. Attention is drawn to the existence of less

than charted depths extending up to 0.2 mile NW of the lighted

buoy.

2.24 The Tsing Ma Bridge, which links Ma Wan and Tsing Yi,

crosses Ma Wan Fairway. The maximum safe vertical

clearance is 53m. Vessels with an air draft of more than 53m

will not be allowed to transit the area between Ma Wan and

Tsing Yi.

Kap Shui Mun Fairway

Ma Wan Fairway
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 35

Pub. 161

2.25 The passage along the N shore of Tsing Yi from

Tsuen Wan continues W and is intersected by Ma Wan Fairway

NE of Ma Wan and by Kap Shui Mun Fairway NE of the N

extremity Tai Yue Shan. The passage then leads W about 10

miles, bordered on the N by the mainland and on the S by the

islands off the N shore of Tai Yue Shan where it becomes part

of the Zhujiang Kou.

2.25 Caution.—Traffic may converge from all directions in the

vicinity of the junction of the N end of Western Fairway, the

SE end of Kap Shui Mun Fairway, the SE end of Ma Wan

Fairway, and the W end of Northern Fairway. Particular

caution should be exercised when navigating in this area.

2.25 Ma Wan and Tang Lung Chau are fringed with drying rocks,

some of which lie as far as 0.3 mile E of the E side of Ma Wan.

Foul ground connects Tang Lung Shun with Ma Wan, and

extends up to 0.2 mile off the S point of the former.

2.25 From the mainland opposite Ma Wan, a pier extends into the

strait. Caution is necessary in this portion of the channel, as

docking or undocking may occur at the wharf at all hours.

2.25 A light is shown from a framework tower standing on Ngau

Lan Tsui, the NE extremity of Ma Wan. Another light is shown

from a tower standing on Gemini Point (22°21'48"N.,

114°04'12"E.); the white sector of this light leads through Ma

Wan Fairway. Both lights are shown day and night when a

vessel constrained by its draft transits Ma Wan Fairway.

2.25 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 53m, connects a point

lying 0.5 mile ENE of Gemini Point and the NW extremity of

Tsing Yi.

2.25 Ma Wan Traffic Control Center is located on Gemini Point.

The positions of the restricted areas in Ma Wan Fairway are

best seen on the chart.

2.25 Traffic signals, consisting of three red lights, disposed

vertically, are shown day and night from towers situated at Ha

Pang; Kau Po, the NW extremity of Ma Wan; and Hoi Mei

Wan, 0.1 mile NE of Gemini Point. Traffic restrictions will also

be passed by VHF and through patrol craft.

2.25 Waiting Areas have been established, as follows:

2.25 When Ha Pang and NW Ma Wan signals are shown, a vessel

is about to transit or is transiting Ma Wan Fairway westbound

or northbound. On seeing the signals, all traffic approaching

Ma Wan eastbound, except vessels of less than 20m in length

and passenger ferries issued with a Speed Restriction Permit

(SRP), should either proceed to Waiting Area 1 or 2 or, when

considered safe to do so, to continue their passages by making

use of Kap Shue Mun.

2.25 Vessels should avoid waiting in the zone between Waiting

Areas 1 and 2 above, as this will obstruct the passage of large

vessels following the deep water route.

2.25 When Hoi Mei Wan signals are shown, a vessel is about to

transit or is transiting Ma Wan Fairway eastbound or

southbound. On seeing the signal, all vessels approaching the

restricted area from N of Tsing Yi, except vessels of less than

20m in length and passenger ferries issued with a Speed

Restriction Permit (SRP), should wait at Waiting Area 3,

taking care not to encroach upon the deep water channel close

to the N shore of Tsing Yi. Vessels approaching the area from

the S should wait at Waiting Area 4 or continue their passage

by following Kap Shui Mun. If they prefer to wait, they should

keep clear of Ma Wan Fairway and Kap Shui Mun.

2.25 Vessels that have entered the restricted area before the signal

lights are shown should proceed with extreme caution and

observe directions given by the patrol launch.

2.25 The tidal currents in the vicinity of Kap Shui Mun are strong,

and at the sides of the channels cause eddies that are of

sufficient strength to make navigation of small craft difficult.

Tai Yue Shan

2.26 Tai Yue Shan (Lantau Island) (22°16'N., 113°57'E.)

is the largest of the islands in Hong Kong and extends NE to

SW between the W side of Sai Pok Liu Hoi Hap (West Lamma

Channel), and the E side of the outer Zhujiang Kou. The island

is rather barren and rugged, with numerous peaks in excess of

250m high. The summit of Tai Yue Shan, in the S central part,

is Lantau Peak, which rises to a height of 935m. Fishermen

frequent the many bays and inlets along the jagged coastline of

Tai Yue Shan as well as the islands off its shores.

2.26 The NE face of Tai Yue Shan forms the W side of Kap Shui

Mun, previously described in paragraph 2.24. The coves

indenting the E coast, which is about 8 miles long, have depths

of generally less than 5.5m. Depths of less than 5.5m also

extend S from the NE end of the island to the N side of Hei

Ling Chau and Chau Kung Island.

2.26 An islet and several rocks, one of which dries and another

sunken, encumber the very shoal channel between the NW end

of Peng Chau and Tai Yue Shan.

2.26 A submarine power cable is laid from the NW point of Hei

Liug Chau leading NW to Lantau.

2.26 A lighted buoy is moored close offshore on the S side of

Ngan Kwon Wan, about 0.8 mile NW from Castle Rock

(22°15'N., 114°01'E.).

2.26 A fresh water pipeline stretches from the NE entrance point

of Ngan Kwang Wan to Hei Ling Chau, to Chau Kung, to Peng

Chau, and then W to Lantau.

2.26 The SE extremity of the island lies 0.5 mile off the N end of

Cheung Chau Island. The channel between Cheung Chau

Island and Tai Yue Shan has depths of 3m in the fairway. 

2.27 Adamasta Rock (22°13.5'N., 114°01.2'E.) is marked

by a lighted beacon. The rock dries 1.2m and lies in the

separation zone at the NE end of the channel. Adamasta NW

Lighted Buoy and Adamasta SE Lighted Buoy mark the extent

of the shoal water surrounding the rock. There is a depth of

3.9m lying 0.2 mile WNW and a 5.5m depth lying 0.5 mile NE

of the rock.

2.27 Submarine cables, including a power cable and a water

pipeline, are laid across Adamasta Channel. Southeast Lantau

Lighted Buoy is moored at the SW end of the channel.

Area Location

Waiting Area 1 0.8 mile WSW of Ha Pang Light 

and N of the deep water channel

Waiting Area 2 1.25 miles SW of Ha Pang Light 

and S of the deep water channel.

Waiting Area 3 0.4 mile E of Hoi Mei Wan Light.

Waiting Area 4

0.5 mile E of Tang Lung Chau and 

between Kap Shui Mun and Ma 

Wan Fairway.
36 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.27 The S side of the island is indented by two shoal bights

separated by a hilly promontory. The E side of the E bight is

formed by a rugged peninsula which extends to the SE

extremity of the island.

2.27 Rocky Islet, 29m high, lies 0.8 mile E of the W entrance

point of the E bight. Mid Rocks, which dry 1.2m, lie about 1

mile NE of Rocky Islet.

2.27 The cliff at the SW extremity of Tai Yue Shan, from which a

light is shown, is whitewashed for ease of identification.

Between the SW extremity of Tai Yue Shan and Peaked Hill,

a small islet connected to Tai Yue Shan by a sandspit, about 1.2

miles N, with depths of less than 5.5m extends over 0.3 mile

offshore. A 1m rock lies about 1 mile NNW of Peaked Hill.

2.27 Two shallow coves indent the island between Peaked Hill

and Bluff Point about 2.5 miles to the NNE. Near the S end of

Bluff Point there is a conspicuous police station and flagstaff.

A pier about 52m long with a depth of 2.7 m to 3m along its

inboard side extends SW from the shore near the flagstaff.

2.27 Supplementary storm signals are shown from the police

station when local signals are displayed in Victoria Harbor.

2.27 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks lie 1.8 miles ESE, 2 miles

NNW, and 4 miles N, respectively, of Bluff Point.

2.28 The Soko Islands (22°10'N., 113°55'E.) are a group

of islands and rocks located toward the S end of a shoal with

depths of less than 9.2m that extends 3.5 miles S from the S

central part of Tai Yue Shan.

2.28 Tai A Chau, the southwesternmost of the group, rises steeply

to 153m. A rock, that dries 1.5m, lies about 0.2 mile N of the N

end of the island and an islet, 40m high, with a rock off its S

end, lies about 1 mile ESE of Tai A Chau Light.

2.28 Siu A Chau, 122m high and the northernmost of the group,

lies about 0.5 mile N of Tai A Chau. A shoal with depths of

less than 5.5m, extends about 2 miles W from the W side of Siu

A Chau. Four rocky islets, the highest 36m high, lie between

the W ends of Siu A Chau and Tai A Chau. 

2.28 Between Bluff Point and a small projecting point that forms

the NW extremity of Tai Yue Shan 3.2 miles NE, the coast is

indented by a shoal irregular bight.

Zhujiang Kou—North of Tai Yue Shan

2.29 Chi Shuimen is the fairway between Urmston Road

and Kap Shui Mun which is bordered on the N by the China

mainland and on the S by Tai Yue Shan and the islands off its N

coast. The channel is part of the Zhujiang Kou and more than 1

mile wide with depths in excess of 12.5m in mid-channel.

2.29 Kwai Shek (22°21'N., 114°03'E.), at the W side of the N end

of Kap Shui Mun, is the northernmost point of Tai Yue Shan.

The coast, for about 1 mile SW of this point, is indented by two

small bays separated by a narrow peninsula to the E of which is

a conspicuous red cliff, 88m high. Immediately SW of these

bays is a bight, at the W entrance of which lies Lu Keng Island.

This island separates the bight from another small bay to the

W.

2.29 Sui Mo To (East Brother) is an islet, 59m high, located 2.2

miles W of Lu Keng Island. There are depths of less than 5.5m

within about 0.4 mile of the W and E sides of this islet. Tai Mo

To (West Brother), an islet 65m high, lies 1 mile SW of Sui Mo

To and has depths of less than 5.5m extending 0.6 mile W, 0.1

mile N, and 0.4 mile E of its shores. Both islands provide good

radar returns at 13 miles.

2.29 Reef Islet, 9m high, lies 0.3 mile S of Sui Mo To and has a

bank with a depth of 2.7m extending over 91m E.

2.30 Chek Lap Kok Island (Chu Lu Kok Island)

(22°19'N., 113°56'E.) lies with Red Point, its N extremity, 1.2

miles WSW of Tai Mo To. The island is barren, 124m high,

about 1 mile wide at its greatest breadth and extends 2.1 miles

S from Red Point to within 0.3 mile of the entrance to Tung

Chau Bay on Tai Yue Shan. Red Point has a remarkable rocky

appearance.

2.30 Anchorage can be taken in the fairway E of Red Point and S

of Reef Island, in depths of 10 to 15m.

2.30 The 5m curve extends ESE from Red Point nearly to Tai Yue

Shan, leaving shoal depths in the bay enclosed by Chek Lap

Kok Island and the NW coast of the larger island.

2.30 Sha Chau (22°21'N., 113°53'E.), 53m high, lies to the SE of

a group of small islands and drying and submerged rocks

which form the SW limit of Urmston Road. Lung Kwu Chau,

marked by a light on its NW extremity, is two rocky islets

connected by a drying spit that lies about 1.5 miles N of Sha

Chau at the NW of this group of islets, on rocks. White Rock,

Tree Islet, and Dulley Rock, about 1.5 miles SW of the light on

Tung Kwo, mark the W limits of these dangers.

2.30 The NW coast of Tai Yue Shan from Lu Keng for about 6

miles WSW to Tung Chung Bay is steep. Between this bay and

the NW point of the island is an islet 46m high, about 1 mile

offshore.

2.30 Caution.—The actual depths across the bank between Sha

Chau and Chu Lu Kok Island have not been verified. Less

water than charted has been reported (1995) NW of Lung Kwu

Chau.

2.30 A height restricted area has been established in the vicinity

of the Tung Chung bridges, with a maximum permitted vertical

clearance of 8m.

2.30 Restricted areas, designated 1 through 8, have been

established around Chek Lap Kok Airport (22°18.5'N.,

113°55.0'E.), Lung Kwu Chau (22°18.5'N., 113°53.0'E.), and

Siu Mo To (22°20.2'N., 113°58.9'E.). Vessels are prohibited

from entering or passing through areas 1 through 4 without the

permission of the Director of Marine. Vessels with air drafts

greater than 15m and 30m are prohibited from entering or

remaining in areas 5 or 6 and 7 or 8, respectively, without the

permission of the Director of Marine. The areas are marked by

buoys and lights and are best seen on the chart.

2.31 Between Brothers Point (22°21'N., 114°01'E.) and

Black Point, the mainland coast trends W about 4.5 miles to

Mong Hau Shek (Pillar Point), then 3.2 miles NW to Black

Point. Tai Lam Chung and another small bay indent the shore

to the W of Brothers Point and about 2 miles further W is

Tsing Shan Wan.

2.31 A tank and a white building from which storm signals are

displayed stand on the W shore of Tai Lam Chung, from which

a jetty projects. The jetty has a length of 40m and alongside

depths of 4.9m. A submarine cable extends from the shores of

the bay to Tai Yue Shan; the cable landing is marked by

beacons. About 1 mile N of the bay, two conspicuous chimneys

stand near a wharf with alongside depths of 6.1m.
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 37

Pub. 161

2.31 Anchorage.—Tuen Mun Immigration Anchorage, with

depths of 4.8 to 7m and a mooring buoy at the NW corner, lies

1.5 miles ESE of Mong Hau Shek. The anchorage is for the

clearance of river trade vessels operating between Pearl River

Delta ports and Hong Kong.

2.31 Tsing Shan Wan (Castle Peak Bay) is 2.5 miles across its

mouth from Mong Hau Shek to the opposite shore. Pak Kok

Point, on which stands an obelisk, lies 1 mile ENE of Mong

Hau Shek. This shallow bay is fronted by a bank with a depth

of 5.8m; two rocks are charted off the bay’s E shore. A light

marking a sewer outfall lies 0.1 mile SSE of Pak Kok Point.

2.31 An offshore jetty is under construction (2006) about 1 mile

SW of Pillar Point. 

2.31 The coast trends SE from Tsing Shan Wan to Pillar Point,

then NW to Black Point. The coast is reef-fringed in places,

with depths of less than 5.5m extending up to 0.7 mile off the

shore N of Tap Shek Kok (22°23'N., 113°55'E.).

2.31 A power plant and cement plant stand about 1.5 miles NE of

Pillar Point, and are approachable through a marked channel

dredged to a depth of 18.5m.

2.31 There are two conspicuous chimneys in the area; the NW

chimney has an elevation of 220m and the SE chimney an

elevation of 255m.

2.31 Urmston Road is the area between the latter coast and Tung

Kwu. It affords anchorage for vessels proceeding upriver, but

the tidal currents are strong. 

2.31 Anchorage is available in the charted area W of Black Point,

in charted depths of 11.2 to 17.4m, sand. Depths shoal rapidly

W of the anchorage; a wreck is charted about 0.2 mile W of the

anchorage’s W boundary.

Zhujiang and Zhujiang Kou

2.32 The Zhujiang Kou (Zhujiang Estuary) generally

encompasses the area between Tuwu Chio (22°05'N.,

113°33'E.) on the W, the SW extremity of Tai Yue Shan on the

E, and the numerous islands fronting the coast to the S,

including Wanshan Quindao (Wanshan Ch’un-tao). The two

main channels leading to the Zhujiang through the estuary are

Lantau Channel from the E, and Tan-hsi Shui-tao from the SW.

The Portuguese province of Macau lies on the NW side of the

estuary on the China mainland. The major Chinese ports within

the Zhujiang are Huangpu and Guangzhou, which lie 60 and 77

miles, respectively, upriver from Macau.

2.32 Dachan Donghangdao fairway (22°31'N., 113°51'E.) has a

least depth of 15m and a navigable width of 195m. 

2.32 Shenzhen Western Channel (22°28'N., 113°51'E.) has a least

depth of 15m and a minimum navigable width of 210m. 

2.32 Pilotage.—Pilotage for the Zhujiang (Pearl River) is

compulsory and vessels are required to send their ETA 24

hours and 12 hours prior to arrival. Pilots for both Zhujiang and

Macau board 1.7 miles W of Guishan Dao (paragraph 2.34),

where the quarantine anchorage area is centered. Chinese

customs, immigration, health, and other port officials usually

board the vessel with the pilot.

2.32 Cargo activities are carried out at the quarantine anchorage.

The depths are 9m and 15m with good holding ground, mud.

Sichi Yan, a rock, awash, lies 2.3 miles W of Guishan Light.

2.32 Regulations.—Vessels are required to obtain permission of

the proper authorities well in advance to enter the People’s

Republic of China. Chinese authorities prohibit foreign vessels

navigating, anchoring, or fishing within territorial claimed

waters.

2.32 Directions.—Vessels entering Zhujiang and Macau should

follow the directions given below: 

1. Vessels sailing from Hong Kong to Zhujiang may

follow a route through West Lamma Channel to a position

22°08'44''N, 113°55'30''E, then proceed through Lantau

Channel, as safe navigation permits, on a course of 295° to

arrive at 22°12'04''N, 113°47'41''E. Steer 204° to

22°10'36''N, 113°47'00''E and then S to the Quarantine

Anchorage. In 1989, it was reported that vessels could pass S

of Guishan Dao, thus avoiding the shoal water extending

NW from Niutou Dao. 

2. When departing Macau or Zhujiang Kou, the courses

listed above should be followed in their reverse order.

However, the directions given above are subject to change

and any variation or changes are directed by the local

authorities and broadcast by radio.

2.32 Caution.—Vessels should have little difficulty entering the

estuary by day, however, in thick weather caution is necessary

because the off-lying islands in the approaches are steep-to and

soundings give insufficient warning.

2.32 Fish stakes have been established throughout the Zhujiang

Kou and the Zhujiang (Pearl River) and must be avoided.

Additionally, the channels, aids, and depths in the river are

constantly changing. Therefore, excessive reliance should not

be placed upon the charted depths or features in this area.

2.32 No vessel should enter any of the channels, creeks, or

tributaries of the Tan Jiang, Xijiang, and Zhujiang without a

pilot. Permission to enter these waters must be obtained from

the government of the People’s Republic of China.

2.32 In the narrow channels, creeks, and tributaries of the Tan

Jiang, Xijiang, and Zhujiang vessels should proceed at such a

speed that the waves caused by their motion through the water

do not damage the river banks and shore installations. This is

especially true in passing the numerous villages on both sides

of the channels. Speed should be reduced when passing tows

and heavily loaded junks. A careful lookout must be kept for

tows and junks hauling out from the river banks or coming out

from the various tributaries or reaches.

2.32 Care must be taken in approaching the river banks because

of a number of small groins extending out. Barriers have been

built in some places, leaving only a narrow navigable channel.

2.32 Overhead telegraph cables, at varying heights above the level

of the river, span the narrow channels, creeks, and tributaries.

They are erected or removed without notice.

2.32 Reports indicate that vessels anchoring or transiting areas

claimed by the People’s Republic of China without prior

permission, and/or outside of the recommended routes risk

seizure and detention.

2.32 A restricted area has been established and is bounded by

lines joining the following positions:

a. 22°25'N, 113°49'E.

b. 22°23'N, 113°50'E.

c. 22°23'N, 113°51'E.

d. 22°25'N, 113°51'E.

2.32 Foreign vessels are prohibited inside the line connecting the

islands of Xiaowanshan Dao, Dawanshan Dao, Jiapeng Liedao,

and Dangan Liedao.
38 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.33 Wanshan Quindao is the southernmost group of the

numerous islands contained within Zhujiang Kou.

2.33 Dawanshan Dao (21°56'N., 113°43'E.), the outermost of

Wanshan Quindao, is steep, bold, and rocky and features a

conspicuous dome-shaped mountain in its NW part that rises to

447m. At the SW end of the island is a small inlet known as

Wanshan Wan. 

2.33 Aspect.—Xiowanshan Dao, with several rocks lying off its

shores, rises to 254m WNW of Dawanshan Dao. A rock with a

depth of 1.8m lies about 0.7 mile NW of the island’s SW end.

Yamu Pai, a steep-to rock which dries 1.8m, lies 0.5 mile N of

the island’s NE end. Xiaoputai, a small islet, together with two

other islets form the W extension of Wanshan Quindao.

Xiaoputai, 58m high, lies 5 miles NW of Dawanshan Dao. A

racon transmits from Xiaoputai.

2.33 Huangmao Dao lies to the E of Xiaoputai and features a

peaked hill rising to 99m. Bai Pai, an islet, lies 0.4 mile off the

island’s W side, with a drying rock close SE of it. Across a

narrow channel to the E of Huangmao Dao lie two islands

known as Dalie Dao and Xiaolie Dao, which are themselves

separated by a narrow foul channel. 

2.33 A drying rock lies 0.2 mile N of the N island, and a 4m patch

lies 0.8 mile N of the same island.

2.33 Dongao Dao, 172m high, lies 1.2 miles ESE of Huangmao

Dao. Nan-Sha Wan indents the SW side of the island, and

affords shelter in Northeast Monsoon, but rocks with depths of

less than 2m lie in the approaches to the bay. A dangerous

wreck lies close W of Dongao Dao. Tung-ao Wan, a rockfringed inlet, indents the NE side of the island. A rock with a

depth less than 1.8m and another with a depth of 5.5m lies in

the entrance to the bay. A rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lies 0.8

mile E of the NE extremity of the island.

2.33 Bei Yan, awash and steep-to, lies 0.3 mile NE of the same

point.

2.33 Pilotage.—The pilot boarding area lies N of Dawanshan

Dao in position 21°59'N, 113°43'E. 

2.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in 22m, mud, can be taken by

small vessels off the entrance to the inlet.

2.34 Baili Dao (21°59'N., 113°45'E.) lies 1.5 miles SE of

Dongao Dao, and rises to a height of 302m, with a conspicuous

conical hill, 225m high, on its NE portion. The hills on the S

part of the island are studded with black rocks. Baili Dao is

rock-fringed in places and indented with several small inlets.

About 2 miles N of the island lies Shagou Pai, which breaks,

and about 0.5 mile N of the island’s NW extremity lies Clio

Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m. House Islet, 33m high,

and close E of which lies a sunken rock, lies 0.2 mile N of Baili

Dao’s N end.

2.34 Gui Zhou, 86m high, lies 0.75 mile E of Baili Dao, and has a

rock, which dries 1m, close off its NW extremity.

2.34 Heng Zhou, 117m high, and Zhu Zhou, 175m high, lie 2 and

3 miles, respectively, E of Baili Dao. Zhu Zhou, which is

marked by a light, is indented on its N side by a small inlet, and

has a steep, rocky islet, 54m high, known as Chou-Tzu, off its

SE side. 

2.34 Anchorage, in a depth of 19m, may be taken in the S part of

the channel between Heng Zhou and Zhu Zhou, with the light

on Zhu Zhou bearing 095°, and about 0.1 mile distant.

2.34 Dongtou Shi, a rock which dries 1.8m, lies about 3.2 miles N

of Heng Zhou. Sanya Pai, a group of rocks marked by a light,

lies 5 miles N of the same island. Xiaozhizhu Pao and

Dazhizhu Dao (22°07'N., 113°53'E.) are two islands at the SE

end of Dahao Shuidao, which stretches 6.5 miles NW of the

latter named island. Xiaozhizhu Dao is 109m high while

Dazhizhu Dao is 265m high, with rocks, awash, off its E and

SW extremities.

2.34 Guishan Dao (22°08'N., 113°49'E.), 234m high and

inhabited, lies 2 miles WNW of Xiaozhizhu Dao. A light is

shown from the islet, and a signal station is situated on the

island’s summit. A pilot station for Zhujiang Kou pilots is

situated on the W side of Guishan Dao.

2.34 Caution.—A prohibited anchorage area lies S of the island

and is best seen on the chart.

2.35 Zhenxiangwei, 64m high, lies 0.75 mile off Guishan

Dao’s SE side, several dangers encumber the channel between

them. The channel between Zhenxiangwei and Xiaozhizhu

Dao is clear of dangers, and is sometimes used by vessels

entering Lantau Channel from the S.

2.35 Zhongxin Zhou, 133m high, lies close N of Guishan Dao,

with depths of less than 5.5m between them.

2.35 Niutou Dao (22°10'N., 113°48'E.), 141m high at its N end,

lies NW of Zhongxin Zhou and is separated from it by Niutou

Men, a passage about 0.2 mile wide. A rock with a depth of 5m

lies about 0.2 mile off Niutou Dao’s SW side, encumbering the

W entrance of the passage. A 64m high islet lies close off the

island’s NW extremity.

2.35 A light is shown from the NW extremity of Niutou Dao.

2.35 Caution.—A dangerous wreck lies in the passage between

Zhongxin Zhou and Niutou Dao.

2.36 Lantau Channel (Tai Yue Hoi Hop) leads into the

central part of the Zhujiang Kou between the Soko Islands and

Tai Yue Shan on the NE and Dazhizhu Dao to the SW. The

channel is nearly 2 miles wide at its narrowest portion, deep,

and clear of dangers.

2.36 Daxi Shuidao is a channel which leads into Zhujiang Kou,

and leads off the W side of the estuary. The E side of the

channel is the deepest, with shoaling reported on the W side.

The fairway has charted depths of 7m, and is entered between

Dawo Shan (22°05'N., 113°33'E.) on the NW, and Xiaoputai

on the SE.

2.36 The islands on the W side of the channel are described with

the W side of the estuary.

2.36 Datou Zhou (22°06'N., 113°42'E.) lies 5.5 miles NE of

Xiaoputai. Dalu Dao, 97m high with a prominent rock on its

summit, is a rocky islet lying 0.5 mile N of Datou Zhou. Dalu

Pai, with a depth of less than 0.9m close NE, is an exposed

rock 15m high, lying 0.8 mile NNE of Dalu Dao. Jishiling Pai,

a 14m high islet, lies 0.2 mile E of Dalu Pai.

2.36 Anchorages have been established 2 miles NW and 3 miles

SE from Datou Zhou.

2.36 Sanjiaoshan Dao, 150m high and rugged, with a 1.5m rock

close off its S side, lies 0.8 mile N of the islet of Xilu. Depths

of less than 5.5m extend up to 0.8 mile N of the island. Qing

Zhou, 104m high and the northernmost island of the group, lies

0.8 mile NNE of Sanjiaoshun Dao.

2.36 Chitan (22°07'N., 113°46'E.), 72m high, with a rock close

off its NW side, lies 3.2 miles E of Dalu Dao.
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 39

Pub. 161

2.37 Sichi Yan (Four Feet Rock) (22°09'N., 113°46'E.), a

rock awash, lies 1.5 miles NNE of Chitan. This obstruction lies

quite near the pilot, quarantine, and cargo handling anchorages.

Another foul area exists 0.7 mile E of Sichi Yan.

2.37 The tidal currents are not very strong around the outer

islands, but are variable and stronger in the channels leading

into the Zhujiang Kou.

2.37 In Daxi Shuidao, the ebb current sets strongly S along the

islands on the E side of the channel. The flood current sets

mostly N to NW.

2.37 In Lantau Channel, the ebb current sets SE through the

fairway. Strong eddies form, particularly in July and August,

when the current attains a spring rate of 4.5 knots. The flood

current sets NW, following the axis of the channel.

2.37 Freshets flowing out of the Zhujiang through Daxi Shuidao

have an almost constant set from Dahengqin Dao (22°06'N.,

113°33'E.), cross-channel, then along the islands to the W. The

currents at this time attain a rate of 1 or 2 knots, particularly

with E winds. At times there may seem to be a surface current

setting to the E, but during freshets the undercurrent continues

to set to the W.

2.37 The W side of the outer estuary is very shoal between Tu-Wu

Chiao and Tung-Ku Chiao, about 18 miles N. Depths of less

than 5.5m extend over 4.5 miles offshore, and probably farther.

Reports indicate that this area has shoaled so much that charted

depths of the area may be inaccurate. 

2.37 The islands of Ilha de Tapia and Ilha da Coloane lie in the S

approach to that harbor, on the W side of Zhujiang Kou. 

2.37 Ilha de Coloane (22°08'N., 113°34'E.), 171m high on its

SW part, is the southernmost island of the province. A

causeway connects the island with Ilha de Taipa, and shows

navigational lights from its shores. 

2.37 Ilha de Taipa (22°10'N., 113°33'E.), with an 11m high rock

of its E extremity, lies 1 mile N of Ilha de Coloane. The island

rises to a height of 158m and is joined to Macau by a bridge

and causeway. 

2.37 The channel W of these islands consists of drying mud flats

which are navigable by small craft only. Ilha de Taipa and

Xiaohengqin Dao to the W form the S side of a boat passage

which connects the port of Macau and the Xijiang.

2.37 There is a deepwater port in the vicinity of Ponta de Ka-Ho

comprising a 40m long container wharf and an oil terminal for

tankers up to 1,200 dwt.

Macau Harbor (22°11'N., 113°34'E.)

World Port Index No. 57810

2.38 Macau Harbor and the city of Macau occupy the

peninsula at the SE end of Aomen Dao (Macau Island). The

port consists of two parts; the outer port is protected by

breakwaters on the E side of the peninsula and the inner port on

the W side of the peninsula is sheltered on the W by La-pa

Shan. The port is frequented by small vessels, ferry boats, and

local craft, while larger cargo vessels work freight from the

anchorages rather than enter the harbor.

2.38 Tides—Currents.—The mean tidal range is about 1.8m.

The tidal currents set strongly across the harbor entrance.

Macau Tower and the Sai Van Bridge (rear)
40 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.38 Depths—Limitations.—The 5m curve lies about 3 miles E

of, and the 2m curve lies in close proximity to, the outer ends

of the breakwaters. The channel to the outer harbor which

leads between the breakwaters has a dredged depth of 4.4m on

the range line. The channel leading S of the W breakwater and

around the peninsula to the inner harbor is dredged to a depth

of 3.5m up to the piers. The latter channel leads under a bridge

in the causeway between Macau and Ilha de Taipa which has a

vertical clearance of 30m.

2.38 Aspect.—Fortaleza da Guia, a prominent fort, stands on the

summit of a hill overlooking the city of Macau from the E. A

light, a signal station, and several yellow buildings are situated

at or near the fort. Four radio masts, three of which are painted

red and white, stand on a hill about 0.5 mile NE of the fort.

2.38 At the observatory, situated about 0.1 mile SW of the fort, is

a luminous time signal. The signal, consisting of 37 lights on a

post, indicates the exact local times of 2400, 0300, 0600, and

2100 by extinguishing the lights. The signal commences 4.5

minutes before the time.

2.38 The channels to both the inner and outer ports are marked by

lighted and unlighted beacons and buoys. Range lights, aligned

305°, mark the dredged channel to the outer harbor.

2.38 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, and the pilot boards at

the Pilotage, Quarantine, Loading, or Unloading Anchorage in

Zhujiang Kou. Vessels should not attempt to proceed past the

pilot station without a pilot on board due to the regulations in

force in this area by Chinese authorities.

2.38 Signals.—Vessels using the Macau channels by day shall

carry at the mast, two black spheres vertically arranged, and by

night two green lights on the yard arm, similarly arranged.

2.38 The local storm signal code used in Macau is the same as

used in Hong Kong.

2.38 Anchorage.—Anchorage in the fairways of the port is

prohibited. Large vessels may anchor, in a depth of 7.3m, mud,

in a position 7 to 8 miles SE of Fortaleza da Guia or on the

main entrance range 1.5 to 2 miles from the breakwater heads,

in depths of 4.1m and 4.2m, respectively. Cargo is worked at

these anchorages by lighters.

2.38 Directions.—If proceeding from Hong Kong to Macau, or

vice-versa, vessels should use the appropriate Traffic

Separation Scheme, as seen on the chart.

2.38 Caution.—Mariners are advised to obtain the latest and

largest scale charts of the area before proceeding to Macau.

However, even though these charts may be held, they may not

reflect the correct depths throughout the area due to the

continuous river estuary silting and lack of reports containing

corrective information.

2.39 Shekou (Chiwan) Harbor (22°28'N., 113°52'E.)

(World Port Index No. 57777) is situated on the E side of

Zhujiang Kou and SW of the Nantou Peninsula. Shekou, once

a fishing village has now developed into a modern deep water

port. The port can be regarded as an important gateway of sea

transportation in S China.

2.39 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel has a depth

of 12.5m. The maximum allowable draft for the port is 11m.

Vessels up to 70,000 dwt can be accommodated. There are six

berths with depths of 7 to 11m. The longest berth is Supply

Boat Jetty, 520m in length, with a depth of 7m alongside. 

2.39 Kaifeng Container Terminal has two berths, with a combined

length of 610m and an alongside depth of 14m.

2.39 The Chiwan Petroleum Service Base has seven berths, with a

total of 515m of berthing space and alongside depths of 6.6 to

7.1m.

2.39 Mawan, a port for general cargo is situated close NW of

Chiwan Gang. Vessels up to 50,000 dwt can be accommodated.

There is a 230m long berth, with a depth of 11.4m alongside,

for vessels up to 30,000 dwt. 

2.39 Shekou Gang, a general cargo port and offshore oil support

base, is situated 1.2 miles ENE of Mawan. Vessels up to 70,000

dwt can be accommodated. Shekou has six berths, with depths

alongside of 6 to 11m. Berth No. 3, the longest and deepest

berth, is 180m long and has an alongside depth of 11m. 

2.39 Aspect.—A lighted range, in line bearing 305°, leads into

the harbor. 

2.39 An automatic identification system (AIS) transponder is

situated on Buoy K1 (22°26'N., 113°53'E.). 

Pilotage.—Pilotage, available during daylight only, is

compulsory for foreign vessels entering and leaving port. The

pilot boards in position 22°23.7'N, 113°53.7'E. Pilotage is

provided by Hong Kong and Shekou Pilots. Vessels should

send their ETA 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance of

their arrival at the port. Chiwan Harbor is equipped with VHF

facilities and a coastal radio station. In addition, a dispatch

network has been set up to provide wireless telephone and

telex services to offshore drilling rigs.

2.39 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in designated

areas, with depths of 7 to 13m, mud and sand, good holding

ground. The designated anchorage areas lie S of Chiwan and

are best seen on the chart.

2.39 Caution.—Lesser depths than charted have been reported

(1996) in the S end of the designated anchorage area.

2.39 A wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, lies in position

22°26'19"N, 113°52'35"E. 

2.40 Between Macau and Tonggu Jiao point about 7.5

miles N, the coast is indented by two small shoal bays.

Xiangzhou Wan, the southernmost of the two has a group of

islands off its S entrance point. Taipei (White Rock), the

outermost danger fronting the bay, lies 2 miles NE of the bay’s

S entrance point, and is surrounded by drying rocks. Yeli Shan,

a small islet, 71m high, lies 0.8 mile WSW of Bai Pai. A drying

rock lies 0.7 mile W of B

2.40 Several small islets lie within 0.8 mile of Changkeng Ding

(22°19'N., 113°36'E.), the point separating the two bays. The N

bay is shoal.

2.40 Tonggu Jiao (22°23'N., 113°37'E.) is a rock-fringed point at

the N extremity of the N bay. A 1.5m patch lies 0.5 mile SSE

of the point. An islet and a drying rock located on a bank with

depths of 1.5m lie about 0.5 mile NNW of the point.

2.40 The inner part of the estuary extends about 22 miles N of a

line connecting Lan Kok Tsui (Black Point) on the E, and

Tonggu Jiao on the W. The estuary above this point is up to 15

miles wide, constricting to the N. This body of water is

encumbered with numerous shoals and banks which dry, and

leave only narrow, shoal, and shifting channels toward the

center of the estuary. Although small shallow-draft vessels

navigate the maze of rivers and channels connecting the
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 41

Pub. 161

Zhujiang and Xijiang to the W, ocean-going vessels are

confined to the reaches of the river.

2.40 Tides—Currents.—During the Northeast Monsoon, the

night tide will be about 0.2m higher than the day tide; during

the Southwest Monsoon the reverse is found.

2.40 Winds from the NW have been known to reduce depths by as

much as 0.6m, while fresh SE winds have increased depths by

the same amount.

2.40 The level of water in the estuary is likely to be highest in

summer, especially after a heavy rainfall.

2.40 Directions.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels proceeding

N of the Pilot, Quarantine, Loading, or Unloading Anchorage.

Vessels following the buoyed channel should navigate the

lower reaches with particular caution as fishing stakes,

dangerous wrecks, and other obstructions are charted in the

reach between a point W of Peaked Hill, and Neilingding Dao.

North of Neilingding Dao, the channel has a charted width of

about 0.4 mile to a point 5.2 miles SSE of Sanban Zhou

(22°43'N., 113°39'E.); then the channel widens.

2.40 Caution.—The lower reaches of the Zhujiang and Huangpu

port areas contain military and naval installations.

2.41 Neilingding Dao (22°25'N., 113°48'E.) rises to a

height of 339m in a conical peak. The E side of the island

shows wooded slopes while the W side has a customs station

situated on it. Several buildings are situated on the island. A

light is shown from the NW point of Neilingding Dao. Nan

Shazui, with depths of less than 1m, extends S of the island,

while Fanshi Qiantan, with depths of 2.5m, extends up to 19

miles N of the island.

Inner Zhujiang Kou—West Side

2.42 Between Tonggu Jiao and Dajiaotou Dao, 22 miles N,

the estuary is encumbered by drying banks extending from the

shore and the islands that front them. Several channels

available to shallow-draft vessels only, lead through the banks,

W to the Xijiang and N to Guangzhou. Junk Fleet Entrance and

Lunghsueh Hai-Kou (Lankit Entrance) are the most transited.

2.42 Qi’ao Dao (22°25'N., 113°38'E.), an island rising to 184m at

its SW end, lies 1 mile N of Tonggu Jiao. A light is shown from

the island, and the fishing stakes off its NE side are usually

marked by lights. Several rocks fringe the S side of the island.

2.42 Jinxingdan is the channel between the island and Tonggu

Jiao. Small vessels may find anchorage, in a depth of 9.2m,

mud, about 1.5 miles NW of Tonggu Jiao, but depths at the

anchorage may be less than charted. Half-Tide Rock, awash

and fringed with sunken rocks, lies 2.2 miles NW of Tonggu

Jiao, and an islet surrounded by foul ground, lies 0.8 mile NW

of the point. A shoal with a dangerous sunken rock at its NW

end, extends about 1 mile WNW of the islet.

2.43 Junk Fleet Entrance (22°24'N., 113°41'E.), lying off

the NE extremity of Qi’ao Dao, is a narrow, shoal, and

unmarked channel leading through the mud banks fronting the

W side of the estuary. From Qi’ao Dao the channel leads about

12 miles NNW to the entrance of Tan-Chou Shui-Tao, about 2

miles NE of Hengmen Dao, and is joined from the W by

Hengmen, another tributary, at the same point.

2.43 Dajian Feng, 301m high, stands on the mainland about 1.2

miles WSW of Hengmen Dao. Hengmen Dao (22°34'N.,

113°35'E.), 97m high, lies close NE of Dajian Feng. 

2.43 Longxue Dao (Lankit Island.) (22°42'N., 113°38'E.) is 61m

high near its SW extremity, where a small temple and some

trees stand. The island lies at the SE terminus of a drying bank

extending from several islands about 2.3 miles WNW of it. A

new harbor (2010), protected by breakwaters, is in progress. 

2.43 Shanban Zhou (22°43'N., 113°39'E.) two small islets

separated by a drying bank, lie 1.5 miles NE of Longxue Dao.

The SE islet, which resembles an overturned boat, shows a

light. Detached reefs lie up to 0.3 mile SE, E, and N of the N

islet. A drying bank extends up to 0.3 mile NW, and SSW of

the same island, off the island’s W shore.

2.43 Nansha (22°48'N., 113°35'E.), a new section of the

Guangzhou Port Complex, is located along the NE coast of

Dajiaotou Dao. The purpose of this expansion to the S is to

provide deeper water for ferry, container, coal, shipyard and

petro-chemical facilities. Considerable land reclamation and

construction (2005) are underway to convert several adjoining

islands in the Zhujiang into this major port and industrial zone.

2.43 Depths—Limitations.—The port can handle vessels up to

50,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 200m and maximum

draft of 10.5m. Phase 2 of this expansion, expected to be

completd in 2007, will allow for vessels up to 100,000 dwt.

2.43 Aspect.—To the N of the Humen Bridge are Shaluo Wanzui

Wharf (ferry), Nanwei Deepwater Wharf, Dongfa Wharf, and

Shichang Wharf. Yourong Chuangchang Wharf is used as a

shipyard; the Zhujiang Power Station has an L-shaped jetty.

2.43 To the S of Humen Bridge lies Lianhe Container Wharf.

When Phase 2 is completed, four more wharves will be

available.

2.43 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory; pilots board at the

Guangzhou and Huangpu Pilot Station.

2.43 Regulations.—See information about Guangzhou VTS

(paragraph 2.52) and Hong Kong VTS (paragraph 2.23).

2.43 Anchorage.—There are several anchorages, best seen on

chart, inside Humen Shuidao. 

2.43 Caution.—Due to the lack of current information, the shoal

nature of the channel, and the need for local knowledge as well

as the restrictions placed upon foreign vessels in Chinese

waters, vessels should not attempt any of the channels

mentioned above without prior permission and a pilot aboard.

Inner Zhujiang Kou—East Side

2.44 Lan Kok Tsui (Black Point) (22°25'N., 113°54'E.) on

the E side of the estuary, is the W extremity of a large, high

peninsula, rising to a height of about 138m. A dangerous

wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, lies in position 22°31'05"N,

113°48'56"E.

2.44 Hau Hoi Wan (22°28'N., 113°57'E.) is entered between Lan

Kok Tsui and Mawan Xiajiao, about 4 miles NNW. The bay is

mostly shoal and studded with fishing stakes. A bridge, with a

vertical clearance of 23m at its central span (22°28.5'N.,

113°57.4'E.), crosses the bay and is marked by lights. 

2.44 Dachan Wan (22°33'N., 113°53'E.), a shoal bay, indents the

mainland on the N side of the peninsula forming the N shore of

Hau Hoi Wan. Several islands lie off the mouth of the bay, the

largest being Dachan Dao, 121m high, and the farthest W

being Xiya, located about 6 miles NW of Mawan Xiojiao.
42 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

2.44 Huipeng Jiao (22°30'N., 113°50'E.), two islets close

together on a drying sandbank, lie 0.8 mile S of Dachan Dao.

The NW island is the higher of the two.

2.44 Dachan Dao, located 3.2 miles NW of Mawan Xiajiao, has a

signal station situated at the NW end of the island. Xiaochan

Dao lies 1.5 miles N of Dachan Dao, and is nearly connected to

it by a spit with depths of less than 1m.

2.44 Bai Shi (White Rock) and Fanshi Yu, 8m and 17m high,

respectively, are two exposed rocks lying close together, 4.5

miles WNW of Mawan Xiajiao. Both rocks lie on the E

extremity of Fanshi Qiantan (Fanshek Bank). This bank is over

21 miles in extent, about 4.5 miles wide at its widest part, and

has a least charted depth of 1m S of Neilingding Dao. Fanshi

Shuidao, the channel E of the bank, should only be attempted

by shallow-draft vessels possessing local knowledge.

2.44 Between the N entrance point of Ta-ch’en Wan and Ch’uan

Pi Chiao about 14 miles NW, the E side of the estuary is

fringed by a drying bank. Depths of less than 5.5m lie up to 5

miles offshore.

Zhujiang Entrance to Huangpu

2.45 The Zhujiang is navigable by ocean-going vessels to

Guangzhou (Canton), about 17 miles above Huangpu (Wampoa). The main channel was reportedly dredged to a depth of

8.5m as far as Huangpu and has a depth of 9m at HW. South

Channel and East Channel lead from Huangpu to Guangzhou.

South Channel is the main channel and has a depth of 6m at

HW. The channel is marked by beacons, buoys, and ranges, but

depths within it are subject to change, and several dangers lie

adjacent to it.

2.45 An extensive network of side channels permeate the

Zhujiang delta, used mainly by fishing craft, junks, and other

local traffic. Because of the restrictions placed on foreign

vessels in Chinese waters, the shallow nature of the fairways,

and the need for local knowledge, only the main fairways will

be considered.

2.45 The passage from pilot quarantine anchorage to Huangpu

covers 63 miles through seven major channels. Lingding

Shuidao (22°25'N., 113°45'E.) is the channel between Fanshi

Qiantan shoal and the banks on the W side of the estuary. The

channel has dredged depths of 10m and is marked by lighted

buoys. 

2.45 Lingding Shuidao has dredged depths of 15 to 16.5m in the

center of the channel between Mayou Shi Light Vessel

(22°16.6'N., 113°48.3'E.) and Nansha Gang. 

2.45 Tonggu Shuidao (22°20'N., 113°49'E.), a deeper and more

direct route to the Shenzhen ports, leads 8.5 miles NNE from

Lingding Shuidao from a point about 2.25 miles N of Mayou

Shi Light Vessel. The channel, marked by buoys, has a depth of

15.8m and a navigable width of 210m. 

2.45 Regulations.—Vessels entering and departing Shenzhen

Gang by Tonggu Shuidao must obtain prior approval of the

Shenzhen or Guanzhou VTS Centers at least 24 hours in

advance of arrival. See information about Guangzhou VTS

(paragraph 2.52). Vessels of 50,000 dwt and larger are

restricted to daylight transit. Vessels of 80,000 dwt or more

must arrange for tugs and a safety and security plan at least 72

hours in advance.

2.45 Shenzhen VTS is divided into two sections as follows:

1. Eastern Sector: The area between the coast and a

line connecting Tai Long Tsui (22°24.8'N., 114°24.3'E.) and

Heiyan Jiao (22°27.0'N., 114°30.1'E.). 

Eastern Sector VTS may be contacted on VHF channels

16, 68, and 74.

2. Western Sector: The area between the coast and the

following reporting lines:

a. the parallel of latitude of Lung Kwu Chau Light

(22°22.8'N).

b. the line connecting Lung Kwu Chau Light

(22°22.8'N., 113°52.6'E.) and Neilingding Dao

lightbeacon (22°25.0'N., 113°46.9'E.).

c. the meridian of longitude of Neilingding Dao

lightbeacon (22°25.0'N., 113°46.9'E.).

d. the parallel of latitude 22°31.2'N.

Western Sector VTS may be contacted on VHF channels

16 and 65; passenger vessels should report on VHF channel

69; cargo vessels should report via VHF channel 72.

2.45 Vessels entering port must report to the Shenzhen or

Guangzhou VTS Centers, respectively, prior to leaving the

Jiashan or Zhuzhou anchorages, and subsequently, when

transiting the cape area of Jiyi Jiao. Vessels departing port must

report when passing the “T17” (22°24.6'N., 113°51.1'E.)

lighted buoy in the Tonggu fairway.

2.45 Vessels of less than 5m draft, and vessels carrying bulk

liquid cargoes, should avoid entering Tonggu Shuidao, except

in an emergency. Fishing is prohibited in Tonggu Shuidao. 

2.45 Caution.—An obstruction is reported to lie in the N exit of

the channel at Urmston Road.

2.45 Chuanbi Shuidao (22°42'N., 113°41'E.) lies at the Zhujiang

entrance.

2.45 Humen Shuidao (22°46'N., 113°38'E.) is marked by lighted

buoys.

2.45 The port of Hunan (22°46'N., 113°40'E.) is a developing

port on the E side of the mouth of the Zhujiang River (Pearl

River). 

2.45 There are two multipurpose quays, with a combined length

of 678m, that can accommodate vessels of up to 20,000 dwt,

Work is in progress (2008) on the construction of berthing for

general cargo and container vessels of up to 50,000 dwt. 

2.45 Caution.—The Humen Bridge, with a vertical clearance of

60m, spans the channel in the vicinity of Jinsuo Pai (22°47'N.,

113°37'E.). 

2.46 Nizhau Shuidao (22°54'N., 113°34'E.) and

Lianhuashan Shuidao (22°58'N., 113°32'E.) channels are

marked by range lights and lighted buoys.

2.46 Caution.—A stranded wreck lies close W of the charted

track, about 0.8 mile W of the S extremity of La Sha.

2.46 Chisha Shuidao (23°02'N., 113°30'E.) extends 3 miles

upriver from Dong Jiang, a tributary that flows into Zhujiang

from NE, where Huangpuxingang is located. There are several

mooring buoys and anchorages. The channel has reportedly

been dredged to a depth of 8.5m.

2.46 Dahaozhou Shuidao (23°05'N., 113°28'E.) is marked by

leading lights and lighted buoys from 2 miles ESE of Huangpu.

This channel is the narrowest of all major ship channels, 70m

wide, and has a least depth of 7.8m. Loaded ships of 20,000 ton

can pass through this channel on a flood tide. However, a
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 43

Pub. 161

vessel requires a vertical clearance of 60m to pass under a

hanging power cable. The Huangpu Bridge, with a maximum

vertical clearance of 60m, crosses the channel at Dahao Zhou. 

2.47 Huangpuxingang (23°03'N., 113°30'E.) (World Port

Index No. 57825) is situated close NW of Dong Jiang creek

and the E bank of Zhujiang. Huangpuxingang is a new port

complex of Huangpu, situated 4.5 miles NW. This port

complex has a total quayage of 1,500m. 

2.47 Tides—Currents.—During the winter months of the

Northeast Monsoon, a high tide at night rises an additional

0.3m higher than a daytime high tide. During the Southwest

Monsoon, this occurrence reverses. During the Southwest

Monsoon, the rise of the river is visibly higher than during the

Northeast Monsoon by 0.3m.

2.47 Wind effect on the water level in the region is significant. A

fresh SE wind can increase the depth by 0.6m and decrease it

by an equal amount during NW wind. 

2.47 Tide gauges, showing the water level measured above the

LLWS, are established, as follows: 

1. Off Nizhou Shuidao (22°54'N., 113°34'E.).

2. Huangpu main wharf and dockyard.

3. At a jetty situated in position 23°04.5'N, 113°15.3'E.

(2 miles S of Guangzhou).

4. At a jetty situated 0.2 mile N of Guangzhou Harbor.

2.47 The flood current usually reaches a velocity of 2.5 to 3.5

knots, and the ebb current a velocity of 2.5 to 4.5 knots, but

may vary during freshets or drought conditions.

2.47 Depths—Limitations.—Wharf No. 1 through Wharf No. 8

can accommodate vessels between 20,000 and 35,000 tons, and

have depths of 11.9m alongside. Additional berths are under

construction close N of the wharves. Conspicuous silos stand

W of the berths. Facilities are available for the handling of bulk

solid, bulk liquid, break-bulk, and containerized cargoes.

2.47 A container and ro-ro terminal has two berths, with a total

length of 471m and depths of 12m alongside. The terminal can

accommodate vessels of up to 25,000 tons. 

2.47 Nansha Gang Container Wharf (22°39'N., 113°41'E.) has six

new berths (2009) with depths alongside of 11.9 to 15m. 

2.47 Tanker piers are situated 0.8 mile NW of the port area.

Facing the port at midstream, there are anchor berths and

several mooring buoys. 

2.47 Aspect.—Chuanbi Shuidao, at the N end of Zhujiang Kou is

the river entrance. From the river mouth, the fairway passes

between the anchorage berths situated off the E bank at the

river entrance, E of the islands in the lower reaches of the

fairway, and over several shoal areas via a channel

approximately 137m wide to the new port complex. The

channel widens considerably at this point, but narrows again

for vessels proceeding to Guangzhou. Huangpu port area is

entered by a short reach off the main channel, marked by range

lights.

2.47 Signals—IThe port signal station stands in position

23°03'48"N, 113°30'00"E.

2.47 Caution.—There have been extensive changes in the shoals

encumbering the river, the channels traversing it, and the aids

to navigation marking the channels. In addition, several sets of

power cables span the channel to Guangzhou from a point over

the Huangpu port area to Guangzhou itself. Local authorities

should be consulted for the latest information on channel

depths and vertical clearances before attempting passage to

Huangpu or Guangzhou.

2.48 Ch’uan-Pi Chiao (22°45'N., 113°40'E.), the S

extremity of Chueen-Pi Island, marks the S extremity of

Chuan-bi Shuidao. About 1 mile N of the point stands Tower

Hill, on which a signal station stands. Nearly 2.4 miles W of

Tower Hill lies Tai-Chiao Shan (Bower Point), on which stands

a fort. The point is backed by a hill, 49m high, about 0.5 mile

further W.

2.48 Anchorage.—In the Zhujiang, anchorages are used for

pilots embarking or disembarking, quarantine, awaiting tide or

for swinging a vessel around, or in the cases of draft restraint

or terminal congestion. Anchorages are used also for working

cargo. In addition to the anchorage W of Guishan Dao

(paragraph 2.34) in the Zhujiang estuary, there are anchorage

areas established in the river off Xiaohu Jiao (22°50'N.,

113°34'E.), Lianhuashan Shuidao (22°58'N., 113°32'E.), and

off Dahao Zhau.

2.48 The area off Shanban Zhou has 15 anchorage berths,

numbered Berth S1 through Berth S15, in depths of 9.5 and

15m, mud and sand. A rock, with a depth of 10.5m, lies near

the center of Berth S14. A dangerous wreck lies close SW of

anchor Berth S14 and Berth S15.

2.48 The area off Dahao Zhou has anchorage berths D1 through

D8 for handling dangerous cargo.

2.48 There are anchorages and mooring berths established around

and in the port area, in depths of 7 to 12m, sand and mud, with

swinging areas of 330m and 740m in diameter.

2.48 Permission to anchor must be obtained from the proper

authorities at least 24 hours in advance, but vessels seeking

typhoon shelter are permitted temporary anchorage with no

prior notice.

2.48 Caution.—An area extending 0.5 mile E, and 1 mile N and

S of Tai-Chiao Shan is reported to be prohibited to all merchant

and fishing vessels. 

2.48 Two islands named Shanghengdang and Xiahengdang lie 4.5

miles and 4.2 miles, respectively, N of Ch’uan-Pi Chiao. The

islands and various dangers extending from or lying off them

divide the river into two channels. Hu Men, the E channel, is

used by ocean-going vessels, while the W channel is used only

by local traffic. Foul ground, on which a small islet lies,

extends between the islands, up to 0.2 mile E, 0.3 mile N, and 3

miles SE of those islands. Jinsuo Pai, which shows a light, lies

0.2 mile SE of Shanghengdang, and is surrounded by foul

ground. A 6.5m patch and a rocky islet lie 0.2 mile SE and 0.3

mile S, respectively, of Jinsuo Pai.

2.49 Dahu Dao (22°50'N., 113°35'E.), 179m high, lies on

the SW side of the channel, about 2 miles N of Shanghengdang. The N end of the island rises to a remarkable rounded

mass of granite with sheer sides. A 3.7m patch lies 1 mile SE

of the island.

2.49 About 4.5 miles N of Dahu Dao the channel traverses a

heavily shoaled area where the fairways reduced to a width of

about 137m. The fairway meanders across the river channel for

about 15 miles to its terminus, 1 mile S of the Huangpu New

Terminal complex, and is marked by lighted beacons, range

lights, and buoys. 

2.49 Second Bar Pagoda (23°00'N., 113°30'E.), with Linfo Fort
44 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

close N of it, stands on a hill 108m high, on the W bank of the

river. Conspicuous silos stand 3.5 miles NNW of the pagoda.

Huangpu (Wampoa) (23°05'N., 113°25'E.)

World Port Index No. 57822

2.50 Huangpu is the major port in S China devoted to

foreign trade and is the largest transhipment terminal S of

Shanghai. It is situated about 10 miles E of Guangzhou. 

2.50 From 0.5 mile SSE of the N point on Dahaozhou, Chisha

Shuidao leads NW into Tiezhuang Shuidao and branches

NNW through Dahaozhou Shuidao into Huangpu Shuidao,

where the two channels are separated by four sand banks or flat

islands known as Hongsheng, Longchuan, Daji, and Diancao.

Huangpu Channel runs N of these and Tiezhuang channel runs

S. These channels meet again at Honan-chou Tsui (23°06'N.,

113°14'E.) off the city of Guangzhou (Canton). The distance to

Honan-chou Tsui from the dividing point at Chisha Channel

through Tiezhuang Channel is 16 miles. Huangpu Channel is

13 miles. However, vessels do not proceed beyond the port of

Huangpu when using the N channel, because low bridges cross

this channel on the approach to Guangzhou.

2.50 A spit with depths of less than 5m extends about 0.4 mile

ESE and 0.2 mile NE from Diancao Zhou, the easternmost flat

island of the four mentioned before. From Huangpu, an

overhead power cable spans across to Diancao Zhou and S over

Tiezhuang Channel with a vertical clearance of 60m.

2.50 Yuzhu Qiantan, part of which dries, extends 0.3 mile close N

of Daji Sha, a flat island W of Diancao. The navigable channel,

Huangpu Shuidao, lies between this bank and the port of

Huangpu.

2.50 Winds—Weather.—This area is dominated by long

summers and short winters. The highest temperatures recorded

are in July (39°C), and the lowest in January (0°C). Rainfall is

heaviest between April and August. Fogs develop occasionally

during the early morning hours in winter, but are generally

short lived, dissipating soon after sunrise.

2.50 Winds, under the monsoon influence, are generally S and SE

from April to July, and NE the rest of the year. 

2.50 Typhoons occur in the summer and autumn, with winds

generally of force 6 to 9, gusting to force 11.

2.50 Tides—Currents.—Tides are affected by a large diurnal

inequality. The average rise of spring tides ranges from 2m in

January to 3m in June and July. Tidal currents attaining

velocities of 2 to 3 knots on the flood, or 2.5 to 4 knots on the

ebb, may be experienced. 

2.50 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor is divided into two

sections, Dongji and Xiji. There are 45 berths totalling 5,000m

of berthing length with alongside depths of 8.5 to 9m. In

addition, cargo is handled at several anchorages, in the midcurrent of Huangpu Shuidao (Whampoa Channel), in depths of

8 to 10m, mud and sand.

2.50 Aspect.—The main port area is fronted by several flat

islands separating it from the main river channel. A signal

station stands about 1 mile NW of the new port complex; a

second station stands on a 65m hill about 0.8 mile NW of

Yuchu (23°06'N., 113°26'E.)

2.50 Pilotage.—See Pilotage for Guangzhou in paragraph 2.52.

2.50 Regulations.—See Regulations for Guangzhou in paragraph

2.52.

2.50 Signals.—Signal stations are located 1 mile NW of the new

port complex and 0.7 mile N of the main portion of the harbor.

Storm signals, similar to those flown at Hong Kong, are

displayed. 

Huangpu to Guangzhou

2.51 The main channel to Guangzhou continues with the

river channel on the S side of the islands fronting Huangpu,

trending SW, then NW, and finally N to the terminals at

Guangzhou. Vessels having a maximum draft of 5m can berth

in the harbor. Larger vessels are handled at Huangpu.

2.51 Several overhead power cables, some with unspecified

vertical clearances, span the fairway. A power cable crossing

the channel at the S end of the port restricts entering vessels to

masthead heights of less than 26m.

2.51 Due to the nature of the channel, the need for extensive local

knowledge, and the restrictions placed on foreign vessels in

Chinese waters only general directions will be given.

2.51 From Huangpuxingang to Junk Rock (23°02'N., 113°24'E.),

the fairway has general depths of 5.6 to 13.4m, but several

shoal patches with depths of 5.2m and less obstruct the

channel. Concrete piles and fishing stakes obstruct the N half

of the channel at the confluence of two streams charted about 5

miles WNW of the Huangpu new port complex. A concrete

pile obstructs the S side of the channel about 0.8 mile NE of

the fishing stakes mentioned above.

2.51 Junk Rock, with a depth of 1.2m, lies 0.2 mile NE of a point

with conspicuous cliffs on it, 44m high. About 1.2 miles N and

close S of the point, overhead power cables span the channel.

2.51 From Junk Rock to Yuangangsha Zui (23°02'N., 113°21'E.)

the channel runs SW, then W, and NW between Shen-ching

Chou and Nan-T’ang Chou, passing N of Hai-hsin-kang, an

islet which shows a light. Comus Rock, awash, lies about 0.1

mile E of the island. 

2.51 Lijiao Shuido lies between the islands, is marked, and has a

least depth of 5.9m. 

2.51 Vessels bound for Guangzhou pass S of Hsi-yu Chou, 6

miles W of Xiajiao, then N past Macau Fort to the port. An

overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans

the channel close by Macau Fort.

Guangzhou (Canton) (23°06'N., 113°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 57830

2.52 Guangzhou port area encompasses an area on the N

bank of the Zhujiang with the main seaward approach coming

from the S. The limits of the port are best seen on the chart.

2.52 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise 2.3m and neap tides

rise 1.9m. The ebb current attains a rate of 3 to 4 knots abreast

Macau Fort. A tide gauge is situated on a T-headed pier on the

E bank.

2.52 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels having a maximum draft of

5m can be accommodated in the harbor, which has a total

berthing length of 2,600m. Vessels of up to 6m draft can work

cargo mid-stream. Vessels unable to enter must anchor out and

discharge to lighters. A passenger service operates to Hong

Kong. An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of

26m spans the channel close by Macau Fort. Bridges to the NE,
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 45

Pub. 161

N, and NW of the main berthing areas restrict vessels sailing

beyond the port. Larger vessels are handled at Huangpu.

2.52 Aspect.—Macau Fort (23°04'N., 113°15'E.) is situated on a

small island at the S end of the harbor area. Numerous wharves

and T-headed piers line the river banks.

2.52 A large tract of alluvial land lies in the common delta of the

Xijiang and the Zhujiang to the E of Sanshui (23°11'N.,

112°50'E.) and S of Guangzhou. This tract of land is

intersected by a web of creeks and waterways used for trade

and communication.

2.52 The principal waterways connecting the two rivers intersect

the Zhujiang between Chin-Haing Men (22°23'N., 113°37'E.)

and the shoal area below Huangpuxingang. Since most of the

passages are either extremely shallow or obstructed by

underwater barriers and overhead cables, only shallow draft

traffic, such as junks, travel them regularly. For the above

reasons, further description of these waterways will not be

given.

2.52 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels

entering or departing the port. The pilots board in the following

positions:

1. Dazhizhou South (for foreign vessels and Chinese

vessels entering or leaving by way of Tonggu Fairway)—

position 22°05'N, 113°51'E.

2. Dadanwei Pilot Large Vessel Anchorage—position

21°57.6'N, 113°59.1'E. 

3. Wai Lingding Works Pilot Anchorage—position

22°05.5'N, 114°00.5'E.

4. Zhujiang Zhoutou Pilot Anchorage—position

22°07.3'N, 113°40.5'E.

5. Guishan Pilot Anchorage—position 22°07.9'N,

113°46.3'E.

6. Guishan Large Vessel Anchorage—position

22°08.4'N, 113°48.4'E. 

7. Wanshan Qundao—21°59.0'N, 113°43.0'E. 

8. Guishan Dao—22°09.0'N, 113°50.0'E. 

2.52 Regulations.—The Guangzhou VTS is in operation and

monitors traffic within the area bounded by lines joining the

following positions:

a. 22°20'N, 113°32'E.

b. 22°20'N, 114°24'E.

c. 21°55'N, 114°24'E.

d. 21°55'N, 113°32'E.

2.52 Reports to the VTS are mandatory for the following vessels:

1. Vessels over 500 grt.

2. Vessels entering the anchorage area and transporting

hazardous goods, liquified gas or chemicals, as well as all oil

tankers.

3. Passenger vessels entering the anchorage area.

4. Fishing vessels greater than 24m long. 

2.52 Vessels navigating Tonggu Fairway (22°20'N., 113°49'E.)

must also report to Shenzhen VTS as outlined in the

regulations section in sector-paragraph 2.45 of this publication. 

2.52 Signals.—Storm signals, similar to those shown in Hong

Kong, are shown at the yardarm of the customs house, 0.2 mile

E of Honanchou Tsui and also from a mast atop the

examination shed, 0.3 mile NNE.

2.52 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available in the port area, in

depths of 5 to 6.5m, mud and sand. Local authorities and the

pilot should be consulted before attempting to anchor in any of

the areas mentioned above. 

2.52 Directions.—Due to the nature of the channel, the need for

local knowledge, and the restrictions placed on foreign vessels

within Chinese waters, vessels are urged to contact local

authorities before attempting any of the channels mentioned

above.

Dahengqin Dao to Dajin

2.53 Dahengqin Dao (22°06'N., 113°30'E.) lies at the SW

portion of the entrance to the Zhujiang Kou and at the SE end

of Modao Men, which is the main entrance of the Xijiang.

Several islands lie off the river deltas between Dahengqin Dao

and Dajin about 30 miles WSW. To the N of the latter island is

a bay which leads to Ya Men Wan and the T’an Chiang.

2.53 Aspect.—Dahengqin Dao is a large irregularly shaped

island. Naobei Shan (Adams Peak), 460m high and located

near the middle of the E part of the island, is its summit.

Shihlan Chou, two islets lying close together, is located about

0.3 mile S of the S extremity of Dahengqin Dao. Hsing Chou, a

small islet, lies about 1 mile NW of Shihlan Chou. Close

approach to the above islands is prevented by dangerous rocks

and mud flats.

2.53 Sanzao Dao (22°02'N., 113°21'E.) lies 4 miles W of

Dahengquin Dao across the entrance to the Hsi Chiang.

Though larger than the latter island, it is not as high, its highest

mountain peak rising to only 270m. Sanzao Dao is populated

and has a few small piers in the bays which indent its

perimeter. Titao Tsui (Red Cliff Head) (22°05'N., 113°24'E.)

is the NE extremity of this island.

2.53 A group of small islands and islets extends in an arc from

Heng Zhou (Ross Island), off Titao Tsui, S and SW to Shihwan (The Stragglers) (22°00'N., 113°24'E.), off the SE side of

Sanzao Dao. A narrow channel, bound on the E by mud flats,

leads between Titao Tsui and Heng Zhou, but it is blocked at

its N end by a causeway.

2.53 Anchorage can be taken NW of Heng Zhou. The anchorage

is well-sheltered, but the holding ground is only fair and the

tidal currents are strong.

2.53 Caution.—Shoals, with depths of less than 5.5m, have been

reported to extend farther SE from Sanzao Dao than charted.

2.54 Gaolan Dao (21°55'N., 113°15'E.) lies about 4 miles

SW of the SW extremity of Dahengqin Dao. It is 420m high

and has a prominent sand slide on its NE side. The island is

indented by many small, shallow bays. Sunken rocks fringe the

SE side of the island. 

2.54 Depths—Limitations.—The channel to Zhuhai

International Container Terminal (21°57'N., 113°14'E.) has a

least depth of 10m. 

2.54 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels having a draft of

more than 6m board a pilot at Anchorage No. 1 (21°50.5'N.,

113°13.4'E.), Vessels having a draft of less than 6m board a

pilot at Anchorage No. 2 (21°53.5'N., 113°12.5'E.). 

2.54 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in about 5m,

mud, in the NW of the two small bays on the SW side of

Gaolan Dao. The islets of Wen Zhou and Yuan Chou lie about

0.8 mile E of the island.

2.54 Hebao Dao is an irregularly-shaped island lying 3 miles SW

of Gaolan Dao. Nan Wan, an exposed bay with depths of 5.5 to
46 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

10m in its middle part, indents the S coast of the island. A rock,

5m high, lies off the SW entrance to this bay. Hebao Dao is

highest on its W side; anchorage may be taken, in a depth of

9m, about 1.5 miles W of the coast.

2.54 A channel, which leads to the approach to the T’an Chiang,

passes between Hebao Dao and Gaolan Dao. Depths of 5.5 to

9.2m are found in the channel up to about 6 miles NW of the E

extremity of Niu-chiao Shan. Small vessels can find protected

anchorage in this channel.

2.54 Dajin (21°52'N., 113°02'E.) a rocky island with four peaks

more than 305m high, is located about 5.5 miles W of Hebao

Dao. Its 393m high peak, which is dark in color with some red

streaks, stands on the island’s E side. A rock, 4m high, lies

close off the S extremity of the Dajin. This rock is the

northernmost of a chain of rocks and islets that extends S for

about 4 miles. The southernmost rocks are called San-pei-chiu. 

2.54 Caution.—Vessels should pass well S of San-pei-chiu as the

vicinity has not been closely examined.

2.54 Dajin is separated from the mainland to the NW by a channel

with depths of less than 3.7m. 

2.54 Tong Kwa (21°51'N., 112°54'E.), on the mainland, is

located 5 miles W of Dajin. The description of the mainland W

of Tong Kwa begins in paragraph 3.2.

Entrance to the Xijiang

2.55 The delta of the Xijiang is formed by many islands

which are separated from the mainland by numerous shallow

channels and waterways. The principal entrance, Modao Men,

passes to the W of Dahengqin Dao and leads NNW into the

river. Other entrances to the Xijiang are suitable only for small,

local craft. Between the mouth of the Hsi Ching and San-shui

Junction, about 75 miles NNW of Dahengqin Dao, the E side

of the Xijiang is connected with the Zhujiang system by a large

number of creeks. Although, these waterways will be

mentioned as they join or leave the Xijiang, they will not be

described, due to their restricted depths and lack of current

information.

2.55 Modao Men is the E and principal chanel and is entered from

seaward between the islets off the SW of Dahengqin Dao on

the E, and a bank which partly dries and extends about 12

miles SE from Teng-lung Sha on the W. 

2.55 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of the delta of the Hsi

Chiang, the W current of the Northeast Monsoon occurs from

October to May. In March, April, and May about one third of

the currents set in an opposite direction. The E current of the

Southwest Monsoon occurs from June to September. In June,

July, and August this current attains its greatest rate and

consistency.

2.55 Offshore of the delta of the Xijiang, the tidal current on the

rising tide is governed principally by the prevailing wind. With

strong E winds it sets WNW; with SW winds it sets N. The

tidal current on the falling tide sets mostly in a SW direction.

2.55 The mean range of the tide at Gaolan Dao is about 1.2m and

the diurnal range is about 1.7m.

2.55 Within the river the tidal currents, which are strong, usually

follow the direction of the channels. These channels are

generally shallow and intricate. However, the depths are

greatly affected by seasonal change. In June and July, the river

is at its highest, and in December and January it is at its lowest.

A high river brings with it strong currents, making navigation

difficult at times.

2.55 Caution.—Permission to navigate the river must be obtained

from the proper authorities well in advance of the vessel’s

arrival. The river and the ports it services have been reportedly

closed to foreign shipping. 

2.56 From San-shui Junction, where the Pei Chiang joins

the Xijiang, the Xijiang trends W past Wu-chou. Description of

the river will terminate at Wu-chou, as only small craft proceed

beyond to the upper reaches of the river .

2.56 The ports described with the Xijiang are Pei-chieh, Hsin-hui,

San-shui, and Wu-chou. 

2.56 Ta-ching Chiao (Morgan Point) (22°06'N., 113°28'E.) is the

W extremity of Dahengqin Dao and lies 3.5 miles within the

channel entrance on its E side. Vessels must avoid the rocks

and islets between this point and Shih-lan Chou at the SE end

of the entrance.

2.56 About 1.3 miles NW of Ta-ching Chiao on the E side of the

channel is a drying rock marked by a beacon. A rock, awash,

also marked by a beacon, lies on the mud flats about 1 mile W

of the above mentioned drying rock.

2.56 Massie Point is the W extremity of Hsiao-heng-ch’in, a

narrow island lying parallel to the N shore of Ta-heng-ch’in

Tao. Mud flats fill the gap between these two islands. A bank

that dries 0.2m at its N end, extends about 2.5 miles NW from

Massie Point. Ta-kang (Mong Chau) lies on this bank in a

position about 0.7 mile NW of Massie Point. A prominent

white square tower stands on this islet. About 0.2 mile N of Takang lies another small islet.

2.56 The island of Hao Chou (Pak Tank) (22°09'N., 113°24'E.)

lies on the drying flat across the channel about 3 miles W of

Ta-kang. The islands immediately NNW, W, and WSW of Hao

Chou are joined by a causeway from the NE end of Ta-lin-Tao

to Teng-lung Shan.

2.56 La-pa Shan lies about 1 mile N of Hsiao-heng-ch’in. A

narow boat channel separates the two islands and connects

Modao Men with the Zhujiang Kou.

2.57 Yu-chi Shan (22°12'N., 113°27'E.) is the summit of

an unnamed island, 210m high, lying close W of La-pa Shan

and is separated from it by a creek. The N side of this island

and La-pa Shan are separated from Ao-men Tao by another

narrow channel. Ma On Shan, a steep hill, is the W extremity

of this nameless island. A rock with a depth of less than 2m lies

close W of this point.

2.57 A narrow bank, with its S end about 0.3 mile SW of the

above rock, extends NW for 4.8 miles to Chu P’ai Sha. This

bank forms the W limit of the channel and is backed by Tenglung Sha. On the E side of the channel extending NW from Ma

On Shan, several creeks lead into Ao-men Tao; a long narrow

cultivated island parallels the aforementioned bank.

2.57 Sheong Ma Kok (22°16'N., 113°21'E.), located E of Chu

P’ai Sha, is the SW extremity of a range of hills on Ao-men

Tao. The main fairway leads between these two islands, then

NW to Mo-Tao, a hilly island about 0.5 mile N of Chu P’ai

Sha. Mo-Tao is separated from Ao-men Tao by a narrow

channel. A fort stands on the island.

2.57 Lo-chou Men is a continuation of the main channel above
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 47

Pub. 161

Modao Men. Three islands which extend about 11 miles NNW

from the N side of Teng-lung Sha form the W side of the

channel. San Sha is the southernmost of these three islands. Lo

Chao (22°19'N., 113°17'E.), the middle island, features Stripe

Cliff on its SE side about 0.7 mile from the W bank of the river.

Tree Point lies on the E side of the same island about 1.2 miles

N of Stripe Cliff. Sunken rocks lie close off this point. Some

white and red cliffs, fronted by rocks close offshore, stand a

short distance inland on the NE side of Lo Chao

2.57 Red cliffs are found on the SE side and on the N end of Chuk

Chau, the third of the three islands. A rock with a depth of less

than 1.8m lies close offshore about 1.3 miles SE of the N end

of Chuk Chau. A shoal extends off the N and NE of the N red

cliff for up to 0.5 mile.

Chuk Chau to Chau Lin Channel

2.58 Lo-chau Ch’i is entered from N close W of the N end

of Chuk Chou. Moorhen Creek is entered from SE between the

same point and the S end of an island about 0.5 mile N. The

entrances to these creeks, which are used by small craft, are

very narrow.

2.58 The E side of the river from Mo-tao to abeam the N end of

Chuk Chau is also formed by islands, the northernmost being

Kwongfuksha. The creeks that separate these islands from each

other and from Ao-men Tao to the E, lead to the entrance of

Nemesis Creek. This latter creek connects Lo-chou Men with

the Zhujiang system, but is suitable for use by small craft only.

2.58 The main channel leads close W of an island which lies

nearly in mid-channel about 0.5 mile NE of the N end of Chuk

Chau. The W side of the channel, for a distance of about 9

miles NNW of this island, is formed by a number of low and

cultivated islands. The E side of the channel is low and is

intersected by a number of creeks. Some sunken rocks lie close

off the NW end of Kwongfuksha, nearly 2 miles N of the midchannel island.

2.58 An islet lies in mid-river about 0.8 mile N of the NW end of

Kwongfuksha. The main channel leads between this islet and

the E bank of the river. A shoal spit and two groins project

from the N part of the islet. A rock with a depth of less than

1.8m, existence doubtful, lies close off the E bank of the river

abreast the islet.

2.58 Kep Siang (22°29'N., 113°14'E.), a narrow islet, lies on the

E side of the channel about 1.5 miles NNW of the above islet.

A spit, with a depth of less than 1.8m, extends a short distance

N from the N end of the islet. A rock with a depth of less than

2m lies abreast the N end of Kep Siang, close off the W bank of

the main channel.

2.58 Shih-ch’i Ch’i (Shekkei Creek) enters the main channel

abreast the SE end of Kep Siang. This creek connects the

Xijiang with the Zhujiang system. Lung-Kang Ch’i (Lung

Kong Creek) a tributary of the main river, enters the main

channel off the NE side of Kep Siang. Holmes Creek leads S

from a position about 4 miles NNW of Kep Siang.

2.58 The NE end of the island separating Holmes Creek from the

main channel of the Xijiang is fronted by shoals to a distance

of 0.3 mile. Groins extend from both banks of the river, just

below the junction.

2.58 The main channel trends 4 miles N from its junction with

Holmes Creek. Gruning Shoal, an extensive sand bank, is the

only known danger in this part of the channel. It extends about

0.7 mile SE and 0.3 mile E from the SE end of Chau Lin

(22°37'N., 113°09'E.).

2.58 The Xijiang is divided into three branches in the vicinity of

Gruning Shoal. The W branch, which leads off the SW side of

the shoal, leads to Pei-chieh and Hsin-hui. The NW branch,

which leads off the NE side of this shoal, is the main branch of

the Hsi Chiang and is known as Chau Lin Channel. The N

branch, which is entered N of the SE side of this shoal, is

known as Sandpiper Creek. It is used by small craft. 

2.58 Wai-hai (Ngaihai), a village, stands on the S side of the W

branch, abreast the SE extremity of Chau Lin. A tower stands

on the river bank, close N of Wai-hai.

2.58 Wu-chun Hill, 56m high, is located on the E side of the main

river about 1 mile E of the SE end of Chau Lin.

Chau Lin Channel leads NW about 4.5 miles along the NE

side of Gruning Shoal, then, between Chau Lin on the SW and

Futong Island on the NE. Near the N end of Chau Lin, Bamboo

Island lies in mid-river with the main channel between its SW

shore and Chau Lin. Hall Point, 0.6 mile WNW of Bamboo

Island, is the N extremity of Chau Lin. An overhead cable

crosses the river at Bamboo Island. A spit, with a depth of

1.2m, extends 0.3 mile N from Hall Point.

2.58 A narrow island, separated from the SE side of Chau Lin by

a narrow creek, extends about 1.6 miles NW from a position

about 0.5 mile NW of the SE extremity of Chau Lin. The main

channel leads off the NE side of this island. A sunken stone

barrier, nearly awash at LW and usually marked by eddies,

extends 0.2 mile E from the NW end of the narrow island. A

shoal, with a depth of 0.9m, extends a short distance from the

SW side of the channel, close NW of the barrier. To the SW of

Chau Lin on the W banks of a creek known as Chiang-men

Ch’i, are situated Pei-Chieh and Hsin-hui. These towns can be

approached through the channel leading W along the S side of

Chau Lin or from the N by sailing S along the W side of Chau

Lin to the Chiang-men Ch’i.

2.58 Vessels using the channel on the W side of Chau Lin from

Chau Lin Channel should give Hall Point a wide berth. The

depth in this channel is estimated to be about 3m and reported

to be buoyed.

2.58 The E entrance, off the SW of Gruning Shoal is very narrow.

Edgell Island, 46m high, lies in mid-channel about 1.7 miles

within the E entrance. It can be passed on either side. A rock

with a depth of 0.9m, lies on the S side of the fairway about 0.8

mile E of the island.

2.58 There is a shoal area and a spit extending from the S bank

where the N entrance, E entrance, and Chiang-men Ch’i

converge.

2.58 The tidal current on the falling tide attains a rate of 4 to 5

knots during the high river season, and from 1 to 2 knots during

the low river season. 

Pei-chieh (Pakkai) (22°35'N., 113°06'E.) stands on the W

bank, close N of the E entrance of the Chiang-men Ch’i. It

consists of a custom house, a business section, and a few

homes. All vessels bound for or leaving Hsin-hui must stop at

the customs house. There are four wharves at Pei-chieh where

cargo is transshipped to junks and sampans for carriage to

Hsin-hui, 1.8 miles SW, on the NW side of the Chiang-men

Ch’i. 
48 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

Chau Lin Channel to San-shui Reach

2.59 The main channel leads N about 3.5 miles from Hall

Point to Chai Tau Shan. A couple of villages stand on the river

banks in this portion of the channel and some rocky spits and

shoals project up to 0.3 mile from shore. The NW end of

Sandpiper Creek joins the Xijiang about 0.5 mile SE of Chi

Tau Shan at the N end of Futong Island.

2.59 Chi Tau Shan (Plover Island) is a low, flat, narrow island

lying in mid-river. A prominent house stands on a rocky

mound, 12m high, on the N end of the island. The

recommended channel is to the E of the island as rocks are

reported to be in the W channel. A cable, with a reported

clearance of 23m at LW, crosses the E channel. Vessels passing

under it should keep well to the E bank.

2.59 The Xijiang widens somewhat as it trends NNW for 3 miles

from Chi Tau Shan to Staunch Island. Heng-chiang, a village,

stands near the W bank about 0.5 mile W of Chi Tau Shan. A

temple stands on the same side of the river about 0.5 mile N of

the village. A rocky point is located close N of the temple.

2.59 A rock, that dries 1.8m, lies close off the W bank about 0.5

mile S of the temple. A rock, that dries 2.4m, lies close off the

same side of the river, about 0.2 mile N of the temple.

2.59 Short groins extend from the W side of the river in this area.

The main channel leads along the W side of the river, off the

groins.

2.59 Staunch Island is formed by a rocky patch that covers during

periods of high river. A light is shown from a white hut erected

on piles on the island. A rocky ledge extends 0.3 mile N from

Staunch Island.

2.60 Lo Sa Tau Point (22°46'N., 113°05'E.), located about

0.5 mile E of Staunch Island, is a low projection. A drying

shoal extends a short distance N and W from the point. A

branch channel, entered between this point and First Cliffs,

about 0.7 mile NE, trends in a SE direction for 2.5 miles to its

intersection with three creeks. One of these leads S and rejoins

the Xijiang and the others ultimately lead to the Zhujiang.

2.60 Fa Chiau, an island 36m high, lies on the E side of the main

river in a position about 2.5 miles N of Staunch Island.

Navigable channels lead on either side of the island. A rock,

with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies close W of the S extremity

of Fa Chiau. A spit extends nearly 0.5 mile NW from the NW

extremity of the island. The main channel leads SE of the

island and the spit. A high overhead cable crosses the main

river at a position about 0.3 mile S of the island.

2.60 Kan-chu-Ch’i, a waterway which connects the Xijiang

system with the Zhujiang system, is entered just to the E of Fa

Chiau.

2.60 Tam Kong Chau (22°49'N., 113°02'E.), a small islet, lies on

the S side of the Xijiang about 1.5 miles WNW of Fa Chiau.

Kaukong Sa Hau, the port area of Kaukong Hu, is situated on

the N side of the river abreast the islet.

2.60 Sha-tzu (Hok Shan Islands) lie from 0.7 mile W to 3.2 miles

WNW of Tam Kong Chau. They consist of two low, flat islands

which are separated by a narrow, partly drying channel. The

main channel leads along the N shore of these islands between

them and an extensive shoal that extends out from the N bank

of the river. Perkins Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies near the

SE end of this shoal, about 0.2 mile off the NE side of the E

island.

2.60 Ku Lao and Ho-ch’ing, two small villages, are situated on

the SW and NE banks, respectively, of the river about 1.5 miles

NW of the NW end of the W island. A rocky ledge, parts of

which are above water, extends halfway across the river at Ku

Lao. Its outer edge is usually marked by eddies. 

2.60 Anchorage can be taken, in 13 to 16.5m, about 1 mile

upstream from Ku Lao.

2.60 About 3.7 miles NNW of Ku Lao a prominent seven-story

pagoda, 57m high, stands on a point on the W bank of the river.

Lo An Chau (Rattler Island), low, narrow, and flat, lies near the

E bank, abreast of this pagoda.

2.60 The island of T’ai-p’ing Shan, which is rather large, flat, and

wooded, lies NW of Lo An Chau and divides the river into two

channels. An extensive sand bank lies N and W from the N end

of the island. The E channel is the main channel and has

greater depths on its E side. The W channel is not

recommended as it is shallow at each end.

2.60 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 4.9m, off the

prominent pagoda at the entrance to the W channel of T’aip’ing Shan.

2.60 Ho Kok Island lies parallel and close to the E river bank from

1.2 to 3 miles N of the N end of T’ai-p’ing Shan. Red Hills,

178m high, is located a short distance inland from the W bank,

abreast Ho Kok Island.

2.61 Rocky Point (23°00'N., 112°51'E.), located on the E

bank about 1.8 miles NNW of the end of the above island, is

rather steep-to. Fu Wan, a village, stands on a small point on

the opposite side of the river, abreast Rocky Point. Some rocks

lie close off the coast near the village.

2.61 Sik Lung Tsi, 18m high and very small, lies in the middle of

the river in a position about 2 miles N of Rocky Point. The

channel E of the island is clear. This reach of the river is lined

with brick kilns.

2.61 Pai-ni Bank, which dries at low river lies close off the E bank

in a position about 1.8 miles N of Sik Lung Tsi. The main

channel leads W of this bank. A shoal bank, which extends up

to 0.5 mile off the E side of the river, extends nearly 1.5 miles

NNW and then a little over 1 mile N from Pai-ni Bank. The

river is very narrow in this vicinity.

2.61 A low point, on which stands a temple, is located on the W

side of the river about 2.5 miles NNW of Sik Lung Tsi. This

point is fringed with rocks, some of which dry, and which are

usually marked by eddies.

2.61 Mau Hau, a village, stands on the E bank, about 2.5 miles N

of the low point. The river narrows in the vicinity of the village

and flows through rocky headlands. To the N of the village it

widens out somewhat. At San-shui Junction, located about 1.7

miles N of the village, the Xijiang trends NW and then W. Sanshui Reach, which connects the Xijiang with the Pei Chiang,

leads NE from the junction. The E end of the reach is connected with the system by Fo-shan Chih-liu and Hsi-nan Ch’i.

2.61 Mandarin Shoal lies in mid-channel off the SW entrance to

San-shui Junction. It varies as to size and position and when

considered dangerous is usually marked by a sampan

displaying a red flag.

2.61 The main channel of the Hsi Chiang leads NW off the SW

sides of Mandarin Shoal and Chin-sha (Kwong Sai or Fort
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 49

Pub. 161

Island), then W. This latter island is narrow, low, flat, partly

wooded, and extends about 1.8 miles NW from a position

about 0.3 mile NNW of the shoal. A spit extends 0.3 mile from

the NW end of the island and a rock, with a depth of 1.2m, is

reported to lie off the SW side of Chin-sha.

San-shui Reach (23°10'N., 112°50'E.) is entered from the

Xijiang through San-shui Junction. The W entrance is between

Entrance Point and Mandarin Point about 0.1 mile N. The

former point is the middle of three points on the SE shore of

the entrance; the latter point is marked by a light.

2.61 A shoal bank, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends halfway

across the junction from its NW side. The depths in San-shui

Reach change from year to year and during low-river season,

only small craft can navigate the channel.

2.61 Kang Ken (Tweed Point) is located on the SE side of the NE

end of San-shui Junction, 0.7 mile NE of Mandarin Point. A

light is shown from the shoal ground fringing Kang Ken. A tide

gauge, marked from 1m below zero to 3.9m above zero, is

situated near Kang Ken.

2.61 Frasers Hill, 61m high, rises 0.5 mile NE of Kang Ken. A

rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies close N of the hill. A

drying bank extends up to 0.1 mile offshore for nearly 1 mile to

the E, beginning about 0.1 mile E of Frasers Hill.

2.62 Lo Ah Chau (Rattler Island) (23°10'N., 112°50'E.)

lies in the middle of the entrance of the Pei Chiang and forms

the N side of the W entrance of San-shui Reach. Fish Point, the

SW extremity of the island, is located about 0.3 mile NNE of

Kang Ken. A light vessel, which displays a red flag by day, is

moored off Fish Point. Chow Wei (Low Point), the SE

extremity of the island, is located about 0.6 mile NE of Kang

Ken. A beacon stands on Chow Wei.

2.62 A drying sand bank lies close off the SW side of Lo Ah

Chau. A shoal bank, with depths of 0.6 to 1.8m, lies between

the SE side of the island and the SE side of the reach in the

vicinity of Frasers Hill.

2.62 A rock, 3.3m high and marked by a beacon, is located in

mid-channel about 1 mile E of Chou Wei. A spit with a depth

of 0.3m extends SSE to shore from close SE of this rock.

2.62 Sun Sha, a large island, lies in mid-channel. Its W end,

which is fringed by a drying bank to a distance of 0.3 mile, lies

about 0.5 mile E of the aforementioned rock. A wooded islet

lies a short distance off the NE side of the island in a position

about 0.2 mile NW of its E end. Lo Sha, a narrow island

covered mostly by buildings, lies close E of Sun Sha. A narrow,

drying bank separates the two islands. A chimney stands near

the NW end of Lo Sha, and a tower stands near its SE end.

2.62 The channel, which passes S of the two islands, is reported to

be the one used. Sand banks have been reported as extending

from both sides of the W part of this channel.

2.62 A narrow spit, with a depth of 0.3m, extends 0.2 mile N from

a position on the N side of Sun Sha, 0.5 mile W of the NW end

of Lo Sha. A drying bank, the outer end of which lies close W

of this spit, extends nearly halfway across the channel from the

N side of the reach. A small drying patch lies in mid-channel,

close E of the spit.

2.63 San-shui (23°11'N., 112°50'E.) is located on the E

side of the mouth of the Pei Chiang, about 0.5 mile N of

Hokau. San-shui is a small port, with Hokau, its port area,

situated outside the embankment. Hokau is flooded about 6

months of the year. The greater part of the waterborne traffic of

San-shui is carried through to Hsi-nan, about 2.5 miles E of

Hokau.

2.63 A small jetty, with a pipeline, lies at the oil depot on the N

bank, about 0.8 mile E of Hokau.

2.63 Floods can be expected once or twice a year when there are

freshets concurrently in the Xijiang and Pei Chiang. At these

times, usually June and July, the rivers become turbulent,

sweeping past like a mill race. Violent squalls usually

accompany the freshets. River levels under these conditions

have exceeded 8m at the bar. 

2.63 Signals.—A black ball is displayed at the custom house at

Hokau when the depth on the bar is less than 2.4m.

2.63 Storm signals are displayed at the custom house at Hokau.

2.63 Anchorage.—The anchorage outside the bar off Kang Ken

is used by vessels unable to cross the bar between Lo Ah Chau

and Frasers Hill. This anchorage is small and can

accommodate about three vessels.

2.63 The anchorage off the custom house at Hokau has good

holding ground, but is exposed to sudden, heavy squalls from

the SE in summer. During the winter months it is obstructed by

shifting sand banks, which limit its use to vessels drawing less

than 1.5m.

2.63 Caution.—Vessels without recent local knowledge should

not attempt to enter San-shui Reach from the Xijiang as the

charts are inadequate and the river is continually changing.

Great attention must be paid to the steering due to the strong

swirls and eddies.

2.63 Numerous native craft and large rafts are often met within

the entrance and in San-shui Reach. The rafts are kedged and

their progress is slow, thus impeding navigation.

2.63 The large rafts, up to 122m long and 46m wide, which

sometimes transit the Pei Chiang three or four at a time, are a

danger to navigation. Large stacks of pine tree branches, which

are floated down two abreast on boats which are lashed

together, also are a hazard. Sometimes 20 or more of these rafts

and stacks are in close proximity and occupy almost the entire

width of the river.

2.63 The Pei Chiang leads N from the W of San-shui Junction and

San-shui Reach. It is suitable only for shallow draft vessels.

Chin-sha to Ts’ang-Wu

2.64 From a position SW of the NW end of Chin-sha, the

river leads W about 7 miles to the island of Moyen Chou. The

channel favors the N bank of the river for most of this stretch.

2.64 Ch’ing-ch’i-hsu (Ching Ki Creek) joins the Hsi Chiang from

the N about 0.5 mile NW of Chin-sha. A group of drying rocks

Day signal Night signal Meaning

One black ball One red light Bad weather is 

expected

Two black balls, 

disposed 

vertically

Two red lights A typhoon or strong 

gale is expected
50 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

lies close off the S bank of the Xijiang opposite the mouth of

the Ch’ing-ch’i-hsu. Red Banks and Kestrel Bank, which

extend over halfway into the river, stretch about 2.5 miles W

from the drying rocks.

2.64 Anchorage can be taken close off the steep-to banks of the

river near the village of Sha Po which lies 3 miles W of Kestrel

Bank.

2.64 Moyen Chou (Kwangli Island), a rather large island, lies in

mid-river, 2 to 4.5 miles W of Sha Po. The main channel leads

over the N shore of the island. Sandbanks lie close off the NE

side and NW end of the island and a shoal spit extends about

0.8mile WSW from its W end. Some rocky patches lie close

off the N bank, N of the E end of Moyen Chou.

2.64 The Xijiang trends about 4 miles SW from the W end of

Moyen Chou to the N entrance of Ling Yang Gorge. First Bar,

which has a depth of 1.8m at low river, lies about 2 miles N of

the entrance to the gorge. The river continues SW about 4.2

miles through this gorge, passing between mountain ranges

rising to 858m at Mount Parkes, 3.5 miles due S of the N

entrance. Ling Yang Gorge is 0.1 to 0.15 mile wide in its

narrowest part, and is deep in the fairway. Overhead cables

span the river at both ends of the gorge. Vessels should stay to

the middle of the channel.

2.64 At the S entrance of the gorge, the Xijiang continues 4 miles

SW, then turns W a distance of 6 miles. Sandbanks and rocks

lie close off the banks for most of this latter SW portion of the

channel. As the river turns W, it passes the walled city of Kaoyao (Shiuhing) (23°01'N., 112°28'E.), a military station. A

sandbank, awash at LW, encumbers the S side of the river from

abreast the city to 3 miles E. The Seven Stars, a marble range

of hills, is located 2 miles inland, N of Kao-yao.

2.64 Anchorage can be taken off the S gates of Kao-yao about 1.5

miles E of a large pagoda.

Between Kao-yao and Narrow Island, the Xijiang winds

through hilly country for a distance of 24 miles. The hills vary

in height from 30 to 457m. They are mostly densely wooded,

but many of them are cultivated. There are several villages

along both shores of this portion of the river. Sandbanks and

sunken rocks project from the banks, primarily near the bends

in the channels.

2.64 Spike Hill rises on the N bank about 2.5 miles W of Kaoyao. A temple can be seen on the S bank opposite Spike Hill.

Overhead cables span the river at this location which should be

passed near the N bank during high river season.

2.64 A deep, narrow, and steep-to gorge is entered 4 miles upriver

from Spike Hill. A prominent tower stands on the N bank of

the gorge near its N end where the channel turns from W to

NW.

2.65 Lu-pu-hsu (Lukpo) (23°08'N., 112°28'E.) stands on

the N river banks where the channel takes a sharp turn from W

to S. A bank extends from the SE side of the river abreast the

village. From here, the channel winds generally SW about 8

miles to Tree Head on the S shore 0.7 mile S of Narrow Island.

2.65 Narrow Island lies in mid-river and is covered with bamboo.

Extensive sand banks connect the island with the N bank of the

river. Sandbanks, which are steep-to on their S side, extend 1.3

miles WSW from Narrow Island. These banks are usually

marked by stakes. A small, steep projection juts out from the E

bank about 0.4 mile NE of the NE end of this island.

2.65 Three prominent red cliffs are located a short distance W of

Tree Head. Some dangerous rocks, marked by eddies, are

found nearly in mid-channel abreast the middle cliff.

2.65 Yueh-ch’eng (Yutshing) (23°04'N., 112°'E.) a village, is

situated on the NW side of a bend in the Xijiang, 3.5 miles W

of Narrow Island. The Cock’s Comb, a marble hill, stands near

the N bank of the river, 4.7 miles W of the village.

From the Cock’s Comb, the river trends W about 2.5 miles,

then N 2 miles farther, before turning generally W again for

about 14 miles to Steep Point on the S bank. The channel holds

to mid-river for the most part. Some banks extend offshore in

places along the passage, particularly where the channel turns

from N to W above Cock’s Comb and off Te-ch’ing (Takhing),

about 3 miles E of Steep Point. A few drying rocks lie off the E

shore opposite the former bank. These rocks are sometimes

marked by buoys.

2.65 There are numerous villages and settlements on both banks

of the river throughout this stretch. Several joss houses and

pagodas can be seen on either shore along the way. Te-ch’ing, a

walled city, is apparently the largest of the villages on this W

heading. A nine-story pagoda stands on the N shore, slightly

inland and 3 miles E of Te-ch’ing.

2.65 The Hsi Chiang turns SW for a short distance at Steep Point.

Flat Rocks, which dry 0.3m, extend nearly halfway across the

river from the NW bank, opposite the point. Strong eddies are

found in their vicinity.

2.65 Yung Tong, a village on the N bank of the river, is situated 1

mile NW of Steep Point. Some rocks, that dry, lie close off the

S bank, about 0.6 mile SW of the village. A buoy marks these

rocks during winter. Shoals, composed of stones and shingle,

fringe the N bank 0.7 mile to 1.8 miles W of Yung Tong.

2.65 Ta-li-Kou (Tai Lik Hau), a village, is situated on the S bank 2

miles WSW of Yung Tong. A shoal bank extends from the SW

side of the river between the village and a point 2.5 miles NW.

The SE side of this shoal extends into the middle of the river.

2.65 Rocky Spit is located on the NE side of the river, 1.5 miles

NW of the village. A rock, marked by a buoy in winter, lies in

mid-river off the spit. The channel lies between the rock and

the spit. Two rocks, the existence of which are doubtful, lie a

short distance upriver from this rock. Strong eddies exist in the

vicinity of these rocks.

Ha Lok, a village, is situated on the N bank about 1.5 miles

NNW of Rocky Spit. An extensive shoal bank fringes the N

bank of the river up to 4 miles WNW of the village.

2.65 A prominent temple stands on the S bank, 1 mile WSW of

the village. A reef, that dries 0.6m, extends about 150m from

the S bank, 1 mile W of the temple. Some rocks lie off the S

bank between the temple and the reef.

2.66 Lo-p’ang (Lu Pong) (23°10'N., 111°37'E.), a village

standing on the S bank, is situated about 2 miles W of the

temple. Rocks, that dry 4.3m, lie in the middle of the river, N

of Lo-p’ang. The channel leads between these rocks and the S

bank of the river. Rocks, the existence of which are doubtful,

lie on the edge of a shoal bank that extends from the NE shore,

about 0.5 mile NW of the drying rocks.

2.66 A single mass of granite, in the form of a thumb, rises

perpendicularly about 91m high, on a range of hills 430m high.

The formation is prominent and lies a short distance inland

from the N bank, NE of the drying rocks.
Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 51

Pub. 161

2.66 A rock lies close off the SW bank, 1.7 miles NW of Lop’ang. A shoal bank fringes the E side of the river 2.5 to 3.8

miles NW of Lo-p’ang. A reef, with some rocks N of it,

extends W from the N end of the shoal bank almost to the

opposite side of the river. The W extremity of this reef is

marked by a buoy. Some rocks lie close off the W side of the

river, abreast the reef. The channel leads between these rocks

and the W end of the reef.

2.66 Tu-ch’eng (Dosing), a small town, stands on the W bank of

the river, 4.2 miles NW of Lo-p’ang. An overhead cable

crosses the river at a position 0.8 mile upriver from Tu-ch’eng.

Vessels should keep close to the E bank of the river in passing

under this cable.

2.66 The W side of the river, between Tu-ch’eng and a point 2.8

miles NE, is fringed by an extensive shoal. The E side of this

shoal is marked by buoys.

2.66 Ku-hsun (Pa Chung), a village on the SE bank of the river, is

situated 1 mile E of Tu-ch’eng. Some rocks lie off the SE bank,

0.5 mile NE of the village and some rocks, which dry 1.8m, lie

off the E bank, 2 miles NE of Ku-hsun.

2.66 Ch’ang-kang Hsu (Chong Kong), a village, stands on the E

bank 1 mile N of the latter mentioned drying rocks. A shoal

bank extends from the NE side of the river both abreast, and for

some distance N, of the buildings. A joss house, possibly

blocked from view until nearly abeam, stands near a hill on the

SW bank of the river 1 mile N of the drying rocks. A rock lies

close offshore and SW of the joss house.

Caution.—Second Bar lies abreast of the joss house. A

reported depth of 1.8m was found over this bar; the channel

over it is subject to shifting.

2.66 Shoal banks extend 5 miles along the NE riverbank upriver

from Second Bar. Robinson Rocks, marked by a buoy and

lying nearly in mid-channel, lie on the W side of the channel in

a position 1.2 miles NNW of the joss house. Janus Rock,

marked by a buoy, lies in a similar position, 1 mile farther

upriver. Some rocks lie close off the W bank, 3.5 miles NNW

of the joss house. A sunken rock lies 0.2 mile NNW of these

rocks and over 0.1 mile from the W bank of the river. Another

sunken rock lies 0.2 mile farther NNW.

2.66 Kok Heu, a village situated among the trees on the NE bank

of the river, is located 3.2 miles N of the above joss house.

Shoal banks, which dry 3.6m, extend halfway across the river

abreast the village. The main channel leads between these

shoal banks and the aforementioned rocks on the W side of the

river.

2.67 Feng-ch’uan (Fungston) (23°24'N., 111°31'E.), a

walled city, is situated on the E bank about 3.5 miles NNW of

Kok Heu. A shoal bank extends into the middle of the river

from the village. The Ho Chiang, a tributary of the Xijiang

flows into the E side of the latter river in a position 2 miles N of

Feng-ch’uan.

2.67 A shoal bank extends off the W side of the river for a

distance of about 1 mile N and S, opposite the mouth of the Ho

Chiang. A rocky ledge lies off the E bank a short distance N of

the same river mouth. Rocks that dry 2.1m and that are marked

by rips when submerged, lie in mid-river on the N side of the

channel 2.5 miles N of the mouth of the Ho Chiang.

2.67 An islet, 6m high, lies on the S side of the fairway, 1.5 miles

E of Wu-chou. There is a joss house on the islet. Rocks, some

of which dry 2.7m, extend 0.3 mile W from the islet. A drying

rock lies on the end of a drying shoal which extends 0.2 mile E

from the islet. A small islet lies close E of this rock.

2.67 A reef that dries 3.3m extends a short distance from the S

bank of the river, about 1.2 miles W of the 6m high islet.

2.67 Caution.—Some of the dangers in the Hsi Chiang between

Tu-ch’eng and Wu-chou are marked by spar buoys, either on

the danger itself or very near it, and by more conspicuous

wooden triangular framework buoys moored near the spar

buoys. The triangular buoys are sometimes swept away by

tows, but the spar buoys usually remain in position. The

triangular buoys are placed in position by the port authority at

Wu-chou when the water level is about 2.1m at the city. These

buoys are numbered from No. 1, off Sun Sin Kiu, to No. 14, in

the Wu-chou Reach. Red buoys should be left to the starboard

hand, and black buoys on the port hand, when proceeding

upriver.

2.68 Wu-chou (Ts’ang-Wu) (23°29'N., 111°19'E.) stands

primarily on the N bank of the Hsi Chiang at its junction with

the Kuei Chiang to the W about 180 miles from the sea. It has

several concrete and brick wharves equipped with light cranes,

and several covered warehouses in the port. 

2.68 Tides—Currents.—The rate of the current during high

flood in the gorge is 5 to 8 knots, accompanied by heavy

eddies. The average rate in winter is about 1.5 knots.

2.68 The Hsi Chiang has an irregular rise. In 1897, the lowest

water was taken as a datum for the zero mark at Wu-chou.

Since that time the river has fallen 0.8m below the datum and

risen 21m above it. At the time of low river, a craft drawing

over 2.1m runs the risk of grounding in several places in the

river.

2.68 The period of low river appears to last from the start of

December to the middle of March. Then the river rises rapidly,

attaining its highest level in June, and falls again gradually

from the end of September.

2.68 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels drawing up to 3.9m can

proceed to Wu-chou at high river, and from 1.8 to 2.1m at low

river.

2.68 Aspect.—The city stands on the SW side of a hill which is

336m high. The business center is in the SW part of the city.

Some conspicuous barracks stand inland to the NE of the city

and are backed by radio masts a short distance N. A tide gauge

lies off the N shore 0.3 mile S of the barracks. The N bank of

the Hsi Chiang at Wu-chou slopes and in summer when the

river overflows its banks, the river is considerably wider

opposite the city than it is in winter.

2.68 The hills on the S side of the river rise to a height of 259m. A

prominent pagoda, which stands on a 150m hill on the S bank

of the river, is situated 0.7 mile SSE of the barracks. There are

some oil installations and a tide gauge on this side of the river.

2.68 The old British Consulate stands on the W bank of the Kuei

Chiang, abreast of Wu-chou. A prominent building is situated 1

mile W of the consulate.

2.68 Anchorage.—The anchorage is close E of the city 0.3 mile

SE of the barracks. It has been reported that in summer, when

the Kuei Chiang is in flood, safe anchorage can be taken on the

S side of the river, opposite the city.

2.68 Caution.—Overhead cables span the river to the E of the

city near the anchorage. These cables are low and necessitate
52 Sector 2. Coast of China—Dapeng Jiao to Dajin, including Hong Kong and Macau 

Pub. 161

housing the topmasts. Vessels should keep to the N bank in

passing under them during the high river season.

2.68 The Xijiang beyond Wu-chou is navigable only by small

craft with shallow draft and will not be described.

T’an Chiang

2.69 T’an Chiang (22°26'N., 113°04'E.) is approached

from the S between Hebao Dao (21°52'N., 113°10'E.) and

Dajin, then, into a large bay indenting the mainland through

which vessels pass to reach Ya Men Wan. Ya Men Wan

(22°20'N., 113°04'E.), in turn, joins the T’an Chiang at its

mouth.

2.69 Depths—Limitations.—The channels to and through the

T’an Chiang are shallow and intricate. The rise of the river is

very irregular and fluctuates with the seasons. The river is

highest in summer and lowest in winter.

2.69 Aspect.—The W shore of the inner approach to the T’an

Chiang is well-defined and has a number of small villages

along it. It is fronted by mud flats on which lie some small

islets. The E shore is formed by reclaimed land and mud banks

and is not well-defined.

2.69 Ya Men Wan, entered 20 miles N of Dajin, is 13 miles long.

The Hu-t’iao Men, a very narrow and shoal tributary leading to

the Xijiang from the W, is entered just to the E of the S

entrance to Yai Men. Its entrance is narrow and leads between

shoals extending from both shores. The banks of the T’an

Chiang beyond the N end of Ya Men Wan are low and flat. The

land bordering the river is cultivated.

2.69 Caution.—Vessels are required to obtain the permission of

the appropriate authorities before navigating the river, which

has been reported to be closed to foreign shipping.

2.70 Damang, rounded and 263m high in its N part, and

with a rocky peninsula extending 1.5 miles SW from its main

part, lies with its S extremity 1.8 miles NNW of the NW

extremity of Hebao Dao. A group of rocks, 1m high, lie 0.5

mile W of the middle of the island. Mang-tzu, 60m high, lies at

the outer extremity of a group of rocks that extends 0.5 mile

SSW from the SW extremity of Damang. T’a Chou, a rocky

islet, 85m high, lies about 0.8 mile NW of the N part of

Damang. A rock, 6.4m high, lies 0.2 mile SE of T’achou.

2.70 Sanjiaosan Dao, a rocky islet, 138m high, lies 1.2 miles NE

of Damang. A rock, 3m high, lies 0.3 mile W of Sanjiaosan

Dao.

2.71 Nancy Dao (22°00'N., 113°13'E.), a narrow island,

253m high, lies with its SW extremity 1.5 miles NE of Mangtzu. It is joined to the mainland to the N by reclaimed land.

2.71 In addition to the above mentioned islands, several small

islets lie close off both the E and W shores of the bay. One of

these islets, Chi’s-pi, lies about halfway up and in the middle of

the bay. The channel passes close E of this islet.

2.71 Depths—Limitations.—A narrow, intricate, and unmarked

channel with a least depth of 2.1m at LW leads up the bay

between the drying banks to the entrances of Ya Men Wan and

Hu-t’iao Men. Pilots with local knowledge are a necessity.

2.71 Yai Men Channel is 13 miles long. Greater depths are found

in this channel than in the approach channels.

2.71 Aspect.—A prominent white tower stands on the W side of

the entrance of Ya Men Wan. A similar tower stands on the S

end of the point separating the entrances of Yai Men and Hut’iao Men. A prominent, white building with a flagstaff stands

close to the latter tower, but at a lower level. A ruined fort, with

an overhead telegraph spanning the river in its vicinity, stands

on the E side of the channel in a position about 1 mile NW of

the tower.

2.71 Caution.—Vessels entering Ya Men Wan must depend on

local knowledge. It may be necessary to lower the topmast at

high river to clear the overhead cables.

2.71 The T’an Chiang is divided into two branches 3 miles NW of

its entrance. The valley of the river is well-cultivated and there

are several towns along its banks. The N branch of the river is

wider and deeper than the preferred channel. Due to the need

for local knowledge and for a pilot on board, no further

description is given.
Pub. 161

3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, Including HainanTao

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
55

Pub. 161

SECTOR 3 

COAST OF CHINA—DAJIN TO JIAOWEI JIAO, INCLUDING HAINAN DAO

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S coast of China from

Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, the sequence being from E to W, including the N shore of Hainan Dao bordering Qiongzhou Haixia.

Following the description of the strait, Hainan Dao is described

clockwise from Ching-hsin Chiao, its NE extremity, to Pingma-chiao, the island’s NW extremity.

General Remarks

3.1 Winds—Weather.—The climate in this sector is governed by the monsoons. The Northeast Monsoon is much

stronger and more persistent than its counterpart. It begins

around September and brings rain with cool temperate weather. 

3.1 This monsoon is rarely interrupted over the open sea and

from between the N and E more than half the time. The direction of the wind is steadiest from December to February. In

March and April winds from between S and E become increasingly frequent as opposed to the middle of the season when

interruptions in the wind pattern last only for 1 or 2 days. May

is the month of transition to the Southwest Monsoon.

3.1 The Southwest Monsoon is very irregular and often weak.

Winds are from SE to SW, but not as strong or consistent as

during the Northeast Monsoon. Hot weather begins in early

summer and calms make the heat oppressive. Showers occur in

the afternoon almost daily during this season. At the end of

August, W winds are as common as E winds near Hainan Dao.

These W winds bring rain and thick weather.

3.1 Near Hainan Dao and through Qiongzhou Haixia heavy

squalls of short duration are common from June through

August, although they may occur during any season of the

year. These squalls are usually preceded by a blue haze over

the land. The most dangerous type of squall is the arch squall,

which is preceded by clouds rising from the horizon in the

form of an arch. Heavy rain occurs when the arch is passing

overhead. They can be expected inland off the river estuaries

and in places where the hinterland is mountainous when strong

offshore winds are occurring.

3.1 Typhoons may occur in any month, but they are more frequent from June through November. The typhoons occurring in

August and September are considered more violent.

3.1 Fog occurs about two to three days per month from January

to April between Hainan Dao and 112°E, however, to the E of

this meridian the frequency increases. 

3.1 Coastal fogs are fairly common from January through April,

although not more so than at sea. During the Northeast Monsoon, particularly from January through March, visibility in

Qiongzhou Haixia is poor. Misty or drizzly weather may

reduce visibility to less than 2 miles with little or no warning.

3.1 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the South China Sea are mostly of a diurnal character. The principal changes follow the declination of the moon rather than its phases. Shortly after the

moon crosses the equator, the diurnal tide vanishes and the

semi-diurnal tides occur. As declination increases, the diurnal

tide increases, and when the declination is near its maximum,

N or S, single day tides may occur. The springs of the semidiurnal tide occur shortly after a full or new moon. The neaps

of the semi-diurnal tide occur shortly after quadrature. The

springs of the diurnal tide occur shortly after the moon reaches

its maximum declination.

3.1 Currents of the South China Sea flow in accordance with the

general pattern of the wind. The main currents are those caused

by the monsoons. The SW current of the Northeast Monsoon is

stronger and more constant than the NE current of the Southwest Monsoon. A considerable portion of the currents of both

monsoons exceeds a rate of 1 knot.

3.1 Between 14° and 21°N, the SW or W current of the Northeast Monsoon occurs from October through February, with

March and April being the months of transition.

3.1 The NE or E current occurs from May through August, September being the month of transition. In December and January, the current attains a maximum rate of 0.5 knot to 1.5 knots.

3.1 During the Northeast Monsoon, and also in August and

September when E winds prevail, the current frequently sets W

at a rate of 3 knots off Tungtafan Shih (21°28'N., 112°23'E.).

It abates only to 1.5 knots when the tidal current, under

ordinary circumstances, would be setting E.

3.1 Frequently during the Southwest Monsoon, if the wind shifts

to the E, a W set is experienced. Off the SE and SW coasts of

Hainan Dao, currents resulting from monsoons may be encountered. From October through March, the currents set NW

at a rate of 0.7 to 1 knot. From June through August, the currents set SE at a rate of 0.5 to 0.8 knot.

Aspect.—For a distance of 115 miles WSW of T’ung-ku, the

peninsula extending from the mainland 6 miles W of Ta-chin,

to the mouth of the Shui-lung Chiang, the S coast of China is

irregular and fronted by off-lying islands. Most of these islands

and other dangers in this portion of the sector lie within the

20m curve. Along the coast, mud flats and banks are prevalent.

The shore is backed by hills and mountains reaching heights of

over 1,219m. There are no ports of commercial importance to

foreign shipping in this part of the sector.

3.1 To the W of the above-mentioned river mouth, the coast

trends SW for about 35 miles to the entrance of Kuang-chou

Wan, within which is situated the port of Chan-chiang. This

large bay, filled with islands and shoals, indents Leizhou Bandao. The S side of this peninsula, about 45 miles S of Kuangchou Wan’s main entrance, forms the N side of Qiongzhou

Haixia.

3.1 Qiongzhou Haixia, the passage between the peninsula and

the island of Hainan Dao is encumbered with numerous sandy

shoals and banks in its E approaches, but a deep navigable

channel leads between them. 

3.1 The strait proper is about 50 miles long and 10 miles wide at

it narrowest part. Specific regulations govern vessels transiting

the strait.

3.1 Hainan Dao is 156 miles long NE-SW, and 100 miles wide at

its widest part. Its coast is about 560 miles in length. Ch’i-chou
56 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

Ch’un Tao is the largest group of off-lying islets, lying as far as

18 miles from the NE end of the island.

3.1 The E and NW sides of Hainan Dao are reef-fringed in

places. The SE and S coasts are bold, but banks and shoals

have been reported along them in places as well as along the

SW coast. Sand or sand and gravel beaches front most of the

coast. These are interrupted by bold, rocky points and low,

marshy land bordering lagoon and river entrances.

3.1 The S half of the island is mountainous and vegetationcovered, attaining elevations of over 1,829m in the Wu-chih

Shan which at times are visible from Qiongzhou Haixia. Spurs

from these ranges extend to the coast at the S two-thirds of the

island where they form bold capes and headlands. Low-lying

river valleys and constricted coastal plains lie between these

ranges.

3.1 A flat to rolling plain, interrupted by steep isolated hills,

extends over the N third of Hainan Dao. Much of this plain is

under cultivation.

3.1 Only three harbors on the island are of commercial importance; the others provide only limited facilities to native junks.

Of the main ports, Haikou is on the N coast, Tung-hai-t’an is

on the W coast, and Sanya is on the S coast.

3.1 Caution.—Several wrecks lie off the coast described in this

sector. Their type and location can best be seen on the charts of

the area concerned.

3.1 Much of the area described in this sector has been imperfectly surveyed, especially between the offshore islands and

the mainland and along the mainland shores in the many bights

and bays. With the exception of the S side of Qiongzhou

Haixia, much of the coast of Hainan Dao has not been

thoroughly examined. Many shoals and reefs fringe the island,

some of them extending seaward as far as 10 miles or more.

The position of vessels may not be accurately determined by

visual bearings in some instances.

3.1 Permission to enter Chinese waters should be obtained well

in advance of any voyage here.

3.1 Certain portions of the coastline covered in this sector are

reported to be dangerous due to mines. 

Tong Kwa To Shui-Lung Chiang

3.2 Tong Kwa (21°51'N., 112°54'E.), at its S extremity, is

a peninsula extending from the mainland to within about 1.5

miles of the NW side of Dajin. The passage between the two,

Tong Kwa Hai, is shoal and used only by small craft. An islet,

93m high, lies in the passage off the S side of the peninsula and

the S extremity of Tong Kwa is fringed by dangerous sunken

rocks. The SE side of the above peninsula between its SW

extremity and Chiao-tsui Shan, 10 miles NE, is high and

rugged.

3.2 Several islands and islets lie offshore to the SW of Tong Kwa

peninsula. The N shores of the islands of Hsia-ch’uan Shan and

Shangchuang Dao form the S side of San-hsia Kou, a passage

leading to a large bay to the W of Tong Kwa.

3.2 Shangchuang Dao (21°41'N., 112°48'E.) is a large mountainous, and irregularly shaped island which rises to a height of

485m in its N part. Its NE extremity lies 5.3 miles S of the SW

extremity of Tong Kwa peninsula. Its W extremity lies 11

miles SW of Tong Kwa and its SW extremity, Shangchuan Jiao

14 miles SSW of its NE extremity.

3.2 Three large, open, unexamined bays indent the E coast of

Shangchuang Dao. Some drying rocks lie off the NE extremity

of the island and three islets, the highest of which is 52m high,

are found about midway down the coast.

3.2 Off the SE coast lies the island of Weijia Dao which is rocky,

marked by a light, and over 206m high. A deep channel, about

0.2 mile wide, separates the cliffs of the two islands.

3.2 Wuzhu Zhou (21°36'N., 112°53'E.), a barren island over

230m high, is separated from the SE end of Shangchuang Dao

by a channel about 2.7 miles wide with a depth of 21.9m. An

islet, 70m high, lies close off the NW side of Wuzhu Zhou.

3.2 The N coast of Shangchuang Dao is rugged and irregular

with shallow bays and coves indenting its entire length. Huangmao T’ou, a narrow peninsula, extends from shore about 5

miles W of the NE extremity of the island and forms the E side

of a rather large bay which is divided by four offshore islets.

On the E shore of this bay, in its N portion, stands a large

monastery.

3.3 Pai Yen (21°41'N., 112°42'E.) is the point marking

the W extremity of Shangchuang Dao. The W coast of the

island, between the above point and Shangchuang Dao, is

indented by three distinct bays. The northernmost, Ta Wan,

indents the middle of the island to a distance of about 4 miles,

nearly cutting Shangchuang Dao into two parts.

3.3 The middle bay on the W coast, Shati Wan, is entered

between Shati Jiao and a point about 1.5 miles SE and indents

the coast 1.5 miles. A naval activity property consisting of a

barracks and a jetty used by patrol craft is situated within the

bay. Depths of 9.2m are found in the entrance, gradually

decreasing to 5.5m about 0.3 mile from the head of Shati Wan.

3.3 Meitou Zhou, a rocky islet, 23m high, lies on the N side of

the entrance to Shati Wan. The channel between this islet and

Shangchuang Dao is foul.

3.3 A reef, marked by a lighted buoy, was reported (1957) to lie

in the bay. The position of the reef is not known.

3.3 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 9.2m about

0.3 mile SE of Meitou Zhou or in a depth of 8.2m with the

drying rocks at the head of the bay bearing 050° about 0.8 mile

off. Large junks may be found anchored off Shati Hsu, the

village at the head of the bay.

3.3 Tatien Wan is the southernmost bay on the W side of the

island. A signal station is situated near Shangchuang Dao, SE

of the S entrance to this bay. Rocks extend about 0.2 mile

seaward to the S entrance to Tatien Wan.

3.3 The S coast of the island is rather rugged and steep-to.

3.4 Xiachuan Dao (Hsia-ch’uan Shan) (21°40'N.,

112°36'E.), a large and irregularly shaped island, lies within

the 10m curve to the W of Shangchuang Dao across a strait encumbered with islets. The island is about 11 miles long on its

NE-SW axis and 7 miles wide on its E-W axis.

3.4 The W side of the island between the islet off its NE

extremity and Pai-shih Chiao, its SW extremity, is indented by

a number of bays and coves. Anchorage can be taken, in 9 to

11m, soft mud, about 1 mile W of the southernmost cove on

this W shore, just N of Pai-Shih Chiao. The E side of Hsiach’uan Shan, between the NE end of the island and its E extremity, is indented by a shallow bight about 2.5 miles across

its mouth.
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 57

Pub. 161

3.4 Nan-ao Wan is a small but well-protected bay on the S coast

of the island. The bay is protected by a peninsula extending E

from the SW extremity of Hsia-ch’uan Shan and by the island

of Wang-fu Chou, which lies about 1.2 miles E of the E end of

the peninsula across the mouth of Nan-ao Wan.

3.4 Wang-fu Chou (Wang-fu Zhou), 186m high, is separated

from the S shore of the larger island by a channel about 0.5

mile wide which is encumbered by fishing stakes. Passage Islet

lies close off the SW end of Wang-fu Chou with a reef joining

the two. Rocks extend 100m W from Passage Islet and along

the W shore of Wang-fu Chou.

3.4 Depths of 9.2m are found in the S entrance to the bay which

leads to the W of the above mentioned off-lying rocks and to

the E of the peninsula on the SW end of Hsia-ch’uan Shan.

Depths of 7.3 to 8.2m are found in the middle of the bay NW

of Wang-fu Chou.

3.4 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in Nan-ao Wan, in 8.2m,

soft mud, about 0.5 mile off the W side of Wang-fu Chou. This

anchorage offers protection from E winds, but is exposed to S

winds and swells. Anchorage can be taken, in about 7.3m,

mud, in the middle of the W part of the bay. This anchorage

affords protection from S and SE winds.

3.4 Some sunken rocks lie off the E entrance point of Nan-ao

Wan. Between this point and the E extremity of the island, 3.2

miles NE, there is a shallow bight.

3.5 San-hsia Kou (21°47'N., 112°52'E.), the passage

between Shangchuang Dao and Hsia-ch’uan Shan and the

mainland to the N, leads SW from SW of Tong Kwa peninsula

to the island of Mang Chou, a distance of over 25 miles.

Depths of 4.8 to 5.5m are found in this unmarked fairway. 

3.5 The channel is entered from the E between the rocks off the

Tong Kwa peninsula and those NE of the NE end of Shangchuang Dao. The S entrance leads to the W of the islands off

the E coast of Hsia-ch’uan Shan on the W and the W coast of

Shangchuang Dao on the E. Depths of 9.2m shoaling to 5.5m

are found in this latter approach channel.

3.5 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets N and the ebb S

through the S approach channel. They are strongest at springs.

3.5 Anchorage.—Anchoring is possible in this passage, which

has a soft bottom.

3.5 Vessels can anchor, in 9 to 11m, soft bottom, in the S part of

the S approach to San-hsia Kou. Anchorage can also be taken,

in 4.3m, soft mud, between the SE coast of Hsia-ch’uan Shan

and P’ing Chou (21°36'N., 112°39'E.).

3.5 The W and SW approaches to San-hsia Kou which lead N of

Mang Zhou across the mouth of Pei-hai Wan and SW of Mang

Zhou along the NW coast of Hsia-ch’uan Shan, respectively,

have not been adequately surveyed.

3.5 Mang Zhou (21°40'N., 112°27'E.), an irregularly-shaped,

grass-covered island, 304m high, lies close within the 5m

curve about 4 miles SSE of the W entrance point of Pei-hai

Wan. A village, visible from SE, stands near the summit of the

island and a rock, 9m high, lies about 0.8 mile S of Mang

Zhou. Shoal ground, on which there are some rocks, extends

about 1.5 miles NE and E from the NE side of the island.

3.5 The coast between the SW extremity and the Tong Kwa

peninsula and T’an Wan, 29 miles WSW, is mountainous,

rugged, and irregular. The many bays formed by the indentations of the coast have not been closely examined. Kuang-hai

Wan, at the head of a bay 11 miles N of Shangchuang Dao, is a

supply center for fishing craft. A fishing harbor with a shipyard

for repair and construction of fishing craft is established.

3.5 The mouth of T’an Wan (21°44'N., 112°08'E.) is 13 miles

across. Mo-yang Chiang, a river with a rather large delta, flows

into the bay in its NW part. The main entrance to the river lies

between two forts about 0.5 mile apart. Local knowledge is

required to enter this bay as it is shallow, rock-strewn, and

relatively unexamined.

3.5 Mud flats extend a considerable distance off this entire

portion of the coast.

Off-lying Islands

3.6 Dongdafan Shi (Tung-fan Shih) (21°27'N.,

112°22'E.), a barren white rock, 61m high, and appearing as a

junk with one sail, lies farthest offshore of the islands in this

portion of the sector. It has a steep summit and is prominent.

Tung-hsiao-fan Shih, a high rock, lies 0.5 mile N of Dongdafan

Shi and a rock awash lies between the two islets. 

3.6 Explosives grounds, with reported depths of 24m and 25m,

lie approximately 1.5 miles W and 1.2 miles SSE of Dongdafan Shi.

3.6 Nanpeng Dao (Nan-P’eng) over 244m high near its W end,

is located 12 miles WNW of Dongdafan Shi. Huangchengshan,

a rounded islet, lies 3.8 miles W of Nanpeng Shi. Breakers

have been reported on the shoal S of the island and in the area

of two above-water rocks lying 1.8 miles SW of Huangchengshan.

3.6 Enhuo (Erh-huo), a rocky islet, 148m high, lies 4 miles

NNW of Nanpeng Dao. Sunken rocks lie close off its W and

SE ends and a rocky islet lies between it and Li-t’ou-t’ieh,

about 1 mile E.

3.6 Dahuo (Ta-huo) (21°39'N., 112°07'E.), 129m high, lies in

about the middle of the mouth of T’an Wan. It appears as a

saddle when viewed from the SW. A rock awash lies about 1

mile SW of this island.

3.7 Hailingshan Dao (Hai-ling-shan Tao) (21°38'N.,

111°54'E.) is a rather large mountainous island whose N side

forms the SW side of T’an Wan as well as the SE side of Yangpien Hai. The waters N of the island have not been closely

examined. Near the center, is the island’s summit, Sugar Loaf,

which is over 400m high.

3.7 The SW extremity of the island is a low, sandy point with a

drying sand bank extending SW from it for about 0.5 mile.

Two islets with numerous sunken rocks around them lie on this

bank. The S coast of the island extends about 13 miles ENE

and is slightly indented. Reefs, shoals, and drying flats extend

off this coast from about 2.5 miles E of the SW end up to the E

extremity, Hailingshan Dao, which is marked by a 223m high

hill and a red patch of sand visible from SE.

3.7 Hailingshan Gang (Hai-ling-shan Chiang) (21°45'N.,

111°39'E.) is a bay of moderate depth, encumbered by shoals,

lying between the W side of Hailingshan Dao, and the mainland to the W. 

3.7 Winds—Weather.—Southwest winds predominate in summer, when rainstorms are frequent. Northeast winds predominate in winter, when fog is prevalent. Northeast winds are usually experienced during the approach of a typhoon.
58 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

3.7 Tides—Currents.—The tide sets NE on the rising tide at a

rate of 1.3 knots and SW on the falling tide at a rate of 2.5

knots.

3.7 Pilotage.—Pilots board 1 mile SW of Mawei Zhou.

3.7 Anchorage.—The anchorage is sheltered from NE, E, and

SE winds, but during NW and N winds, considerable swell is

experienced. Vessels wishing to use this anchorage should

obtain permission from the proper authorities well in advance.

Local knowledge is essential for this anchorage.

3.7 A quarantine anchorage and a designated anchorage have

been established 1 mile SW and 2.5 miles WSW respectively,

from Mawei Zhou. 

3.8 Shuangshan Dao (Shuang Shan) (21°33'N.,

111°41'E.) is comprised of two islets, 64m high, that lie in the

SW of a bay indenting the coast to the W of Hailingshan Dao.

A rocky spit, extending E from the mainland, encloses and

extends beyond these islets. The Rugged Mountains, which

attain a height of nearly 914m, lie inland in this vicinity.

3.8 The coast, from Shungyu Zui (Shuang-yu Tsui), a low sandy

point about 3.2 miles SW of Shuangshan Dao, to the mouth of

Shui-lung Chiang, 31 miles W, is very irregular and fringed by

offshore reefs and islets. Most of this coastline has not been

closely examined and mariners should remain well offshore.

Continuing W and WSW to the Huang-p’o Chiang, a distance

of about 30 miles, the coast is low and relatively regular, but

incompletely surveyed. Vessels should give this coast a wide

berth.

3.8 A pinnacle-shaped feature on Shuangyu Zui, 38m high, is

reported to be prominent. A reef, with some rocky islets on it,

extends 1.3 miles SW from this point. The entrance to the

narrow inlet N of this reef is foul.

3.8 Qing Zhou (Ch’ing Chou) (21°29'N., 111°28'E.), 126m high

and covered with bushes and grass, is located 2 miles S of a

rocky peninsula which marks the E entrance of a bay. Depths

of 7.3 to 11m are found in the unobstructed sections of the

outer part of this bay, but the inner part is mostly shallow.

3.9 Xiaozhu Zhou (Ta-chu Chou) (21°26'N., 111°22'E.),

87m high, lies 0.5 mile NNE of Dazhu Zhou and foul ground

extends 1.8 miles farther NNE. Reefs and rocks are found N,

NW, S, and SW of Qing Zhou and N and NE of Xiaozhu Zhou. 

3.9 Anchorage, in 7.3 to 11m, fine sand, can be taken about 0.5

mile or more W of the latter island. The anchorage is exposed

to the Southwest Monsoon, but offers some protection from the

Northeast Monsoon.

3.9 The coast immediately N of the above anchorage trends N to

SW and terminates at its SW end in a triangular-shaped

peninsula called Lien-t’ou. The NE end of the peninsula is

joined to the mainland by a sandy isthmus. The S side of Lient’ou is hilly and has a rounded appearance from the E. Sie Ho

Point, the S extremity of the peninsula, is located about 2.5

miles SSE of its N extremity.

3.9 Caution.—An SBM lies about 5.5 miles SE of Xiaozhu

Zhou. A submarine oil pipeline extends 8 miles NW from the

SBM to the coast. Navigation is prohibited within 1 mile of the

SBM and the pipeline.

3.9 Sie Ho Reef lies about 0.5 mile off the SE side of Lien-t’ou

and extends 1 to 2 miles ESE from Sie Ho Point. An abovewater rock lies near its center. Po-p’i Shih, a large white rock,

lies about 0.5 mile SW of the above point. A drying rock lies

close W of Po-p’i Shih and a sunken rock lies about 0.5 mile

off the W side of Lien-t’ou, 1 mile NW of Sie Ho Point.

3.9 Hsiao-fang-chi Tao, a very small islet, 32m high, lies 1.5

miles W of Po-p’i Shih with a sunken rock in the area between

the two as well as other sunken rocks lying nearly 0.5 mile off

the NW extremity of the former islet.

3.10 Dafangji Dao (Ta-fang-chi Tao) (21°23'N.,

111°11'E.) rises to a height of 122m about 2 miles SW of

Hsiao-fang-chi Tao. A shoal spit with a depth of 4.5m extends

1.5 miles N from the islet.

3.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken with some protection

from monsoons, in a depth of 11m, just N of an imaginary line

joining Dafangji Dao and Hsiao-fang-chi Tao. Heavy swells

roll into the anchorage during the strength of the monsoons.

3.10 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks lie about 2 miles S and 6

miles SSW of Dafangji Dao.

3.10 A shallow bank extends up to 4 miles off the mainland coast

to the N of the above anchorage. The E end of the bank dries.

Niu-mu Shih (Black Rocks) and Hua-wen Shih (Marble Rock)

lie to the W of the S end of the drying bank with the former

lying 4.8 miles NW and the latter 2.3 miles N, respectively, of

Hsiao-fang-chi Tao. These rocks are above-water and prominent.

3.11 Tien-pai Chiang is a small harbor located N of Lient’ou. It is entered through a channel leading between the abovementioned dangers and the W side of the peninsula. The harbor

is used only by junks and other small craft.

3.11 Shui-lung Chiang, another small coastal harbor used by

junks and small craft, lies with its narrow entrance about 8

miles W of the entrance to Tien-pai Chiang. The coast between

the two entrances is rather hilly, but has not been completely

examined. Chim Shan, a white hummock, 21m high, is located

midway along this coast. 

3.11 Shuidong (21°29'N., 111°05'E.), the port serving the city of

Maoming (21°50'N., 110°56'E.), is located inside the entrance

to a drying lagoon. The port is known locally as “Oil City.”

Shuidong SBM, lighted and equipped with a racon, is located

in position 21°21'N, 111°24'E. 

3.11 Currents run parallel to the coast, in either a SW or NE

direction.

3.11 Vessels approach from the S using an entry and departure

lane that is 5.5 miles wide and 12 miles long. A channel, 91m

wide with a depth of 9.4m and marked by buoys and ranges,

leads to the piers. The government general cargo berth is 189m

long. There is also a private general cargo berth, 244m long.

Both berths have a depth of 11m alongside. A private oil wharf

has depths of 7.5 to 11.9m alongside.

3.11 Vessels with a maximum draft of 7.5m can be accommodated. Vessel transits are allowed during daylight hours only.

3.11 Pilots board in the pilot and typhoon anchorage areas, which

are best seen on the chart. 

3.11 Caution.—A dangerous wreck is reported (2005) to lie

approximately 24 miles S of Shuidong SBM. 

3.11 Two 4.5m shoals lie close off the pier area.

3.11 Shoal ground, as defined by the 3m curve, extends up to 4

miles off this coast. The E end of this shoal ground dries. The

20m curve is charted 6.5 miles offshore.
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 59

Pub. 161

3.12 A narrow peninsula with its E end forming part of the

W side of the entrance channel to Shui-lung Chiang, extends

about 5 miles WSW to An Kang Shan. This bold cliff, 168m

high, is fronted by dangerous rocks extending 4 miles farther

WSW and about 1 mile offshore. Two prominent hills, 9 and

18m high, stand on the peninsula between its NE end and An

Kang Shan.

3.12 Between this hill and the mouth of the Huang-p’o Chiang,

about 24 miles WSW, the coast is low and has some red cliffs.

A 1.8m rocky patch lies 2.5 miles offshore in a position about

11.5 miles WSW of An Kang Shan. The 20m curve is charted

up to 16 miles offshore of this coast.

3.12 Huang-p’o Chiang has not been thoroughly examined.

Breakers have been reported as extending 3 miles seaward of

the river mouth. Ngchunyun, a small river port, lies about 5

miles within the river entrance. Light-draft vessels with local

knowledge can ascend the river as far as the port. A white fort

(21°14'N., 110°38'E.) stands on an island on the SW side of

Huang-p’o Chiang, and a peak, 183m high, lies 12.5 miles

NNW of the fort.

3.12 The coast from the mouth of this river for about 10 miles

SSW to the entrance of Zhanjiang Gang is low and sandy.

3.12 Leizhou Bandao is a large peninsula extending S from the S

coast of China between the parallels of 20°13'N and 21°25'N.

Its surface is undulating and deeply indented. Barren sand

dunes and scattered fishing villages are found along its coasts.

3.12 The E coast of the peninsula between Huang-p’o Chiang and

Caia-pei Chiao, 46 miles S, is indented by a wide bight to a

distance of about 25 miles. The coasts of the bight are flat and

muddy and are intersected by a number of small rivers. The

islands of Lin-hai Tao and Tung-hai Tao fill the N half of this

bight. The main entrance to Kuang-chou Wan, which is also

the entrance to the port of Chan-chiang, leads between these

two islands. The country backing Zhanjiang Gang is undulating and volcanic in origin.

3.12 The S portion of the bight is filled with shallow banks with

narrow channels between them. Much of this portion of the

bight is imperfectly surveyed. Rocks and reefs probably exist

within 10 miles of the SE coast of the peninsula.

3.12 The S coast of Leizhou Bandao is described with Qiongzhou

Haixia in paragraph 3.27.

3.13 Naozhou Dao (Nao Chao) (20°54'N., 110°35'E.) is a

rocky island with a barren summit, 85m high, marked by a

stone lighthouse which is prominent from all directions except

S. Sometimes this light is obscured by clouds. The island

appears as a flattened cone from seaward and is reportedly a

good radar target. Tung-pei Chiao, the NE point of the island,

and Chung Chiao, about 2.8 miles SSW, provide good radar

fixes. Sandhills, 12 to 15m high, stand on the N side of Naozhou Dao.

3.13 A conical tower, painted in black and white bands, stands on

the N coast of the island about 0.3 mile E of Pei-ch’ing T’ou,

the N extremity of the island.

3.13 The coasts of Naozhou Dao are irregular and are fringed

with drying banks which extend 0.2 to 0.8 mile offshore. Foul

ground consisting of sunken and drying reefs connected by

sand and mud shoals, extends 1 to 6 miles seaward from the SE

coast of the island. P’ang Chiao (Grand Plateau), 2.2 miles

SSE of Tung-nan Chiao, which is the SE extremity of Naozhou

Dao, dries 3.6m and is the highest reef within the foul area.

3.13 Naozhou Roadstead, lying to the SE of Kuang-chou Wan, is

formed by the N side of Naozhou Dao, the E side of Tung-hai

Tao, and the SE side of Lin-hai Tao. The main channel through

the roadstead allows vessels with a draft of about 11m to ride

the tide into Kuang-chou Wan. Vessels with a draft of less than

8m can enter and leave regardless of the tide. 

3.13 Kuang-chou Wan is reportedly accessible via a channel passing S and W of Naozhou Dao, but this approach is not authorized by Chinese authorities.

3.13 Longshui Ling (Wei-t’sui Ling) (21°02'N., 110°31'E.),

located 9 miles NW of the summit of Naozhou Dao and 1 mile

inland of the E coast of Tung-hai Tao, is 109m high and very

prominent. Its dark summit is fronted by light sand. Sand hills

lie between it and the coast. 

3.14 Hung Shan (21°04'N., 110°32'E.), 32m high, stands

2.5 miles N of Longshui Ling and 1 mile within the S entrance

point of Kuang-chou Wan. The latter is low, sandy, and

rounded. The N side of the entrance is marked by several

wooded hills which are prolonged toward the N by high sand

dunes. 

3.14 Ch’ing Ling (21°06'N., 110°33'E.), which is wooded only

on its S and W sides, is the most conspicuous of these hills. It

is 0.7 mile inland and shows a light, close to the W of which is

a prominent white house.

3.14 Caution.—During the Northeast Monsoon, the seas break

over the shoal ground that extends SE from the SE end of Linhai Tao and E from the NE end of Tung-hai Tao.

3.14 The coastal area S of Naozhou Dao, for a distance of about

22 miles to the N limit of the mined area in the E entrance to

Qiongzhou Haixia, is unsurveyed, and is probably dangerous

due to reefs and shoals.

3.14 Dangerous wrecks lie 11 miles S and SSE and 2 miles SSW

of Naozhou Dao.

Zhanjiang Gang

3.15 Zhanjiang Gang (Kuang-Chou Wan), a rather large

bay, is 6.5 miles long in an ESE-WNW direction. It is 5.5 miles

wide within its entrance. The navigable portion is reduced to a

comparatively narrow channel which in some places is only 0.2

mile wide between the shoals with which it is encumbered. The

entrance channel of the bay is about 1 mile wide between the

narrow drying banks which fringe the coast on either side.

3.15 The channel bottom for its entire length is of mud and sand.

The shores of the bay are low, sandy, and fronted nearly

everywhere by banks of soft drying mud. There are, however,

some red cliffs and some clumps of trees which shelter villages

along the shores of the bay.

3.15 Zhanjiang Vessel Traffic System (VTS).—Zhanjiang VTS

is in operation in the waters between “A2” lighted

buoy(20°59'27"N., 110°37'05"E.) and No. 46 lighted buoy

(21°10'55"N., 110°25'06"E.). The VTS provides the following

information on request:

1. Traffic information and schema.

2. Meteorological conditions.

3. Navigational assistance and advice.

3.15 Zhanjiang VTS may be contacted on VHF channels 8, 16,

and 65. 
60 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

3.15 Maxie He Chiang enters Kuang-chou Wan in its N part

abreast the island of Ta-ch’ing Tao.

3.15 Pilotage.—See the port description for Zhanjiang.

3.15 Regulations.—Vessels wishing to navigate within Chinese

waters should obtain the permission of the proper authorities

well in advance.

3.16 Islands.—Dongtoushan Dao (Tung-T’ou Shan)

(21°06'N., 110°24'E.), a rather large island, lies in the SW part

of the bay. There is a prominent white cone-shaped beacon on

the SE end of the island. A narrow and foul channel separates

the S side of Dongtoushan Dao from Yuan Chiao, a point on

the N end of Donghai Dao. The N and E sides of the island are

fronted by banks of rock and mud.

3.16 Teching Dao (Ta-ch’ing Tao) (21°09'N., 110°25'E.) is about

the same size as Tung-t’ou Shan, but is more regular in shape

and lies 3.2 miles N. It lies on the E side of the main channel

close E of the tanker piers. The island is cultivated and supports some villages. Hsi Chiao is the W extremity of Teching

Dao. A drying bank extends 1.2 miles SE of the island.

3.16 The tidal currents in the entrance of Zhanjiang Gang sometimes attain a rate of over 4 knots. They flow in the general

direction of the channel. However, seaward of the entrance,

particular care should be given to the set of lateral currents

during the Northeast Monsoon. These crosscurrents have been

reported to reach velocities of 8 knots.

3.16 Within the bay the tidal currents follow the general direction

of the main channel, except near the N end of Dongtoushan

Dao where the flood continues to set W into the channel off the

NW side of this island and the ebb sets in an opposite direction.

3.16 To the N of Dongtoushan Dao the tidal currents return to the

main channel directions. Velocities range from 1.2 to 2.5 knots

on the flood and reach 0.5 knot on the ebb.

3.17 Entrance channel.—From seaward, the entrance

channel has a least reported depth of 9.2m, but the range line

passes close aboard shoal patches, an obstruction, and across a

7.5m shoal patch charted 5.8 miles N of the range lights on

Naozhou Dao. A dangerous wreck (2009) lies close E of the

approach channel in position 21°02.7'N, 110°36.3'E. The

fairway passes N of Naozhou Dao, between Nansan Dao and

Donghai Dao, and through the estuary to the port of Zhanjiang. 

3.17 Several secondary channels exist in Zhanjiang Gang, but

should only be attempted by vessels with local knowledge.

Kuang-chou Wan

3.18 North side.—This shore, lying NW of Lin Shan, is

low and swampy. Chintzu Chiao, located 4 miles NW of Lin

Shan, is formed by red cliffs. Banks formed of sand, mud, and

rocks, some of which dry as much as 3.7m, extend from the

shore S to the fairway. These banks are charted.

3.19 South side.—This side of the bay begins with a low,

sandy point at the NE part of Donghai Dao. The shore to the

SW, for a distance of 2.5 miles, consists of broken cliffs up to

20m high. There are patches of rock along the shore. The coast

is then low and sandy as far as Yuan Chiao, where it again rises

to a low cliff.

3.19 The shoal ground and drying banks that front the N coast of

Donghai Dao force the main channel to a nearly NW-SE

direction. Fishing stakes may be found on these banks.

3.19 A rocky shoal forms the SW side of the fairway of the main

channel about 1 mile to the N of Dongtoushan Dao. In this

vicinity, the channel is about 0.3 mile wide.

3.20 West side.—The W side of the bay from Shitou Jiao

extends SW. A sand bank, which dries and has several scattered drying rocks on it, extends offshore forming the NW side

of a side channel and the W side of the main channel. Fisher’s

Rock, which dries 4m, lies 2 miles SSW of Shitou Jiao.

3.20 Shitou Jiao (21°09'N., 110°23'E.) can be identified by the

oil tanks at the foot of the main tanker jetty extending from it.

3.20 Caution.—Vessels should have little trouble as long as they

stay in the main channel and adhere to the guidance of the pilot

when moving off the range lines or out of the buoyed passages.

Most turns and dangers near the fairway are marked by buoys

and can be cleared by staying on the ranges.

3.20 Fishing stakes are found bordering the main channel in

various locations along its routes.

Zhanjiang (21°12'N., 110°24'E.)

World Port Index No. 57770

3.21 The port of Zhanjiang (Chan-Chiang) is situated at the

NE part of the Leizhou Peninsula of Guangdong Province, on

the W bank of Maxie He Chiang (Wu-li-shan Chiang). 

3.21 The port is protected against typhoons, but during the Northeast Monsoon, conditions caused by strong onshore winds can

be difficult. The inability of a pilot to berth a vessel during this

period can cause considerable delays. However, this deep water

port handles much of the trade of southern China and it also

serves as a base for offshore oil drilling and deep sea fishing

industry.

3.21 Winds—Weather.—The port has a subtropical climate with

long hot summers and short winters. 

3.21 Winds follow the patterns of the Northeast Monsoon and

Southwest Monsoon. In summer, winds from E and SE prevail

Zhanjiang
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 61

Pub. 161

while in winter they are NW through N to NE. Rainfall is

heavy from May to September.

3.21 Typhoons strike the port most frequently between July and

November and bring winds reaching force 8 to 12 on the

Beaufort Scale. Although the harbor provides shelter during

these storms, cargo operations are often interrupted.

3.21 Fog occurs frequently between dawn and mid-morning during winter and spring. The fog is infrequently dense, however,

and does not affect aviation or cargo operations to any great

extent. There is little fog in summer and autumn.

3.21 Tides—Currents.—The tides within the port are semidiurnal, but irregular. They rise 3.8m at springs and 2.9m at

neaps.

3.21 Off Zhanjiang, the tidal current on the rise flows roughly

NW following the channel at a rate of 1.2 to 2.5 knots. It begins

2.5 hours after LW at Naozhou Dao. When falling, the

direction is SE beginning 1 hour 12 minutes after HW at

Naozhou Dao. The velocity on the fall is between 0.5 and 1.5

knots.

3.21 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels of up to 70,000 dwt can be

accommodated at the port. The port is divided into three

working areas totalling 2,767m of wharfage. The majority of

the berths, 23 of the 29, are deepwater berths for vessels

exceeding 10,000 tons. There are an additional 18 anchorge

berths, in depths of 13 to 34m.

3.21 Nine berths in Area No. 1 have alongside depths of 10.9m

and can accommodate vessels of up to 10,000 tons. Two berths

in Area No. 2 can accommodate vessels of up to 35,000 tons.

3.21 There is a petroleum jetty with a 100,000 ton capacity and an

alongside depth of 11.9m; four vessels of 25,000 to 50,000

tons can be berthed at the pier. There are two container berths

able to accommodate vessels of up to 15,000 dwt.

3.21 The controlling depth of the approach channel is 11m at HW

and 9.5m at LW. The maximum permitted drafts are:

1. Bulk carriers—10.4m.

2. General cargo vessels—9.2m.

3. Tankers—11.7m.

3.21 The general cargo area is situated 1 mile N of the oil jetty.

There are 14 berths here and a ro-ro camber for local ferries.

3.21 A bulk terminal capable of handling coal, ore, grain, or

phosphate vessels of up to 35,000 dwt, is situated 1 mile N of

the oil pier. It is approached by a narrow channel. A new

facility, able to accommodate ore carriers of up to 400,00 dwt

is expected to become operational in 2011. 

3.21 A bridge having a vertical clearance of 48m is centered in

position 21°15.1'N, 110°25.1E. 

3.21 Aspect.—When entering the port proper, the oil tanks and

the piers of the petroleum complex are conspicuous on the W

bank of the Maxie He Chiang. Two breakwaters, parallel to

each other and to the tanker jetty, extend E from shore close N

of the N tanker berth which extends N from the main jetty.

3.21 Zhanjiang Gang Light Vessel (21°04'N., 110°35'E.) marks

the S limit to Zhangjiang Harbor; the light vessel is equipped

with a racon. 

3.21 Shoal ground and drying banks extend into the river from

both shores. Some drying and above-water rocks stand on these

banks. Vessels are, therefore, advised to stay to mid-channel

unless directed otherwise by the pilot.

3.21 Alouette Bank (21°11'N., 110°24'E.) a rocky shoal that

dries less than 0.3m at its S end, lies on the NW side of the

fairway, 1 mile SSW of Tung-ying Chiao. A 1.5m patch lying

at the end of a foul bank, lies 1.5 mile SW of Alouette Bank.

3.21 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels

entering or leaving the harbor. Vessels should indicate which

pilot anchorage they intend to use when requesting the pilot.

3.21 The pilot will board inbound vessels at the First or Second

Pilot Anchorage Area, depending on draft and familiarity with

the port. The First Pilot Anchorage Area is used by vessels

lacking local knowledge and/or entering with drafts in excess

of 9.5m. Vessels with a draft of less than 9.5m and in

possession of local knowledge may board the pilot at the

Second Pilot Anchorage Area, which is also the quarantine

anchorage. Both anchorages are best seen on the appropriate

chart. 

3.21 Port officials will board with the pilot.

3.21 Signals.—A signal and lookout station with a signal mast is

situated close inshore about halfway between the root of the

Shih-t’ou petroleum jetty and the S end of the main cargo

wharf. Strong wind and strom signals are shown in the accompanying table titled Zhanjiang—Strong Wind and Storm

Signals.

3.21 Anchorage.—The outermost anchorage, First Pilot Anchorage Area, is situated at the intersection of Longshuiling Hangdao and Doulongoun Beighangdao leading tracks. The holding

ground is good in soft mud, but the anchorage is exposed to the

Northeast Monsoon. Alternatively, most vessels embark pilots

at Second Pilot Anchorage Area, which also has good holding

ground; this anchorage lies off the N side of the fairway, at the

intersection of Entrance Channel and Nansan-dao Xihangdao.

A yellow lighted buoy marks the shoal limit NE of the

anchorage. Vessels with a maximum draft of 10.3m can use

Second Pilot Anchorage Area.

3.21 There are 19 anchor berths, in depths of 13 to 34m, designated by the harbormaster, most of them with good holding

ground, sand and mud. However, mariners should note the

1.6m shoal within the Oil Tanker Anchorage lying 1 mile E of

the bulk terminal.

3.21 Anchor berths No. 17, No. 18, and No. 19 lie on the N side

of Entrance Channel off the SW extremity of Nansan Dao.

There are several anchorages for tankers, situated 1 mile S of

Shai Wei (21°09.5'N., 110°25.0'E.), and 1.5 miles NNE of the

same point.

3.21 Anchorage is prohibited in the cable area NE of the city.

Zhanjiang—Strong Wind and Storm Signals

Day signal Night signal Meaning

Winds not associated with a typhoon

Cylinder, disposed vertically Two green lights, disposed vertically Winds over force 6-7 within 6 hours

Diamond, disposed vertically One red light over one green light Winds over force 8 within 24 hours
62 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

3.21 There are a number of mooring buoys for use by vessels of

10,000 tons during typhoons.

3.21 Directions.—Approach Naozhou Dao from the E, keeping

Doulong Cun (20°56'N., 110°38'E.) Range Lights, in line

bearing 276°45', and passing N of Lighted Buoy No. 1, alter

course to head for Longshui Ling Range Lights, in line

303°45'. If the range lights are unrecognizable, then steer for

Longshui Ling summit bearing 299°; however, a W set towards

Naozhou Dao is usually encountered on this leg. The dark

summit fronted by light sand is unmistakable, and sometimes

appears to rise from the clouds. A vessel choosing First Pilot

Anchorage Area should use the N section of the anchorage area

during the Northeast Monsoon, and the W section when

anchoring with a flood tide. 

3.21 A vessel proceeding to cross the bar continues on the above

course and from First Pilot Anchorage Area brings Doulong

Cun Range Lights in line bearing 167° astern when steering on

347°. This course should lead a vessel through the bar, between

lighted buoys until about 4 miles from Nasan Dao Front Range

Light, when course should be altered to 325° in alignment with

Nansan Dao Range Lights. 

3.21 A regular mid-channel dredging operation is conducted to

maintain a least depth of 9m in Doulongcun Beihangdao channel bar (in the vicinity between Lighted Buoy No. 2 and

Lighted Buoy No. 3). An obstruction lies about 0.2 mile NNW

of Lighted Buoy No. 2 with a 6.5m depth above it; another

shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, lies on the W limit of the channel

and 4.7 miles SSE of Nasan Dao Front Range Light.

3.21 When Hou Ling bears 259°, or at night when Longshui Ling

Front Range Light changes from red to white, alter course to

284°30' and proceed through the entrance channel.

3.21 There are three anchorage berths, lying midway between the

10m contour S of Nansan Dao and mid-channel. The Second

Pilot Anchorage Area lies 0.5 mile W of the westernmost anchoring berth. Fishing stakes are usually encountered on both

sides of this channel; a dangerous wreck lies about 0.2 mile

ESE of Lighted Buoy No. 10

3.21 Caution.—A dangerous wreck is reported (2006) to lie less

than 1 mile E of the First Pilot Anchorage Area.

3.21 Lesser depths than charted have been reported in the

entrance channel and adjacent waters. Mariners should note the

additional dangerous wrecks, best seen on the chart, within this

part of the approach. 

3.21 Some of the range lights within the port may be obscured by

trees. Vessels may experience considerable scend in the shallowest part of the channel. Fishing piles encumber both sides

of the fairway.

3.21 Mariners should exercise caution due to numerous charted

obstructions and dangers between Zhangjiang Gang and Hailingshan Gang, some lying up to 70 miles offshore.

3.22 Maxie He Chiang, above Zhanjiang, maintains its

width and deep-draft navigability as far N as the island of

Diaoshun Dao, a distance of about 6 miles. To the N of this island, the river is traversed by smaller vessels with local knowledge and junks as far as the village of Shih-men (21°24'N.,

110°22'E.).

3.22 West bank.—Between Zhanjiang and Ping-lo T’ou

(21°14'N., 110°24'E.), 2 miles NNE, the shore is indented

about 0.5 mile by a mangrove-fringed bight. The bight, which

is encumbered with fishing stakes, is filled with drying mud

flats.

3.22 Bonheur Tower, which is prominent, stands near the shore 1

mile NNW of the N piers at Zhanjiang Between the tower and

Ping-lo T’ou, there are two prominent hills, 12m high, standing

close together. Ping-lo T’ou is the E extremity of a range of

hills. Nearly the entire W shore is fronted by mud flats that dry.

3.22 A chimney stands on the coast near the NW end of Pese

Cliffs which begin about 2.5 miles NW of Ping-lo T’ou and

extend NW. A black and white banded square tower, 7m high,

stands 0.5 mile NW of the chimney. Another chimney stands

close SE of the tower.

3.22 Due N of Pese Cliffs lies the island of Diaoshun Dao. An

extensive flat lies between the W side of the island and the

mainland to the W. A causeway extends to the SW end of the

island from the vicinity of the above mentioned black and

white tower. Another causeway joins the N end of the island

with the mainland to the N.

3.22 A rocky shoal, with depths of 1.2m to 1.8m at its outer end,

extends about 1 mile SSE from the S end of Diaoshun Dao.

3.22 A steelworks has been built on Diaoshun Dao. There is a

2,000m long quay on the SE end of the island, at which there

are five berths with alongside depths of 9.1m. A bulk-loading

berth lies at the NE end of the quay.

3.22 Anchorage can be taken in the river in a position about 1.3

miles SE of the SE end of the island.

3.23 Between Tung-ying Chiao (21°12'N., 110°25'E.),

Winds associated with a typhoon

T-shape Three white lights, disposed vertically Tropical storm within 48 hours

Ball One white light over one green light 

over one white light Winds force 6-7 within 24 hours

Cone, point up One white lights over two green lights Winds over force 8 within 12 hours

Two cones, points together Three green lights, disposed vertically Storm force winds not exceeding force 12 

within 12 hours

Cross One red light over one green light 

over one red light Typhoon

Zhanjiang—Strong Wind and Storm Signals

Day signal Night signal Meaning
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 63

Pub. 161

which is rather steep-to, and a point 2 miles NE, the E side of

the Maxie He Chiang consists of low and level cliffs. Inland

there is cultivation, and several villages lie hidden by trees. A

naval installation extends N from the point. A drying bank

fringes the shore N of Tung-ying Chiao and fishing stakes are

sometimes found on the banks.

3.23 Between the point located 2 miles NNE of Tung-ying Chiao

and Point Tumulus, about 1.5 miles NNW, there is a bight,

most of which dries. A hill, 9m high, stands on Point Tumulus.

3.23 A sand bank lies about 1.5 miles NNW of this point, about

0.3 mile offshore. A drying rock lies about 0.3 mile SW of the

S end of the sand bank.

3.23 Between Point Tumulus and Chenal de Potao about 2.2 miles

N, the E side of the river is bordered by mangroves. Mud flats,

which dry, extend up to 0.3 mile offshore and generally fringe

the coast N to Shih-men.

Leizhou Bandao

3.24 Hsi-nan Hang-men is a partially unsurveyed and unmarked channel which leads S of Nao Chao and Tung-hai Tao

and NE of Leizhou Bandao. The channel is entered from the

SE between the foul ground off the SE of Nao Chao, which is

nearly always visible during daylight hours, and the banks off

to the E of the peninsula. The entrance is 3 miles wide.

3.24 Caution.—Hsi-nan Hang-men and the branch channels

leading from it are used only under favorable conditions by

vessels with local knowledge, most of which are also light

draft. Although the channels are described here in general, due

to their unsurveyed nature and Chinese regulations governing

territorial waters, their use is not recommended.

3.25 Chi-moa Sha (20°51'N., 110°31'E.) is an extensive

bank which nearly dries and forms the S side of Hsi-nan Hangmen. Near the SE end of this bank, a branch channel, Tung-pei

Hang-men, leads to the NE between Naozhou Dao and the

reefs and foul ground to the SE. The entrance, between two

1.8m patches and the channel, lies SE of Naozhou Dao

Roadstead in the approaches to Kuang-chou Wan. This channel

should be attempted only at LW when the dangers are most

visible.

Nao-chou-hsi-pei Hang-men, a channel connecting the inner

part of Hsi-nan Hang-men with the approach to Kuang-chou

Wan, leads along the W and NW sides of Naozhou Dao. It is

entered from S between Hsi-nan T’an and Ma-ti T’an where

there is a least depth of 5.3m over a width of 0.5 mile in the

fairway. The channel narrows to about 0.25 mile within the

entrance for a good part of its length as it leads between the

banks of Kan-hsin T’an and Hsi-pei T’an.

3.25 Swatchway Channel, with a least depth of 2.8m in the fairway, lies between Kan-hsin T’an and the shoal ground fringing

the SE side of Tung-hai Tao.

3.25 Mandarin Bay is entered at the NW head of Hsi-nan Hangmen. This bay fills the bight on the S of Tung-hai Tao and on

the E of Leizhou Bandao. The shores of the bay dry nearly all

around. However, a narrow channel does lead from its W part,

N along the W coast of Tung-hai Tao and into Kuang-chou

Wan. A river enters the SW corner of the bay, but access to it is

shoal.

3.25 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents are divided by

Naozhou Dao. One current passes N of the island and the other

S. In Nao-chou-hsi-pei Hang-men the tidal currents attain a

rate of 2.5 knots at springs, changing about 1 hour after high

and low water. The set is to the S on the rising tide and to the N

on the falling tide. The flood current setting NW through Hsinnan Hang-men meets the flood current setting S through Naochou-hsi-pei Hang-men in the channel abreast of Tan-shui;

they separate at the same spot.

3.25 To the SW of Chi-mao Sha, the coast of Leizhou Bandao

(Lei-chou Pan-tao) between Pei-kou-keng Chiao (20°51'N.,

110°20'E.) and Malu about 18 miles SSE, is low, irregular, and

indented by shallow creeks. The coast has not been thoroughly

examined and shoal banks extend as far as 18 miles offshore.

3.26 Malu (20°35'N., 110°28'E.), a small port, stands on

the S side of Wai-lo-pou Chiang. Between this port and Chiapei Chiao, 8 miles SSE, the coast consists of sand hills.

3.26 Off the entrance of Malu, the tidal currents set strongly

across the channel on both sides. The maximum rate of the

current is reported as 2.5 knots.

3.26 Chia-pei Chiao (Nui-pi Chiao) (Gopai Point) (20°29'N.,

110°32'E.), the NE entrance point of Qiongzhou Haixia, forms

the E extremity of Leizhou Bandao. The point is low and is

backed by sand hills rising to heights of 21 to 24m. A mound,

48m high, lies 3 miles SSW of Chia-pei Chiao.

3.26 Hei Chiao (Black Rocks) (20°30'N., 110°32'E.) which dry

1.2m, are located about 1.5 miles NNE of Chia-pei Chiao. A

shoal that dries in places lies 3 miles E of the same point.

3.26 Caution.—The N limit of a mined area lies at the E end of

Qiongzhou Haixia and extends E about 32 miles from Heichiao; the area then extends along the inner route close off

Leizhou Bandao to the S of Hei-chiao and could be dangerous.

Qiongzhou Haixia

3.27 The S side of Leizhou Bandao forms the N side of

Qiongzhou Haixia (Hainan Strait) (20°10'N., 110°10'E.) and

the N coast of Hainan Dao (Hai-nan Tao) forms the S side of

the strait. The waterway has a least width of about 10 miles

between the peninsula and the island and is about 47 miles

long. The E limit of the strait is defined as a line drawn from

Mulan Tou Light (20°09'N., 110°41'E.) in a 320° direction to

Shanguohou Light (20°25'N., 110°31'E.) on Leizhou Bandao.

The W limit is a line drawn between Lingao Jiao (Lin-kao

Chiao) Light (20°01'N., 109°43'E.) and Jiaowei Jiao (ChiaoWei Chiao) Light (20°13'N., 109°55'E.). This passage is declared to be Chinese inland waters and regulated by the Qiongzhou Haixia Authority. 

3.27 Depths—Limitations.—Rocks and shoals lie in the approaches to the E and W entrances of the strait, with the E entrance being far more encumbered with dangers than the W.

The offshore approaches to the S coast of the peninsula and to

the N coast of the island within the strait are mostly clear. The

inshore approaches, however, are obstructed in many places.

Fringing reefs are prevalent in some of the bays indenting the

peninsula and along many parts of the N coast of Hainan Dao.

3.27 Both coasts bordering Qiongzhou Haixia share a similar

aspect. They are indented by many bays separated by capes and

points of varying configuration. The heads of these bays are

mostly shoal and some are bordered by mud and sand flats.
64 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

Some have detached dangers and others have lagoons extending inland from them.

3.27 The coast is fronted predominantly by sandy beaches

although, there are short stretches of cliffs with scattered rocky

points. In most places the coast is backed by low sand dunes

and sand hills covered with scrub growth. Scattered palms and

other trees grow near the coast while a wide coastal plain extends inland. This low rolling plain is broken in places by isolated hills rising between 91m and 244m.

3.27 The streams which discharge into the sea are navigable only

by small, native craft.

3.27 Haikou is the only commercial port of importance within the

strait. It lies on the N coast of Hainan Dao about midway

through the strait.

3.27 Regulations.—Application for authorization to transit the

strait should be made in accordance with established regulations. If it is necessary for nonmilitary vessels to transit the

strait, they should execute the following procedures.

3.27 Application for permission to enter the limits of Qiongzhou

Haixia should be submitted to the Qiongzhou Haixia Authority

48 hours prior to entry. Vessels requesting permission to transit

must include:

1. Vessel name.

2. Nationality.

3. Date and time of passage.

4. Gross tonnage.

5. Ports of departure and destination.

6. Speed.

7. Hull color and funnel markings.

3.27 Upon receipt of authorization to pass through the strait, and

24 hours prior to entering the strait or within 2 hours of sailing

the port of departure, the vessel shall report to the Qiongzhou

Haixia authority the exact time of anticipated entry.

3.27 Vessels must not exceed a maximum speed of 10 knots

within the strait. Upon entry into the strait, if signals originating from the bank or from a naval vessel are sighted, the transiting vessel shall reply immediately and comply with the request conveyed by the signals. When passing through Qiongzhou Haixia, the vessel should adhere strictly to the reported

time schedule and remain within the stipulated navigational

area.

3.27 When passing through Qiongzhou Haixia, the vessel may

not normally operate its radar, take photographs, conduct surveys or engage in acts contrary to the laws of the People’s Republic of China. If in the course of navigation, conditions such

as dense fog or a storm are encountered which severely restrict

visibility and necessitate the use of radar, the vessel involved

shall submit a report to the Qiongzhou Haixia Authority stating

the reasons for wishing to operate its radar and the vessel’s

present position and speed. Not until approval is given may the

Qiongzhou Haixia
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 65

Pub. 161

vessel operate its radar. If at that time conditions are critical

and the ship’s navigational safety is endangered, it may submit

a report of the circumstances and operate its radar immediately

and afterward send a detailed report to the Qiongzhou Haixia

Authority for its records showing the time that the radar was

used and describing the circumstances and events concerning

its operation.

3.27 A non-military vessel which violates these regulations shall

be treated as follows:

1. Prior to its entry into the strait, the vessel may be

ordered to desist from entering the regulated area, reverse its

course, and sail around Hainan Dao, or wait until it has

satisfactorily completed formalities to pass through the strait

and receive approval before resuming its passage.

2. If the vessel has already entered the regulated area, it

may be ordered to heave-to, be escorted to the port of Haikou

for an inspection to be conducted, and be penalized in

accordance with the findings of the inspection. After the

inspection or delay, depending on circumstances, the vessel

may be allowed to transit the strait, or may be ordered to

leave, in which case it will be escorted out of the strait under

guard.

3.27 It should be clearly understood that the publication of the

above regulations is solely for information relative to the navigational safety of shipping, and in no way constitutes a legal

recognition by the United States of the international validity of

any rule, regulation, or proclamation so published.

3.27 Additional cautionary notes and regulations concerning navigation in the vicinity of China’s coastline are found in paragraph 1.1, paragraph 1.2, and paragraph 2.1, as well as in Pub.

120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and

Southeast Asia.

3.27 The Qiongzhou Haixia Vessel Traffic System (VTS) is in

operation within Qiongzhou Haixia. Participation in the VTS is

mandatory for passenger vessels and all vessels of 200 grt or

greater. Anchoring in the VTS area is prohibited. 

3.27 The Qiongzhou Straits Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) has

jurisdiction over the waters between the following lines:

1. East limit—the area within a circle having a radius of

22 miles centered on Mulan Tou Light (20°10'N, 110°41'E.). 

2. West limit—a line drawn between Lingao Jiao Light

(20°01'N., 109°43'E.) and Denglou Jiao Light (20°13'N.,

109°55'E.). 

3.27 Vessels must maintain a continuous watch on VHF channels

8 and 16, and use VHF channel 25 for business communications. Vessels with any emergency situation must report immediately to the VTC. Reports must be made to Qiongzhou Haixia VTC on VHF channel 8 when crossing the following reporting lines:

1. East Reporting Line—delimited by an arc, having a

radius of 22 miles, centered on Mulan Tou Light (20°10'N,

110°41'E.).

2. West Reporting Line—a line connecting the following

points:

a. Lingao Jiao Light (20°01N., 109°43'E.).

b. Denglou Jiao Light (20°13'N., 109°55'E.).

3. South Reporting Line—a line connecting Mulan Tao

Light and position 20°03'N, 110°00'E.

4. North Reporting Line—a line connecting Sandun

Lighted Buoy (20°12'N., 110°05'E.) and Paiwei Jiao Lighted

Beacon (20°15'N., 110°17'E.).

3.27 The N channel of Qiongzhou Haixia has a non-IMO adopted

traffic separation scheme (TSS) in force. The TSS, with a least

depth of 8m, is marked by lighted buoys and runs to the NW

from Lighted Buoy No. 11 and Lighted Buoy 13. There are two

dangerous wrecks which lie approximately 1 mile S of Lighted

Buoy No. 1.

3.27 Caution.—Although, the hydrography in the E entrance and

approach to Qiongzhou Haixia seems to offer many usable

channels between the various shoals and banks, the entire area

is reported to be mined. However, a channel has been swept for

use on a risk-acceptable basis and presents the best route

through the shoals. The channel is buoyed and begins at Buoy

No. 1 (21°15'N., 111°05'E.) and leads through Chung Shui-Tao

passage.

3.27 A smaller minefield is reported to obstruct the W approaches

to the strait. For details of the limits of both mined areas and

the buoyed channel through the E area, see Pub. 120, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast

Asia..

3.27 Tide rips exist throughout the strait, particularly abreast

Mulan Tou. Some of these rips have the appearance of shoals

and are discolored by vegetable matter. When the currents set

W in the vicinity of Mulan Tou there is a strong set toward the

reef extending from this point. Currents in this vicinity attain

rates of 3 to 5 knots.

Qiongzhou Haixia—East Entrance

3.28 The sea usually breaks on the shoal parts of the

dangerous banks at the E approach to the strait during the

Northeast Monsoon and when there is a swell from E. These

banks extend as far as 20 miles NE from a line joining the E

entrance points of the strait. Although there are deep channels

between the banks, vessels should proceed with extreme

caution as tidal currents are uncertain and most of the shoal

heads are unmarked.

3.28 Zhong Shuidao leads between Pei-fang Tui (20°19'N.,

110°54'E.), an extensive shoal oriented ENE-WSW with a least

depth of 0.2m on its W end, and Nau-Fang Tui (20°12'N.,

110°52'E.), another extensive shoal bank with a dangerous

wreck on its NE extremity. The channel then leads S of Hsifang Tui (20°17'N., 110°40'E.), which has several dangerous

sunken rocks on its SE edge, to the designated navigable area

of the strait as previously described in the regulations in

paragraph 3.27. This middle channel is the only channel open

to foreign shipping. The channel is swept through the mined

area and is marked by a safe water buoy at its entrance. The

rest of the channel is marked by lighted buoys. This channel is

the widest and deepest channel in the E approach to Qiongzhou

Haixia. Although the dangers are not all marked, the channel is

considered the best channel in the approach to the strait from

the E and its use is mandatory.

3.28 Pei Shui-tao, with a least depth of 10.4m at the E part of its

fairway, leads between Pei-hsi Tui on its NW side and Hsi-fang

Tui and Pei-fang Tui on its S and SE sides. Several isolated

shoals and detached patches with depths of 8.2 to 9.4m, lie

throughout the channel, and are best seen on the appropriate

chart.

3.28 The use of this channel is not recommended because the
66 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

dangers are not marked, the currents are strong, the channel is

not straight and the use of a channel other than Zhong Shuidao

is a contravention of local regulations for foreign shipping.

Additionally, Pei Shui-tao traverses a reported mine danger

area.

3.28 Pei-hsi Tui, with a least depth of 2m, lies with its center

approximately 13 miles NNE of Mulan Tou. An extensive

shoal area, which has not been thoroughly examined, lies N of

this bank and extends about 12.5 miles ENE from the NE end

of Lo-t’o Sha (20°22'N., 110°35'E.).

3.28 In general, the 20m curve lies less than 2 miles from the

salient points of the N and S shores of the strait, except where

bays indent the coast.

3.28 Caution.—Visibility may be quickly and dangerously restricted by fog in Xiongzhou Haixia, particularly in the January

to March monsoon season. 

Qiongzhou Haixia—West Entrance

3.29 Several sandy banks lie in the W approach to the

strait, some with shoal heads. Pei Sha is a large shoal, about 1.3

miles wide with a least depth of 5.4m, that extends about 11

miles E from a position 20 miles NE of Bingma Jiao (Ping-ma

Chiao) (19°55'N., 109°18'E.).

3.29 In approaching the strait from the W or departing to the W,

the best channel leads S of Pei Sha. Vessels should give the

NW coast of the island a berth of about 5 miles to ensure

avoiding the coastal bank W of Lingao Jiao (Lin-kao Chiao)

(20°01'N., 109°43'E.) Two dangerous wreck lies 9 miles and

15 miles WNW of Lingao Jiao. Care should also be taken to

avoid the wrecks lying NW of Bingma Jiao. Additionally,

anchoring in the vicinity of the reported minefield in this area

would not be prudent. 

3.29 A shoal, with a least depth of 5.4m lies 5 miles N of the E

end of Pei Sha in a position lying between 16 and 20 miles W

of Jiaowei Jiao. A bank with several shoal heads extends NW

from a position about 7.5 miles W of the same point. The NW

shoal head lies 25 miles NW of the point and has a depth of

7m. The SE shoal head with a least depth of 8.5m, reported

(1962), lies about 7 miles W of Jiaowei Jiao.

3.29 For information concerning the Gulf of Tonkin N and W of

the entrance to Qiongzhou Haxia, see Sector 4. For information

on the South China Sea E of the strait, see Sector 1.

Qiongzhou Haixia—North Shore

3.30 The S coast of Leizhou Bandao forms the N shore of

Qiongzhou Haixia. It extends from Chia-pei Chiao (20°29'N.,

110°31'E.) SW about 20 miles to Paiwei Jiao, then W about 21

miles to Jiaowei Jiao.

3.30 Between Chia-pei Chiao and Paiwei Jiao (P’ai-wei Chiao)

(20°14'N., 110°17'E.), the coast is backed mostly by sand hills

between 21m and 24m high. San-kao-lung rises to 49m about 3

miles SSW of Chia-pei Chiao and along the SW part of this

portion of the coast, red cliffs mark the shore.

3.30 Between Chia-pei Chiao and Shangouhou (Peterson Point)

(20°26'N., 110°31'E.), which is reportedly marked by a light, a

fringing offshore reef extends as far as 1.8 miles offshore.

About 3 miles off this shore are reefs which continue E and SE

for at least 15 miles. It is on this reef, to the SE of the point, on

which lies Luodou Sha.

3.30 This cay is 2.3 miles long and 2m high. Small cays lie close

off the N and S ends of the main islet. Depths shoal abruptly in

the approach to these cays.

3.30 The channel between Luodou Sha and the mainland is about

1 mile wide but it is fringed on both sides by reefs. It is used by

small, local craft as an inner route to and from Chan-chiang,

but it is not recommended for vessels without local knowledge

as the area is imperfectly surveyed and governed by local

regulations. The passage becomes narrow and dangerous in its

N portions.

3.30 The coast SW from Shangouhou to Hongkan Point

(20°19'N., 110°24'E.) is mostly unexamined. Hongkan Wan is

a slight indentation just SW of the latter point. Foul ground

extends about 1.3 miles offshore from the NE entrance point.

Small vessels with local knowledge and permission can anchor

in 13m, mud, with the light on the NE entrance point bearing

068° distant 1.5 miles.

3.30 Paiwei Jiao (P’ai-wei Chiao) is a fringed, sandy reef with a

conical point about 24m high. To the SW of the point the coast

is reef fringed and indented by Hai-an Chiang which recedes

about 2 miles. Depths in the bay shoal sharply within the 20m

curve which fronts the bay less than 1 mile offshore abreast the

entrance points.

3.30 The head of the bay is backed by red cliffs between 15 and

18m high. Anchorage for small vessels can be taken, in 9.2,

mud, with the light bearing 338°, distant 1.8 miles.

3.31 Hsiao-tao Chiao (Islet Point) (20°14'N., 110°07'E.) is

the E entrance point of Jiaowei Wan (Chiao-wei Wan) (Kami

Bay). The mouth of the bay stretches from this point for about

12 miles W to Jiaowei Jiao.

3.31 The bay indents the coast about 4 miles, and is shoal and

reef-fringed from about 0.5 to 1.8 miles offshore. The land

backing the E side of the bay rises gradually to the N of HsiaoTao Chiao. A pagoda stands on the E slope of a hill 5.5 miles

NNE of the point.

3.31 Several small islets lie on the reef fringing the E entrance

point.

3.31 The W side of the bay is backed by sand hills. These hills are

brush-covered, but become bare towards the SW part. There

are red cliffs at the central part of the head of the bay.

3.31 Jiaowei Jiao (Chiao-Wei Chiao) (20°13'N., 109°55'E.)

marks both the W entrance to Jiaowei Wan and the NW

entrance to Qiongzhou Haixia. It is the SW end of a 12m reeffringed islet on which stands a light. It was reported (1965) that

the high trees on the island make the lighthouse extremely

difficult to distinguish. A rock, with a depth less than 1.8m, lies

about 1 mile SSW of the point. Depths of less than 11m extend

2 miles SW from the point and there are rips in this area.

3.31 Small vessels can take anchorage, with some shelter from

the NW, in a depth of 9.1m, mud, with Jiaowei Jiao Light

bearing 277°, distant 1.5 miles; and from NE winds, in 16.5m,

mud, with the point bearing 128°, distant 1.5 miles.

3.31 The coast N of Jiaowei Jiao is described in paragraph 4.3.

Hainan Dao—North Coast

3.32 The N coast of Hainan Dao forms the S side of

Qiongzhou Haixia. The coast is very irregular, being indented
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 67

Pub. 161

by several bays. The Nan-tu Chiang delta bisects the coast. 

3.32 The port of Haikou is situated at the mouth of this river. The

E portions of this coast are generally sandy and low, but toward

the W part cliffs intersperse the dunes. The rivers that intersect

the coast are navigable only by very small craft.

3.32 Baohu Jiao (Ching-hsin Chiao) (20°01'N., 110°56'E.),

marked by a light equipped with an automatic identification

system (AIS), is a low sandy point rising to a height of 63m

about 1.5 miles inland to the S of its extremity; a radiobeacon

is situated 0.5 mile NW of the light. Baohu Shan, a black

double-peaked hill, 194m high, rises 4.5 miles SW of the point.

The hills W of the point are red and those S of the point are

covered with black patches. A prominent conical tomb stands

on the point. A reef extends about 1 mile offshore from Baohu

Jiao. 

3.32 Between Baohu Jiao and Mulan Tou, 16.5 miles NW, the

coast recedes about 3 miles SW and is backed by sandy hills.

Shan-tou Chiao, with a reef, parts of which dry, extending

about 1.3 miles NE from it, divides this large bight about

midway along its length. A reef fringes the coast as far as 2

miles offshore, W from Baohu Jiao to a position about 2.5

miles SE of Shan-tou Chiao. Depths of less than 5.5m extend 2

miles N of the same point.

3.32 From a position about 3.8 miles N of Shan-tou Chou, a shoal

extends NW for about 3 miles to Magpie Rock (20°08'N.,

110°42'E.). Close NE of this rock is Riversdale Patch, with a

depth of 4.5m. The patch lies on the NE end of a spit about 1.7

miles SE of Mulan Tou. There are numerous rocks and shoal

heads fringing the coast in this vicinity to as far as 1 mile

offshore.

3.33 Mulan Tou (20°10'N., 110°41'E.) is the N headland

of the coast. A light marks the point; an automatic identification system (AIS) is siutated at the light. The shoreline is

reef-fringed to a distance of 0.8 mile offshore in places. A 59m

hill rises 1 mile S of this point and a 49m hill, with a conspicuous white sand cliff on its E side, rises 0.8 mile farther

SE.

3.33 The tidal currents on the flood set strongly toward the reef

extending N from Mulan Tou. To the W of the point they set

SW into Puqian Chiang and must be allowed for. It is advisable

at times to pass E and N of Nan-hsi-hsiao-tui, then W into the

strait due to the set of these currents.

3.33 Regulations.—As Nan Shuidao leads into Qiongzhou

Haixia from other than the required approach, its use is

restricted to local vessels unless prior permission is obtained

from the Chinese authorities. Extreme caution should be taken

when rounding Mulan Tou, because of the numerous dangers

and strong tidal currents off the point.

3.33 Caution.—In addition to the previously-mentioned reefs,

rocks, and shoals, several wrecks and obstructions lie off the

coast of Hainan Dao between Baohu Jiao and Mulan Tou.

Their locations can best be seen on the charts.

3.33 Hainan Tou Tui, with shoals and patches which dry at low

water, extends about 10 miles ESE and then irregularly about 6

miles NE from a position about 1.5 miles NE of Mulan Tou. A

detached 5m shoal head is reported close off the NW end of

Hainan Tou Tui, with depths of 13.2m around. The shoal heads

at the NE part of this bank encumber the channel between this

bank and Nanfang Qiantan.

3.33 Nan Shuidao leads between Hainan Tou and the dangers

which fringe the coast SE of Mulan Tou. Although this channel

is marked by buoys, it is very narrow at its NW end and the

charted positions of the buoys should not be relied upon. There

is a least charted depth of 12.6m in the fairway. This channel

has the advantage of leading close to the coast with

navigational aids. It is considered dangerous at night or in

restricted visibility and with strong tidal currents.

3.33 The channel is closed to foreign merchant ships.

3.34 Puqian Jiao (20°06'N., 110°34'E.) lies 7.8 miles SW

of Mulan Tou, across the mouth of Hainan Wan, a slight

indentation in the coast. The shores of this bay are backed by

scrub-covered sand hills between 15m and 21m high. 

3.34 Anchorage can be taken, in 13m, mud, about 1 mile SW of

Hai-nan Yuan-yai which is a prominent, flat bluff 56m high

that stands about 1 mile SW of Mulan Tao. Rocks, wrecks, and

reefs make close approach to the shores of Hainan Wan dangerous without local knowledge.

3.34 Puqian Shan (Chi-hsing-ling), a hill with several summits,

the highest 140m and on which stands a conspicuous pagoda,

rises 1.5 miles E of Puqian Jiao.

3.34 Puqian Wan, a bight indenting the coast about 4 miles,

stretches between Puqian Jiao and Pai-sha Chiao, 13 miles E,

at the center of the delta of the Nan-tu Chiang. Depths within

the bay are mostly less than 9m and they shoal toward its head.

Fishing stakes are charted off the entrance to the bight.

3.34 A 10.1m patch, and several wrecks, along with numerous

fishing stakes lie off the E entrance to the bight. 

3.34 The shores are low except on the E side. The entrance to a

large shallow lagoon used by small craft with local knowledge

lies at the SE end of the bay.

3.34 Pai-sha Tui, a dangerous shoal ridge with shoal heads having

depths of as little as 0.4m, extends about 11.5 miles ENE from

Pai-sha Chiao (20°05'N., 110°18'E.), close within the 20m

curve.

3.34 Anchorage.—Exposed anchorage can be taken, in a depth of

11m, mud and sand, good holding ground, about 1.5 miles W

of Puqian Jiao. Small vessels can anchor, in a depth of 8.2m,

mud, in the W part of the bay in the lee of Pai-sha Tui with the

pagoda SE of Pai-sha Chiao bearing 226° and the pagoda on

the hill E of Puqian Jiao bearing 088°. The latter anchorage

should be approached from the E.

3.34 Fishing stakes may be encountered as far as 2 miles N of Paisha Chiao and a detached 8.2m patch lies about 0.8 mile N of

the same point at the W entrance to Haikou Wan.

3.35 The mouth of Haikou Wan is formed on the E by the

Nan-tu Chiang delta and on the W by Chengmai Jiao, about 10

miles W. The 10m curve generally fronts the bay between these

points. From here the depths shoal rapidly toward the head of

the bay. The port of Haikou lies in the S part of Haikou Wan.

3.35 Several small, shallow river mouths discharge through the

delta of Nan-tu Chiang, on the E side of the bay.

3.35 A cliffy ridge, 12 to 15m high, on which several conspicuous

buildings are situated, rises close inland at the S side of the bay.

Sand dunes, 21 to 24m high, back the SW side of Haikou Wan

up to its W entrance. Xiaomao Shan, a conspicuous hill, 25m

high, is located 1.5 miles E of Chengmai Jiao and Ma-an Ling

(The Hummocks), with two crater like peaks, the higher of
68 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

which is 230m, rises about 8 miles S of the above hill.

3.35 Ta-lu T’an, with depths of less than 0.8m, extends NW from

within the bay to a position about 1.5 miles NE of the W entrance point. Several partially exposed wrecks lie in the central

part of the bay.

Haikou (20°02'N., 110°17'E.)

World Port Index No. 57760

3.36 Haikou is an artificial harbor situated in the S, central

part of Haikou Wan. It is protected by two strengthened breakwaters and is used as a typhoon refuge. The outer harbor anchorage handles most of the foreign commerce.

3.36 Winds—Weather.—The winds affecting the port are a result of the monsoons. During the summer, they have little affect

on port operations unless they result from a typhoon. In winter,

the Northeast Monsoon can develop heavy seas in the anchorage area rendering cargo operations untenable. Fog occurs in

winter and spring, but is usually of short duration. Violent

squalls occur occasionally.

3.36 Tides—Currents.—The tropic range is 1.8m and the

diurnal range is 1.3m. Tidal currents set SW into the bay for

about 16 hours on the flood and NE for about 8 hours on the

ebb at rates of 1.2 to 3 knots. These rates and directions are

subject to change during the strength of the monsoon due to the

consistency of the wind.

3.36 Depths—Limitations.—The outer channel to the lighterage

working area is dredged to a depth of 9.5m. Haikou is entered

through a buoyed channel dredged to a depth of 7.4m in it. It

was reported that the channel has a tendency to silt. Range

lights lead through the channel to the harbor area. 

3.36 A wharf on the E side of the harbor, having three berths can

accommodate vessels of up to 5,000 dwt and up to 6m in draft.

On the S side of the harbor, two piers exist with lesser depths.

The majority of the cargo operations involving larger vessels,

especially those of foreign registry, takes place at anchor with

the use of lighters. Vessels of 25,000 dwt are handled at the

anchorage. 

3.36 Passenger services to Hong Kong and Guangzhou are in

operation as well as a passenger and ro-ro service to Zhanjiang.

3.36 The W entrance to the harbor is much deeper than the

entrance, which is used only by small craft.

3.36 Aspect.—The port of Haikou is situated on the S shore of

Haikou Wan near the city of Xiuying. The city of Haikou lies

3.5 miles ENE of the port area within the delta of the Nan-tu

Chiang. This city can be reached only by small, local craft.

3.36 A conspicuous white fort stands on each of the entrance

points to Haikou Wan, with the shores to the E, W, and NW

being mainly wooded. Several towers stand on the SE side of

the bay, and a conspicuous, 47m high pagoda stands 2 miles SE

of the town.

3.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots are met in the pilot

quarantine anchorage. Pilotage is available day and night. ETA

should be sent 24 hours in advance to PENAVICO (Haikou).

3.36 There is a coast radio station and a port radio station.

3.36 Regulations.—Since vessels proceeding to or from Haikou

must use Qiongzhou Haixia they should comply with the

regulations governing the use of the strait. 

3.36 Signals.—A signal station, from which storm signals are

shown is situated in the port area SW of the main wharf. The

following flags of the International Code of Signals are used:

3.36 Anchorage.—The Pilot and Quarantine Anchorage lies 4

miles N of the harbor area, and has depths of 15.2 to 16.4m,

mud and sand. Several anchorage berths, having depths of 3.7

to 9.2m, are available, and are best seen on the chart. Northeast

winds send a heavy sea into the anchorages.

3.36 Directions.—Due to the restrictions placed on foreign vessels in Chinese waters, and the compulsory nature of pilotage

for this port, no directions are given. Vessels are urged to

contact local authorities for the latest information on depths in

the channels and anchorages of the port.

3.36 Caution.—Depths in the approach channel, the harbor

basin, and the anchorages are liable to shoal. Several prohibited anchorages lie in the vicinity of the port, and are best seen

on the appropriate chart.

Hainan Dao—North Coast (continued)

3.37 Chengmai Jiao (20°04'N., 110°09'E.) is a low, sandy

point which forms the E point of Chengmai Wan, a shoal bay

indenting the coast about 4 miles. The NE part of the bay is

encumbered with fish stakes to a distance of 1.5 miles offshore.

Depths in the SW part of the bay shoal rapidly.

3.37 The SE shore of the bay is low and sandy from Chengmai

Jiao to the pagoda 7 miles SW. The pagoda stands on the NE

end of some low cliffs which extend W about 3 miles to the

mouth of a shallow lagoon. Tong Sui Mun, a hill, 172m high,

rises to its summit 3.5 miles ESE of the lagoon entrance. Sand

dunes, 6 to 9m high, back the SW side of the bay as far as

Yubao Jiao.

3.37 Caution.—An area containing unexploded ordnance is

charted 2 miles NE of Yubao Jiao.

3.38 Between Yubao Jiao (19°59'N., 109°53'E.) and

Leigong Dao, an eroded, 15m high islet lying 3.2 miles W, the

coast is quite steep-to. It is faced with red cliffs, 15 to 18m

high. A layer of black lava lies close under the top of the cliffs

and appears as a HW mark.

3.38 Anchorage for small vessels can be taken in Maniao Chiang,

in 7.3m, blue clay, about 0.8 mile SSW of the small islet which

lies close NW of the E entrance point. The shores of this bay

are low and reef-fringed with drying flats at its head.

3.38 The bay indenting the coast between Hung-t’ao Tsui and

Lingao Jiao is suitable only for small craft. 

3.38 A fort stands on a spit at the SE side of the bay near a

shallow inlet.

3.38 Lingao Jiao (Lin-kao Chiao) (20°01'N., 109°43'E.), which

is marked by a light and a signal station, is the SW limit of the

Qiongzhou Haixia Administrative Area. The point is low and

sandy and the coast, for about 11 miles WSW to T’iao-lou, is

Haikou Port Signals

Flag Meaning

C Customs Officer requested

O Stevedores requested

Q Quarantine
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 69

Pub. 161

low, reef-fringed, and sandy. This portion of the island should

be given a wide berth. Kao-shan Ling, 210m high, is a

prominent hill rising 6 miles E of T’iao-Lou.

3.39 Bingma Jiao (Ping-ma Chiao) (19°55'N., 109°18'E.)

is located 12 miles WSW of T’iao-Lou across the mouth of

Houshui Wan. The point is low on its N side and cliffy on its E

side. Reefs fringe the coast on either side of the point, but the

20m curve lies less than 1 mile off the point. A light is shown

from a white tower on Bingma Jiao; a signal station and racon

are situated at the light.

3.39 The shore of Houshui Wan is irregular and low, but several

hills behind it make good landmarks. Sun-lin Ling

(19°48'06"N., 108°25'00"E.) is a wooded conical hill rising to

198m about 9.5 miles SE of Bingma Jiao; another hill, 212m

high, rises 8.5 miles farther ESE.

3.39 The bay is reef-fringed with drying flats at its head.

Linchang Dao, a large drying reef which is steep-to on its N

side, lies in the center of the mouth of the bay. A low, sandy

cay, 4m high, lies on the S side of the reef toward its E end.

3.39 Anchorage, sheltered in all seasons, for small vessels, with

permission, can be taken,in a depth of 7.3m, sand, about 1.5

miles SW of the cay. 

3.39 Caution.—Care should be taken to avoid the detached

drying reef lying S of the cay when approaching this anchorage

from the E.

Hainan Dao—East Coast

3.40 Qizhou Leidao (Ch’i-chou Ch’un Tao) (T’a-ya

Ch’un-tao) (19°56'N., 111°13'E.) is comprised of two small

groups of offshore islands that lie 17 miles ESE of Baohu Jiao.

The islands are high, almost inaccessible, and barren and

extend in a NE-SW direction for about 8 miles.

3.40 Bei Shi (Pei-t’a-ya Tao) (Pei Shih) (19°59'N., 111°16'E.),

the outermost and largest of the NE group of four islets, is

191m high. Two small islets, of which the southwesternmost is

conical, lie close together about 0.7 mile SW of the large

island. P’ing-shih, 114m high, lies 0.3 mile farther SW. It is the

southwesternmost island of the group and the space between

these latter three islets is encumbered with sunken rocks. A

light is shown from Bei Shi; a racon is situated at the light.

3.40 The N islet of the SW group, Ch’ih-shih-tzu, is very small,

but 52m high. It lies about 5 miles SW of Bei Shi. Nan-shih,

the largest of this group and with a sunken rock and a small

islet close off its N end, has three peaks, the highest 151m

high. 

3.40 Nan-t’a-ya Tao (Shuang-fan) (19°53'N., 111°12'E.), 99m

high, with a sunken rock close off its N end, lies 1.2 miles SSE

of Nan-shih and has two summits.

The coast trends regularly about 24 miles S from Baohu Jiao

to Tonggu Zui, a hilly headland. It is fairly low between these

two points with several streams discharging into the sea. The

coast is backed by sandy ridges, 30 to 60m high, and fronted by

a sand and pebble beach.

3.40 A rocky shoal area, with depths of less than 5.8m, was

reported (1941) within a radius of 2 miles from a position

about 7 miles SE of Baohu Jiao.

3.41 Tonggu Zui (Tung-ku Chiao) (Tung-ku Tsui)

(19°38'N., 111°02'E.) is a reef-fringed point. It forms the SE

extremity of a hilly promontory which rises to a height of

347m about 2 miles NNW. Between Tonggu Zui and the

entrance of Ch’ing-lan Chiang, 14 miles SW, the coast is low

and reef-fringed. The bight to the W of Tonggu Zui is

encumbered by above-water and drying rocks.

3.41 Lorne Rock, which covers, is a dangerous pinnacle lying

about 11 miles S of Tonggu Zui.

3.41 Ch’ing-lan Chiang, lying 11 miles W of Lorne Rock, is a

sheltered inlet receding 3 miles NW which leads to a large

shallow lagoon. Rocks and sand bars that fringe the entrance

uncover at LW and limit the use of the bight for shelter to small

vessels. These craft anchor off the entrance of the inlet, in a

depth of 12.8m, sand and coral, about 2 miles S of the E

entrance point. A narrow buoyed channel, about 0.1 mile wide,

leads over the bar and into the harbor. The village of Ch’inglan is situated on the W bank, 1.5 miles from the W entrance

point. In 1989, it was reported that there are two berths built at

Ch’ing-lan for vessels up to 5,000 dwt.

3.41 Between Ch’ing-lan Chiang and Ta-hua Chiao, 46 miles

SSW, the coast is low and flat with scattered hills rising inland.

A small cove, the entrance points of which are reef-fringed, is

located about 11 miles SW of Ch’ing-lan Chiang. It affords

anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge, in 11 to

14.6m, sand and mud.

3.41 The Wan-ch’uan Ho discharges into Po-au Chiang, a large

very shoal lagoon, the entrance of which lies 15 miles SSW of

the above cove. A prominent white pagoda stands close S of

the entrance. A conspicuous hill, 332m high, rises 11 miles W

of the entrance. Several above-water and drying rocks lie close

off the lagoon entrance and make it nearly inaccessible. The

tallest rock is 7.9m high.

3.41 Rocks, some of which uncover, fringe the coast up to 1.5

miles offshore for a distance of about 15 miles S of the lagoon

entrance. Scattered hills rise closer to the coast in this vicinity.

3.41 Caution.—When piloting between Tung-ku Chiao and Poau Chiao, vessels should be maintained in depths greater than

27m.

3.41 The entrance to another large, but very shallow lagoon, lies

17 miles farther S from the entrance to Po-au Chiang. Two

black rocks, the outer rock being 6.1m high, mark the lagoon

entrance.

3.42 Wenchang Oil Terminal (19°37'N., 112°03'E) lies

approximately 60 miles E of the NE extremity of Hainan Dao.

The terminal consists of fixed platforms and the Wenchang

Floating Production and Storage Off-loading (FPSO) vessel,

The facility can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

3.42 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels with a maximum draft of

16.5m can be accommodated. 

xiaozw@cnooc.com.cn

China National Offshore Oil Corporation

http://www.cnooc.com.cn
70 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

3.42 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boarding area

lies within a circle with a radius of 2 miles centered in position

19°45'N, 111°55'E. Pilots will board in daylight hours only.

The port authority for Wenchang Oil Terminal is China

National Offshore Oil Corporation. 

3.43 Baian Dao (Kuan-Ts’ai Ling) (18°49'N., 110°34'E.)

is 87m high, with a conspicuous pillar rock on its E end, and

lies 2 miles NE of Dahua Jiao. A rock, 12m high, lies at the

outer edge of a ledge which extends about 0.8 mile NNW from

the islet of Baian Dao. A light is shown from the S extremity of

the islet.

3.43 Dahua Jiao (Ta-hua Chiao) (18°47'N., 110°33'E.), close off

which there is a sunken rock, rises to a height of 124m at its N

and highest summit. A signal station stands on the point.

Between Dahua Jiao and Jinmu Jiao, 68 miles SW, the coast

is rugged and mostly steep-to. Several fairly deep bays and

coves indent the coast between bold headlands and steep

points. These are backed by high land with mountains rising in

the interior.

3.43 The coast between Dahua Jiao and Ma-liu T’ou, a cliffy

point located 11 miles SW, is filled by an irregular bight that

recedes 2.5 miles NW. Several hilly points which rise to over

91m project slightly seaward. They form coves affording shelter for small craft. Between these points the coast is low and

sandy.

3.43 Round Islet (18°46'N., 110°30'E.), 71m high, with a rock

awash at LW close off its SE side, lies 3 miles SW of Dahua

Jiao.

3.43 Dazhou Dao (Ta-chou Tao) (18°40'N., 110°29'E.), 4 miles E

of Ma-liu T’ou, consists of two high ridges connected by a

sandy isthmus which partly covers. The S end rises to 290m. A

shoal with depths of less than 7.3m extends 1.3 miles W from

the N part of the island. A light, equipped with an automatic

identification system (AIS), is situated at Dazhou Dao. 

3.43 Anchorage can be taken by vessels with permission, in a

depth of 13m, mud and sand, off the W side of the island, S of

the shoal area or, in 20 to 22m, E of the isthmus on the E side

of the island.

3.43 Ma-liu T’ou (Malow T’ou) (18°40'N., 110°25'E.) rises to a

height of 141m near its outer end. It forms the S end of a hilly

ridge that extends 2 miles N from the point. Several prominent

peaks rise to the W and inland from the point. The highest

peaks have been reported to be visible at a distance of 90 miles.

3.43 A large, fairly regular bight indents the coast to the NW for a

distance of 5 miles and extends between Ma-liu T’ou and

Lingshi Jiao which lies 27 miles to the SW. Several islets lie

offshore within this bight.

3.43 Chou-tzu Tao, 155m high, lies 3 miles SW of Ma-liu Tao

with Chia-ching Tao, 79m high, about 4.2 miles farther W.

Anchorage, sheltered from NE, can be taken, in depths of 11 to

16.5m, sand, about midway between the former island and the

point. A shallow lagoon entrance breaks the shoreline between

the two islets.

3.44 Fen-chieh Chou (18°35'N., 110°12'E.), 107m high,

lies 6.5 miles SW of Chia-ching Tao and 1 mile offshore. This

islet has two hummocks. Shunang-fan Shih, 9.5 miles SSW of

Fen-chieh Chou is 46m high and about 4 miles offshore. It is

the largest of a group of rocks and resembles a junk from the

distance.

3.44 Lingshi Jiao (Ling-shui Chiao) (18°23'N., 110°03'E.) is the

SE extremity of a headland that is cliffy on its S side. It rises to

a height exceeding 259m in a range of hummocks that extend 5

miles W from the point. A white tower stands near Lingshi

Jiao. The S end of the headland has a 148m high sugar loaf

point. A rocky shoal extends nearly 2 miles SW from a reeffringed point about 2 miles WNW of this latter point.

3.44 Anchorage, sheltered from the NE, can be taken, in depths of

18 to 22m, mud with the fort at the lagoon entrance NNW of

Lingshi Jiao bearing 034°, distant about 3 miles.

3.44 Between Lingshi Jiao and Ya-lung Chiao (Lang-yeh Chiao)

(18°12'N., 109°42'E.), which is the S point of an irregular

peninsula projecting SE from Hainan Dao, the coast recedes

irregularly about 8 miles to the NW and forms Ling-shui Wan.

The N and W shores of this bay are low and sandy, with the

exception of the section lying 13 miles W of Lingshi Jiao,

where a reef-fringed point with some sunken and above-water

rocks interrupts the shore. The narrow coastal plain is backed

by hills and mountains to the N and W.

3.44 Wu-ch’i Chou (Niu-ch’i Chou) (18°19'N., 109°45'E.), 82m

high, lies in the SW part of the bay about 3.5 miles NE of the

entrance to a shallow lagoon. The island is cliffy on its S side

and reef-fringed on its N side. A rocky shoal, with a least depth

of less than 1.8m, lies 1 mile E of Wu-ch’i Chou.

3.44 Anchorage, sheltered from the SW, can be taken, in 29m,

sand, about 2 miles S of Wu-ch’i Chou.

3.44 The peninsula forming the SW side of Ling-shui Wan is

indented by several coves around its entire perimeter. It is

cliffy, mostly steep-to, and rises to a height of 359m toward its

center. The W spit of the peninsula, which has Ya-lung Chiao

as its S extremity, forms the E side of Lang-yeh Wan. Pai-hu

Chiao, a black, rocky point located 5.5 miles SSW, forms the

W entrance point of the bay. The head of the bay is fronted by a

sandy beach and backed by hills.

3.45 Lang-yeh Wan contains several islands and islets.

Dongmao Zhou (18°11'N., 109°41'E.), 111m high, is the outermost island of the bay. A 14m high rock and an 11m high

rock lie close E and N, respectively of the island. Hsi Chou,

105m high, lies 1 mile W of Dongmao Zhou and is marked on

its SE end by a light.

3.45 Yeh-Chu Tao, an island, 95m high, stands within the bay

about 2.5 miles NW of Dongmao Zhou. Two small islets,

Tung-p’a and Hsi-p’ai lie to the W of Yeh-chu Tao. Anchorage

can be taken, in 12.8 to 14.6m, mud and sand, about 0.8 mile

NE of the E end of Yeh-chu Tao. However, the NE wind blows

strongly between the hills of the peninsula to the E and during

S and SE winds, considerable swell may build up in the bay.

3.45 Between Pai-hu Chiao and Jinmu Jiao (Chin-mu Chiao)

(18°10'N., 109°33'E.), 2.8 miles WSW, the coast is bold and

steep-to. This headland marks, at Jinmu Jiao, both the S point

of Hainan Dao and for descriptive purposes, the dividing line

between the E and W coasts of the island. The peninsula rises

to 380m to the NE of the signal station above Jinmu Jiao. A

light is shown from the S extremity of this point and the coast

to the W is steep-to and bold; a racon is situated at the light.

3.45 Caution.—Unexploded ordnance lies in the vicinity of Yulin Chiang in approximate position (18°10'50"N.,

109°32'21"N.). 
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 71

Pub. 161

Hainan Dao—West Coast

3.46 From Jinmu Jiao, the W coast of Hainan Dao trends

WNW a distance of 55 miles, then N about 52 miles, and then

NE a distance of 49 miles to Bingma Jiao.

3.46 Mountains stand fairly close to the S part of this coast forming several fairly bold and prominent points. Along the NW

part of the coast, the coastal plain widens. Here, the hills are

more isolated and many of the points are low.

3.46 Chien-feng Ling, 1,290m high, a conspicuous peak, stands

about 16 miles NE of Ying-ko Tsui and 3.8 miles SE of Tu

Ling (18°45'N., 108°50'E.), which is 1,293m high. The former

peak appears as a precipitous crater from SE and NE, but from

W appears as a single pinnacle.

3.46 Farther inland the mountains of the interior rise to elevations

exceeding 1,829m.

3.46 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets WNW at a rate

of 2 knots abreast Yai-chou Wan and the ebb sets E at a rate of

1.8 knots.

3.46 Abreast Ying-ko Tsui, the flood current sets NW at a rate of

2.3 knots and the ebb current sets SE at a rate of 1.8 knots.

3.46 Caution.—When navigating along the W coast of the island,

it is recommended that vessels stay in depths greater than 46m

in order to stay seaward of the dangers lying off this coast.

3.47 Yu-lin Chiang (18°11'N., 109°31'E.) is a large bay

indenting the coast between Jinmu Jiao and Luhuitou Jiao. Yulin Chiao, supporting a signal station, is the S end of a small

peninsula that divides the N part of the bay. The bay is free of

dangers beyond 0.3 mile offshore with the exception of a 3.6m

patch which lies 2 miles E and a 7m shoal lying 1.8 miles ENE

of Luhuitou-Ling (18°10'N., 109°34'E.). To the E and N of

this peninsula is the naval port of Yu-lin. The port area is nearly

landlocked, but is reported to be able to accommodate vessels

with a draft of up to 9.7m; however, it has also been reported

that the port is closed to foreign commercial vessels. 

3.47 Caution.—The approaches to the port of Yu-lin are reportedly dangerous due to mines near Jinmu Jiao, Yu-lin Chiao, Talang Chiao and in Yu-lin Chiang.

3.48 Luhuitou Jiao (Lu-hui-t’ou Chiao) (18°11'N.,

109°28'E.) is the S extremity of a narrow peninsula that rises to

a height of 277m. Between this point and Nan-shan Chiao, 18

miles WNW, the coast recedes 5 miles N forming San-ya

Chiang and then tends quite regularly W. The coast is backed

by hills and intersected by narrow valleys. Several islands lie

across the mouth of San-ya Chiang.

3.48 Dongmao Zhou, 79m high, reef-fringed and cliffy on its SE

side, lies 4 miles NW of Luhuitou Jiao. Shoals with depths of

less than 7.8m exist within 0.5 mile of the island. A reef, with

two rocky heads 8.7 and 11m high, lies 1.2 miles SW of the

island.

3.48 Ximao Zhou (Hsi-mei Chou), 124m high, wooded, reeffringed and cliffy on its S end, lies about 2.2 miles WNW of

Dongmao Zhou. A 38m high islet lies close off the SW end of

the island; Pan-hu Shih, a rock which dries 1.1m, lies about 1

mile SW of the islet. A light, equipped with an automatic

identification system (AIS), is shown from the S end of Ximao

Zhou. 

3.48 Caution.—It is recommended that vessels not pass between

Dongmao Zhou and Ximao Zhou, nor between Ximao Zhou

and Chiao Ling due to a dangerous wreck in the fairway, 2

miles NW of Ximao Zhou.

3.49 Sanya (18°14'N., 109°30'E.) lies on the E side of

Sanya Chiang, and is entered between Hsiao Chou, 24m high,

located at the W end of a drying reef extending from the shore,

1.5 miles NE of Sanya Chiao, and the SW end of Bai Pai, 0.6

mile NNW. The port is primarily a salt export terminal.

3.49 Tides—Currents.—The mean range of the tide is 1.8m.

3.49 Depths—Limitations.—An L-shaped pier, divided into

three sections, provides 728m of berthing space for general

cargo vessels. Berth No. 3 is 92m long and has an alongside

depth of 4.5m. Berth No. 4 and Berth No. 5 have a combined

length of 250m and an alongside depth of 4.2m. Berth No. 6

and Berth No. 7, 260m long, have an alongside depth of 7.5m.

Vessels of 10,000 dwt are loaded and unloaded at the anchorage.

3.49 Sanya Lifesaving Station, an L-shaped pier, extends 100m

into the channel from an area of reclaimed land on the side of

the entrance channel.

3.49 The entrance channel, marked by lighted buoys, leads ENE

towards the harbor area from a position 0.3 mile N of Xia

Zhou. The depth of the channel is 7m at LW and 9.2m at HW.

The maximum allowable draft in the channel is 7m.

3.49 Aspect.—Range lights are established for the entrance

channel. The lights in line bearing 071°30' lead in a least

charted depth of 7.1m (on the Chinese chart), to the pier.

3.49 Nan-shan Chiao, located about 8 miles W of the last

mentioned group of rocks, rises to a height of 490m about 1

mile N of the point. Its summit is flat and bold with a slight

saddle in it. A prominent pagoda stands on a hill about 3.5

miles E of the summit.

3.49 A rock that dries about 1.8m lies 4.2 miles SW of the point.

3.49 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours

daily. The pilot will board at the Pilot Anchorage (18°11'N.,

109°26'E.). The anchorage, established in depths of 20 to 28m,

mud, good holding ground, is intended for vessels of up to

10,000 dwt. Vessels awaiting pilotage or quarantine clearance

should anchor within 0.5 mile of the pilot boarding place.

3.49 Anchorage.—There are three anchorages available, including the Pilotage and Quarantine Anchorage. The Haven

Anchorage (18°14'N., 109°26'E.) has depths of 5 to 16m, mud,

good holding ground, and accepts vessels of up to 50,000 dwt.

The Lightening Anchorage (18°14'N., 109°27'E.) has depths of

8 to 16m, mud, good holding ground, and accepts vessels of up

to 50,000 dwt.

3.49 Anchorage during the Northeast Monsoon may be obtained

outside the port, in a depth of 9m, or inside the entrance, in a

depth of 4m, good holding ground. 

3.49 Vessels should anchor as directed by the pilot in one of the

designated anchorages situated in the area NE of Dongmao

Zhou and Ximao Zhou. Vessels over 50,000 dwt may choose

an anchorage in greater depths. 

3.49 Vessels should not proceed closer to shore from the anchorage without local knowledge due to the existence of reefs,

shoals, and islets to the E and SE.

3.49 Directions.—It is recommended that vessels entering Sanya

Chiang use the route passing through the following positions
72 Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 

Pub. 161

(bearings and distances from Ximao Zhou peak (18°14'N,

109°22'E.)):

a. 225°, 9.0 miles.

b. 284°, 5.1 miles.

c. 352°, 1.8 miles.

d. 044°, 1.3 miles.

e. 083°, 5.5 miles.

3.49 Caution.—Several rocks lie N of the recommended track

about 3.2 miles NW of Ximao Zhou.

3.49 A lighted production platform stands 48 miles SSW of Nanshan Chiao; a submerged gas pipeline extends from the platform to the point.

3.50 Yai-chou Wan indents the coast for about 12 miles W

of Nan-shan Chiao as far as Fu-jung Ch’i (Fu-jung-ch’i). In the

NE part of the bay, a stream discharges into the sea where the

coast is low. Fu-jung Ch’i is marked by two, 35m high hummocks.

3.50 The islands of Tung-lo Tao (18°19'N., 108°59'E.) and Hsiku Tao, 2 miles WSW of it, lie to the S Fu-jung Ch’i. A 5.5m

shoal lies about 2 miles S of Hsi-ku Tao and a drying rock lies

2 miles S of Hsi-ku Tao.

3.50 Between Fu-jung Ch’i and Ying-ko Tsui (18°30'N.,

108°41'E.), the SW extremity of Hainan Dao, the coast is

backed by a low cultivated plain. Ying-ko Tsui is marked by a

light; an automatic identification system (AIS) is situated at the

light structure. Sandy hillocks, 6.1 to 12.2m high, border the W

part of the coast in places. An isolated hill, 119m high, rises 5

miles NE of Ying-ko Tsui. A stream discharges into the sea

through the marshes about midway along the shore at the head

of the bay. Seaward to the S and SW of the river mouth are

several shoal heads having depths of as little as 2.7m. 

3.50 Eddies are frequently encountered in the vicinity of the

banks off the SW coast of Hainan Dao.

3.51 Yu-lin Chiao (Yu-lin Chou) (19°06'N., 108°36'E.), a

45m high point, stands 36 miles N of Ying-ko Tsui. The

intervening coast is indented by two large bights and the shore

is mostly low, flat, and sandy. About 12 miles N of Ying-ko

Tsui, a spur from the mountains in the interior extends to the

coast terminating in a 195m hill. 

3.51 Several dangerous shoal areas and banks lie a considerable

distance off this portion of the coast. Most of these are elongated and lie parallel to the coast. They are relatively steep-to

on their seaward sides.

3.51 Outer Bank (18°37'N., 108°23'E.), the outermost danger,

has a 3.6m shoal head which breaks near its center. Shoal

depths extend ESE from this bank to a position lying 3 miles

SW of Ying-ko Tsui and N, then NE to about 11 miles SW of

Yu-lin Chiao.

3.51 Caution.—Due to the shoals and other dangers off the W

and SW coast of Hainan Dao, vessels should keep to depths of

46m or greater, and at least 25 miles offshore. With the strong

tidal currents and soft nature of the bottom off this coast, the

shoal heads may constantly shift position.

3.52 Beili Wan (Pei-li Chiang) (19°10'N., 108°35'E.) is a

shoal bay indenting the coast between Yulin Chiao and a low

sandy spit about 7 miles N. The N part of the bay has drying

flats. Shoals with depths of less than 5.5m extend over 5 miles

WSW from the N entrance point. Except in the SW part of the

bay, the depths are less than 5.5m. Reefs fringe the SE shore of

the bay. The port of Basuo Gang is located in Beili Wan and the

Pei-li Ho discharges into the bay about 4 miles NE of the

harbor. The city of Beili stands 0.5 mile up this river.

Basuo Gang (19°06'N., 108°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 57768

3.53 Basuo Gang is located 0.8 mile E of Yu-lin Chiao, the

westernmost point on Hainan Dao. The harbor is protected by

two long breakwaters of large concrete blocks; the N breakwater submerges partially at HW. However, the harbor is

exposed to typhoons. The major activities at the port are export

of iron ore and fishing. A red light is shown from the N breakwater head, and a green light from the S breakwater head.

3.53 Winds—Weather.—The Northeast Monsoon is at strength

at Basuo Gang from November through February. Winds blow

out of the NE at force 4 to 7 and sometimes force 8 for several

days at a time. During these periods of strong wind, a heavy

sea can build up in the open roadstead and cause ships to pitch

and roll at the berths within the breakwaters. The Southwest

Monsoon season is from April to September.

3.53 Fog is not a major problem at Basuo Gang, but heavy rain

can be expected at times between June and September.

3.53 Storm warnings are given by the signal station on Yu-lin

Chiao and should be particularly heeded by vessels at the ore

berths during the typhoon season.

3.53 Tides—Currents.—Tides at Basuo Gang are usually

diurnal. Tidal heights reach a maximum of 3.6m at MHHW,

and 0.4m at MLLW. At flood tide, the current flow is NE

attaining a rate of 0.8 knots and at ebb tide, it is SW at about

1.3 knots. Offshore currents are governed by the prevailing

monsoon and generally parallel the coast.

3.53 Depths—Limitations.—The maximum draft for vessels

entering the harbor is 9m, although depths of 7.8m are charted

on the range line. The approach channel is 120m wide and has

a depth of 9m at HW.

3.53 North Wharf, comprising Berth No. 1 and Berth No. 2, has a

length of 450m and an alongside depth of 9m. The wharf is

designed to accommodate ore vessels of up to 20,000 dwt. 

3.53 South Wharf, comprising Berth No. 3 and Berth No. 4, has a

length of 670m and an alongside depth of 9m for general cargo

vessels. The wharf is designed to accommodate one vessel of

20,000 dwt and one of 5,000 dwt.

3.53 Berth Nos 5 and Berth No. 6 have a combined length of

400m and an alongside depth of 10m. General cargo and LPG

vessels of up to 20,000 dwt can be accommodated.

3.53 Vessels up to 180m long and 43,000 dwt can be accommodated. 

3.53 Aspect.—The pyramidal hill on Yu-lin Chiao is very distinctive. A 145m high hill, located 6.5 miles NE of the point,

has been reported to be a useful landmark. A light, equipped

with an automatic identification system (AIS), is shown from

Yu-lin Chiao. 

3.53 The entrance channel and breakwaters are marked by range

lights and beacons. The axis of the main channel is 089°-269°

and is nearly 1 mile long. The breakwaters are visible com-
Sector 3. Coast of China—Dajin to Jiaowei Jiao, including Hainan Dao 73

Pub. 161

pletely at LW and the ore-loading machinery which extends the

length of the ore wharf is distinctive.

3.53 Pilotage.—Pilotage, available during daylight only, is compulsory for all foreign vessels entering and leaving the harbor.

3.53 Regulations.—Masters are requested to radio the following

information to Basuo Gang 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours

before arrival or immediately on departure from their last port

of call:

1. Ship’s ETA and route taken.

2. Cargo to load.

3. Ship’s overall length, breadth, draft, and tons per inch

immersion.

4. Type and quantity of dangerous cargo on board.

3.53 A subsequent message 16 hours before arrival should give an

amended ETA.

3.53 Anchorage.—The Pilot and Quarantine Anchorage is

situated 1.8 miles NW of the N breakwater, in depths of 8 to

11m, mud and sand. The anchorage may prove to be untenable

in a strong wind, as it is exposed, and the holding ground is

reported to be marginal.

3.53 Directions.—Vessels should make Yulin Jiao, and from a

position with the lighthouse bearing between 100° and 110°,

distant 10 miles, should steer for the quarantine anchorage. The

channel entrance is marked on the S side by a lighted buoy

moored 0.6 mile NW of Yu-lin Chiao. 

3.53 Caution.—Numerous fishing stakes and fixed nets exist in

the approaches to Basuo Gang.

3.53 A dangerous wreck lies 3 miles W of Yu-lin Chiao Light.

3.54 Between Ssu-keng-sha Chiao (19°13'N., 108°37'E.),

the N entrance of Beili Wan and Ta-chiao T’ou, a bold, rocky

point 10 miles NNE, the coast is low. The Ch’ang Chiang

discharges through a wide delta with several mouths about

midway between these two points. Depths are very shoal near

the delta. Farther N, a sunken rock lies 2.8 miles SW of Tachiao T’ou.

3.54 Anchorage.—A lightering anchorage with depths of about

18m lies approximately 3.5 miles WSW of Ta-chiao T’ou light

and is centered in position 19°20'N, 108°38'E. 

3.54 Lying 16 miles NE of Ta-chiao T’ou is a shallow lagoon

entrance used by fishermen. The entrance can be identified by

a conspicuous fort which stands near it. Exposed anchorage, in

13m, can be taken off this entrance with the fort bearing 114°,

distant about 3 miles.

3.54 Caution.—Vessels should give this portion of the coast a

wide berth due to the obstruction area lying offshore between

the river mouth and Ta-chiao T’ou.

3.55 Yang-p’u Wan (19°42'N., 109°06'E.) recedes 5 miles

E between Guanyin Jiao (19°35'N., 109°00'E.) and Shenjian

Chiao, 15 miles NE. The head of the bay is shoal and it is reeffringed on the SE and NE sides.

3.55 Lin-ch’ang Shih (Ta-ch’an) (19°41'N., 109°06'E.), is a reef

which has a low, sand cay and an islet on it, and together with a

reef extending W from the low, sandy peninsula projecting

WSW into the bay from its NE part, obstructs the entrance to

Yang-p’u Chiang.

3.55 Depths—Limitations.—The port has 26 deep water berths

for the handling of steel products, general and bulk cargo, and

containers. 

3.55 Yang-p’u Chiang has a coal terminal for vessels of 20,000

dwt, a container berth for a 20,000 dwt vessel, and a berth for

vessels of 3,000 dwt. Vessels should contact local authorities

for more information.

3.55 The maximum permissible draft in the harbor is 11m at LW,

or 13m at HW. The maximum allowable vessel length is 200m.

3.55 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels.

Pilots board vessels exceeding 300,000 dwt at Anchorage No.

1, which has a 1 mile radius centered in position 19°49'00N,

108°56'25E.

3.55 Pilots board all other vessels in Anchorage No. 2, delimited

by the following coordinates: 

(a) (19°46'00"N., 109°01'00"E.)

(b) (19°46'30"N., 109°01'00"E.)

(c) (19°46'30"N., 109°01'48"E.)

(d) (19°46'00"N., 109°01'48"E.) 

3.55 Anchorage.—Anchorage No. 1 has depths of approximately

30m. 

3.55 Anchorage No. 2 lies centered about 10 miles W of the

Automatic Identification System (AIS) tower (19°46'N.,

109°12'E.), best seen on the chart. 

3.55 Small vessels with local knowledge can proceed to a sheltered anchorage, in 7.3 to 9.1m, close within the entrance of a

large lagoon, which has its entrance at the head of the bay. A

narrow buoyed channel, with a least known depth of 4.2m

across the bar, leads clear of the reefs and sandbanks to the

lagoon entrance. 

3.56 Shen-chien Chiao (19°47'N., 109°09'E.) is a cliffy,

reef-fringed point with a conspicuous pillar rock, 18m high,

lying close WSW. A conspicuous pagoda stands on the N side

of the point. The remainder of the coast, NE to Bingma Jiao

(19°55'N., 109°18'E.), a distance of about 11 miles, is reeffringed to a distance of 0.8 mile offshore in places. Bingma

Jiao is marked by a light; a signal station and racon are situated

at the light structure. Ping-ma Shan, an important landmark in

the approach to the W entrance of Ch’iung-chou Hai-Hsia from

SW, rises to a height of 211m about 3.5 miles SSW of Bingma

Jiao.

3.56 Caution.—Two wrecks lie approximately 10.5 miles WNW

of Bingma Jiao, and are best seen on the chart.
75

Pub. 161

4. 

Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
77

Pub. 161

SECTOR 4 

COAST OF VIETNAM—THE GULF OF TONKIN

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Gulf of Tonkin and includes the port of Hai Phong, the shipping port for Hanoi, the

capital of Vietnam. The arrangement of the sector is N from

Jiaowei Jiao (20°13'N., 109°55'E.) and along the coast of Leizhou Bandao, then W to the Chinese border. The SW and NW

shores of the Gulf of Tonkin, from Mui Lay (17°05'N.,

107°07'E.) to the Chinese border, including the Archipel des

Fai Tsi Long, are then described. 

General Remarks

4.1 The Gulf of Tonkin is bordered S and W by the coast

of Vietnam, and E by Hainan Dao and Leizhou Bandao, which

are Chinese territory. The entrance to the gulf is more than 120

miles wide between the SW extremity of Hainan Dao and the

mainland SW. Numerous islets and shoals lie at the head of the

gulf, and several small islands lie near the W shore. In the NW

part of the gulf is the extensive delta plain of the Red River,

with its many waterways. This region is densely populated.

4.1 General depths in the gulf are comparatively shallow, with

depths of 101m being found in the middle of the entrance; the

depths decrease toward the shores, and average less than 55m

in the N part of the gulf. The bottom is generally soft and

suitable for anchorage. Large patches of muddy water, resembling banks, are seen at times, but invariably are found to have

deep water when examined.

4.1 The NE part of the gulf is quite shallow, with depths of 18m

and less being found 25 miles from the land.

4.1 For the most part, sunken dangers are within or near the 20m

curve, with the exceptions of the banks and shoals fringing the

W and N shores of Hai-Nan Tao.

4.1 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels

when entering, leaving, shifting, mooring or unmooring within

the limits of a Vietnamese port. Request for pilotage services is

required 24 hours prior to departure from a port or for any

movement within a port.

4.1 Vessels must send their ETA message at least 48 hours

before arrival at any Vietnamese port, followed by intervals of

12 hours, 7 hours, and 2 hours. Vessel messages are tendered

through their local agents to the office of the port authorities.

The port authorities should be immediately informed of any

unforeseen delay occurring during the above stipulated period.

4.1 Anchorage.—A vessel awaiting a pilot on arrival shall

anchor in the designated waiting area until further notice.

Vessels carrying explosives or flammable cargo shall anchor in

the area as designated. 

4.1 Regulations.—In the approaches to Vietnamese ports, vessels must follow the tracts recommended by the port authorities. From the time of such an approach, the Vietnamese flag

must be kept hoisted at all times until departure from a port or a

pilot station.

4.1 Port entry is controlled by the port authorities, pending berth

availability, weather, etc. 

4.1 Requests for port entry are made by vessels to the port

authorities on VHF channel 16 or by radiotelephone, or by

means of visual International Code of Signals.

4.1 A vessel shall not enter a harbor until the signal granting

entry is shown from the signal station, or from the pilot boat.

4.1 When refused entry, the vessel should immediately reduce

speed, alter course to stay clear of the fairway, stemming the

tide if possible, or anchor in the area recommended to avoid

obstructing traffic flow.

4.1 Inbound vessels should give way to outbound vessels, as

vessels leaving port maintain priority over inbound vessels.

4.1 Caution.—Vessels wishing to enter the ports or approach

the coasts described in this chapter should do so only with the

prior permission of the respective authorities, well before the

vessel’s arrival. Vessels not having the approval of the proper

authorities should give the coast a wide berth. 

4.1 Fishing stakes are frequently encountered at distances of 25

to 30 miles offshore. They consist of several long bamboo

poles, anchored by large stones, and marked by a flag; a sampan is usually attached to them, and vessels should not pass

between the sampan and the bamboo. 

4.1 Very large fleets of fishing junks may be met off the coast of

China. The large trading junks have five masts, with two small

sails aft. Chinese junks do not carry the regulation lights.

4.1 Steel pipes and well heads are reported in the following approximate positions:

a. 20°35'N, 108°33'E.

b. 20°46'N, 108°38'E.

c. 20°45'N, 109°02'E.

d. 20°17'N, 109°17'E.

e. 20°46'N, 108°59'E.

f. 20°46'N, 109°00'E.

Dao Bach Long Vi

4.2 Dao Bach Long Vi (20°08'N., 107°44'E.) lies 42

miles SE of Xuy Nong Chao (Iles Norway) and serves as a

good mark for vessels approaching Hai Phong. The summit of

the island is a plateau, 58m high, the slopes of which are precipitous in places, and in others, covered with trees. It is

fringed by reefs, and a rocky bank with depths of less than 10m

up to 1.3 miles NE, 0.8 mile W, 1.3 miles SW, and 2 miles S of

the island. The island should be given a berth of at least 2

miles. Dao Bach Long Vi can be seen on radar at a distance of

18 miles.

4.2 Shoals of fish are plentiful in the vicinity and have been

mistaken for breakers.

4.2 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels calling at any

port in the Gulf of Tonkin, or at Hai Phong, must continue to

Hon Dau (20°40'N., 106°49'E.), where pilots are available.

4.2 Anchorage.—Small vessels may find anchorage during the

Northeast Monsoon, in a depth of 6.4m, off the S side of the

island.

4.2 Caution.—A depth of 10.9m lies 26 miles WNW of Dao

Bach Long Vi.
78 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

4.2 A pinnacle depth of 29m has been reported in approximate

position 18°49'N, 106°35'E.

4.2 A dangerous wreck lies about 27 miles NW of the island.

The Gulf of Tonkin—Northeast Side 

4.3 Jiaowei Jiao (Chiao-Wei Chiao) (Denglou Jiao)

(20°13'N., 109°55'E.), the SW extremity of a sandy islet, 12m

high, lies on the N side of the W approach to Chiung-chou Haihsia (Hainan Strait). Jiaowei Jiao was described in paragraph

3.31.

4.3 Dongchang Wan lies between Jiaowei Jiao and Shuiwei Jiao,

a low point, 11 miles NNW. The shores of the bay are level and

cultivated, with sandy beaches in places, and groups of trees.

There are numerous fishing stakes about 5 miles NW of

Jiaowei Jiao. A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about

1 mile S of Jiaowei Jiao.

4.3 Liusha Wan, entered N of Shuiwei Jiao, is unsurveyed, but is

reported navigable by large vessels for a distance of 2 or 3

miles, and by small craft for several miles further. The river

enters the Gulf of Tonkin through a wide lagoon, and is

reported to provide good shelter during typhoons.

4.3 The coast in this vicinity is low and wooded, rising gradually

to a summit, 186m high, about 11 miles NNE of Shuiwei Jiao.

Approaching from W this summit is the first land to be seen.

4.3 The coast between Shuiwei Jiao and Guantou Jiao, 77 miles

NW, has not been surveyed. Numerous banks exist offshore

and there are many fishing stakes. Several bays indent the W

side of Leizhou Bandao.

4.3 An extensive bay lies in the NE part of this section of coast.

The large estuaries of Tieh-shan Chiang (21°35'N.,

109°35'E.)and Ying-lo Chiang discharge into the N and E

sides, respectively, of the bay. The bay and estuaries are encumbered with numerous shallow banks and fishing stakes.

4.3 Guantou Jiao (Kuan-tou Chiao) (21°27'N., 109°02'E.) is the

W extremity of a low peninsula. A ridge of hills rises close

behind the point and attains an elevation of 114m at its summit,

about 0.5 mile NE of the point. The ridge of hills appears as an

island from a distance. Nautilus Hill, 111m high, is the summit

of Guantou Jiao. 

4.3 A light is shown from a conspicuous white tower situated on

Guantou Ling. A conspicuous white fort stands on a hill about

0.9 mile NE of the light.

4.3 There is an L-shaped oil pier close NE of Guantou Jiao; an

L-shaped jetty lies 0.2 mile farther NE.

4.4 Weizhou Dao (Wei-chou Tao) (21°03'N., 109°07'E.)

lies 23 miles S of Guantou Jiao. From the sea, the island is seen

rising abruptly on its W and S sides and sloping gradually on

its SE side. A light is shown from a stone tower situated on its

SW side. 

4.4 Wan-t’ou Ling (21°02'N., 109°07'E.), the summit of the

island, 70m high, rises near the SE extremity of the island.

4.4 A reef extends 1 mile from the N side of the island and 0.3

mile from the SW and E sides of the island. At night the island

should not be approached within depths of less than 20m.

4.4 Discolored patches of small area, with the appearance of

shoal water, are very common between Weizhou Dao and

Guantou Jiao; they are only detached mud whirls or weed

patches.

4.4 Nam Wan (Nan Wan), the small bay on the S side of the

island, affords anchorage, in 7.3 to 9.2m, in its outer part. It is

sheltered from all winds except those between SSE and ESE;

apart from the chance of a typhoon, S winds are seldom very

strong. A bank, with a depth of 4.5m at its outer end, extends

0.8 mile SE from the W entrance point of the bay; a sunken

rock, with a depth less than 1.8m, lies 0.4 mile SE of the same

point. Depths of less than 5.5m extend 0.5 mile offshore

between the E entrance point of the bay and a point located 0.8

mile WNW. A rocky islet, 29m high, lies 0.8 mile W of the E

entrance point.

4.5 Xieyang Dao (Hsieh-yang Tao) (20°54'N., 109°13'E.)

lies 9 miles SE of Weizhou Dao Light. The steep cliffs on its W

side rise up to a height of 140m where a 15m high triangular

light structure stands.

4.5 Weizhou Marine Terminal is a floating process, storage, and

off-loading vessel, Nan Hai Xi Wang, permanently moored to

an SPM in position 20°49'54"N, 108°36'48"E. A production

platform situated 1 mile SSE of the SPM is connected to it by

pipeline. Vessels of up to 100,000 dwt with a maximum length

of 270m may be accommodated at the terminal. The terminal

requires a minimum dwt of 30,000 and length of 100m. Draft

requirements are given in the accompanying table.

4.5 Vessels must be in accordance with MARPOL (The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships)

regulations.

4.5 Restricted areas encircle both the platform, with a radius of 1

mile, and the SPM, with a radius of 2 miles.

Beihai Gang (Pei-hai Anchorage) 

(21°29'N., 109°04'E.)

World Port Index No. 57750

4.6 Beihai Gang, situated NE of Guantou Jiao, affords anchorage for vessels of moderate draft. The anchorage is protected by sand banks on its N side and is open SW. Working

cargo is often difficult during the Northeast Monsoon. The

major cargoes are fertilizers, grain, steel products, coal, ore,

and timber.

4.6 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Beihai is 4.7m at

MHHW.

4.6 The tidal currents set through the anchorage area at velocities of 0.5 to 2.5 knots, proportional to the range of tide. The

NE flood begins 1 hour after LW; the SW ebb begins 1 hour

after HW.

4.6 Depths—Limitations.—Beihei channel extends from the

pilot and quarantine anchorage to the lightening anchorage.

Vessel size

Draft

Forward Aft

Up to 32,000 dwt 4.9m 7.3m

32,000 to 45,000 dwt 5.5m 7.9m

45,000 to 60,000 dwt 5.8m 8.2m

60,000 dwt and over 6.7m 8.5m
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 79

Pub. 161

The channel has been dredged to depths of 9.5 to 11.8m over a

width of 0.2 to 1 mile (2008). This channel can be transited by

vessels up to 230m in length, with a maximum draft of 10.8m. 

4.6 The channel to Shibuling harbor is marked by lighted buoys

and extends from the central part of Beihei Channel. The

channel is 100m in width and has depths of up to 12m. There

are two deepwater berths capable of accommodating general

cargo vessels of up to 35,000 dwt at Shibuling, with a

combined berthing length of 340m and an alongside depth of

12m. 

4.6 The Waisha harbor channel extends from the end of Beihai

channel to Waisha harbor. The channel is 60 to 80m wide and

has depths of 2.5 to 3.8m. Waisha inner harbor has a 463m

long quay wall with alongside depths of 2 to 4m.

4.6 Aspect.—The coast for a distance of 1.2 miles NE of

Guantou Jiao consists of cliffs about 21m high.

4.6 Ti-chiao, a fishing village, lies 2.7 miles NE of Guantou

Jiao. The town of Pei-hai lies 2 miles farther E; a conspicuous

custom house is situated in the E end of the town.

4.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage, available during daylight only, is compulsory for foreign vessels entering, leaving, and moving

within the port. Requests for pilotage are sent 24 hours in

advance. Vessels are boarded at the pilotage and quarantine

anchorage centered 4 miles S of the light on Guantou Jiao.

Vessels should send their ETA with draft and cargo description

72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance of the arrival at the

anchorage, and amended as necessary. 

4.6 Regulations.—Local harbor regulations are in force, as follows:

1. Before adjusting ballast, lowering lifeboats, inspecting the main engine, testing/using radio, or painting the outer

hull, vessels should apply to the harbormaster in writing.

2. When taking bunkers or welding, in addition to first

obtaining permission from the harbormaster, the work must

also be done under the harbormaster’s supervision.

3. There must be crew available at the top of the gangway to adjust the gangway as required. A safety net must be

securely rigged under the gangway.

4. The master must arrange for a duty officer to be

available to solve any potential problems during the vessel’s

loading and discharging and said officer should liaise closely

with shore personnel.

5. While at anchor, a duty officer must maintain a VHF

watch on the nominated channel.

4.6 All vessels must use a Chinese State agent. A separate

locally-appointed agent is responsible for all dealings with the

state agent.

4.6 Signals.—Storm signals are displayed from a flagstaff situated 1 mile SE of Ti-chiao. Radio services are available on

VHF channels 16 and 14.

4.6 Anchorage.—The pilot and quarantine anchorage, centered

4 miles S of the light on Guantou Jiao, has a radius of 800m,

and depths of 8 to 10m, sand and mud. 

4.6 Three lightening anchorages are situated off the port, in

depths of 5 to 9m, mud and sand. The Northeast Monsoon

makes cargo operations at these anchorages difficult.

4.6 Directions.—From a position located 5 miles W of Weizhou

Dao, proceed as safe navigation permits to the pilot and quarantine anchorage, then be guided by the buoys to the cargo

anchorage.

4.6 Caution.—An area prohibited to fishing and anchorage

extends NW from Guantou Jiao. Fishing stakes are reported to

lie in the SE portion of the pilot and quarantine anchorage, as

well as several other positions in the approaches to the port that

are best seen on the appropriate chart.

4.6 Danshuisha Qiantan, the bank between Guantou Jiao and

Dijiao (21°29'24"N., 109°04'24"E.), extends 0.2 to 0.8 mile

offshore and has depths of 2 to 3m. The NW and N stretch of

the bank is marked by lighted buoys to a distance of 1 mile NE

of Wai Sha (21°29'N., 109°05'E.).

4.7 Between Guantou Jiao and Wu-lei Chiao (20°36'N.,

108°44'E.), 20 miles WNW, a large shallow bay, with depths of

less than 1.8m, indents the coast. Several rivers discharge into

the bay. Tai-mei Tun (Tai-mao Chou), an islet, lies 0.7 mile S

of Wu-lei Chiao. A hill, 111m high, rises 1.5 miles N of Wu-lei

Chiao.

4.7 A 1.8m patch and a 5.5m patch were reported to lie 7.2 and

8.5 miles S, respectively, of Tai-mei Tun, but their existence is

doubtful.

4.7 Qinzhou (Ch’in Chou Wan) lies between Tai-me Tun and

Hu-tieh Ling (21°33'N., 108°26'E.), 17 miles WSW. Hu-tieh

Ling, an islet, 36m high, lies close to the coast, connected by a

sand bank. The bay is encumbered with shoals, many of which

dry. Depths in the bay are mostly less than 5.5m. A narrow

channel, obstructed by a bar lying 6.5 miles E of Hu-tieh Ling,

leads N into the bay. Only vessels with local knowledge should

attempt to enter the bay.

4.7 An-pu-k’ou Kang (An-fou-k’ou Chiang), a shallow bay

encumbered with drying banks, is entered between a point, 3

miles W of Hu-tieh Ling, and Pai-lung Wei, 10 miles farther

WSW. A bank, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends 3.5 miles

SW of the E entrance point of the bay. An islet, 7.9m high, and

a rock that dries 0.9m, lie 1.5 miles WSW and SSW, respectively, of the E entrance point.

Fangcheng Gang (21°45'N., 108°21'E.)

World Port Index No. 57745

4.8 Fangcheng Gang, a deep water port at the mouth of

the Fangcheng River, is open to foreign shipping, and primarily

handles cement, ore, timber, grain, fertilizer, and general cargo.

The port borders the provinces of Yunnan, Guizho, and

Sichuan to the NW, and Beibu Gulf to the N. 

4.8 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds are NE and SW.

Fog is most frequent in the morning or at night in the early

spring and late winter.

4.8 Tides—Currents.—The average tidal range is 3 to 4m.

4.8 The current attains a velocity of 1.7 knots at flood tide and

3.1 knots at ebb tide.

4.8Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel leading to the

port is 7.5 miles long, with a minimum width of 80m, and

depths of 15.7 to 16.9m. It is marked by lighted buoys and

lighted range beacons. 

4.8 Vessels of up to 69,550 dwt, with a maximum length of

225m and beam of 32m, can be accommodated.

4.8 The port has eight berths. Berth Nos. 1 and 2 are general cargo

berths which can accommodate vessels of up 10,000 dwt, each

having a length of 180m and an alongside depth of 8.5m.
80 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

4.8 Berth No. 3 through Berth No. 5 are heavy cargo, grain, and

cement berths, which can accommodate vessels of up to 15,000

dwt, each having a length of 180m and an alongside depth of

9m. 

4.8 Berth No. 6, with a length of 180m and an alongside depth of

10m, is a bulk cargo berth, which can accommodate vessels of

up to 25,000 dwt. 

4.8 Berth No. 7, with a length of 210m and an alongside depth of

10.5m, is a coal and ore berth, which can accommodate vessels

of up to 25,000 dwt.

4.8 Berth No. 8, with a length of 220m and an alongside depth of

13.6m, is a bulk cargo berth which can accommodate vessels of

up to 30,000 dwt.

4.8 Berth No. 12, with a length of 265m and an alongside depth

of 10.5m, is a bulk cargo berth which can accommodate vessels

of up to 180,000 dwt. 

4.8 The cement factory has a berth with a length of 165m and an

alongside depth of 7.5m, which can accommodate vessels of

up to 10,000 dwt. 

4.8 The swinging basin near the berths has a 360m diameter. 

4.8 Aspect.—A light is shown from the E side of the entrance to

the bay of An-pu-k’ou. The approach from seaward to the

quarantine anchorage is clear of dangers. The hilly coastline

provides a good radar return.

4.8 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available day and

night, though subject to tidal variations. Pilots must be

requested 24 hours in advance, and confirmed 12 hours prior to

arrival. Vessels must request pilots 12 hours prior to departure.

The pilot boards in the following positions: 

a. 21°25.4'N, 108°25.5'E. 

b. 21°23.8'N, 108°22.7'E. (capesize vessels)

4.8 Regulations.—Fangcheng Radio may be contacted on VHF

channels 9 and 16.

4.8 Anchorage.—There are ten anchorages, designated B1

through B10, each with a 450m radius, in depths exceeding

10m, sandy mud and clay. Anchorage for vessels carrying

dangerous cargo may be taken in designated areas B9 and B10.

Non-power driven vessels should anchor N of the B1

anchorage. 

4.8 Vessels engaged in lightening, awaiting berth, or taking

shelter from inclement weather, anchor in the four anchorages,

designated C1 through C4. Each anchorage has a radius of

300m in depths of 6 to 13m, sandy mud and clay.

4.8 Additional berths for large vessels waiting to enter the

harbor are situated 2 miles W of Paotai Jiao on a continuation

of the initial leg of the approach channel.

4.8 Directions.—The channel entrance to Fangcheng is marked

by a pair of lighted can buoys in position 21°30'N, 108°21'E,

which is 3 miles N of the pilot boarding place. The channel

then extends N for a distance of 2.5 miles to the first pair of

leading lighted beacons. After crossing over the unmarked bar

and passing E of two red can lighted buoys, vessels should

align the lighted beacons and steer into the range bearing

303°15'. 

4.8 The next pair of lighted beacons align on a bearing of

326°45' and lead a short distance through the turn into Niutou

Hangdao. Leading lights bearing 350° ahead, and an additional

set to be kept bearing 170° astern, lead a distance of 2 miles

through this reach. When the next pair of lighted beacons is

aligned bearing 339°15', steer on this range for a distance of

0.8 mile until a lighted can buoy is on the starboard beam, then

head NNE for the berths.

4.9 Bailong Wei (Cap Pak Loung) (21°30'N., 108°13'E.),

88m high, is the SW extremity of a hilly peninsula projecting

from the mainland.

4.9 Bailong Wan is entered close W of Bailong Wei. Nearly all

the N and NW portions of the bay are occupied by drying sand

banks, on which lay the islands of Man-wei tao and Wu-t’ou.

Outside the entrance to the bay there is a bar with depths of

7m. From a position lying 0.8 mile W of Bailong Wei, for a

distance of 2 miles NNE, there are depths of 7 to 11m in the

fairway, and anchorage with good holding ground. The bay

should not be entered without local knowledge.

The Gulf of Tonkin—West Side—Mui Lay to

Archipel des Fai Tsi Long

4.10 Mui Lay (Cap Lay) (17°05'N., 107°07'E.) is rocky

and covered with vegetation. The cape is 21 to 30m high, and a

small group of rocks extends a short distance from it. On the S

side of the cape are some yellowish-brown cliffs, at the N end

of which is a small bay. On the N side of the cape there are red

and yellow cliffs.

4.10 Hon Co (Hon Gio) (Ile du Tigre), 70m high, lies 13 miles

ENE of Mui Lay, from which it is separated by a deep and

clear channel. A conspicuous tower is situated on the summit

of the island. The N and S ends of the island slope steeply

towards the sea. 

4.10 Rocks fringe the N and W sides of the island, and detached

rocks lie close to its E and S extremities. The bottom around

the island is rocky and uneven. A depth of 14m lies 2 miles N

of the island.

4.10 Aspect.—Abreast Hon Co, in fine weather, the inland range

of mountains from Dong Ngai (16°21'N., 107°14'E.), 1,774m

high, to the peaks in the vicinity of Rau Nhat Le can be seen.

The most prominent mountains are: Dong Voi Mep (Dent du

Tigre), 1,739m high, rising 30 miles SW of Mui Lay; Dong

Chan, 1,254m, about 10 miles farther N; Nui Da Mao, 734m

high, standing 9 miles SW of Rau Nhat Le; and Co Roong

(Grand Sommet), 1,623m high, located 15 miles WSW of Nui

Da Mao.

Mui Lay to Mui Ron

4.11 The coast between Mui Lay and Rau Nhat Le, 37

miles NW, is low and sandy, with villages and a few palm trees

in places. 

4.11 Rau Nhat Le (Ron Nhat Le) (17°29'N., 106°38'E.) is

fronted by a bank with depths of less than 1.8m extending more

than 0.5 mile offshore. The charted depths of about 3m in the

entrance to the river are subject to change. Entry should not be

attempted without local knowledge.

4.11 The town of Dong Hoi stands on the W bank of the river. A

church, with a tower, surmounted by a dome, rising above the

sand hills, stands on the W bank about 0.8 mile within the

entrance and is prominent from seaward.

4.11 A rock, which dries 1.8m, lies nearly 1 mile offshore, 2 miles

N of Rau Nhat Le.

4.11 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage off Rau Nhat Le,
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 81

Pub. 161

outside the bar, during the Southwest Monsoon. Within the

entrance, small vessels may anchor off the church and tower, in

a depth of 4m. 

4.12 The coast between Rau Nhat Le and Pointe Da Nhai,

12 miles NW, is sandy, backed by sand hills, and has low cliffs

in places. The first of these cliffs lies 2.3 miles NW of Rau

Nhat Le. Another cliff, 2 miles farther NW, is red in color,

stands at the entrance to a small river, and rises to a wooded

summit on which stands a pagoda. 

4.12 Cua Lyhoa lies 11 miles NW of Rau Nhat Le. A rocky point

lies 1 mile SE of the river entrance. A fishing village is situated

on the N side of the entrance. A dredged channel to Cua Lyhoa,

suitable for small craft, has a depth of 1.5m at HW.

4.12 Pointe Da Nhai (17°40'N., 106°30'E.) consists of two rocky

spurs, close together and bordered by sand. A small white

pagoda stands at the foot of the N spur. The mountains

approach the coast here and form a promontory, 74m high,

rendering the point prominent. Ru Hon Bong, 233m high, rises

2 miles WSW of the point.

4.12 Cua Giang, 3 miles NNW of Pointe Da Nhai, is fronted by a

steep-to bar. It was reported that vessels with a draft of less

than 1.8m could cross the bar at half-tide. The bar is subject to

frequent change and should not be attempted without local

knowledge. Song Giang is reported to be deep as far as the

mountains inland, where timber is floated down to the mouth.

4.12 Between Cua Giang and Cua Ron, 10 miles N, the coast is

low and sandy. A rocky bank extends about 2.3 miles E of Cua

Ron. Hon No, a coral reef, which dries 0.9m, lies near the outer

end of the bank. The bank extends N and connects with the

reefs extending W of Hon Nam, which is 61m high.

4.13 Mui Ong (17°56'N., 106°31'E.) rises to an elevation

of 154m about 1 mile inland, and can be recognized by a

pagoda and large red patches on it. Ba Coc, 1,006m high and

Hoanh Son, 1,022m high, are two prominent wooded summits,

about 4 and 11 miles, respectively, WNW of the cape. A shoal

with a depth of 0.6 mile lies 0.4 mile S of Mui Ong.

4.13 Hon Co and Hon La lie close to, and about 0.7 mile ESE,

respectively, of Mui Ong. Hon La is the higher of the two.

4.13 Hon Gio, 109m high, is a rugged and steep-to islet, lying 9

miles E of Mui Ong.

4.13 A bank, with a depth of 18m, was reported to lie 29 miles

ESE of Mui Ong. The bank was unsuccessfully searched for,

and its position and existence are doubtful.

4.13 Vung Chua, a bay lying SW of Hon La and Hon Co, is the

only place on this section of coast offering protection during

the Northeast Monsoon. The bay affords good holding ground,

but is exposed to the swell. Small vessels can anchor, in 5.5 to

9.2m, in the shelter of the above islets. Larger vessels anchor

farther offshore, keeping Hon Gio open S of the S extremity of

Hon La.

4.13 Mui Doc rises to an elevation of 264m about 0.7 mile W of

Mui Ong. Good anchorage, during the Southwest Monsoon,

can be found N of Mui Ong, or off Mui Doc.

4.13 The coast is rocky between Mui Doc and Mui Dao, a low

point lying 2.5 miles NNW, and another low point, located 0.5

mile farther NNW. The coast is then low and sandy for a

distance of 7 miles NNW. 

4.14 Mui Ron (18°07'N., 106°26'E.) is a rocky steep-to

headland rising to an elevation of 230m. Nui Can Son, 368m

high, is conspicuous about 3.5 miles SW of Mui Ron. Mui Ron

Ma is the NE point of the cape.

4.14 Hon Son Duong, 145m high and wooded, lies 1.5 miles SE

of Mui Ron. From the E it has the appearance of three pointed

summits, with a perpendicular cliff towards its N end, and

sloping highlands towards the SW end. A reef, with a depth of

1.8m, and steep-to on its N and S side, extends about 0.3 mile

WSW from the W extremity of Hon Son Duong. A reef, with a

rock which dries about 3m at its outer end, extends 0.4 mile SE

from the SE extremity of the islet.

4.14 Hon Con Chim, 25m high and rocky, with two pointed

peaks, lies 1.5 miles ENE of Hon Son Duong.

4.14 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of

11m, mud, about 0.5 mile S of Hon Son Duong, which is steepto, with its W extremity bearing 325°, and with Hon Con Chim

bearing 055°. The anchorage is sheltered by the islet and the

reefs extending from its extremities, but during the Northeast

Monsoon the swell is considerable.

Mui Ron to Ben Thuy

4.15 The coast between Mui Ron and Mui Ga, 60 miles

NW, consists of sandy beaches, backed by sandy plains. Inland,

the mountains, which approach the coast at Mui Ong, curve W,

then NW, following to some extent the curve of the coast. 

4.15 Rao Co (18°10'N., 105°25'E.), 2,286m high and the most

prominent peak, lies 58 miles W of Mui Ron and 35 miles

inland. From N, this peak presents a remarkable double summit, but is often hidden by clouds. There are prominent isolated

peaks on the plains near the coast.

4.15 Vung Han, the bay W of Mui Ron, affords shelter from E and

S winds, but is open to winds from NE to W, and is therefore

available only during the Southwest Monsoon. The head of the

bay is low and sandy, and can be approached according to

draft.

4.15 Cua Khau, the narrow outlet of a large lagoon, lies close W

of Vung Han and is obstructed by a bar that dries. Nui Ban Do,

two prominent peaks, 441m high, lie 5 miles NW of Cua Khau.

4.15 Cua Nhuong (18°16'N., 106°08'E.) has a narrow entrance,

obstructed by a shallow bar. Hon Buc, a group of gray rocks, 4

to 5m high, and many rocks, some of which dry, lies 1 mile N

of the entrance. Hon En, a precipitous rectangular-shaped islet,

41m high, lies 3.5 miles NE of the E entrance point of Cua

Nhuong. Hon Man, a ridge of rocks, 7m high, lies 0.3 mile E of

Hon En; the sea has been observed to break a short distance SE

of these rocks.

4.15 Cliffs extending 1.8 miles E of Cua Nhuong are high and

precipitous. Ru Cua, 458m high, lies 1.7 miles ESE of the E

entrance point of Cua Nhuong.

4.16 Ru Cum, 108m high, with a pagoda on its E slope, lies

close to the coast, 2 miles WNW of Cua Nhuong.

4.16 The coast between Ru Cum and Nui Nam Giai, 13 miles

NW, is low, sandy, and bare of vegetation. Nui Nam Giai,

375m high, is the summit of a ridge terminating 1.8 miles N in

Mui Sot, a high, cliffy headland, 57m high, which is connected

to the coast by a narrow low sandy isthmus. A rock, 2.4m high,

lies about 137m N of Mui Lo, the N extremity of Mui Sot. Cua
82 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

Sot, entered W of Mui Lo, has an entrance with a least depth of

1.8m over the bar; within the bar the depths increase, but the

channel narrows.

4.16 Between Cua Sot and Cua Hai, 20 miles NW, the coast is

sandy. Bong Son, 213m high, lies 3 miles W of Mui Lo, nearly

1 mile inland. Nui Ong, consisting of four peaks, the highest of

which is 700m high, lies 6.5 miles NW of Bong Son, and 2.5

miles inland; it is the highest range in the vicinity.

4.16 Between Cua Hoi and the mouth of Song Cua Lo, about 5

miles NW, the coast is low and sandy. Mui Rong, the N

entrance point of Song Cua Lo, is cliffy and a hill, 102m high,

rises 0.3 mile W of it; drying rocks extend up to 0.8 mile E of

the point. Roche Cua Lo, high, black and prominent, lies 1 mile

S of Mui Rong, about 0.1 mile off a small projection on the

coast.

4.16 Mui Ga (18°51'N., 105°43'E.), comprised of cliffs, lies 0.8

mile N of Mui Rong. Ru Than Vu, 441m high, standing 7 miles

W of Mui Ga, is the summit of a range of mountains.

4.17 Off-lying islets and dangers.—Hon Mat (18°48'N.,

105°58'E.), 218m high, lies 13.5 miles ESE of Mui Ga. Roche

des Pecheurs, with a depth of 1.5m, lies about 1.5 miles NW of

the NW end of the islet. A rock awash lies close off its SE

extremity.

4.17 Hon Truan, 43m high, lying 1.2 miles E of the S extremity of

Hon Mat, is the easternmost of the islets off this part of the

coast. A rock, above water, with a rock drying 0.9m close E,

lies about 300m NW of Hon Truan.

4.17 Rocher Nom, 13m high, and fringed by rocks on its SW and

SE side, lies in the E approach to Cua Hoi, 7 miles WSW of

Hon Mat. Rocher Lap, 4m high, lies 1 mile NW of Rocher

Nom. Rocky patches, with depths of 3.7m, lie about 0.5 mile

SSE and 0.2 mile W of Rocher Lap.

4.17 Hon Nieu (18°48'N., 105°46'E.), 4 miles SE of Mui Ga, lies

in the N approach to Cua Hoi. It is comprised of two hills,

separated by a low neck; the E and higher hill is 123m high. A

rock, with a depth of less than 2m, existence doubtful, is

charted 1.2 miles NNE of Hon Nieu.

4.17 Plateau du Large, a group of rocks, one of which is about

0.6m high, lies 3 miles E of Mui Ga. It is generally visible or

can be distinguished by the sea breaking over it. Rocher St.

Ann, which dries 0.3m, lies 1.2 miles WSW of Plateau du

Large.

4.17 Anchorage.—Small vessels can obtain shelter, during the

Northeast Monsoon, on the SW side of Hon Mat, in a depth of

20m. There is good anchorage, sheltered from NE winds, for

vessels with local knowledge, on the SW side of Hon Nieu, in a

depth of 8m. This anchorage is useful to vessels unable to enter

Cua Hoi.

Ben Thuy (Nghe Tinh) (18°39'N., 105°42'E.)

World Port Index No. 57660 

4.18 Cua Hoi is the mouth of Song Ca. Vessels able to

cross the bar can ascend to Ben Thuy, about 10 miles from the

entrance. Ben Thuy is the port for Vinh, the capital of the

province of Nge An.

4.18 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at MHHW at Hon Nieu is

2.7m.

4.18 With large tides the flood current lasts about 6 hours, and the

ebb for 18 hours. With small tides there is no flood. During

periods of high river, the currents can be very strong. Slack

water at Ben Thuy occurs about 1 hour 45 minutes after that at

Cua Hoi, or about 1 hour after high and low water.

4.18 Depths—Limitations.—A bank, with depths of less than

2m, extends from both entrance points of Cua Hoi, which are

low and sandy. The bar is composed of hard sand and subject to

frequent change. No vessel should attempt to cross the bar

without a pilot.

4.18 Vessels drawing up to 4.5m can reach Ben Thuy. Vessels of

deeper draft anchor NW of Hon Nieu and discharge their cargo

into lighters.

4.18 Ben Thuy Pier (18°39'00"N., 105°42'00"E.) can accommodate vessels with a maximum draft of 4m. 

4.18 Cua Lo Pier (18°49'30"N., 105°42'00"E.) can accommodate

vessels up to 100m long with a draft of 5m. 

4.18 Xuam Hai Pier (18°40'48"N., 105°42'00"E.) can accommodate vessels with a maximum draft of 4.5m.

4.18 Aspect.—A lighted beacon is shown from the N entrance

point of Cua Hoi.

4.18 The channel over the bar is buoyed.

4.18 Pilotage.—Vessels requiring a pilot should give 24 hours

notice. The pilot will then meet the vessel outside the bar or off

Hon Nieu. Messages should be sent through Da Nang or Hai

Phong coast radio stations.

4.18 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained off Ben Thuy, in a

depth of 8m. A vessel drawing 3m can anchor 100m from the

outer ends of the piers.

4.18 There are several mooring buoys established off the port

area.

4.18 Vung Thu Dien (Vung Phu Dien) (Baie du Brandon) is

entered between Mui Ga and Mui Falaise, located 15 miles N.

The bay affords inadequate shelter as it is open NE; during the

Southwest Monsoon, the winds are SE. Le Pate, an isolated

peak, 149m high, lies 12.5 miles NW of Mui Ga, and 5 miles

inland.

Ben Thuy to the Delta of the Red River

4.19 Mui Falaise (19°06'N., 106°44'E.) rises to an

elevation of 189m about 0.5 mile inland. The cape has a broad,

light-colored stripe on its N face. Lach Quen, about 1.5 miles

W of Mui Falaise, has an entrance restricted by banks. Nui Ky,

117m high, lies 0.2 mile W of the W entrance of Lach Quen.

4.19 The coast between Mui Falaise and Cap Bouton, 7 miles N,

is low and sandy. A group of rocks, some of which are sunken,

lie 2.5 to 3.5 miles N of Mui Falaise, and close offshore; two of

these rocks are prominent and the highest is about 79m high.

4.19 Cap Bouton (19°13'N., 105°45'E.), 139m high and wooded,

is the E entrance point of Cua Can, a shallow estuary. Two

rocks, the S of which dries 1.5m, lie close together, 1 mile ENE

of the cape, and about 0.3 mile offshore.

4.19 Shoals, the existence of which is doubtful, with depths of

5.8m and 7m, are charted 7 miles ESE and 4 miles SE, respectively, of Cap Bouton.

4.19 Mui Ta Lus (Cap Ta Lus), 4 miles NNE of Cap Bouton, is

joined to the mainland by a narrow neck of sand. About 0.7

mile N of Mui Ta Lus is the S extremity of Hu Truong, a steep

cliff the summit of which, nearly 1 mile N, is 171m high.
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 83

Pub. 161

4.19 Dao Bien Son, 2 miles NNE of Mui Ta Lus, is an island,

162m high at its N end, and joined to the mainland by a drying

bank. There is a conspicuous vertical rock, almost detached at

the SE extremity of the island. Foul ground, drying 1.5m at its

outer end, extends about 0.3 mile S from the island. A rock,

with a depth of 4m, lies 2 miles N of Dao Bien Son.

4.19 Abreast Dao Bien Son, the coast is bordered by a range of

hills, which attain an altitude of 431m in Nui Xuoc, about 4

miles inland.

Off-lying Islets and Dangers

4.20 Hon Me (19°22'N., 105°56'E.), the largest and northeasternmost of a group of precipitous islets, which shows a

light, lies 5.2 miles ENE of the N end of Dao Bien Son. The

islets are uninhabited and only frequented by fishermen in

summer. Hon Me has several wooded peaks, the highest rising

to a height of 251m. Hon Vat, 127m high, lies close SSE of

Hon Me, with an islet and rocks between. Hon Vong, 58m

high, lies 0.3 mile W of the W extremity of Hon Me.

4.20 Anchorage can be taken off the SW side of Hon Me, between

Hon Vat and Hon Vong, in depths of 7.3 to 8.2m, with local

knowledge. 

4.20 Hon Dot, 115m high and conical, lies 1.5 miles SW of Hon

Me. Hon Tio, 28m high, lies close off the SE end of Hon Dot.

4.20 Hon Men, 36m high, is the highest of a group of rocks, 0.7

mile SW of Hon Dot. Hon Sap and Hon Neu are groups of

rocks, the highest reaching heights of 16m and 50m high,

respectively, 0.8 mile and 1.5 miles SE, respectively, of Hon

Men. A 9.5m patch lies 2 miles S of Hon Sap. 

4.20 Hon Bong, 65m high, is the NW of a group of islets lying 2.3

miles WSW of Hon Me. A ledge of rocks, some of which dry,

extends 0.4 mile WSW from Hon Bong. A bank, with depths

of less than 9m, extends 1.3 miles S of Hon Bong.

4.20 Mui Bang (Cap Bang) (19°26'N., 105°49'E.), 92m high, lies

7.5 miles WSW of Hon Me, and has a summit, in the shape of a

finger, dominating the sand hills.

4.20 A range of mountains lies within this section of coast. Nui

Tu Vi, 560m high and cone-shaped, lies at the S end of the

range, 6 miles W of Mui Bang. Nui Cac, 507m high, rises 4

miles N of Nui Tu Vi, and stands at the N end of the range. Nui

Bom, 307m high, lies 4 miles NE of Nui Cac and 2 miles from

the coast.

4.20 North of Nui Cac is the plain of Thanh Hoa, through which

flow Song Yen and Song Ma. The plain is also watered by

numerous canals and is wooded. It is cultivated near the coast

and studded with villages. Nui Dau Lon, 304m high, lies on

this plain, 13 miles NW of Nui Tu Vi.

4.20 Lach Yapp, the mouth of Song Yen, lies 9 miles N of Mui

Bang. Within the mouth of Lach Yapp a bank of mud nearly

obstructs the river.

4.21 Mui Chao (Cap Chao) (19°43'N., 105°54'E.) is 78m

high, and can be recognized by a pagoda on its N slope that is

visible from sea.

4.21 Lach Chao (Song Lach Chao), 4 miles NNE of Mui Chao, is

the mouth of Song Ma. There is a depth of 3.7m between the

entrance points in the fairway, although drying banks extend

from both points. The bar close off the banks has a depth of

about 1.2m, but is subject to change.

4.21 Lach Truong Giang is entered about 6.5 miles N of Lach

Chao. Nui Truong, 201m high, steep and isolated, lies 1 mile

SW of the S entrance point. Hon Bo, 26m high, lies near the

extremity of a drying bank that extends 0.3 mile ENE from the

S entrance point; two drying rocks lie close E of the islet.

4.21 Lach Truong Giang is accessible at HW to vessels drawing

3.4m, but the depths are subject to change. No vessel should

enter without local knowledge. 

4.21 Hon Ne (19°55'N., 106°01'E.), 79m high, lies 3 miles NE of

Hon Bo.

Delta of the Red River

4.22 Located 7 miles N of Hon Ne is the SE extremity of a

range of serrated mountains that extend NW for a considerable

distance. Northeast of this range is an extensive plain watered

by the Red River, the Song Thai Binh, and their tributaries. The

mouths of the different branches of these rivers form a vast

delta extending from the above-mentioned range of mountains

to Lach Huyen (20°46'N., 106°55'E.), the NE mouth of Song

Thai Binh, 70 miles NE.

4.22 Shallow banks of mud front this section of coast, which is

flat with trees here and there which appear to rise out of the

sea. Vessels approaching the coast should continuously employ

sound signals, and should not attempt the river mouths without

a pilot. During restricted visibility, the proximity of the coastal

bank is noticed by the reddish color of the water and the

breakers.

4.22 The branches of the Red River and Song Thai Binh are connected by creeks and canals, and a considerable trade is carried

on within the interior.

4.23 Hanoi (21°02'N., 105°50'E.) can be reached by

shallow draft vessels. Vessels drawing 2.7m can reach Hanoi

by Song Day and the Red River, except when the river is low. 

4.23 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in the approaches to the

Red River normally set N on the flood and S on the ebb. Strong

currents have been noted near Cua Lach Giang and Cua Ba Lat.

4.23 The Red River is at its lowest from December to May.

Around May, the melting of the snows causes the river to rise

rapidly, frequently washing away the banks. The annual rise at

Hanoi is 4.9 to 6.1m. The current in the lower reaches of the

river is often 2 or 3 knots. In the upper reaches, above Hanoi, 4

to 5 knots is common in the high-river season. In the narrows

during freshets, 7 or 8 knots may be reached.

4.23 Depths—Limitations.—The wharves provide 850m of

berthing space with alongside depths of up to 6m.

4.23 Smaller vessels can proceed about 200 miles above Hanoi

when the river stages permit. 

4.23 Hai Phong, 13 miles inland, is situated on the S bank of the

Cua Cam, a mouth of Song Thai Binh. 

Cua Day to Presqu’ile de Do Son

4.24 Cua Day (Cua Dai) (19°58'N., 106°06'E.), the mouth

of Song Day, lies 8 miles NE of Hon Ne, and is fronted by

drying banks extending 4 miles S of the entrance. The narrow

channel between the banks is subject to frequent change.

4.24 Cua Lach Giang, 6 miles ENE of Cua Day, and Cua Ba Lat,

26 miles farther NE, are impracticable for ocean-going vessels.
84 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

They are fronted by drying mud banks for a considerable distance, and muddy waters, having the appearance of banks of

mud, extend a considerable distance offshore. Vessels passing

should give these mouths a wide berth due to the strong crosscurrents in the vicinity, and the scarcity of landmarks.

4.24 A light is shown 5.5 miles NE of the entrance to Cua Ba Lat.

4.24 Cua Tra Ly, 11.5 miles N of Cua Ba Lat, appears easy of

access, but the depths within decrease rapidly.

4.24 Cua Thai Binh (20°36'N., 106°38'E.) and Cua Van Uc, 5

miles NE, are among the shallower mouths of Song Thai Binh.

The bars that obstruct their entrances have depths of less than

1.5m. Three buoys are moored 6 miles SE of the river entrance.

A stranded wreck lies 1.2 miles to seaward of the middle buoy.

4.24 Presqu’ile de Do Son is a hilly peninsula with Petit Mirador,

70m high, at its SE extremity. The peninsula attains an

elevation of 129m at Grand Mirador, located 2.5 miles NW of

Petit Mirador.

Approaches to Hai Phong

4.25 Hai Phong is approached between Presqu’ile de Don

Son and Xuy Nong Chao (Iles Norway), 18 miles E. Dao Cat

Ba (Ile Cac Ba), 7 miles NNW of Xuy Nong Chao, lies on the

N side of the approach.

4.25 Two channels lead to Hai Phong. Cua Cam, a mouth of Song

Thai Binh, NE of Presqu’ile de Do Son, and Cua Nam Trieu, 3

miles NE, and separated from Cua Cam by Ile de Dinh Vu.

Deep draft vessels use Cua Nam Trieu, which is entered by a

dredged channel across the bar. Cua Nam Trieu is connected to

Song Cua Cam by Dinh Vu (Canal Maritime), which has been

cut through Ile de Dinh Vu. Hai Phong lies on the S bank of

Song Cua Cam, 4 miles above Dinh Vu.

4.25 Caution.—Significant shoaling has been reported (2007) in

the entrance to Cua Cam Trieu and within Cua Cam. The channel has been extensively revised due to a narrower recommended NW passage. 

4.25 Hon Dau (20°40'N., 106°49'E.), which shows a light from

which a radio beacon transmits, lies 0.5 mile SE of Presqu’ile

de Do Son.

4.25 Xuy Nong Chao (Iles Norway) consists of two groups of

high and inaccessible islands and rocks, separated by a channel

about 1.5 miles wide. Rocher Est, 75m high and the largest

island of the E group, is a natural landmark for vessels calling

at ports in the NW part of the Gulf of Tonkin. Several islets and

rocks extend 0.3 mile ENE of Rocher Est and La Tour, a

pointed rock surrounded by depths of 4.7m, lying 0.3 mile N of

the island.

4.26 Grande Norway (20°37'N., 107°10'E.), 83m high, is

the largest of the W group. A light, from which a radio beacon

transmits, is shown from the SE part of the island. A small

group of islets lies 0.5 mile SE of Grande Norway; Le Menhir,

a rock, lies 0.1 mile SE of the group.

4.26 Ile Ouest, 64m high and lying 1.5 miles WSW of Grande

Norway, is the W island of Xuy Nong Chao.

4.26 Caution.—A depth of 11m lies 21.8 miles distant bearing

162° from the S extremity of Grande Norway.

4.26 Numerous junks may be encountered in the approach to Hai

Phong and in the vicinity of Xuy Nong Chao. Most of these

vessels display no navigational lights at night.

4.26 Ta Lao Pai (Rocher de Large), 17m high, lies 3.5 miles NW

of Ile Ouest, and shows a light. Basse du Passage, with a depth

of 8.5m, lies 1.7 miles WNW of Ta Lao Pai.

4.26 Dao Cat Ba (Ile Cac Ba), a large irregularly-shaped island,

has a range of mountains rising to a summit over 340m high

near the W part of the island. A peninsula at the S end of the

island has a summit 144m high, with a prominent fort on it, 0.8

mile NE of the S extremity of Dao Cat Ba.

4.27 La Quille (20°41'N., 107°03'E.), a 41m high rock,

lies 1.3 miles S of Dao Cat Ba. Les Oreilles, an islet, and Ile H,

98m high, lie 0.1 mile N and 0.8 mile NNW, respectively, of La

Quille. 

4.27 Rocher Trident, with a depth of 1.8m, lies 1 mile W of La

Quille; a stranded wreck lies on the N side of the shoal. A

wreck, with a depth of 1.5m, lies 0.8 mile W of Rocher Trident.

4.27 In the approaches to Hai Phong the tides are subject to a

large diurnal inequality. Only one high and one low tide occurs

in 24 hours. The lowest tides occur about 3 days after the moon

has crossed the Equator. At this period the ordinarily diurnal

tides are observed. High water occurs at Hai Phong about 1

hour after HW at Presqu’ile de Do Son. Highest tide occurs

about 5 hours after the moon’s upper transit when the moon has

a N declination, and about 5 hours after lower transit when the

moon has a S declination. The tides are higher during the

Northeast Monsoon than during the Southwest Monsoon.

4.27 The tidal rise at Cua Nam Trieu is 3.1m and 2.7m at Xuy

Nong Chao at MHHW.

4.27 Tidal currents off the entrance to Cua Nam Trieu generally

set NE and follow the channels on the flood. As the tide rises,

the flow becomes less restricted to the channels and sets across

them in a northerly direction, at the same time attaining its

maximum rate. At HW locally, the flow turns counterclockwise and decreases. The flow sets SSW on the ebb tide,

attaining a velocity of nearly 0.8 knot with small tides and 1

knot with large tides. The flow becomes very weak 2 hours

before LW, and reverses at LW. The flow is stronger on the

flood tide than on the ebb tide, and in the dredged parts of the

channel over the shallows.

Hai Phong (20°52'N., 106°41'E.)

World Port Index No. 57680

4.28 Hai Phong, the shipping port for Hanoi, has the

appearance of a European town. The city and wharves lie on

the S bank of the Cua Cam. Moorings are laid in the river to

provide berths for deeper draft vessels, and cargo is worked by

lighters.

4.28 Hai Phong port limits cover the Vinh Ha Long (paragraph

4.35) and Hon Gai (Hon Gay) (paragraph 4.36) areas.

4.28 Winds—Weather.—The climate of Hai Phong is primarily

tropical. However, during the months of January, February, and

March the weather is cold and damp.

4.28 Squalls are a probability at any time of the year, those of

particular violence being the “arch squall” that occurs in this

area. This type is preceded by clouds rising in the form of an

arch, attended by heavy rains and high winds.
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 85

Pub. 161

4.28 Tides—Currents.—In Song Cua Cam the current may

attain a velocity of 2.5 knots. In Cua Nam Trieu, the flow

reverses 2 hours 30 minutes after HW and 1 hour 30 minutes

after LW at Cua Cam. With large tides, the velocity of the ebb

current exceeds 3 knots.

4.28 At Hai Phong during the low-river season (October to

February), the ebb current begins 2 hours after HW at Hon Dau

and the flood current begins 2 hours 30 minutes after LW at

Hon Dau; the maximum velocities are 1.5 knots and 1 knot,

respectively. With large tides, the ebb current begins 3 hours 30

minutes after HW at Hon Dau and the flood current begins 6

hours 30 minutes after LW at Hon Dau; the maximum

velocities are 2 to 4 knots and 2 to 3 knots, respectively. 

4.28 At Hai Phong during the high-river season, which occurs in

summer, the flood current is reduced and the ebb current is

increased in both speed and duration; there is no flood current

at all if the tidal range is less than 0.3m. The ebb current has

been observed to reach 4 to 5 knots after heavy rain and vessels

frequently drag anchor.

4.28 The flood current becomes established slowly; for the first

0.5 hour the velocity does not exceed 0.5 knot and this is

followed by a slack water period of 1 hour to 1 hour 30 minutes

before the current is properly established. The ebb current

starts rapidly, beginning in the middle of the river; it attains a

velocity of 1 knot within 1 hour of commencement.

4.28 Depths—Limitations.—Dinh Vu (Canal Maritime) has a

least depth of 7.9m. The depths decrease to 4.6m in Cua Cam

on the range line, about 0.5 mile farther WNW.

4.28 The maximum size vessel permitted to cross the bar and

enter the dredged channel in Cua Nam Trieu is 200m in length,

26m breadth, and 7m draft. Vessels of lesser size may have an

allowable draft of 7.6m to berth alongside. Vessels of lesser

draft may also lighter in Nihtiep (20°51.3'N., 106°46.0'E.) and

Bachdang (20°52.4'N., 106°45.4'E.) anchorages. Vessels exceeding this draft are lightered in Ha Long Bay (Vinh Ha

Long) anchorage.

4.28 There are 11 berths with depths of 8m alongside for general,

bulk, and container cargo, and passenger vessels. Additionally,

the longest berth is located in the Doanxa berthing area, which

has two berths for ro-ro and container vessels, and has a total

length of 300m. 

4.28 The tanker berth in the Thuongly area can accommodate

vessels of up to 5.8m draft.

4.28 The Cua Cam berthing area harbors three berths for general

cargo vessels. The Thuysan area has an additional two berths

for fishing vessels and general cargo vessels. Chauve provides

a berthing area for two general cargo vessels.

4.28 If maximum draft exceeds port limitations, vessels anchor in

Baie d’Halong and discharge into lighters.

4.28 The harbor has a total of 15 marine moorings which are

capable of accommodating vessels of the 15,000 dwt class,

with maximum drafts of 7.6m. Mooring berths in the river have

depths of 5.7 to 7.8m.

4.28 Large vessels usually swing upstream, beyond the wharf

area, and then dock with their bows downstream.

4.28 A channel, marked by lighted buoys, leads NW to Lach

Huyen. The channel has been dredged (2009) to a mid-channel

depth of 6.7m and minimum width of approximately 100m. 

4.28 A channel, marked by lighted buoys, leads WSW and

connects Lach Huyen with Cua Nam Trieu. The channel has a

mid-channel depth of 4.6m and minimum width of

approximately 80m. 

4.28 The channel to the port of Hai Phong follows Canal

Maritime and ends in Cua Cam. The channel has a controlling

mid-channel depth of 5.2m and minimum width of

approximately 80m. 

4.28 Vessels bound for Hai Phong should seek up to date advice

regarding draft limitations prior to arrival.

4.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage for merchant vessels is compulsory.

Pilots are stationed at Hon Dau and board 2.5 miles E of Hon

Dau Light (20°39.8'N., 106°52.0'E.).

4.28 Vessels should radio their expected time of arrival at the pilot

station at least 48 hours in advance. The notice should also

include the last port of call and their estimated draft at arrival.

Vessels are generally taken upriver by day only. Pilots may be

contacted on VHF channels 9 and 16.

4.28 The pilot boat has a red hull. Pilots embark in the vicinity of

Lighted Buoy No. 0.

4.28 Regulations.—A customs officer and police officer usually

board vessels at Lighted Buoy No. 0 and accompany the vessel

to Hai Phong.

4.28 During poor visibility vessels should maintain constant radio

watch, and should notify the port authorities of the time of

departure from Lighted Buoy No. 0 and their speed. Vessels

with a draft of less than 3m must navigate outside the channel,

NE of the line of starboard hand lighted buoys.

4.28 Passage at night is possible, but daylight hours are preferred.

4.28 When two vessels are approaching Dinh Vu from opposite

directions, the one from Cua Nam Trieu must wait, and anchor

if necessary, until the vessel from Cua Cam has passed

through.

4.28 Signals.—When dredges are at work, vessels must sound

their whistles repeatedly. A dredge must not be passed until it

displays the signal “Not under command” at half mast, indicating that the channel is clear, and one of the two following

signals:

4.28 Vessels passing a dredge must do so as slowly as possible,

and must stop if necessary.

4.28 A signal station is available in Hai Phong, from which storm

signals are displayed.

4.28 Anchorage.—There are four anchorage areas, as follows: 

4.28 Vessels awaiting the tide should anchor as near Hon Dau

Day Night Meaning

A cone, 

point up

Two green lights, 

vertically disposed

The dredge must be 

passed on the starboard side

A cone, 

point down

Two red lights, vertically disposed

The dredge must be 

passed on the port 

side

Anchorage Maximum draft

Ninhtiep 7.0m

Bachdang 6.0m

Halong 10.0m

Hongay 9.4m
86 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

(20°40'N., 106°49'E.) as their draft will permit. If there is a

heavy swell, vessels with a draft of 5.8m can anchor in the

entrance of Baie d’Apowan (20°43'N., 107°02'E.) in a depth

of 7m. See also Vinh Ha Long for deep-draft anchorage, which

will be described later in paragraph 4.35.

4.28 Vessels anchoring in the vicinity and outer anchorages

should beware of intruders. See also the cautionary remarks on

piracy in paragraph 2.1.

4.28 Directions.—Vessels bound for Hai Phong should steer for

Xuy Nong Chao (Iles Norway). Approaching these islands in

thick weather or at night, caution should be exercised in depths

of less than 29m. The bottom E of the islands consists of gray

mud. The radio should be manned continuously in thick

weather.

4.28 A vessel approaching from S in thick weather should steer

for Hon Dau. Approaching Hon Dau on a bearing of 343° the

bottom consists of muddy sand, while to the W of this line the

bottom is almost all mud, often mixed with shells. East of this

line the bottom is white or gray sand, with black speckles.

4.28 In poor visibility, if a vessel considers itself too far W, it

should anchor as soon as it is in depths of 15m. On ascertaining

such is the case, it should steer E into a depth of 20m, and then

N, into a depth of 11m, when it will have a better chance of

sighting Hon Dau.

4.28 If the pilot boat is not sighted or it is too late to proceed to

Hai Phong, excellent anchorage can be obtained, in 12m, mud,

good holding ground, with Hon Dau bearing W, and with

Lighted Buoy No. 0 bearing N. 

4.28 Due to the changing nature of the entrance channel and the

compulsory pilotage for the port, no further directions are

given.

4.28 Caution.—Depths in the seaward approach channel are

subject to change, and the buoyage is altered accordingly. The

buoyage in the approach channel is reported to be unreliable or

missing. In 1990, heavy silting in the Cua Nam Trieu was

reported.

4.28 A dangerous wreck lies in the approaches to Hai Phong,

approximately 7.75 miles ESE of Hon Dau.

Song Bach Dang

4.29 Above the E entrance of Dinh Vu, the Cua Nam Trieu

becomes the Song Bach Dang (20°51'N., 106°46'E.), and then

the Song Da Bach. Port Redon (20°59'N., 106°46'E.) lies on

the NE bank of Song Da Bach, about 8.5 miles above Dinh Vu;

it is the terminus of a railway to mines and has a small jetty at

which vessels can not berth. 

4.29 Bancs de Ha Nam extend about 0.8 mile from the W bank of

Song Da Bach, about midway between Dinh Vu and Port

Redon. A narrow channel on its E side is marked by buoys. In

1990, it was reported that the dangerous rock on Bancs de Ha

Nam was removed by explosives.

4.29 Pilotage.—Pilotage in the river is compulsory.

4.29 Anchorage.—There is anchorage above Bancs de Ha Nam,

abreast the W entrance of Song Chanh, in a depth of about

10m. This anchorage serves Quang Yen (20°56'N., 106°48'E.)

and its zinc factory.

4.29 Anchorage can be taken by vessels with a draft of 4.9m in

Song Chanh, 4 miles SE of Quang Yen.

4.29 Port Redon Anchorage, about 3 miles farther N, has depths

of 7 to 11m. Vessels load coal and other ores by lighters.

4.29 Lach Huyen (20°48'N., 106°55'E.), the NE mouth of Song

Thai Binh, has a tower on its W entrance point. A buoyed

channel leads NW from Buoy P-0 (20°41'N., 107°00'E.) and

over the bar lying 3 to 4.5 miles SE of the entrance. The

channel is approximately 7 miles long, with depths of 7.1 to

10.7m and a minimum width of 100m. 

4.29 Vessels with local knowledge can cross the bar at HWS and

proceed upriver in deep water to the E entrance of Song Chanh.

There are depths of not less than 4.9m in Song Chanh to within

2.5 miles of Quang Yen. 

4.29 A buoyed channel in the S part of Dao Ha Nam (20°49'N.,

106°52'E.) connects Lach Huyen and Ha Nam with Cua Nam

Trieu and Hai Phong. This channel has depths of 5.9 to 7.4m

and a minimum width of 78m. 

Archipel des Fai Tsi Long

4.30 The NW shore of the Gulf of Tonkin, for a distance of

40 miles NE of Dao Cat Ba (20°48'N., 107°02'E.), is bordered

by numerous, high, rocky islands and islets of limestone

formation, known as the Archipel des Fai Tsi Long (20°50'N.,

107°25'E.). These islands present varied forms with very distinct summits, some of which attain elevations of over 305m.

4.30 Xuy Nong Chao (Iles Norway) makes a good landfall in the

approach from S. The fort on the S end of Dao Cat Ba, and

Dao Lai Tao (20°43'N., 107°28'E.) 23 miles E, an island with

a conical summit, are easily identified.

4.30 The archipelago consists mainly of steep rocks and islets of

marble, 46 to 91m high, some of which have been worn away

at the waterline and overhang the sea. From a distance, these

islands appear as a compact mass, but on nearer approach the

channels between them can be distinguished. Steep mountains

run parallel to and back the coast NW of the archipelago.

4.30 Caution.—Vessels should not pass close to the limestone

rocks as large pieces occasionally break off. Small islets should

be given a wide berth to avoid the shoals in their vicinity.

4.31 Channels.—Archipel des Fai Tsi Long provides

anchorages for large vessels. The principal channels leading to

these anchorages are:

1. Entree Profonde, leading from Baie de Lan Ha,

through Rade du Crapaud, then through Chenal du Volta, or

Passe de l’Arche, to Vinh Ha Long.

2. Entree Profonde, then through Passe Crochet into

Passe Henriette and Vinh Ha Long to Port Courbet .

3. Passe Henriette, the best approach to Vinh Ha Long.

Chenal du Ducouedic and Chenal del’Hamelin lead from

Passe Henriette to Baie de Fai Tsi Long.

4. Passe de l’Aspic, leading into Baie de Fai Tsi Long,

and through Chenal de la Saone and Chenal de Cam Pha to

Cam Pha Port.

5. Passe de la Perouse, then through Passe du Casque

into Chenal de la Saone. This is the most direct route to Cam

Pha Port.

4.31 The above channels lead to sheltered anchorages where the

working of cargo is generally uninterrupted and where vessels

can go alongside one another. The holding ground is good and

tidal currents attain a velocity of only 1 knot at spring tides.

These anchorages offer fair shelter during typhoons as they are
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 87

Pub. 161

practically landlocked, and the islets are high enough to diminish much of the wind.

4.31 Pak Ha Mun (20°58'N., 107°34'E.) on the E side of the

archipelago, has depths of 11 to 13m, and affords secure anchorage in a depth of 15m.

4.31 Winds—Weather.—From December to March fogs are

frequent and persistent. Among the islands the heat in summer

is greater than in the delta area SW or offshore. Temperatures

reach 38°C in summer, and drop to 7° to 10°C in winter. 

4.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory to ports in the archipelago. Pilots for Hon Gai and Cam Pha Port are embarked in

the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 0. Vessels must arrive at the

pilot boarding area before 1500 on weekdays and before 1200

on Sundays or festivals in order to enter these ports on the day

of arrival. Once embarked the pilot will signal the time of

arrival at the port concerned, after which the use of radio is

forbidden.

4.31 A pilot boarding place is also in the vicinity of L’Orange.

Approaches to Vinh Ha Long and Hon Gai

4.32 Baie de Lan Ha (20°45'N., 107°07'E.) is entered

between the islets fronting the SE side of Dao Cat Ba and the

SW extremity of Ile de la Paix (20°45'N., 107°07'E.). The E

side of the bay, which is high and steep, is formed by Ile de la

Paix, with several islets off its NW side, and Ile de l’Union,

close N.

4.32 Ilots M (20°42'N., 107°05'E.), a group of three islets, lies 2.8

miles N of Hon Ta Lao Pai. Roche du Pecheur, with a least

depth of 8.2m, lies 0.5 mile SE of Ilots M. Ilot Cornu, 37m

high, lies 1.5 miles NE of Ilots M. Rocher Soulipai, which

dries 3m, lies 0.8 mile S of Ilot Cornu; a rock, with a depth of

0.9m, lies 0.2 mile farther S.

4.32 Anchorage according to draft can be taken in several sheltered inlets formed by the islets on the W side of the bay.

4.32 Entree Profonde (20°47'N., 107°07'E.) is entered between

the S extremity of Ile de l’Union and Pointe O, 1.3 miles

WNW. Ile du Milieu, 62m high, lies on the W side of the

channel, about 0.3 mile SE of Pointe O. From S, the entrance to

Entree Profonde is not visible until past Ile du Milieu.

4.32 On the E side of the channel, Ilot de la Recherche, 36m high,

with a rock close off its SW side, lies 0.3 mile NW of the S end

of Ile de l’Union.

4.32 La Selle, 220m high, the summit of Ile de l’Union, is

conspicuous and stands 0.8 mile N of the S end of the island.

Above-water rocks extend about 0.2 mile offshore abreast La

Selle; a rock with a depth of 1.8m, lies close W of the rocks.

Ilot Rouille, 58m high, lies 0.1 mile farther N.

4.32 A chain of islets and rocks extends up to 0.3 mile off the N

part of the W side of Ile de l’Union. Vessels should pass W of

these dangers.

4.32 Anchorage.—Port Bayard, on the W side of Entree Profonde, affords excellent shelter to small vessels with local

knowledge in typhoon conditions. It has depths of 5.5 to 7.3m,

but the entrance between the rocks on either side is about 73m

wide.

4.32 Entree Profonde leads into Rade du Crapaud at its N end

between the NW end of Ile de l’Union and Le Cobra, about 0.5

mile NW.

4.32 Rade du Crapaud (20°49'N., 107°07'E.) affords the most

accessible shelter from typhoons for large vessels when in the

vicinity of Xuy Nong Chao. Le Crapaud, 13m high, lies on the

SW side of the roadstead, 0.1 mile ENE of the N end of Le

Cobra.

4.32 Anchorage can be taken, in 13m, mud, with Le Crapaud

bearing 150°, distant about 0.7 mile.

4.32 Chenal du Volta, on the NW side of the roadstead, leads to

Vinh Ha Long. A vessel can proceed into Passe Henriette via

Passe Crochet on the E side of the roadstead.

4.33 Passe Henriette (20°48'N., 107°09'E.), the best

approach channel to Vinh Ha Long and Hon Gai, is the only

one that should be used by deep-draft vessels. The channel,

according to surveys (2006), has a least depth of 12.8m in the

fairway, which is approximately 200m wide, and leads NNW

to Hon Bui Xam (20°51'N., 107°08'E.). Passe Henriette is

entered between L’Orange (20°44'N., 107°11'E.), a 42m high

islet, and Ile Henriette, a 60m high islet, lying 1 mile W.

L’Orange has a white mark on its SE point, which was reported

to be visible, although indistinctly, for a distance of about 5

miles. Le Bloc (Bloc), a 94m high islet, lies about 0.2 mile N

of Ile Henriette. From a position in the vicinity of Hon Co

Ngua (20°52'N., 107°07'E.), the channel continues NW to meet

the buoyed inner channel. The inner channel, with dredged

depths of 8.3 to 8.5m and a width of 80m, leads NNW to Cua

Luc. The Hon Gai Bridge crosses Cua Luc and has a vertical

clearance of 50m.

4.33 La Mauvaise, a shoal with a depth of 3m, lies 0.7 mile SSE

of Ile Henriette; a rock, with a depth of 0.9m, lies 0.2 mile S of

the same islet.

4.33 Le Canot, a 23m high islet lying 1.5 miles N of Ile Henriette,

is the outermost of several islets lying E of Ile de la Paix. A

4.6m shoal, with a wreck on its S side, extends 0.1 mile SE of

Le Canot.

4.33 Le Youyou, a rock, 0.9m high, lies about 0.3 mile N of Le

Canot, and close W of the recommended track. A rock, with a

depth of 2.1m, lies 0.2 mile NW of Le Youyou.

4.33 Le Nez, 69m high, lies 0.5 mile NE of La Scie, the northeasternmost of the islands fringing Ile de l’Union. A reef, with

a depth of 3.7m, extends 100m E of Le Nez, and close W of the

recommended track.

4.33 An 11m patch lies 0.1 mile SSE of L’Orange. L’Epieu, a

46m high islet, lies 0.8 mile ENE of L’Orange.

4.33 Le Fantome, a 47m high islet, lies 0.8 mile N of L’Orange.

La Jonque, a 63m high islet, lies 0.3 mile N of Le Fantome. A

rock, with a depth of 0.6m, lies 0.4 mile W of La Jonque.

4.33 Le Bouquet, 34m high, lies 1 mile NNW of La Jonque. Le

Musoir, 123m high, lies 0.5 mile N of Le Bouquet. Ile du

Cirque, 131m high, lies 0.7 mile E of Le Musoir. A 4.6m shoal

lies 0.5 mile NNW of Le Musoir.

4.33 Hongai L’Echelle (20°49'N., 107°09'E.), 127m high, and Le

Dragon, on which there is a prominent casemate, are the

southernmost and northernmost of a group of islets lying 0.5

mile NE of Le Nez. A bank, with depths of less than 9m,

extends 0.3 mile SSE from L’Echelle.

4.34 Head of Pass.—Ile Salacco (20°50'N., 107°08'E.)

lies on the W side of the channel, 0.7 mile WNW of Le Dragon. Le Moine, 0.5 mile N of Ile Salacco, has a rock, 2m high,

close off its E extremity. The island of Le Goeland lies close
88 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

NW of Le Moine; a wreck lies off the NE side of the island. 

4.34 Le Puceron, a 12m high islet, lies on the E side of Passe

Henriette, about 0.5 mile ENE of Le Moine. La Roche Percee,

a 126m high island, lies 0.3 mile farther N.

4.34 Hon May Den (L’Index) (20°52'N., 107°07'E.), a 156m

high islet, has a prominent notch about halfway up its steep W

side, and a white mark on its E side. A light is shown from the

islet. A bank with depths of less than 9m extends 0.4 mile S of

the islet.

4.34 Anchorage.—The quarantine anchorage lies 0.5 mile WSW

of Hon May Den.

4.34 La Tribune, 59m high, lies 0.3 mile SE of Hon May Den and

is the southernmost of a group of small islets on the E side of

the entrance to Chenal de l’Hamelin.

4.34 La Banane, 102m high, lies 1 mile NNW of Hon May Den.

Vinh Ha Long 

4.35 Vinh Ha Long (20°55'N., 107°05'E.) is an extensive

bay lying between the islands bordering the N and NE coasts of

Dao Cat Ba and the mainland N. The major part of the bay is

occupied by a bank with depths of less than 4.5m. Large vessels can anchor in a narrow band in the SE part of the bay off

the inner entrances of the channels leading into the bay.

4.35 Ile de l’Hospital lies about 1.8 miles WSW of Hon May Den;

two islets, the N of which is 45m high, lie close N of the W extremity of Ile de l’Hospital. La Noix, a small islet, marked by a

light, lies 0.5 mile E of Ile de l’Hospital.

4.35 Anchorage.—The most frequented anchorage is in depths of

11 to 15m, mud, between Ile de la Surprise (20°51'N.,

107°06'E.) and Hon May Den. 

4.35 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9 to 15m, abreast Ile de

l’Hospital. The anchorage has excellent holding ground, and

vessels intending a long stay should weigh their anchors occasionally to prevent them from being buried.

Hon Gai (Cai Lan) (Port Courbet) 

(20°57'N., 107°04'E.)

World Port Index No. 57700

4.36 Hon Gai (Hon Gay), lies in the N part of Vinh Ha

Long, and is accessible by a dredged channel through the bay.

Chenal de l’Hamelin is an alternate route to Hon Gai. The port

lies at the SE extremity of Cua Luc, the entrance to Hongai

Bay. The latter is a large bay, encumbered with drying banks.

4.36 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Hon Gai is 3.6m at

MHHW.

4.36 The N flood current in Cua Luc begins 4 hours after LW

during small tides, and 2 hours after LW during large tides. The

S ebb current begins 1 hour after HW. The ebb current is the

stronger, attaining a velocity of 3 knots after heavy rains. The

flood current has a maximum velocity of about 0.8 knot at halftide.

4.36 Outside the entrance the tidal current is stronger on the E

side than on the W side; during the ebb there is an eddy which

sets N along the wharf at Hon Gai.

4.36 In the anchorage the ebb begins about 1 hour after HW, with

both small and large tides.

4.36 Depths—Limitations.—A buoyed channel, dredged to a

depth of 8.6m, leads NNW across Vinh Ha Long from a

position about 0.6 mile NNW of La Noix. Vessels with a draft

up to 10m can reach Hon Gai at HW. 

4.36 Cai Lan terminal has four berths and can accommodate

vessels of up to 25,000 dwt. There is a general cargo berth,

166m long, with an alongside depth of 9m. Two container

berths, 220m and 230m long, respectively, have alongside

depths of 12m. The bulk and general cargo berth is 230m long

and has an alongside depth of 12m. 

4.36 There is a coal berth, 120m long with an alongside depth of

8.5m. 

4.36 Tankers of up to 20,000 dwt can be accommodated at a buoy

berth, in a depth of 15m, about 0.5 mile N of Cua Luc narrows.

4.36 A submarine cable and an overhead electrical cable, with a

safe clearance of 33m, cross the entrance of Cua Luc. Hon Gai

bridge also crosses the channel and has a height of 50m. 

4.36 Aspect.—The axis of the channel, 159°-349°, is marked by

two directional lights; one is shown on La Noix, while the

other is shown on the W side of Cua Luc.

4.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot station is situated in position 20°43'24"N, 107°10'18"E. See pilotage instructions for Hai Phong (paragraph 4.28) and Archipel des Fai

Tsi Long (paragraph 4.30) for further information. 

4.36 Anchorage.—There are designated anchorages for LASH

vessels, tankers, dangerous cargo, and lightering.

4.36 Anchorage can be taken in the deep water S of the entrance

to Cua Luc, provided they do not obstruct the approach to the

wharves at Hon Gai.

4.36 Anchorage can also be taken, in depths of 15 to 17m, in the S

part of Port Courbet, N of Cua Luc, where there are two mooring buoys.

4.37 Chenal de l’Hamelin, an alternative channel leading

to Port Courbet, has a least depth of 3.7m in the fairway, and

passes between a number of islands in the NW part of Vinh Ha

Long. In the NW part of the channel there is a bar, through

which there is a dredged channel with a depth of 4.9m, soft

mud. Lighted and unlighted buoys mark the S side of the

dredged channel.

4.37 The channel leads close E of Hon May Den, then leads N

and NE, passing NE of La Clochette, an islet, marked by a

light, lying 1.3 miles NE of Hon May Den. Then it passes close

W of La Toque, a 24m high islet, about 0.3 miles farther N.

From close W of La Toque the channel leads about 0.7 mile

NW, passing close NE of La Porte-Fanal, an islet marked by a

light. The channel then extends WNW, passing S of Ile du

Repos, which shows a light, then passes through the dredged

channel leading to the deep water S of Cua Luc. Vessels in the

dredged channel should keep about 50m N of the buoys.

4.37 The shallowest part of the channel is midway between La

Porte-Fanal and La Lionne, a 65m high islet lying 0.5 mile N,

where there is a depth of 3.7m.

Baie de Fai Tsi Long

4.38 Baie de Fai Tsi Long (20°55'N., 107°53'E.), the

largest bay in the archipelago, is exposed to NE winds. Depths

within the bay are mostly shoal except in its SE part. The bay is

not as commercially important as Vinh Ha Long, and is more

of a thoroughfare to the channels within the islands.
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 89

Pub. 161

4.38 The bay is entered from SW by Chenal du Ducouedic, which

branches off from Passe Henriette. Chenal du Chateau Renaud,

which branches off Chenal de l’Hamelin, close N of La

Clochette (20°53'N., 107°08'E.), enters the W end of the bay,

runs along its NW side and joins Chenal de la Saione E of

L’Aigle. 

4.38 Baie de Fai Tsi Long is entered from the S by Passe de

l’Aspic, or by Passe de la Perouse, which connects with Passe

du Casque (20°52'N., 107°18'E.). Passe de la Mouche,

available for ships with local knowledge, is entered E of Ile de

Deux Passes, which lies 1 mile NE of Ile de l’Entree

(20°50'N., 107°19'E.). Tidal currents in Passe de la Mouche are

very strong.

4.38 Chenal de la Saone parallels the S and SE sides of the bay. It

connects with Chenal de Bourayne, from which Chenal de

Cam Pha leads to Cam Pha Port.

Chenal du Ducouedic

4.39 Chenal du Ducouedic is the deepest channel from

Passe Henriette to Baie de Fai Tsi Long. It branches off Passe

Henriette, E of Ile de l’Union, and passes E of L’Echelle

(20°49'N., 107°09'E.) in a N direction. It then passes W of Le

Sac, which lies close NW of Le Grand Sommet, 113m high. Le

Sampan, a rock which dries 3.4m, lies about 0.3 mile N of Le

Sac.

4.39 From abreast Le Sac, the channel leads NNE, passing W of

Ile Commune, 1.3 miles NNE of Le Sac. It then passes W of

Ilot A and Ile de l’Entree, which lie nearly 1 mile and 1.8

miles, respectively, NNE of the W extremity of Ile Commune.

The channel then turns ENE and enters Chenal de la Saone.

Chenal du Chateau Renaud

4.40 Chenal du Chateau Renaud branches off Chenal de

l’Hamelin NW of La Clochette (20°53'N., 107°08'E.), and

trends NE between Le Nid and Le Pierrot, a 113m high islet,

lying 0.3 mile N, where the channel enters Baie de Fai Tsi

Long. Le Nid, an islet with a needle-shaped rock at its N

extremity, lies 0.2 mile W of Ile des Singes (20°53'N.,

107°10'E.). A rock, with a depth of 3.7m, lies nearly 0.3 mile

NNE of the N extremity of Ile des Singes.

4.40 Le Castel, a 169m high islet, lies on the SE side of the

channel, about 0.3 mile NE of Ile des Singes. Le Lapin

(20°54'N., 107°10'E.), 30m high, and Le Kepi, 40m high, are

two islets lying 0.5 mile and 1.7 miles ENE, respectively, of Le

Castel.

4.40 On the NW side of the channel, Le Marron, a 16m high rock,

lies 0.6 mile N of Le Lapin. La Voile, a steep, 24m high rock,

lies nearly 1.8 miles farther ENE.

4.40 Chenal du Chateau Renaud leads across the NW side of Baie

de Fai Tsi Long, and passes between Le Dome (20°57'00"N.,

107°14'30"E.), a 102m high islet, lying 4 miles NE of Le Kepi,

and Le Carosse, a 34m high islet, about 0.3 mile E.

4.40 Le Spectre (20°57'N., 107°15'E.), an island, lies 0.2 mile E

of Le Carosse. A bank, with a depth of 4m, extends 0.1 mile N

of the E end of Le Spectre. Roche du Chenal, which dries 0.9m

and is marked to its N by a buoy, lies 0.2 mile N of Le Spectre.

The channel passes between the bank and Roche du Chenal .

4.40 After clearing Roche du Chenal, the channel extends ENE to

a position about 0.2 mile S of the E end of La Momie, an island

lying 0.8 mile NW of L’Aigle (20°58'N., 106°59'E.). Le Chien,

an islet, lies on the NW side of the channel, about 0.3 mile SW

of La Momie. The channel then extends in an ESE direction,

passing close NE of L’Aigle, and joins Chenal du Bourayne.

L’Aigle, seen from the W, dominates all other islands and

rocks.

Islands and Dangers in the Approach to Baie de

Fai Tsi Long 

4.41 Dao Lai Tao (20°43'N., 107°28'E.), 170m high, is the

southernmost of the islands which lie on the NE side of the S

approach to Baie de Fai Tsi Long. The island lies 15 miles

ENE of Rocher Est, and is steep-to on its S side, outside its

fringing reef. Roche du Chinois, with a depth of 4.2m, lies 1

mile SW of the island, and a dangerous rock (PA) lies 1.3 miles

further SW.

4.41 Nui Thuong Mai (Siong Lai Tac), 132m high, lies 1 mile

NNE of Dao Lao Tao. Cap Quan Lan, the S extremity of Dao

Cai Ban (Ile de Quan Lan) lies 2.5 miles N of Dao Lai Tao.

4.41 Off-lying dangers.—Tche Li Pai, an 8m high rock, surrounded by a reef, lies 6 miles WSW of Dao Lai Tao. At LW

several pointed rocks are visible, which occasionally resemble

the masts of junks. Depths of less than 3.7m extend up to 0.6

mile N and S of the island.

4.41 Recif des Salpes, which dries 3.4m, lies 1.2 miles N of Tche

Li Pai. A reef, which dries 0.3m, and a rocky shoal, with a

depth of 2.1m, lie 0.5 mile NNE and 1 mile NNW, respectively,

of Recif des Salpes.

4.41 Nui Nut (Ti Mao Tao), 116m high, lies 3.5 miles WNW of

Dao Lai Tao. A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends

1.7 miles W of Nui Nut. Baou Tao, 94m high, lies on this bank,

0.5 mile W of the island.

4.41 Ile du Sud (20°47'N., 107°20'E.), with Le Fourmilier, a 55m

high islet, close N, lies 3.2 miles NW of Baou Tao, and is the S

of a group of islets and rocks off the SW extremity of Ile Danh

Do La.

4.41 A bank, with depths of less than 9m, extends 5 miles SW

from Ile Danh Do La, and NW as far as the E side of Passe de

L’Aspic and across the entrances of Passe de la Mouche and

Passe de la Perouse.

Passe de l’Aspic

4.42 Passe de l’Aspic lies E of Passe Henriette, and has a

least depth of 8.2m on the recommended track in the pass. 

4.42 Approaching from SW, a vessel should pass E of Hu Lang

(20°44'N., 107°12'E.), a 52m high islet, and L’Epieu, lying 0.2

mile SW, at a distance of at least 1 mile. L’Epieu, a 46m high

islet, is the southeasternmost islet of the group lying on the E

side of Passe Henriette.

4.42 The entrance to Passe de l’Aspic lies NNE of Hu Lang with

that islet bearing 210°, astern, showing about midway between

Sam Pui Tsao and the NW island of the group lying 1 mile W

of Grande Norway.

4.42 La Mere (20°48'N., 107°15'E.), a 45m high islet, with

L’Enfant, a 19m high rock lying close SE, lies on the SE side

of the entrance to Passe de l’Aspic. A rock, which dries 1.8m,

lies almost 100m NW of La Mere. L’Arche, an islet, lies 0.7

mile NW of La Mere.
90 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

4.42 From abreast L’Arche, L’Escargot (20°53'N., 107°15'E.), a

66m high islet lying 4.5 miles NNE, will be seen between the

islets bordering Passe de l’Aspic on either side, bearing about

011°.

4.42 Le Roquet, an islet, lies on the E side of the pass, 0.7 mile

NNE of L’Arche. Ile de l’Aspic, on the W side of the pass, lies

0.5 mile NW of Le Roquet.

4.42 L’Escalier, an islet, about 0.7 mile NNE of Ile de l’Aspic,

lies on the W side of the channel. A rocky ledge, with a depth

of 1.8m at its extremity, extends 0.1 mile S from L’Escalier.

4.42 Ile du Souffleur lies nearly 0.5 mile E of L’Escalier, on the E

side of the pass. A rocky ledge connects Ile du Souffleur to the

W extremity of Ile de l’Arlene, 0.7 mile N. A rock, with a

depth of less than 1.8m, lies close off the W extremity of Ile de

l’Arlene. La Tranche, a rock, lies about 0.4 mile WNW, on the

W side of the pass.

4.42 Ile du Pont lies 0.8 mile N of Ile de l’Arlene, with several

islets between, on the E side of the pass. A bank, with a depth

of 0.9m, and a spit, with a depth of 3.7m, extend a short

distance from the SW side, and N end, respectively, of Ile du

Pont.

4.42 On the W side of the pass, La Potiche, a rock, close off the E

end of an islet, lies 0.1 mile W of Ile du Pont. An islet lies close

NE of La Potiche.

4.42 After passing Ile du Pont, Passe de l’Aspic leads about 0.5

mile NE, then NNE, passing between some islets. It then enters

Baie de Fai Tsi Long between L’Escargot and Le Nigre, a rock,

0.7 mile E, and joins Chenal de la Saone, 1 mile farther NNE.

Shoals over which there are depths of 5.8 to 7m, lie E of

L’Escargot and 0.4 mile SW of Le Nigre, but there is a narrow

channel between them in which the depths are greater.

4.42 Tidal currents are strong abreast Ile du Pont.

Passe de la Perouse (Lach Dong Trang)

4.43 Passe de la Perouse, E of Passe de l’Aspic, is oriented

on a 029°-209° axis and approached from SW between Tche

Li Pai (20°41'N., 107°21'E.) and L’Epieu, about 9 miles

WNW. The best course of approach is with Sam Pui Tsao

(20°39'N., 107°09'E.) bearing 221° astern.

4.43 Le Turco (20°48'N., 107°16'E.), a rock, lies on the NW side

of the approach to Passe de la Perouse.

4.43 Le Cancrelat (20°50'N., 107°18'E.), an islet marked by a

light, lies 1.5 miles NE of Le Turco, on the SE side of Passe de

la Perouse. There is a least depth of 8.5m on the recommended

track at the S end, but the depths increase as Passe du Casque is

approached.

4.43 Approaching the pass from S, La Mere, L’Enfant, and Le

Cancrelat are easy to identify. The channel leads about 0.3 mile

NW of Le Cancrelat and passes between it and several islets on

the NW side of the pass.

4.43 A 6m patch lies close off the E extremity of La Meduse

(20°51'N., 107°17'E.), the largest of the islands lying NW of

the recommended track, and an above-water rock lies close W

of the patch. Two islets lie about 0.2 mile further N.

4.43 L’Encrier, a rock, marked by a beacon, lies 1.5 miles NNE of

Le Cancrelat, and between them is a group of islets and shoals

which lie within 0.1 mile of the SE side of the recommended

track.

4.43 Tidal currents at the junction of Passe de la Perouse and

Passe du Casque attain a velocity of 1.5 knots, with a tidal

range of about 3m.

Passe du Casque

4.44 Passe du Casque leads NW from a position located

0.3 mile NW of L’Encrier (20°51'N., 107°19'E.). It then

passes between Le Marsouin, 0.7 mile NW of L’Encrier, and a

group of islets which lie on an extensive shoal on the NE side

of the channel.

4.44 The channel continues NW, passing close E of Le Casque, a

261m high island lying 1.2 miles NW of Le Marsouin. The NE

extremity of Le Casque is marked by a beacon backed by a

whitewashed mark facing N.

4.44 From a position 0.2 mile NW of L’Encrier, the SW extremity

of Hon Hang Toi (Ile Double) (20°49'N., 107°20'E.) bearing

about 146° astern, and just open SW of Ile Verte, leads through

the NW portion of the pass. Ile Verte lies 0.3 mile SE of

L’Encrier.

4.44 Passe du Casque, which should only be used by vessels with

local knowledge, can be used at any state of the tide.

Passe de la Mouche

4.45 Passe de la Mouche, E of Passe de la Perouse, should

only be used by vessels with local knowledge. Le Chien

(20°50'N., 107°20'E.), with another smaller islet close NW, lies

1 mile N of Hon Hang Toi, on the E side of Passe de la

Mouche. Ile Haute lies 0.4 mile farther NNW. A rock, with a

depth of 0.3m, lies 0.4 mile W of Le Chien.

4.45 Ile de l’Entree lies nearly 0.8 mile W of the above rock. The

E extremity of Ile de Deux Passes, located nearly 1 mile NE of

Ile de l’Entree, bearing 015°, in range with La Mouche, a low

rock lying 0.2 mile farther NNE, leads W of this rock, and

through the entrance of the pass.

4.45 Passe de la Mouche is entered from S between Ile des Deux

Passes and the islet lying 0.3 mile ESE.

4.45 From a position about 0.3 mile S of Ile des Deux Passes, a

vessel may leave Passe de la Mouche steering in a NW

direction to join Passe du Casque, with Le Casque bearing

313°. The channel then leads N and NNW, passing E of the SE

extremity of Nui Thua Cong, and E of Ile Kieu, farther N. The

SE extremities of both islands are fringed by reefs.

4.45 Ile Dao Trao (20°52'N., 107°22'E.), on the W side of the

pass, has a peninsula projecting from its NW end. Nui Say Tau,

110m high, lies on the N end of the peninsula. A patch having a

depth of 5.8m lies nearly in mid-channel, 0.5 mile NW of the

NW extremity of Ile Dao Trao.

4.45 Northward of the N end of Ile Kieu, Passe de la Mouche

turns NW and enters Chenal de la Saone.

Chenal de la Saone

4.46 Chenal de la Saone, a continuation E of Chenal du

Ducouedic, crosses the banks in the S part of Baie de Fai Tsi

Long, in a least depth of about 4.5m. From 1 mile SE of Ile du

Milieu (20°55'N., 107°16'E.), Chenal de la Saone turns NE

through the E part of Baie de Fai Tsi Long.

4.46 Ile du Chenal (20°56'N., 107°17'E.), 1.5 miles NE of Ile du

Milieu, lies on the NW side of Chenal de la Saone. La Poire
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 91

Pub. 161

and La Pomme lie close together about 0.5 mile farther NE.

4.46 Les Aiglons is a group of islands lying off the S side of

L’Aigle. A beacon lies on the SE extremity of the E island of

Les Aiglons.

4.46 On the SE side of the channel, Ilot Plat lies 0.3 mile WSW of

the NW end of Nui Thua Cong.

4.46 Ile Rousse lies 0.8 mile E of La Pomme. A bank, with a

depth of 1.5m at its outer end, extends 0.5 mile SW of the W

end of Ile Rousse. Chenal de la Saone passes between La

Pomme and the bank.

4.46 Chenal du Bourayne, the continuation NE of Chenal de la

Saone, is entered between Le Vautour (20°58'N., 107°19'E.)

an islet lying 0.7 mile NE of L’Aigle, and La Regate, 1 mile

SE. The channel has a least fairway depth of 9.1m to the

entrance of Chenal de Cam Pha, 2 miles NE.

4.46 L’Abeille, an islet with a 4.3m shoal patch close NE, lies on

the SE side of this channel, nearly 1 mile NE of La Regate. La

Ruche, a rock, with a depth of 1.5m, and with an islet close

SW, lies 0.7 mile farther NE. A light is shown from the NW

side of L’Abeille.

Cam Pha (21°02'N., 107°22'E.)

World Port Index No. 57710

4.47 Cam Pha consists mainly of a coaling wharf, built for

the export of coal from the mines in the vicinity.

4.47 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Cam Pha Port is 4.3m

at MHHW.

4.47 The tidal currents are strong. The ebb tidal current sets in a

SW direction in the S part of Chenal de Cam Pha. Abreast the

wharf, the tidal current sets N and S; the ebb current attains a

velocity of 3 knots.

4.47 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel is dredged

to a depth of 6.7m.

4.47 The wharf at Cam Pha Port, 320m long, can berth two vessels alongside, in a depth of 10.5m. Vessels of up to 55,000

dwt, with a length of 265m and a draft of 14m, can be

accommodated. 

4.47 Aspect.—Chenal de Cam Pha, which is buoyed and marked

by ranges, is entered close SE of Les Ours (20°59'N.,

107°21'E.), the SE of a group of islets which lies on the coastal

bank extending over 1 mile offshore. The E side of the channel

is bordered by a shoal bank, which extends about 1 mile SW

from Le Bouton, an above-water rock, 1 mile ENE of Les

Ours.

4.47 Ile de l’Angle, 0.7 mile NNE of Les Ours, lies on the outer

edge of a bank, which partly dries, on the W side of the channel. A beacon marks the edge of the bank E of Ile de l’Angle.

4.47 Ile Jaune lies 0.5 mile N of the wharf at Cam Pha. Ile Verte

lies 0.3 mile NE of the S extremity of Ile Jaune. A spit, which

dries, extends 0.5 mile S of Ile Verte; a rock, 0.9m high, lies on

this spit, 0.2 mile S of Ile Verte.

4.47 A rock, with a depth of 3.7m, lies 0.3 mile N of the S extremity of the wharf at Cam Pha Port and about 100m offshore.

4.47 Aspect.—Chenal de Cam Pha is marked by buoys, and range

lights which are shown only occasionally.

4.47 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The vessel’s ETA should

be sent on departure from last port of call and 72 hours, 36

hours, 24 hours, 12 hours, 6 hours, and 4 hours prior to arrival. 

4.47 The pilot will board at Buoy No. 0, at the entrance to Cua

Nam Trieu. In 1984, it was reported that pilots may board 0.5

mile WSW of L’Orange. On leaving, pilots disembark at Le

Cancrelat (20°50'N., 107°18'E.). See Hai Phong (paragraph

4.28) and Archipel des Fai Tsi Long (paragraph 4.30).

4.47 Regulations.—Pratique can not be granted by radio, but

must be applied for through the boarding party delegated by

the port authority to review all related shipboard documentation and manifests.

4.47 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in 5.8 to 10.1m, in

the N part of Chenal de Cam Pha, but there is very little swinging room.

4.47 Directions.—The most frequent route to Cam Pha Port is via

Passe de la Perouse and Passe du Casque, then through Passe

de la Saone to Chenal du Bourayne and Chenal de Cam Pha to

the wharf. 

Inner Channels in the North Part of Archipel des

Fai Tse Long

4.48 Between the islands in the N part of Archipel des Fai

Tsi Long there are several channels, some of which are linked

by subsidiary channels. During the Northeast Monsoon these

channels offer considerable advantages for shallow-draft and

low-powered vessels with local knowledge. There are few aids

to navigation and most of the dangers are unmarked. Most of

the channels have depths of not less than 4.3m in the fairway,

except at the N end of Chenal du Duchaffaut, where there is a

bar with a depth of 3m. This bar can be avoided by proceeding

to the open sea through Passe des Bruyeres, close N of Ile aux

Bruyeres, and then Tsieng Mun.

Chenal du Roc aux Aigles

4.49 Chenal du Roc aux Aigles is entered from W between

Van Duoi (20°55'N., 107°20'E.) and Ile Rousse, close N.

Shoals, with depths of less than 5m, extend nearly 0.5 mile W

from the W end of these islands.

4.49 Ilot Boise, 38m high, lies 0.8 mile E of Van Duoi. A rock,

which dries 0.6m, lies close to the SE side of the channel, on

the N end of the foul ground extending almost 1 mile NE of

Ilot Boise.

4.49 La Brioche, a 91m high islet, lies 1.5 miles ENE of Ilot

Boise. Le Coin, 0.3 mile N of La Brioche, is the southeasternmost of a group of islets on the NW side of the channel. Depths

of less than 5m extend 1 mile WSW of Le Coin.

4.49 The channel then leads NE between Le Roc aux Aigles

(20°57'N., 107°26'E.), a steep hill, 195m high, on the NW side

of Ile Longue, and Le Lapin, a 38m high rock lying 0.3 mile W.

The channel continues NE passing between La Hache, 173m

high, and La Plate, another islet, 109m high, which lies close

NW of the N end of Ile Longue.

4.49 L’Enclume (20°59'N., 107°26'E.), a 136m high islet, lies 0.8

mile NE of La Hache, with several other islets between it.

4.49 Farther N the channel joins Chenal du Lynx.

Chenal du Lynx

4.50 Chenal du Lynx extends NNE from the NE entrance

of Chenal du Roc aux Aigles, and between L’Isole (21°00'N.,
92 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

107°27'E.), a 48m high islet lying 0.8 mile NNE of L’Enclume,

and Le Gamin, a 19m high rock, lying 0.6 mile ENE of L’Isole.

La Souris (21°00'N., 107°28'E.), a prominent rock, 30m high,

lies nearly 0.5 mile E of Le Gamin. Le Gland, a 4m high rock

which is difficult to distinguish, lies on the W side of the

channel, 0.4 mile N of L’Isole.

4.50 The least depth in the fairway of Chenal du Lynx is 5.8m and

lies 0.3 mile SE of L’Isole.

4.50 From a position 0.3 mile E of L’Isole, the channel continues

NNE a distance of 3.5 miles to pass close E of Ile du Coude

(21°03'N., 107°28'E.). On this stretch the channel passes close

E of a group of islands that lie together on the W side of the

channel, 1 mile N of Le Gamin. The channel continues 5.5

miles NE past Ile du Coude along the E side of the shallow

bank separating it from Chenal du Duchaffaut.

4.51 Le Grande Ile (21°04'N., 107°30'E.), 212m high on

its W end, and Le Diademe, an 89m high islet, lie 0.3 mile, and

1.7 miles, respectively, NE of Ile de la Saone.

4.51 Le Chat, a 58m high islet, lies 0.4 mile NNE of the W

extremity of Le Grande Ile. A bank with depths of less than

5.5m, extends about 0.3 mile SW of Le Chat.

4.51 From a point lying 0.3 mile SW of Le Chat, round the islet at

a distance of about 100m from its E side, and from a position

about 0.3 mile NE of the islet, continue in a NE direction with

the SE extremity of Le Chat bearing 226° astern, in range with

the SE extremity of Ile du Coude.

4.51 On the NW side of this part of the channel, Basse du Diademe, with a depth of 5.2m, lies 0.3 mile NW of Le Diademe.

Basse du Lynx, lying 0.2 mile farther W, is marked by a beacon. Le Lion, a 96m high islet, lies about 0.2 mile farther W.

4.51 Le Pate, an 84m high islet, and Le Donjon, 88m high, lie 1.3

miles and 2 miles, respectively, NE of Le Lion, and lie on the

bank separating Chenal du Lynx from Chenal du Duchaffaut.

4.51 After passing between Basse du Diademe and Le Diademe,

the channel takes a more N course and passes between Le

Donjon and Le Castel, a 109m high islet lying 0.8 mile E. The

channel then joins Chenal du Duchaffaut. 

Chenal du Kersaint

4.52 Chenal du Kersaint, with a least depth of 7.3m in the

fairway, branches off Chenal de la Saone, 0.3 mile NW of the

NW end of Ile Rousse, and leads E between that island and

L’Amande (20°57'N., 107°20'E.), which lies 0.2 mile N of the

W part of Ile Rousse. A rock, with a depth of 3.7m and marked

by a buoy, lies 0.1 mile S of L’Amande.

4.52 La Limace, an island, lies on the N side of the channel,

nearly 1 mile ENE of L’Amande. Le Doigt, an above-water

rock, lies 0.4 mile E of the N end of La Limace. Le Capitole,

an islet, lies 0.8 mile farther ENE, on the N side of the channel.

Shoals, which partly dry, lie on the S side of the channel, about

0.5 mile S and SSW of La Limace.

4.52 Abreast the shoals S of La Limace the channel leads NE,

with the summit of Le Colosse (Colosse) (21°01'N.,

107°27'E.), bearing about 051°, until reaching a point 1.2 miles

SW of that island, when it takes a more N course and joins

Chenal du Duchaffaut.

4.52 Le Dome (21°00'N., 107°26'E.), a 123m high island, lies on

the SE side of the channel. A rocky shoal, which dries 3.4m,

lies 0.4 mile N of Le Dome, and is marked by a beacon. Chenal

du Kersaint connects with Chenal du Duchaffaut about 0.2

mile W of the shoal.

Chenal du Duchaffaut

4.53 Chenal du Duchaffaut, the continuation of Chenal du

Kersaint, leads in a NNE direction for a distance of 6 miles

between the islands and rocks off the SE side of Dao Cai Bau

(Ile de Ke-Bao), and then for 10 miles along the SE side of that

island, about 0.5 mile offshore, as far as the S entrance of Cua

Mo (21°13'N., 107°37'E.), where it accesses the sea. Off Cua

Mo there is a bar, over which there is a depth of 4.6m, which is

the shallowest part of the channel.

4.53 The channel leads between Le Colosse (21°01'N.,

107°27'E.) and Le Maillet, another island, 63m high, 0.5 mile

W of the S extremity of Le Colosse. The channel then

continues NNE, passing E of Ile aux Trois Sommets, lying 2.2

miles NNE of Le Maillet. From abreast Ile aux Trois Sommets

the channel trends more N to a position 0.2 mile E of Le

Marron, a 20m high islet, lying 1 mile farther NNE.

4.53 Le Doigt, an islet, 63m high, lying 0.7 mile NNE of Le

Marron, is the SE of a group of islets NW of the channel.

4.53 From abreast Le Marron, the channel leads NE and passes

between L’Isole, a 45m high islet, and a 2.4m high rock lying

0.1 mile ESE. The fairway in this stretch leads across patches

with depths of 5.5m. L’Isole lies 0.5 mile NW of Ile du

Marquis (21°05'N., 107°30'E.). Basse de l’Isole, with a depth

of 2.7m, lies 0.3 mile E of L’Isole. Lying 0.2 mile N of Basse

de l’Isole, are depths of less than 5.2m in the fairway of the

channel.

4.53 From a position lying 0.3 mile NE of L’Isole, the channel

continues NE for about 3 miles to abreast Le Donjon

(21°07'N., 107°32'E.). Chenal du Duchaffaut joins Chenal du

Lynx about 1 mile NNE of Le Donjon.

4.53 From abreast Le Donjon, the channel continues 8 miles NE

to abreast the NE extremity of Dao Cai Bau, the S entrance

point of Cua Mo. A shoal, with a depth of 4.2m, lies 0.3 mile

offshore, about 1.5 miles SW of the NE extremity of Dao Cai

Bau. The SE extremity of Ile de la Plage (21°14'N., 107°38'E.)

bearing 035°, and in range with the partly wooded summit of

Ile du Grand Singe (21°17'N., 107°41'E.), leads close SE of

the above shoal.

4.53 A marked shoal with a least depth of 4.6m extends from the

NE extremity of Dao Cai Bau, SE to Hon Chin, obstructing the

fairway. Vessels may bypass this shoal and proceed to the open

sea via Passe des Bruyeres and Tsieng Mun. Passe des

Bruyeres leads close around the N end of Ile aux Bruyeres

(21°09'N., 107°35'E.), with a fairway depth of 4.5m.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers in the East Approach to Archipel des Fai Tsi Long

4.54 Iles Kao Tao, a group of islands located 7 to 14 miles

offshore, lies 20 miles NE of Dao Lai Tao (20°43'N.,

107°28'E.). The islands are nearly bare of trees, the larger ones

being cultivated, and form a contrast with the islands near Cap

Quan Lan, which are densely wooded. The islands are fairly

steep-to on the SE side, and lie close within the 20m curve. The

channels between the islands are encumbered with numerous
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 93

Pub. 161

dangers, and vessels without local knowledge should not

navigate between the islands.

4.54 Dao Ching Lan Xan (Ile Tching Lan Xan) (21°01'N.,

107°50'E.), the SE island of the group, has a range of hills extending the length of the island, and attains an elevation of

210m near its middle.

4.54 Dao Cu Xa (Ile Cu Xu), an island with a conical summit,

166m high, near its N end, lies 1 mile W of Chao Chay Toc, the

SW extremity of Dao Ching Lan Xan.

4.54 Anchorage for vessels with local knowledge, having a draft

of 4.5m, can be taken between Dao Ching Lanx Xan and Dao

Cu Xa.

4.54 A rock, which dries 0.9m, lies 2 miles NNW of the S

extremity of Dao Cu Xa; a detached 5.5m patch lies 1.5 miles

W of the rock.

4.54 Rocher Ulipai, 0.9m high, lies 2.8 miles NW of the N

extremity of Dao Cu Xa. A rock, which dries 2.4m, and

another rock, which dries 1.8m, lie 0.3 mile N and 0.2 mile S,

respectively, off Rocher Ulipai.

4.54 Roche du Pou, with a depth of 4.6m, lies 1.2 miles NW of

Rocher Ulipai.

4.54 Vang Chao lies 4 miles NW of Xan Chao, an island lying off

the NW end of Dao Ching Lan Xan. Txat Xing Chao

(21°08'N., 107°48'E.), 1.5 miles NW of Vang Chao, is the largest of a group of islets off the NW side of Iles Kao Tao. A reef

on which lies several islets, extends nearly 0.5 mile NNE of

Txat Xing Chao.

4.54 Ma Chao (21°09'N., 107°51'E.), 106m high, lies 3 miles NE

of Txat Xing Chao, and is the N island of Iles Kao Tao. A reef,

on which there are some islets, extends about 0.5 mile from the

NE end of Ma Chao.

4.54 Dangers between Iles Kao Tao and Tsieng Mun.—Banc

Intermediaire, which has a least depth of 3m, lies about

midway between Rocher Ulipai and Ile Ba Mun. Roche Nam,

with a depth of 3.7m, lies at the NE end of this bank, nearly 4

miles ESE of Pointe de Tsieng Mun, the SE entrance point of

Tsieng Mun. Roche du Nhatrang, with a depth of 2.7m, lies 2

miles SE of the same point.

Islands and Channels on the East Side of Archipel des Fai Tsi Long

4.55 Dao Cai Ban (Ile De Quan Lan) is hilly, rising to an

elevation of 195m about 2 miles NNE of Cap Quan Lan

(20°59'N., 107°29'E.). Sommet de l’Entree, 96m high, lies at

the N extremity of the island.

4.55 Pak Ha Mun (20°58'N., 107°34'E.), a body of water from

which Chenal de la Suprise is accessible, is identified by

Sommet de l’Entree and La Bosse, a 220m high hill, about 1

mile NE at the S end of Ile Ba Mun. Sommet Pak Ha Mun,

401m high, in the N part of Ile de la Table, and the flat summit

of the same island, 436m high, can also be identified rising 2.5

miles NNW and WSW, respectively, of Sommet de l’Entree.

4.55 Le Fer a Cheval, a group of black jagged rocks, lie about 1

mile NW of the entrance. Pointe Cormoran lies 0.5 mile farther

N.

4.55 Within the entrance of Pak Ha Mun the land is high on both

sides; the E side is densely wooded and on the W side the

slopes of the hills are clearer. The middle of Pak Ha Mun is

encumbered by a narrow sand bank, with depths of less than

3.7m, which extends 1.8 miles S from La Tortue, a 27m high

island, lying 0.8 mile NNE of Pointe Cormoran.

4.55 The NE end of Chenal du Jaguar lies between Sommet de

l’Entree and Le Fer a Cheval. In this vicinity, Ile de la Table

and Dao Cai Ban are connected by a sandbank which has

depths of less than 1.8m. Chenal de Jaguar is available only for

shallow-draft vessels with local knowledge.

4.55 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths of 10 to 12m,

between Le Fer a Cheval and the sand bank lying 0.4 mile E. A

more sheltered anchorage lies E of the sand bank, abreast Anse

du Pirate, in depths of 6 to 7m. The bottom is mud, good holding ground, but the tidal currents are strong and the sea is

rough during the Northeast Monsoon.

4.55 Vessels entering from seaward should steer for Sommet Pak

Ha Mun bearing 313°.

Chenal de la Surprise

4.56 Chenal de la Surprise is entered between Pointe

Cormorant and Pointe Ducouedic, 0.7 mile ENE. From the

entrance of Pak Ha Mun, the channel leads N, passing E of the

sandbank extending 1.7 miles S of La Tortue, and E of the

bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, which extends off the E

side of Ile de la Table from La Tortue to La Gourde (21°02'N.,

107°34'E.). An islet, 20m high, lies on the bank about 0.3 mile

NNE of La Tortue. A rocky shoal, which dries 2.7m, lies on the

bank, about 0.7 mile SSW of La Gourde.

4.56 The channel passes 0.3 mile E of La Gourde, then passes

close E of La Tour, a 135m high island, lying 1.5 miles farther

NNE.

4.56 There is a least depth of 5.8m in the fairway of the N part of

Chenal de la Surprise, and the depths are not less than 4.9m for

about 100m on either side.

4.56 After passing E of La Tour, the channel is navigated by

keeping the SE extremity of that island bearing 204° astern,

and in range with La Gourde. Then, from abreast Ile Noire

(21°05'N., 107°35'E.), the channel leads in a more E direction,

with the S extremity of Ile Noire bearing 217° astern.

4.56 Ile du Doigt, 99m high, lies on the NW side of the channel,

with several islets close NE, one of which is 122m high. The

NE of these islets lies 1 mile W of the N extremity of Ile Ba

Mun. Rocher Tsieng Mun, 48m high, lies 0.3 mile NNE of the

latter islet.

4.56 Les Freres, two islets close together, lie on the SE side of the

channel. The N islet is 51m high, and lies 0.7 mile WSW of the

N extremity of Ile Ba Mun. 

4.56 Chenal de la Surprise enters Tsieng Mun between Rocher

Tsieng Mun and Pointe de Tsieng, the N extremity of Ile Ba

Mun, from a position 0.2 mile E of Ile du Doigt, with the S

extremity of Ile du Doigt bearing 236° astern.

Chenal de la Carabine

4.57 Chenal de la Carabine is entered from Chenal de la

Surprise between La Gourde (21°02'N., 107°34'E.), the

outermost islet off the NE end of Ile de la Table, and Le Cone,

an islet, 56m high, lying 0.5 mile N. The channel trends W and

SW, and connects with Chenal du Lynx and Chenal du Roc aux

Aigles. The least depth in the fairway is about 6.7m.

4.57 La Quille, a 22m high rock, lies close off the NE end of Ile
94 Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 

Pub. 161

de la Table, about 0.3 mile NW of La Gourde. Ile Plate lies on

the N side of the channel, 0.2 mile NW of La Quille. The islet

of Le Chateau Fort lies 0.1 mile farther NW.

4.57 A shoal, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies 0.3 mile W of the S

extremity of Le Chateau Fort. La Touffe, a 13m high island,

with a white rock on its S end, lies in mid-channel, about 0.5

mile farther W. A bank, with a depth of 4.6m, and a bank with

a depth of 3m, extend 0.1 mile W and E, respectively, of La

Touffe. A shoal, with a least depth of 0.9m, lies about 0.2 mile

S of La Touffe. The main channel lies S of La Touffe, but

vessels with local knowledge may pass about 150m N of it.

The white rock on the S end of La Touffe bearing 274° leads

from Chenal de la Surprise to La Touffe.

4.57 The channel trends SW and divides into two branches after

passing La Touffe. The branches pass on either side of a bank,

on which there are three islets. Chenal du Sud, leading SW

between the islands and the NW side of Ile de la Table, is only

available at LW for vessels with local knowledge, drawing less

than 4.6m. Le Schako, 43m high and the northeasternmost

islet, lies 1.2 miles SW of La Touffe. La Chimere, a 95m high

islet, lies 0.3 mile SW of Le Schako, and Le Meutriere, a small

islet, 74m high, lies 1 mile farther SW. A rock, awash, lies 0.2

mile SW of Le Meutriere.

4.57 Chenal de la Carabine leads SW between the above dangers

and a chain of islands, lying on a shallow bank extending SW

from Ile Madeline (21°06'N., 107°34'E.), and forming the NW

side of the channel. Ile de Amers, Le Lieve, and La Fourmi lie

on the above bank closest to the fairway. Ile de Amers lies 0.5

mile W of La Touffe. Le Lieve, a 24m high islet, lies 0.3 mile

NW of La Meutriere. La Fourmi, a 5.5m high rock, lies close

off the edge of the bank, 1 mile SW of La Meutriere.

4.57 The channel passes between La Meutriere and La Lieve and

then SE of La Fourmi. It then passes N of La Souris and then

on either side of Le Gamin, about 0.5 mile farther W. The latter

two rocks are described with Chenal du Lynx (paragraph 4.50).

Chenal de la Carabine joins Chenal du Lynx W of Le Gamin.

Tsieng Mun

4.58 Tsieng Mun (21°08'N., 107°38'E.) is entered between

Pointe de Tsieng Mun, the N extremity of Ile Ba Mun, and Ile

Boise, about 0.8 mile NE. This pass leads to Passe des

Bruyeres and the N end of the channels running through the E

part of Archipel des Fai Tsi Long. A spit, with a depth of 2.7m,

extends 0.1 mile NE of Pointe de Tsieng Mun.

4.58 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 14 to 18m, good

holding ground, close within the entrance of Tsieng Mun.

Shallow draft vessels can find better shelter in Chenal de la

Surprise, close SE of Ile du Doigt, which lies 1 mile SW of

Pointe de Tsieng Mun.

4.58 Iles Kao Tao and the dangers W of them have been previously described in paragraph 4.54.

Passe de Bruyeres

4.59 Passe de Bruyeres is a narrow shoal channel, with a

least depth of 4.6m. It leads WNW from a position 0.5 mile

NNW of Pointe de Tsieng Mun, passing N of Rocher Tsieng

Mun, lying 1 mile WNW of the point. The channel then passes

0.1 mile NE of the reef extending from the NE end of Ile aux

Bruyeres, and SW of an extensive bank which lies S of Hon

Chin. The channel is less than 0.2 mile wide here, and there are

depths of less than 0.9m on the S and SW sides of the latter

bank. The channel then leads into Chenal du Duchaffaut.

4.59 Directions.—From Tsieng Mun, pass N of Rocher Tsieng

Mun, then bring the N end of the latter rock to bear 132°

astern, and in range with a white pyramidal structure on the

NW end of Ile Ba Mun. Steer on this range for about 1 mile.

Then bring a white mark on the N extremity of the

northeasternmost islet of the Ile du Doigt group in range 148°,

astern, with a pyramidal structure on the S islet of Les Freres.

This course leads N of Ile aux Bruyeres into Chenal du

Duchaffaut. 

Dao Cai Bau to the Chinese Border

4.60 The coast between the NE extremity of Dao Cai Bau

(Ile de Ke-Bao) (21°31'N., 107°37'E.) and the Chinese border,

about 16 miles NE is backed by hills, covered with trees and

dense jungle, extending to the coast, which is bordered by

mangroves. A range of mountains lies between 8 and 18 miles

inland, rising to an elevation of 1,507m, about 21 miles N of

the NE end of Dao Cai Bau, but they are only visible from

seaward in clear weather.

4.60 A chain of long and narrow islands, with hills about 100 to

150m high, and usually very wooded, lies a short distance off

and parallel with the coast. Vinh Thuc (Ile du Kersaint), the E

island of the chain, has a conspicuous peak, 159m high, at its

SW extremity. Xinh Moui Tiai (Gai Tien Xa) (Ile du Chateau

Renaud) is separated from the SW end of Vinh Thuc, by Passe

Fu Tai Mun (Fu Tai Mun), a narrow pass.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

4.61 Dao Lo Chuc San (Ile Lo Chuc San) (21°14'N.,

107°58'E.), 186m high, is the highest of a group of islands and

rocks, fringed by foul ground, and lies 6 miles NE of Iles Kao

Tao. Several 10m patches lie between Iles Kao Tao and the

group.

4.61 Tai Shan Tao, 141m high, the SE island of the group, is

located 3 miles SE of Dao Lo Chuc San. Rocher Occidental,

5m high, lies 0.5 mile W of the W extremity of Tai Shan Tao. A

10.1m patch lies 2.5 miles S of the island.

4.61 Im Shan, a 59m high island, lies 0.4 mile NNW of Tai Shan

Tao. A reef, which dries 3.4m, lies 0.3 mile E of the S extremity of the island, and a group of rocks, 4.9m high, lies 0.2 mile

farther E, with a 4.9m patch close NE.

4.61 Anchorage.—Anchorage, affording good shelter during the

Northeast Monsoon, can be taken, in a depth of 10m, mud and

sand, 0.5 mile SE of the W extremity of Dao Lo Chuc San,

about 0.2 mile offshore.

4.61 Sam Hai Pai, a reef with two heads, which dries 0.3m, lies

5.5 miles ENE of the N extremity of Dao Lo Chuc San.

4.61 Pak Son Kong Pai, a dangerous rock, 0.3m high, with a reef,

which dries 1.2m close W, lies 10 miles NE of Sam Hai Pai,

and 7 miles S of Pei Lung Wei. A rocky shoal, with a depth of

1.8m, lies 1 mile E of Pak Son Kong Pai, and a rocky shoal,

with a depth of 6.1m, lies 1 mile W of the same rock. 
Sector 4. Coast of Vietnam—The Gulf of Tonkin 95

Pub. 161

Approaches to Van Hoa and Rade de Tien Yen

4.62 Van Hoa is approached via Kuai Chin Mun

(21°15'N., 107°42'E.), N of Ile des Singes (Ile aux Singes),

then through Cua Mo. It can also be approached via Tsieng

Mun, Passe de Bruyeres and the channels through Archipel des

Fai Tsi Long.

4.62 The seaward approaches to Kuai Chin Mun are encumbered

with numerous shoals with depths of less than 5.5m. Le Grand

Banc, with a least depth of 3.4m, lies with its W edge about 0.5

mile W of Ile aux Sangliers. Le Petit Banc (21°12'N.,

107°45'E.), with two heads, with depths of 2.1m and about 0.7

mile apart, lies 4 miles ESE of Ile aux Singes. Le Banc du

Milieu, a sandbank, with a least depth of 1.2m, lies 4.5 miles E

of Ile aux Singes. Banc de la Clocheterie, with a least depth of

3m, lies 2.5 miles SSE of the E end of Iles Tsin San (21°17'N.,

107°47'E.).

4.62 The fairway depths in Kuai Chin Mun are over 5.5m, with

the exception of a 4.5m patch lying 1.7 miles W of the N extremity of Ile aux Singes. Kuai Chin Mun should only be used

by shallow draft vessels having local knowledge.

4.62 Cua Mo is entered between the NE extremity of Dao Cau

Bau and Ile Verte, 0.5 mile NNE. The channel passes NW of

Ile des Pirates (21°13'N., 107°35'E.), which lies close W of

the NE extremity of Dao Cai Bau. Iles des Pirates should be

passed 0.1 mile off to avoid the extensive sandbank, with

depths of less than 5.5m, lying 0.3 mile NW of that island.

Van Hoa and Rade de Tien Yen

4.63 Van Hoa (Port Wallut) (21°12'N., 107°34'E.) (World

Port Index No. 57720), a coaling station, reported in disrepair,

is situated on Dai Cai Bau, S of the SW extremity of Iles des

Pirates. There is a stone coaling wharf, 60m long, with a depth

of 4.9m alongside.

4.63 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but can be obtained

at Hon Dan with advance arrangement. (See Hai Phong, paragraph 4.28).

4.63 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 7.3 to 12m, good

holding ground, 0.5 to 1 mile W of the SW extremity of Ile des

Pirates.

4.63 Rade de Tien Yen provides anchorage about 3 miles NW of

Ile des Pirates, but vessels without local knowledge should not

proceed above Van Hoa.
Pub. 161

5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
99

Pub. 161

SECTOR 5 

VIETNAM—CENTRAL AND SOUTH COASTS

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes the central and S coasts of

Vietnam, and includes the port of Sai Gon (Sai Gon). The offlying islands and banks off the SE coast of Vietnam are first

described; these include Dao Phu Qui, Iles Chadwick, Royal

Bishop Banks and Con Son. The central and S coasts of Vietnam are then described. The arrangement of the latter part is SE,

S, then SW from Mui Lay (17°05'N., 107°07'E.), the W entrance point of the Gulf of Tonkin to Mui Bai Bung, the SW extremity of Vietnam.

General Remarks

5.1 The coast from Mui Lay to Mui Da Nang is generally

low with sand dunes, 20 to 30m high, with the exception of the

mountains near Mui Chon May Dong.

5.1 The coast of central Vietnam to Mui Vung Tau (10°19'N.,

107°05'E.) is for the most part mountainous, and consists of a

succession of jagged cliffs and wind-swept sand hills. There

are many bays and secure anchorages S along the coast to Mui

Dinh (11°22'N., 109°01'E.).

5.1 The coast from Mui Vung Tau to Mui Bai Bung is low and at

times inundated by the sea, and in most parts the tops of the

trees are only just visible at a distance of up to 12 miles. This

coast is fringed by banks of sand, with depths of 1.8 to 5.5m,

which extend offshore up to 15 miles off the delta of the

Mekong.

5.1 Caution.—Mariners are cautioned that unknown dangers

may exist in the approaches to the mouths of the Mekong between the meridians of Mui Bai Bung (8°36'N., 104°43'E.)

and Cu Lao Thu (Dao Phu Qui) (10°33'N., 108°56'E.) and

also that less depths than charted may exist.

5.1 Vessels navigating within 25 miles of the coastline should

exercise extreme caution when N of the Con Son Islands, as

numerous dangerous wrecks and obstructions lie in these

waters.

5.1 Gas fields, best seen on the chart, are established in several

offshore areas of this coast. Vessels are advised not to enter the

restricted areas associated with the terminal operations.

Maritime Exclusion Zones (MEZ) may only be entered with

permission of the terminal operators. 

Off-lying Islands and Banks

5.2 Cu Lao Thu (Dao Phu Qui) (10°32'N., 108°57'E.), an

island with two hills near its N end, lies 40 miles off the coast

of Vietnam. The NE hill, 91m high, is conical and several

masses of rock near its summit give it a jagged appearance.

The SW hill, 108m high, has a round top. The island has been

reported to be a good radar target at 18 miles.

5.2 Ilot du Sud, 47m high, lies near the center of a reef extending

1.5 miles SSE of the island. Some rocks, one of which is 22m

high, lie on the outer edge of the coastal reef which extends 0.5

mile NE of the island.

5.2 Anchorage.—During the Northeast Monsoon, there is fair

anchorage, in depths of 24 to 29m, sand and shells, off the

sandy shore forming the W and SW sides of the island. The

best position is in depths of 18 to 26m, just S of the SW extremity of the island, about 0.5 mile off the coastal reef.

5.2 Anchorage can be taken during the Southwest Monsoon off

the NE end of the island, in depths of 26 to 28m, but the bottom

is rocky, the holding ground is poor, and it cannot be recommended as an anchorage. There is a better anchorage, however, with the 22m rock bearing 170°, distant about 1 mile.

5.2 Caution.—A mined danger area lies close S of Ilot du Sud.

The area is about 6 miles N to S and 5 miles E to W.

5.3 Rocher Eleve, 20m high, lies 5 miles NW of Cu Lao

Thu. Soundings of 11 to 13m lie within 1 mile E and W of the

rock. A depth of 12.8m lies on a bank midway between Cu Lao

Thu and Rocher Eleve.

5.3 Banc Hollandais consists of coral and has a least depth of 2m

about 15 miles WNW of Cu Lao Thu. There are depths of 4.6

to 9m on its SE side, which is very steep-to.

5.3 Depths in the channel between Banc Hollandais and Rocher

Eleve are very irregular, varying from 12 to 50m. A bank, with

a depth of 11m, coral, and a bank with 15.8m, lie 4 miles N and

6 miles NNW, respectively, of the shallowest part of Banc

Hollandais.

5.3 Vessels should give Banc Hollandais a wide berth as soundings are so irregular in its vicinity that it cannot be approached

with safety.

5.3 Banc Rivier, 10 miles WNW of Banc Hollandais, together

with the banks NE and SW, will be described with the

mainland beginning in paragraph 5.40.

5.3 Banc de la Marne, 21 miles WSW of Cu Lao Thu, has a least

depth of 15.8m. It has not been thoroughly examined. A depth

of 13.7m, existence doubtful, and a depth of 16.5m (reported

1964), lie 8 miles ESE of Banc de la Marne.

Iles Catwick

5.4 Iles Catwick (10°00'N., 108°59'E.), S of Cu Lao Thu,

lie in a region of irregular depths in which volcanic activity has

been noted. Great caution is necessary when navigating in the

vicinity. Iles Catwick consists of three islands.

5.4 Poulo Sepate (Poulo Sapate) (9°58'N., 109°05'E.), 111m

high and barren, is the E and highest of Iles Catwick. Viewed

from some directions, the island resembles a shoe and from

others it appears as a square column, while from E it appears as

a pyramid.

5.4 The island is steep-to, except for a rock awash, close E of its

S extremity. Anchorage can be taken, in 29m, E of the island,

but the holding ground is not good. Poulo Sepate has been

reported to be a good radar target at a distance of 19 miles.

5.4 Rocher Julia (Julia Shoal), with a depth of 5.8m, coral, lies

3.5 miles SE of Poulo Sepate. A depth of 28m lies 5 miles SSE

of Poulo Sepate, in an area in which submarine volcanoes have
100 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

been reported. A 20m depth was reported (1978) 33 miles SSE

of Poulo Sepate.

5.4 Petite Catwick, a pyramidal rock, 17m high and steep-to, lies

2 miles NW of Poulo Sepate. Unsheltered anchorage can be

taken, in a depth of 20m, about 0.2 mile NE of the rock.

5.4 Grande Catwick (10°03'N., 108°54'E.), a round, barren

rock, 60m high, lies 9.5 miles WNW of Petite Catwick. The

island is steep-to, except for a reef extending about 0.2 mile

SE. Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 40m, about 0.2 mile

N of the island. Grande Catwick has been reported to be a good

radar target at 20 miles.

5.4 La Paix, a rock which dries 1.8m, lies midway between

Grande Catwick and Petite Catwick. The rock is small and

steep-to; the sea always breaks on it except in calm weather.

5.4 Rocher Yusun, 17 miles N of Petite Chadwick, is a coral

patch with a depth of 6m. In fine weather it is not easily seen,

but in the strength of the monsoon the sea has been observed to

break on it.

5.4 Currents in the vicinity of Iles Catwick are at times very

strong. They are quite irregular close in around the islands.

5.4 An unlit mooring-type buoy was reported (1989) in a position about 39 miles WSW of Grande Catwick.

Royal Bishop Banks

5.5 Royal Bishop Banks, composed of coral, has a least

depth of 7.9m. The following depths lie at distances and bearings from the least depth:

1. Depths of 12.8m and 16.1m lie 13.5 and 20.5 miles,

respectively, ENE.

2. A depth of 13.7m lies 7.5 miles ESE.

3. Depths of 16.8m lie 14 and 22 miles S.

4. A depth of 9.2m lies 7 miles SW.

5. A depth of 10.4m lies 11.5 miles WSW.

5.5 Numerous platforms have been established in the Royal

Bishop Banks.

5.5 Banc Wallace (9°29'N., 107°38'E.), with a least depth of

8.5m, lies 31 miles WSW of the least depth of Royal Bishop

Banks.

5.5 Banc Callou (Callou Bank), with a least depth of 9.2m, lies

11 miles SSW of Banc Wallace.

5.5 A shoal, with a depth of 12.8m (reported 1959), lies 19 miles

SE of Bank Callou and a dangerous wreck lies 22 miles ENE

of the bank. Another dangerous wreck lies 25 miles ESE of

Banc Callou (2006).

5.5 Banc de l’Astrolabe consists of three detached coral reefs.

The E reef (10°06'N., 107°58'E.), with a least depth of 6.7m,

lies 25 miles NNW of the least depth of Bishop Banks. The W

reef has a least depth of 4.6m and lies 11 miles W of the E reef.

The middle reef, with a least depth of 6.7m, lies about midway

between the E and W reefs. Banks, with least depths of 8.5m

and 8.2m, lie 8 and 10 miles, respectively, N of the middle reef.

A depth of 7.3m was reported (1972) to lie 24 miles NE of the

middle reef. A 12.8m patch lies 8 miles ESE of the E reef.

5.6 Bach Ho Oil Field (9°48'N., 108°00'E.), consists of

several Floating Storage and Off-loading sytems (FSO). A

marine exclusion zone (MEZ), which requires prior approval

from the terminal to enter, surrounds the terminal

5.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Berthing is restricted to

daylight hours only. Vessels should forward their ETA 72, 48,

24, and 12 hours prior to arrival. Confirmation that the

navigation and propulsion equipment is operational should be

included in the report forwarded 24 hours prior to arrival.

Vessels should advise the terminal of any revision of ETA by

more than 3 hours, subsequent to the vessel forwarding its 12

hour report. 

5.6 The initial ETA report to the oil and gas production

enterprise (OGPE) should include:

1. Vessel’s name, call sign, type of vessel, and flag.

2. ETA, date and time.

3. Master’s name and nationality.

4. Most recent port of call and next port of call.

5. Number of crew and passengers on board.

6. Arrival draft, LOA, and trim.

7. Most recent port of call.

8. Type and quantity of cargo on board and/or ballast.

9. Quantity of cargo to be loaded at the terminal and

maximaum loading rate at one manifold.

10. Confirmation that the vessel is able to load and

deballast simultaneously.

11. Confirmation that the inert gas system is working and

the tanks are inert on arrival.

12. Confirmation that the cargo heating system is

operational and can maintain cargo temperatures of at least

40°C.

5.6 Vessels calling at the terminal for the first time should

include:

1. GRT, nrt, and dwt.

2. Inmarsat numbers. 

3. LOA and length from bow to manifold.

4. Confirmation that a 16-inch flange is available at the

port manifold.

5. Confirmation that the vessel is equipped with a

fairlead and bracket, or chain stopper for a 76mm chain.

5.6 Upon reaching a distance of 20 miles from the terminal,

vessels should contact the terminal on VHF channel 16 for

instructions, 

5.6 The pilots will board in positions approximately 4 miles

from the specific floating units, or in positions advised by

Vung Tau port authority. 

5.7 Dai Hung Oil Field (8°29'N., 108°41'E.), consisting

of a floating production unit (FPU) and a floating storage and

offloading unit (FSU), lies approximately 75 miles SSE of

Royal Bishop Banks. A marine exclusion zone, which requires

prior approval from the terminal to enter, surrounds the

terminal. Sea traffic must maintain a minimum distance of 5

miles from the marine exclusion zone. 

5.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Berthing is restricted to

daylight hours only. Vessels should forward their ETA 72, 48,

24, and 12 hours prior to arrival. Confirmation that the

navigation and propulsion equipment is operational should be

included in the report forwarded 24 hours prior to arrival.

Vessels should advise the terminal of any revision of ETA by

more than 3 hours, subsequent to the vessel forwarding its 12

hour report. Notice of ETA should include: 

1. Vessel’s name, call sign, type of vessel, and place of

registraton.
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 101

Pub. 161

2. Radio frequencies available for communication.

3. Inmarsat numbers and satellite in use.

4. Arrival draft, LOA, and trim.

5. Number of crew and passengers on board.

6. Most recent port of call.

7. Type and quantity of cargo on board.

8. Name of insurers and place of issued certification.

5.7 Vessels should contact the terminal control room on VHF

channel 6 upon approaching within 10 miles of the terminal,

stating course, speed, distance and bearing from the FPU. 

5.7 Pilots will board 3 miles from the terminal, or at the port of

Vung Tau, as advised by the port authority. 

Con Son Islands (8°42'N., 106°37'E.)

5.8 This group consists of about 12 islands and islets,

lying 45 miles from the coast of Vietnam. They are located

near the track of vessels proceeding between Singapore and Sai

Gon (Sai Gon). The islands are of sufficient height as to be

conspicuous in clear weather from a considerable distance.

They serve as a useful mark in making a landfall on the

mainland coast from S. Con Son has been reported to be a poor

radar target at a distance of 29 miles, and a good radar target at

20 miles.

5.8 Con Son, the principal and largest island of the group, is

mountainous. The summit of the island, 549m high and flat,

lies in the S part of the island. A rocky peninsula, terminating

in Mui Con Chim (Mui Ta Be), divides the E coast into two

bays, Vinh Con Son and Vinh Dong Bac. The village of Con

Son, at the head of Vinh Con Son, contains a penitentiary.

5.8 Most of the islets off Con Son are high and wooded.

5.8 Rocher Blanc (Hon Trung) (8°46'N., 106°43'E.), 57m high,

lies 3 miles ENE of the NE end of Con Son.

5.8 Hon Cau, 221m high, lies 4.5 miles E of Mui Con Chim.

Hon Bai Canh, 2 miles WSW of Hon Cau, lies in the approach

to Vinh Con Son, and consists of two hills joined by a narrow

isthmus. A light is shown from the islet.

5.8 A 13.7m depth was reported (1968) about 32 miles E of the

NE end of Con Son.

5.8 Hon Chac Lon and Hon Tai Lon lie 0.3 mile SE, and 1 mile

ESE, respectively, of the SE extremity of Con Son. Hon Tho

(Hon Nghe) lies near the extremity of a reef extending about

0.2 mile E of Hon Tre Nho.

5.8 Hon Ba lies close off the SW side of Con Son, to which it is

joined by a drying bank. La Dent, 330m high, the summit of

Hon Ba, lies near the E end of the islet.

5.8 Hon Tre Lon, 141m high, with an islet close off its E

extremity, lies 2.5 miles N of Hon Ba, off the W side of Con

Son; Hon Tre Nho lies 2.5 miles farther NE. Hon Nghe lies

near the extremity of a reef extending 0.2 mile E of Hon Tre

Nho.

Vinh Con Son

5.9 Vinh Con Son (Vung Con Son), the S of the two bays

on the SE side of Con Son, is entered between Mui Con Chim

and Mui Ca Map (Bai Nhut), the SE extremity of Con Son. The

bay is open SE, and is recommended only during the Southwest Monsoon.

5.9 The N part of Vinh Con Son, inside the line joining the

entrance points is encumbered with an extensive shore flat and

many detached shoal patches, some of which dry. Banc du

Convict, which dries 0.6m, lies near the outer edge of this area,

1.8 miles SW of Mui Con Chim.

5.9 Banc des Tortues fronts the bay and extends from the W side

of Hon Bai Canh to the N end of Hon Tai. It has general depths

of 5.5 to 11m, with shoal patches of less than 5.5m.

5.9 Rocher du Courrier, with a depth of 5.8m, lies 1 mile WSW

of the W extremity of Hon Bai Cahn, with a 9.2m patch about 1

mile farther SW; they lie in the deep passage between Banc des

Tortues and the shallow patches of Vinh Con Son.

5.9 Entrances.—There are three entrances into Vinh Con Son.

The NE entrance, wide and deep, lies between Mui Con Chim

and Hon Bai Canh. Care must be taken to avoid Rocher du

Courrier.

5.9 The SE entrance is entered by passing 0.1 mile NE of Hon

Tho, midway between the islet and the shoal with depths of 4.9

to 5.2m, which lies near the SW end of Banc des Tortues.

There are least depths of 9.2m in the fairway of this channel.

5.9 The SW entrance lies between Mui Ca Map and Hon Chat.

The channel is narrow and deep, but the depths decrease

somewhat rapidly N of the entrance.

5.9 Aspect.—Lights, in range bearing 339°, situated at the head

of the bay near the town of Con Son, lead to Pierre Blanche

Anchorage. The light structures are conspicuous by day.

5.9 A radio tower exhibiting aircraft warning lights stands at the

head of the bay.

5.9 A light shown from a large white rock is situated 1.2 miles S

of the range lights.

5.9 Anchorage.—Deep-draft vessels, which must enter by the

NE entrance, can find a good berth, in 11 to 12.8m, with the

summit of Hon Tai bearing 182°, and Hon Bong Lan bearing

095°. The latter is a small islet lying 0.3 mile S of the SW end

of Hon Bai Canh.

5.9 Vessels of moderate or light draft should anchor W of the

above position, in depths of 8.5 to 9.4m, to avoid the sea during

the strength of the Southwest Monsoon. The squalls are strong

there, but the holding ground is good, consisting of gray mud.

5.9 Anchorage can be taken in Pierre Blanche Anchorage, in

depths of 6.4 to 7.3m, with the pier at Con Son bearing 010°,

distant 0.8 mile. The entrance range leads clear of Rocher du

Milicien, which dries.

5.9 Vinh Dong Bac (Ving Dong Bac), immediately NE of Vinh

Con Son, offers convenient anchorage during the Southwest

Monsoon. The bay is free from dangers, but the depths decrease rapidly within the 10m curve. Vessels should therefore

anchor, in a minimum depth of 13m, mud. A dredged and

buoyed channel leads to the river entrance.

5.10 Ben Dam (Baie du Sud Ouest) (8°40'N., 106°32'E.) is

formed between the SW side of Con Son and Hon Ba, close

SW. The bay is well-sheltered by the surrounding hills, except

from NW, but the wind is seldom strong from that quarter.

Anchorage can be taken, in 11 to 13m, good holding ground,

gravel and mud. The head of the bay narrows and dries.

5.10 Off-lying islets.—Hon Trung Lon (8°36'N., 106°09'E.), the

NE of two islets, is 47m high and round, with the upper half

covered with vegetation. It lies 24 miles W of the Con Son

Islands.

5.10 Hon Trung Nho, lying 3.5 miles SW of Hon Trung Lon, is
102 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

12.8m high, with patches of vegetation. It appears white from

E, and the sea breaks heavily on its E side during high winds.

5.10 The above islets have been reported to be good radar targets

at 17 miles.

Mui Lay to Vung Da Nang

5.11 Mui Lay (17°05'N., 107°07'E.), with Hon Co and the

mountains inland, has been described in paragraph 4.10.

5.11 The coast between Mui Lay and Mui Chon May Tay, 65

miles SE, is low and sandy, with intermittent sand hills. It

offers no anchorage during the Northeast Monsoon, but anchorage is possible anywhere off the coast during the Southwest Monsoon, in suitable depths. There are no known sunken

dangers. The high mountains inland are often hidden by mist,

particularly during the Northeast Monsoon.

5.11 Cua Tung, 4.5 miles S of Mui Lay, is the outlet of Song Ben

Hai, and is often marked by breakers. The river is only accessible to boats with drafts up to 1.8m.

5.11 Cua Viet, 12 miles SSE of Mui Lay, is often marked by

breakers and has a bar, with a depth of 1.5m, lying 0.8 mile E

of the entrance and subject to change.

5.11 The coast between Cua Viet and Cua Thuan An, 32 miles SE

is a sandy plain with fishing villages near the shore.

5.11 A depth of 14m lies 21 miles ESE of the entrance to Cua

Thuan An.

5.11 Cua Thuan An (16°34'N., 107°38'E.) is the entrance to

Song Huong, which provides access to the city of Hue

(16°29'N., 107°35'E.). During the Northeast Monsoon, the sea

breaks on the bar and it may become impassable. A barrier,

with a number of openings through it, stretches across the inner

end of Cua Thuan An. During the Southwest Monsoon, the

river can probably be entered by vessels with a draft of 3m, but

can only be navigated by vessels of 1m draft to Hue, which lies

7 miles upstream. The last of the flood is the best time to enter. 

5.11 The river is encumbered with sand banks and fishing stakes,

and vessels should not enter without local knowledge. The

river is at its lowest level in February, and at its highest in

November. The tidal currents are strong on the bar and in the

river. A light is shown from the W side of the entrance.

5.11 There is no regular pilotage service, but the services of a

pilot may possibly be obtained.

5.11 Anchorage can be taken, in 11 to 18m off the bar during periods of favorable winds.

5.11 Banc de Thuan An, with depths of 12.8 to 16.5m, lies E of

Cua Thuan An, almost parallel to the coast and 4 to 7 miles offshore.

5.11 Cua Tu Hien, located 22 miles SE of Cua Thuan An, leads

into Dam Cua Hai, which is connected by inland waterways

with Song Huong. The coast between the above entrances

consists of sandy beach backed by sandhills, on the summits of

which are villages surrounded by trees and cultivated fields.

This part of the coast is distinctive and unlikely to be mistaken

for that section N of Cua Than An, where the villages are on

the sides of the hills, not on the summits.

5.11 Mui Chon May Tay, 2 miles ESE of Cua Tu Hien, projects

only a short distance from the coast. Nui Vinh Phong, 482m

high, and Dong Nhut, 592m high, lie 1 mile and 2.5 miles

SSW, respectively, of Mui Chon May Tay.

5.11 Baie Chon May (Vung Chon May), entered between Mui

Chon May Tay and Mui Chon May Dong, provides anchorage,

in 13m, good holding ground, leeward of Mui Chon May

Dong. However, the bay is barely tenable when the Northeast

Monsoon is fairly established.

5.11 Mui Chon May Dong (16°21'N., 108°02'E.) is the N extremity of a steep and wooded peninsula, joined to the coast by

a sandy isthmus. The peninsula rises to Nui Tron, 282m high,

1.7 miles from the cape.

5.11 The coast is low from the peninsula of Mui Chon May Dong

to the outlet of Dam Lap An, 6 miles SE, which is marked by a

pagoda. The coast is rocky for a distance of 6 miles to the

peninsula at the NW entrance point of Vung Da Nang. 

5.11 Hon Son Cha (16°13'N., 108°12'E.), a 230m high island, is

cliffy and separated from the NW entrance point of Vung Da

Nang by a passage about 0.3 mile wide, with a depth of 24m in

the fairway.

Vung Da Nang (16°06'N., 108°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 57650 

5.12 Vung Da Nang (Da Nang) (16°06'N., 108°13'E.) is

entered between the N extremity of Ban Dao Tien Sa and

another high peninsula, lying 4 miles NW. The entrance to the

bay is easily recognized by Hon Son Cha, previously described

above in paragraph 5.9, and Ban Dao Tien Sa , which lie off the

NW entrance point of the bay. There are a number of dangerous wrecks in Vung Da Nang.

5.12 Ban Dao Tien Sa, a mountainous peninsula of irregular

outline, rises to an elevation of 696m near its center, and is

joined to the mainland by a low isthmus. Mui Da Nang

(16°07'N., 108°21'E.) forms the E extremity of Ban Dao Tien

Sa, and a small peninsula, 62m high, with Hai Quan (Ilot de

l’Observatoire) at its S end, forms the W extremity. Rocher

Canton, which dries 0.6m, lies 0.4 mile N of the N extremity of

Ban Dao Tien Sa, is generally visible and is marked close N by

a buoy. An obstruction with a least depth of 9.6m lies 1.3 miles

WSW of Rocher Canton.

5.12 The port of Da Nang (16°04'N., 108°14'E.) lies in the SW

part of Vung Da Nang, on the W bank of Song Han, close

within the river mouth. The channel to the river is protected on

its W side by a detached breakwater nearly 1 mile long. A

breakwater extends NW from the E side of the entrance to the

river.

5.12 Da Nang is a principal port of central Vietnam. The terminal

handles bulk cargo, being the port for the coal mines of Nang

Son, 35 miles upriver, as well as general cargo, containerized

cargo, cars, and petroleum products.

5.12 Winds—Weather.—During the Northeast Monsoon season,

from November to March when fresh breezes prevail, the

climate is temperate. Squalls from the N appear in February,

warning of which is given by the clouds amassing on the

mountains N. Exposure to the sun should be avoided during the

remaining 7 months of the year. The heat is very trying in April

and May due to the frequent calms. At this time vessels should

anchor well out in the bay away from the high land of the

peninsula in order to have the benefit of any light airs, avoiding

the stifling inshore anchorages. In June the heat is tempered

somewhat by land and sea breezes.
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 103

Pub. 161

5.12 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Da Nang is 1.2m at

MHHW and 1.1m at MLHW.

5.12 During large tides the currents in the bay are negligible, and

only just reach a velocity of 0.5 knot in the river. There is no

flood current at Da Nang during nominal tides.

5.12 Depths—Limitations.—There are depths of 18 to 22m in

the entrance of Vung Da Nang, decreasing gradually toward

the SW shore. The entrance channel is dredged to a controlling

depth of 13m.

5.12 The two piers NW of Hai Quan (Ilot de l’Observatoire)

comprise the sea port of Tien Sa. There are four berths able to

accommodate vessels of up to 182m in length with alongside

depths of 9.5m.

5.12 A jetty, 91m long, projects SE from the S end of Hai Quan.

Vessels up to 190m in length, 26m beam, and a maximum draft

of 11m can berth at this jetty.

5.12 The channel from Ile de l’Observatoire to the entrance of

Song Han has charted depths of 4.5m.

5.12 The main quay at the river port of Song Han is 530m long

and has alongside depths of 4 to 6m. Song Han 7 is 134m long

with an alongside depth of 6m. Song Han 8 is 90m long and

has an alongside depth of 6m. Song Han 9 is 70m long and has

an alongside depth of 6m. Quay No. 234 is 220m long and has

an alongside depth of 6m. 

5.12 My Khe (16°04'15"N., 108°15'20"E.), an offshore tanker

berth, lies 2 miles off the S shore of Vung Da Nang and can

accommodate vessels of up to 40,000 dwt with a maximum

draft of 13m. 

5.12 Lien Chien (16°08'15"N., 108°08'10"E.), a tanker mooring

berth designated for vessels of up to 5,000 dwt, lies in depths

of 7.6m in the N part of Vung Kim Lien, on the W side of Vung

Da Nang.

5.12 Submarine pipelines connect the oil berths mentioned above

to the shore and are best seen on the chart.

5.12 Aspect.—A light is shown from the E side of Ban Dao Tien

Sa, 1.8 miles NW of Mui Da Nang.

5.12 A conspicuous radar tower stands on the 621m peak on the

W side of Ban Dao Tien Sa.

5.12 A light is shown on the W extremity of Ban Dao Tien Sa,

about 0.5 mile NW of Hai Quan.

5.12 Pointe Isabelle (16°10'N., 108°09'E.), the SE end of a small

peninsula, 130m high, on the W side of the bay, is reported to

be a good radar target.

5.12 A green tank is conspicuous 1.8 miles ESE of Hai Quan.

5.12 Lighted buoys mark the channel over the bar leading to the

anchorage E of Hai Quan, and to the entrance of Song Han.

5.12 The detached breakwater on the W side of the channel

leading to the river entrance is marked by lights at its N and S

ends.

5.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots will board in the

designated quarantine anchorage (16°10'N., 108°11'E.). Requests for pilotage should be sent 48 hours and 24 hours in

advance. Berthing is usually restricted to daylight hours.

5.12 Signals.—The Harbor Entrance Control Post (HECP) is

situated near the W extremity of Bun Dao Tien Sa, which may

be contacted on 2716 kHz. A signal station is situated near the

light structure NW of Mui Da Nang.

5.12 Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor in the 45 designated

anchorages established in Vung Da Nang, in depths of 10 to

16m.

5.12 Small vessels can anchor E of Hai Quan, sheltered from the

force of the Northeast Monsoon.

5.12 Vung Da Nang offers no sheltered anchorage during the

Northeast Monsoon or during a typhoon; in the latter case the

best anchorage is in the shelter of Cu Lao Cham (15°57'N.,

108°31'E.).

5.12 Emergency and Explosive Anchorages are situated in the W

part of the bay.

5.12 Directions.—Vung Da Nang is easy of access between the N

side of Ban Dao Tien Sa and Hon Son Cha, 4 miles NW.

Vessels should pass N and W of Rocher Canton.

5.12 To enter Song Han, after passing Hai Quan, a vessel should

keep the range lights, situated NE of Hai Quan, in line astern,

and proceed through the dredged channel.

5.12 Caution is necessary to avoid the numerous fishing vessels

which generally show no lights.

Vung Da Nang to Vung Qui Nhon

5.13 Baie du Lutin (Bai Num) (16°06'N., 108°18'E.), on

the S side of Ban Dao Tien Sa, provides sheltered anchorage, in

11 to 12m, mud, to vessels with local knowledge.

5.13 Baie du Rocher Noir lies farther W. Rocher Noir, above

water, lies on a shoal outside the entrance of the bay.

5.13 Southwest of Rocher Noir there is a stretch of coast known

locally as China Beach. An offshore pipeline berth, 1 mile S of

Rocher Noir, can accommodate tankers up to 183m long, with

drafts of 13m.

5.13 The coast between Ban Dao Tien Sa and Song Cua Dai, 15

miles SW, is low and backed by lagoons. A hill, 106m high,

rising 10 miles NW of Song Cua Dai, is the only landmark on

this stretch.

5.13 Song Cua Dai (15°53'N., 108°24'E.) is entered between

Pointe Cua Dai (Mui Cua Dai) and Mui An Luong, 1 mile E. A

narrow sandbank extends in a curve 1 mile E of Pointe Cua

Dai. Southward of the bank, Song Cua Dai is fronted by a bar,

about 1 mile wide. The channel through the bar has a depth of

about 1.5m, but is subject to frequent change.

5.13 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 14 to 18m, outside the

bar, but the holding ground is poor. The masts of junks anchored inside the bar are visible from seaward.

Off-lying Islands

5.14 Cu Lao Cham (15°57'N., 108°31'E.) is the largest of

a group of islands extending up to 10 miles ENE of the mouth

of Song Cua Dai. It is 517m high, and can be seen for a great

distance in clear weather.

5.14 Anchorage.—The bay on the SW side of Cu Lao Cham

provides good shelter during the Northeast Monsoon, in depths

of 7.3 to 8.2m, sand and mud, good holding ground. Good

shelter can also be found in deeper water SW of the island.

5.14 Hon Tai, 212m high, lies 0.7 mile S of Cu Lao Cham. Rocher

d’Entrecasteaux, with a least depth of 4.3m, lies 0.8 mile WSW

of Hon Tai.

5.14 Hon Giai and Hon Mo lie 1 mile and 2 miles, respectively,

SSW of the W end of Cu Lao Cham.

5.14 Hon La, 166m high, lies 2 miles W of Cu Lao Cham. Hon

Co and Hon Cu lie 1 mile and 1.5 miles, respectively, farther

W.
104 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

5.14 Caution.—Cu Lao Cham, Hon Tai, and Hon Giai lie in an

area restricted to traffic.

5.14 The depths between the Cu Lao Cham group are irregular,

with shoal patches. Several areas of potential danger, many of

which are charted, lie up to 60 miles offshore from and

between ESE and NNE of Cu Lao Cham.

5.15 The coast between Song Cua Dai and Mui An Hoa

(15°31'N., 108°41'E.), 44m high, located 28 miles SE,

continues at a low elevation. Hon Ong, a steep-to islet, 140m

high, lies 18 miles N of Mui An Hoa. In the interior are several

mountain ranges. Hon Nui Tau, 953m high, lies 31 miles NW

of Mui An Hoa.

5.15 A ledge of rocks, with a depth of 1.8m and another ledge

with depths of less than 0.3m, lie 1 mile NW and 0.5 mile W,

respectively, of Mui An Hoa. The sea sometimes breaks on

these ledges.

5.16 Vung An Hoa lies between Mui An Hoa and a

peninsula lying 1.2 miles SSE. The bay is encumbered by

rocks and islets in its N part. Truong (Trung) Giang discharges

into the S end of the bay.

5.16 A radio tower, marked by red obstruction lights, and a water

tank stand near the S entrance point of the bay. A conspicuous

dome and water tank stand about 1 mile S of the S entrance

point.

5.16 A channel, dredged to 6.1m in 1970 and marked by lighted

buoys, leads through the S part of Vung An Hoa, and to a ramp

near the E entrance of Truong Giang.

5.16 An offshore pipeline berth, 3.5 miles SE of Vung An Hoa,

can accommodate vessels up to 183m in length and up to

10.3m in draft.

5.16 Vung Dung Quat (15°25'N., 108°44'E.), a terminal in Viet

Tranh Bay, consists of an oil jetty and a SPM (15°22'33"N.,

108°51'40"E.). Dung Quat is approached between Mui An Hoa

and Mui Dat Vian Ka (Mui Vian Ka) (15°25'N., 108°48'E.).

Foul ground extends about 0.3 mile NNW of the latter point.

Song Tra Bong enters the bay 2.5 miles SW of Mui Dat Vian

Ka. Several islets and rocks lie off the mouth of the river.

Inland of the coastline the country is mountainous. Nui Chua,

1,362m high, lies 14 miles SW of Mui An Hoa.

5.16 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels:

1. Passenger vessels, oil tankers, and LPG vessels of

1,000 grt and greater.

2. All foreign vessels of 100 grt and greater.

3. All Vietnamese vessels of 2,000 grt or greater.

5.16 Pilots may be contacted on VHF channel 12. 

5.16 Use of tugs is compulsory for vessels berthing or unberthing.

Vessels may berth between the hours of 0600 and 1600 local

time.

5.16 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, good

anchorage can be taken in the SE part of Vung Dung Quat.

Large vessels should anchor, in a depth of 15m, SW of Mui Dat

Vian Ka. Small vessels can anchor, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m,

nearer the shore.

5.17 Mui Nam Tram (15°21'N., 108°52'E.), rising to an

elevation of 141m, lies 1.5 miles E of Mui Dat Vian Ka, from

which it is separated by a bay. Between Mui Nam Tram and

Pointe de Go Nhan, 6 miles SSE, lie two open bays separated

by Mui Phuoc Thien (Pointe de Phuoc Thien), a 31m high

headland. A rock, awash, lies 0.5 mile SE of Pointe de Go

Nhan.

5.17 A sandy bay lies between Pointe de Go Nhan and Mui Ba

Lang An, 6 miles SE. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 10

to 12m, in the S part of the bay, NW of Mui Ba Lang An.

5.17 Mui Ba Lang An (Mui Batangan) (15°14'N., 108°57'E.),

36m high, is fringed on its N side by a reef and rocks, some of

which are above water, extending more than 0.5 mile offshore.

Hon Bong Lan (Rocher Plat), 6m high, lies 3.5 miles SSE of

the cape, and 1.8 miles offshore. Two detached rocks, with

depths of 7.6 and 2.7m, lie 1 mile and 1.3 miles, respectively,

NNW of Hon Bong Lan. Mui Ba Lang An should be given a

wide berth.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

5.18 Cu Lao Re (15°23'N., 109°07'E.), an island lying 12

miles NE of Mui Ba Lang An, is formed of several craters and

peaks. These appear isolated when viewed from a distance of

25 miles, except on a N bearing, when the island has a level

aspect. The E and highest peak is 169m high. A light is shown

from the NE extremity of the island.

5.18 Cu Lao Re is fringed by coral reef which extends 0.7 mile

WNW from its W extremity and 1 mile SE from its E end.

5.18 Anchorage.—The holding ground off the island is rocky and

poor, but temporary anchorage can be taken S of the summit.

The best anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon is N of the

W peak, where the sea is generally calmed.

5.18 Cu Lao Bo Bai, a rocky islet, lies 2.5 miles NNW of Cu Lao

Re. It is fringed by coral reef, and lies on a bank, with depths of

less than 9m, extending 0.5 mile offshore.

5.18 Banc du Volta, with a least depth of 4.3m, lies 6 miles NW of

Cu Lao Re. The sea breaks frequently on the bank; during the

Southwest Monsoon, it is frequented by fishermen.

5.18 In 1965, a depth of 11m was reported to lie 31 miles NE of

Cu Lao Re, with another shoal, with a depth of 18.3m, lying 5

miles farther N. In the same year a shoal with a depth of 18.3m

was reported to lie 23 miles ESE of the same island.

5.19 The coast between Mui Ba Lang An and Cap Sa Hoi,

35 miles SSE, is backed by sandhills. A prominent sand hill,

163m high, lies close inland from Cap Mia, which lies 10.5

miles NNW of Cap Sa Hoi. Inland of the coastline the country

is mountainous. Nui Da Vach, the highest in the area, rises to

an elevation of 1,136m, about 21 miles SW of Mui Ba Lang

An.

5.19 Song Tra Khuc discharges 6 miles SSW of Mui Ba Lang An.

The village of Quang Ngai is situated 5 miles within the river

mouth.

Cu Lao Re from SE
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 105

Pub. 161

5.19 Rocher Noir, a 4.5m high black rock, lies 3 miles S of Song

Tra Khuk, near the edge of a bank that extends 0.8 mile offshore.

5.19 Cap Sa Hoi (14°40'N., 109°05'E.), 92m high, is the S end of

a peninsula enclosing a lagoon. There is a customhouse on the

cape and a village lies on the mainland W.

5.19 The coast between Cap Sa Hoi and Pointe de Kim Bong, 5

miles S, consists of beaches, separated by rocky points. The

coast is then sandy to Pointe An Yo, 8.5 miles farther S. Nui

Kho, with a red summit, 223m high, lies 4 miles NW of Pointe

An Yo and 2 miles inland.

5.19 Pointe An Yo is the N of two rocky spurs that extend from a

chain of mountains. The summit of the mountains rises 5 miles

SSW of the point. A rock, with a depth of 2.1m, lies 0.5 mile E

of Pointe An Yo.

5.19 Ile Tortue (14°22'N., 109°12'E.), a 10m high black islet, lies

6.5 miles SE of Pointe An Yo and 3.5 miles offshore. A reef

extends a short distance from its E side.

5.19 Ile Nuoc, 45m high with two peaks, lies 6.5 miles S of Ile

Tortue. It is the largest and NE of a group of black, rocky islets,

and lies on a bank extending 1 mile from the mainland. Rocher

Plat, which dries 2.1m, lies on this bank about 1 mile S of Ile

Nuoc. A white house, formerly a lighthouse, lies on the mainland W of the islet.

5.20 Nuoc Ngot (14°08'N., 109°13'E.) is a steep promontory, 168m high, with several red granite peaks made conspicuous by the patches of sand on their slopes. This promontory is

the S end of a peninsula that forms the E side of Dam Nuoc

Ngot.

5.20 Nui Ba, 874m high, with an isolated rock on it, lies 7 miles

SW of Nuoc Ngot. Hon Heo, 664m high with a flat summit and

an isolated rock on it, lies 5 miles ESE of Nui Ba.

5.20 Hon Trau, a barren, granite islet, 37m high, lies 4 miles E of

Nuoc Ngot. Two rocks, above water, lie 0.2 mile E of the islet.

A rock, on which the sea breaks, lies between the rocks and the

islet.

5.20 Thanh Hi (14°01'N., 109°15'E.), 188m high, lies 2.5 miles E

of Hon Heo. Tan Ly, a 218m high prominent hill, lies on the

coast 1.5 miles farther S, separating two small bays. A rocky

point lies 2 miles S of Tan Ly. An open sandy bay, backed by

sand hills, extends 5 miles SSE to Ban Dao Phuoc Mai, a 94m

high promontory, near its N end. 

5.20 Nghiem Kinh Chieu (13°53'N., 109°19'E.), a rock-fringed

islet with another islet close N, lies 0.3 mile E of the above

promontory. The E side of Ban Dao Phuoc Mai is steep and

high to Mui Yen at its SE extremity. A prominent gap between

two hills lies 3.5 miles N of Mui Yen. Nui Den (13°51'N.,

109°17'E.), 361m high, the summit of the peninsula, lies 2.3

miles N of the gap.

5.20 Cu Lao Hon Kho, a 52m high islet connected to the coast by

a reef, lies 0.8 mile NE of Mui Yen.

Off-lying Islands—Approach to Vung Qui Nhon

5.21 Cu Lao Coni (Nui Ong Can), a small group of islets,

the highest of which is 34m high, lies 3.5 miles E of the N

extremity of Ban Dao Phuoc Mai. A 7.3m rocky patch lies 0.4

mile W of Cu Lao Coni.

5.21 Nui Ong Co, a steep pyramidal rock, 54m high, lies 1.7 miles

W of Cu Lao Coni..

5.21 Cu Lao Xanh (Cu Lao Poulo Gambir) (13°37'N.,

109°21'E.), with two summits, the tops of which are bare, lies

nearly 8 miles SSE of Mui Yen. The NW hill is 123m high, and

a light is shown from the E hill. Banc de Paques, composed of

coral and with a least depth of 7.6m, lies 2 miles W of the S

extremity of Cu Lao Xanh.

5.21 Les Mamelles are two sharp-peaked rocks, one of which is

38m high, lying 0.7 mile SSE of Cu Lao Xanh. Another rock

lies close S of Les Mamelles, and there is a depth of 5.2m

about 0.1 mile S of this rock.

Vung Qui Nhon (13°46'N., 109°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 57640

5.22 Vung Qui Nhon, on the W side of Ban Dao Phouc

Mai, is a mostly shallow bay, with the exception of the dredged

channels in its S part. The bay is entered between Pointe Sud,

the SW extremity of Ban Dao Phouc Mai, and Pointe de Gia,

about 0.3 mile N. The town of Qui Nhon occupies the spit

forming the SW shore of Vung Qui Nhon which terminates in

Pointe de Gia. Numerous streams discharge into the W side of

the bay. Les Sept Ilots lie nearly in the middle of the bay, 1.8

miles NNW of Pointe de Gia.

5.22 The port handles cement, fertilizer, timber and wood products, and agricultural cargo. 

5.22 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Qui Nhon is 1.9m at

MHHW.

5.22 Tidal currents near Culao Hon Kho set W on a rising tide,

attaining a velocity of 1.5 knots. During the rainy season the

current setting out of Vung Qui Nhon is strong. The current at

the entrance attains a velocity of 2 knots with large tides, and

1.5 knots with small tides; this velocity is attained 6 hours after

high and low water locally. The current changes direction 2

hours after high and low water.

5.22 Depths—Limitations.—The 20m curve in the approach to

Qui Nhon runs roughly between Mui Yen and close E of Hon

Dat (13°41'N., 109°16'E.).

5.22 Hon Kho, with a depth of 7m, is an isolated danger in the

approach, lying 2.5 miles SSE of Mui Yen.

5.22 A buoyed channel, established between the 10m curves,

leads between Pointe Sud and Pointe de Gia.

5.22 There are two berths with a total length of 350m and a depth

of 7.5m alongside. There is also a floating petroleum dock for

tankers having a draft of up to 8m.

5.22 Vessels of up to 16,000 dwt, having a maximum length of

180m and a maximum draft of 7.5m, can be accommodated.

5.22 A rock, with a depth of 3.9m and marked by a buoy, lies 0.1

mile W of Pointe Sud.

5.22 Aspect.—Ban Dao Phuoc Mai and Cu Lao Xanh have been

previously described in paragraph 5.17 and paragraph 5.18,

respectively.

5.22 Nui Mui Yen, 151m high, lies 0.6 mile NNW of Mui Yen,

the SE extremity of Ban Dao Phuoc Mai. Nui Dau Goc Let

(Phuong Mai), 318m high, the highest peak on this part of the

peninsula, lies 1.5 miles farther NW. Hon Dat, 68m high and

covered with brushwood, lies 4.5 miles SSW of Nui Mui Yen,

and 1 mile off the mainland.
106 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

5.22 A tower, showing red obstruction lights and white lights at

its base, stands 3.5 miles WSW of Pointe Sud.

5.22 Beacons, in range bearing 352°, lead from the Zero Buoy to

the bay.

5.22 Pilotage.—Pilotage, which is compulsory, should be arranged for well in advance. The pilot boards during daylight

hours at Zero Buoy (13°44'19"N., 109°15'16"E.). During inclement weather, the harbormaster designates an anchorage

position via VHF where the pilot may board with safety.

5.22 Signals.—The Harbor Entrance Control Post (HECP) on

Pointe Sud can be contacted on 2716 kHz or by flashing light.

5.22 Anchorage.—Anchorages in the Qui Nhon area are

assigned by the Harbor Entrance Control Post. Large vessels

anchor S of Ban Dao Phuoc Mai in suitable depths. Sheltered

anchorage can be found in Vung Qui Nhon, in depths of 5.5 to

9m, N of Pointe de Gia.

Vung Qui Nhon to Vung Xuan Dai

5.23 Mui Ke Ga (13°34'N., 109°18'E.), 4 miles SW of Cu

Lao Xanh, is the E extremity of a rocky peninsula. A few

above-water rocks lie close off the NW side of the peninsula.

Nui Yen Beo, 336m high with a conical summit, lies 3.5 miles

W of Mui Ke Ga.

5.23 Baie De Cu Mong, entered 2.5 miles SSW of Mui Ke Ga, is

quite shallow. There are depths of 11m in the entrance which

shoal rapidly. The shores of the bay are densely populated and

bordered by coconut trees. Anchorage, well-sheltered, can be

taken by small vessels in the SW part of the bay in a depth of

5m, mud.

5.23 Mui Vung Trich, 3.8 miles S of Mui Ke Ga, is the S extremity of a peninsula, 114m high, joined to the mainland by a narrow isthmus of sand. Anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon can be taken, in depths of 5 to 9m, in the bay SW of Mui

Vung Trich.

5.23 Mui Ong Dien, 6 miles SSE of Mui Ke Ga, rises to an elevation of 158m and is the NE end of a hilly peninsula forming

the E side of Vung Chao. 

5.23 Mui Luoi Cay (13°24'N., 109°18'E.), a perpendicular cliff, 4

miles SSW of Mui Ong Dien, is the S extremity of the peninsula. Three peaks rise on the S side of the peninsula; the E and

highest peak is 358m high, and nearly 2 miles N of Mui Luoi

Cay.

Vung Xuan Dai and Vung Chao

5.24 Vung Xuan Dai (13°23'N., 109°17'E.), entered between Mui Luoi Cay and Mui Ganh Den, 2.5 miles S, provides

access to Vung Chao (Baie de Vung Chao), one of the most

sheltered bays on the coast of Vietnam. The entrance of Vung

Xuan Dai can be recognized by the peaks on the peninsula N of

Mui Luoi Cay, the high cliffs of Mui Ong Den and those close

N of Mui Vung Trich. Vung Chao is entered between Mui Mu

U (13°26'N., 109°15'E.) and Dong Tranh, lying 1.2 mile E.

5.24 Rocher de l’Illissus, with a depth of 1.8m, lies in the

approach to Vung Xuan Dai, 1.2 miles SE of Mui Ganh Den,

which is 77m high and cultivated.

5.24 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Vung Xuan Dai is 1.7m

at MHHW.

5.24 The tidal currents in the entrance to Vung Xuan Dai attain a

velocity of 1.5 knots, setting W on the flood.

5.24 Depths—Limitations.—Vung Xuan Dai has general depths

of 11 to 17m. Vung Chao has general depths of 5.5m to 8.2m.

Depths of less than 5.5m extend 1 mile from the W shore of the

bay and the NE part of the bay is fringed by a drying reef

extending up to 0.5 mile offshore.

5.24 Hon Yen (13°23'N., 109°17'E.), 48m high, and formed of

jagged red rocks, lies in the entrance of Vung Xuan Dai. A

bank, with above-water rocks, extends about 0.2 mile ENE and

WSW of the islet. Rocher de l’Octant, with a depth of 1.5m,

lies 0.5 mile WSW of Hon Yen.

5.24 Cu Lao Ong Xa, gray in color and rock-fringed, lies 2.3

miles WNW of Hon Yen. Rocher du Volga, with a depth of 4m,

lies 0.5 mile NNE of Cu Lao Ong Xa.

5.24 Rocher Bouee, 1m high, lies 0.4 mile W of Mui Ganh

Tuong (13°24'N., 109°16'E.), in the approach to Vung Chao.

5.24 Hon Lo Dam Ca, a coral patch which dries 1.2m, lies nearly

in the middle of Vung Chao, 1.5 miles NNW of Dong Tranh.

5.24 Anchorage.—Anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon

can be taken, in a depth of 11m, with the mouth of Song Binh

Ba in the S part of Vung Xuan Dai, bearing 165°, and with Hon

Yen bearing 070°. Rocher de l’Octant is to be avoided when

approaching this anchorage.

5.24 Anchorage can also be taken in Rade de Vung Lam (Ao Xom

Luoi), about 0.5 mile N of Cu Lao Ong Xa, in 9m, mud. When

approaching this anchorage, Rocher du Volga should be

avoided.

5.24 During the Northeast Monsoon, anchorage can be taken, in a

depth of 10m, NNW of Rocher Bouee, but the sea is usually

rough during this monsoon and if the draft permits it is better

to enter Vung Chao.

5.24 In Vung Chao anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 7m, between Hon Lo Dam Ca and Mui Co, a point located 2 miles E.

Anchorage can also be taken, in depths of 5.5 to 5.9m, in the W

part of Vung Chao, off Song Cau, with the town bearing between 280° and 300°. The bottom in the latter two anchorages

is hard mud, good holding ground.

Vung Xuan Dai to Cap Varella

5.25 Mui Lang (13°20'N., 109°18'E.), a black rocky bluff,

lies 1.7 miles S of Mui Ganh Den.

5.25 Cu Lao Ma Nha (Lao Ma Nha), a wooded island, 104m high,

lies 3.5 miles SE of Mui Lang. It is uninhabited, but frequented

by fishermen. During the summer the narrow channel between

the island and the coast is blocked by fishing nets.

5.25 Le Trapeze (13°15'N., 109°19'E.), a black, prominent point,

is located 1.5 miles SW of Cu Lao Ma Nha. A steep-to reef, on

which lies an above-water rock, extends 0.3 mile E of the

point. Le Bonnet, a black islet, lies 1.8 miles farther SSW.

5.25 Iles Bai Ma Lieng lie on a rocky bank extending 2 miles SE

from a rocky promontory. Lao Dua (13°10'N., 109°20'E.),

14m high, lies near the outer end of the bank. Hon Chua (Lao

Chua), 37m high, lies about midway between Lao Dua and the

point. A 7m patch lies 0.5 mile SE of Lao Dua. 

5.25 Anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon can be taken SW

of Hon Chua. Iles Bai Ma Lieng provide some shelter during

the Northeast Monsoon, but anchorage is not recommended

during the season.
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 107

Pub. 161

5.25 A sandy beach extends from the vicinity of Iles Bai Ma

Lieng to Cap Varella.

5.25 The mouth of Song Da Rang (Song Ba), accessible only to

junks, lies 5 miles S of Iles Bai Ma Lieng. Nui Chap Chai,

391m high, and Nui Hon Chuong, 572m high, are prominent

standing 4.5 and 11 miles, respectively, NW of the mouth.

5.25 Hon Co, 18m high, lying 9.5 miles SE of the mouth of Song

Da Rang and 1.5 miles offshore, is the SE of a group of rocks,

some of which are awash.

5.25 Cap Varella, the E extremity of Vietnam, consists of steep

cliffs rising to four rocky peaks. Three of the peaks lie on the

peninsula forming the E side of Vung Ro. Mui Nay is the NE

point of the cape. Mui Ke Ga (Mui Dieu) (12°54'N.,

109°28'E.) lies NE of the NE rocky peak. Mui Ba, 2.3 miles S

of Mui Ke Ga, is the SW extremity of the cape.

5.25 Nui Da Bia, 706m high, the summit of Cap Varella, is

located 3.5 miles W of Mui Ke Ga and has a rock resembling a

pagoda. The summit is visible for 50 miles in clear weather, but

is often hidden by clouds. A light and a signal station stand on

the peak. 

5.25 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage

can be taken off the bight NW of Mui Nay, in a depth of 18m,

with Nui Da Bia bearing 233°.

5.25 Vung Ro (12°51'N., 109°25'E.), a small bay, is entered W of

Mui La, the SW extremity of Cap Varella. It is backed by high

land and its E side formed by Cap Varella. It is one of the safest

anchorages on the coast of central Vietnam. The depths in the

entrance are 18.3m, which gradually decrease towards the village at the head of the bay. Hon Nua, a 143m high island, with

perpendicular cliffs on its E side, lies in the approach to Vung

Ro, 1.7 miles SW of Mui La.

5.25 An offshore pipeline berth, with a least depth of 12.8m, lies

in the NW part of the harbor. A pier, 180m long and linked to

the shore by a causeway, has depths of 7.9 to 11.5m alongside.

5.25 Anchorage can be taken as convenient in Vung Ro. During

the Southwest Monsoon or in good weather anchorage can be

taken W of Hon Nua.

Presqu’ile de Hon Gom

5.26 Presqu’ile de Hon Gom, with Mui Ganh (12°34'N.,

109°26'E.) at its S extremity, is joined to the mainland, 15

miles NNW of Mui Ganh, by a low and narrow isthmus about 5

miles long. The islands in Ben Goi can be seen over the

isthmus. Hon Nhon, 436m high, 8 miles NNW of Mui Ganh, is

the summit of a mountainous projection extending 4 miles SW

from the W side of the peninsula.

5.26 The S side of Ban Dao Hon Gom is mountainous. Khai

Luong, 291m high, and Le Doigt, 309m high, lie 0.8 mile N,

and 3.5 miles NNW, respectively, of Mui Ganh.

5.26 Chu Mu (La Mere and L’Enfant), 2,051m high, prominent

and surmounted by two rocks that appear like fingers of

unequal size, is located 31 miles WNW of Mui Ganh. Nui Hon

Chao, 1,625m high, lies 10.5 miles ENE of Chu Mu. The

mountain peaks are frequently obscured by clouds, especially

during the Northeast Monsoon.

5.26 Hon Lon, a large island, lies close off the SW side of Ban

Dao Hon Gom. On the E side of the peninsula, Hon Trau Nam,

a group of eight rocks, 6m high, lies 1.5 miles E of Mui Ganh.

Hon Kho Tran, an islet, lies 2 miles farther NNE and 0.5 mile

offshore.

5.26 Mui Doi, 5.5 miles NNE of Mui Ganh, is the SE extremity of

a hilly peninsula. Hon Doi, with sunken rocks lying close to its

W and S side, lies close NE of Mui Doi.

Baie de Van Fong and Ben Goi

5.27 The approach to Baie de Van Fong and Ben Goi lies

between Mui Ganh, the S extremity of Presqu’ile de Hon Gom,

and Mui Ban Thang (12°24'N., 109°21'E.), 11 miles SSW.

The latter point is the E extremity of a mountainous and

wooded peninsula. Hon Heo, 813m high, rising 4 miles W of

Mui Ban Thang, is the summit of this peninsula.

5.27 Lach Cua Be, entered between Mui Ghan and Mui Co, 1

mile W, is the deep clear channel by which vessels reach Cua

Van (Port Dayot). Vung Van Fong, which leads into Ben Goi, is

entered between the SE extremity of Hon Lon and Mui Mong

(12°30'N., 109°19'E.), the E extremity of Hon My Giang, 6

miles WSW. Hon Do, 136m high, lies 2 miles ESE of Mui

Mong. Hon Hoa, 26m high, lies 1 mile E of Hon Do on a small

shoal patch, and is the outermost islet in the approach to Vung

Van Fong. Vung Cai Ban is formed between the latter islands

and Mui Ban Thang.

5.27 Lach Cua Be is entered W of Mui Ganh. Rocher du Lion,

with a depth of 2.7m, lies 0.3 mile S of Mui Ganh. The passage

has depths of 28m, and narrows to a width of 0.25 mile NE of

Hon Lon, where it enters Cua Van. Vung Thu, a small bay, lies

midway along the NE shore of Lach Cua Be.

5.27 Cua Van (Port Dayot) is a small landlocked bay on the W

side of Ban Dao Hon Gom. It has two prominent islands within

it.

5.27 Lach Co, with depths of 20m, is the continuation W of Lach

Cua Be from Cua Van into Ben Goi.

5.27 Anchorage.—Cua Van provides anchorage in any of its

bights, in depths of about 18m. The NW bight, where the bottom is mud, is most frequented. In the Northeast Monsoon,

there is better anchorage in Vung Thu, in depths of 12m, about

0.2 mile offshore.

5.28 Vung Van Fong has depths of 12 to 28m, mud bottom.

Hon Lon, wooded and mountainous, forms the NE side of the

bay which is free of dangers. The island rises to a flat summit,

567m high, near its NW end. A small bay indents the SW side

of Hon Lon. Hon Den lies 0.7 mile WSW of the NW entrance

point of the bay; a patch, with a depth of 2.4m, lies 0.2 mile W

of the islet.

5.28 Anchorage during the Northeast Monsoon can be taken

leeward of Hon Lon, but it is open SE.

5.28 Ben Goi is entered between the NW end of Hon Lon and

Pointe Hon Khoi (12°35'N., 109°15'E.). The latter point is the

NE extremity of Presqu’ile de Hon Khoi, with a high summit

rising 1.5 miles SSW of the point. 

5.28 Hon Mai, 42m high, is the outermost of several islets off the

NW end of Hon Lon, and lies 0.8 mile NW of the point. A

detached drying patch lies 0.2 mile S of the islet.

5.28 Banc du Milieu, which dries, lies 0.5 mile W of Hon Mai. Da

Bia, described with Cap Varella in paragraph 5.22, in range

022°45' with Hon Mao, the NE of the chain of islets on the NW

side of Ben Goi, leads into the bay between Hon Mai and Banc

du Milieu.
108 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

5.28 Plateau du La Perouse, a group of detached shoals with

several rocky heads and some with depths of less than 0.6m, lie

nearly in the middle of the S end of Ben Goi. Rocky patches

having depths of 3m and 0.3m, lie 1.6 and 2 miles, respectively, WNW of Hon Mai, on the NE side of the group.

5.28 A chain of islets fringed by drying coral reef lies parallel to

the NW side of Ben Goi. Hon Vung, 20m high, the SW of the

chain of islets, lies 3 miles NW of Hon Mai. A patch, which

dries 1.5m, and another patch, which dries 0.6m, lie about 0.3

mile WSW and NE, respectively, of Hon Vung.

5.28 Cua Gia (Kua Gia), a channel separating the islets from the

coast, has a least width of 0.7 mile between the reefs on either

side, with depths of not less than 5.5m in the fairway.

5.28 Hon Mao (12°44'N., 109°20'E.), 16m high, is the NE islet of

the group. Hon Trau, a reef which dries 0.6m, lies 1 mile NE of

Hon Mai.

5.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels approaching the

bay should contact Hon Khoi pilots on VHF channel 16 at least

2 hours prior to arrival. The pilot boards just outside the

entrance to the bay in position 12°30'N, 109°23'E.

5.28 Regulations.—Vessels should forward their ETA 48 hours,

24 hours, 12 hours, and 6 hours prior to arrival. The message

sent 48 hours prior should include the following information:

1. Vessel’s name, port of registry, and flag.

2. Dwt/nrt/grt.

3. Number of crew members.

4. Anti-pollution Insurance Coverage (TOVALOP or

equivalent).

5. Arrival/departure drafts.

6. Parallel body length (arrival and departure).

7. Freeboard (arrival and departure).

8. Manifold compatability with 8 or 10 inch hose.

9. Cargo description.

10. Total cargo on board.

11. Total cargo transfer.

12. Nationality of senior officers.

13. Validity of trading certificates.

5.28 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor as convenient, in depths of

12.8 to 16.5m, in Ben Goi, with Da Bia in range 023° with the

summit of Hon Mao, or closer to Ban Dao Hon Gom.

5.28 Vung Hon Khoi is entered between the N extremity of Ban

Dao Hon Khoi and a point lying 4 miles NW. There are depths

of 5.8m between the entrance points, but S of this line the

depths decrease rapidly. Anchorage can be taken in the bay, in

depths of 4m, good holding ground, by small vessels with local

knowledge or, in depths of 7m, farther out.

5.28 Directions.—Ben Goi can be entered through Lach Cua Be

and Lach Co, or through Vung Van Fong. If entering from the

latter, a vessel should pass between Hon Mai and Banc du

Milieu, keeping on the charted range line.

5.28 Vung Cay Ban, NW of Mui Ban Thang, is sheltered by the

islets on its N side. Banc de Deo Ngan, with depths of 7m in its

outer part, extends 2.8 miles N of Mui Ban Thang.

Baie de Nha Trang—Approaches

5.29 Several islands, the largest of which is Hon Tre

(12°12'N., 109°17'E.), and Grand Banc (12°17'N., 109°18'E.),

an extensive shoal, lie in the approach to Baie de Nha Trang.

5.29 Hon Tre is formed of three mountain ranges, connected by

low isthmuses. The summit of the E range is 414m high and

lies nearly 1.5 miles WNW of Mui Rach Trang, the E

extremity of Hon Tre. The summit of the central range, 482m

high, lies 2 miles farther W. The island is densely wooded and

there are steep cliffs in places. A light is shown from Mui Rach

Trang.

5.30 Eastern approach.—The E approach lies between

Mui Rach Trang and Mui Ban Thang, 12 miles N.

5.30 Hon Dung (12°16'N., 109°22'E.), 218m high and prominent,

with a framework tower on its summit, is located 4.5 miles

NNE of Mui Rach Trang. The islet is steep-to and bordered at

its base by a narrow ridge of shingle. Hon Cau, 116m high and

bare with high rocks off its S end, lies 0.6 mile NE of Hon

Dung and resembles a ruined castle from the offing.

5.30 Hon Cha La, 192m high and rocky, lies 2.5 miles SE of Mui

Ban Thang, in the NE part of the approach. The island is bare

except for some scrub on its summit, where there is a large

boulder. Hon Bac, 18m high, is located 4 miles SSW of Mui

Ban Thang, the E extremity of a mountainous and wooded

peninsula. Hon Heo (12°24'N., 109°17'E.), the summit of this

peninsula, is located near the center of its SE end, 4 miles W of

Mui Ban Thang.

5.30 Baie de Binhcang lies on the NE side of the approach to Baie

de Nha Trang. It is entered between Mui Da Chong and Mui

Khe Ga, located 4 miles SW. Hon Cu Lao and Hon Thi lie 3.5

miles NNW and 4.5 miles N, respectively, of Mui Khe Ga. The

depths in Baie de Binhcang gradually decrease as the islands

are approached. A shallow, marshy inlet lies NW of the islands.

5.30 Anchorage.—Baie de Binhcang affords good anchorage

during both monsoons, in depths of less than 18m.

5.31 Grand Banc lies near the middle of the E approach to

Baie de Nha Trang; the depths on the bank are very irregular.

Rocher du Nord-Ouest, with a depth of 0.3m, is the shallowest

coral head, lying 2.5 miles E of Mui Khe Ga. Rocher Bourayne, with a depth of 1.8m, coral, lies 0.8 mile SE of Rocher du

Nord-Ouest.

5.31 Mui Khe Ga (12°18'N., 109°15'E.), the N entrance point of

Baie de Nha Trang, rises steeply from the sea to several high

peaks. Due Ba, 578m high, consists of three summits, rising

5.5 miles WNW of the point. Hon Mat (Ile Tortue), 49m high

and resembling a tortoise, lies nearly 1 mile S of Mui Khe Ga.

5.32 South approach.—The S approach to Baie de Nha

Trang lies between Mui Dong Ba (12°08'N., 109°14'E.) and

Mui Rach Trang, 7.5 miles ENE. Mui Dong Ba is the E

extremity of a mountain range, and rises steeply from the sea.

Nui Chu Hin, a 643m high peak, lies 1.5 miles W of the point,

and Nui Cau Hin, 978m high, lies 3.5 miles farther WNW.

5.32 Hon Tam, 2 miles NW of Mui Dong Ba, lies in the middle of

the S approach, and is fringed by a narrow steep-to reef.

5.32 Mui Chut (12°13'N., 109°13'E.) is the S entrance point of

Baie de Nha Trang. Hon Mieu, 100m high, lies about midway

between Mui Chut and Hon Tam.

5.32 Hon Mung, 184m high, is located on the E side of the S

approach, 2 miles SW of Mui Rach Trang. North of Hon Mung

there is an indentation in the S side of Hon Tre.

5.32 Hon Mot, 92m high, is located 1.2 miles WNW of Hon
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 109

Pub. 161

Mung. Rocher du Lion, with a depth of 4m, lies 0.3 mile W of

Hon Mot.

5.33 Off-lying islets and dangers in the South

Approach.—Iles des Pecheurs is a group of islets with Hon

Ngoai (12°00'N., 109°20'E.), 112m high, the S and highest,

located 11.5 miles S of Mui Rach Trang. A white cairn stands

on the summit of Hon Ngoai, and Rocher Vulcan, with a depth

of 1.5m, lies about 0.5 mile N of the islet.

5.33 Hon Noi, 2 miles N of Hon Ngoai, is the largest of the group,

and its summit, 99m high, has a white cairn on it. Smaller islets

lie close N and S of Hon Noi.

5.33 Banc de Castlereagh, Banc de Thuy Trieu, and Banc du

Tondu extend NW from Iles des Pecheurs.

5.33 Banc de Thuy Trieu has a depth of 5.5m lying 4.5 miles

WNW of Hon Noi. Vessels without local knowledge should not

pass between Iles des Pecheurs and the coast.

Baie de Nha Trang (Nha Trang) 

(12°15'N., 109°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 57620 

5.34 Baie de Nha Trang lies between Mui Chut and Mui

Khe Ga, 6 miles NNE. In the bay, the shore from Mui Chut to

the entrance of Song Cai, 3 miles N, is fronted by a sandy

beach, backed by sand hills. The NW shore of the bay, between

Song Cai and Mui Khe Ga, is fringed by coral reef. Hon Cut

Chim, 7m high, is located 1 mile E of the N entrance point of

Song Cai. Depths of 0.3m and less extend 0.1 mile S and W of

Hon Cut Chim.

5.34 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Nha Trang is 1.8m at

MHHW.

5.34 In Baie de Nha Trang the flow is weak and is governed by

nontidal current.

5.34 Depths—Limitations.—An offshore pipeline berth, close N

of Mui Chut, can accommodate tankers of up to 20,000 dwt

with a maximum draft of 10.7m.

5.34 The approach channel is dredged to a depth of 11.5m. 

5.34 There is a quay, 215m in length, with a depth of 11.8m

alongside; vessels of up to 20,000 dwt can be accommodated. 

5.34 A pier, 58m long, for barges and small vessels, has depths of

3 to 6.1m alongside and is situated 0.5 mile NW of Mui Chut.

5.34 A cable car system, with a vertical clearance of 54m, crosses

the channel between Thon Truo’ng Dong and the western

peninsula of Hon Tre island. 

5.34 Cargo vessels are lightened at the anchorages.

5.34 Aspect.—The islands in the approach to Baie de Nha Trang

are good radar targets. A red and white checkered water tank

stands 1.5 miles NW of Mui Chut.

5.34 A statue of Buddha is prominent above a temple on the summit of a hill, 2 miles farther NNW; the statue is floodlit and

marked by a red obstruction light.

5.34 Rocher Noir, 1.5m high, lies 0.3 mile offshore, near the NW

end of Hon Tre.

5.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels approaching Nha

Trang from the S must board a pilot 1 mile SSW of Hon Mot.

Vessels arriving from the E must board a pilot 2 miles NNE of

Mui Chut. Pilots board during daylight hours only. 

5.34 Signals.—The Harbor Entrance Control Post (HECP), close

S of Mui Chut, will assign anchorage berths and may be contacted by radio or flashing light.

5.34 Anchorage.—Anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon

can be taken almost anywhere in Baie de Nha Trang, S of the

town, over a bottom of sand and mud.

5.34 Vessels carrying dangerous cargo anchor NW of Hon Mot, in

a depth of 20m. Other vessels anchor within 0.5 mile of the

quay, in a depth of 15m.

5.34 There is anchorage, frequented by junks, W of Hon Mieu.

During the Southwest Monsoon, this anchorage is sheltered

from the swell that frequently comes from SE. During the

Northeast Monsoon, the anchorage is sheltered from the heavy

swell by the NW end of Hon Tre.

5.34 During the Southwest Monsoon, vessels with local knowledge

can find secure anchorage in Bai Tru or Bai Tre on the N side of

Hon Tre.

5.34 During the Northeast Monsoon (October to March) anchorage in Baie de Nha Trang may become untenable due to the

heavy swell that enters the bay. At such times, shelter can be

found SE of Hon Tre or in the bay on its S side.

5.34 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the E can pass N or

S of Hon Dung. The entrance channel S of Hon Dung is 1 mile

wide and passes S of Grand Banc and Hon Mat.

5.34 Approaching from the S, a vessel should pass E of Iles des

Pecheurs and proceed between Hon Mot and Hon Tam or

between the latter islet and Hon Mieu. Care must be taken to

avoid Rocher du Lion off the W side of Hon Mot.

5.34 Caution.—Submarine cables are laid across Baie de Nha

Iles des Pecheurs bearing 255°, distant 15 miles Photograph courtesy of M/V Queen Victoria

Nha Trang Cable Car Pylon
110 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

Trang, generally in an E direction from the shore 2 miles NW

of Mui Chut.

5.34 Caution is necessary at night due to the presence of fishing

boats which often show no lights.

Baie de Nha Trang to Vinh Cam Ranh

5.35 Plage de Thuy-Trieu, a low, sandy beach, backed by

sandhills, extends 9 miles SSE from a point located 2 miles

SSW of Mui Dong Ba (12°09'N., 109°14'E.). A bare and rocky

hill, 142m high, lies at the SE end of the beach.

5.35 Mui Lo Gio, 2 miles farther SW, is rocky and bare; a rocky

ledge, with a depth of 4.6m at its extremity, extends 0.2 mile

ENE from the point. A rock, 4m high, lies nearly 1 mile NNW

of the point; a 4.2m shoal lies 0.1 mile NE of the rock.

5.35 The N entrance point of Baie de Ba Dai is located 1.5 miles

SSW of Mui Lo Gio. Two islets lie on a bank extending 0.8

mile E of the N entrance point. Hon Nhan is the inner islet. The

outer islet is 16m high, and Mui Cam Linh (Pointe de Cam

Ranh) is located 3.5 miles farther S.

Approach to Vinh Cam Ranh

5.36 The approach to Vinh Cam Ranh lies between Mui

Cam Linh (Pointe de Cam Ranh) (11°53'N., 109°17'E.) and

Mui Da Vaich, 9.5 miles SSW. Vinh Cam Ranh is one of the

finest harbors on the coast of central Vietnam. A secure

anchorage is available for all types of vessels at the approaches

and within the bay.

5.36 Mui Cam Linh (Pointe de Cam Ranh) is the E extremity of

the mountainous end of a peninsula. The summit of this peninsula is Nui Ao Ho (Ao Ho), 465m high, located 2.3 miles

WNW of Mui Cam Linh. Hon Deo, 14m high, is the outermost

islet lying off a point located 1.2 miles SSW of Mui Cam Linh.

5.36 Dao Tagne (11°50'N., 109°15'E.) lies with Mui Bai Nom, its

S extremity, lying 4 miles SW of Mui Cam Linh. The island is

divided into two parts by low land with palms on it. The summit, 206m high, with a conspicuous white square building on

it, is located on the SW side of the island. Hon Co Ngoai (Hon

Kho Ngoai), 15m high, lies 0.3 mile off the SE extremity of the

island.

5.37 Mui Da Vaich (Mui Da Vach) rises steeply to an

elevation of 330m about 0.7 mile W of the point and forms the

E extremity of a range of mountains, which attains an elevation

of 950m in Nui Ong, 4.8 miles WNW of Mui Da Vaich. On

Nui Ong there is an isolated rock, or knob, resembling that on

Cap Varella. Nui Chua, cone-shaped, is located 1 mile E of Nui

Ong. Mui Da Vaich slopes evenly from its summit and is

wooded to the steep cliffs fronting the sea. Rocher Varella, 5m

high, is conspicuous close S of the point. There is deep water

close off the point.

5.37 Hon Chut, 117m high, bare and rocky, lies 2.7 miles NNW

of Mui Da Vaich and is connected to the mainland by a

submerged ridge with depths of 3.7m in the fairway. An islet

and above-water rocks lie close SSE of Hon Chut. A light is

shown from the NE end of Hon Chut.

5.37 Hon Salacco (Hon Trung), 25m high, lies 0.3 mile NW of

Hon Chut. Basse Salacco, with a depth of 5.2m, lies 0.3 mile

NE of Hon Salacco.

5.37 Mui Ca Tien (Pointe de Ba Tien), lying 1.7 miles NW of Hon

Chut, is the E extremity of a peninsula joined to the mainland

by a narrow neck of land.

5.37 Hon Trung (Hon Mui) (11°49'N., 109°12'E.), 22m high, is

composed of dark, rock with its summit covered with brushwood, and lies 0.5 mile NE of Mui Ca Tien.

5.37 Grande Passe, the access channel to Vinh Cam Ranh, is

entered between Hon Trung and Dao Tagne, 1.5 miles NE. The

passage has depths of 20 to 25m in the fairway.

5.37 Mui Sopt (Mui Sop), 3.5 miles N of Hon Trung, is the N

extremity of a range of hills that separates the outer roadstead

from Vinh Cam Ranh. Rocher Doigt, a hill, 140m high, is

conspicuous nearly 0.5 mile S of Mui Sopt.

5.37 Hon Lo Ong Gia, a group of rocks, one of which is 8m high,

lies 1 mile S of Mui Sopt. There are other dangers near.

5.37 Le Goulet, the passage leading into Vinh Cam Ranh, lies

between Mui Sopt and Mui Hon Lan (Mui Hon Luong), 0.8

mile ENE. Mui Hon Lan is fairly steep-to, while Mui Sopt is

foul to a distance of 0.1 mile, and Le Goulet has depths in the

fairway of 22m. A radio tower, marked by red obstruction

lights, stands 1.2 miles NNE of Mui Hon Lan.

5.37 Baie de Binh Ba, on the E side of the outer roadstead, is

entered between Mui Nam, the NW extremity of Dao Tagne,

and Mui Hon Lan. Baie de Binh Ba has general depths of about

14 to 22m. 

Vinh Cam Ranh (11°53'N., 109°10'E.)

World Port Index No. 57610

5.38 Vinh Cam Ranh, on the coast of central Vietnam, is

easy to access and surrounded by mountains. The harbor opens

N and SW within Le Goulet. The village of Cam Lam (Cam

Ranh) lies on the W side of the bay, 3.5 miles WNW of Mui

Hon Lan.

5.38 Pointe Bai Sau lies on the E side of the bay, 1.8 miles N of

Mui Hon Lan. A sandbank, with depths of less than 1m and

steep-to on its W side, extends 0.8 mile W of the point.

5.38 Mui Con Ke projects from the NW shore of the bay, 2 miles

NNW of Pointe Bai Sau. Lagune de Thuy-Trieu, a shallow

lagoon, extends N of Mui Con Ke and is separated from the sea

by Plage de Thuy-Trieu, a narrow neck of land.

5.38 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Vinh Cam Ranh is

1.7m at MHHW. In Vinh Cam Ranh, at springs, the current

inside the bay and at the entrance is less than 1 knot.

5.38 Depths—Limitations.—There are depths of 9.2 to 18.3m

for a distance of 2 miles within the entrance. In the SW part of

the bay, depths of less than 5.5m extend 1.5 miles from the

shore. The NW shore, opposite Le Goulet, is bordered by

drying reef extending up to 0.5 mile offshore in places.

5.38 Rocher Da Nau, with a depth of 1.5m, lies 1 mile E of Cam

Lam. Banc de Da Bac, nearly awash and marked by a tower,

lies 1 mile S of Cam Lam.

5.38 A concrete tanker pier, 160m in length, with a depth of

12.8m alongside, lies 0.5 mile S of Pointe Bai Sau. The pier is

connected to the shore by a causeway, and a mooring dolphin is

situated close seaward of the pier. A pier close S can accommodate deep-draft vessels.

5.38 A channel dredged to 9.2m and marked by lights leads to

charted LST ramps and a basin situated 1 mile N of Pointe Bai

Sau.
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 111

Pub. 161

5.38 The T-head pier, at the outer end of the causeway S of Cam

Lam, has a 90m long face capable of berthing vessels up to

107m in length with a draft of 4.9m. 

5.38 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and should be arranged

well in advance. The pilot will board in position 11°48'30"N,

109°12'30"E during daylight hours.

5.38 Signals.—The Harbor Entrance Control Post (HECP), situated on top of a conspicuous white building on Mui Hon Lan,

may be contacted by radio or flashing light. Anchorage berths

are assigned by the post.

5.38 Storm signals are shown from Cam Lam, 0.9 mile NNE of

the head of the pier.

5.38 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor according to draft in Vinh

Cam Ranh or the approaches as directed by HECP.

Vin Cam Ranh to Baie de Phan Rang

5.39 Ilot Da Tai (Hon Long Doi) (11°43'N., 109°14'E.),

46m high, lies close offshore, 1 mile SW of Mui Da Vaich.

5.39 Baie de Vung Gang, entered 1 mile farther W, is difficult to

distinguish due to the high mountains near it. La Sentinelle, a

small island, lies close off the W shore of the bay, 0.5 mile N of

the S entrance point of the bay. A rock, above water, lies close

E of the latter entrance point. Three rocks above water lie close

N of La Sentinelle. The bay is divided into two basins N of the

latter rocks. A fishing village stands at the head of the bay, and

a number of fishing craft are found here in season.

5.39 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 14.6m, in the outer

basin, which provides good protection and is easy to access.

Heavy squalls occur at times, but the holding ground is good.

5.39 The coast between the S entrance point of Baie de Vung

Gang and Hon Chong, 8.5 miles SSW, slopes steeply inland

from the mountains and is fringed by reef. Bai Lua, 27m high,

lies midway along this stretch and close offshore.

5.39 Hon Chong, 27m high, is the outer of a group of islets extending 0.5 mile off the coast. Hon Do, a low peninsula, lies

1.3 miles SW.

5.40 Vung Phan Rang (Thon Ninh Chu) (Baie de Phan

Rang) (11°35'N., 109°02'E.) is entered between Hon Do and

the mouth of Song Kinh Dinh, 6 miles WSW. The river is not

navigable. Two mountains are located at the head of the bay;

Nui Quit, 356m high, rises 5 miles WNW of Hon Do, and Nui

Ca Du, 319m high, rises 3.2 miles farther WNW. 

5.40 Depths—Limitations.—Plateau de Corail, with a least

depth of 0.3m, extends 0.7 mile to 1.5 miles SW of Hon Do.

Banc du Chateaurenault, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies 3.2

miles WSW of Hon Do; a 5.5m patch lies 1 mile NE of the

bank. Banc du Haiphong, with a depth of 0.3m, lies 3.2 miles

WNW of Hon Do and 0.5 mile offshore.

5.40 There are depths of 7.5 to 14.6m in the entrance to the bay,

W of Banc du Chateaurenault. The general depths in the bay

are 7.5 to 9.2m.

5.40 Aspect.—A prominent church of Phan Rang stands 2 miles

WNW of the mouth of Song Kinh Dinh. A drying coral reef

extends 0.8 mile E from a point lying 0.7 mile N of the above

river mouth. The town of Ninh Chu lies 2.5 miles farther N.

5.40 Anchorage.—During the Northeast Monsoon, the best

anchorage is in a depth of 7m in the NE part of the bay.

Vung Phan Rang to Mui Vung Tau

5.41 The coast from Song Kinh Dinh to Mui Dinh

(11°22'N., 109°01'E.), 10.5 miles S, is backed by high land.

Nui Cha Bang, 437m high, is located 8 miles NW of Mui Dinh

at the N end of a range of mountains extending S. Nui Maviek,

354m high, is located 3.5 miles E of Nui Cha Bang and 1.2

miles from the coast.

5.41 Mui Dinh (Cap Padaran) is high, steep, and convex to

seaward. Nui De Ca, 614m high, is located 4 miles W of the

cape. The land near Mui Dinh appears isolated when viewed

from the N or SW.

5.41 Aspect.—A light is shown from the high part of the cape.

Vessels can communicate with the signal station on Mui Dinh

by means of the International Code of Signals.

5.41 Banc Nouvelle, with a depth of 6.1m, lies 2 miles N of Mui

Dinh and 1 mile offshore.

5.41 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, large vessels

can anchor, in a depth of 14.6m, off a small bay close N of Mui

Dinh, with the NE extremity of the cape bearing 157°. Bancs

du Lutin, with depths of 1.4 to 3.3m, lie close NNW of the anchorage.

5.42 High land extends along the coast from Mui Dinh to

Mui Sung Trau, 7 miles WSW.

5.42 Baie de Padaran is entered between Mui Sung Trau and

Pointe Lagan, 15 miles SW. The SW part of the bay is

encumbered by a bank with depths of less than 9m. Hon Lao,

40m high, lies 8 miles ENE of Pointe Lagan, on the E edge of

the above bank. A bank, with a depth of 4.3m at its outer end,

extends 1 mile W of the island.

5.42 Banc Ernest Simons, with a depth of 8.8m, lies 2 miles E of

Hon Lao.

5.42 Banc de Breda, with a least depth of 1.5m, coral, lies nearly

midway between Hon Lao and Mui Sung Trau.

5.42 Ca Na, a village situated 2.5 miles NW of Mui Sung Trau,

lies on the E side of the entrance to a lake. The village lies at

the S end of a gap between the mountains which is only prominent from SW. A power station, 1.5 miles ESE of the village,

can be recognized by a white building and a water tower.

5.42 Anchorage can be taken during the Northeast Monsoon, in

depths of 9 to 13m, sand, SW of the power station and 0.8 mile

offshore. A SE swell is developed in the bay during the Northeast Monsoon.

5.42 Pointe Lagan (11°10'N., 108°43'E.) is the extremity of a

narrow spit of land. A ledge, with depths of less than 5.5m,

extends 2.5 miles SW of the point.

5.43 Off-lying dangers.—The coastal bank, with depths

of less than 20m, sand and coral, extends 13 miles SSE from

Pointe Lagan. Banc de l’Althea, with a depth of 12.8m, lies 12

miles SSE of Pointe Lagan and is the outermost of several

dangerous shoal heads.

5.43 Banc Bourayne, with a depth of 8.8m, lies 2.5 miles NNW of

Banc de l’Althea. Banc Duchaffaut, with a depth of 8.8m, lies

3 miles farther NW.

5.43 The banks off Pointe Lagan are rocky, and there are bamboo

fish traps on or near them, sometimes in considerable depths.

There are also numerous wrecks in the area. Vessels should

give Pointe Lagan a berth of about 15 miles.
112 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

5.43 Banc de Torcy, with a least depth of 14m, lies 17 miles S of

Pointe Lagan.

5.43 Vung Phan Ri is entered between Pointe Lagan and Pointe

Guio, located 15.5 miles WSW. Hai Tan, a large village, lies 9

miles NNE of Pointe Guio at the mouth of Song Luy. The coast

between Pointe Guio and Hai Tan consists of cliffs of reddish

color, E of which the slopes of the hills are wooded.

5.43 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 7 to 9m, SW of the

mouth of Song Luy, with Pointe Lagan bearing 075°. During

the Northeast Monsoon, small vessels can find shelter, in a

depth of 6.4m, NW of Pointe Lagan.

5.43 Nui Binh Nhon, a 236m high sand hill standing 4 miles W of

Pointe Guio, can easily be recognized.

5.43 Mui Ne (Pointe Vinay) (10°55'N., 108°18'E.) is the

extremity of a low, wooded hill, steep on its S side at the S end

of a peninsula. Hon Lao, 25m high and covered with grass, lies

0.5 mile SE of the point. A tower is conspicuous on the W side

of the peninsula, 1 mile N of the point.

5.43 Caution.—Banc Rivier, with a depth of 12.8m, coral, and

Banc Madge, with a least depth of 12.8m, coral, lie about 18

miles SE and 15 miles S, respectively, of Mui Ne. Banc

Hollandais and other off-lying dangers have been previously

described in paragraph 5.3.

5.44 Vinh Phan Thiet (Vung Phan Thiet) occupies the bight

between Mui Ne and Mui Ke Ga, 22 miles SW. Depths in the

bay are irregular, and a bank with depths of less than 5.5m,

extends 1.5 miles W of Mui Ne. Fishing nets may be found at a

distance of 10 miles offshore abreast Ving Phan Thiet and Mui

Ne.

5.44 Mui Ke Ga (10°42'N., 108°00'E.) is the extremity of a low

tongue of land and the prolongation of a spur of Nui Ta Kou.

The latter mountain, 694m high, rising 9 miles NW of Mui Ke

Ga, is the most conspicuous of the mountains W of Vung Phan

Thiet, and stands detached from any other high land. Ilot Ke

Ga lies close S of the point. A light is shown from the islet.

5.44 Caution.—A mined area lies 1.5 miles S of Ilot Ke Ga; the

area is charted and extends approximately 10 miles N to S and

7 miles E to W. Another mined area lies 10 miles SW.

5.45 The town of Phan Thiet, an important fishing center,

lies 15 miles NNE of Mui Ke Ga, at the mouth of Song Cai.

The light structure, on the E side of the river entrance, is not

very visible among the trees. The best landmarks are a water

tower, with a red roof, and a tower marked by red obstruction

lights, 1 mile NNW and 2.2 miles W, respectively, of the light

structure.

5.45 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 7.9m, mud, with the

light structure at Phan Thiet bearing 314°, distant 2 miles.

5.45 During the Northeast Monsoon, anchorage can be taken, in a

depth of 6.4m, in the NE part of the bay, off Hai Long (Khan

Thien), keeping clear of the bank extending W of Mui Ne.

5.46 The coast between Mui Ke Ga and Mui Ba Kiem, 31

miles WSW, is low, and the coastal bank, with depths of less

11m, extends up to 6 miles offshore in places. A bank, with

depths of 4 to 5.5m, extends 2.5 miles WSW from a position

lying 2 miles WSW of Mui Ke Ga.

5.46 Hon Ba, a 38m high islet, is wooded and lies 11.5 miles

WSW of Mui Ke Ga and 1.3 miles offshore.

5.46 A spit, with a depth of 4m at its S extremity, extends 4.2

miles offshore from a position lying 3 miles WSW of Hon Ba.

5.46 Caution.—Banc de Britto, with a least depth of 0.9m, lies

near the outer edge of the 20m curve, 16 miles SW of Mui Ke

Ga. Vessels are advised not to pass between Banc de Britto and

the coast without local knowledge and, in adverse weather,

should not approach the bank in depths less than 29m. Bancs

de l’Astrolabe, farther S, and the shoals in the vicinity were

previously described in paragraph 5.5.

5.47 Mui Ba Kiem (10°30'N., 107°31'E.) is 119m high.

Nui Ho Linh, 162m high, lies 0.8 mile NW of the cape. A

chain of yellowish-white sand hills, 36 to 46m high, extends

along the coast between Mui Ba Kiem and Mui Ho Tram,

located 4.5 miles WSW; the hills lie a short distance inland, 1

to 3 miles NE of Mui Ho Tram.

5.47 Caution.—Rocher Rosslyn, with a depth of 0.6m, lies 6.2

miles SSE of Mui Ba Kiem.

5.47 Haut Fonds de Ba Ke, a number of isolated patches, with

depths of 4 to 9.2m, extend 7 miles SSE of Mui Ho Tram.

These shoals are separated from each other by depths of 11 to

12m, causing overfalls. Detached shoals, with depths of 10.1m

and 7.3m, lie 8 and 11 miles S, respectively, of Mui Ho Tram.

5.47 During restricted visibility vessels should pass the above

dangers in depths of 22m or more.

5.48 Su Tu Den Terminal (10°25.4'N., 108°23.7'E.)

consists of the FPSO Cuu Long MV9 and is operated by

Cuulong Joint Operating Company. Pilotage is compulsory; the

Mooring Master boards in position 10°21.2'N, 108°23.4'E. If

the weather is bad, the pilot will board 4 miles S of Mui Vung

Tau. Berthing is done in daylight only, while unberthing is

done 24 hours.

Vessels should request pilotage and give their ETA 72 hours,

48 hours, 24 hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival.

Mui Ky Van (10°23'N., 107°16'E.), 12 miles WSW of Mui

Ho Tram, rises to several peaks, the highest of which is Nui

Chau Vien, 327m high, located 2 miles N of the cape. A

conspicuous red building stands near the shore, 2 miles NE of

Mui Ky Van.

5.48 Rocher Pernambuco, with a depth of 5.2m, lies 2 miles SE of

Mui Ky Van. The depths in the vicinity are irregular, with

several shoal patches nearby; the shallowest and outermost,

with a depth of 5.2m, lies 3.2 miles SSE of Mui Ky Van.

5.48 Between Mui Ky Van and Mui Vung Tau, 11 miles WSW,

there is a shallow bay, the shores of which are low and backed

by sand hills.

Song Sai Gon

5.49 The delta of Song Sai Gon lies in a bay entered

between Mui Vung Tau (10°19'N., 107°05'E.) and Pointe du

Mirador, the NE entrance point of Cua Tieu, 20 miles WSW.

The delta is composed of numerous islands, separated by rivers

or canals which are connected with each other. The delta

provides access to the important port of Sai Gon (Than Pho Ho

Chi Minh), situated 35 miles NW of Mui Vung Tau.

5.49 Song Sai Gon has its source 80 miles NW of Mui Vung Tau

and pursues a winding course as far as Sai Gon. About 4 miles
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 113

Pub. 161

SE of Sai Gon, the river is joined by Song Dong Nai. At Pointe

Phami, 5 miles below this junction, the river divides into two

branches. The E branch, consisting of Song Long Tao and

Song Nha Be, flows through the middle of the delta and enters

Vung Ganh Rai, 9 miles NW of Mui Vung Tau. This branch is

the principal access to Sai Gon, being the deepest and best

marked, and ascends for a distance of 46 miles from Mui Vung

Tau to Sai Gon. The W branch, consisting of Song Nha Be and

Cua Soirap, is entered 12 miles WNW of Mui Vung Tau. Banc

du Soirap, with a least depth of 1.2m, extends 12 miles SE

from the E entrance point of Cua Soirap.

Mui Vung Tau and Approaches

5.50 Mui Vung Tau is the S extremity of an island which

has three steep hills on its W side. These hills are the first high

land seen when approaching from SW and appear as islands at

a distance. Nui Nho, 182m high, the S of the three hills, lies

nearly 1 mile NNW of Mui Vung Tau. The highest hill, 245m

high, lies 1.5 miles farther NNW. Nui Dinh, 491m high, the S

peak of a group of mountains, lies 13.5 miles NNE of Mui

Vung Tau. Mui Ky Van, 11 miles ESE of Mui Vung Tau, was

previously described in paragraph 5.44.

5.50 A light is shown from the summit of Mui Vung Tau and a

racon transmits from the tower; a signal station is situated near

the light.

5.50 The climate at Mui Vung Tau is tropical and there is heavy

rainfall from May to October.

Dangers in the Approach

5.51 In adverse weather the banks in the S approach to Mui

Vung Tau should be cleared with close regard to the soundings.

Approaching from NE, Britto Bank (10°29'N., 107°50'E.) and

other dangers off the coast should be given a wide berth. A

dangerous wreck lies on the E side of the bank. Additionally,

there are dangerous wrecks lying 4 miles NE and 10 miles E of

Britto Bank.

5.51 Banc du Cap has a least depth of 7.6m and lies 2.2 miles SE

of Mui Vung Tau. A detached shoal, with a depth of 7m, lies 3

miles SE of Mui Vung Tau.

5.51 Banc du Requin, farther E, has least depths of 6.4 and 5.8m

lying 5.5 and 6 miles ESE, respectively, of Mui Vung Tau.

5.51 Banc Formosa, 1 mile ESE of Mui Vung Tau, has a least

depth of 4.4m in its W part, and a rock, with a depth of 1.5m,

lies 2 miles ESE of the cape.

5.51 Banc Ranza, with a least depth of 5.8m and extending in a

WNW-ESE direction, is centered 0.7 mile W of Mui Vung Tau.

A considerable number of wrecks and obstructions, some of

which are marked by buoys, lie near the bank and in the access

to the E branch of the river.

5.51 Ilot Archinard, 15m high, lies 0.4 mile NE of Mui Vung Tau,

on the outer edge of a reef extending 0.2 mile offshore and

another islet lies 0.2 mile SW of Ilot Archinard. There is a

rock, with a depth of 6.4m, lying 0.3 mile SE of Mui Vung Tau.

5.51 On the W side of the approach, Bancs de Can Gio, which dry

0.3 to 2.4m, extend nearly 2 miles offshore between Mui Dong

Tranh (10°20'N., 106°53'E.), located 10 miles NE of Pointe du

Mirador, and Mui Ganh Rai (Pointe Can Gio), lying 6.5 miles

farther ENE.

5.51 Banc du Sud-Ouest, with depths of less than 9.1m, extends

farther SE, between Banc du Soirap and a position lying 1.5

miles SW of Mui Vung Tau.

5.51 Banc du Phare, with depths of 0.8 to 1.9m on its E edge, lies

on the W side of the access to Vung Ganh Rai. The bank is

separated from Mui Do Cao Trang, located 2.5 miles NNW of

Mui Vung Tau, by a deep channel 1.2 miles wide.

5.51 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Mui Vung Tau is 3.5m

at MHHW and 3.3m at MLHW.

5.51 At Mui Vung Tau the flood current begins shortly after LW

and the ebb shortly after HW.

5.51 At Sai Gon the flood current begins about 4 hours 45

minutes after LW at Mui Vung Tau; the ebb current begins 4

hours 15 minutes after HW at Mui Vung Tau. The duration of

slack water is about 20 minutes. The flood current attains its

maximum velocity quickly, the ebb current slowly.

5.51 The current attains velocities of 1 knot to 3.5 knots. The

local pilots anticipate a velocity of 1 knot for every meter of

tidal range. According to the pilots, if the range of tide is less

than 0.9m, there is no flood current for that flood tide.

5.51 The duration and velocities of the tidal currents are greatly

influenced by the rainy season (August through September)

and the flood current is often completely negated, so that the

ebb flows continuously.

5.52 Off Pointe du Lombard (10°36'N., 106°52'E.) violent crosscurrents and undertows are experienced.

5.52 During the Northeast Monsoon, a vessel may be set leeward

of Mui Vung Tau toward Bancs de Can Gio by the prevailing

current, accelerated by the flood tidal current. During the ebb,

however, the current is at times overcome and there may be a

NE set. During the flood tide the current sets W over Banc

Formosa. Westward of the bank it sets more N into Vung Ganh

Rai. On the ebb tide it sets in a S direction out of the bay and E

over Banc Formosa. Slack water occurs about 1 hour after high

and low waters at Mui Vung Tau, and the currents attain

velocities of about 2 knots; this velocity is maintained for the

middle 2 hours of the rising and falling tides.

5.52 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot station is

situated at Baie des Cocotiers (Vung Dua). Request for a pilot

should be made by radio or VHF at least 24 hours in advance,

stating the draft and any possibly dangerous material. The pilot

boards 2.5 miles NW of Mui Vung Tau. The customs official

usually boards with the pilot.

5.52 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 10 to

20m, off the high land NNW of Mui Vung Tau, on either side

of the entrance channel. The anchorage is excellent during the

Northeast Monsoon, but there is often considerable swell

during the Southwest Monsoon.

5.52 Vessels in quarantine anchor at Nha Be.

5.52 Anchorage is prohibited, except in case of emergency, within

1 mile of either side of the sharp bends of the river, or in the

vicinity of the channel through Banc du Corail.

5.52 It has been reported (1989) that vessels anchoring S of

10°19'N will be asked to proceed closer to Xa Vung Tau in

order to be boarded and cleared by the authorities.

Main Channel

5.53 The entrance to the E and main branch to Sai Gon lies
114 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

between Mui Ganh Rai (10°25'N., 106°59'E.) and the S

extremity of Cu Lao Phu Loi, 2 miles NNW. The bar leading

into Song Nga Bay lies NE of Mui Ganh Rai and has depths of

7.2m on the recommended track to abreast Mui Ganh Rai. The

entrance channel is buoyed. It has been reported that buoys

may not be in their charted positions and they may no longer

exhibit lights.

5.53 There are least depths of 6.4m on either side of the recommended track, with the exception of a 5.5m shoal, about 1 mile

NNE of Mui Ganh Rai, close S of the recommended track.

5.53 The channel narrows toward the NW part at the river

entrance. Within the bar the depths increase and then there are

generally ample depths upriver. The shallowest depths are

found on the point side of the bends in most cases. There is

adequate room in most reaches of the river for vessels to pass

each other.

5.53 A bank, with depths of 4.2 and 5.5m at its E edge, extends

halfway across the river, abreast Rach Don (10°34'N.,

106°50'E.), on the W side of the river.

5.53 Banc du Propontis (10°35'N., 106°52'E.), with a depth of

5.2m at its W edge, extends halfway across the river from the E

bank. About 0.5 mile farther N, a bank with depths of 4.5m at

its E edge, extends halfway across the river opposite Rach Tac

Roi.

5.53 Banc de Corail, which extends across the river, lies with its S

end lying 0.5 mile NNW of Pointe du Lombard (10°36'N.,

106°52'E.), and its N end in the concave side of the bend, 1

mile farther NNW. The least charted depth in the channel

through the bank is 5.4m near its S end, although it was

reported (1995) that lesser depths may exist, particularly in this

vicinity. Shoal depths are reportedly encroaching toward the

center of the channel from both sides of the river (1995). 

5.53 Song Long Tao enters Song Nha Be N of Pointe Phami

(10°40'N., 106°47'E.). A spit, with a depth of 4.9m at its extremity, extends 0.2 mile NW of the point. Anchorage is prohibited in the area NW of Pointe Phami.

5.54 Nha Be (10°41'N., 106°47'E.) is a subport of Sai Gon

and the commercial oil depot for Than Pho Ho Chi Minh, lying

on the W bank of Song Nha Be, 4 miles NW of the city. 

5.54 Tides—Currents.—Vessels proceeding to Nha Be normally

cross Banc du Corail at HW, turn opposite the jetty on the flood

tide and berth starboard side-to. Vessels crossing Banc du

Corail later than 1 hour after HW have to berth on the ebb tide.

Vessels berthing on a flood tide must also unberth on a flood

tide. Vessels which berth on an ebb tide may only un-berth on

either the first or last hour of the ebb tide.

5.54 Depths—Limitations.—There are jetties equipped with

mooring buoys with depths alongside of 8.2, 9.2, and 9.4m,

respectively. There are two wharves with a combined berthing

length of 380m and alongside depths of 10 to 13m. Vessels of

up to 30,000 dwt can be accommodated.

5.54 There are several mooring buoys inside the 10m curve

between Pointe du Lazaret and Nha Be.

5.54 Banc de la Ville de Paris and a bank close SE, each with

depths of less than 5.5m, extend 0.4 and 0.3 mile, respectively,

off the E bank of Song Nha Be, opposite the port of Nha Be.

5.54 From N of Banc de la Ville de Paris to Mui Den Do (Pointe

du Feu Rouge) (10°44'N., 106°46'E.), a bank with depths of

less than 5.5m, extends off the E bank of Song Nha Be, as far

as the middle of the river. A dangerous wreck, marked by

buoys close NE and SW of it, lies 0.9 mile SW of Mui Den Do.

5.54 Mui Ky Ha (Pointe de Binh Loi), 0.4 mile NNE of Mui Den

Do, is the N entrance point of Song Dong Nai. Banc de

Caobang, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends 0.7 mile SSE

of Mui Ky Ha. Xom Cat Lai lies 2.5 miles ENE of the point.

5.54 Song Sai Gon, entered N of Mui Den Do, extends W and

winds irregularly for about 5 miles to the mouth of Kinh Te, the

S limit of the port of Sai Gon .

5.54 Pointe du Rach Bao lies on the N side of the river, 0.8 mile

W of Mui Den Do. Banc du Chargeur, with a depth of 4.9m at

its outer edge, extends 150m W of Pointe du Rach Bao. Banc

du Gange, with a depth of 4.9m at its E edge, extends nearby to

mid-river from the W bank, just N of Banc du Chargeur.

5.54 Above these dangers the channel is clear except for the fringing banks and several stranded wrecks on the N bank of the

river.

5.54 Caution—An overhead cable, with an estimated vertical

clearance of 40m, spans the river about 0.3 mile E of the mouth

of Kinh Te.

5.55 West Channel.—Cua Soirap is an alternate channel

and can be used at any stage of the tide by vessels with a

maximum draft of 6.7m. The channel entrance, common to

Cua Soirap and Cua Tieu, is buoyed. 

5.55 The bar obstructing the channel to Cua Soirap is covered

with fishing stakes. The fairway over the bar is marked by

buoys which are moved as necessary and requires local knowledge. 

5.55 Abreast the entrance of Song Vam Co (10°29'N., 106°44'E.)

there is a shelf, with depths of 4.6m, encumbered by rocks and

fishing stakes.

Sai Gon (Than Pho Ho Chi Min) (Saigon) 

(10°46'N., 106°43'E.)

World Port Index No. 57580

5.56 The port of Sai Gon (Saigon) lies on the W bank of

Song Sai Gon and is the port for Thanh Pho Ho Chi Minh. The

port extends from the mouth of Kinh Te, the S limit of the port,

to the mouth of Rach Ben Nghe, 1 mile NW, then to the mouth

of Rach Cau Bong, 1 mile farther NNE. 

5.56 The Port de Commerce, the commercial part, lies in the S

part of the harbor, and the navy yard occupies the N part. The

N limit of the Port de Commerce is abreast the Statue of

General Tra Hung Dau, standing 0.4 mile N of the mouth of

Rach Ben Nghe. 

5.56 The harbor offices and custom house are situated on the N

side of the entrance to Rach Ben Nghe.

5.56 The Port of Nha Be, the oil port of Sai Gon, is situated about

10 miles below the port, and was previously described in

paragraph 5.50.

5.56 The military port of Newport lies close E of the navy yard

Tides—Currents

5.56 The tidal rise at Sai Gon is 3.7m at MHHW and 3.2m at

MLHW.

5.56 The tidal currents at Sai Gon can attain velocities of 4 knots.
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 115

Pub. 161

Off the E bank, the current turns 20 minutes before it occurs in

mid-river. See also tides and tidal currents at Mui Vung Tau.

Depths—Limitations

5.56 Vessels of up to 220m in length and 11m draft can transit the

main channel between 0400 and 1600. Vessels must arrive in

Sai Gon at least 1 hour before the end of the flood in order to

swing at anchor before mooring.

5.56 The maximum draft of a vessel transiting the main channel

to Sai Gon is limited to the depth in the channel through Banc

du Corail. Vessels with less than 6m draft can cross the bank at

any hour of the tide. In order to arrive at Than Pho Ho Chi

Minh at the beginning of the flood, a vessel must be at Mui

Vung Tau at the beginning of the flood there. 

5.56 The least depth in Port de Commerce is 8.2m, on Banc du

Canton, nearly in mid-river, off the mouth of Rach Ben Nghe.

With this exception, the depths in the fairway are 9.8m or

more. 

5.56 Off the navy yard there are obstructions, with depths of 1.8

to 4.9m, about 0.4 mile SW of the mouth of Rach Cau Bong.

5.56 Quay Kanh-Hoi, 249m long, has 11 berths and is situated on

the SW side of the river, close upriver of the mouth of Kinh Te,

and has depths of 5.5 to 10.3m alongside. The quay at Nha

Rong is 488m long and has depths of 6 tp 9m alongside. Tan

Thuan is 343m long with alongside depths of 9.6 to 12.1m. Tan

Thuan II Terminal has two berths: Phu My is 230m long with

an alongside depth 0-of 14m; TT2 is 222m long with an

alongside depth of 10.5m.

5.56 There are container and ro-ro facilities at the K-12 berths in

depths of 12m. Ore and bulk cargo can be handled at quay K9

which is 100m long and has an alongside depth of 9.5m.

5.56 The Vitaico Terminal, which handles wood products, is

126m long, has an alongside depth of 8.7m, and can accommodate vessels of up to 16,000 dwt.

5.56 Ben Nghe is 519m long and has depths of 9.5 to 13m. There

are five mooring buoys providing berths with lengths of 160 to

200m in depths of 7 to 10m.

5.56 The quay at New Port is 618m long and has alongside depths

of 7.5 to 9.5m.

5.56 There is a passenger terminal with two quays. Quay MM1 is

138m long and has an alongside depth of 9m. Quay MM2 is

147m long and has a depth alongside of 6m.

5.56 There are 20 mooring berths in the harbor. Vessels are, as a

rule, moored head and stern between buoys, with bows downstream. The buoys provide berths 50 to 200m long in depths of

7 to 13.3m.

5.56 Rach Ben Nghe, which connects Thanh Pho Ho Chi Minh

with the river port of Cho Lon close SW, has a least depth of

0.9m and is crossed by three bridges. 

5.56 Vessels can swing at anchor in only two areas; one is near the

mouth of Rach Ben Nghe, and the other is N of Port de Guerre,

above the navy yard. At the latter point, on the S bank, nearly

0.5 mile E of Rach Cau Bong, vessels place their bows on the

bank between two beacons and let the tidal current swing them.

Pilotage

5.56 Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board in position 10°20'N,

107°03'E. 

Regulations

5.56 Vessels, as a general rule, are permitted to shift berth during

daylight hours only, as prescribed by the port authorities. A 6

hour notice is necessary.

Signals

5.56 There is a coast radio station and a port radio station at

Thanh Pho Ho Chi Minh.

5.56 Storm signals are shown from a station situated in position

10°46'N, 106°42'E.

5.56 At Nha Be, a vessel should display its national flag and

number. Vessels can display flag N of the International Code to

obtain a motorboat which will take a message to be transmitted

by telephone to Sai Gon. Vessels can also use the International

Code.

Anchorage

5.56 Anchorage is prohibited within the harbor limits. Vessels

must anchor below the mooring berths and out of the fairway. 

5.56 Vessels in quarantine or carrying explosives are instructed to

anchor at Nha Be.

Sai Gon
116 Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 

Pub. 161

The Mekong River

5.57 The Mekong River, one of the world’s great rivers, is

2,800 miles long and has its source in the mountains of Tibet. It

flows through China, Burma, Laos, and Cambodia before

reaching its delta in Vietnam. For the greater part of its length

it runs through steep gorges and over dangerous rapids. At

Kracheh, in central Cambodia, 105 miles above Phnom Penh, it

becomes a wide slow-flowing river suitable for navigation by

ocean-going vessels.

5.57 At Phnom Penh (11°36'N., 104°54'E.), the Mekong River

divides into two principal arms, flowing nearly parallel to each

other through Vietnam to the South China Sea. The E arm, and

principal waterway used by ocean-going vessels, is known as

Song Tien Giang, and the W arm is known as Song Hau Giang

or Bassac.

5.57 At Phnom Penh, the Mekong River is joined by a river

extending NW, which connects with Tonle Sap, a lake about 80

miles long.

5.57 Depths over the bars at its entrances are the controlling

factor in the navigation of the Mekong River. There are depths

of 2.1 to 3m over the bars of the principal mouths of the river.

The river depths generally increase within the bars, but local

knowledge is necessary.

5.57 The land in the vicinity of the mouths is low and subject to

frequent change due to the accumulation of alluvial deposits

brought down by the different branches of the river.

5.57 Tides—Currents.—The water level in the river is low from

February to June, the lowest levels occurring in April and May,

and high from July to December, the highest levels occurring

from August to October. When the river is low, the current is

influenced by the tidal current as far as Phnom Penh; when the

river is high, the effect of the tidal current is felt to about Sadec

(10°18'N., 105°45'E.). At and above Vinh Long (10°15'N.,

105°58'E.) the direction is continuously seaward.

5.57 Tidal currents in the river mouths attain velocities of 3 to 4

knots during the high river season on the ebb current. In the

low river season it may attain velocities of 1.5 to 2 knots with

large tides.

5.57 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in the Mekong River; it is

compulsory from Mui Vung Tau to the Cambodian border.

Pilots board and disembark in Baie des Cocotiers, NW of Mui

Vung Tau.

5.57 Vessels bound for Phnom Penh should send, 48 hours in

advance, their ETA at Mui Vung Tau to Mekong Pilotage Sai

Gon, and their ETA at Phnom Penh to the Port Captain Phnom

Penh through Sai Gon coast radio station.

5.57 Cambodia and Vietnam each maintain a pilot station in their

respective territories near the border on the Mekong River. The

Cambodian station is at Kaam Samna Kraom (10°56'N.,

105°11'E.), and the Vietnamese station is at Tan Chau

(10°48'N., 105°15'E.). 

5.57 Vessels subject to pilotage are piloted by Cambodian pilots

between the Vietnam border and Phnom Penh.

5.57 Regulations.—Vessels in the Vietnamese part of the Mekong River are only permitted to be underway from sunrise to

sunset, except in unfavorable circumstances of the tide.

5.57 Vessels waiting overnight for the tide are only permitted to

anchor at My Tho (10°21'N., 106°22'E.) or at certain points

indicated by the pilot.

5.57 Vessels proceeding to Phnom Penh and requiring the services of a pilot must first obtain permission from the Cambodian authorities.

Song Tien Giang

5.58 Song Tien Giang, the E and principal waterway of the

Mekong River, enters the sea through six main mouths. Cua

Tieu, the N mouth and principal entrance, is entered between

the NE extremity of Cu Lao Loi Quan and Pointe du Mirador

(10°16'N., 106°45'E.).

5.58 Banks, with depths of less than 5.5m, extend up to 13 miles

off the entrance of Cua Tieu; breakers generally mark the edges

of the banks. Fish nets and large, isolated fish stakes, invisible

at night, constitute a danger to navigation, especially near

Pointe de Mirador.

5.58 Banc Norodom dries to a distance of 5 miles ESE of Pointe

de Mirador. A light is shown from the S side of the bank, about

2.7 miles ESE of the point.

5.58 Depths—Limitations.—There are depths of 2.1m over the

bar of Cua Tieu, which extends 11 miles from the entrance, and

vessels without local knowledge should not cross it.

5.58 The allowable draft of a vessel proceeding to Phnom Penh

depends on the depth of water on the bar at Cua Tieu plus the

tide at Mui Vung Tau. There are also bars at distances of 70,

78, and 120 miles above the entrance, but these, although

possibly affecting the times of anchoring, do not necessarily

diminish the practicability of the passage.

5.58 Vessels should arrive at the entrance of the bar at such time

as to be able to cross with an underkeel clearance of 1.2m, and

proceed up the river on the flood.

5.58 The allowable drafts vary from 4.4m in April to 5.5m in

August through November.

5.58 Speed is limited to 10 knots in the entrance.

5.58 The seaward entrance to the channel, and the channel itself,

are buoyed.

5.58 Caution.—There are many fishing stakes in Song Tien

Giang, but these are generally well lit at night with the end

stake normally being marked by a red light.

5.58 The passage is not as difficult as it may appear; the river is

wide and there are few sharp turns. The bottom consists of soft

mud and if a vessel goes aground serious damage is unlikely.

5.58 Vessels should be cautious of the high density of river craft,

which in general, do not observe the regulations.

5.59 Phnom Penh (11°36'N., 104°54'E.), 178 miles above

Cua Tieu, is the capital of Cambodia. The limiting draft for a

vessel proceeding to Phnom Penh is dependent upon the draft

of a vessel able to cross the bar at Cua Tieu.

5.59 The height of the river at Phnom Penh has a tidal range of of

9.2m from LW to HW. The current at Phnom Penh flows

seaward, attaining a maximum velocity of 3.8 knots.

5.59 The port consists of a commercial harbor and a naval harbor.

Pontoon Wharves Nos. 1 and 3, each 58m long, and Pontoon

Wharf No. 2, in the commercial harbor, can accommodate vessels up to 2,000 tons. A wharf, 200m in length, two T-headed

quays, and a wharf, 60m in length, have least depths of 5m

alongside. Additional pontoons allow the berthing of vessels

up to 100m in length.

5.59 Shell POL Pier, a T-head pier, with a berthing length of 76m,
Sector 5. Vietnam—Central and South Coasts 117

Pub. 161

can accommodate vessels of 5,200 dwt, with drafts of 3.3 to

5m.

Song Hau Giang

5.60 Song Hau Giang (Bassac), the W arm of the Mekong

River, is used mainly by vessels bound for Can Tho, Long

Xuyen, and Chau Doc (Chau Phu). It has two mouths, Cua

Dinh An and Cua Tran De, which are fronted by shallow banks

extending 10 miles offshore.

5.60 Cua Dinh An, the entrance most used, is fronted by a bank

which dries in parts. North of the bank there is another bank,

which also dries in parts, and on which there is a stranded

wreck.

5.60 The entrance channel to Cua Dinh An, which is buoyed,

leads past Pointe de Long Kanh, the NE point of the river

mouth. Caution should be exercised when approaching the

entrance channel, due to the drying bank mentioned above, the

lack of prominent landmarks, and the reported unreliability of

the buoyage in the channel.

5.61 Can Tho (10°02'N., 105°47'E.) is situated 50 miles

above the entrance to Cua Dinh An. The port handles gasoline,

fertilizers, chemicals, cement, and rice.

5.61 Depths—Limitations.—There are two quays, with a total

berthing length of 142m and depths of 9m. Vessels of up to

18,800 dwt, 140m in length, and a draft of 7m can be accommodated.

5.61 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards in position 9°29'N, 106°31'E.. Pilotage must be requested by VHF 24

hours in advance of arrival through Can Tho Port Authority.

The harbormaster will advise the vessel of an alternate boarding station in the event of poor weather conditions. Pilotage is

available during daylight hours only.

5.61 Anchorage.—Vessels awaiting a pilot may anchor in the

vicinity of the pilot boarding position, in a depth of 12m. A

dangerous wreck lies approximately 1.7 miles SE of this

boarding area. 

The Mekong River to Mui Bai Bung

5.62 The coast of Vietnam, off the mouths of the Mekong

River and then to Mui Bai Bung (8°37'N., 104°43'E.), is low,

and at times inundated by the sea. In most parts the tops of the

trees are only just visible at a distance of 11 or 12 miles. The

coastal bank, with depths of 1.8 to 5.5m, borders this entire

coast, extending up to 13 miles off the Mekong Delta. Off the

delta, the depths seaward of the coastal bank increase abruptly

to 11m, then to 18m.

5.62 Vessels bound for Mui Vung Tau from the W or SW are recommended to give Hon Khoai a wide berth, then pass E or W

of the Con Son Islands, previously described in paragraph 5.6,

and continue to navigate toward Mui Vung Tau, keeping well

seaward of the coast. Many vessels have grounded on the banks

off the Mekong delta due to the absence of landmarks and the

rapid decrease in depths. If it becomes necessary to approach

this coast, a vessel should not proceed in depths of less than

20m, especially during the Northeast Monsoon, when there is a

strong current which sets onto the banks.

5.62 The mouth of Song Ganh Hao (9°00'N., 105°25'E.) is obstructed by a bar which dries at very low tides. Mooring buoys

have been established 6 miles SE of the river mouth. Junks

ascend Song Ganh Hao as far as Quan Long (Ca Mau), 20

miles NW of the mouth, and can reach the Gulf of Thailand

through inland waterways during the Southwest Monsoon.

5.62 Cua Bo De, 20 miles SE of the mouth of Song Ganh Hao, is

the mouth of a small river that runs across the peninsula and

connects with the Gulf of Thailand. Bouys, lighted buoys, and

a directional light lead into Cua Bo De.

5.63 Hon Khoai (8°26'N., 104°50'E.), 12 miles SE of Mui

Bai Bung, the SW extremity of Vietnam, is 318m high at its S

end and densely wooded. A light is shown from the E side of

the summit.

5.63 Hon Sao, 175m high and wooded, lies 1 mile E of the S end

of Hon Khoai. Rocher Hull, 10 m high, lies 2.5 miles SE of

Hon Sao; a rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies close SW

of Rocher Hull. In 1971, Rocher Hull was reported to lie 0.4

mile SSE of its charted position.

5.63 A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m and about 1 mile wide,

extends E, then ENE, to a position lying 32 miles ENE of Hon

Khoai.

5.63 Caution.—Banc du Royalist, with a depth of 11m, lies 26

miles SE of Hon Khoai. Another bank, with a depth of 11m,

lies 20 miles ENE of Royalist Bank.

5.63 St. Marcouf, a bank with a depth of 6.7m, lies 32 miles E of

Hon Khoai.
119

Pub. 161

6. 

The Gulf of Thailand (Coasts of Cambodia and Thailand) and 

Malaysia—East Coast

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
121

Pub. 161

SECTOR 6 

THE GULF OF THAILAND (COASTS OF CAMBODIA AND THAILAND) AND MALAYSIA—

EAST COAST

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Gulf of Thailand and the E

coast of Malaysia, and includes the port of Bangkok (Krung

Thep). The E and N shores of the Gulf of Thailand to Bangkok

are first described. The W coast of the Gulf of Thailand and the

E coast of Malaysia to Tanjung Penawar (1°31'N., 104°17'E.)

are then described. The arrangement of the sector is N, NW, S,

and then SE. 

General Remarks

6.1 The Gulf of Thailand is one of the major coastal indentations of Southeast Asia. The gulf extends NW about 400

miles from its entrance to its head. The entrance is 205 miles

wide between Mui Bai Bung, the SW extremity of Vietnam,

and Sungai Kelantan (6°13'N., 102°14'E.), on the E coast of

Malaysia.

6.1 The NE shore of the gulf is more indented and irregular than

the W shore and the islets and dangers lie farther offshore.

6.1 The NW and W shores of the gulf are backed by coastal

ranges that extend to the coast in places. This coast is

composed of sandy beaches interspersed by ridges and rocky

points. The hinterland consists of dense forests with numerous

streams.

6.1 Most of the ports are small coastal trading centers. Bangkok,

at the head of the gulf, and Chuk Samet Harbor, on the SE side

of Ao Sattahip, are the only major ports.

6.1 The E coast of Malaysia between Sungai Kelantan and

Tanjung Penawar, 310 miles SSE, is characterized by low

swampy areas with numerous rivers discharging into the sea.

Coastal ridges and hills extend to the coast at isolated points. In

general, the off-lying islands are quite high and wooded. They

provide good landmarks for coastal navigation.

6.1 Caution.—Several areas of the Gulf of Thailand, which are

best seen on the appropriate chart, contain oil and gas fields

with a network of pipelines. Lighted and unlighted structures,

both above and below water are associated with these fields,

and pose a danger to navigation. Specialized offshore tanker

berths, complete with production platforms and storage barges

are present, and will be described. Several pipelines, carrying

petroleum and natural gas are laid on the sea bed of the gulf,

and are best seen on the appropriate charts. However, not all

the features are charted and vessels navigating in the vicinity

are required to exercise special caution. Flares at structures

may be seen from distances exceeding 20 miles.

6.1 Mariners risk prosecution by anchoring or trawling near a

pipeline and damaging it. Gas from a damaged pipeline can

cause a fire, or loss of a vessel’s buoyancy.

6.1 Several areas containing production fields have been

designated as restricted areas, and vessels not associated with

them are advised to avoid the areas by as wide a margin as

practicable.

The Gulf of Thailand—East and North Shores

6.2 Mui Bai Bung (8°37'N., 104°43'E.), the NE entrance

point of the Gulf of Thailand, is low and wooded. Hon Khoai

and the dangers SE have been described in paragraph 5.59. The

point is fronted by a coastal bank, with depths of less than 11m,

extending 7 miles SW and 8.5 miles W, respectively, from the

point. The coastal bank shoals sharply, and has depths of less

than 1.8m close within its W edge. Depths of less than 14.6m

extend up to 13 miles SW of the point.

6.2 A rock, uncovering 1.2m, lies 14 miles SW of Mui Bai

Bung.

6.2 Hon Khoai is the primary landfall for vessels entering the

Gulf of Thailand.

6.2 Caution.—An extensive unexamined bank, with depths of

14.6 to 18.3m, lies with its center lying 70 miles WSW of Mui

Bai Bung.

6.2 Hon Chuoi, 150m high and wooded, is located 22 miles

NNW of Mui Bai Bung; it is cliffy, steep-to, and appears as

two islands from S. Hon Buong, 50m high, with a small islet

off its E side, lies 4 miles SSE of Hon Chuoi. A rocky ledge

extends 0.3 mile E of the islet.

Mui Bai Bung to Chrouy Samit—Off-lying Islands and Dangers

6.3 The islands and dangers described below lie up to 81

miles off the coast and outside the 20m curve between Mui Bai

Bung and Chrouy Samit (Pointe Samit) (10°52'N., 103°07'E.),

166 miles NW.

6.3 Hon Panjang (Hon Tho Chau) (9°18'N., 103°29'E.), flattopped and 167m high, lies 84 miles NW of Mui Bai Bung.

The island has the appearance of a tableland. Two islets, the

outer islet being 45m high, lie on a coral bank extending 2

miles ENE of the island. Rocher Blanc (Hon Da Bac), 23m

high, lies 2 miles S of the SW end of the island. A reef, consisting of two rocky heads, with a depth of 1.2m, lies 1.2 miles

ENE of Hon Da Bac.

6.3 Anchorage.—A bay on the W side of the island offers good

anchorage and shelter, in a depth of 29m, sand and coral. A

rock, 0.6m high, with sunken rocks close E and W, lies 0.5 mile

SW of the N entrance point of the bay.

6.3 Caution.—It has been reported (1998) that Hon Panjang and

its associated islets may lie 1.3 miles E of their charted positions.

6.4 Hon Da Ban, 34m high, and Rocher Table, 12m high

and 0.3 mile SE, lie 8.5 miles ENE of Hon Panjang.

6.4 Dewagougee Shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, was reported to lie

17 miles NNW of Hon Panjang. A shoal, with a depth of 7.3m,

was reported (1961) to lie 3 miles NW of Dewagougee Shoal.
122 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

6.4 Poulo Wai consists of two wooded islets, separated by a

channel 0.7 mile wide, with depths of 18.3m in the fairway.

The W island is 91m high at its SE end. A light is shown from

the E end of the W island. The E island is 61m high, and

Rocher Saracen, awash, lies 0.8 mile NNW of the island. A

rock, 0.9m high, with sunken rocks close E and W, lies 0.7 mile

E of the E island. A patch, with a depth of 8.2m, lies 2 miles S

of the latter rock, and an 8.5m shoal was reported to lie 7.5

miles E of Poulo Wai.

6.4 Recif Depond, which dries 0.6m, lies 12 miles ENE of Poulo

Wai.

6.4 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be found off the N side

of the E island of Poulo Wai, but the best berth is in a depth of

14.6m, off the sandy bay on the NE side of the W island, 0.3

mile offshore.

6.5 Ilot Veer (10°14'N., 102°53'E.), 36m high and steepto, lies 18.5 miles N of Poulo Wai.

6.5 Kas Prins (Kaoh Pring), 61m high, lies 9 miles farther NNW.

An islet, 46m high, and an islet, 7m high, lie 0.5 mile, and 1.5

miles, respectively, W of Kas Prins.

6.5 Kas Tang (Kaoh Tang), 10 miles ESE of Kas Prins, is

wooded, inhabited, and 134m high at its N end. Ile Abri, a

small islet, lies 0.5 mile N of the S entrance point of the sandy

bay on the E side of the island. Another small islet lies 1 mile

SE of Kas Tang.

6.5 Ilots Sud Est consists of two islets lying 4.5 ESE of Kas

Tang. The NW islet is 43m high, and a shoal, with a least depth

of 6.7m, extends 1.5 miles SSE of the SE islet.

6.5 Recif Condor, which dries 0.3m, lies 22 miles NNW of Kas

Prins, and 17.5 miles WSW of Chrouy Samit.

Mui Bai Bung to Baie de Ream

6.6 Mui Ba Quan (8°46'N., 104°48'E.), 12 miles NNE of

Mui Bai Bung, is the N entrance point of a shallow estuary.

6.6 The coast between Mui Ba Quan and the S entrance point of

Vinh Rach Gia, 64 miles N, is low, wooded, and intersected by

small streams. The coastal bank, with depths of less than 5.5m,

extends 2 miles offshore along this stretch of coast. The only

landmark along this coast is Hon Da Bac, 30m high, wooded,

and standing close to the coast, 24 miles N of Mui Ba Quan.

6.6 A 5.8m shoal, existence doubtful, was reported (1965) 37

miles WNW of Hon Da Bac; a 9.2m patch was reported to lie

2.5 miles farther NNW.

6.6 Vinh Rach Gia has general depths of 0.6 to 1.5m. Hon Tre

(9°57'N., 104°50'E.), cone-shaped and 323m high, lies near the

middle of the bay entrance. The N entrance point of the bay

rises to several peaks.

6.6 Rach Gia (10°01'N., 105°05'E.), a small port, lies at the

entrance of a channel which provides access to a canal network

extending to the Mekong River. The canal is navigable by boats

with drafts of up to 1.8m.

6.6 Vung Cay Duong, close NW of Vinh Rach Gia, has depths of

less than 5.5m and is backed by low land.

6.6 Mui Hon Chong (10°08'N., 104°39'E.), the W entrance

point of Vung Cay Duong, is a rocky headland, 161m high.

Rocher Sans Nom, 1.5m high, lies 4.5 miles SE of Mui Hon

Chong, on a bank with depths of 3.4m which extends 3 miles

W of Rocher Sans Nom.

6.6 Mui Ong Thoa (Mui Hon Troc), 2 miles W of Mui Hon

Chong, is a rocky headland. A range of hills, rising to an

altitude of 201m, extends 4 miles NE of the headland.

6.6 Quan Dao Balua (Iles Balua) is an extensive group of islands

extending 12 miles W and SSW of Mui Ong Thoa. Numerous

rocks, reefs, and shoals, with depths of less than 5.5m, lie

between and near the islands. A vessel should not attempt to

navigate within the islands without local knowledge.

6.6 Hon Nghe (10°01'N., 104°33'E.), conical and 323m high, is

wooded, inhabited, and lies 7 miles SSW of Mui Ong Thoa. It

is the largest of the islands. Outer Island, 4 miles SW of Hon

Nghe, is the S island of the group. A shoal lies 9.2 miles W of

Outer Island with a least depth of 7.9m. Ile Escarpe lies 3.5

miles W of Hon Nghe.

6.6 Hon Heo (10°11'N., 104°32'E.), 102m high, lies 4.5 miles

WNW of Mui Ong Thoa. Ile Ouest, 8 miles WSW of Hon Heo,

is the W of Quan Dao Balua.

6.7 Quan Dao Nam Du (Iles de Poulo Dama) (9°41'N.,

104°22'E.) in the approach to Vinh Rach Gia, consists of two

parallel chains of islands in a N-S direction. Hon Nam Du

(9°41'N., 104°21'E.), the principal island of the group, exhibits

a light and has a sharp peak, 309m high, near its center; a

monument stands on the E side of the island, 1.5 miles from its

S extremity. Hon Mong Tay, 103m high, lies 1 mile S of Hon

Nam Du and a 4.6m steep-to shoal lies 0.3 mile S of Hon

Mong Tay. A reef, with a depth of 0.9m, lies 1.3 miles W of the

summit of Hon Nam Du; a rock, with a depth of 1.5m, lies 2

miles farther N. Hon Gian, 105m high, lies 1.5 miles N of Hon

Nam Du. An islet, 48m high, with a rock above-water 0.2 mile

W, lies 1.2 miles WSW of Hon Gian. 

6.7 Hon Mau, over 61m high, and the S of the E chain of islets,

lies 2.5 miles SE of the S extremity of Hon Nam Du. Hon

Truoc, 90m high, and the N islet of the E chain, lies 1.5 miles E

of the NE side of Hon Nam Du. Roche de l’Aspic, with a depth

of 0.6m, lies 0.4 mile N of Hon Truoc; a rock awash lies 0.3

mile WNW.

6.7 Anchorage, during the Northeast Monsoon, can be taken in a

depth of 12.8m, 0.5 mile SW of the W extremity of Hon Mau.

During the Southwest Monsoon, the best anchorage for vessels

with local knowledge is in a depth of 7.3m, good holding

ground, E of the summit of Hon Nam Du, in the passage

between the islands.

6.8 Hon Rai (Ile Tamassou) (9°48'N., 104°38'E.), 405m

high, table-topped, wooded, and with a steep summit, lies 14

miles NE of Quan Dao Nam Du. A rock, with a depth of 0.6m,

lies 0.3 mile off the W end of the island. A 3.2m patch,

existence doubtful, lies 1.2 miles SE of the W end of the island.

6.8 Iles d’An Thoi (9°57'N., 104°02'E.) is a group of small islands and islets extending 6.5 miles S of Mui Hanh (10°01'N.,

104°01'E.), the SW extremity of Dao Phu Quoc. Hon Dua,

101m high, the N island, is separated from Mui Hanh by a

channel, about 0.5 mile wide, with a deep fairway. The channels between Iles d’An Thoi are apparently deep, but should

not be used. A light is shown from Mui Hanh. 

6.8 Hon May Rut, 87m high, lies in the SW end of the group.

Hon Kim Qui, 53m high, and Hon Trang, 33m high, lie 0.5

mile NW and 0.3 mile SSE, respectively, of Hon May Rut. Hon
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 123

Pub. 161

Xuong, 75m high, and Hon Mong Tay, 0.5 mile S of it, are the

SE islands of the group.

6.8 A 10.3m depth was reported (1966) to lie 5.5 miles W of

Hon May Rut.

6.8 Hon Tay (9°49'N., 104°03'E.), 69m high, with a rock, 1m

high, lying 0.3 mile W, is separated from Iles d’An Thoi by a

channel 5 miles wide.

6.8 Hon Da Ban, 6m high, lies 1.2 miles SE of Hon Tay. A rock,

1.5m high, lies 0.8 mile E of Hon Da Ban. Hon Dong, 118m

high, lies 3 miles ENE of Hon Tay.

Dao Phu Quoc

6.9 Dao Phu Quoc (10°15'N., 104°00'E.) is a mountainous island. Nui Chua (10°22'N., 104°03'E.), 565m high, the

summit of the island, rises at the N extremity of a mountain

range that dominates the E coast of the island.

6.9 Cay Dua (An Thoi) (10°01'N., 104°01'E.) is an important

fishing harbor in the small bay E of Mui Hanh. There are two

piers at Cay Dua. The W pier, 101m in length, serves as a fuel

pier, and is supported by concrete pilings. The pier can

accommodate vessels up to 152m in length and 4.2m draft.

6.9 The SW side of Dao Phu Quoc is mostly low with isolated

hills rising inland. Sommet Carre, 161m high, rises close to the

coast, 2.8 miles NNW of Mui Hanh. This coast is fringed by a

bank with depths of less than 9.2m extending up to 0.5 mile

offshore.

6.9 Duong Dong (10°13'N., 103°58'E.) (World Port Index No.

57520), the center of an important fishing industry, is marked

by a light and lies on the S side of a river entrance, 13 miles

NNW of Mui Hanh. A large rock, surmounted by a white mast,

with a pagoda nearby, lies on the S side of the river entrance.

6.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 11m,

about 1 mile W of the light structure on the S entrance point of

the river. 

6.9 During the Northeast Monsoon, anchorage can be obtained

anywhere off the SW side of Dao Phu Quoc.

6.9 Mui Dai Trai (10°22'N., 103°50'E.), the W extremity of Dao

Phu Quoc, is backed by Day Nui Bai Dai, a range of hills

extending 6 miles E. Hon Thay Boi, 18m high and wooded,

lies 1.3 miles W of Mui Dai Trai; a 1.8m patch lies 0.4 mile

ENE of the islet. Hon Ban, 14m high, lies 1 mile N of Hon

Thay Boi. Hon Don Moi (Hon Do Moi), with rocks close off it,

lies 2.3 miles S of Mui Dai Trai, and 0.5 mile offshore.

6.10 Mui Ganh Dau, the NW extremity of Dao Phu Quoc,

lies 1 mile NNE of Mui Dai Trai. Rocher Plat, a rock above

water, lies 0.8 mile N of Mui Ganh Dau; a rock, with less than

1.8m, lies 0.3 mile SE of Rocher Plat.

6.10 The island of Kaoh Ses, 89m high, lies 2.3 miles NW of Mui

Ganh Dau. Ile Cone lies 0.5 mile W of the S extremity of Kaoh

Ses, and a shoal with a depth of 3m lies 0.5 mile SSE of the

same extremity. Kaoh Thmei, close NW of Kao Ses, has two

summits; the highest, 172m high, rises in its N part.

6.10 Mui Kwala, the N extremity of Dao Phu Quoc, rises to Nui

Chao, 382m high, 1 mile S. Nui Ham Rong, 366m high, lies 3

miles farther SSW. Dangerous ground extends nearly 2 miles

W and N of the cape. Banc du Loire Inferieure, with a depth of

3m, lies 1.5 miles N of Mui Kwala, and is the N danger. A

shoal, with a least depth of 4.2m, extends 3 miles ENE of the

cape.

6.10 The E side of Dao Phu Quoc is bordered by shoal water, with

depths of less than 1.8m extending up to 4 miles offshore in

places.

6.10 Nui Da Bac, 448m high, lies at the S end of the tableland

mountain range on the E side of Dao Phu Qui. Nui Ham Ninh,

376m high, lies 3 miles farther SW. The village of Ham Ninh,

where a light is shown, lies 1 mile SE of Nui Ham Ninh.

6.10 Mui Ong Doi, at the SE end of Dao Phu Quoc, is the SE

extremity of a peninsula with a rounded summit, 120m high.

Depths of less than 5.5m extend 3 miles SE of Mui Ong Doi.

6.10 Anchorage.—The irregularity of the bottom makes anchorage difficult off the E side of Dao Phu Quoc. Anchorage can be

obtained, in a depth 8.5m, about 3 miles E of Ham Ninh.

6.10 During the Southwest Monsoon, the most sheltered anchorage is in the bay NW of Mui Ong Doi, in a depth of 10m.

Caution.—Exercise care when utilizing the coast of Dao

Phu Quoc and the adjacent islands from Duong Dong to Hon

Do Mai for position-fixing purposes. Some features on and off

this coast have been reported to be incorrectly charted.

Approach to Ha Tien—Islands and Dangers

6.11 Poulo Cici (10°12'N., 104°15'E.) consists of two

islets, the N of which is 65m high and covered with trees. The

islets lie near the S end of a bank, with depths of less than

5.5m, extending S of the coast between Cap Bumbi (10°32'N.,

104°11'E.) and Pointe Kep, 8 miles ESE.

6.11 Rocher Rosita, which dries 0.6m, lies 4.5 miles NNW of

Poulo Cici.

6.11 Iles Des Pirates (Quan Dao Hai Tac), a group of islands and

islets, lie on a bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extending

13 miles S of Pointe Kep. Vessels should not attempt to pass

between the islands without local knowledge.

6.11 Hon Duoc (10°15'N., 104°19'E.), the S island of the group,

lies 5 miles NE of Poulo Cici. Hon Doc lies 3.5 miles NNE of

Hon Duoc.

6.11 Kaoh Tunsay, 155m high and wooded, rises 3 miles SE of

Pointe Kep, and is the N island of the group.

6.12 Ha Tien (10°23'N., 104°29'E.) (World Port Index No.

57530) lies at the mouth of Rach Giang Thanh, which

discharges 2.5 miles ENE of Mui Nai. Hills on either side of

the river entrance form a gap that is conspicuous from SW. A

light is shown on Mui Nai. Lights, in range 044°, on the NW

side of the river entrance, are moved as necessary to conform

to the channel over the bar; the range passes between a rock,

with a depth of 1.2m, and a wreck farther E.

6.12 The bar at the river mouth has depths of 0.6m for a distance

of about 100m. The mud, however, is very soft and vessels with

drafts of 3.4m, and with sufficient power, can enter the river.

6.12 A quay on the N side of the river has depths of 2.4m

alongside.

6.12 Anchorage.—Vessels drawing 4.6m can anchor 1.5 miles

seaward of Mui Nai.

6.12 During the Southwest Monsoon, small vessels with local

knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 6.4m, about 0.5 mile E of

Hon Doc.

6.12 Directions.—Vessels should approach between Ile Ouest
124 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

(10°09'N., 104°24'E.) and Iles des Pirates and proceed to steer

according to the range lights in line. Vessels should not enter

the harbor without local knowledge.

Kampot (10°36'N., 104°11'E.)

6.13 Kampot, the principal town of the area lies on the E

bank of a river, 3.5 miles N of Cap Bumbi. There are three

channels by which junks can enter the river; the E and best has

a depth of about 0.6m on the bar.

6.13 Vessels of moderate size, with local knowledge, can

approach to a position 6.5 miles SW of Cap Bumbi where

anchorage, in depths of 11 to 16.5m, can be taken.

6.13 There are two approaches to the anchorage off Kampot. Kinh

Gan Dau (Chenal Ouest), the channel N of Dao Phu Quoc,

should be used by vessels with a draft of more than 4.6m. The

depths in the fairway to the anchorage are not less than 10m.

Chenal Sud, the channel E of Dao Phu Quoc, is only navigable

by vessels with a draft of 4.6m or less.

6.13 Phnum Pouvankhone (Massif de L’Elephant), a range of

mountains rising to an elevation of 1,000m, on the mainland N

of Dao Phu Quoc, is very conspicuous when approaching

Kampot. A round peak lies at the SE extremity of the range.

Pnom Dong, 97m high, is conspicuous 1 mile N of Cap Bumbi.

The N coast of Dao Phu Quoc was previously described in

paragraph 6.9.

6.13 Pointe Kep (Chrouy Kab) (10°29'N., 104°18'E.), 7.5 miles

ESE of Cap Bumbi, is prominent with a hill, 297m high, rising

0.5 mile inland.

6.13 Kaoh Kras (Koh Kras), 8m high, lies 5.5 miles W of Pointe

Kep. Ile Temple lies 1.2 miles ESE of Kaoh Kras.

6.13 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 16.5m,

with Cap Bumbi bearing 055°, distant 6 miles. Smaller vessels

can anchor, in a depth of 4.9m, about 1.5 miles S of Cap

Bumbi, or W of Kaoh Kras.

6.13 Directions.—Kinh Ganh Dau is the channel leading to the

sea of Chhak Veal Renh. Vessels should steer to pass close N of

Hon Ban and Rocher Plat, avoiding the 3.1m shoal lying 0.5

mile SSE of Kaoh Ses. Then steer to pass at least 2 miles N of

Mui Kwala to avoid Banc du Loire Inferieure and the shoals off

the cape. Then steer for the anchorage SW of Cap Bumbi,

taking care to avoid the steep-to rocky coastal bank on the N

side of the fairway.

6.13 Vessels using Chenal Sud should round Mui Ong Doi, the SE

extremity of Dao Phu Quoc, at a distance of at least 5 miles.

Vessels then steer to pass W of Rocher Rosita (10°17'N.,

104°21'E.) and E of the banks extending up to 4 miles off the E

coast of Dao Phu Quoc. The E side of Cap Bumbi in range

000° with Pnom Sor, a 125m high hill standing 8 miles N,

leads 0.5 mile W of Rocher Rosita and over 3 miles W of Poulo

Cici. Care should be taken to avoid an obstruction lying 4.5

miles S of Cap Bumbi.

Baie de Ream

6.14 Baie de Ream (10°31'N., 103°36'E.), backed by high

land, is fronted by five reef-fringed islands. A bank, with

depths of less than 5.5m, extends 2.5 miles from the head of

the bay. Uncharted obstructions may be encountered in this

bay and its approaches. 

6.14 Phsar Ream (Ream) (10°30'N., 103°36'E.) (World Port

Index No. 57490) lies on the SE entrance point of the bay.

6.14 Kaoh Sra Maoch (Channel Island) lies 1.2 miles SE of the

SE entrance point of the bay. Kaoh Ta Kiev (Bay Island), 102m

high at its NW end, lies 0.8 mile W of Kaoh Sra Maoch, and is

the largest island. Kaoh Roessei (Kaoh Russei) (Southwest

Island), 88m high, is the SW island. A radio tower, 72m high,

stands on the NE shore of Kaoh Roessei and is conspicuous.

Kaoh Praeus (Northwest Island) lies 1 mile WSW of the NW

entrance point of the bay. 

6.14 Kaoh Khteah (Round Island) lies in the NW approach to the

bay, 1.8 miles NW of the NW entrance point, and less than 1

mile offshore.

6.14 Rocher Blanc (White Rock), which dries 1.8m, lies on a reef

that extends 0.5 mile SSW from the NW entrance point of the

bay.

6.14 The main channel, leading between Kaoh Ta Kiev and Kaoh

Sra Maoch, has a least depth of 5.5m in the fairway. 

6.14 Vessels with drafts of less than 4.6m can enter by any passage between the islands, except between Kaoh Sra Maoch and

the mainland.

6.14 A concrete jetty, 45m long, close NW of the SE entrance

point of the bay, has a depth of 3.7m alongside its head, and is

accessible to vessels up to 61m in length.

6.14 A floating dry dock lies approximately in position

10°30'32N, 103°36'10E. 

6.14

Baie de Ream Floating Dry Dock
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 125

Pub. 161

6.14 Anchorage.—Baie de Ream offers fairly secure anchorage

during the Southwest Monsoon, off the NE end of Kaoh Ta

Kiev. The best anchorage, in a depth of 11m, is with the N side

of the pier bearing 105°, distant 0.2 mile. Vessels should not

proceed farther N of this anchorage as depths shoal sharply.

6.14 During the Northeast Monsoon, strong currents set in the

channel. During the Southwest Monsoon a heavy swell enters

the bay. At this anchorage, tidal currents have been observed

setting N on the flood tide and SSE on the ebb tide, attaining

velocities of up to 1 knot.

Chhak Kampong Saom

6.15 Chhak Kampong Saom (Baie de Kampong Som) is

entered between a point close ESE of Kaoh Poah (Koh Pos)

(10°37'N., 103°29'E.) and Chrouy Samit (Pointe Samit), 27

miles NW. The bay is sheltered from SW by a chain of islands

extending SSE from Chrouy Samit. The N shore of the bay is

low and bordered by mangroves. The N part of the bay is shoal

and encumbered with fishing stakes. Vessels should not

proceed to the head of the bay without local knowledge.

6.15 The port of Kampong Saom lies in the SE part of the bay.

The Approach to Chhak Kampong Saom—Islands and Dangers

6.16 Kaoh Rung Samloem (10°35'N., 103°18'E.), the S

island in the approach, rises to an elevation of 210m in its NW

part, and is thickly wooded; its SW and SE sides are steep-to.

Kaoh Kon (Ile Cone), 157m high, lies close N of the island.

Chhak Saracen (Baie du Saracen) indents the E side of the

island, and have depths of 7.6 to 11m shoaling gradually

towards its shores. No dangers lie more than 0.3 mile offshore.

6.16 Anchorage.—During the southwest monsoon, anchorage

can be taken, in a depth of 7.3m, about 0.3 mile off a cascade,

at the SE end of a sandy beach in the S part of the bay. The NE

part of the bay offers better shelter during the northeast

monsoon.

6.16 Kaoh Rung, 2.2 miles NW of Kaoh Rung Samloem, is steepto on its SW and NW sides. The island is wooded, and its

summit is 317m high on its SW side. A bank, with a depth of

5.2m near its outer end, extends 3.5 miles NE from the NE end

of Kaoh Rung. Banc de Kas Rung, with a least depth of 2.1m,

lies on the SE part of the bank.

6.16 Anchorage, during the Southwest Monsoon, can be taken, in

depths of 7.3 to 14.6m, sand and mud, off the NE side of Kaoh

Rung. Anchorage can also be taken in the bay on the SW side

of the island.

6.16 Kaoh Ta Team (Ile du Chenal) and Kaoh Mano (Ile du

Milieu), with an islet close N, lie 0.7 mile apart, about midway

between Kaoh Rung and Chrouy Samit. The coastal bank, with

depths of less than 5.5m, extends up to 4 miles offshore in the

bay NE of Kaoh Mano.

6.16 Kaoh Damlong (Ile Plate) lies 2.5 miles SE of Chrouy Samit.

6.16 Kaoh Kaong Kang (Koh Kong Kang) (10°36'N., 103°25'E.)

lies in the approach to Kampong Saom, midway between Kaoh

Rung Samloem and the mainland. A reef extends 0.3 mile

WSW from the island. A shoal, with a depth of 8.5m, lies 0.9

mile N and 1.2 miles S, respectively, of the E end of the island.

A light is shown from the E end of Kaoh Kaong Kang.

6.16 Kaoh Poah (Koh Pos), close off the SE entrance, lies 1 mile

WNW of Kaoh Poah. A light is shown from Kaoh Dek Koul.

Chhak Kampong Saom—Channels

6.17 The best channel into Chhak Kampong Saom is

between Kaoh Rung Samloem and Kaoh Kaong Kang. This

channel is 3.5 miles wide and clear, with depths of over 18m.

The passage between Kaoh Rung Samloem and Kaoh Rung

has a least depth of 11m. However, a bank, with depths of less

than 10m extends 3.5 miles SE from the SE side of Kaoh Rung,

and a depth of 6.4m lies on this bank, 2.5 miles SE of the

island. On the S side of the passage, a depth of 7.7m lies 1 mile

E of the N extremity of Kaoh Kon.

6.17 Kaoh Ta Team (Ile du Chenal) lies in the middle of the

passage between Kaoh Rung and Kaoh Mano (Ile du Milieu).

There are least depths of 10.1m in the passage, but depths of

less than 9.2m and 5.5m extend about 3 miles NNE and NE,

respectively of the NE extremity of Kaoh Rung.

Kampong Saom (Sihanoukville) 

(10°38'N., 103°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 57485

6.18 Kampong Saom is the principal port of Cambodia and

the only port which can berth ocean-going vessels. The port

Kaoh Roessei Tower
126 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

extends from the quay S of Pointe Loune to Kaoh Preap

(Rocher Preap) (Rocher Touffu), 1.5 miles NNE. The main pier

extends W then SSW from Pointe Loune. A new pier extends

0.5 mile ENE of Pointe Loune, and is sheltered by a

breakwater extending NNE of Pointe Loune. Extensive port

development plans are scheduled to begin in 2011 and be

completed by 2015. 

6.18 A breakwater extending from Kaoh Preap to Pointe Dominique, 0.7 mile E, forms the N part of the new harbor. A breakwater also extends SSW of Kaoh Preap. Two visible wrecks lie

inside this breakwater and another wreck lies close inside the

breakwater at Pointe Loune.

6.18 An offshore pipeline berth is situated off Pointe du Depart,

3.5 miles NNE of Pointe Dominique.

6.18 Tides—Currents.—Tides at Kampong Saom are usually diurnal. The tidal rise is 1.3m at MHHW.

6.18 There are strong and irregular currents in the passage

between Kaoh Poah and the mainland. The tidal currents at the

main wharf run parallel with it. The maximum velocity is 1.5

knots, and the average rate does not exceed 0.5 knot.

6.18 A flag shown at the N end of the wharf indicates a N current

at the wharf, and a flag shown at the S end of the wharf

indicates a S current; during slack water no flag is shown.

6.18 Depths—Limitations.—The main pier extends W and SW

from Pointe Loune and has a total length of 550m. The principal part of this pier is its SW arm which is 275m in length. It

is reported that two vessels with drafts to 9.5m can berth

alongside its W side and two vessels with drafts of up to 7.5m

alongside its E side. Near the inner end of the main wharf a

breakwater extends SSW providing shelter to a lighter basin on

the E side of which there is a lighter quay. Lloyd’s Port Guide

20

6.18 The entrance and turning basin in the S part of the new

harbor were reported dredged to 7.3m.

6.18 The wharf in the S part of the new harbor has depths of 7.3m

alongside. Two mooring buoys are established between the

breakwater and the wharf.

6.18 The offshore pipeline berth at Pointe du Depart, which lies

13 miles SW of Rocher Blanc, has two moorings in depths of

15m, capable of accommodating tankers up to 220m in length

and 11.5m draft. The facility at Pointe du Depart can accommodate tankers of up to 60m in length with drafts to 4.6m.

6.18 Rocher Thmor (Rocher Eiffel), 3m high, lies nearly 0.9 mile

N of the NE extremity of Kaoh Poah. A 4m patch lies 0.3 mile

NW of Rocher Thmor, and is marked by a buoy. A patch, with

a least depth of 3.3m, lies nearly 0.5 mile E of Rocher Thmor,

and is marked by a buoy.

6.18 A rock, with a depth of 1.6m, lies on a detached shoal, 0.3

mile NW of Kaoh Preap.

Kampong Saom Fuel Pier

Kaoh Poah Bridge (under construction 2010) 
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 127

Pub. 161

6.18 The deep passage between Kaoh Poah and the mainland has

a least depth of 8.2m on the axis of the buoyed channel, with

the white beacon on Pointe Loune bearing 031°36'.

6.18 Aspect.—Two warehouses, easily identifiable from a distance, lie close S of Pointe Loune, and nearly parallel to the

main pier. Several radio towers are reported to be conspicuous. 

6.18 A light is shown from the N tip of the breakwater at Pointe

Loune. Kaoh Preap, 5.8m high and prominent, lies at the NW

corner of the harbor.

6.18 A flare is conspicuous on Pointe du Depart, where there is a

refinery.

6.18 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, and should be requested

at least 24 hours prior to arrival. The pilot boards close NE of

Buoy KS. Berthing is usually carried out in daylight only,

while unberthing takes place day or night, weather permitting.

6.18 Regulations.—Navigation is prohibited within 0.5 mile of

the tanker berth.

6.18 Anchorage.—Three anchorage areas are available to vessels

awaiting a berth, a pilot, or working cargo. The N anchorage,

situated N of Lighted Buoy A, has depths of 9.2 to 11m, good

holding ground. The S anchorage, situated S of Kaoh Poah, is

used as a lightering anchorage when the N anchorage is too

rough. The anchorage has depths of 8 to 10m, mud. The tanker

anchorage, in depths of 15.8 to 18m, lies 2 miles NW of Kaoh

Dek Koul (Rocher Carre).

6.18 Directions.—The port is easy to approach by day or night.

Vessels arriving during hours of darkness are advised to

approach the port by entering between Kaoh Kaong Kang and

Kaoh Dek Koul, passing about 0.4 mile W of the latter.

6.18 The most direct route to the harbor at Kampong Saom is via

the deep passage between Kaoh Poah and the mainland. This

route is marked by buoys and the beacon on Pointe Loune

bearing 031°36'.

6.18 Vessels can also reach the harbor by the passage W of Kaoh

Poah, which has a least depth of 7m. Vessels then pass N of

Lighted Buoy A and Lighted Buoy B, moored NW and ENE of

Rocher Thmor.

Chrouy Samit to Laem Ling

6.19 The coast between Chrouy Samit (Pointe Samit)

(10°52'N., 103°07'E.) and Chrouy Yai Sen (Pointe Yeay Sen),

22 miles N, is hilly near the coast, forming rocky bluffs with

sandy bays between. The bays afford good anchorage with

offshore winds.

6.19 A group of islands lies within 3 miles of the coast N of

Chrouy Samit. Kas Samit, the S island, is 120m high.

6.19 Rocher Table, 60m high, is located 6 miles N of Kas Samit,

and 3.5 miles offshore. A 7.3m rocky shoal extends 0.5 mile

SW of the islet. Roche du Branlebas, which dries 0.3m, lies 2.3

miles NE of Rocher Table.

6.19 Ilots Kussat (Kaoh Putsa) consists of three islets. The outer

islet is 90m high, and lies 1.5 miles SW of Pointe Koh Kussat

(11°05'N., 103°06'E.).

6.19 Caution.—Rocher Kusrovie (Kaoh Kusrovie), 11m high,

lies 17.5 miles W of Pointe Koh Kussat. Banc Ubon Boratit,

composed of sand and coral, with a least depth of 1.2m, lies 1

mile N of Rocher Kusrovie.

6.19 Banc de Yai Sen, with a least depth of 12m, and Banc de Kas

Kong, with a least depth of 12.8m, lie 9.5 miles NE and 13.5

miles N, respectively of Rocher Kusrovie.

6.20 Koh Kong (Koah Kong) (11°20'N., 103°00'E.) fronts

Baie de Kas Kong (Chaak Kaoh Kong), a shoal bay between

Chrouy Yai Sen and Lem Dam (Phum Lamdam), 12 miles N.

The island is wooded and attains an elevation of 406m near its

central part.

6.20 Ilot Cone (Kaoh Mul) (11°26'N., 103°00'E.), 1 mile NW of

Lem Dam, is 37m high and joined to the mainland by a

causeway. A light is occasionally shown from the islet. A

pagoda is conspicuous at Kas Kapig, 1.5 miles NNE of Ilot

Cone.

6.20 Koh Yor (11°35'N., 102°56'E.), 118m high and prominent,

lies 10 miles NNW of Ilot Cone and appears as an island.

6.20 The coast is low and bordered by sandy beaches between

Koh Yor and Khao Hua Maew (11°55'N., 102°47'E.), a rocky

bluff, 71m high, 22 miles NNW. A mountain range, rising to

elevations of 300 to 600m and with its S end lying 4 miles N of

Koh Yor, backs this coast 1 to 3 miles inland.

6.20 Ao Trat is entered between Khao Hua Maew and Laem Nam

(Laem Sok) (12°03'N., 102°35'E.), 14 miles NW. The bay has

depths of less than 5.5m except in its outer part, and there are

drying flats at its head. A light is shown on Laem Nam, and on

Laem Ko Pu, 7.5 miles N.

6.20 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 7.3m, about 4 miles E

of Laem Nam.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

6.21 Ko Kut is the SE of a group of islands lying SSE of

Laem Ling (12°10'N., 102°17'E.). It is a high, level island,

rising to an elevation of 344m in its S part. A light is shown

near the S end of the island (11°34'N., 102°36'E.).

6.21 Ko Mak, 4 miles NW of Ko Kut, has a rocky headland, 107m

high at its W extremity. The channel between the two islands

has depths of over 11m. Ko Rayang Nok, an 81m high islet,

lies 0.5 mile S of the W extremity of Ko Mak. Ko Kradat, 57m

high, lies near the middle of a coral flat extending 4.5 miles NE

of Ko Mak. A depth of 5.5m lies 2 miles SE of the SE

extremity of Ko Kradat. A rock, with a depth of 7m, whose

position is approximate, lies 0.5 mile SSE of the 5.5m depth.

6.21 Ko Rang Yai (Ko Rang), 193m high, lies 3 miles WSW of

Ko Mak. Ko Mapring, 70m high, lies 0.8 mile N of the latter

island. Rocks, above and below water, extend up to 1 mile off

the N end of Ko Rang Yai.

6.21 Hin Phrai Nam, awash, lies 2.5 miles NE of Ko Mapring.

6.22 Ko Chang (12°03'N., 102°21'E.), the largest island of

the group, has several peaked hills intersected by rocky and

precipitous ravines. The summit is a table peak, 744m high, in

the SW part of the island. Ko Chang Trat Light (12°06'N.,

102°17'E.) is shown from the NW summit of the island. 

6.22 Ko Khlum, 242m high, lies 3 miles SE of Laem Bang Bao,

the SW extremity of Ko Chang. Hin Rap, 1.5m high, lies 1.5

miles W of the S end of Ko Khlum. A rock, 1m high, lies 1.5

miles NE of Hin Rap. A rock, with a depth of 5.6m, lies 0.5

mile E of Hin Rap.

6.22 Hin Luk Bat, 1.5m high, lies 2 miles WSW of Laem Bang

Bao.
128 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

6.22 Ko Yuak (Ko Yauk), 40m high, and the NW of three islets,

lies 5 miles NW of Laem Bang Bao, and 1.8 miles off the W

coast of Ko Chang.

6.22 Hin Sam Sao (Hin Samsau), 2.4m high, and Hin Rai (Hin

Rarb), 1.2m high, lie 1.5 and 2 miles, respectively, NW of Ko

Yuak. Hin Rai, 2.5 miles offshore, is the outermost danger off

the W side of Ko Chang.

6.22 Caution.—An area dangerous for anchoring or fishing due

to mines lies up to 8 miles W of the W coast of Ko Chang and

is best seen on the chart.

Chong Ko Chang

6.23 Chong Ko Chang (Ko Chang Chong), the channel

between Ko Chang and the mainland, has depths of 6.4 to 9.2m

in the fairway. Vessels drawing more than 4.5m should not use

this channel without local knowledge.

6.23 Ko Ngam, 120m high, bordered close SE by rocks above and

below water, lies close SE of the SE end of Ko Chang.

6.23 Ko Mai Si Yai (Ko Maisi Yai), 1.5 miles E of Ko Ngam, lies

on the E side of the entrance to Chong Ko Chang. Several islets

extend up to 2 miles E and ENE of Ko Mai Si Yai.

6.23 Ko Baidang, 125m high, and Ko Wai, 128m high, lie 2 miles

SSW, and 3.5 miles SW, respectively, of Ko Mai Si Yai, in the

S approach to Chong Ko Chang, and the W approach to Ao

Trat.

6.23 The coastal bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, on the SW

side of Chong Ko Chang, extends up to 1 mile from the NE

side of Ko Chang. Ko Salak (Ko Lim), 60m high, lies on the

SW side of the fairway, 6 miles NNW of Ko Mai Si Yai; a 4.6m

patch lies 2.5 miles NW of the islet.

6.23 The coast on the N side of Chong Ko Chang is low and

mangrove-covered. A light is shown at Ban Laem Ngop, 7

miles NNW of Ko Salak. The coastal bank, with depths of less

than 5.5m, extends 1 mile off Ban Laem Ngap, and 6.5 miles

offshore in the SE part, extending SW from Laem Sok to the

islets off the SE end of Ko Chang.

6.23 Chong Ko Chang is entered from NW between Ko Chang

Noi, 87m high, close off the NW extremity of Ko Chang, and

Laem Ling, located 3 miles NNE.

6.23 Hin Khi Chang (Hin Kee Chang), 1.2m high, lies on the N

side of the fairway, 3.3 miles E of Ko Chang Noi. A light is

shown from Hin Khi Chang.

6.23 Anchorage.—There is anchorage, in depths of 8.2 to 9.2m,

about 0.7 mile SE of Hin Khi Chang. Small vessels can obtain

anchorage, in a depth of 4.6m, about 1.5 miles SW of Ban

Laem Ngop. Vessels approaching from NW should steer for

the light structure on Hin Khi Chang bearing 110°, and then

pass 0.1 to 0.2 mile S of the rock, and anchor when the structure comes in range, or opens SW of Laem Ling.

Laem Ling to Ko Saba

6.24 Laem Ling (12°12'N., 102°17'E.) is bordered 0.3

mile W by a rocky patch, awash. A hill, 163m high, rises 1

mile ESE of Laem Ling.

6.24 The coast between Laem Ling and the E entrance point of

Mae Nam Chanthaburi, 20 miles NW, is low and fringed with

mangroves.

6.24 Ko Chik Nok, 82m high, standing 5.5 miles NW of Laem

Ling, fronts the mouth of Mae Nam Welu. The bar of the river,

with depths of 1.8 to 2.1m in the fairway, extends 2 miles SW

of Ko Chik Nok. A light is shown from the NW extremity of

Ko Chik Nok.

6.24 Ko Proet, 65m high and connected to the coast by a spit, lies

10 miles NW of Ko Chik Nok. Ko Kwang and Ko Nang Ram,

lie 0.5 mile SE, and 1 mile NW, respectively, of Ko Proet. Hin

Phin, with a depth of 4.4m, lies 1 mile SSE of Ko Kwang.

6.24 Hin Bojesen, consisting of two rocks nearly 0.5 mile apart,

each with a depth of 2.1m, lies 4 miles SW of Ko Proet. Hin

Phut, two steep-to rocks above water, lies 6.2 miles SW of Ko

Proet and is marked by a buoy.

6.24 Laem Sing (12°28'N., 102°04'E.), the W entrance point of

Mae Nam Chanthaburi, rises to Khao Laem Sing, 172m high,

about 0.8 mile NNW. A light is shown from the point.

6.24 Ko Nom Sao, 108m high, lies 2 miles W of Laem Sing. A

rock, with a depth of 9.4m, lies 1.8 miles SSE of the islet. Khao

Sa Bap rises to an elevation of 932m about 10 miles ENE of

Laem Sing.

6.24 Mae Nam Chanthaburi is entered W of Laem Sing. The town

of Ban Paknam stands on the low E entrance point, 0.8 mile

farther N. Ko Chula, a 16m high islet, lies 0.4 mile SE of Laem

Sing. Rocks, below water and awash, extend up to 0.2 mile N

and SSW of the islet. Hin Sukhrip, with a depth of 2.3m, lies

0.5 mile SW of Ko Chula.

6.24 A rocky bank extends 0.1 mile E from Laem Sing, leaving a

channel about 0.2 mile wide, with a depth of 3.6m in the

fairway.

6.24 Vessels drawing 3.6m can proceed up the river 2.3 miles N

of Ban Paknam, to Ban Laem Pradu, where there is a

customhouse, church, and wooden pier, on the W side of the

river. Vessels moor in the river as the tidal currents are strong.

6.24 Tha Chalaep, on the N bank of the river 1.7 miles farther N,

is the port for Chanthaburi and is accessible to vessels of 2.7m

draft. There is a jetty, with a T-head about 25m long, which can

accommodate vessels of 500 tons and a draft of 3m at HW.

Pilotage is not available.

6.24 Ao Mu Yai, a shoal bay, backed by a low and wooded coast,

lies between Laem Sing and Ko Saba, 7 miles WNW. There are

numerous fishing stakes off this bay during the Northeast

Monsoon.

6.24 Ko Saba, 65m high, lies close off a prominent hilly point. Ko

Luk Saba, a reef awash, extends 0.2 mile S of Ko Saba. Mae

Nam Khem Nu, entered E of Ko Saba, is obstructed by a bar

with a depth of 1.8m.

Ko Saba to Laem Samae San

6.25 Khao Khung Kraben (12°34'N., 101°53'E.), a

promontory, 126m high, and joined to the mainland by a

narrow isthmus, lies 5.5 miles NW of Ko Saba.

6.25 Ao Khung Kraben, entered N of Khao Khung Kraben, has

depths of less than 1.8m, with mud and sand flats extending

over most of the bay.

6.25 The coast between Khao Khung Kraben and Laem

Thoraphim, 15 miles WNW, recedes to form a bight. The coast

is hilly between Kao Khung Kraben and Khao Taphao Khwam,

which rises to an elevation of 128m about 4.5 miles NNW; then

the coast is low to Laem Thoraphim. A low hill, 44m high, lies
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 129

Pub. 161

close W of Laem Thoraphim, and Ko Khi Pla, 9m high, lies 1

mile WSW of the point, and 0.3 mile offshore.

6.25 The coastal bank, with depths of less than 5.1m, extends 2.5

miles off the NE shore of the bight. Islets and foul ground

extend 8 miles S of the NW shore. Ko Man Nok (12°34'N.,

101°42'E.), 5.5 miles SE of Laem Thoraphim, is the southernmost islet of the above group. The islet is 22m high and rockfringed; a light is shown from the summit. Hin Loftus, the

outermost danger of the group, is awash at LW, and lies 0.8

mile SE of Ko Man Nok. Vessels should not pass inside this

group of dangers.

6.25 Caution.—Hin Ai Lop, which dries, lies 5.5 miles W of

Khao Khung Kraben. Hin Ritthidet, with a depth of 3.7m, lies

0.7 mile SSW of Hin Ai Lop.

6.25 Hin Alhambra (12°26'N., 101°40'E.), a coral bank which

uncovers, lies 13 miles S of Laem Thoraphim. Parts of the reef

are reported to break in heavy weather. Depths of 0.3m lie 0.8

mile E and 0.3 mile W of its drying part.

6.26 The coast between Laem Thoraphim and Laem Ya, 14

miles WSW, is mostly low and wooded, except for a few

isolated hills. Laem Ya (12°35'N., 101°25'E.) rises to an

elevation of 121m close N. Khao Taphao Khwam, 551m high,

rising 5.5 miles N of Laem Ya, is the S peak of a range of

mountains extending 10 miles N.

6.26 Caution.—Ko Thalu, 65m high, and with rocks extending

0.3 mile S, lies 7 miles SW of Laem Thoraphim. Hin Klang

Rong, which is awash, lies 1 mile N of Ko Thalu.

6.27 Ko Kudi (Ko Kut), 49m high, with the rocky islet of

Ko Thai Khangkhao close S, lies 3.5 miles NW of Ko Thalu. It

is the southernmost of a chain of islets and rocks extending 3

miles from the coast. Vessels should pass S of Ko Thai Khangkhao.

6.27 Ko Samet, with its N extremity lying 2 miles E of Laem Ya,

is the largest island off this coast. The island is hilly, attaining

an elevation of 112m at its N end. A light is shown from the

NW end of Ko Samet.

6.27 Hin Khao, 7m high, and Ko Chan, 21m high, lie 1 mile NE

and 0.3 mile S, respectively, of the S extremity of Ko Samet.

Hin San Chalam, 1.5m high, lies 0.5 mile S of Ko Chan; rocks

above water extend 0.2 mile E, and depths of less than 5.5m

extend 0.3 mile SE of Hin San Chalam.

6.27 Chong Samet, the passage between Ko Samet and the

mainland, has several sunken rocks and shoals with depths of

less than 3.7m and should only be used by vessels with local

knowledge. Marine farms have been established in the

approaches to Chong Samet and in the strait itself.

6.27 The coast between Laem Ya and Laem Samae San, 27 miles

W, is low and wooded, except for Khao Sap, 62m high, an

isolated hill, located 2.5 miles NW of Laem Ya.

6.27 Hin But, with a depth of less than 1.8m, and marked S by a

buoy, lies 2.5 miles W of Laem Ya. Hin Redang lies 1.3 miles

NW of Hin But.

6.28 Mae Nam Rayong (12°39'N., 101°17'E.) discharges

9.2 miles WNW of Laem Ya; the bar of the river is constantly

shifting and the bar nearly dries. A light is shown close within

the river mouth. A pagoda stands on the S side of the promontory. A pier lies 2.5 miles E of the light. The recommended

route to the pier is marked by range lights and lighted buoys. 

6.28 Rayong (Map Ta Phut) (12°38'N., 101°19'E.), a terminal

enclosed by breakwaters, lies W of the mouth of Mae Nam

Rayong.

6.28 Depths—Limitations.—The pier is capable of accommodating a general cargo vessel up to 20,000 dwt and there are

two berths for liquid cargo vessels. 

6.28 Aspect.—Range lights, in line bearing 345°30', lead into the

harbor. The channel to the terminal is marked by lighted buoys.

Range lights, in line bearing 330°, lead to the wharf.

6.28 Ko Saket, 7m high, lies 6.5 miles W of the entrance to Mae

Nam Rayong, and 1.2 miles offshore. The islet lies on a bank,

with depths of less than 1.8m extending 2 miles offshore.

6.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot boards near the

fairway lighted buoy. Berthing and unberthing of vessels takes

place during daylight hours only. 

6.28 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 7.3 to

12.8m, S of Mae Nam Rayong Light, but there is no shelter in

either monsoon season. Vessels with a draft over 15m needs to

contact port control for an anchoring position.

6.28 Caution.—Marine farms exist in the approaches to, and in

Mae Nam Rayong.

Head of the Gulf of Thailand—East Side

6.29 Laem Samae San (12°36'N., 100°58'E.), 58m high, is

the E entrance point of the bight which forms the head of the

Gulf of Thailand. Hin Chula, a rock marked by a light, lies on

foul ground extending 0.2 mile E of Laem Samae San.

6.29 Islands and islets extend 8 miles S of Laem Samae San. Ko

Chuang (12°31'N., 100°58'E.), 148m high, lies with its

summit 4.5 miles S of Laem Samae San. Hin Lak Bet, 8m

high, and Ko Chan, 38m high, lie 1 mile NW, and 0.5 mile E,

respectively, of Ko Chuang. Two islets lie 0.3 mile off the NE

end of the island. A light is shown from the summit of Ko

Chuang.

6.29 Hin Chalam (12°28'N., 100°58'E.), 9m high, white and

steep-to, lies 2.5 miles S of Ko Chuang. Hin Yai, a coral patch

with a depth of 11m, lies 1.8 miles SSW of Hin Chalam.

6.29 Caution.—An ammunition dumping ground surrounds Hin

Chalam.

6.30 Ko Samae San, 167m high and located 1.2 miles N of

Ko Chuang, is the largest of the off-lying group of islands and

islets. Ko Chang Klua, 28m high, lies 1 mile E of the S

extremity of Ko Samae San. Hin Lak Kun Chae, 4m high, and

Kho Kham, 64m high, lie 1 mile, and 1.8 miles, respectively,

NW of the same extremity.

6.30 Ko Raet, 106m high, lies 0.3 mile S of Laem Samae San, and

about the same distance off the NE end of Ko Samae San.

6.30 The coast between Laem Samae San and Laem Chao, 2.3

miles WNW, is indented by two bights with low and wooded

shores, separated by a rocky point. Laem Chao (12°36'N.,

100°57'E.), a rocky headland, 62m high, is bordered 0.5 mile

WSW by Ko Chorakhe, a 57m high islet.

6.30 A submarine pipeline carrying natural gas has been laid from

seaward to a position 9 miles W of Rayong, and is best seen on

the appropriate chart. Vessels should exercise caution when

anchoring in the vicinity.
130 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

Sattahip (Chuk Samet Harbor) 

(12°37'N., 100°55'E.)

World Port Index No. 57446 

6.31 Sattahip is approached between Ko Chorakhe and Ko

I Lao, 2.3 miles WNW. Ko Yo lies close NE of Ko I Lao, on the

same reef. Ko Maeo, 16m high, lies 0.4 mile SE of Ko Yo, at

the SE end of a bank, with depths of less than 5.5m. Ko Mu,

68m high, lies 1.3 miles NW of Ko Chorakhe with a

breakwater, which shelters the harbor, extending 0.5 mile from

the SE extremity of the island. Ko Nang Ram, 29m high, lies

on the E side of the harbor entrance, nearly 0.5 mile E of the

breakwater head. The harbor consists of a tanker pier,

connected to the shore by a pipeline trestle, on the E side of the

harbor entrance, and deep-draft cargo berths farther N. The

port is reserved primarily for naval vessels. 

6.31 Winds—Weather.—The winds and swells in the area are

strong only during the Southwest Monsoon (April through

September). The prevailing winds are WSW at 5 knots in

January; S at 6 knots from February through May; SW at 8 to

10 knots from June through September; and N at 5 to 6 knots

from October through December.

6.31 The mean relative humidity varies from 68 per cent in

January to 82 per cent in October. The mean temperature

throughout the year is 13°C to 15.8°C.

6.31 Tides—Currents.—The tide at Ao Sattahip is usually

diurnal. The tidal rise at MHHW is 2.1m.

6.31 In the channel between Ko Chorakhe and the mainland the

tidal current sets NW on the rising tide and SE on the ebb,

attaining a velocity of 1 knot to 1.5 knots. A 2 to 3 knot current

has been reported in the entrance channel, running generally W

with the flood and E with the ebb.

6.31 Depths—Limitations.—The buoyed channel to the harbor

has depths of 8.9m across its seaward end, and depths of 9.4m

in the fairway of the remainder of the channel.

6.31 The tanker berth has depths of 10.1 to 11m alongside and

can accommodate a vessel of up to 250m in length with a draft

of 9.1m.

6.31 Five general cargo berths are available to ocean-going vessels. The West Quay has a length of 540m and can accommodate three vessels of up to 180m in length with drafts to 9m.

The North Quay is 350m long and able to accommodate two

vessels of up to 150m in length, with drafts to 7.8m. 

6.31 Aspect.—In the approach, the lights on Ko Chuang and

Laem Phu Chao are easily visible up to 20 miles on a clear day.

The breakwater light may be seen up to 10 miles.

6.31 Range lights on the W side of the cargo pier lead through the

buoyed channel to the harbor.

6.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available only in

daylight hours. Pilots board off the entrance to the buoyed

channel. Contact Sattahip Port Control on VHF channel 16

from 35 miles distant from the point of arrival. The working

frequency is VHF channel 12. Vessels are requested to ensure

arrival time is prior to 1600 as pilots will not berth during darkness due to the absence of navigation lights.

6.31 The vessel’s ETA should be sent at least 36 hours in advance,

along with the ship’s length and draft. Vessels are required to

keep continuous listening watch while approaching, at anchor,

and moving within the harbor.

6.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in depths of 22 to

31m, shells and mud, in the two charted anchorage areas situated approximately 4 miles SW and 3.5 miles WSW of the

Chuk Samet breakwater. These areas are exposed and may not

be tenable during the Southwest Monsoon.

6.31 A quarantine anchorage is situated 6 miles SSE of the Chuk

Samet breakwater and can best be seen on the chart.

6.32 Ao Sattahip (12°38'N., 100°54'E.) is shoal and

encumbered with several reef-fringed islands which lie in the

approach and entrance. Laem Pu Chao (12°39'N., 100°51'E.)

is the W entrance point of Ao Sattahip; a light is shown from

the summit. Unauthorized entry into Ao Sattahip is prohibited. 

6.32 Ko Tao Mo, 146m high, and the largest island, lies 0.8 mile

SE of Laem Pu Chao. 

6.32 Tides—Currents.—West of Kao Tao Mo the currents set

NW on the flood and SE on the ebb attaining velocities of 1

knot to 1.5 knots. The tidal currents in the channel between Ko

Tao Mo and Ko Phra flow in the same directions, attaining

velocities of 1 knot.

6.32 Depths—Limitations.—An oil pier with a T-head, 67m

long, and a depth of 5.8m alongside, is situated on the N side of

the W end of Ko Phra. A prominent radio mast, with oil tanks

close E, stands close SE of the pier. A drying bank, marked N

by a lighted buoy, extends 0.3 mile N of the E end of Ko Phra.

The approach to the pier from W is difficult and a vessel should

turn and secure alongside, heading W.

6.32 An L-head pier extending S and W of Laem Thian, is 152m

long and 18m wide, with a depth of 7m alongside. Two concrete LST ramps and mooring platforms are situated close E of

the L-head pier.

6.32 In the narrow channel between Ko Tao Mo and the mainland

there are least depths of 5.5m between the coastal banks.

6.32 Aspect.—The N coast of Ao Sattahip between Laem Pu

Chao and Laem Thian, 2 miles E, is mostly hilly and fringed by

stony beaches. Ko Phra, 103m high, lies 0.3 mile ENE of Kao

Tao Mo. 

6.32 The buildings and radio masts of the naval base at Ao

Sattahip extend N of Laem Thian. 

6.32 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with local knowledge, can be

taken, in depths of 6.4 to 8.2m, N of the NE end of Ko Tao Mo,

but anchorage NE of the island has been reported to be unsafe,

especially in the Southwest Monsoon.

6.32 Caution.—There are areas dangerous due to mines in the

approach to Sattahip and Chong Khram.

6.32 A seaplane landing area is situated in the central part of Ao

Sattahip. Vessels are prohibited from anchoring, fishing, or

transiting the area.

Ko Khram Yai

6.33 Ko Khram Yai (12°42'N., 100°47'E.) is separated

from the mainland by Chong Khram, which is about 1.7 miles

wide. The S extremity of Ko Khram Yai lies 4 miles WNW of

Laem Pu Chao, and the island rises to an elevation of 233m

near its S end.

6.33 Hin Yai, 4m high, and Hin Ta, 5m high, lie 0.3 mile SE and

0.5 mile E, respectively, of the S extremity of Ko Khram Yai. A

rock, with a depth of 1.6m, lies 0.3 mile E of Hin Yai.

6.33 The W side of Ko Khram Yai is fairly steep-to, and fringed
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 131

Pub. 161

by a rocky bank with depths of less than 1.8m extending 0.2

mile offshore.

6.33 A shoal, with a least depth of 4m, lies 1.5 miles N of Ko

Khram Yai. A bank, with depths of less than 10m, extends 2

miles farther N.

6.33 Ko Khram Noi, a 37m high islet, with a small islet close N,

lies 0.5 mile NNW of the NE extremity of Ko Khram Yai.

6.33 Hin Rang Kwian (12°48'N., 100°48'E.), a 9m high rock,

marked by a light, lies 4.5 miles N of the NE end of Ko Khram

Yai.

Chong Khram

6.34 Chong Khram is the strait between Ko Khram Yai and

the mainland. Ko I Ra, 47m high and rock-fringed, lies in the

middle of the S entrance to the strait. Hin Khi Sua, with rocks

extending 0.2 mile SE, lies 0.3 mile NE of Ko I Ra. A light is

shown from Hin Khi Sua. 

6.34 Ao Thung Prong lies on the E side of the strait where there

are depths of 13 to 22m in the fairway. A 9.4m patch lies 0.3

mile E of Hin Khi Sua.

6.34 On the W side of the strait, a bank with depths of 5.5 to 11m

extends 1.5 miles SE from the SE side of Ko Khram Yai. Hin

Ki Pla, 11m high, lies 0.7 mile SE of the E extremity of Ko

Khram Yai. An islet, 4m high, and a rock, with a depth of less

than 1.8m, lie 0.3 mile W, and 0.4 mile ESE, respectively, of

Hin Ki Pla.

6.34 Hin Wua Lai Khwai Wing, which partly dries, lies 0.8 mile

NE of the E extremity of Ko Khram Yai.

6.34 Winds—Weather.—Winds and swells are strong in Chong

Khram during the Southwest Monsoon. During the Northeast

Monsoon season, commencing about mid-September, reasonable shelter from winds and swells are afforded in this area.

6.34 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets N through Chong

Khram and the ebb current S, with velocities of 1 knot to 2

knots. The current attains velocities of 2 to 3 knots W of Ko I

Ra. However, tidal currents are difficult to predict in this area

and vary according to local winds, swells, and river currents. 

6.35 Chong Khram—East side.—The coast from Laem

Pu Chao (12°39'N., 100°51'E.) to Ko Klet Kaeo, 6.5 miles N,

is composed of high rocky bluffs, with sandy bays between.

Khao Hat Yao rises to an elevation of 290m, nearly 4 miles N

of Laem Pu Chao. Ao Thung Kai Tia and Ao Thung Prong, in

the S part of this coast, are separated from each other by a

promontory which rises to an elevation of 186m. The bays have

depths of less than 5.5m, and the 10m curve fronts the entrance

points of these bays close offshore. 

6.35 Caution.—Firing exercises may be conducted by the Royal

Thai Navy in the vicinity of Hat Yao Thung Prong. See Pub.

120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and

Southeast Asia for more information. 

6.36 Thung Prong (12°42'N., 100°50'E.) lies close N of

Ao Thung Prong. It consists of a T-shaped pier and De Long

Pier, situated 0.3 mile N. 

6.36 Tides—Currents.—The strong currents in Chong Khram

create a significant hazard as they run under De Long Pier. Approaching De Long Pier at other than slack water can be dangerous. Tidal currents have been reported to attain velocities of

as much as 6 to 8 knots in the vicinity of the piers at Thung

Prong.

6.36 Depths—Limitations.—Map Pier, the T-shaped pier, a

tanker berth, is 135m long, prolonged by dolphins, and can accommodate vessels up to 183m in length. The pier has depths

alongside of 10.1m at MLW and 9.1m at LWOS. Vessels up to

8.5m draft can remain alongside at LWOS.

6.36 The De Long Pier has a length of 183m, with a depth of

12.8m alongside.

6.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is strongly recommended due to the strong tidal currents.

6.36 Anchorage.—Anchorage while waiting for a berth or pilot

can be taken, in a depth of 13.7m, good holding ground, NE of

Ko Khram Yai between 12°43'N and 12°44'N.

6.36 Between the port of Thung Prong and Ko Klet Kaeo, 74m

high, located 3.5 miles N, depths of less than 10m extend 0.8

mile offshore. A bay, with low and wooded shores, indents the

coast between Ko Klet Kaeo and Laem Phatthaya (Patthaya)

(12°55'N., 100°51'E.), about 9 miles N. A bank, with depths of

less than 6m, extends 2 miles S from a position lying 2 miles

SSW of Laem Phatthaya; a least depth of 4.4m lies near the N

end of the bank.

Photos courtesy of Len Fernandez

De Long Pier
132 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

Off-lying Islets and Dangers

6.37 A chain of islets and dangers extends 2.5 miles offshore between Ko Khram Yai and Laem Krabang (13°05'N.,

100°53'E.).

6.37 Ko Lin (Ko Rin), 108m high, lies 5.5 miles W of Hin Rang

Kwian. Hin Ton Mai, and Hin Khao, each 14m high, lie 0.5

mile S and 0.8 mile NE, respectively, of Ko Lin.

6.37 Ko Phai, 138m high at its S end, lies 7 miles N of Ko Lin,

and 11 miles W of Laem Phatthaya. A light is shown from the

middle of the W side of Ko Phai.

6.37 Ko Man Wichai, 53m high and steep-to, lies 2.5 miles S of

Ko Phai. Ko Klung Badan, 44m high, lies 1.2 miles N of Ko

Man Wichai. Ko Hu Chang, a 2m high islet, lies 0.5 mile

farther N.

6.37 Ko Luam, 108m high, lies 1 mile NW of Ko Phai, and is the

westernmost of the off-lying islets. A bank, with depths of less

than 6m extends 2.5 miles N of Ko Luam.

6.37 Ko Lan, 205m high, lies 5 miles E of Ko Phai. Ko Sak, 33m

high, and Ko Khrok, 41m high, lie 0.5 mile N and 1 mile ESE,

respectively, of the N end of Ko Lan. A rock, with a depth of

2.7m, lies 0.8 mile S of Ko Khrok. A rock awash lies 1.3 miles

ESE of Ko Khrok, and is marked E by a buoy.

Laem Phatthaya to Ko Si Chang

6.38 Laem Phatthaya (Laem Patthaya) (12°55'N.,

100°51'E.), a rocky bluff, rises to a hill, 98m high, about 0.5

mile SSE, on which stands a radio tower, marked by red lights.

Ko Chun, low, rocky, and marked by a light, lies 1 mile N of

Laem Phatthaya.

6.38 A shallow bay, with low and wooded shores, indents the

coast between Laem Phatthaya and Laem Krabang, 9 miles N.

6.38 Ko Nok, 3m high and marked by a light, lies 4.5 miles SW of

Laem Krabang.

6.38 Ao Phatthaya, close NE of Laem Phatthaya, is a popular

beach resort. Excellent anchorage has been reported off Laem

Phatthaya. Ships generally anchor in the vicinity of position

12°56'N, 100°51'E, in depths of 16.5 to 24m, sand, good holding ground.

6.38 Approach to the anchorage can be made from SW or NW,

but vessels generally favor the approach from SW due to

currents which run in a SW-NE direction. Currents have been

reported to attain velocities of up to 6 knots. 

6.38 Laem Krabang is a hilly point, rising to Khao Laem Krabang, 100m high, about 0.5 mile N. Khao Pho Bai rises to

201m high, about 2.5 miles NNE of Laem Krabang.

6.39 Laem Krabang (Laem Chabang) (13°05'N.,

100°53'E.) (World Port Index No. 57462), is a multi-purpose

bulk, cruise, and container term-inal situated on the Gulf of

Siam, and has no depth limitations. This deep water port acts as

a sub-port for Bangkok.

6.39 Tides—Currents.—Currents having a velocity of 3 knots,

in a SW-NE direction, were reported (2009) to be observed in

the harbor. 

Depths—Limitations.—The controlling depth in the entrance channel is 13.6m. The port can accommodate vessels up

to 70,000 dwt, with a maximum draft of 13m. 

6.39 Basin No. 1 is is the northernmost of three basins protected

by a detached breakwater,and is dredged to a depth of 11.6m.

The North Quay consists of six terminals, all with maximum

depths alongside of 14m, except at Terminal A. Terminal A,

which is used for coastal traffic, has a length of 250m and a

maximum depth of 10m. Terminal A1, a cruise terminal, has a

365m long berth, and can handle vessels up to 70,000 dwt.

Terminal A2 and Terminal A3 are multi-purpose, and have

lengths of 400m and 350m respectively, with berths to accommodate vessels carrying sugar and molasses. Terminal A4 is

for agri-bulk, with a length of 350m. Terminal A5 is for coal

and general cargo and has a length of 225m.

6.39 The South Quay consists of five terminals, all with an alongside depth of 14m. Terminal B1 through Terminal B4 are container terminals, each with a berth length of 300m. The Laem

Chabang International Terminal, located at Terminal B5, is

400m long.

6.39 Basin No. 2 is dredged to a depth of 13.6m. The North Quay

consists of terminals C0, C1, C2, and C3. The South Quay consists of terminals D1, D2, and D3.

6.39 Basin No. 3 is under construction S of Basin No. 2. Breakwaters to the W and SSE of the basin are also under construction. 

6.39 An offshore berth is established in position 13°06'N,

100°52'E; an associated submarine pipeline connects the berth

to the shore. 

6.39 Aspect.—Range lights, in line bearing 059°18', lead into

Basin No. 1. 

6.39 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots, contacted on VHF

channels 13, 14, and 16, board in the following positions:

1. North Entrance—13°13.3'N, 100°51.9'E.

2. South Entrance—13°03.0'N, 100°47.3'E.

6.39 Regulations.—There is a VTS to monitor traffic and assist

with navigation within the Laem Chabang harbor limits.

6.39 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 14m,

off Laem Krabang in position 13°04'N, 100°50'E.

Ko Si Chang

6.40 Ko Si Chang is the largest of a group of islands lying

4 miles NW of Laem Krabang. Khao Sao Thong, 192m high,

lies 0.5 mile S of the N end of the island, and is the island’s

summit. The middle of the S part of the island is a wooded

tableland, 59m high, surrounded by hills rising steeply from

the coast.

6.40 Ko Khangkhao, 77m high, lies 0.3 miles S of Ko Yai Tao, an

islet close off the S end of Ko Si Chang.

6.40 Ko Thai Ta Mun, a 25m high islet, lies close SW of Ko

Khangkhao, to which it is connected by a reef. A light is shown

from the summit of the islet.

6.40 Hin Sampayu, 3.6m high and marked at its S end by a light,

lies 0.6 mile NNW of the NW end of Ko Si Chang.

6.40 Hin Kong Nok, a group of rocks nearly awash at LWS, lies

0.6 mile ENE of Hin Sampayu.

6.40 Ko Kham Yai, 62m high, lies 0.8 mile off the NE side of Ko

Si Chang. An obelisk, prominent from N, stands on the NW

extremity of Ko Kham Yai. Hin Kong Nai, a group of rocks

which partly dries, lies 0.3 mile NNW of the NW end of Ko

Kham Yai, on a bank with depths of less than 5.5m extending

0.3 mile farther NNW.

6.40 Ko Kham Noi, 20m high, and Ko Prong, 9m high, lie 0.2
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 133

Pub. 161

mile NE and 0.3 mile E, respectively, of Ko Kham Yai. Depths

of less than 5.5m extend 0.2 mile S of Ko Kham Noi.

6.40 Ko Ran Dok Mai, 15m high and reef-fringed, lies little more

than 0.7 mile SE of Ko Kham Yai.

6.40 Laem Wang (Laem Wat), a narrow promontory with a

prominent obelisk on its extremity, lies on the E side of Ko Si

Chang, nearly 1 mile W of Ko Ran Dok Mai. A light is shown

from Laem Wang.

6.40 Regulations.—A Traffic Separation Scheme has been established between Ko Si Chang and the mainland coast. The limits

of this scheme are best seen on the appropriate chart. This TSS

is not IMO-adopted, however Rule 10 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) applies. 

6.40 Caution.—Lesser depths than charted exist in the navigable

waters between Ko Nok (13°01'N., 100°49'E.) and the Ko Si

Chang Transhipment Area (13°09'N., 100°50'E.). 

6.40 The waters around Ko Si Chang having depths of less than

5.5m are dangerous for anchoring or fishing due to mines, but

are open to surface navigation. Ko Si Chang Anchorage is

usually approached from N. Laem Sommuk Anchorage is

available for small vessels in case of adverse conditions at Ko

Si Chang.

6.41 Ko Si Chang (13°10'N., 100°49'E.) (World Port

Index No. 57470), in the NE part of Ko Si Chang, is utilized by

vessels hampered by the bar of Mae Nam Chao Phraya. Vessels

proceeding to or from Bangkok (Krung Threp) may either load

from or discharge to lighters here.

6.41 Depths—Limitations.—Ko Si Chang Terminal consists of

a pier with four liquid cargo berths and a ro-ro berth at the root

of the pier. Berth No. 1 has a depth alongside of 16m and can

accommodate tankers of up to 100,000 dwt. Berth No. 2 has a

depth alongside of 16m and handles tankers of up to 10,000

dwt. Berth Nos. 3 and 4 have depths of 12m and can

accommodate vessels of up to 5,000 dwt. 

6.41 Pilotage.—Pilots board in the following positions:

1. North Entrance—position 13°07.1'N, 100°50.8'E.

2. South Entrance—position 13°04.9'N, 100°51.4'E. 

6.41 Regulations.—Berthing is allowed during daylight hours

only, but unberthing may be permitted at night.

6.41 Anchorage.—During the Northeast Monsoon, large vessels

generally anchor between Ko Kham Yai and Ko Ran Dok Mai,

in depths exceeding 9m, with the S extremity of Ko Kham Yai

bearing 315°.

6.41 During the Southwest Monsoon, large vessels anchor N of

Ko Kham Noi. Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9m, with

the N extremity of Ko Si Chang bearing 253°, distant 1.2 miles.

6.41 Anchorage, sheltered from both monsoons, can also be

taken, in depths of 9.2 to 16.5m, between Laem Wang and Ko

Ran Dok Mai.

6.41 Caution.—A stranded wreck lies 1 mile ENE of Laem

Wang.

Si Racha (Ao Udom) Terminal 

(13°07'N., 100°53'E.)

World Port Index No. 57460

6.42 Situated on the mainland, 4 miles ESE of Ko Si

Chang, the port is contained within a restricted area, the limits

of which are best seen on the chart. There is one dry cargo pier

and three tanker terminals.

6.42 Winds—Weather.—Occasional squalls may be experienced.

6.42 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Ko Si Chang is 2.3m at

MHHW, and 1.9m at MLHW.

6.42 A N set may be experienced with a rising tide.

6.42 Depths—Limitations.—The port is able to accommodate

tank vessels up to 118,000 dwt, 274m in length, with drafts to

15.3m. Dry cargo vessels of up 150,000 dwt, having a maximum length of 265m, and draft of 12.8m can be accommodated.

6.42 There are four berths at a 450m long jetty for the handling of

scrap metals. Vessels of up to 60,000 dwt can be accommodated.

6.42 The Siam Seaport Terminal has four berths, with a total

quayage of 745m. The terminal can handle bulk, break bulk,

steel, wood, chemical, and agricultural cargos. 

6.42 From N to S; the berths at Sriracha Oil Terminal are, as follows:

1. TORC (Thai Oil Refining Company) Sea Berth consists of six mooring buoys at the seaward end of a pipeline. A

tanker, 274m long having a maximum draft of 14m, can be

accommodated. Torc Jetty lies on the pipeline 0.5 mile from

the shore.

2. PTT Jetty, a gas separation terminal, extends 0.7 mile

offfshore. A pipeline with mooring buoys at its extremity extends NW from the jetty head. No. 1 Berth, which accommodates vessels up to 100,000 dwt, is situated at the head of

the jetty, and No. 2 Berth and No. 3 Berth, which accommodate vessels up to 5,000 and 2,000 dwt, respectively, are

situated on the N side of the jetty. A tanker 280m long and

having a draft of 15m can be accommodated.

3. Esso Sea Berth consists of six mooring buoys at the

end of a pipeline. A tanker 274m long and having a draft of

15.3m can be accommodated. A platform flanked by dolphins is situated on the pipeline 0.5 mile from the shore and

Esso Jetty, also on the pipeline, is 0.1 mile from the shore.

6.42 Vessels may berth both N or S at all berths depending on the

tide and weather. Tankers berth in daytime only.

6.42 A hulk is moored offshore close N of the restricted area.

6.42 Aspect.—A conspicuous flare stands about 0.3 mile E of

Kaho Pho Bai (13°07'N., 100°54'E.). A conspicuous radio

tower painted in red and white bands stands 1 mile SW of the

peak.

6.42 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots can be contacted

on VHF channels 10, 12, 13, 14, and 16 and board in the following positions:

1. North Entrance—position 13°13.3'N, 100°51.9'E.

2. South Entrance—position 13°03.0'N, 100°47.3'E.

6.42 The following information should be passed to Supply

Operations Division (PPT):

1. Name and call sign of vessel.

2. Flag.

3. LOA, draft, and width of vessel.

4. ETA at terminal.

5. Nature of cargo, technical name, UN number (if applicable), and quantity.

6. Distribution of cargo (and that to be left on board).

7. Is vessel fitted with an inert gas system?
134 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

8. Any defects of vessel or its machinery which may

affect navigation, safety, or the marine environment.

6.42 The port authority should be notified immediately if there is

a change of more than 1 hour in vessel’s ETA. Radio contact

should be established 12 hours in advance through Bangkok. 

6.42 Pilots should be contacted by VHF 24 hours and 6 hours in

advance. Contact the terminal 3 hours in advance.

6.42 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in an area 1 mile in

radius, centered in position 13°04'N., 100°51'E, in a depth of

22m, mud and sand, good holding ground. Anchorage is prohibited within the restricted area.

6.42 Directions.—The following positions and courses mark a

recommended track that reportedly give a least depth of 17m.

From position 12°43'00"N, 100°44'36''E, steer 000° to position

12°56'14''N, 100°44'36''E; then steer 022° to position

13°00'00''N, 100°46'12''E. Proceed to steer 037° to position

13°06'20"N, 100°51'00"E and then steer for the port.

6.42 Caution.—Vessels are advised to contact local authorities

for the latest information on depths and approach routes.

6.42 Sea suction intakes are likely to get blocked by vegetation

and floating debri.

Ko Si Chang to Mae Nam Chao Phraya

6.43 Laem Samuk (13°19'N., 100°54'E.) rises to an elevation of 74m about 10 miles NE of Ko Si Chang, and appears as

an island. Khao Phu, a 314m high hill, rises 5.5 miles SE of

Laem Samuk. Khao Khieo, 798m high and located 4.5 miles

NE of Khao Phu, is the highest of a range of hills along this

stretch of coast.

6.43 Khao Phra Bat, 146m high, lies 7 miles NE of Laem Samuk,

and is at the N end of the high land on the E side of the Gulf of

Thailand. Mae Nam Bang Pakong, entered 10 miles NNE of

Laem Samuk, is accessible only to small craft. 

6.43 The coast between the mouth of Mae Nam Bang Pakong and

the mouth of Mae Nam Chao Phraya, 22 miles W, is low and

bordered with mangroves. This coast is fronted by a bank with

depths of less than 11m, extending from 6 to 9 miles offshore.

The bank is encumbered by fishing traps.

Mae Nam Chao Phraya Entrance 

(13°32'N., 100°36'E.) and Bangkok (Krung Thep) 

(13°45'N., 100°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 57450

6.44 Mae Nam Chao Phraya is entered at the head of the

Gulf of Thailand between the fort at Pom Phra Chulachomklao (13°32'N., 100°35'E.) and a point 1 mile NE. The river

provides access to the city of Bangkok, 25 miles upstream.

Krung Thep (Bangkok) New Harbor lies 15 miles above the

river entrance.

6.44 The entrance to Mae Nam Chao Phraya is fronted by a bar

extending about 8 miles seaward. Extensive banks of mud and

sand dry on the bar, which is encumbered with numerous

fishing stakes. Lights may be shown from the stakes at night. A

channel dredged to a depth of 8.5m leads across the bar for a

distance of 10 miles to the river entrance.

6.44 Samut Prakan (Changwat Samut Prakan), a town situated 3.5

miles above the river entrance, is the quarantine station, where

customs officials will board.

6.44 Winds—Weather.—At Bangkok during the day, winds

from between S and SW predominate from February to June,

and are from the SW and W from July to September, with an

average of Force 2 on the Beaufort scale. Northerlies

predominate from October to December, and the winds are

variable in January, with the average being Force 1 to 2 in these

months. At night, the wind is calm most of the time throughout

the year, with the average wind being less than Force 1.

6.44 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Bangkok Bar is 3.5m at

MHHW and 3m at MLHW.

6.44 There are great irregularities in the time and heights of the

tide on the bar. The morning tides are greater than the evening

tides from October to March, or when the declination of the

sun is S; the evening tides are greater than the morning tides

from April to September. There are usually two tides per day,

but at times the weak tide disappears and there is only one tide

per day.

6.44 Depths are also affected by the wind, S winds increasing

them. Depths will be increased when a strong NE or E wind is

blowing in the gulf. Depths are reduced with strong W winds

and heavy NW or W squalls when the flood current is retarded.

6.44 A typhoon in the South China Sea, in the vicinity of Mui

Vung Tau, has been known to decrease the depth of the bar by

as much as 0.9m.

6.44 High tide at Bangkok is 3 hours after high tide on the bar.

The river is at its lowest level in July and August, and at its

highest level in February.

6.44 Outside the bar, the flood tidal current sets NW and the ebb

sets SE; both attain rates of 0.2 to 1 knot. During the Northeast

Monsoon the current occasionally sets W along the edge of the

bar with considerable strength.

6.44 In the channel across the bar the currents follow the direction

of the channel and are influenced by the tidal currents and currents from the river. They attain velocities of 0.5 knot to 3.5

knots.

6.44 At Bangkok, the tidal currents are usually weaker than the

river currents from September to December; during this period

the flow is almost continuously seaward. During the rainy season the currents may occasionally attain velocities of 4 to 5

knots.

6.44 Depths—Limitations.—Entering vessels are restricted in

the maximum length and draft they may carry over the bar to

Bangkok. The maximum draft a vessel may possess when

transiting the bar is calculated by adding a factor called the

“Bar Adder” to the predicted height of tide at the bar as published in the Thai tide tables. The “Bar Adder” is dependent on

the vessel’s length, and is given below. In any event, vessels are

restricted to a length of 183m and a maximum draft of 8.2m.

6.44 Vessels of deep draft and lengths exceeding 150m should

take into consideration their handling characteristics, and the

Length of Vessel Bar Adder

128.4 to 135.6m 4.8m

135.6 to 143.3m 4.6m

143.3 to 152.4m 4.4m 

152.4 to 161.5m 4.2m
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 135

Pub. 161

winding nature of the fairway before attempting the channel.

Vessels unable to cross the bar fully loaded can anchor off Ko

Si Chang, or leeward of Laem Samuk during the Northeast

Monsoon, and work cargo.

6.44 Three overhead cables span the navigable channel of the

river. The first two, with vertical clearances of 71m and 53m,

lie respectively 5 miles N, and 7.2 miles NNE of the fort at the

river mouth. The third cable, with a vertical clearance of 40m,

is situated 341 mile SE of the Grand Palace (13°45'N.,

100°30'E.).

6.44 Four bridges cross the fairway from seaward to a point above

the Royal Thai Navy anchorage. The lower two, situated 3

miles S, and 0.7 mile SSE of the Grand Palace, have moveable

center spans. The two bridges above the Grand Palace have

fixed spans.

6.44 Several submarine cables and pipelines cross the channel at

various places, and are best seen on the chart.

6.44 By Thai regulation, all inbound cargo and passengers must

be discharged at the Klongtoi Wharves, unless a special permit

is obtained from the port authorities in advance. The wharf

complex is situated in the approximate position 13°42'N,

100°35'E, and offers facilities for handling container, bulk,

liquid, and general cargo. A row of 36 mooring dolphins off the

complex offers seven mid-stream berths for vessels not exceeding 172m in length. Vessels loading cargo use these berths, as

well as private wharves and other mooring berths throughout

the harbor area.

6.44 Aspect.—The coast on either side of the river entrance is

low and mangrove-covered, presenting no natural landmarks.

The first conspicuous features seen will be the Bangkok Bar

Pilot Light Station (13°23'N., 100°36'E.).

6.44 The channels and depths in the vicinity of Bangkok Bar are

subject to frequent change. Buoys and other aids to navigation

are modified accordingly. Remains of former leading lights and

ranges may exist. 

6.44 The harbor is divided into three zones, the limits of which

are marked by pairs of obelisks, one on each riverbank. Zone

II, situated roughly between the meridians of 100°31'E and

100°35.5'E is termed the New Port, and is of the greatest

commercial significance. Zone I, which takes in the waterfront

of Bangkok proper, is considered the old port. Royal Thai

Naval installations and anchorages are situated throughout the

area.

6.44 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours.

Vessels 50m and over must board a pilot when transitting the

river between the Bankok Bar Channel entrance and the upper

limits of the port. The pilot may be boarded within about 0.3

mile of the Bangkok Bar Pilot Light Station, situated 13°23'N,

100°36'E. The ETA should be sent 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12

hours in advance.

6.44 The following information is required by the port authorities:

1. Vessel’s name and nationality.

2. Last port of call.

3. ETA at pilot station.

4. Fresh water draft.

5. General cargo tonnage.

6. Any dangerous cargo.

7. If a heavy lift is required.

8. If fresh water is required.

9. Number of passengers.

10. Time of anchoring at pilot station if applicable.

6.44 Vessels should establish contact by VHF within 10 miles of

port and maintain listening watch on VHF channel 16.

6.44 Regulations.—In addition to a request for radio pratique, the

harbormaster must be contacted at least 24 hours prior to

arrival, and a request made to berth at Klongtoi Wharves.

Departing vessels must notify the harbormaster at least 6 hours

prior to leaving berth. Vessels requesting a berth, or a shift of

berth should fly Flag T of the International Code of Signals.

6.44 Customs and health officials will board in the river off Samut

Prankan Changwat Samut Prakan (13°36'N., 100°36'E.).

6.44 Where the channel is divided by mooring berths or vessels

are moored in midstream, the channel to the E of these obstructions shall be used by all vessels exceeding 50 tons.

6.44 A vessel drifting in the harbor shall fly Flag G of the International Code of Signals forward, and shall keep to midstream

or as near to vessels moored in midstream as safe navigation

permits when being passed by a vessel with a following current.

6.44 Vessels anchoring off the seaward end of the bar channel

should provide watchmen and adequate lighting, and should

ensure that all ladders are kept up.

6.44 Signals.—Radio and VHF facilities are available in the port,

and may be used to contact the port officials or pilots.

6.44 Tide and berthing signals are displayed from a flagstaff at the

E end of a quay at the mouth of Khlong Phra Khanong

(13°42'N., 100°35'E.). 

6.44 A vessel in distress should use the following code groups via

flashing light or signal hoist to summon assistance:

1. DQ—I am on fire.

2. ST—I require a police boat.

6.44 The above signals should be supplemented by the code

group X, sounded on the ship’s whistle. Vessels requesting

assistance by VHF should use the above code groups, giving

vessel’s name and location in English.

6.44 Anchorage.—Vessels intending to cross the bar usually

anchor about 2 miles SE of the Pilot Light Station, in charted

depths of 12.5 to 14m. The dangerous goods, quarantine, and

naval anchorages are situated 4.5 miles ESE, 6.25 miles E, and

2.5 miles E of the Pilot Light Station, respectively. The

quarantine and dangerous goods anchorages have general

depths of 14m, while the naval anchorage has lesser depths. A

dangerous wreck lies near the center of the naval anchorage. If

these anchorages become untenable, vessels can anchor off Ko

Si Chang, or in the Northeast Monsoon leeward of Laem Sommuk.

6.44 Vessels waiting for a berth or loading cargo usually anchor in

midstream. The pilot should be consulted before anchoring.

6.44 Several areas prohibited to anchorage and the laying of submarine cables, pipelines, and other obstructions exist in the

waters of the port, and are best seen on the appropriate chart.

6.44 Directions.—Taking into consideration the vessel’s draft,

there may be a need to proceed to an appropriate anchorage

and discharge cargo before attempting the bar.

6.44 Keeping a good lookout for fishing vessels and other traffic,

proceed to the Pilot Light Station described above. Take care to

avoid the charted anchorage areas, and the shoal area charted 3

miles E of the Pilot Light Station. The shoal has a least depth

of 4.9m. Several dangerous wrecks are charted in the

approaches to Bangkok. Dangerous wrecks are charted within
136 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

the Naval Anchorage, and about 2 miles SSE of the Pilot Light

Station, just W of the general anchorage. An extensive expanse

of drying flats studded with fishing stakes fronts the coast in

the vicinity of Mae Nam Chao Phraya, crossed only by the

river entrance channel. 

6.44 The channel is about 12 miles long, has a width of 100m in

the reaches and 250m in the bends. The least depth in the

middle of the channel is about 5m (1996). The fairway is well

marked by beacons, buoys, lighted ranges, and unlighted

ranges, some of which are moved as necessary as the channel

shifts. 

6.44 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia for details on areas

dangerous due to mines in the vicinity of Bangkok.

6.44 A dangerous wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, lies in the approaches to Bangkok approximately 2.5 miles SE of Phra

Chunlachomklao Fort. 

The Gulf of Thailand—West Shore—Mae Nam

Chao Phraya to Prachuap Khiri Khan

6.45 The coast at the head of the Gulf of Thailand, between

the mouth of Mae Nam Chao Praya to the mouth of Mae Nam

Mae Khlong, 37 miles WSW, is low and wooded. There are

numerous fishing stakes off this section of coast and depths of

less than 9m extend up to 11 miles off the coast.

6.45 Midway along the coast, the mouth of Mae Nam Nakhon

Chai Si, obstructed by a shallow bar, is difficult to distinguish.

A radio tower, 64m high and marked by an obstruction light,

stands 2.5 miles farther N, at Samut Sakhon. 

6.45 Mae Nam Mae Khlong is fronted by a shallow bar and

drying mud banks extending about 3.5 miles offshore. A radio

tower, 76m high and marked by an obstruction light, stands 2.5

miles N of the river mouth.

6.46 Laem Phak Bia (13°02'N., 100°06'E.), a low point

marked by a light, lies 20 miles SSE of the mouth of Mae Nam

Mae Khlong. 

6.46 A marine farm is situated 2.5 miles SSW of Laem Phak Bia. 

6.46 A bank, with depths of less than 10m, stretches 24 miles S

from Laem Phak Bia, and extends up to 9 miles offshore.

6.46 Khao Chao Lai, 372m high, rises 15 miles SSW of Laem

Phak Bia, 3 miles inland from the coast.

6.46 A large cement factory and four storage silos are situated

close S of Khao Chao Lai. A canal, 18m wide, extends 1.5

miles inland from the coast E of the factory. The canal entrance

is protected by parallel rock jetties extending 0.7 mile seaward.

The depth of the jetty channel and canal is about 4m.

6.46 Khao Chong Muong rises to an elevation of 642m about 6

miles SW of Khao Chao Lai. Khao Pak Pla, 469m high, lies 7.5

miles farther SSE.

6.46 Hua Hin Light, 5.5 miles SE of Khao Pak Pla, is shown from

a rock close offshore.

6.46 Khao Takiap, a 124m high hill, lies on a small headland extending prominently from the coast, 3.5 miles SSE of Hua Hin

Light. Hin Sao, 3m high, lies 1 mile E of Khao Takiap.

6.46 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, for areas dangerous

to anchoring or fishing.

6.47 Ko Sai, a 35m high islet, lies 2 miles S of Hin Sao. Ko

Sadao, 29m high, with Ko Khi Nok, 15m high, close E, lies 0.8

mile farther S.

6.47 A hill, 190m high, and Khao Kalok (12°20'N., 100°00'E.),

131m high, lie close to the coast, 1.7 miles SW, and 8 miles S,

respectively of Ko Khi Nok.

6.47 Ko Kolam (Ko Koram), 197m high, lies 5.5 miles S of Khao

Kalok.

6.47 Ko Sattakut, 150m high, and marked at its NE end by a light,

lies 2 miles SE of Ko Kolam, and 0.5 mile NE of a hilly

headland.

6.47 Khao Sam Roi Yot, a remarkable range of mountains, lies W

of Ko Sattakut, and 5 miles inland. The two highest peaks, the

highest 605m high, are located at the N end of the range. The

range has the appearance of a serrated tableland at a distance,

and is unlike any other land in the Gulf of Thailand.

6.47 Khao Mong Lai (Khao Ta Mong Rai) (11°50'N., 99°50'E.),

a 269m high summit, is located at the N end of a promontory,

24 miles SW of Ko Sattakut. The sides of the hills forming the

promontory fall steeply to the shore. 

6.47 The stretch of coast between Khao Mong Lai and Laem

Phak Bia is known as Chai Fung Somdet Phra Naresuam

Maharat (the coast of King Naresuan the Great).

Prachuap Khiri Khan

6.48 The coast between the promontory called Prachuap

Khiri Khan (11°48'N., 99°48'E.) and another promontory, 6

miles SSW, is indented by two shallow bays, separated by a

third promontory. The heads of the bays are low, wooded, and

marshy.

6.48 Ao Prachuap Khiri Khan, the N bay, is fringed by a drying

coastal bank, and has depths of less than 5.5m. The town of

Prachuap Khiri Khan lies in the SW part of the bay.

6.48 The promontory separating the bays rises to a conspicuous

horn-shaped hill, 207m high. Ko Raet, 130m high and marked

by a light on its summit, lies 0.5 mile NE of the promontory; a

rock awash lies 0.5 mile SE of the drying coastal bank.

6.48 Ao Manao, the S bay, dries at its head, and has depths of less

than 5.5m. Ko Luam, 122m high, is located in the approach to

Ao Manao, 1.8 miles NE of the S entrance point of the bay. Ko

I Aen, 82m high, is located inside the entrance of the bay, 1

mile WNW of Ko Luam.

6.48 Khao Khlong Wan (11°45'N., 99°48'E.), a conspicuous

rocky horn, 250m high, is located 1 mile NE of the S entrance

point of Ao Manao.

6.48 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, for areas dangerous

to anchoring or fishing due to mines.

6.48 An airplane target practice area extends 35 miles NE and 20

miles SE from Ao Manao. Navigation is prohibited in the area

during aerial bombing exercises.

Prachuap Khiri Khan to Ao Chumphon

6.49 The coast between Khao Khlong Wan and Laem Mae

Ramphuong, 37 miles SSW, is low, wooded, and regular except

for a group of conical hills. The highest of these hills rises to

218m about 14 miles N of Laem Mae Ramphuong. Khao Noi,

165m high, lies 3.5 miles farther N and 2.5 miles inland.
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 137

Pub. 161

6.49 This coast is relatively steep-to, all dangers lying within 2

miles of the coast except for Ko Chan.

6.49 Ko Phing, 63m high, with a rock awash close W, lies 1.8

miles S of Khao Khlong Wan. Ko Phang, 64m high, lies 0.8

mile farther SSW.

6.49 Ko Chan, 63m high, with another small islet close S, lies 7.5

miles SSW of Khao Khlong Wan.

Jasmine Terminal (11°18'N., 101°13'E.) consists of a platform and the FPSO Jasmine Venture MV7, which is equipped

with a radio direction finding beacon. Vessels should give an

ETA 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours prior to arrival. The

maximum size vessel handled was 150,000 dwt.

6.49 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory when berthing and is

done by the Mooring Master. Mooring services are available

during daylight hours only, unless unmooring, which can be

done 24 hours. 

6.49 If waves reach 2.5m in height or wind speeds reach 25 knots,

the vessel must unmoor. 

6.49 Laem Mae Ramphung (11°11'N., 99°34'E.) is the S

extremity of a peninsula which appears as an island from a

distance due to the low elevation of the coast W of it; the point

rises to an elevation of 248m.

6.49 Bang Saphan (11°11'N., 99°33.8'E.), a small port located W

of Laem Mae Ramphung, is designed to handle steel, rubber,

pineapples, and containerized cargo. The approach to the port

is marked by a lighted buoy.

6.49 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory is available 24 hours;

pilots board in position 11°11'N, 99°36.3'E. 

6.49 An islet lies close N of Laem Mae Ramphung; a dangerous

wreck lies 0.5 mile N of the islet.

6.49 The coast between Laem Mae Ramphung and Laem Yai, 18

miles SSW, continues mostly low except for a few isolated hills

inland. About midway between the points, the coastal bank,

with Ko Thalu, 89m high and flat-topped at its outer end, extends 4 miles seaward. Ko Sing lies on the coastal bank

between Ko Thalu and the coast; Ko Sang lies 1.5 miles farther

SSW. A shoal, with a depth of 4.3m, sand, lies 0.5 mile NE of

Ko Sang.

6.49 Laem Yai, a prominent craggy headland, rises to an elevation

of 301m, at the NE end of a peninsula. Laem Chong Phra, the S

extremity of the peninsula, lies 2.5 miles SSW of Laem Yai. Ko

Wiang, 247m high in its N part, lies close SW of Laem Chong

Phra.

6.50 Ko Rang, 100m high and exhibiting a light at its summit, lies 1.5 miles SE of the SW end of Ko Wiang. Ko Chikong, 51m high and with a rock awash close NE, lies 1 mile

NNE of Ko Rang.

6.50 Ko Ran Kai, 30m high, and Ko Ran Pet, 26m high, the outermost islets, lie 3.2 miles ESE and 3.5 miles SE, respectively, of

Ko Rang.

6.50 The coast between Laem Yai and Laem Kho Kwang, 27

miles SW, is hilly, rocky, and reef-fringed, except for several

small coves. These coves dry at their heads and are suitable

only for small craft.

6.50 Khao Yai Bang Chak, steep and marked by a beacon, rises to

a height of 192m close to the coast, 9 miles SW of Laem Yai.

Table Rock, 26m high, lies 2.5 miles S of the summit, and 0.5

mile offshore. Ko Khai, a 108m high islet, is located 2.5 miles

farther S.

6.50 Laem Thaen, a small peninsula, with an elevation of 33m,

projects from the coast, 3 miles SW of Ko Khai; there is a red

cliff at its S extremity.

6.50 Khao Din So rises to an elevation of 350m and stands 5.5

miles SW of Laem Thaen. Laem Pho Bae, 5 miles farther S,

rises to an elevation of 107m close inshore. A rock with a depth

of 6.8m lies 2.7 miles E of Laem Pho Bae.

6.50 Laem Kho Kwang (10°31'N., 99°16'E.), 2 miles farther

SSW, has a hill 56m high at its extremity which is connected to

the coast SW by a low isthmus covered with trees. Another hill,

118m high, lies 1 mile SW of the point.

6.50 Benchamas Explorer (10°31'N., 101°15'E.) is an offshore

terminal consisting of a floating storage unit (FSU) for crude

oil produced in the Gulf of Thailand. Vessels of up to 110,000

dwt can be accommodated. Pilots board in position 10°30'N,

101°09'E or in a position advised by the terminal. Vessels

should send their ETA 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours prior

to arrival. The terminal can be contacted on VHF channels 16

and 73. 

6.50 Tantawan Explorer (10°05'N., 101°25'E.) is a floating

production storage and off-loading (FPSO) platform. Pilots

board in position 10°02'N, 101°20'E or in a position advised by

the terminal. Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours, 24 hours,

and 4 hours prior to arrival. 

Off-lying Islands and Dangers in the Approach to

Ao Chumphon

6.51 Ko Chorakhe, 42m high in its N end, lies 7 miles ENE

of Laem Kho Kwang, in the NE approach to Ao Chumphon. A

reef extends 0.5 mile W of the SW end of the island, and a

shoal, with a depth of 6.8m, extends 0.8 mile farther W.

6.51 Ko Ngam Yai (10°30'N., 99°26'E.), 103m high, the

outermost island in the approach, lies 9 miles E of Laem Kho

Kwang. Hin Lak Ngam, an above-water rock, and Ko Ngam

Noi (Ko Ngam Lek), lie close NNE and 0.3 mile S, respectively, of Ko Ngam Yai.

6.51 Ko Lak Ngam, 19m high, lies 2.2 miles SSW of Ko Ngam

Yai. Hin Lak Mattra, 3m high, lies 2.5 miles farther WSW. A

5.4m depth and an 8.2m depth lie 0.5 mile W and 0.7 mile

NNE, respectively, of Hin Lak Mattra.

6.51 Ko Kalok, 40m high and rock-fringed, lies 3 miles WSW of

Ko Ngam Yai. Ko Thalu, 29m high, lies 1 mile farther SW.

6.51 Ao Chumphon (10°28'N., 99°16'E.) is entered between

Laem Kho Kwang and a point lying 5.5 miles S. Hin Chumphon, a dangerous rock, lies 1.8 miles SE of Laem Kho

Kwang. A shoal, with a depth of 3m, lies between Hin Chumphon and the shore WNW.

6.51 Ko Kho Thian lies on a reef close NE of the S entrance point

of the bay. Ko Samet, 82m high, lies 1 mile NE of Ko Kho

Thian. An 8.9m patch lies 0.7 mile E of the N end of Ko Samet,

and a rock awash lies 0.3 mile W of the SW end of the islet.

6.51 Ko Mattaphon, an islet marked by a light, lies 2.5 miles W of

the N end of Ko Samet, and 0.5 mile NE of the mouth of Mae

Nam Chumphon.

6.51 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage

can be taken, in depths of 7.3 to 9.2m, mud and sand, about 1.5

miles NE of Ko Mattaphon.

6.51 Caution.—During the Southwest Monsoon, there are numerous fishing stakes in Ao Chumphon.
138 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

Ao Chumphon to Lang Suan Roads

6.52 The coast between Ko Kho Thian (10°25'N.,

99°19'E.) and Laem Tian, 4.2 miles S, has hills rising to

elevations of about 100m close to the coast. Ko Maphrao, 55m

high, lies 0.5 mile offshore midway along this coast.

6.52 A group of islands and islets, oriented NE, lies off the above

coast, in the SE approach to Ao Chumphon. Ko Mattra, 132m

high, with rocks extending a short distance NE and SW, is the

outermost and highest of the group, and lies 4.5 miles ESE of

Ko Kho Thian. Ko I Raet, 94m high, lies 1.3 miles SW; Ko Lak

Raet and other rocks above water lie close NE of Ko I Raet. A

bank, with a least depth of 6.4m, is centered 1.8 miles S of the

SW end of Ko Mattra. Ko Sak, 37m high, lies 2.5 miles NW of

Ko Mattra.

6.52 Ao Sawi, entered between Laem Tian and Laem Pracham

Hiang, 8 miles SSW, is a shoal bay with drying flats at its head.

Several islets lie across the entrance of the bay. Ko Rang

Kachiu, 69m high and the outermost islet, lies 2.5 miles SSE of

Laem Tian.

6.52 Laem Pracham Hiang rises to Khao Pracham Hiang, 255m

high. Ko Kula rises to a sharp peak, 175m high, about 1 mile

NE of Laem Pracham Hiang.

6.52 The coast between Laem Pracham Hiang and the mouth of

Khlong Lang Suan, 18 miles SSW is bordered by hills, 100 to

300m high.

6.52 Ko Mat Wai Noi, 47m high, with Ko Mat Wai Yai, 55m high,

close S, lies 1.5 mile S of Laem Pracham Hiang. Ko Khang

Sua, 60m high, lies 3 miles farther SSW, and 2.5 miles offshore.

6.52 Ko Rang Banthat (Ko Rang Prathat), 25m high and marked

by a light, lies 2 miles S of Ko Khang Sua.

6.53 Nang Nuang Oil Field (10°07'30"N., 99°26'12"E.)

consisting of a production platform to which a storage tanker is

moored, is situated 14 miles ENE of Ko Rang Banthat. A light

is exhibited from the production platform.

6.53 Depths—Limitations.—The depth alongside the terminal is

29m.

6.53 Four lighted buoys mark the extent of an area in which navigation is restricted within 500m of the production platform and

storage tanker.

6.53 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for tankers berthing at the

terminal, and can only be carried out in daylight hours. 

6.53 Ko Phithak, 100m high, lies 0.4 mile NE of Laem Thong Sai.

Hin Phithak, above water, lies on a ledge of rocks extending

0.5 mile E of Ko Phithak.

6.53 Laem Riu, 2.5 miles S of Ko Phithak, rises to an elevation of

119m.

6.54 Lang Suan Roads lies off the mouth of Khlong Lang

Suan (Mae Nam) (9°57'N., 99°10'E.). The approach to the

river is encumbered by rocks and shoals, and during the Southwest Monsoon, numerous fishing stakes may be encountered N

and S of the river entrance. A light is shown from the entrance.

Entrance Lighted Buoy No. 1 is moored 0.6 mile ENE of Lang

Suan Light.

6.54 Hin Thong Wo, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 7.7m, lies

in the NE approach, 7 miles NE of Lang Suan Light. Hin

Haeng, with a depth of 4.4m, lies 3.5 miles SW of Hin Thong

Wo.

6.54 Hin Klang Ao, a stony patch with a depth of 3.1m, lies 5.5

miles SE of Lang Suan Light, and is the N danger in the S

approach to Lang Suan Roads. Hin Hemawanit, a 5.5m rocky

patch, lies 2 miles SE of Hin Klang Ao.

6.54 A group of dangerous rocks lies up to 2.5 miles offshore

abreast the mouth of Khlong Lang Suan. Hin Folk Hon (Hin

Falkhon), is the northwesternmost rock; Hin Charas is the

southwesternmost rock of the group.

6.54 Anchorage.—It is reported that small vessels with local

knowledge can obtain secure anchorage in the inner part of

Lang Suan Roads, W of the inner line of dangers, in a depth of

5.5m, sand.

Lang Suan Roads to Chong Samui

6.55 The coast between the mouth of Khlong Lang Suan

and Laem Duat (9°42'N., 99°10'E.), 15 miles S, is wooded and

bordered by numerous dangers. The outermost dangers are Hin

Chen Thale, with a depth of 8.6m, lying 12.2 miles SE of the

mouth of Khlong Lang Suan, and Hin Phum, with a depth of

7.9m, lying 3.8 miles farther S.

6.55 Khao Khan Thuli, a prominent sharp peak, 247m high, is

located 2.5 miles SSW of Laem Duat.

6.55 Khao Prasong, 372m high, located 7.5 miles farther SSE, is

the most prominent feature on this part of the coast.

6.55 Ao Ban Don, a shallow bay, is entered 12.5 miles farther SE.

The bay is entered between Laem Sui, a low point, and Laem

Khung Mo, 14.5 miles ESE. Ko Prap, a 60m high islet, marked

by a light on its summit, lies 6 miles WSW of Laem Khung

Mo.

6.55 Anchorage.—Small vessels with drafts of 4m and over can

anchor 6 miles N of Laem Sui.

6.56 Thathong (9°11'N., 99°22'E.), situated at the mouth

of the Mae Nam Ta Pi river, is a general cargo terminal.

6.56 Tides—Currents.—The average fall and rise of tide is about

0.6m. Extreme tides are 2.5m.

6.56 Depths—Limitations.—The channel leading to the port is

maintained at a depth of 4.8m.

6.56 There is one berth with an overall length of 194m and

another with a length of 94m. The depth at the docks is 5m at

MLLW.

6.56 Pilotage.—All vessels 1,000 gross tons and over are required to have a pilot.

6.57 A chain of islands and islets extends 28 miles N of

Laem Thuat (9°20'N., 99°41'E.), which lies 10 miles ENE of

Ao Ban Don. Ko Palikan, 22m high and marked by a light, lies

1 mile N of Laem Thuat.

6.57 Ko Tung Ku (9°48'N., 99°43'E.), the N islet of the chain, is

59m high, with a smaller islet close S. Ko Mae Ko (Ko Wao

Yai), 100m high, lies 2.5 miles WSW of Ko Tung Ku. Islets

and dangers extend 0.8 mile S of Ko Mae Ko.

6.57 Ko Nai Phut, 193m high, lies 4.5 miles S of Ko Mae Ko.

Above-water rocks extend 0.3 mile N of Ko Nai Phut, and

islets extend up to 0.8 mile W of the island.

6.57 Chong Nua, with depths of 13 to 22m, between the dangers

S of Ko Mae Ko and the rocks N of Ko Nai Phut, is the N passage through the chain.
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 139

Pub. 161

6.57 Ko Ang Thong, rising to 396m at its S end, lies 3 miles S of

Ko Nai Phut, with numerous islets and rocks between. Ko Phai

Ruak, 162m high, lies 2 miles E of the S end of Ko Ang Thong.

Ko Wua Te, a 92m high islet, lies 0.8 mile SE of Ko Phai Ruak.

6.57 Ko Phaluai, 342m high, lies 3.2 miles S of Ko Ang Thong.

Hin Hlak, above water, with a small islet lying 0.3 mile W, lies

0.2 mile N of the N end of Ko Phaluai. Ko Tao Pun, surrounded

by rocks, lies 0.5 mile off the NW side of Ko Phaluai.

6.57 Chong Ang Thong, between Ko Ang Thong and Ko Phaluai,

has a least depth of 6.8m in the fairway. The channel is entered

from E between Ko Wua Te and Hin Hlak.

6.57 Islands, islets, rocks, and dangers lie S of Ko Phaluai, btween the latter island and the mainland. The channels between

are dangerous and shoal.

6.58 Chong Ko Tao (9°55'N., 99°55'E.) is a deep passage,

separating Ko Tao (10°06'N., 99°51'E.) from Ko Phangan, 18

miles SSE. The passage has general depths of 22 to 35m.

6.58 Hin Bai, 14m high and steep-to, lies near the middle of

Chong Ko Tao, 8.5 miles N of Ko Phangan. A submerged rock,

with a depth of 11.3m, lies 4 miles WNW of Hin Bai.

6.58 Caution.—A circular area with a 5 mile radius, centered on

Hin Bai, is declared a dangerous exercise area.

6.59 Ko Tao, 40 miles ENE of the mouth of Khlong Lang

Suan, is 358m high near its NW end. An islet 170m high, with

an islet close S, lies 0.8 mile off the NW extremity of the

island. The N and E sides of the island are steep-to, and an islet

lies 0.2 mile off its SE extremity. The bight on the W side of

the island is foul up to 0.5 mile offshore.

6.59 A submerged rock, with a 5m depth, lies 4.5 miles SSW of

the S end of Ko Tao; another rock, with a depth of 7.1m, lies 4

miles NW of Ko Tao.

6.59 Ko Phangan (9°45'N., 100°02'E.) attains an elevation of

627m near the middle of its N part. Ko Ma, an islet, lies close

off the NW end of the island, and Ko Kong Nui, another islet,

lies 0.5 mile off the W end of the island. Ko Kong Kliang lies

1.5 miles SW of Ko Kong Nui. Ko Phangan is the northernmost of islands and islets extending 37 miles NNE of Laem

Kho Khao (9°13'N., 99°53'E.).

6.59 Chong Phangan, the passage between Ko Phangan and Ko

Samui, 5 miles S, has depths of 13 to 20m in the fairway.

6.59 On the N side of Chong Phangan, Ko Kong Rin, 3m high,

lies close S of the SE extremity of Ko Phangan. Ko Tae Nai lies

0.8 mile off the SW end of Ko Phangan with Ko Tae Nok lying

nearly 1.5 miles farther W.

6.59 On the S side of Chong Phangan, Ko Kong Ok lies 1.2 miles

NE of the NE extremity of Ko Samui, with numerous abovewater rocks between. Ko Som, 2 miles WSW of Ko Kong Ok,

has two above-water rocks and dangers extending about 1 mile

W. Laem Na Lan lies 4.5 miles W of Ko Som and a depth of

1.4m lies 1 mile NE of the point.

6.59 A light is shown from Laem Yai, the NW extremity of Ko

Samui.

6.59 Ko Samui, with its SE extremity Laem Ret (9°25'N.,

100°01'E.) located 3.5 miles ENE of Ko Katen, is part of the

province of Nakhon Si Thammarat. Khao Yai summit, 635m

high, is located 4.5 miles N of Laem Ret. The island is covered

with dense forest, and there are several villages.

6.60 Chong Samui is entered between Laem Kho Khao

(9°13'N., 99°53'E.) and Laem So, the S extremity of Ko Samui.

Laem Kho Khao is conspicuous, consisting of five peaks, one

of which is 237m high. Khao Chai Son, 535m high, lies 2.5

miles NW of Laem Kho Khao. Hills back the coast NNW of

the latter point, and depths of less than 10m extend up to 1.5

miles off the intervening points.

6.60 The W, and best, channel, lies between the mainland and Ko

Wang Nai, 6 miles N of Laem Kho Khao. Ko Wang Nai, 72m

high and rock-fringed, is marked by a light. The channel has

depths of 10 to 14m in the fairway. The channel is partly

encumbered by fishing stakes. A 10.1m patch lies 6 miles SE

of Ko Wang Nai. 

6.60 Ko Wang Nok lies 1 mile E of Ko Wang Nai; a rock, 52m

high, lies 0.3 mile ESE of Ko Wang Nok.

6.60 Ko Rap, 2 miles farther E, lies nearly in the middle of the

entrance to the strait. A rock, with a depth of 6.8m, lies 0.5

mile NE of Ko Rap.

6.60 Hin Nam Lai, above water and surrounded by foul ground,

lies nearly 2 miles NW of Ko Rap. Ko Mat Khaeng lies 0.7

mile farther NNW.

6.60 Ko Katen, 225m high, lies nearly midway between Ko Mat

Khaeng and the S extremity of Ko Samui. An islet 17m high

and reef-fringed, lies close off the SW end of Ko Katen. Ko

Mat Sum lies 1 mile E of the SE end of Ko Katen. Hin La Lek,

3m high in its E part, lies 1 mile N of Ko Mat Sum.

6.60 In the NE approach to Chong Samui, Hin Ang Wong, 0.7m

high, lies on the E end of a detached reef, 2 miles SSE of Laem

Ret, on the SE side of Ko Samui. 

6.61 Khanom (9°14'N., 99°52'E.) is a small port which

provides a bulk berth E of the delta of the Khlong Khanom.

Vessels anchor, in depths of 12.8m, mud and sand, E of the

river mouth. A conspicuous red and white chimney stands on

the NW bank of the river.

6.61 There is also a jetty where vessels are moored to six buoys,

three forward and three aft, to berth 3m off the jetty in a depth

of 9.2m. Vessels should be able to provide six lines.

6.61 Caution.—A submarine power cable is laid from a position

close E of the power station in a NE direction.

6.61 A wreck lies 0.6 mile NE of the river mouth.

6.62 Middle Passage—Middle Passage is the wide passage between Ko Phangan and Ko Samui on the E side, and the

chain of islands and islets extending N of Laem Thuat

(9°20'N., 99°41'E.) on the W side. It leads from Chong Ko Tao

to Chong Samui at its S end.

6.62 On the E side of the passage, Ko Kong Kliang and Ko Tae

Nok and the dangers W of Ko Phangan were previously described in paragraph 6.59.

6.62 Mooring buoys, 2 miles SSE of Laem Yai, the NW end of Ko

Samui, lie at the seaward end of a water supply pipeline; a can

buoy marks the end of the pipeline.

6.62 Ko Mao Thap (Ko Ha), 2 miles WNW of Laem Hin Khom,

the SW extremity of Ko Samui, is the outermost of five islets

off the SW end of Ko Samui. Ko Thalu, with Ko Din close S,

and Ko Malaeng Pong lie 0.5 mile NE and 0.5 mile SSE,

respectively, of Ko Mao Thap.

6.62 On the W side of the passage, Ko Tung Ku (9°48'N.,

99°43'E.) is the N islet. A bank with depths of less than 10m
140 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

extends 12 miles E of Ko Ang Thong and 8 miles E of Ko

Chuak (9°28'N., 99°41'E.). There are depths of 11 to 18m

between the above bank and the dangers off Ko Phangan and

Ko Samui.

Chong Samui to Songkhla Harbor

6.63 A restricted area, enclosing several oil and gas fields

is situated 90 miles NE of Laem Talumphok.

6.63 Rectangular in shape, approximately 60 miles long in a N-S

direction, and 25 miles wide in an E-W direction, the area

encloses a region of producing oil and gas fields, with the associated structures both above and below water, which present a

hazard to navigation. Vessels are advised to avoid the area by

as wide a margin as is practicable.

6.63 Erawan Gas Field Terminal (9°05'N., 101°19'E.) (World

Port Index No. 57440) is connected by pipelines to four other

lighted platforms; Plat-form B through Platform E, within its

group, are situated 54 miles NE of Ko Kra. A single point

mooring buoy (SPM) is situated 2.5 miles NE of Terminal A.

The Erawan group is also linked with pipelines to three other

oil fields in the area. Baanpot Oil Field is situated 15 miles

SSE of Erawan; Satun Oil Field is 16 miles NNE; and Platong

Oil Field is 21 miles further N from Satun Oil Field. Funan Oil

Field, Jakrawan Oil Field, Kaphong Oil Field and Surat Oil

Field have been more recently established within the restricted

area as well.

6.63 The pipeline leads N passing close W of an explosive dumping ground centered on position 9°50'N, 101°15'E and continuing N, landing 8 miles W of Rayong.

6.63 A storage tanker is moored 2.5 miles NE of Platform A at the

center of Erawan Gas Field. Tankers up to 250m in length and

up 100,000 dwt berth alongside to load. 

6.63 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory within the terminal area

and boarding locations are specified by Terminal Control,

except when proceeding to anchor. When approaching Erawan

Terminal from the E, the pilot boards in position 9°04'N,

101°25'E; from the W, the pilot boards at the anchorage in

position 9°05'N, 101°09'E. When approaching Platong

Terminal from the N, the pilot boards at the anchorage in

position 9°40'N, 101°29'E. Tankers can only berth in day-light

hours, but can unberth at any time. 

6.63 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be sent 72 hours in

advance, followed by 48-hour and 24-hour confirmations;

subsequent changes of more than 2 hours to the ETA should be

reported. 

6.63 Vessels should keep a continuous listening watch on VHF

channels 16 and 17 for advice or berthing instructions from

Terminal Control. The operating frequency for Marine Control

is VHF channel 9. Inital entry reports should include the

following information:The working channel for Erawan FSO

and Platong FSO is VHF channel 17. 

1. Vessel name, type and details of vessels ownerhsip.

2. Purpose of visit to the oilfield.

3. If the vessel is on contract, state the principal

contractor and organization managing this contract.

4. The destination and associated ETA within the

oilfield.

5. Status regarding currency of field charts and

prescribed anchoring procedures. 

6.63 Vessels are required to report as follows: 

1. Pattani Spirit Approach Lane.—Vessels must

approach from the E when heading to the Northern Export

Anchorage (9°39.8'N., 101°29.0'E.) by using the Northern

Approach Lane and passing between Northern Approach

Lane Point NA-1 (9°37'N., 101°35'E.) and Point NA-2

(9°42'N., 101°35'E.). 

Reports must be made to Terminal Control before coming

within 10 miles of the Restricted Area. 

2. Erawan Approach Lane.—Vessels must approach

from the W and keep clear of the Restricted Area when

heading to the Western Export Anchorage. Reports must be

made to Terminal Control before coming within 10 miles of

the Western Export Anchorage. 

3. Eastern Approach Lane.—Vessels must report to

Erawan Terminal when passing:

a. Position 9°14'N, 101°35'E. from the N.

b. Position 9°09'N, 101°35'E from the S.

4. Southern Approach Lane.—Vessels must report to

the Erawan Terminal when passing:

a. Position 8°30'N, 101°31'E from the W.

b. Position 8°30'N, 101°37'E from the E. 

6.63 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken within 1 mile of the

following positions:

1. Satun W—position 9°19.3'N, 101°21.3'E.

2. Satun Central—position 9°16.1'N, 101°27.5'E.

3. Erawan Central—position 9°08.2'N, 101°22.0'E.

4. W Export Tanker—position 9°04.5'N, 101°09.0'E.

5. E Export Tanker—position 9°04.0'N, 101°25.0'E.

6. Erawan W—position 8°59.0'N, 101°13.5'E.

7. Funan N—position 8°58.6'N, 101°36.5'E.

8. Funan W—position 8°52.9'N, 101°32.3'E.

9. Pailin N—position 8°51.3'N, 101°18.9'E.

10. Pailin W—position 8°36.9'N, 101°17.0'E. 

Vessels instructed to anchor should subsequently report

their time and anchored position as soon as practicable. 

6.63 Caution.—A number of wells lie outside the restricted area.

6.64 Laem Phlai Dam (9°05'N., 99°55'E.), located 8 miles

SSE of Laem Kho Khao, rises to an elevation of 474m. Khao

Phra, 814m high, lies 3 miles W of the point.

6.64 Laem Kho Kwang, 5 miles S of Laem Phlai Dam, rises to an

elevation of 148m about 1 mile W of the point. A light is

shown 0.7 mile NW of the point, and a rock awash, lies 0.7

mile NNE of the same point.

6.64 The coast between Laem Kho Kwang and the W entrance

point of Ao Nakhon, 30 miles S, is low, and backed by a range

of mountains with several prominent peaks 13 miles inland.

6.64 Ao Nakhon, a shallow bight, is entered between Laem

Talumphuk (8°31'N., 100°08'E.) and the mouth of Khlong

Pak Phaya, 4.5 miles W. Laem Talumphuk is a narrow curved

spit, of coarse sand, with a group of trees on its extremity. A

light is shown from the spit. The entrance of Khlong Tha Phae

lies 3.7 miles NW of the mouth of Khlong Pak Phaya; a light is

shown 0.8 mile above the entrance. Depths of less than 10m

extend 7 miles N of Laem Talumphuk, and the point and the

land behind are low.

6.64 Anchorage, during the Southwest Monsoon, can be taken, in

a depth of 7.3m about 4.5 miles NE of the mouth of Khlong

Tha Phae.
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 141

Pub. 161

6.65 Ko Kra (8°24'N., 100°45'E.), 162m high and marked

by a light, lies 35 miles E of Laem Talumphuk. High Rock,

81m high, with another rock close W, lies 1.3 miles SSE of Ko

Kra. Boat Rock, 1.2m high, lies 1 mile SW of High Rock.

6.65 The coast between Laem Talumphuk and Songkhla, 82 miles

SSE, is low, sandy, and wooded in places. A range of mountains parallels this coast 30 to 35 miles inland. Depths of less

than 10m extend 5 miles offshore in the S approach to Laem

Talumphuk. Farther S, depths of less than 10m extend up to 3

miles offshore.

6.65 A large lagoon, entered from Songkhla Harbor, extends 45

miles NNW, and is separated from the Gulf of Thailand by a

low sandy neck of land ranging in width from 2 to 10 miles.

6.65 Bongkot Terminal (8°04'N., 102°20'E.) consists of the storage tanker FSO2 Patumabaha. Vessels may contact the terminal when they are within 50 miles of it and should maintain

contact on VHF channel 6 or 16 until boarded by the Mooring

Master.

6.65 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is done by a Mooring

Master. Mooring services are available during daylight hours

only. Vessels at anchor awaiting berthing instructions must advise the anchoring time and position and monitor VHF. The

pilot boards in the following positions:

a. 2.6 miles W of Wellhead Platform WP5 (8°00.4'N.,

102°17.1'E).

b. 1.6 miles N of the FSO.

Songkhla Harbor (7°13'N., 100°35'E.)

World Port Index No. 57439

6.66 Songkhla Harbor is entered between Laem Sai

(7°14'N., 100°35'E.) and Hua Khao Daeng, 0.5 mile SW. A

short breakwater extends NE from Laem Sai. A spit, parts of

which dry, extends 2 miles NW of Laem Sai, and is crossed by

a narrow dredged channel close NW of the breakwater. 

6.66 Islets front the harbor entrance, and Khao Tang Kuan, 101m

high, lies 1.5 miles SSE of Laem Sai. The W side of the harbor

is hilly, with a range of hills, some over 150m high, extending

2 miles S of Hua Khao Daeng. 

6.66 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Songkhla Roads is

0.7m.

6.66 The tidal current sets NW along the coast outside the harbor

while the tide is rising inside the harbor, and in the opposite

direction when it is falling.

6.66 The current inside the harbor area attains a velocity of 2

knots.

6.66 Depths—Limitations.—The channel has a dredged depth of

9m and a width of 120m. There is a turning basin at the W end

of the quay with a diameter of 300m.

6.66 There are three berths with a total length of 510m and an

alongside depth of 10m. Vessels up to 173m long, with a draft

of 8.2m can be accommodated. There are three oil berths in

the outer harbor; vessels up to 200m long with a deep draft of

8m can be accommodated. 

6.66 Aspect.—The channel is marked by lighted buoys and range

lights.

6.66 Ko Nu (7°14'N., 100°36'E.), the highest islet, 74m high, lies

1.5 miles ENE of Laem Sai. Hin Luk Maeo Nok, a 1.5m high

rock, lies 0.7 mile farther NE.

6.66 Ko Maeo, 30m high, lies nearly 1.5 miles NNW of Ko Nu.

Hin Luk Maeo Nai, a reef with several rocks, the highest 4m

high, lies 0.5 mile S of Ko Maeo. A rock with a depth of 3.3m

lies 0.7 mile N of the SW end of Ko Maeo; a 3.7m shoal lies

0.2 mile SW of the rock.

6.66 A radio tower marked by obstruction lights stands 100m SW

of Songkhla Light; two pagodas stand on a hill located 1.5

miles WNW of the same light. An airfield lies SE of the town.

6.66 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards in the

vicinity of the entrance buoy.

6.66 Regulations.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia for details on regulations pertaining to vessels in Thai waters.

6.66 Signals.—The port may be reached on VHF channel 16. The

pilots may be contacted on VHF channel 14.

6.66 Anchorage.—It has been reported that three anchorage

berths are available, in the following locations:

a. 7°17'10''N., 100°36'15''E.

b. 7°15'30''N., 100°37'45''E.

c. About 0.8 mile E of Ko Maeo.

6.66 The anchorages have charted depths of 9.2 to 10.4m, mud

and shells. Small vessels can anchor 0.4 mile W of Ko Nu.

6.66 Directions.—The turn into the harbor is reported to be

difficult, and should be attempted only at slack water.

6.66 An overhead cable, having a vertical clearance of 40m, spans

the channel 0.3 mile SE of the range lights.

6.66 Caution.—Two dangerous wrecks lie 20 miles N and 30

miles NNE of Songkhla, respectively. Another dangerous

wreck lies 50 miles ENE of the entrance to Songkhla Khao. 

6.66 Fishing stakes are reported to extend up to 30m from the

channel’s sides.

Songkhla Harbor to Sungei Kelantan

6.67 A range of mountains extends S of Songkhla. Khao

Thiamda, 277m high, and Khao Wang, 305m high, rising 4 and

10 miles, respectively, S of Songkhla, are part of this range.

6.67 The coast between Songkhla and Ao Pattani, 43 miles ESE,

is mostly low. A projection lies about midway along this coast,

with Ko Kham, a 40m high islet, 1 mile NE. Khao Khwang

221m high, lies 2 miles SSW of the projection.

6.67 Enemy Chaser Patch, 15.5 miles E of the projection, has a

least depth of 3.3m, and lies at the N end of a shoal extending 3

miles offshore.

6.67 Ao Pattani, a shallow bay, is entered between Laem Ta Chi

(6°56'N., 101°15'E.) and the mouth of Mae Nam Pattani, 2

miles S. The town of Pattani, 1 mile S of the mouth of Mae

Nam Pattani, is a major rubber exporting center. Lighters

which have to be taken over the bar of the river at HW are used

in cargo operations.

6.67 A dangerous wreck, marked by a buoy, lies 2 miles NNW of

Laem Ta Chi.

6.67 Laem Ta Chi is the extremity of a low, sandy spit, thickly

covered with pine trees. A light is shown from the N side of the

spit, 2 miles ENE of the extremity of Laem Ta Chi. Range

lights are shown from the W entrance point of Mae Nam

Pattani. A radio tower, 93m high and marked by obstruction

lights, stands nearly 2 miles farther SSW.

6.67 A bank, with depths of less than 10m, extends 12.5 miles

NNW of Laem Ta Chi.
142 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

6.67 Loftus Bank, consisting of hard sand, and rocks with depths

of 1.5 to 3.7m, extends 5.5 miles ESE from a position about 2

miles NE of the N end of the above-mentioned spit; it is almost

joined to the coastal bank near its W end.

6.67 Beating China Shoal, with a depth of 2.9m, lies 0.7 mile off

the N side of Loftus Bank; rocks, with depths of 6.5 to 7.5m,

extend 2.5 miles farther E.

6.67 Anchorage.—Small vessels can obtain anchorage, in depths

of 5.5 to 9.2m, about 5 miles W of Laem Ta Chi. Large vessels

can anchor in depths of 10 to 11m about 4 miles NW of Laem

Ta Chi, particularly during the Southwest Monsoon (April to

September), when the sea is calm. Ships are boarded by immigration and customs officers. There is no quarantine service,

but ships are required to have a clean bill of health.

6.68 The coast between Ao Pattani and Laem Khao Phra

(6°51'N., 101°33'E.) is low. Khao Maruat rises to an elevation

of 322m about 2 miles WSW of the cape. Khao Yai, 475m

high, lies 6.5 miles SSW of the cape.

6.68 Off-lying islet.—Ko Losin (Pulau Lozin) (7°19'N.,

101°56'E.), 2m high, lies 3l miles NE of Laem Khao Phra. A

light is shown from the islet. Ko Losin is reported to lie 3.75

miles ENE of its charted position.

6.68 The coast between Laem Khao Phra and the entrance to

Sungai Kelantan, 55 miles SE, is mostly low.

6.68 The entrance to Khlong Sai Buri, obstructed by a shallow

shifting bar, lies 9 miles S of Laem Ko Phra. A light is shown

on the S side of the river entrance.

6.68 Khao Nam Khang, 780m high, rising 9.5 miles SSW of the

entrance to Khlong Sai Buri, is the N summit of a range of

mountains extending SSE.

6.68 Hin Rakit, a white rock, 9m high and steep-to, lies 3.2 miles

offshore, 6 miles ESE of the entrance to Khlong Sai Buri. Khao

Tanyong, 294m high, conical and wooded, rises close to the

coast about 17.5 miles farther SSE. A conspicuous dark hill,

over 150m high and wooded, is located 3 miles S of Khao Tanyong.

6.68 Narathiwat (6°26'N., 101°50'E.), a small rubber and copra

port, lies 3 miles NW of Khao Tanyong, 0.5 mile within the

shoal entrance of Khlong Bang Nara. Cargo is lightered to the

roadstead 1.5 miles off the river entrance. Vessels of light draft

are able to cross the bar only at HW. 

6.68 Song Duc Marine Terminal (7°10'N., 104°03'E.) lies about

150 miles offshore, ENE of Laem Khao Phra. The terminal

consists of a platform and Floating Production, Storage, and

Offloading (FPSO) unit. There is a doctor available on the

FPSO. 

6.68 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. There is an anchorage

and pilot boarding area about 4 miles E of the terminal. 

6.68 The port authority may be contacted by e-mail, as follows: 

Sungai Kelantan

6.69 The delta of Sungai Kelantan, low and featureless, is

backed by numerous lagoons and waterways. Sungai Kelantan

has two main entrances. 

6.69 Kuala Besar (6°13'N., 102°13'E.), the E entrance is navigable only by boats. The depths are constantly changing, and

local knowledge is necessary. A light is shown close inside the

E entrance point of Kuala Besar. Discolored water may be

encountered several miles seaward of the entrance. The N

extremity of the E entrance point of Kuala Besar is the SW

entrance point of the Gulf of Thailand.

6.69 Kuala Tongkong, the W entrance to Sungai Kelantan, lies 4

miles W of Kuala Besar. 

6.70 Tumpat (6°12'N., 102°10'E.) lies on the S side of the

entrance of Kuala Besar. Kota Baharu lies 6 miles SE of

Tumpat, on the W side of Sungai Kelantan. Tumpat exports

logs loaded into riverine lighter vessels. An air field is situated

3.5 miles NE of Kota Baharu. 

6.70 The port area of Tumpat is sheltered from seaward by a

curved sand spit, but anchorage inside the sand spit is suitable

only for small craft. 

6.70 Depths—Limitations.—A jetty, 185m in length, projects

from the coast about 1 mile WNW of Tumpat. At night, when

work is in progress, the jetty and immediate vicinity are

illuminated by bright lights.

6.70 Aspect.—Pantai Sri Tujoh Light is exhibited from a white

wooden framework tower, 11m high, standing close within the

W extremity of Tanjung Kuda.

6.70 Kuala Baru Tumpat Lighted Beacon, a white structure 5m in

height, stands on a drying mud flat at the E end of the harbor,

1.7 miles E of Pantai Sri Tujoh Light; its position is approximate.

6.70 A light is also occasionally exhibited from a beacon situated

1 mile SW of Pantai Sri Tujoh Light.

6.70 Anchorage.—Small vessels can obtain anchorage, in a

depth of 6.4m, soft mud, 2 miles NNW of Tumpat Light. Large

vessels anchor farther offshore, remaining in depths of 11m or

more, but the holding ground is poor.

6.70 Anchorage, in a depth of 9.2m, mud, good holding ground,

was reported to lie 1 mile N of the entrance to Kuala Besar.

6.70 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to Tumpat from SE should

keep 2.5 miles from the coast until Tumpat Light bears 180°

when course may be steered for the anchorage.

6.70 Caution.—A shoal, with a least depth of 3.1m, lies 2.5 miles

NNW of Tumpat. A wreck with masts showing lies on the W

side of the shoal.

6.70 Fishing stakes may be encountered up to 6 miles from the

coast.

East Coast of Malaysia—Sungai Kelantan to

Tanjung Penawar

6.71 The E coast of Malaysia between Sungai Kelantan

and Tanjung Penawar, 310 miles SSE, is characterized by low

swampy areas with numerous rivers discharging into the sea.

Coastal ridges and hills extend to the coast at isolated points. In

general, the off-lying islands are quite high, wooded, and good

landmarks for coastal navigation.

6.71 Caution.—Fishing stakes may be encountered in depths of

less than 15m off the E side of Malaysia.

6.71 Oil well structures, transfer platforms, and related equipment

are situated off this section of coast. 

cbphuong@tsjoc.com.vn
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 143

Pub. 161

Sungai Kelantan to Kuala Terengganu

6.72 A light is shown from a framework tower at Sabak

(6°11'N., 102°19'E.), located 6.5 miles ESE of the E entrance

to Sungai Kelantan.

6.72 The coast between Sabak and Sungai Besut, 25 miles SE, is

low, sandy, and bordered by coconut trees. Depths of less than

11m extend up to 4.5 miles offshore, shoaling gradually shoreward.

6.72 The village of Bachok, where a light is shown, is situated 8

miles SSE of Sabak. Bukit Marak, a hill, 112m high, is

conspicuous 5 miles WSW of Bachok. Bukit Gunong, with an

elevation of 192m, is located 6 miles SW of Bachok.

6.72 Kuala Semarak, located 14 miles SSE of Bachok, lies at the

entrance of Sungai Semarak, and is obstructed by a bar. A light

is shown at the S side of the entrance. Batu Meninjau (Batu

Maninjau), 514m high, is conspicuous 14 miles W of the

entrance.

6.72 Sungai Besut, navigable only by boats, is entered 4 miles SE

of Kuala Semarak. A fishing light is shown on the E entrance

point of Sungai Besut.

6.72 Pulau Rhu, with an elevation of 110m, is located 3 miles E of

the entrance to Sungai Besut, and 2 miles offshore.

6.72 The coast between Sungai Besut and Tanjung Merang, 30

miles SE, is low and bordered by sandy beach. Kuala Setiu

Bharu, an inlet along the coast, lies 17 miles SE of Sungai

Besut.

6.72 Pulau Chipu, a 23m high islet, scrub-covered and surrounded

by shoal water, is prominent about 3.8 miles NE of Kuala Setiu

Bharu. Baker Shoal, an 11.3m coral patch, and Dickson Shoal,

a 12.8m coral patch, lie 3.5 miles N and 3.8 miles WSW,

respectively, of Pulau Chipu.

6.72 A range of mountains, with many peaks, backs this coast,

attaining its greatest elevation at Gunong Lawit, 1,519m high,

about 17 miles SW of Kuala Setiu Bharu.

6.73 Tanjung Merang (5°32'N., 102°57'E.) has an

elevation of 47m, and a conical hill, 204m high rises 2.5 miles

S of it. A light is shown on Tanjung Merang.

6.73 Batu Rusa, two above-water rocks, the S of which is 2.7m

high, lies 2.5 miles ENE of Tanjung Merang. Batu Tengah,

0.6m high, with a rock, awash, close SW, lies 0.8 mile N of

Batu Rusa.

6.73 Batu Bara, 40m high, lies nearly 6.5 miles N of Tanjung

Merang; three rocks, the highest of which stands 2.1m high, lie

0.8 mile NW of Batu Bara. Hafther Rock, with a depth of less

than 1.8m, lies 0.7 mile SW of Batu Bara.

6.73 Batu Rakit, a small group of rocks, 0.6m high, lies 8 miles

SE of Tanjung Merang, and 0.5 mile offshore. A light is shown

on Batu Rakit.

6.73 The coast between Tanjung Merang and Kuala Terengganu,

16.5 miles SE, is low, but at Batu Rakit the high land approaches the coast.

6.73 An 11m patch lies 4.5 miles N of Batu Rakit. Depths of less

than 11m extend up to 5 miles offshore in the vicinity of Baku

Rakit.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

6.74 Pulau Perhentian Kechil (5°55'N., 102°43'E.), 345m

high in its S part, lies 7 miles NE of Pulau Rhu. Pulau

Perhentian Besar, 321m high, is located close E of Pulau

Perhentian Kechil, from which it is separated by a narrow foul

channel. A coral patch, awash, lies 0.3 mile off the W side of

the W island. A light is shown from the SW side of Pulau

Perhentian Besar. Anchorage for small vessels with local

knowledge can be taken in the S entrance to the channel

between the islands.

6.74 Pulau Susu Dara, 199m high, lies 3.5 miles WNW of the N

end of Pulau Perhentian Kechil. Pulau Serenggeh, 59m high,

and Pulau Rawa, 55m high, lie nearly 1 mile S, and 1 mile E,

respectively, of Pulau Susu Dara. A rock, 1.2m high, lies 0.5

mile WNW of the W end of Pulau Susu Dara. Several islets

and rocks lie between Pulau Susu Dara and Pulau Rawa.

6.74 Churchill Patches, with a least depth of 13.7m, sand and

shell, lies 7.8 miles N of Pulau Susu Dara.

6.74 Pulau Lang Tengah, 128m high, wooded, and cultivated in

places, lies 8.5 miles SE of Pulau Perhentian Besar.

6.75 Pulau Redang (5°47'N., 103°01'E.), lying 14 miles

ESE of Pulau Perhentian Besar, is the largest, highest, and outermost of the group of islands which lie off the coast between

Kuala Semerak and Kuala Terengganu. Pulau Redang, thickly

wooded, rises to an elevation of 359m in its N part. Pulau

Lima, 76m high, lies 1 mile off the E side of Pulau Redang.

6.75 Pulau Redang Harbor, formed by islands off the S side of

Pulau Redang, provides sheltered anchorage for small vessels.

Pulau Pinang, 126m high, and reef-fringed on its NE side,

forms the SW side of the harbor. A light is shown from the

island.

6.75 The channel N of Pulau Pinang is for boats and is dangerous

when the tide is in progress. A 5.2m shoal lies in mid-channel

0.3 mile ENE of the N end of Pulau Pinang. Connell Rock, a

coral patch with a depth of 4.9m, lies 0.2 mile E of Pulau

Pinang.

6.75 Pulau Ekor Tibu, 52m high, is located nearly 1.5 miles E of

the E extremity of Pulau Pinang, on the S side of the E

approach to the harbor. Pulau Chipor, 11m high, lies 0.5 mile

WSW of Pulau Ekor Tibu. Batu Chipor, a round-topped rock,

which dries 1.8m, lies 0.2 mile N of Pulau Chipor.

6.75 Pulau Koringo Besar, 15m high, lies on the S end of a reef

extending 0.5 mile off the SE side of Pulau Redang, and on the

N side of the E entrance to the harbor.

6.75 Anchorage.—Small vessels can find good anchorage, in

depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, with swinging room of about 300m, in

the NW part of Pulau Redang Harbor. Larger vessels can

anchor, in depths of 16 to 18m, sand and coral, about 0.5 mile

N of Pulau Chipor.

6.75 Anchorage can also be taken by medium-sized vessels in the

bay on the N side of Pulau Redang. The bottom is fine coral

sand and the holding ground is reported to be good, especially

at the seaward end of the bay where the bottom is hard sand or

clay. Approach to the bay can be made with a conspicuous

rocky outcrop, located at the head of the bay, bearing about

200°; a thickly-wooded hill lies in the vicinity of the rocky

outcrop.

6.76 Pulau Yu Kechil (5°38'N., 103°10'E.), 71m high, is

located 11.5 miles SE of Pulau Redang, and is the southeasternmost of the islets off this part of the coast. Pulau Yu
144 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

Besar, 91m high, is located 1 mile NNW of Pulau Yu Kechil.

An 11m depth is charted about 1.2 miles SE of Pulau Yu

Kechil.

6.76 Pulau Bidong Laut, 293m high, lies 5.2 miles W of Pulau Yu

Kechil. The island is thickly wooded and has several bays with

sandy beaches on its W and SW sides. A submerged rock was

reported (1945) to lie 0.3 mile N of Pulau Bidong Laut. Pulau

Gelok, 107m high, lies 1.5 miles N of Pulau Bidong Laut.

Pulau Tengkorak, 34m high, with a 9m high islet close N, lies

0.5 mile farther NNE. Pulau Kapak, 65m high and thickly

wooded, lies 0.5 mile S of Pulau Bidong Laut.

6.77 Kuala Trengganu (5°21'N., 103°08'E.), a small

coastal port, is fronted by a shifting bar, which had a least

depth of 1.4m in 1972. The town of Trengganu lies on the S

bank close within the harbor entrance. 

6.77 Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the inner channel decrease from 9m at the river entrance to 2m above the inner

navigational buoys. Four jetties, with depths of 3.7m alongside,

are situated between the town and 1.5 miles upstream.

6.77 Aspect.—A fort lies on a 31m hill about 0.3 mile SW of the

S entrance point of the harbor. A light is shown from a white

brick pillar in front of the fort. Bukit Besar, a hill rising 2 miles

S of the entrance, is surmounted by a radio mast with an

elevation of 202m and marked by red obstruction lights.

6.77 Pilotage.—The pilot boarding place lies within a 1-mile radius of the fairway lighted buoy.

6.77 Anchorage.—Exposed anchorage can be taken, in 9m, sand,

with the light near the fort bearing 243°, distant 1.5 miles.

Small craft with local knowledge can obtain good anchorage,

in a depth of 4.3m, just within the entrance.

Kuala Trengganu to Tanjung Dungun

6.78 Tanjung Chenering (5°16'N., 103°11'E.), 74m high,

is located 5 miles SSE of Kuala Trengganu, and is conspicuous

being the only rocky headland in the vicinity. Bukit Panji,

203m high, is located 1.5 miles SW of Tanjung Chenering.

6.78 Pulau Kapas, 124m high and densely wooded, lies 5 miles

ESE of Tanjung Chenering. An islet lies close off its NW end.

A light obscured from seaward between bearings of 154° to

300° is shown from the S end of Pulau Kapas. Depths of less

than 11m extend 1 mile NNW and SSE of the island. A 4.9m

shoal lies 0.5 mile WSW of Pulau Kapas, on the coastal bank,

with depths of less than 9m, extending between the island and

the mainland.

6.78 Kuala Merchang, an inlet along the coast, is located 10.5

miles S of Pulau Kapas. Batu Siatin, 3 miles NNE of Kuala

Merchang and 1.5 miles offshore, consists of two steep-to

rocks, 0.2 mile apart, the outer rock with a least depth of 0.6m.

6.78 The coast from abreast Pulau Kapas to Tanjung Dungun, 28

miles SSE, is flat, covered with jungle and scrub, and backed

by many low hills. A range of wooded hills is located 3.5 miles

inland, in the S part of this coast; the range terminates at its S

end in Bukit Laba, 232m high, 5 miles W of Tanjung Dungun.

The 10m curve lies 1 mile offshore abreast Batu Siatin and

approaches to about 0.5 mile offshore abreast Tanjung Dungun.

6.79 Off-lying islands.—Pulau Tenggol (4°48'N.,

103°41'E.), 283m high and densely wooded, lies 14.5 miles E

of Tanjung Dungun. The island has three peaks, the N and

center of which have twin summits. The island is steep-to and

rocky, except for a small bay on its W side; there are several

sunken rocks in the bay. 

6.79 Anchorage off the bay can be taken, in a depth of 48m, about

0.3 mile N of the S entrance point of the bay. An old light

tower stands on the NE extremity of the island.

6.79 A bare rock, 10m high, lies 0.8 mile SSE of Pulau Tenggol.

The channel between the rock and Pulau Tenggol has depths of

20m in the fairway and appears to be free of dangers.

6.79 Pulau Nyirih, lying 2 miles NNW of Pulau Tenggol, has two

summits, the N and higher of which has an elevation of 108m.

A rock, which dries 1.8m, and a rock with a least depth of

6.1m, lie 0.1 mile NNW, and 0.3 mile E, respectively, of the N

point of the island.

6.79 A bare rock, 26m high and steep-to, lies 1 mile N of Pulau

Nyirih. A small rock, 3m high, and another 4.6m high, each

steep-to, lie 0.2 mile NW, and 0.8 mile ESE, respectively, of

the above-mentioned bare rock.

6.80 Tanjung Dungun (4°47'N., 103°26'E.) rises to an

elevation of 60m, and is marked at its summit by a light. The

town of Kuala Dungun, 1 mile SW of Tanjung Dungun, serves

the port and the iron mines at Bukit Besi, 19 miles inland, to

which it is connected by a light railway. The port limits extend

N to 4°47'00"N, E to 103°28'15"E, and S to 4°42'00"N.

6.80 Winds—Weather.—Vessels load and discharge into local

lighters, but this is practicable only during the Southwest

Monsoon season from about March 1 to October 31.

6.80 Depths—Limitations.—Sungai (Sungei) Dungun, discharging close SW of Tanjung Dungun, is accessible to vessels

of 2m draft. A rest house is conspicuous 1 mile S of the W

entrance point of Sungai Dungun; Sura Jetty is situated 0.5

mile farther S. Sura Jetty can only be used in calm weather.

Mooring buoys are situated E of the rest house and Sura Jetty.

6.80 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all ore vessels. Pilots

board 10 miles off the coast. The pilot boat flies Flag H of the

International Code. Custom and immigration authorities board

at the anchorage.

6.80 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 10m,

mud and sand, about 1.5 miles E of Sura Jetty. 

Tanjung Dungun to Kuantan

6.81 Bukit Bauk (4°42'N., 103°25'E.), 474m high and

densely wooded, is located 5 miles SSW of Tanjung Dungun,

and is the summit of a range extending SE to the coast. Bukit

Belakang Parang lies 1 mile E of Bukit Bauk, in the same

range.

6.81 Tanjung Labohan, 16 miles S of Tanjung Dungun, is marked

by a light, and rises to Bukit Labohan, 378m high, about 0.8

mile NNW. Paton Bank, with a depth of 15.5m, is located 3

miles ENE of Tanjung Labohan.

6.81 Kertih Oil Terminal (4°34'N., 103°28'E.) (World Port Index

No. 57415) is situated close N of Tanjung Batu Lata. Kertih

Control Tower light is shown from a gray metal framework

tower, 35m high. A lighted yellow beacon is shown from Paka
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 145

Pub. 161

Power station cooling water intake nearly 2 miles N of the

terminal.

6.81 Gas pipelines lead ENE from Kertih Oil Terminal to Tapis

Marine Terminal and Sotong Platform, 108 miles NE and 86

miles E, respectively.

6.81 A T-head pier projecting to the 5m curve consists of three

berths lying in position 4°35'N., 103°28'E. The pier is protected by a detached breakwater, lighted at its N and S ends,

established close E. A buoyed channel leads to the berths.

6.81 Winds—Weather.—It is reported (2009) that all marine

operations may be suspended in wind and sea conditions of

Beaufort Force 5 or greater. 

6.81 Depths—Limitations.—Single Anchor Leg Moorings

(SALM) No. 1 and SALM No. 2, lighted, with sound fog

signals, are situated 2.2 miles E and 2.7 miles ESE respectively

of the terminal. Tankers between 40,000 dwt and 250,000 dwt

can berth at them. The maximum loaded draft is 17.4m at

SALM No. 1 and 20.4m at SALM No. 2.

6.81 A Single Point Mooring (SPM) is moored 1.3 miles ENE of

the terminal, in a depth of 16.5m. A tanker between 15,000 and

85,000 dwt can berth there to load from a refinery ashore to a

maximum draft of 11.1m. 

6.81 Lighted Buoy No. 1 and Lighted Buoy No. 2 are at the 15m

curve to mark shallow waters for deep draft tankers. A tug and

a mooring launch attend during the mooring operations.

6.81 Pilotage.—Pilotage through the mooring master is compulsory for all vessels. Pilots board, as follows:

1. Pilot Station 1—position 4°38'N, 103°33'E.

2. Pilot Station 2—position 4°35'N, 103°33'E.

6.81 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA to Kertih

Marine Control via telex upon departure from the previous

port. The ETA should be confirmed 72 hours, 48 hours, 24

hours, and 12 hours in advance.

6.81 Vessels should contact Kertih Marine Control on VHF channel 16 when within range and maintain a continuous listening

watch on that channel.

6.81 A Vessel Traffic Management System is maintained with

radar surveillance encompassing the area within 24 miles of

the port. The service provides vessels with advice on navigational conditions, traffic, weather, and tidal information upon

VHF contact.

6.81 A restricted area extends about 5 miles seaward of the

terminal. The N limit of the restricted area is marked by a

lighted buoy moored 4.5 miles NE of Tanjung Bata Lata.

6.81 Caution.—A sudden outbreak of severe weather may be experienced in the area, resulting in the offshore current exceeding 3 knots. The currents are the result of the monsoon

seasons. During the Northeast Monsoon (November-March)

the current sets S and in the Southwest Monsoon (May-September) it sets N.

6.82 The village of Kemasik, from which a light is shown,

lies 5.5 miles S of Tanjung Labohan. Batu Bau, with a least

depth of 7.6m, lies 1.5 miles E of Kemasik. Caslon Bank, with

a least depth of 13.7m, extends 4 miles NW of Batu Bau.

6.82 Tanjung Penunjuk (4°20'N., 103°30'E.) lies 11.5 miles S of

Tanjung Labohan; a light is shown 0.8 mile NW of the point.

Radio masts, marked by red obstruction lights at an elevation

of about 335m stand on Bukit Kijal, 1.5 miles SW of Tanjung

Penunjuk; the lights are visible for a considerable distance

from NE and SE, but are obstructed from E. A shoal, with a

least depth of 11.3m, and Beting Karang Baru, with a depth of

10.7m, lie 3.5 miles NE, and 4.2 miles SE, respectively, of

Tanjung Penunjuk.

6.82 Sungai Kemaman (4°14'N., 103°27'E.) discharges 6 miles

SSW of Tanjung Penunjuk. Bukit Gemok, 174m high, is

located close to the coast, 4 miles NNE of the river entrance. A

light is shown from a hill close N of the E entrance point.

6.82 Vessels with a draft of 2.4m, with local knowledge, can enter

the river. The entrance to the river is marked by lighted ranges. 

6.82 Chukai lies 2 miles within the river entrance. Iron ore is

exported through Chukai by lighters to vessels at anchor off the

river entrance.

6.82 Two shoals, one with a depth of 4.2m and the other with a

depth of 3.9m, lie 2 miles ESE and 2.5 miles SE, respectively,

of the E entrance point of Sungai Kemaman.

6.82 Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 12.8m, mud and sand,

about 0.7 mile SE of the E entrance point, with the light

structure bearing 305°.

Kemaman Harbor (4°15'N., 103°27'E.)

World Port Index No. 57411

6.83 Kemaman Harbor is protected by East Wharf, which

extends 850m SSW from Tanjung Berhala, and the S breakwater, which extends 730m E then N from Tanjung Sulung.

6.83 Depths—Limitations.—In the N part of the harbor, the offshore oil and gas supply Base Wharf is 360m long with a depth

of 7.8m alongside. The W side of East Wharf is 630m long,

with a depth of 14.5m alongside for vessels up to 220,000 dwt

and 13m draft. In the S part of the harbor, there is a berth at the

head of the LPG terminal jetty for tankers up to 40,000 dwt and

12.5m draft. 

6.83 A bank with depths of less than 11m extends 0.4 miles SSE

from the head of East Breakwater. A rock, Batu Belacan, with

a depth of 4.6m, lies 0.1 mile N of the S extremity of the bank.

6.83 Aspect.—The main channel leading to the turning basin in

the harbor is 15m deep, and is approached from a position 2

miles SSE of Tanjung Berhala. Lighted Beacon No. 1 marks

the channel, which is guided by two pairs of leading lights into

the harbor. The first pair lead from Lighted Beacons No. 8 and

Lighted Beacons No. 10 aligning on bearing 310°; the second

pair lead from Lighted Beacon No. 7 and Lighted Beacon No.

9 on bearing 327°30'. Fairway Lighted Buoy is moored on the

alignment of the first pair of leading lights, 5.2 miles SE of the

harbor entrance.

6.83 Lighted Beacon No. 5 stands close S of East Wharf head. A

light is shown from the head of the S breakwater.

6.83 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, except for offshore

supply vessels, and is available between 0700 and 1900. The

pilot boards at the channel entrance, about 2.5 miles SE of the

head of East Wharf. Deep draft vessels are boarded about 5.5

miles SE of the head of East Wharf.

6.83 Anchorage.—The quarantine anchorage and the deep draft

anchorage are situated NE of the approach channel and are best

seen on the chart.

6.83 The petroleum anchorage is situated SW of the approach

channel and is best seen on the chart.
146 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

6.83 The supply vessel anchorage is situated NE of the approach

channel, 1.5 miles SE of Tanjung Berhala.

6.84 Coastal Features.—Tanjung Geliga (Tanjung Guliga), 4 miles S of Sungai Kemaman, rises to an elevation of

92m.

6.84 The coast between Tanjung Geliga and Tanjung Gelang, 12.5

miles S, is low and featureless except for a 97m hill rising close

to the coast, 1 mile N of Tanjung Cherating.

6.84 Offshore oil platforms are situated 100 miles W of Tanjung

Geliga.

6.84 Oil fields on the W side of Main Route.—Kapak Natuna

Oil Field and Terminal lie 30 miles NW of the main route

between Singapore and Hong Kong. Platforms may also be

encountered within 7 miles of either side of the main route,

between S and SE of Kapak Natuna Oil Field. 

6.84 Oil fields on the E side of Main Route.—Udang Oil Field

is situated 40 miles NNE of Kepulauan Anambas and 20 miles

SE of the main route between Singapore and Hong Kong.

There may exist extended chains of platforms, particularly

leading NW in Udang Oil Field, a distance of 2 to 5 miles E of

the main route.

6.85 Tanjung Gelang (3°58'N., 103°27'E.) rises to an elevation of 112m. Bukit Pengorok, 196m high and conical, is

located 2 miles farther NW. Beting Gebing, a shoal having a

least depth of 3.7m, lies 2.2 miles NE of Tanjung Gelang.

Depths of 6.7 to 11m extend 3.8 miles N, and 5.5 miles SSW of

Beting Gebing. A 12.5m depth, and Skua Shoal, with a least

depth of 10.3m, lie 3.5 miles E, and 4.5 miles SSE, respectively of Tanjung Gelang.

6.85 Tanjung Tembeling (3°48'N., 103°23'E.), located 10.5

miles SSW of Tanjung Gelang, rises to an elevation of 100m. A

light is shown 0.3 mile N of the point. Bukit Pelindong, 267m

high, is located 2 miles NNW of Tanjung Tembeling. A group

of radio masts, 37m high, marked by red lights at the mast

heads and green lights at the base of the masts, stands on the

summit of Bukit Pelindong. The lights are visible a considerable distance to seaward. Red obstruction lights are shown at

an elevation of 335m, from a conspicuous radio mast, 76m

high, 0.3 mile farther E. Bukit Beserah rises to an elevation of

366m about 2 miles farther NW.

6.85 There are several obstructions, with depths of less than 9m,

within 3 miles of Tanjung Tembeling.

Off-lying Shoals in the Approach to Kuantan

6.86 Asquith Shoal (3°44'N., 103°43'E.), with a depth of

12.3m, lies 21.5 miles ESE of Tanjung Tembeling. Boys Shoal,

with a least depth of 13.7m, and Campbell Shoal, with a least

depth of 11.2m, coarse sand and rock, lie 6 miles SE, and 10

miles SSE, respectively, of Asquith Shoal.

6.86 Elliot Shoal, with a least depth of 14m and Allen Shoal, with

a least depth of 13.1m, extend 3.5 miles SSE and 4.5 miles S,

respectively, of Asquith Shoal.

6.86 Haslam Shoals consists of fine sand and shells; the main

shoal, 4 miles long in a N-S direction, has a least depth of 6.7m

at its S end, which lies 6 miles WSW of Asquith Shoal.

Robinson Rock, with a depth of 10.9m lies 3 miles SE of the

main shoal, with depths of 11m between.

6.86 Herring Shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies 10 miles E of

Tanjung Tembeling. An 11m shoal lies 3.5 miles farther E.

Clark Shoal, with a depth of 8.2m, lies 2 miles SSE of Herring

Shoal. A 10.4m shoal, and a rock with a depth of 10.7m, lie 2

miles E and 2 miles ESE, respectively, of Clark Shoal.

6.86 Martin Ridge, composed of sand and rock, extends S for a

distance of 9 miles from a position 8.5 miles ESE of Tanjung

Tembeling. There is a patch, with a least depth of 7.3m at the N

end, and there is a least depth of 6.7m about 2 miles from its S

end.

6.86 Karang Tanjong, with a least depth of 4.9m, sand, shell, and

shingle, lies with its shallowest part lying 3 miles SE of

Tanjung Tembeling. Depths of 5 to 7m lie 1 mile SSW of the

shallowest part, and depths of 6.7 to 9.4m extend 6 miles NNE

of the shallowest part. Stork Rock, with a depth of 10.6m, lies

9 miles ENE of Tanjung Tembeling. An obstruction, with a

depth of less than 6.4m, lies 0.8 mile W of the N end of Karang

Tanjong.

6.86 Appleby Rock, Harris Shoal and Taylor Shoal, with depths

of 4.2m, 5.5m, and 4.2m respectively, lie 5, 6.5, and 9.5 miles,

respectively, SSE of Tanjung Tembeling.

Kuantan Port (3°58'N., 103°26'E.)

World Port Index No. 57410

6.87 Kuantan Port is situated on the N side of Tanjung

Gelang. Kuantan Old Port (3°48'N., 103°20'E.) is located at

the mouth of the Kuantan River, 11 miles SSW. Kuantan Port is

the only deep-water port on the E side of the Malay Peninsula

and can accommodate vessels of 45,000 dwt, except at the

palm oil berth, where vessels of 54,500 dwt, with a draft of

11.2m, can be accommodated. The main exports are timber

and palm oil.

6.87 There is a basin in the harbor and the harbor is protected by

N and S breakwaters, each marked by a light at the head. From

the basin entrance, the N breakwater extends SE and then SSE

1 mile, to a point 0.5 mile NNE of Tanjung Gelang Light. The

S breakwater extends 0.1 mile from a point N of the same light. 

6.87 Winds—Weather.—The wind is predominantly NE. The

monsoon season is from November to February.

6.87 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range at spring rise is 3.5m.

The predominant current sets N across the harbor entrance

attaining a velocity of 2 knots, which decreases as it flows

seaward. The current may reverse its direction to the S after a

storm during the monsoon.

6.87 Depths—Limitations.—The channel to Kuantan is dredged

to a least depth of 12.6m. Within the breakwaters is a turning

basin, 500m in diameter, with a least depth of 12.2m. 

6.87 There are 11 berths in the port. A jetty, on the S side of the

entrance to the basin, has inner and outer palm oil berths. The

outer berth is 315m long for vessels with 11.5m draft and can

accommodate vessels of up to 54,000 dwt. The inner berth is

150m long for a vessel with a maximum draft of 8m and can

accommodate vessels of up to 8,000 dwt. At the N entrance to

the basin, there is a jetty with mineral oil berth 150m long for

vessels with an 8m draft.

6.87 On the S side at the W section of the harbor basin there are

general and container cargo berths, numbered from seaward,

with a total quayage of 750m for vessels having a maximum
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 147

Pub. 161

draft of 11.2m. The container berth is 225m long with an

alongside depth of 11.5m. The three multipurpose berths have

a total length of 525m. Passenger vessels may dock at the

multipurpose berths. The container, ro-ro, and multipurpose

facilities can accommodate vessels up to 45,000 dwt. Sternramp vessels can also be accommodated.

6.87 The Chemical Berth and the MTBE Terminal each have a

length of 240m, at which vessels of up to 53,000 dwt, with a

maximum draft of 11.4m, can berth.

6.87 The Service Jetty, close N of the Naval Basin, is 140m long

and has an alongside depth of 4m. Berth No. 1A is a coastal

berth, 70m long in a depth of 8m. 

6.87 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels are to forward

their ETA at least 24 hours in advance and to confirm the ETA

on VHF channel 12, 13, or 16 at least 2 hours before arrival.

Pilots board vessels at a point 0.3 mile E of Fairway Lighted

Buoy.

6.87 Anchorage.—Vessels with drafts up to 13m draft anchor NE

and SW of the approach channel, good holding ground, mud

and sand, although this anchorage is exposed to the Northeast

Monsoon.

6.87 Directions.—From the pilot boarding place the channel

leads in a straight line for a distance of 3 miles to the breakwater entrance. The range lights, bearing 311°04', will guide a

vessel in maintaining the centerline of the channel; it is 220m

wide and dredged through a ridge 1.5 miles SE from the breakwater entrance. The channel has a least depth of 12.2m. An

underkeel clearance of 3.5m is required to enter harbor during

the Northeast Monsoon.

6.87 Caution.—Discolored water lies in position 3°53'N,

105°11'E, approximately 15 miles SSE of the lighted platform

situated in Belida Oil Field. 

6.87 A dangerous wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, lies 0.6 mile

ESE of Tanjung Gelang. Another dangerous wreck lies 1.1

miles ENE of the point. 

6.88 Tapis Marine Terminal A (5°31'N., 105°01'E.)

(World Port Index No. 57425) is situated within a restricted

area that should not be entered by unauthorized vessels. Several groups of platforms from the surrounding oilfields are connected by pipelines. Dulang Platform is situated 5 miles NW of

Semankok Platform. A tanker mooring buoy is established 1

mile S of Dulang Platform. 

6.88 Pipelines are laid from Tapis Terminal and Sotong Platforms

WSW to Kertih Terminal. Semangkok Field, with two

platforms, is situated 47 miles WNW of Tapis Marine Terminal

A; Sotong Collector Platform is situated 42 miles SSW of

Tapis Marine Terminal A; and Kakap Oil Field is situated 55

miles SE of Tapis Marine Terminal A. Two Duyong Platforms

are situated 24 and 29 miles ENE of Satong Platform.

6.88 A platform, with a SPM close E, is situated 40 miles E of the

E Duyong platform.

6.88 Pilotage.—Pilots board in the waiting area 17 miles SSW of

the storage tanker, where ships usually remain underway. Port

radio station and administrative offices are aboard the storage

tanker.

6.89 Sungai Kuantan (3°48'N., 103°21'E.), entered 1.7

miles W of Tanjung Tembeling, provides access to Kuantan,

which is the outlet for a considerable tin mining industry.

Kuala Kuantan, the mouth of the river, is fronted by a drying

bank. A dredged channel, marked by a lighted range and

lighted buoys, leads across the bank. The channel is subject to

constant change, especially during the Northeast Monsoon; the

range lights and buoys are moved as necessary. No vessel

should enter the river without local knowledge.

6.89 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Kuantan is 2.7m at

MHHW and 1.8m at MLHW.

6.89 Depths—Limitations.—The river is accessible to vessels of

up to 3m draft. The main wharf in the harbor is 43m long, with

a depth of 2.1m alongside, and a depth of 4.9m a short distance

off. A private wharf, close SW of the main wharf, has depths of

3m alongside. Two T-head oil jetties, on the N side of the river,

have depths of 5.5 and 5.8m alongside.

6.89 A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends up to 2 miles

offshore for a distance of 5 miles SSW of Tanjung Tembeling.

6.89 Two 5.5m patches lie 1.8 miles S, and 2.2 miles SSW,

respectively, of Tanjung Tembeling. 

6.89 Aspect.—A cluster of three oil tanks stands on the N bank of

the river, close within the entrance, and provides a good

landmark. A water tank is conspicuous 0.3 mile S of the W

entrance point of the river. A conspicuous radio mast, 105m

high and marked by obstruction lights, stands 2 miles SW of

the same entrance point.

6.89 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 8.2 to

9.2m, mud and sand, good holding ground, 0.8 mile SSE of

Tanjung Tembeling.

6.89 Anchorage is also available 2.3 miles SE of Tanjung Tembeling, in a depth of 12m.

Kuantan to Tanjung Penyabong

6.90 The coast between the entrance to Sungai Kuantan

and the N entrance to Sungai Pahang, 18 miles SSE, is low and

densely wooded.

6.90 Sungai Pahang has two mouths formed by Pulau Syed

Hasan (Pulau Syed Hassan) (3°31'N., 103°29'E.). The river is

shallow and the banks constantly change.

6.90 Kuala Pahang Light is shown close N of the N entrance point

of Sungai Pahang.

6.90 Batu Serandu, a reef supporting a fishing reserve, has a depth

of 5.5m, and lies 3 miles NNW of the N entrance point of

Sungai Pahang.

6.90 Bass Shoals, consisting of several heads with depths of 9.8 to

10.7m, extends up to 7 miles E of the entrance to Sungai

Pahang. Cardno Shoals, with a least depth of 8m, lies 4 miles

SE of Pulau Syed Hasan.

6.90 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 8.2m, mud and sand, 1

mile NE of Kuala Pahang Light.

6.90 Wardlaw Shoals, consisting of patches of coral rising steeply

from the bottom, and with a least depth of 1.2m, lies 3.5 miles

S of Pulau Syed Hasan; depths of less than 5.5m extend about

1 mile farther S.

6.90 The coast from the S entrance of Sungai Pahang to abreast

Wardlaw Shoals is densely wooded, then the coast to Tanjung

Batu, 16 miles S, consists mainly of sandy beaches. A wooded

hill, 41m high, rises 1 mile N of Tanjung Batu.

6.90 A narrow shoal, 1.5 miles long in a N-S direction, and with a

least depth of 3m, lies with it S end lying 2.5 miles NE of

Tanjung Batu. A shoal, with a least depth of 3.4m, lies 6.5
148 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

miles farther N. A 7m patch lies 5 miles ENE of the abovementioned narrow bank.

6.90 A light is shown at Nenasi, a fairly large fishing settlement,

situated 3.5 miles S of Tanjung Batu.

6.91 Off-lying islets and dangers.—Pulau Berhala

(3°15'N., 103°39'E.), a wooded steep-sided islet, 28m high and

marked by a light, lies 13 miles ENE of Tanjung Batu. A ledge

of rocks, 0.3m high, over which the sea breaks in bad weather,

extends 0.3 mile NNE of the islet. A shoal, with a least depth

of 10m, and a 10m patch, lie 4.5 miles NW, and 7.5 miles N,

respectively, of Pulau Berhala.

6.91 Jubilee Shoal, a steep-to coral patch, with a least depth of

8.8m, lies 9 miles E of Pulau Berhala. A depth of 15.5m lies

10.5 miles NE of Jubilee Shoal.

6.91 Bell Shoal, with a depth of 15.8m, lies 18 miles NNE of

Pulau Berhala. Tucker Shoals, a number of detached shoals,

with a least depth of 12.8m, extends 10 miles SSE from Bell

Shoal.

6.91 The coast from Nenasi (3°08'N., 103°27'E.) to the entrance

of Sungai Rompin, 19 miles S, consists of a series of long,

sandy beaches, fringed by a line of casuarinas and backed by

flat jungle country. Settlements are distinguished by the

coconut palms which surround them.

6.91 Sungai Bebar, navigable at HW, enters the sea from within a

sandy spit, parallel with the coast and extending S of Nenasi.

Sungai Mercung, suitable for boats, lies 6 miles farther S.

6.91 Margaret Shoal, a detached bank 13.5 miles in length within

its 5.5m contour, lies with its N end lying 5.5 miles E of Nenasi

light structure. A patch, with a least depth of 1.5m, lies near its

S end, 3 miles offshore. An extensive shoal, with a least depth

of 10m, lies 6.5 miles E of the S part of Margaret Shoal.

6.91 A radio tower, marked by a red obstruction light, stands on

the N entrance point of Sungai (Sungei) Rompin.

6.91 The mouth of Sungai Rompin is fronted by a bar with a least

depth of 1.1m. No attempt should be made to enter the river

without local knowledge as changes occur every monsoon. The

port is little used except by fishing craft. The limits of the port

of Kuala Rompin are comprised between the parallels of

2°53'24"N and 2°45'00"N, and W of 103°36'48"E.

6.91 A light is shown from the head of the Kuala Rompin Jetty,

situated on the S side of the river.

6.91 Vessels working cargo via Sungai Rompin should anchor

within the port limits N of 2°49'18"N. Vessels working cargo

via Sungai Pontian, a river with a drying bar 3 miles SE of

Sungai Rompin, should anchor within the limits S of

2°49'18"N.

6.92 Pulau Duchong Laut, 43m high, lies 2.5 miles ESE of

the entrance to Sungai Pontian. Drying rocks lie NE of the

islet, and another islet, 35m high, lies 0.8 mile S.

6.92 Boya Rock, 0.3m high, lies 3 miles E of Pulau Duchong

Laut. A light is shown from Boya Rock.

6.92 The coast between Sungai Rompin and Tanjung Penyabong

(2°39'N., 103°45'E.), 19 miles ESE, is fairly low except for an

isolated hill, 129m high, standing 3.5 miles from the coast,

abreast of Pulau Duchong Laut.

6.92 Kuala Endau, entered 6.5 miles WNW is obstructed by a bar,

with depths of 0.9 to 1.5m, extending 1.5 miles offshore. A

light is shown from the E entrance point of Sungai Endau; the

light structure is difficult to identify from seaward. Robb

Shoals, an extensive rocky patch, lies with its least depth of

2.4m about 3.2 miles N of the river entrance. Iron ore and tin

are exported from the town of Endau, 1 mile within the river

entrance. 

6.92 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12.8 to 16.5m, mud,

good holding ground, about 5.3 miles NE of the river entrance.

6.93 Pulau Acheh (Pulau Kaban) (2°40'N., 103°46'E.),

located 1 mile NE of Tanjung Penyabong, has several summits,

the highest rising to 154m at its SE end. A small islet, 43m

high, lies close off the NW end of the island.

6.93 Pulau Tengah, 76m high, is the N of a group of islets and

rocks extending 1 mile N of the NW extremity of Tanjung

Penyabong.

6.93 Pulau Tunus and Pulau Layak lie on the N side of Blair

Harbor, about 1 mile, and 2 miles, respectively, NW of Pulau

Acheh. Pulau Tunus consists of three islets, the highest with an

elevation of 43m. Pulau Layak is 78m high at its SE end. Batu

Doyak, which dries 1.8m, lies 0.7 mile S of Pulau Layak.

6.93 A rock awash, and a rock with a depth of 5.5m, lie 0.5 mile

SW, and 0.7 mile SE of the S end of Pulau Acheh.

6.93 Anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge can be

taken, in a depth of 7.3m, stiff mud, W of Pulau Acheh between the islets NW and Pulau Tengah.

Tanjung Penyabong to Tanjung Sekakap

6.94 Two shallow bays, separated by Pulau Mawar, indent

the coast between Tanjung Penyabong and Tanjung Resang, 5

miles SE. Pulau Mawar consists of two islets; the SE and larger

islet is 72m high, and the NW islet has two conspicuous pillar

rocks, 24m high. Malang Gading, 1.3 miles N of Pulau Mawar,

consists of two groups of rocks, 0.2 mile apart, the N of which

is 3.4m high.

6.94 Tanjung Resang rises to an elevation of 75m. Bukit Arong,

238m high, is easily identified 1.5 miles SW of Tanjung

Resang. Pulau Puchong, 15m high, is located 1 mile SE of the

same point.

6.94 Tanjung Selantai, 143m high, is located 5 miles SSE of

Tanjung Resang. Pulau Batu Gajah (Batu Gaja), 45m high, is

located 1 mile SSE of Tanjung Selantai. Pulau Stindan, 85m

high and marked by a light at its SE end, is located 1.5 miles S

of the same point.

6.94 Caution.—Between Pulau Acheh and Tanjung Selentai, are

numerous fishing stakes which extend offshore to depths of

15m in places. During the Northeast Monsoon, these stakes are

frequently destroyed, and wooden stakes, often submerged, are

dangerous to small craft, and may be encountered anywhere

along the coast.

6.95 Mersing (2°26'N., 103°51'E.) lies at the mouth of

Sungai Mersing, 2.5 miles S of Pulau Setindan. A light,

difficult to distinguish against the lights of the town, is shown

on the S side of the river entrance. A green-tiled dome is conspicuous in the town, 0.3 mile S of the light. Batu Chawang, a

10m high red rock, lying 1 mile E of the river entrance, is a

good landmark. A meteorological hut with a flagstaff is

conspicuous on a hill about 1 mile NW of the river entrance.

The bar off the entrance of the river is passable by boats, and
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 149

Pub. 161

has varying depths. The bar was reported to dry at LW. 

6.95 Anchorage, according to draft, can be taken NE of the river

entrance; the very flat bottom consists of mud, sand, and shell.

6.95 Two radio masts, marked by obstruction lights, stand at an

elevation of 114m, about 3 miles S of Sungai Mersing, at the S

end of a range of hills.

6.95 Tanjung Sekakap, 107m high, is located 8 miles SE of

Sungai Mersing. Pulau Blanah, a small islet, 27m high, lies

close to the coast 1.3 miles NW of the point. A shoal with a

least depth of 8.2m lies 3 miles NNE of Tanjung Sekakap.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

6.96 Pulau Sembilang (2°42'N., 103°53'E.), 234m high on

its NW side, lies 7.5 miles ENE of Tanjung Penyabong. Pulau

Sribuat (Pulau Siribuat), 139m high at its SE end, is separated

from Pulau Sembilang, close W, by a foul channel. Pulau

Santu, 72m high and grass-covered, lies nearly 0.5 mile E of

the NE end of Pulau Sribuat. 

6.96 Mitchell Patches, an extensive bank, has a least known depth

of 10.4m lying 1.7 miles N of the NW end of Pulau Sribuat. A

depth of 8.5m lies 1.8 miles SE of the S end of Pulau

Sembilang, then a reef, with depths of 7.3 to 11m, extends NW

almost to the island.

6.96 Anchorage, well-sheltered from S, can be taken, in a depth

of 14m, mud, sand, and shell, 1 mile NW of the NW end of

Pulau Sribuat, on the S end of Mitchell Patches. Good anchorage can also be taken, in a depth of 16.5m, mud and sand,

1.2 miles SE of Pulau Sribuat, on the bank extending SE from

the island.

6.96 Pulau Mertang Barat (Pulau Achi), 2 miles SW of Pulau

Sribuat, is 59m high, and the NW and highest of three rocky

islets lying close together. Depths of less than 11m extend 0.4

mile W of Pulau Mertang Barat, and 0.4 mile SE of the SE

islet. A light is shown from Pulau Mertang Barat.

6.96 Remora Patches lie with a least depth of 13.7m lying 6 miles

NW of Pulau Mertang Barat. Burden Patches has a depth of

10.1m lying 2 miles SW of the same islet and a 10.4m depth

lying 2 miles farther S.

6.96 Pulau Harimau, located 6.5 miles SE of Pulau Mertang

Barat, is 91m high and steep-to except on its SW side where

there are sunken rocks. It is the NW and largest of a chain of

islets and rocks extending 3 miles SE, and which lie on the

same submerged ridge as Pulau Mertang Barat. A bank, with a

least depth of 11.6m, lies 2.5 miles NW of Pulau Harimau.

6.97 Pulau Mensirip, 49m high and tree-covered, lies 0.7

mile SE of Pulau Harimau; the fairway between the two islands

is free of dangers. Pulau Rawa, 113m high, is located 2 miles

farther SE and is the SE islet of the group.

6.97 Pulau Babi Kechil North, 122m high, lies 2 miles SW of

Pulau Rawa. Pulau Babi Kechil South lies 0.5 mile SSE of

Pulau Babi Kechil North, from which it is separated by foul

ground. A rock, 4.9m high, lies 0.2 mile off the E side of Pulau

Babi Tengah. Both islands are planted with coconut palms, and

there are sandy beaches on the SW sides, but the NE sides are

steep and rocky.

6.97 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 20m, mud and sand,

midway between Pulau Rawa and Pulau Babi Kechil North.

6.97 Pulau Babi Besar, lying 1.2 miles SSE of Pulau Babi Kechil

South, is thickly wooded, with four separate summits, the

highest of which is 252m high, in its SE part. It is fringed by

rocks and reefs extending up to 0.2 mile offshore. A bank, with

depths of 5.5 to 11m, extends 1.3 miles S of the island. A

detached 5.5m shoal lies 1.3 miles SW of the island. In the

channel between Pulau Babi Besar and the mainland, a bank

with a least depth of 10.6m and another bank, with a least

depth of 8.2m, lie 2 miles WNW and SW, respectively, of the

5.5m shoal.

6.97 Batu Sakit Mata, 1.5m high, is located 2.5 miles E of the N

end of Pulau Babi Besar, and Batu Tikus, 8.5m high, is located

2.5 miles farther SE. They are rocky outcrops on a bank with

general depths of 12.8 to 18.3m.

Pulau Tioman

6.98 Pulau Tioman (2°47'N., 104°10'E.), the largest island

off the E coast of Malaysia, consists of lofty mountains.

Gunong Kajang, the largest and highest peak, 1,053m high,

rises 5 miles NW of Tanjung Lanting, the SE extremity of the

island. A light is shown from Tanjung Lanting. 

6.98 A conspicuous twin-peaked hill, 456m high, is located near

Tanjung Lanting; a flat-topped mountain, 957m high, is conspicuous 2 miles farther NW. Bukit Perayon, 419m high, the N

summit of the island, is easily identified. The island is covered

with jungle, with some cultivation limited to the coastal strip.

The presence of coconut palms indicates the location of the

inhabitants of the island. The island has been reported visible

from distances of more than 50 miles at times.

6.98 The E side of Pulau Tioman, apart from Telok Juara, is

steep-to, rugged, and rocky, with no off-lying dangers. The N

entrance point of Telok Juara, 5 miles N of Tanjung Lanting,

rises abruptly to a height of 183m. Above-water rocks extend

0.2 mile SE of the point, and a 4.6m rocky shoal, and an 11m

patch, lie 0.3 mile SE and 0.4 mile SSW of the same point. The

cove is about 1.2 miles wide between its entrance points, and

recedes 0.8 mile W to a sandy beach bisected by a small

headland. The 10m curve fronts the W shore of the cove nearly

0.5 mile offshore. 

6.98 Anchorage, in depths of 11 to 18.3m, mud under sand, good

holding ground, can be taken in the SW part of the cove.

6.98 Telok Mokut, a sandy bay, indents the coast between

Tanjung Lanting and Tanjung Duata, located 4 miles W. Two

conspicuous outcrops of rock with twin summits, 760m high,

rise close N and NW of Tanjung Duata. Anchorage with local

knowledge and in fine weather, can be taken in Telok Mokut, in

depths of 26 to 28m, sand.

6.98 The SW coast of Pulau Tioman from Tanjung Duata to

Tanjung Bongkil, 4.2 miles NNW is steep-to, with the 10m

curve at no point lying more than 0.3 mile offshore.

6.98 Pulau Tumuk, a small wooded islet, 34m high, lies 0.5 mile

NNE of Tanjung Bongkil. Tanjung Batu Panjang lies 0.7 mile

farther NE. A radio mast stands on Tanjung Batu Panjang.

6.98 Telok Tekek (Telok Telek) is entered between Tanjung Batu

Panjong and Tanjung Penuba, 3.5 miles NNE. Pulau Rengis, a

small rocky islet, 24m high, lies 0.8 mile NE of Tanjung Batu

Panjong. A shallow bank of sand and coral, with a depth of

10.4m at its outer end, extends 0.4 mile W of Pulau Rengis.

Within the bay the 20m curve fronts the coast 0.3 mile offshore

with the exception of the bank off Pulau Rengis. Within the
150 Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 

Pub. 161

20m curve the depths decrease very rapidly and there are

numerous coral heads.

6.98 Anchorage can be taken anywhere in Telok Tekek, NE of

Pulau Rengis, in depths of 26 to 37m, mud and shells, good

holding ground.

6.98 An offshore current flowing NE attaining velocities of 1 to 2

knots has been reported in the vicinity of the bay.

6.98 Pulau Soyah, 37m high, lies close offshore, 1.3 miles N of

Tanjung Penuba. Between Tanjung Penuba and Tanjung Gua

Layang, the N extremity of Pulau Tioman, the 30m curve lies

at distances of no more than about 0.4 mile offshore.

6.99 Off-lying islets and dangers.—Magicienne Rock,

with a depth of 8.2m, lies 2 miles NW of the N extremity of

Pulau Tioman.

6.99 Pulau Tulai lies 3 miles WNW of the NW extremity of Pulau

Tioman. The island is densely wooded, and has several

summits, the highest rising 123m on the E side of the island.

Two above-water rocks lie off the S side of the island.

6.99 Pulau Chebeh, 72m high and nearly 1 mile NNW of Pulau

Tulai, is a steep-to rocky islet with few trees on it. 

6.99 Pulau Sepoi, a rocky islet, 73m high, lies 3 miles WSW of

Pulau Tulai. Pulau Labas, a bare rocky islet, 20m high, lies 1

mile SE of Pulau Sepoi. A comparatively shallow bank extends

between the two islets, with a 10.1m depth lying 0.2 mile SE of

Pulau Sepoi. Karang Tohor, with a least depth of 14m, lies 1.5

miles SSW of Pulau Labas.

6.99 Pulau Burong 9.5 miles W of the W extremity of Pulau

Tioman, is a group of three rocky islets; the N and largest islet

is 53m high.

6.99 Pulau Gut, 4.5 miles SW of Tanjung Lanting, is 49m high to

the tops of the trees. It is steep-to except off its S side where

depths of less than 5.5m extend 0.2 mile offshore. Batu Sepoy,

with a least depth of 2.4m, lies nearly 1 mile N of Pulau Gut.

6.99 Pulau Tokong Bahara (2°40'N., 104°04'E.) is a bare rock,

57m high, marked by a light close NNW, and lies 6.5 miles W

of Pulau Gut. Two detached rocks lie about 0.3 mile NNW of

the islet.

Pulau Pemanggil

6.100 Pulau Pemanggil (2°35'N., 104°20'E.), 9.5 miles SE

of Pulau Tioman, has two main peaks and a number of

subsidiary peaks. The SE and highest peak, 433m high, rises

abruptly from the end of the island; the NW peak, 386m high,

is less distinctive. A dome-shaped rocky summit, with smooth

vertical sides, rises to a height of 319m about 0.5 mile SSW.

6.100 The island is steep-to on all sides, but is partially fringed by

narrow coral reefs and rocks close inshore, particularly in the

bays. A rock, which dries 2.1m, lies 0.1 mile offshore in the N

part of Telok Kador, a bay on the NE side of the island.

Coconut-palm plantations distinguish the inhabited part of the

island, close to the shore of the two bays on the SW side of the

island.

6.100 Good anchorage can be found, in depths of 33 to 39m, sand

and shell, as convenient, off the SW coast of Pulau Pemanggil.

6.100 Pulau Aur (2°27'N., 104°31'E.), 11.5 miles SE of Pulau

Pemanggil, is densely wooded, with two conspicuous peaks.

The SE peak is 538m high, and the NW peak is 445m high.

From NE or SW, the saddle-shaped island often appears as two

islands from a great distance.

6.100 Pulau Pinang, 0.5 mile off the SE shore of Pulau Aur, is

steep-sided, rocky, and 95m high. The channel between these

two islands is deep and clear of dangers.

6.100 Three rocks and coral shoals, with depths of 9.2 to 10.1m, lie

SW of Pulau Pinang, 0.8 mile off the SE coast of Pulau Aur.

Strong tidal currents and current eddies may be encountered in

this area which should be given a wide berth.

6.100 A target, consisting of a group of nine mooring buoys, lies

2.3 miles S of the SW end of Pulau Aur.

6.100 Pulau Dayang, 171m high, lies close NW of Pulau Aur, from

which it is separated by a deep channel. A group of rocks, the

largest 1.5m high, extends 0.7 mile E from the N end of the

island. Pulau Lang, 55m high, lies 0.8 mile SW of Pulau

Dayang, and 0.5 mile off the W end of Pulau Aur.

6.100 Anchorage.—Large vessels can obtain good shelter during

the Northeast Monsoon off Telok To Kaya (Telok Kyahs) on

the SW side of Pulau Aur, in a depth of 40m, sand, a distance

of 0.5 mile offshore, with the left tangent of Pulau Aur bearing

335° and the right tangent bearing 117°. Within the bay the

bottom is irregular and discolored water caused by tidal eddies

give the impression of shoal water.

6.100 Excellent sheltered anchorage can be found, in a depth of

42m, sand and shell, at the NW end of Pulau Aur, equidistant

between that island, Pulau Dayang and Pulau Lang; swinging

room is limited to about 0.3 mile. The W approaches on either

side of Pulau Lang are deep and clear. The main village of

Pulau Aur lies in a sheltered valley on the SE side of this anchorage.

Tanjung Sekakap to Tanjung Penawar

6.101 The coast between Tanjung Sekakap (2°21'N.,

103°56'E.) and Tanjung Tenggaroh, located 6.5 miles SSE, is

mainly steep, rocky, and interspersed with sandy beaches.

Tanjung Murang, 2.5 miles SE of Tanjung Sekakap, rises to a

height of 111m.

6.101 A light is shown from the easternmost part of Tanjung

Tenggaroh; an abandoned lighthouse stands close SW.

6.101 The coast between Tanjung Tenggaroh and Tanjung Sedili

Besar, 22 miles SSE, is mostly low and densely wooded. The

coast between Tanjung Tenggaroh and Tanjung Leman, 6 miles

SSE, is fringed by a bank with depths of less than 5.5m extending up to 2.3 miles offshore.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

6.102 Batu Murau, 1.5m high, lies 4 miles E of Tanjung

Murau, at the S end of a reef of about 0.5 mile in extent.

6.102 Pulau Tinggi (2°18'N., 104°07'E.), 4 miles farther E, rises to

a conical peak, 609m high. Gebang Rocks, two rocks which

dry 0.6m and on which the sea breaks during the Northeast

Monsoon, lie 1.3 miles N of the island. Pulau Iboi, 105m high,

with two drying rocks close E, is the outermost of two islets,

0.5 mile off the NE side of the island. Pulau Simbang, 44m

high, lies near the SE edge of a bank with depths of less than

11m extending 1.8 miles SE of Pulau Tinggi. One Tree Rock,
Sector 6. The Gulf of Thailand and Malaysia—East Coast 151

Pub. 161

22m high, lies close N of Pulau Simbang, with a detached

rocky ledge, uncovered at most stages of the tide, close E.

6.103 Pulau Yu (Tokong Yu) (2°07'N., 104°15'E.), a bluff,

wooded islet, 47m high, is the SE of a chain of islets and

dangers extending 12 miles SE of Pulau Tinggi. A small shoal,

with a least depth of 11.3m on its S side, lies 1.3 miles NW of

Pulau Yu.

6.103 Tokong Chopak, 5m high, Tokong Blalang, 31m high, and

Tokong Chondong, 43m high, are located 3.5, 5, and 5.8 miles,

respectively, NW of Pulau Yu. A rocky ledge, with a least

depth of 1.8m, joins Tokong Chondong to Tokong Gantang, 0.3

mile N, and then extends 0.1 mile N to a rock which dries

1.2m.

6.103 Pulau Lima Besar, with five distinctive pinnacles, 52m high,

lies on a rocky bank lying 2 miles NW of Tokong Gantang.

Tokong Sangoe, 21m high, is located nearly 1 mile W of Pulau

Lima Besar, and Tokong Raket, two rocks, the highest 30m

high, lies 0.5 mile ESE of Pulau Lima Besar. Karang Ambong,

a rock with a depth of 0.9m, lies 0.5 mile SW of Pulau Lima

Besar.

6.103 Pulau Sibu, 4 miles SW of Pulau Tinggi, is 154m high near

its SE end, and 114m high near its NW end. A bank, with

depths of less than 5.5m, extends 2 miles SE of Pulau Sibu.

Pulau Sibu Tengah, 3.7m high, lies 1 mile SE of Pulau Sibu,

and other islets and rocks extending 1 mile farther SE, lie on

the SE edge of the above bank. Three patches, with a least

depth of 4.3m, lie 0.5 mile NE of the N end of Pulau Sibu.

6.103 Sibu Channel, between Pulau Sibu and the mainland, is 2.5

miles wide between the 5m curves on either side, with depths

of 9.8 to 15.2m in the fairway. The channel is encumbered by a

number of patches on its NE side, the shallowest with depths of

5.2m and 7.6m, about 1.2 miles NW, and 0.8 mile WNW,

respectively, of the NW end of Pulau Sibu.

6.103 Tanjung Sedili Besar (1°55'N., 104°08'E.) rises to an elevation of 47m. A light is shown from a 3.7m high rock, near

the outer end of foul ground extending 1 mile SE of the point.

6.104 Telok Mahkota (Jason Bay), a shoal bay, is entered

between Tanjung Sedili Besar and Tanjung Sedili Kechil, 4

miles SSE. A wreck, marked by a buoy, lies 5 miles E of Tanjung Sedili Kechil.

6.104 Sungai Sedili Besar enters the N end of the bay, between

Tanjung Sedili Besar and Pulau Tagal, a densely wooded

island, 0.5 mile W. Kampong Sedili Besar, a fishing village,

lies on the E side of the river entrance. A pylon, 15m high,

stands on a 0.6m high rock, about 0.1 mile N of Pulau Tagal;

an overhead telephone cable extends from the pylon to the jetty

at Kampong Sedili Besar. Tanjung Sedili Kechil is 85m high,

and a reef extends 0.8 mile E of the point.

6.104 The coast between Tanjung Sedili Kechil and Tanjung

Kelesa (Tanjung Klesa), 10 miles SSE, is backed by hills close

inshore. Depths of less than 11m extend 2 to 3 miles offshore.

Then the coast between Tanjung Kelesa and Tanjung Siang 4

miles farther SSE is bordered by trees about 43m high.

6.104 Tanjung Balau lies 2.5 miles SSE of Tanjung Siang. A group

of rocks, the highest with an elevation of 3m, lies close

offshore, 0.5 mile NW of Tanjung Balau.

6.104 Bukit Siti rises to a height of 137m about 3.5 miles WSW of

Tanjung Siang.

6.105 Tanjung Penawar (1°31'N., 104°17'E.), located 6.5

miles SSE of Tanjung Balau, is a low point, 9 miles N of the

NE entrance point of Singapore Strait. The coast for a distance

of 1 mile N of Tanjung Penawar is bold, but with rocky patches

extending 0.2 mile to 0.8 mile offshore. The 10m curve fronts

the point about 2 miles offshore.

6.105 Bukit Twatow, 139m high, rises 2 miles WSW of Tanjung

Penawar. The coast in this vicinity is rather low and wooded.

Bukit Twatow, being discernible during hazy weather much

sooner than Bukit Pelali, 191m high, 6 miles farther SSW, is a

good landmark when approaching Singapore Strait from N.
Pub. 161

Glossaries 153

Glossaries

Chinese

Chinese English

A

an................................embankment, bank, shore, coast cliff

an-chiao............................................. submerged rocks, reef

anjiao................................................................. sunken rock

ansha ........................................................... shoal, sandbank

ao.........................................................bay, cove, inlet, dock

B

bandao................................................................... peninsula

bei................................................................................. north

bi ................................................................................... nose

bodi ...................................................................... anchorage

bu ...............................................................................village

C

cao............................................................................ channel

cha....................................................lock, dam, floodbarrier

chau.........................................................................see chou

chao.....................................................................bog, marsh

chen.........................................................town, market town

ch'eng ........................................................ city, walled town

chi...............................................obstruction, ledges in river

ch'i............stream, river, head, cape, point, mountain, seven

chia.......................................................................cape, bluff

ch'ia ..............................................................customs barrier

chiang........ river, shoal, harbour, port, inlet, channel, sound

chiang-tao............................................channel, strait, sound

chiao.....................creek, rock, reef, shoal, islet, cape, point

ch'iao .......................................................................... bridge

chien.............................................................mountain, peak

ch'ien .............................................................. shallow, shoal

ch'ien-lai............................................................. bank, shoal

ch'ien-t'an ........................................................... bank, shoal

ch'ien-tui .......................................................................bank

ch'ih...............................................................................pong

chih-chiang-tao ............................................................reach

ching................................... capital, city isthmus, ford, ferry

chiu.................................................................................nine

cho...........................................................................see chou

chou................................................................... island, bank

chow........................................................................see chou

ch'uan ................................................................stream, river

chuang........................................................................village

chueh................................................................... cape, point

chung...............................................................middle,centre

ch'un-tao................................. archipelago, group of islands

chu-tao ................................... archipelago, group of islands

cun..............................................................................village

D

da............................................................................big, great

dao............................................................................... island

daozi............................................................................ island

diantan.......................................................................patches

ding ..................................................................................top

dizui ......................................................................... landspit

dong ................................................................................east

E

erh ...................................................................................two

F

fangbodi.............................................................. breakwater

feng .............................................................. mountain, peak

fou.................................................................................. port

fu................................................................. province capital

G

gang .............................................port, harbour, mound, hill

gangchi ........................................................................ basin

gangkou ........................................................... port, harbour

gaojiao ...............................................................promontory

guanchang.................................................................. square

H

hai ........................................................................... sea, gulf

haibin ...........................................................................beach

hai-ching ........................................................ strait, channel

haidi .........................................................................sea wall

hai-hsia .......................................................... strait, channel

haikou ...................................................................sea mouth

hai-k'ou ......................................................channel entrance

hai-pin........................................................seashoure, beach

haiqu .................................................................... water area

hai-wan ...................................................................bay, gulf

haixia ............................................................................strait

hangdao.....................................................................fairway

hang-lu......................................................................fairway

hangmen .......................................... pass navigable to ships

he .................................................................................. river

hei ................................................................................ black

ho ................................................................. river, waterway

hou ..................................................................................rear

hsi ....................................................west, mountain, stream

hsia..........................................................strait, gorge, lower

hsiang........................................................rural area, village

hsiao............................................................................. small

hsien..................................................district, district capital

hisin ............................................................................... new

hsu............................................................................... island

hsuan...........................................................................eddies

hu ................................................................................... lake

huang ......................................................................... yellow

hung .................................................................................red

J

ji....................................................................... village, town

jia ................................................................. headland, point

jian ......................................................................... top, peak

Chinese English
Pub. 161 

154 Glossaries

jiang .............................................................................. river

jiao ................................................................................. reef

jiao ...................................................................... point, cape

jie .................................................................................street

jiu .....................................................................................old

K

kan.............................................................dry, harbour, port

kan........................................................................see chiang

kang.................................................................... mound, hill

kao..................................................................................high

kao-chiao............................................................promontory

kao-juan .................................................................... plateau

kau............................................................................see k'ou

kiang.....................................................................see chiang

kiao.........................................................................see chiao

kou or k'ou ..mouth, river entrance, port, inlet, ravine, gully

kow............................................................................see kou

ku ................................................................................valley

ku-k'ou ........................................................................ravine

kuan.............................................................barrier, customs

kuo ........................................................... country, kingdom

L

lan...........................................................................reef, blue

lanjiangsha .......................................................................bar

lao.....................................................................................old

li ..........................................................gravel, shingle, inner

liedao...........................................................group of islands

lieh-tao ..................................................................see liedao

lieh-yeh ......................................................... group of rocks

lin .................................................................................forest

ling ................................... ridge, mountain, mountain range

liu ...........................................................stream, current, six

lu ....................................................................................road

M

man............................................................................seemen

maodi ................................................................... anchorage

mao-ti....................................................................see maodi

men................................................gate, pass, channel, strait

miao ...........................................................................temple

mu ........................................................... trees, wood, grave

mun ..........................................................................see men

N

nan................................................................................south

nei................................................................................. inner

nei-ao ........................................................................... basin

n'i....................................................................................mud

O

o ..................................................................................see ao

ou ................................................................................see ao

P

pa.................................................. embankment, quay, eight

pai.........................................................................reef, white

Chinese English

pang ........................................................................see peng

pan-tao ................................................................ see bandao

pao ......................................................town village, rampart

p'ao-t'ai........................................................................... port

pei ..............................................................................see bei

peng ............................................................................. creek

pi .......................................................................... cape, nose

piao ....................................................................... rock, islet

p'ing-chou .......................................................... level shoals

p'o .................................................................. arm of the sea

po-ti..................................................... roadstead, anchorage

pu ...............................................................................village

p'u ..................................inlet, creek, village, town, rampart

Q

qian ............................................................................... front

qiantan ................................................................shoal, bank

qu ................................................................................... area

qundao ............................................................... archipelago

qunjiao .......................................................................... reefs

S

san.................................................................................three

san........................................................................... see shan

san-chiao-chou.............................................................. delta

seu............................................................................. see hsu

sha............................ sandbank, islet, sand, low sandy point

sha-chiao..................................................................sandspit

sha-ch'iu................................................................sand dune

shan.....................................................mountain, hill, island

shang............................................................................upper

shan-hu .........................................................................coral

shan-hu-chiao ........................................................coral reef

shan-mo .......................................................mountain range

shan-sha ............................................................ bar, sandbar

shan-tien ...................................................mountain summit

shao...................................................................... small, few

shatan................................................sandy shoal, sand flats

sha-tsui.....................................................................sandspit

shatui......................................................................sandbank

shazhou ..................................................................sandbank

shazui.......................................................................sandspit

shen............................................................................... deep

sheng.......................................................................province

shi ..................................................................................rock

shih ..........................................city, market, store, rock, hill

thih-t'ai............................................................ridge of rocks

shih-ti.........................................................................swamp

shu...................................................................................tree

shu-lin ..........................................................................forest

shui .....................................................................water, river

shuidao..................................................................... channel

shui-lu ........................................................channel, passage

shui-tao ............................................................... seeshuidao

si ................................................................................temple

ssu ...................................................monastery, temple, four

su................................................................................ seehsu

Chinese English
Pub. 161

Glossaries 155 

T

ta...............................................................tower, great, large

t'a............................................................................... pagoda

tai ............................................................................... see tui

tan.................................................................................... flat

t'an..................................................banks, flats, rapids, lake

tang.............................................................................village

t'ang........................................................embankment, pond

tao...................................................island, road, paddy field

t'ao...................................................................................bay

tao-tzu ............................................................................islet

tau...............................................................................see tao

tautze.................................................................... see t'o-tzu

ti ...... embankment, dyke, earth, ground, place, low, bottom

t'ien.............................................................arable land, field

ting .......................................................... summit, mountain

t'o.......................................................stone, rocky eminence

t'o-tzu .............................................. stone, rocky knob, islet

tou or t'ou ............................................cape, headland, point

t'ou-tzu ................................................cape, headland, point

tow ............................................................................ see tou

tsui............................................................... cape, point, spit

tsui-tsu......................................................... cape, point, spit

tsui-wei......................................................... cape,point, spit

ts'unvillage

tu ........................................................................... ferry,ford

tuan.............................................................................village

tui .....................................................................mound, bank

tui-tsui .................................................................... bank,spit

tun ..............................................................................village

tung ................................................................................ east

W

wa.............................................................................. swamp

Chinese English

wai ................................................................................outer

wan.....................................................bay, gulf bend in river

wei .............................................headland, tail. walled town

X

xi .........................................................................west, creek

xia .................................................................................strait

xian ............................................................................county

xiao .....................................................................small, little

xin .................................................................................. new

xu ...............................................................................village

Y

yai .................................................................................. cliff

yan .................................................................................rock

yang ................. ocean, enclosed portion of the sea, channel

yeh .........................................................................moorland

yen ................................embankment, dyke, rock, reef, cliff

yen't'an ......................................................................salt pan

yen-tien ......................................................................saltpan

yen-ch'ang..............................................................saltworks

yu ........................................................................island, islet

yunhe ........................................................................... canal

yun-ho.......................................................................... canal

Z

zhai ............................................................................village

zhang...........................................................................mount

zhen...............................................................................town

zhong ............................................................middle, central

zhou .....................................................................shoal, islet

zhuang........................................................................village

zui .........................................................................point, spit

zeizi...............................................................................point

zulangdi .............................................................. breakwater

Chinese English
Pub. 161

156 Glossaries

Vietnamese

Vietnamese English

A

ap................................................................................hamlet

B

ban..............................................................................village

ban dao.................................................................. peninsula

ben tau....................................................................... seaport

bien...................................................................................sea

bot ..................................................................................inlet

C

cang........................................................................mountain

chu.................................................................. hill, mountain

cua..................................................................mouth of river

cudao, culao ................................................................ island

D

dar, dia........................................................................... river

doi ..................................................................high hill, cape

duong .......................................................................... ocean

G

giang..................................................................... large river

giong ............................................................................... hill

H

hon .................................................................... small island

hoang................................................................. lake, lagoon

K

kas ............................................................................... island

khum ..........................................................................village

kinh .................................................................... strait, canal

kompong ....................................................................village

L

lang.............................................................................village

luon .............................................................. irrigation canal

M

mui ...................................................................... cape, point

muon .......................................................... girrigation canal

N

nhai thi ...................................................................river port

nui .................................................................. hill, mountain

nuoc ....................................................................river, water

O

oan ................................................................................. gulf

ong ............................................................................. stream

P

phnom ..............................................................................hill

pho ................................................................ branch of river

phum ..........................................................................village

poulu ........................................................................... island

prek ............................................................................ stream

Q

quan dao............................................................. archipelago

R

rach ............................................................................ stream

ran .....................................................................breaker, reef

ranh .............................................................................. canal

roc ................................................................................ canal

S

sa............................................................................sandback

se, son, song.................................................................. river

soung, sung ................................................................. island

stoeung.......................................................................... river

T

than ..................................................... shallows, bar of river

thom...................................................................under water

tieu ................................................................ reef, coral reef

tong, tot..................................................................mountain

tram............................................................................ woods

tranh...........................................................................village

V

vam .................................................................... river mouth

vinh .........................................................................bay, gulf

W

wat .............................................................................temple

X

xa, xom ......................................................................village

xeo ............................................................................. stream

xuyen ............................................................................ river

Vietnamese English
Pub. 161

Glossaries 157

Cambodian

Cambodian English

A

ap................................................................................hamlet

au........................................................................stream, port

B

bai....................................................................................bay

ban..............................................................................village

banteai.................................................... fort, fortified place

beng......................................................................lake, pond

C

camnan............................................................................bay

chhung........................................................................... cape

Chrung .......................................................................... cape

chrouy ................................................................. point, cape

cua............................................................mouth of the river

D

dac................................................................................. river

dai...............................................................................stream

G

giri..........................................................................mountain

H

hon .............................................................................. island

K

keng.................................................................. rocks, rapids

khum ..........................................................................village

khuon ............................................................................quay

kinh ...............................................................................strait

koh .............................................................................. island

koi ................................................................. customs house

kok .............................................................................village

kompong ......................................................................... hill

komput ......................................................................summit

krong ..........................................................................stream

L

lem ................................................................................point

M

meat .............................................................. mouth, estuary

mui................................................................................point

muang ...........................................................................town

N

nam ............................................................................... river

nui ....................................................................................hill

O

ong ............................................................................. stream

P

phnom, pnom................................................. hill, mountain

phra ..............................................................................tower

phum srok .....................................city, capital, urban centre

poulu ........................................................................... island

prasap...................................................................... tributary

prasat............................................................................tower

prek ...................................................................stream, river

S

shrui ...............................................................................cape

song....................................................................river, rapids

T

tbong ............................................................................. peak

thui............................................................................... water

tonle ............................................................. large river, lake

tranh...........................................................................village

trep.................................................................floating island

tuk ................................................................................ water

X

xom ............................................................................village

Cambodian English
Pub. 161

158 Glossaries

Malay

Malay English

A

ayer.................................................................. water, stream

alangan.............................................................................bar

arus............................................................................ current

ayer masin............................................................. salt water

B

bagan............................................................... landing place

baharu, bahru ................................................................. new

bandar.......................................................port, trading town

barat ................................................................west, western

batang............................................................................ river

batu.................................................................................rock

besar....................................................................large, great

beting ................................................................. shoal, bank

biru.................................................................................blue

bukit ................................................................................ hill

C

changkat.......................................................... hillock, shoal

chetek....................................................................... shallow

D

dalam............................................................................. deep

darat ........................................................... land, the interior

G

gosong, gusong ........................................... shoal, reef, islet

H

hijau .............................................................................green

hitam, itam ..........................................................black, dark

hutan or utan ....................................................jungle, forest

K

kampong.....................................................................village

karang................................................................... coral, reef

kechil...................................................................small, little

kering, kring.................................................................... dry

kuala................mouth or a river or confluence of two rivers

kuning ........................................................................yellow

L

labuan................................................................... anchorage

laut ....................................................................sea, seaward

M

malang.....................................................rock, reef, or shoal

mas.............................................................................golden

merah ...............................................................................red

muara .......................................................... mouth of a river

N

negri.....................................................................town, state

P

paya................................................................marsh, swamp

pangkalan........................................................ landing place

panjang ..........................................................................long

pantai ................................................ coast, seaboard, beach

parit.................................................................. ditch, stream

pasir ................................................................... sand, beach

pekan................................................................town, market

pohon or pokok...............................................................tree

prau ................................................................................boat

pulau ........................................................................... island

puteh, putih ..................................................................white

R

rendah .............................................................................low

rumah...........................................................................house

S

selat................................................................ channel, strait

selatan .......................................................... south, southern

sungai............................................................................ river

T

tanah ................................................................land, country

tanjong ...........................cape, headland, point, promontory

telok ....................................................... bay, bend in a river

terumbu, trumbu ............................. dangerous hidden shoal

terusan....................................................connecting channel

timor ...............................................................................east

tinggi..............................................................................high

tohor..........................................................................shallow

tua ....................................................................................old

tukun ................................................................. sunken rock

U

umpur.............................................................................mud

utara ............................................................................. north

Malay English
Pub. 161

Glossaries 159

Thai

Thai English

A

ao.......................................................................... bay, creek

B

ban...........................house, or, if with a place name, village

bo ...................................................................................lake

bung .......................................................................... swamp

C

chiang............................................................................town

chong.............................................................................strait

chong........................................................................... khaep

D

dam...............................................................................black

deng..................................................................................red

din-nieo ..........................................................................clay

din-saw-pong ...............................................................chalk

don .........................................................................high land

doi ................................................................................... hill

F

fai ...........................................................................fire, light

fang ..............................................................................shore

H

hard ............................................................................. beach

hardzai.................................................................sand beach

hin ..................................................................................rock

hlaem.............................................................cape, headland

ho .................................................................................tower

hoioy ..........................................................................stream

hyai................................................................................great

K

kao....................................................................................old

kaho..............................................................................white

khlon ..............................................................................mud

khlong ............................................................ canal or creek

khok ................................................................................ hill

ko ................................................................................ island

L

laem...............................................................cape, headland

lang...............................................................................lower

lek ................................................................................ small

lom................................................................................wind

luang .............................................................................large

lueng .......................................................................... yellow

M

mae ............................................................................... river

mai ................................................................................. new

mai nam ........................................................................ river

monthol, monthon...................................... province or state

muang ...........................................................................town

N

nai-kwa .........................................................................inner

nakhon ..........................................................................town

noi ..................................................................................little

nik-kwa .........................................................................outer

P

pa dong ........................................................................forest

pak ..............................................................................mouth

pak nam ...................................................... mouth of a river

phra-chedi ................................................................. pagoda

phukhao .................................................................mountain

pom ................................................................................. fort

S

sai.......................................................................sand, gravel

so-cloke..........................................................................rock

T

tam ..................................................................................low

thale .................................................................................sea

thale saplake

thi samo ............................................................... anchorage

thitnua .......................................................................... north

thit tai........................................................................... south

thit tuan ok......................................................................east

thit tuan tok....................................................................west

tong koong ............................................................river bend

W

wat .............................................................................temple

Y

yot ....................................................................................top

Thai English
161

Pub. 161

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

ABERDEEN HARBOR 22 15 N 114 11 E 2.16

ADAMASTA ROCK 22 14 N 114 01 E 2.27

AI ZHOU 22 03 N 113 55 E 2.13

ALICIA ANNIE REEF 9 24 N 115 26 E 1.34

ALISON REEF 8 50 N 114 00 E 1.36

ALLISON REEF 8 50 N 114 00 E 1.36

ALOUETTE BANK 21 11 N 110 24 E 3.21

AMBOYNA CAY 7 52 N 112 55 E 1.44

AMPHITRITE GROUP 16 53 N 112 17 E 1.8

AN THOI 10 01 N 104 01 E 6.9

ANBO SHOZHOA 7 52 N 112 55 E 1.44

ANOA NATUNA MARINE TERM. 5 13 N 105 36 E 1.46

ANTELOPE REEF 16 27 N 111 35 E 1.14

AO SATTAHIP 12 38 N 100 54 E 6.32

AO UDOM 13 07 N 100 53 E 6.42

AP LEI PAI 22 14 N 114 09 E 2.16

ARCHIPEL DES FAI TSI LONG 20 50 N 107 25 E 4.30

ARDASIER REEF 7 38 N 113 56 E 1.38

ASQUITH SHOAL 3 44 N 103 43 E 6.86

B

BACHDANG 20 52 N 106 45 E 4.28

BAI NUM 16 06 N 108 18 E 5.13

BAIAN DAO 18 49 N 110 34 E 3.43

BAIE D'APOWAN 20 43 N 107 02 E 4.28

BAIE DE FAI TSI LONG 20 55 N 107 13 E 4.38

BAIE DE LAN HA 20 45 N 107 07 E 4.32

BAIE DE NHA TRANG 12 15 N 109 14 E 5.34

BAIE DE PHAN RANG 11 35 N 109 02 E 5.40

BAIE DE REAM 10 31 N 103 36 E 6.14

BAIE DU LUTIN 16 06 N 108 18 E 5.13

BAIE DU SUD OUEST 8 40 N 106 32 E 5.10

BAILI DAO 21 59 N 113 45 E 2.34

BAILONG WEI 21 30 N 108 13 E 4.9

BANC DU PROPONTIS 10 35 N 106 52 E 5.53

BANC WALLACE 9 29 N 107 38 E 5.5

BANG SAPHAN 11 11 N 99 34 E 6.49

BANGKOK 13 45 N 100 30 E 6.44

BAOHU JIAO 20 01 N 110 56 E 3.32

BEI SHI 19 59 N 111 16 E 3.40

BEIHAI GANG 21 29 N 109 04 E 4.6

BEIJIAN DAO 21 53 N 114 02 E 2.11

BEILI WAN 19 10 N 108 35 E 3.52

BEN DAM 8 40 N 106 32 E 5.10

BEN THUY 18 39 N 105 42 E 4.18

BEN THUY PIER 18 39 N 105 42 E 4.18

BINGMA JIAO 19 55 N 109 18 E 3.39

BLACK POINT 22 25 N 113 54 E 2.44

BLACK ROCKS 20 30 N 110 32 E 3.26

BOKHARA ROCKS 22 13 N 114 16 E 2.19

BOMBAY REEF 16 02 N 112 31 E 1.16

BOMBAY SHOAL 9 26 N 116 55 E 1.30

BONGKOT TERMINAL 8 04 N 102 20 E 6.65

BOXALL REEF 9 36 N 116 10 E 1.32

BRITTO BANK 10 29 N 107 50 E 5.51

BROTHERS POINT 22 21 N 114 01 E 2.31

BUKIT BAUK 4 42 N 103 25 E 6.81

C

CAI LAN 20 57 N 107 04 E 4.35

CAM PHA 21 02 N 107 22 E 4.47

CAN THO 10 02 N 105 47 E 5.61

CANTON 23 06 N 113 14 E 2.52

CAP BANG 19 26 N 105 49 E 4.20

CAP BOUTON 19 13 N 105 45 E 4.19

CAP BUMBI 10 32 N 104 11 E 6.11

CAP CHAO 19 43 N 105 54 E 4.21

CAP LAY 17 05 N 107 07 E 4.10

CAP PAK LOUNG 21 30 N 108 13 E 4.9

CAP QUAN LAN 20 59 N 107 29 E 4.55

CAP SA HOI 14 40 N 109 05 E 5.19

CASTLE ROCK 22 15 N 114 01 E 2.26

CAY DUA 10 01 N 104 01 E 6.9

CENTRAL REEF 8 55 N 112 21 E 1.42

CH'I-CHOU CH'UN TAO 19 56 N 111 13 E 3.40

CH'ING CHOU 21 29 N 111 28 E 3.8

CH'ING LING 21 06 N 110 33 E 3.14

CH'UAN-PI CHIAO 22 45 N 113 40 E 2.48

CHAI WAN 22 16 N 114 15 E 2.14

CHANGKENG DING 22 19 N 113 36 E 2.40

CHARLOTTE BANK 7 08 N 107 36 E 1.49

CHAU KUNG TO 22 16 N 114 03 E 2.21

CHAU LIN 22 37 N 113 09 E 2.58

CHEK CHUE WAN 22 12 N 114 12 E 2.15

CHEK LAP KOK ISLAND 22 19 N 113 56 E 2.30

CHENGMAI JIAO 20 04 N 110 09 E 3.37

CHESTERMAN ROCK 22 11 N 114 12 E 2.19

CHIAO-WEI CHIAO 20 13 N 109 55 E 4.3

CHIAO-WEI CHIAO LIGHT 20 13 N 109 55 E 3.27

CHIA-P'ENG LIEH-TAO 21 52 N 114 00 E 2.11

CHIA-PEI CHIAO 20 29 N 110 31 E 3.30

CHIA-PEI CHIAO 20 29 N 110 32 E 3.26

CHI-MOA SHA 20 51 N 110 31 E 3.25

CHING-HSIN CHIAO 20 01 N 110 56 E 3.32

CHIN-HAING MEN 22 23 N 113 37 E 2.52

CHIN-MU CHIAO 18 10 N 109 33 E 3.45

CHISHA SHUIDAO 23 02 N 113 30 E 2.46

CHITAN 22 07 N 113 46 E 2.36

CHIWAN HARBOR 22 28 N 113 52 E 2.39

CHONG KO TAO 9 55 N 99 55 E 6.58

CHROUY KAB 10 29 N 104 18 E 6.13

CHROUY SAMIT 10 52 N 103 07 E 6.19

CHU LU KOK ISLAND 22 19 N 113 56 E 2.30

CHUANBI SHUIDAO 22 42 N 113 41 E 2.45

CHUK SAMET HARBOR 12 37 N 100 55 E 6.31

COLOSSE 21 01 N 107 27 E 4.52

COMMODORE REEF 8 22 N 115 14 E 1.37

CON SON ISLANDS 8 42 N 106 37 E 5.8

CORNWALLIS SOUTH REEF 8 45 N 114 13 E 1.36

CU LAO CHAM 15 57 N 108 31 E 5.14

CU LAO POULO GAMBIR 13 37 N 109 21 E 5.21

CU LAO RE 15 23 N 109 07 E 5.18
162 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 161

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

CU LAO THU 10 32 N 108 57 E 5.2

CU LAO THU 10 33 N 108 56 E 5.1

CU LAO XANH 13 37 N 109 21 E 5.21

CUA DAI 19 58 N 106 06 E 4.24

CUA DAY 19 58 N 106 06 E 4.24

CUA LO PIER 18 49 N 105 42 E 4.18

CUA MO 21 13 N 107 37 E 4.53

CUA NHUONG 18 16 N 106 08 E 4.15

CUA THAI BINH 20 36 N 106 38 E 4.24

CUA THUAN AN 16 34 N 107 38 E 5.11

CUARTERON REEF 8 54 N 112 52 E 1.41

D

DA NANG 16 04 N 108 14 E 5.12

DA NANG 16 09 N 108 12 E 5.12

DACHAN WAN 22 33 N 113 53 E 2.44

DAFANGJI DAO 21 23 N 111 11 E 3.10

DAHAOZHOU SHUIDAO 23 05 N 113 28 E 2.46

DAHENGQIN DAO 22 06 N 113 30 E 2.53

DAHENGQIN DAO 22 06 N 113 33 E 2.37

DAHU DAO 22 50 N 113 35 E 2.49

DAHUA JIAO 18 47 N 110 33 E 3.43

DAHUO 21 39 N 112 07 E 3.6

DAI HUNG OIL FIELD 8 29 N 108 41 E 5.6, 5.7

DAJIN 21 52 N 113 02 E 2.54

DALLAS REEF 7 38 N 113 48 E 1.39

DANGAN DAO 22 02 N 114 12 E 2.11

DANGAN LIEDAO 22 01 N 114 12 E 2.11

DAO CAI BAU 21 31 N 107 37 E 4.60

DAO CAT BA 20 48 N 107 02 E 4.30

DAO CHING LAN XAN 21 01 N 107 50 E 4.54

DAO LAI TAO 20 43 N 107 28 E 4.41

DAO LO CHUC SAN 21 14 N 107 58 E 4.61

DAO PHU QUI 10 32 N 108 57 E 5.2

DAO PHU QUI 10 33 N 108 56 E 5.1

DAO PHU QUOC 10 15 N 104 00 E 6.10

DAO TAGNE 11 50 N 109 15 E 5.36

DAPENG JIAO 22 27 N 114 30 E 2.2

DAPENG WAN 22 32 N 114 23 E 2.2

DATOU ZHOU 22 06 N 113 42 E 2.36

DAWANSHAN DAO 21 56 N 113 43 E 2.33

DAWO SHAN 22 05 N 113 33 E 2.36

DAZHIZHU DAO 22 07 N 113 53 E 2.34

DAZHOU DOA 18 40 N 110 29 E 3.43

DENGLOU JIAO 20 13 N 109 55 E 4.3

DIDO BANK 16 49 N 112 53 E 1.15

DIJIAO 21 29 N 109 04 E 4.6

DISCOVERY GREAT REEF 10 01 N 113 52 E 1.26

DISCOVERY REEF 16 14 N 111 40 E 1.17

DISCOVERY SMALL REEF 10 01 N 114 01 E 1.26

DONG NGAI 16 21 N 107 14 E 4.10

DONGDAFAN SHI 21 27 N 112 22 E 3.6

DONGMAO ZHOU 18 11 N 109 41 E 3.45

DONGTOUSHAN DAO 21 06 N 110 24 E 3.16

DOUBLE HAVEN 22 32 N 114 18 E 2.4

DOULONG CUN 20 56 N 110 38 E 3.21

DUNCAN ISLANDS 16 27 N 111 43 E 1.12

DUNG QUAT 15 25 N 108 44 E 5.16

DUONG DONG 10 13 N 103 58 E 6.9

E

EAST LAMMA CHANNEL 22 14 N 114 08 E 2.20

EAST REEF 8 50 N 112 35 E 1.41

ENLOA REEF 8 07 N 114 08 E 1.39

ENTREE PROFONDE 20 47 N 107 07 E 4.32

ERAWAN TERMINAL 9 05 N 101 19 E 6.63

ERICA REEF 8 07 N 114 08 E 1.39

F

FANGCHENG GANG 21 45 N 108 21 E 4.8

FEN-CHIEH CHOU 18 35 N 110 12 E 3.44

FENG-CH'UAN 23 24 N 111 31 E 2.67

FIERY CROSS REEF 9 35 N 112 54 E 1.41

FIRST THOMAS SHOAL 9 20 N 115 57 E 1.34

FOUR FEET ROCK 22 09 N 113 46 E 2.37

FUNGSTON 23 24 N 111 31 E 2.67

G

GAOLAN DAO 21 55 N 113 15 E 2.54

GAU TAU 22 28 N 114 26 E 2.3

GAVEN REEFS 10 12 N 114 13 E 1.25

GEMINI POINT 22 21 N 114 04 E 2.25

GOPAI POINT 20 29 N 110 32 E 3.26

GRAND BANC 12 17 N 109 18 E 5.29

GRAND PALACE 13 45 N 100 30 E 6.44

GRANDE CATWICK 10 03 N 108 54 E 5.4

GRANDE NORWAY 20 37 N 107 10 E 4.26

GREEN ISLAND 22 17 N 114 07 E 2.18

GUANGZHOU 23 06 N 113 14 E 2.52

GUANTOU JIAO 21 27 N 109 02 E 4.3

GUANYIN JIAO 19 35 N 109 00 E 3.55

GUISHAN DAO 22 08 N 113 49 E 2.34

H

HA MEI WAN 22 13 N 114 06 E 2.17

HA TIEN 10 23 N 104 29 E 6.12

HAI PHONG 20 52 N 106 41 E 4.28

HAIKOU 20 02 N 110 17 E 3.36

HAI-LING-SHAN CHIANG 21 45 N 111 39 E 3.7

HAILINGSHAN DAO 21 38 N 111 54 E 3.7

HAILINGSHAN GANG 21 45 N 111 39 E 3.7

HAI-LING-SHAN TAO 21 38 N 111 54 E 3.7

HAINAN STRAIT 20 10 N 110 10 E 3.27

HALF MOON SHOAL 8 52 N 116 16 E 1.30

HANOI 21 02 N 105 50 E 4.23

HAO CHOU 22 09 N 113 24 E 2.56

HAU HOI WAN 22 28 N 113 57 E 2.44

HAVEN ANCHORAGE 18 14 N 109 26 E 3.49

HEBAO DAO 21 52 N 113 10 E 2.69

HEI CHIAO 20 30 N 110 32 E 3.26

HELEN SHOAL 19 12 N 113 52 E 1.6

HENGGANG DAO 22 02 N 114 01 E 2.13

HENG-KANG CHOU 22 02 N 114 01 E 2.13

HENGMEN DAO 22 34 N 113 35 E 2.43

HEUNG KONG TSAI 22 15 N 114 11 E 2.16

HIN ALHAMBRA 12 26 N 101 40 E 6.25

HIN CHALAM 12 28 N 100 58 E 6.29

HIN RANG KWIAN 12 48 N 100 48 E 6.33

HOK TSUI 22 13 N 114 16 E 2.14

HON DAT 13 41 N 109 16 E 5.22

HON DAU 20 40 N 106 49 E 4.28

HON DAU LIGHT 20 40 N 106 49 E 4.28

HON DUNG 12 16 N 109 22 E 5.30

HON DUOC 10 15 N 104 19 E 6.11

HON GAI 20 57 N 107 04 E 4.35

HON HANG TOI 20 49 N 107 20 E 4.44

HON HEO 10 11 N 104 32 E 6.6

HON HEO 12 24 N 109 17 E 5.30

HON KHOAI 8 26 N 104 50 E 5.63

HON LONG DOI 11 43 N 109 14 E 5.39

HON MAO 12 44 N 109 20 E 5.28

HON MAT 18 48 N 105 58 E 4.17

HON MAY DEN 20 52 N 107 07 E 4.34

HON ME 19 22 N 105 56 E 4.20

HON MUI 11 49 N 109 12 E 5.37

HON NAM DU 9 41 N 104 21 E 6.7

HON NE 19 55 N 106 01 E 4.21

HON NGHE 10 01 N 104 33 E 6.6

HON NGOAI 12 00 N 109 20 E 5.33

HON NIEU 18 48 N 105 46 E 4.17

HON PANJANG 9 18 N 103 29 E 6.3

HON RAI 9 48 N 104 38 E 6.8

HON SON CHA 16 13 N 108 12 E 5.11

HON TAY 9 49 N 104 03 E 6.8

HON THO CHAU 9 18 N 103 29 E 6.3

HON TRE 12 12 N 109 17 E 5.29

HON TRE 9 57 N 104 50 E 6.6

HON TRUNG 11 49 N 109 12 E 5.37

HON TRUNG 8 46 N 106 43 E 5.8

HON TRUNG LON 8 36 N 106 09 E 5.10

HON YEN 13 23 N 109 17 E 5.24

HONAN-CHOU TSUI 23 06 N 113 14 E 2.50

HONG KONG ISLAND 22 16 N 114 12 E 2.14

HONGKAN POINT 20 19 N 110 24 E 3.30

HOPKINS REEF 10 49 N 116 05 E 1.28

HSIA-CH'UAN SHAN 21 40 N 112 36 E 3.4
Index—Gazetteer 163

Pub. 161

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

HSIAO-TAO CHIAO 20 14 N 110 07 E 3.31

HSIEH-YANG TAO 20 54 N 109 13 E 4.5

HSI-FANG TUI 20 17 N 110 40 E 3.28

HSI-TAN TAO 21 58 N 114 08 E 2.11

HU LANG 20 44 N 107 12 E 4.42

HUANGPU 23 05 N 113 25 E 2.50

HUANGPUXINGANG 23 03 N 113 30 E 2.47

HUE 16 29 N 107 35 E 5.11

HUIPENG JIAO 22 30 N 113 50 E 2.44

HUIZHOU OIL TERMINAL 21 21 N 115 25 E 1.4

HUMEN SHUIDAO 22 46 N 113 38 E 2.45

HUNAN 22 46 N 113 40 E 2.45

HUNG SHAN 21 04 N 110 32 E 3.14

HU-TIEH LING 21 33 N 108 26 E 4.7

I

ILE AUX BRUYERES 21 09 N 107 35 E 4.53

ILE DAO TRAO 20 52 N 107 22 E 4.45

ILE DE KE-BAO 21 31 N 107 37 E 4.60

ILE DE L'ENTREE 20 50 N 107 19 E 4.38

ILE DE LA PAIX 20 45 N 107 07 E 4.32

ILE DE LA PLAGE 21 14 N 107 38 E 4.53

ILE DE LA SURPRISE 20 51 N 107 06 E 4.35

ILE DES PIRATES 21 13 N 107 35 E 4.62

ILE DES SINGES 20 53 N 107 10 E 4.40

ILE DOUBLE 20 49 N 107 20 E 4.44

ILE DU CHENAL 20 56 N 107 17 E 4.46

ILE DU COUDE 21 03 N 107 28 E 4.50

ILE DU GRAND SINGE 21 17 N 107 41 E 4.53

ILE DU MARQUIS 21 05 N 107 30 E 4.53

ILE DU MILIEU 20 55 N 107 16 E 4.46

ILE DU SUD 20 47 N 107 20 E 4.41

ILE LO CHUC SAN 21 14 N 107 58 E 4.61

ILE MADELINE 21 06 N 107 34 E 4.57

ILE NOIRE 21 05 N 107 35 E 4.56

ILE OUEST 10 09 N 104 24 E 6.12

ILE SALACCO 20 50 N 107 08 E 4.34

ILE TAMASSOU 9 48 N 104 38 E 6.8

ILE TCHING LAN XAN 21 01 N 107 50 E 4.54

ILE TORTUE 14 22 N 109 12 E 5.19

ILES CATWICK 10 00 N 108 59 E 5.4

ILES D'AN THOI 9 57 N 104 02 E 6.8

ILES DE POULO DAMA 9 41 N 104 22 E 6.7

ILES TSIN SAN 21 17 N 107 47 E 4.62

ILHA DE COLOANE 22 08 N 113 34 E 2.37

ILHA DE TAIPA 22 10 N 113 33 E 2.37

ILOT CONE 11 26 N 103 00 E 6.20

ILOT DA TAI 11 43 N 109 14 E 5.39

ILOT VEER 10 14 N 102 53 E 6.5

ILOTS M 20 42 N 107 05 E 4.32

ILTIS BANK 16 46 N 112 13 E 1.10

INVESTIGATOR NORTHEAST SHOAL 9 10 N 116 25 E 1.31

INVESTIGATOR SHOAL 8 10 N 114 40 E 1.38

IRVING REEF 10 52 N 114 55 E 1.27

ISLET POINT 20 14 N 110 07 E 3.31

ITU ABA ISLAND 10 23 N 114 22 E 1.26

J

JACKSON ATOLL 10 30 N 115 45 E 1.27

JASMINE TERMINAL 11 18 N 101 13 E 6.49

JIAOWEI JIAO 20 13 N 109 55 E 4.3

JIAOWEI JIAO LIGHT 20 13 N 109 55 E 3.27

JIAPENG LIEDAO 21 52 N 114 00 E 2.11

JINMU JIAO 18 10 N 109 33 E 3.45

JINSUO PAI 22 48 N 113 36 E 2.45

JOHNSON REEF 9 42 N 114 17 E 1.34

JOSS HOUSE BAY 22 16 N 114 17 E 2.18

JUNK BAY 22 17 N 114 16 E 2.18

JUNK FLEET ENTRANCE 22 24 N 113 41 E 2.43

JUNK ROCK 23 02 N 113 24 E 2.51

K

KAAM SAMNA KRAOM 10 56 N 105 11 E 5.57

KAHO PHO BAI 13 07 N 100 54 E 6.42

KAMPONG SAOM 10 38 N 103 30 E 6.18

KAMPOT 10 36 N 104 11 E 6.13

KAOH KAONG KANG 10 36 N 103 25 E 6.16

KAOH KONG 11 20 N 103 00 E 6.20

KAOH MUL 11 26 N 103 00 E 6.20

KAOH POAH 10 37 N 103 29 E 6.15

KAOH RUNG SAMLOEM 10 35 N 103 18 E 6.16

KAO-YAO 23 01 N 112 28 E 2.64

KAU YI CHAU 22 17 N 114 04 E 2.22

KEMAMAN HARBOR 4 15 N 03 27 E 6.85

KEP SIANG 22 29 N 113 14 E 2.58

KERTIH OIL TERMINAL 4 34 N 103 28 E 6.81

KHANOM 9 14 N 99 52 E 6.61

KHAO HUA MAEW 11 55 N 102 47 E 6.20

KHAO KALOK 12 20 N 100 00 E 6.47

KHAO KHLONG WAN 11 45 N 99 48 E 6.48

KHAO KHUNG KRABEN 12 34 N 101 53 E 6.25

KHAO MONG LAI 11 50 N 99 50 E 6.47

KHAO TA MONG RAI 11 50 N 99 50 E 6.47

KHLONG LANG SUAN 9 57 N 99 10 E 6.54

KHLONG PHRA KHANONG 13 42 N 100 35 E 6.44

KO CHANG 12 03 N 102 21 E 6.22

KO CHANG TRAT LIGHT 12 06 N 102 17 E 6.22

KO CHUAK 9 28 N 99 41 E 6.62

KO CHUANG 12 31 N 100 58 E 6.29

KO KHO THIAN 10 25 N 99 19 E 6.52

KO KHRAM YAI 12 42 N 100 47 E 6.33

KO KRA 8 24 N 100 45 E 6.65

KO KUT 11 34 N 102 36 E 6.21

KO LOSIN 7 19 N 101 56 E 6.68

KO MAN NOK 12 34 N 101 42 E 6.25

KO NGAM YAI 10 30 N 99 26 E 6.51

KO NU 7 14 N 100 36 E 6.66

KO PHANGAN 9 45 N 100 02 E 6.59

KO SI CHANG HARBOR 13 10 N 100 49 E 6.41

KO TAO 10 06 N 99 51 E 6.58

KO TUNG KU 9 48 N 99 43 E 6.57

KOH KONG 11 20 N 103 00 E 6.20

KOH KONG KANG 10 36 N 103 25 E 6.16

KOH POS 10 37 N 103 29 E 6.15

KOH YOR 11 35 N 102 56 E 6.20

KRUNG THEP 13 45 N 100 30 E 6.44

KUAI CHIN MUN 21 15 N 107 42 E 4.62

KUALA BESAR 6 13 N 102 13 E 6.69

KUALA TRENGGANU 5 21 N 103 08 E 6.77

KUANTAN OLD PORT 3 48 N 103 20 E 6.87

KUANTAN PORT 3 58 N 103 26 E 6.87

KUAN-TOU CHIAO 21 27 N 109 02 E 4.3

KUAN-TS'AI LING 18 49 N 110 34 E 3.43

KWAI SHEK 22 21 N 114 03 E 2.29

KWO CHAU KWAN TO 22 16 N 114 21 E 2.7

L

L'AIGLE 20 58 N 106 59 E 4.40

L'AMANDE 20 57 N 107 20 E 4.52

L'ECHELLE 20 49 N 107 09 E 4.33

L'ENCLUME 20 59 N 107 26 E 4.49

L'ENCRIER 20 51 N 107 19 E 4.44

L'ESCARGOT 20 53 N 107 15 E 4.42

L'INDEX 20 52 N 107 07 E 4.34

L'ISOLE 21 00 N 107 27 E 4.50

L'ORANGE 20 44 N 107 11 E 4.33

LA CLOCHETTE 20 53 N 107 08 E 4.38

LA GOURDE 21 02 N 107 34 E 4.56

LA MEDUSE 20 51 N 107 17 E 4.43

LA MERE 20 48 N 107 15 E 4.42

LA QUILLE 20 41 N 107 03 E 4.27

LA SOURIS 21 00 N 107 28 E 4.50

LACH HUYEN 20 46 N 106 55 E 4.22

LACH HUYEN 20 48 N 106 55 E 4.29

LAEM CHABANG 13 05 N 100 53 E 6.39

LAEM CHAO 12 36 N 100 57 E 6.30

LAEM KHAO PHRA 6 51 N 101 33 E 6.68

LAEM KHO KHAO 9 13 N 99 53 E 6.59

LAEM KHO KWANG 10 31 N 99 16 E 6.50

LAEM KRABANG 13 05 N 100 53 E 6.39

LAEM LING 12 10 N 102 17 E 6.21

LAEM LING 12 12 N 102 17 E 6.24

LAEM MAE RAMPHUNG 11 11 N 99 34 E 6.49

LAEM NAM 12 03 N 102 35 E 6.20

LAEM PATTHAYA 12 55 N 100 51 E 6.38

LAEM PHAK BIA 13 02 N 100 06 E 6.46
164 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 161

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

LAEM PHATTHAYA 12 55 N 100 51 E 6.38

LAEM PHLAI DAM 9 05 N 99 55 E 6.64

LAEM PU CHAO 12 39 N 100 51 E 6.32

LAEM RET 9 25 N 100 01 E 6.59

LAEM SAI 7 14 N 100 35 E 6.66

LAEM SAMAE SAN 12 36 N 100 58 E 6.29

LAEM SAMUK 13 19 N 100 54 E 6.43

LAEM SING 12 28 N 102 04 E 6.24

LAEM SOK 12 03 N 102 35 E 6.20

LAEM TA CHI 6 56 N 101 15 E 6.67

LAEM TALUMPHUK 8 31 N 100 08 E 6.64

LAEM THONG LANG 12 37 N 100 55 E 6.31

LAEM THUAT 9 20 N 99 41 E 6.57

LAEM YA 12 35 N 101 25 E 6.26

LAMMA ISLAND 22 12 N 114 08 E 2.17

LAMMA PATCH 22 15 N 114 07 E 2.20

LAN KOK TSUI 22 25 N 113 54 E 2.44

LANG-YEH CHIAO 18 12 N 109 42 E 3.44

LANKIT ISLAND. 22 42 N 113 38 E 2.43

LANTAU CHANNEL 22 08 N 113 54 E 2.8

LANTAU ISLAND 22 16 N 113 57 E 2.26

LAO DUA 13 10 N 109 20 E 5.25

LE CANCRELAT 20 50 N 107 18 E 4.43

LE CHIEN 20 50 N 107 20 E 4.45

LE COLOSSE 21 01 N 107 27 E 4.52

LE DOME 20 57 N 107 14 E 4.40

LE DOME 21 00 N 107 26 E 4.52

LE DONJON 21 07 N 107 32 E 4.53

LE GRANDE ILE 21 04 N 107 30 E 4.51

LE LAPIN 20 54 N 107 10 E 4.40

LE PETIT BANC 21 12 N 107 45 E 4.62

LE ROC AUX AIGLES 20 57 N 107 26 E 4.49

LE SPECTRE 20 57 N 107 15 E 4.40

LE TRAPEZE 13 15 N 109 19 E 5.25

LE TURCO 20 48 N 107 16 E 4.43

LE VAUTOUR 20 58 N 107 19 E 4.46

LEI YU MUN 22 17 N 114 14 E 2.19

LEI YUE MUN 22 17 N 114 14 E 2.8

LEMA CHANNEL 22 06 N 114 14 E 2.8

LES OURS 20 59 N 107 21 E 4.47

LEUNG SHUEN WAN HOI 22 20 N 114 19 E 2.5

LIANHUASHAN SHUIDAO 22 58 N 113 32 E 2.46

LIEN CHIEN 16 08 N 108 08 E 5.12

LIGHTENING ANCHORAGE 18 14 N 109 27 E 3.49

LIN-CH'ANG SHIH 19 41 N 109 06 E 3.55

LINCOLN ISLAND 16 40 N 112 44 E 1.15

LINGAO JIAO 20 01 N 109 43 E 3.38

LINGAO JIAO LIGHT 20 00 N 109 42 E 3.27

LINGDING SHUIDAO 22 25 N 113 45 E 2.45

LINGSHI JIAO 18 23 N 110 03 E 3.44

LING-SHUI CHIAO 18 23 N 110 03 E 3.44

LIN-KAO CHIAO 20 01 N 109 43 E 3.38

LIN-KAO CHIAO LIGHT 20 00 N 109 42 E 3.27

LIVOCK REEF 10 11 N 115 17 E 1.27

LO AH CHAU 23 10 N 112 50 E 2.62

LO CHAO 22 19 N 113 17 E 2.57

LO SA TAU POINT 22 46 N 113 05 E 2.60

LOAITA ISLAND 10 41 N 114 25 E 1.24

LONG HARBOR 22 27 N 114 21 E 2.3

LONGSHUI LING 21 02 N 110 31 E 3.13

LONGXUE DAO 22 42 N 113 38 E 2.43

LO-P'ANG 23 10 N 111 37 E 2.66

LORD AUCKLAND SHOAL 10 20 N 117 19 E 1.29

LO-T'O SHA 20 22 N 110 35 E 3.28

LU PONG 23 10 N 111 37 E 2.66

LU-HUI-T'OU CHIAO 18 11 N 109 28 E 3.48

LUHUITOU JIAO 18 11 N 109 28 E 3.48

LUHUITOU-LING 18 10 N 109 34 E 3.47

LUKPO 23 08 N 112 28 E 2.65

LU-PU-HSU 23 08 N 112 28 E 2.65

M

MA CHAO 21 09 N 107 51 E 4.54

MACAU FORT 23 04 N 113 15 E 2.52

MACAU HARBOR 22 11 N 113 34 E 2.38

MACCLESFIELD BANK 15 45 N 114 20 E 1.18

MAE NAM 9 57 N 99 10 E 6.54

MAE NAM CHAO PHRAYA 13 32 N 100 36 E 6.44

MAE NAM RAYONG 12 39 N 101 17 E 6.28

MAGPIE ROCK 20 08 N 110 42 E 3.32

MA-LIU T'OU 18 40 N 110 25 E 3.43

MALOW T'OU 18 40 N 110 25 E 3.43

MALU 20 35 N 110 28 E 3.26

MANG ZHOU 21 40 N 112 27 E 3.5

MAP TA PHUT 12 39 N 101 17 E 6.28

MARIVELES REEF 8 00 N 113 56 E 1.39

MENZIES REEF 11 09 N 114 48 E 1.27

MERSING 2 26 N 103 51 E 6.95

MIAO-WAN 21 56 N 114 01 E 2.12

MIAOWAN DAO 21 56 N 114 01 E 2.12

MIRS BAY 22 32 N 114 23 E 2.2

MISCHIEF REEF 9 55 N 115 32 E 1.33

MONEY ISLAND 16 27 N 111 30 E 1.14

MORGAN POINT 22 06 N 113 28 E 2.56

MUI AN HOA 15 31 N 108 41 E 5.15

MUI BA KIEM 10 30 N 107 31 E 5.47

MUI BA LANG AN 15 14 N 108 57 E 5.17

MUI BAI BUNG 8 36 N 104 43 E 5.1

MUI BAI BUNG 8 37 N 104 43 E 5.62

MUI BAN THANG 12 24 N 109 21 E 5.27

MUI BANG 19 26 N 105 49 E 4.20

MUI BATANGAN 15 14 N 108 57 E 5.17

MUI CAM LINH 11 53 N 109 17 E 5.36

MUI CHAO 19 43 N 105 54 E 4.21

MUI CHON MAY DONG 16 21 N 108 02 E 5.11

MUI CHUT 12 13 N 109 13 E 5.32

MUI DA NANG 16 07 N 108 21 E 5.12

MUI DAI TRAI 10 22 N 103 50 E 6.9

MUI DAT VIAN KA 15 25 N 108 48 E 5.16

MUI DEN DO 10 44 N 106 46 E 5.54

MUI DIEU 12 54 N 109 28 E 5.25

MUI DINH 11 22 N 109 01 E 5.41

MUI DONG BA 12 08 N 109 14 E 5.32

MUI DONG BA 12 09 N 109 14 E 5.35

MUI DONG TRANH 10 20 N 106 53 E 5.51

MUI FALAISE 19 06 N 106 44 E 4.19

MUI GA 18 51 N 105 43 E 4.16

MUI GANH 12 34 N 109 26 E 5.26

MUI GANH RAI 10 25 N 106 59 E 5.53

MUI GANH TUONG 13 24 N 109 16 E 5.24

MUI HANH 10 01 N 104 01 E 6.8

MUI HON CHONG 10 08 N 104 39 E 6.6

MUI KE GA 10 42 N 108 00 E 5.44

MUI KE GA 12 54 N 109 28 E 5.25

MUI KE GA 13 34 N 109 18 E 5.23

MUI KHE GA 12 18 N 109 15 E 5.31

MUI KY VAN 10 23 N 107 16 E 5.48

MUI LANG 13 20 N 109 18 E 5.25

MUI LAY 17 05 N 107 07 E 4.10

MUI LUOI CAY 13 24 N 109 18 E 5.23

MUI MONG 12 30 N 109 19 E 5.27

MUI MU U 13 26 N 109 15 E 5.24

MUI NAM TRAM 15 21 N 108 52 E 5.17

MUI NE 10 55 N 108 18 E 5.43

MUI ONG 17 56 N 106 31 E 4.13

MUI RON 18 07 N 106 26 E 4.14

MUI VIAN KA 15 25 N 108 48 E 5.16

MUI VUNG TAU 10 19 N 107 05 E 5.1

MULAN TOU 20 10 N 110 41 E 3.33

MULAN TOU LIGHT 20 09 N 110 41 E 3.27

MY KHE 16 04 N 108 15 E 5.12

MY THO 10 21 N 106 22 E 5.57

N

NAMYIT ISLAND 10 11 N 114 22 E 1.25

NANCY DAO 22 00 N 113 13 E 2.71

NANG NUANG OILFIELD 10 07 N 99 26 E 6.53

NANSHA 22 48 N 113 35 E 2.43

NANSHAN ISLAND 10 44 N 115 49 E 1.28

NAN-T'A-YA TAO 19 53 N 111 12 E 3.40

NAO CHAO 20 54 N 110 35 E 3.13

NAOZHOU DAO 20 54 N 110 35 E 3.13

NARATHIWAT 6 26 N 101 50 E 6.68

NAU-FANG TUI 20 12 N 110 52 E 3.28

NEILINGDING DAO 22 25 N 113 48 E 2.41

NENASI 3 08 N 103 27 E 6.91

NGAN CHAU 22 13 N 114 11 E 2.15

NGAU MEI HOI 22 20 N 114 17 E 2.6

NGHE TINH 18 39 N 105 42 E 4.18

NGHIEM KINH CHIEU 13 53 N 109 19 E 5.20
Index—Gazetteer 165

Pub. 161

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

NGONG SHUEN CHAU 22 19 N 114 08 E 2.18

NHA BE 10 41 N 106 47 E 5.54

NHA TRANG 12 15 N 109 14 E 5.34

NIHTIEP 20 51 N 106 46 E 4.28

NINEPIN ISLANDS 22 16 N 114 21 E 2.7

NIU-CH'I CHOU 18 19 N 109 45 E 3.44

NIUTOU DAO 22 10 N 113 48 E 2.35

NIZHAU SHUIDAO 22 54 N 113 34 E 2.46

NIZHOU SHUIDAO 22 54 N 113 34 E 1.

NORTH DANGER REEF 11 25 N 114 21 E 1.21

NORTH EAST CAY 11 27 N 114 21 E 1.21

NORTH ISLAND 16 58 N 112 18 E 1.9

NORTH POINT 22 17 N 114 11 E 2.23, 7.

NORTH REEF 17 06 N 111 30 E 1.8

NORTH WEST INVESTIGATOR REEF 9 35 N 112 54 E 1.41

NUI CHUA 10 22 N 104 03 E 6.9

NUI DEN 13 51 N 109 17 E 5.20

NUI-PI CHIAO 20 29 N 110 32 E 3.26

NUOC NGOT 14 08 N 109 13 E 5.20

O

ONE FOOT ROCK 22 15 N 114 22 E 2.7

OUTER BANK 18 37 N 108 23 E 3.51

O-YEN SHIH 21 56 N 114 03 E 2.11

P

P'AI-WEI CHIAO 20 14 N 110 17 E 3.30

P'ING CHOU 21 36 N 112 39 E 3.5

PAI YEN 21 41 N 112 42 E 3.3

PAI-SHA CHIAO 20 05 N 110 18 E 3.34

PAIWEI JIAO 20 14 N 110 17 E 3.30

PAK HA MUN 20 58 N 107 34 E 4.31

PAK KOK 22 17 N 114 11 E 2.23, 7.

PAK TANK 22 09 N 113 24 E 2.56

PARACEL ISLANDS 16 40 N 112 20 E 1.7

PASSE DU CASQUE 20 52 N 107 18 E 4.38

PASSE HENRIETTE 20 48 N 107 09 E 4.33

PASSU KEAH 16 03 N 111 46 E 1.17

PATTLE ISLAND 16 32 N 111 36 E 1.13

PEARSON REEF 8 59 N 113 42 E 1.37

PEI SHIH 19 59 N 111 16 E 3.40

PEI-CHIEN TAO 21 53 N 114 02 E 2.11

PEI-FANG TUI 20 19 N 110 54 E 3.28

PEI-HAI ANCHORAGE 21 29 N 109 04 E 4.6

PEI-KOU-KENG CHIAO 20 51 N 110 20 E 3.25

PEI-LI CHIANG 19 10 N 108 35 E 3.52

PEI-T'A-YA TAO 19 59 N 111 16 E 3.40

PENG CHAU 22 17 N 114 02 E 2.22

PETERSON POINT 20 26 N 110 31 E 3.30

PHNOM PENH 11 36 N 104 54 E 5.59

PHSAR REAM 10 30 N 103 36 E 6.14

PIGEON REEF 8 52 N 114 38 E 1.37

PILOT ANCHORAGE 18 11 N 109 26 E 3.49

PING-LO T'OU 21 14 N 110 24 E 3.22

PING-MA CHIAO 19 55 N 109 18 E 3.39

PO LO TSUI 22 13 N 114 06 E 2.17

PO TOI GROUP 22 11 N 114 16 E 2.9

PO TOI ISLAND 22 10 N 114 16 E 2.10

POINTE DA NHAI 17 40 N 106 30 E 4.12

POINTE DE CAM RANH 11 53 N 109 17 E 5.36

POINTE DU FEU ROUGE 10 44 N 106 46 E 5.54

POINTE DU LOMBARD 10 36 N 106 52 E 5.52

POINTE DU MIRADOR 10 16 N 106 45 E 5.58

POINTE HON KHOI 12 35 N 109 15 E 5.28

POINTE ISABELLE 16 10 N 108 09 E 5.12

POINTE KEP 10 29 N 104 18 E 6.13

POINTE KOH KUSSAT 11 05 N 103 06 E 6.19

POINTE LAGAN 11 10 N 108 43 E 5.42

POINTE PHAMI 10 40 N 106 47 E 5.53

POINTE SAMIT 10 52 N 103 07 E 6.19

POINTE VINAY 10 55 N 108 18 E 5.43

POK LIU CHAU 22 12 N 114 08 E 2.17

POM PHRA CHULACHOMKLAO 13 32 N 100 35 E 6.44

PORT COURBET 20 59 N 107 04 E 4.35

PORT REDON 20 59 N 106 46 E 4.29

PORT WALLUT 21 12 N 107 34 E 4.63

POULO CICI 10 12 N 104 15 E 6.11

POULO SAPATE 9 58 N 109 05 E 5.4

POULO SEPATE 9 58 N 109 05 E 5.4

PRACHUAP KHIRI KHAN 11 48 N 99 48 E 6.48

PRATAS ISLAND 20 42 N 116 43 E 1.3

PRINCE CONSORT BANK 7 55 N 109 58 E 1.48

PRINCE OF WALES BANK 8 09 N 110 30 E 1.48

PULAU ACHEH 2 40 N 103 46 E 6.93

PULAU AUR 2 27 N 104 31 E 6.100

PULAU BERHALA 3 15 N 103 39 E 6.91

PULAU KABAN 2 40 N 103 46 E 6.93

PULAU LOZIN 7 19 N 101 56 E 6.68

PULAU PEMANGGIL 2 35 N 104 20 E 6.100

PULAU PERHENTIAN KECHIL 5 55 N 102 43 E 6.74

PULAU REDANG 5 47 N 103 01 E 6.75

PULAU SEMBILANG 2 42 N 103 53 E 6.96

PULAU SYED HASAN 3 31 N 103 29 E 6.90

PULAU SYED HASSAN 3 31 N 103 29 E 6.90

PULAU TENGGOL 4 48 N 103 41 E 6.79

PULAU TINGGI 2 18 N 104 07 E 6.102

PULAU TIOMAN 2 47 N 104 10 E 6.98

PULAU TOKONG BAHARA 2 40 N 104 04 E 6.99

PULAU YU 2 07 N 104 15 E 6.103

PULAU YU KECHIL 5 38 N 103 10 E 6.76

PUQIAN JIAO 20 06 N 110 34 E 3.34

PYRAMID ROCK 16 35 N 112 39 E 1.16

Q

QI'AO DAO 22 25 N 113 38 E 2.42

QING ZHOU 21 29 N 111 28 E 3.8

QIZHOU LEIDAO 19 56 N 111 13 E 3.40

QUAN DAO NAM DU 9 41 N 104 22 E 6.7

QUANG YEN 20 56 N 106 48 E 4.29

R

RACH DON 10 34 N 106 50 E 5.53

RACH GIA 10 01 N 105 05 E 6.6

RADE DU CRAPAUD 20 49 N 107 07 E 4.32

RAO CO 18 10 N 105 25 E 4.15

RATTLER ISLAND 23 10 N 112 50 E 2.62

RAU NHAT LE 17 29 N 106 38 E 4.11

REAM 10 30 N 103 36 E 6.14

RED CLIFF HEAD 22 05 N 113 24 E 2.53

REPULSE BAY 22 14 N 114 11 E 2.15

ROCHER BLANC 8 46 N 106 43 E 5.8

ROCHER ROSITA 10 17 N 104 21 E 6.13

ROCKY HARBOR 22 20 N 114 20 E 2.23

ROCKY POINT 23 00 N 112 51 E 2.61

RON NHAT LE 17 29 N 106 38 E 4.11

ROUND ISLAND 22 13 N 114 11 E 2.15

ROUND ISLET 18 46 N 110 30 E 3.43

ROYAL CAPTAIN SHOAL 9 01 N 116 40 E 1.31

ROYAL CHARLOTTE REEF 6 57 N 113 35 E 1.45

S

SABAK 6 11 N 102 19 E 6.72

SABINA SHOAL 9 43 N 116 36 E 1.31

SADEC 10 18 N 105 45 E 5.57

SAI GON 10 46 N 106 43 E 5.56

SAI POK LIU HOI HAP 22 11 N 114 03 E 2.21

SAIGON 10 46 N 106 43 E 5.56

SAINT ESPRIT SHOAL 19 33 N 113 03 E 1.6

SAM PUI TSAO 20 39 N 107 09 E 4.43

SANBAN ZHOU 22 43 N 113 39 E 2.40

SANDY SHOAL 11 02 N 117 38 E 1.29

SAN-HSIA KOU 21 47 N 112 52 E 3.5

SAN-MEN 22 03 N 113 59 E 2.13

SANMEN DAO 22 03 N 113 59 E 2.13

SAN-SHUI 23 11 N 112 50 E 2.63

SANSHUI 23 11 N 112 50 E 2.52

SAN-SHUI REACH 23 10 N 112 50 E 2.61

SANYA 18 14 N 109 30 E 3.49

SANZAO DAO 22 02 N 113 21 E 2.53

SATTAHIP 12 37 N 100 55 E 6.30

SCARBOROUGH REEF 15 08 N 117 45 E 1.19

SCARBOROUGH SHOAL 15 08 N 117 45 E 1.19

SCAWFELL SHOAL 7 18 N 106 52 E 1.49

SEAHORSE SHOAL 10 50 N 117 47 E 1.29
166 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 161

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SECOND BAR PAGODA 23 00 N 113 30 E 2.49

SECOND THOMAS SHOAL 9 49 N 115 52 E 1.32

SHA CHAU 22 21 N 113 53 E 2.30

SHA TIN HOI 22 26 N 114 13 E 2.4

SHAI WEI 21 10 N 110 25 E 3.21

SHANBAN ZHOU 22 43 N 113 39 E 2.43

SHANGCHUANG DAO 21 41 N 112 48 E 3.2

SHANGOUHOU 20 26 N 110 31 E 3.30

SHEK KWU CHAU 22 12 N 113 59 E 2.21

SHEKOU 22 28 N 113 52 E 2.39

SHEN-CHIEN CHIAO 19 47 N 109 09 E 3.56

SHEONG MA KOK 22 16 N 113 21 E 2.57

SHEUNG SZ MUN 22 12 N 114 15 E 2.19

SHIH-MEN 21 24 N 110 22 E 3.22

SHIH-WAN 22 00 N 113 24 E 2.53

SHITOU JIAO 21 09 N 110 23 E 3.20

SHIUHING 23 01 N 112 28 E 2.64

SHUANG SHAN 21 33 N 111 41 E 3.8

SHUANG-FAN 19 53 N 111 12 E 3.40

SHUANGSHAN DAO 21 33 N 111 41 E 3.8

SHUIDONG 21 29 N 111 05 E 3.11

SI RACHA 13 07 N 100 53 E 6.42

SICHI YAN 22 09 N 113 46 E 2.37

SIHANOUKVILLE 10 38 N 103 30 E 6.18

SIN COWE ISLAND 9 52 N 114 19 E 1.35

SOKO ISLANDS 22 10 N 113 55 E 2.28

SONG BACH DANG 20 51 N 106 46 E 4.29

SONG CUA DAI 15 53 N 108 24 E 5.13

SONG DUC MARINE TERMINAL 7 10 N 104 03 E 6.68

SONG GANH HAO 9 00 N 105 25 E 5.62

SONGKHLA HARBOR 7 13 N 100 35 E 6.66

SOUTH REEF 11 23 N 114 18 E 1.22

SOUTH SAND 16 56 N 112 20 E 1.9

SPRATLY ISLAND 8 38 N 111 55 E 1.43

SSU-KENG-SHA CHIAO 19 13 N 108 37 E 3.54

STANLEY BAY 22 12 N 114 12 E 2.15

STONECUTTERS ISLAND 22 19 N 114 08 E 2.18

STORM ISLAND 8 38 N 111 55 E 1.43

SU TU DEN TERMINAL 10 25 N 108 24 E 5.48

SUBI REEF 10 54 N 114 06 E 1.23

SUNGAI KELANTAN 6 13 N 102 14 E 6.1

SUNGAI KEMAMAN 4 14 N 103 27 E 6.82

SUNGAI KUANTAN 3 48 N 103 21 E 6.89

SUNGEI KEMAMAN 4 14 N 103 27 E 6.82

SUNGEI KUANTAN 3 48 N 103 21 E 6.89

SUN-LIN LING 19 48 N 108 25 E 3.39

T

T'AN CHIANG 22 26 N 113 04 E 2.69

T'AN WAN 21 44 N 112 08 E 3.5

T'A-YA CH'UN-TAO 19 56 N 111 13 E 3.40

TA-CH'AN 19 41 N 109 06 E 3.55

TA-CH'ING TAO 21 09 N 110 25 E 3.16

TA-CHING CHIAO 22 06 N 113 28 E 2.56

TA-CHOU TAO 18 40 N 110 29 E 3.43

TA-CHU CHOU 21 26 N 111 22 E 3.9

TA-FANG-CHI TAO 21 23 N 111 11 E 3.10

TA-HUA CHIAO 18 47 N 110 33 E 3.43

TA-HUO 21 39 N 112 07 E 3.6

TAI MIU WAN 22 16 N 114 17 E 2.18

TAI PANG WAN 22 32 N 114 23 E 2.2

TAI TAM BAY 22 14 N 114 14 E 2.15

TAI TAN HOI HAP 22 27 N 114 21 E 2.3

TAI YUE SHAN 22 16 N 113 57 E 2.26

TAITAMI CHANNEL 21 57 N 114 06 E 2.11

TAM KONG CHAU 22 49 N 113 02 E 2.60

TAN CHAU 10 48 N 105 15 E 5.57

TANJUNG CHENERING 5 16 N 103 11 E 6.78

TANJUNG DUNGUN 4 47 N 103 26 E 6.80

TANJUNG GELANG 3 58 N 103 27 E 6.85

TANJUNG MERANG 5 32 N 102 57 E 6.73

TANJUNG PENAWAR 1 31 N 104 17 E 6.105

TANJUNG PENUNJUK 4 20 N 103 30 E 6.82

TANJUNG PENYABONG 2 39 N 103 45 E 6.92

TANJUNG SEDILI BESAR 1 55 N 104 08 E 6.103

TANJUNG SEKAKAP 2 21 N 103 56 E 6.101

TANJUNG TEMBELING 3 48 N 103 23 E 6.85

TAN-KAN LIEH-TAO 22 01 N 114 12 E 2.11

TAN-KAN TAO 22 02 N 114 12 E 2.11

TAP SHEK KOK 22 23 N 113 55 E 2.31

TAPIS MARINE TERMINAL A 4 31 N 105 01 E 6.88

TCHE LI PAI 20 41 N 107 21 E 4.43

TECHING DAO 21 09 N 110 25 E 3.16

TENNENT REEF 8 52 N 114 38 E 1.37

THAN PHO HO CHI MIN 10 46 N 106 43 E 5.56

THANH HI 14 01 N 109 15 E 5.20

THATHONG 9 11 N 99 22 E 6.56

THE STRAGGLERS 22 00 N 113 24 E 2.53

THITU ISLAND 11 03 N 114 17 E 1.23

THON NINH CHU 11 35 N 109 02 E 5.40

THUNG PRONG 12 42 N 100 50 E 6.36

TIDE COVE 22 26 N 114 13 E 2.4

TIEH-SHAN CHIANG 21 35 N 109 35 E 4.3

TITAO TSUI 22 05 N 113 24 E 2.53

TOKONG YU 2 07 N 104 15 E 6.103

TONG KWA 21 51 N 112 54 E 2.54

TONGGU JIAO 22 23 N 113 37 E 2.40

TONGGU SHUIDAO 22 20 N 113 49 E 2.45

TONGGU ZUI 19 38 N 111 02 E 3.41

TOULU ZHOU 22 04 N 113 56 E 2.13

TREE ISLAND 16 59 N 112 16 E 1.8

TRIDENT SHOAL 11 28 N 114 40 E 1.22

TRITON ISLAND 15 47 N 111 12 E 1.17

TRURO SHOAL 16 20 N 116 43 E 1.19

TS'ANG-WU 23 29 N 111 19 E 2.68

TSEUNG KWAN O 22 17 N 114 16 E 2.18

TSIENG MUN 21 08 N 107 38 E 4.58

TSIN SHUI WAN 22 14 N 114 11 E 2.15

TSING CHAU 22 17 N 114 07 E 2.18

TU LING 18 45 N 108 50 E 3.46

TUMPAT 6 12 N 102 10 E 6.70

TUNG LUNG ISLAND 22 15 N 114 17 E 2.18

TUNG POK LIU HOI HAP 22 14 N 114 08 E 2.20

TUNG-FAN SHIH 21 27 N 112 22 E 3.6

TUNG-KU CHIAO 19 38 N 111 02 E 3.41

TUNG-KU TSUI 19 38 N 111 02 E 3.41

TUNG-LO TAO 18 19 N 108 59 E 3.50

TUNG-T'OU SHAN 21 06 N 110 24 E 3.16

TUNGTAFAN SHIH 21 28 N 112 23 E 3.1

TUNG-YING CHIAO 21 12 N 110 25 E 3.23

TUWU CHIO 22 05 N 113 33 E 2.32

TXAT XING CHAO 21 08 N 107 48 E 4.54

U

UNION ATOLL 9 45 N 114 25 W 1.34

V

VAN DUOI 20 55 N 107 20 E 4.49

VAN HOA 21 12 N 107 34 E 4.63

VEREKER BANKS 21 00 N 116 00 E 1.5

VICTOR ROCK 22 18 N 114 26 E 2.7

VINH CAM RANH 11 53 N 109 10 E 5.38

VINH HA LONG 20 55 N 107 05 E 4.35

VINH LONG 10 15 N 105 58 E 5.57

VUNG DA NANG 16 09 N 108 12 E 5.12

VUNG PHAN RANG 11 35 N 109 02 E 5.40

VUNG QUI NHON 13 46 N 109 14 E 5.22

VUNG RO 12 51 N 109 25 E 5.25

VUNG XUAN DAI 13 23 N 109 17 E 5.24

W

WAGLAN ISLAND 22 11 N 114 16 E 2.9

WAI SHA 21 29 N 109 05 E 4.6

WAILINGDING DAO 22 06 N 114 02 E 2.13

WAI-LING-TING 22 06 N 114 02 E 2.13

WAMPOA 23 05 N 113 25 E 2.50

WANG LAN ISLAND 22 11 N 114 16 E 2.9

WAN-T'OU LING 21 02 N 109 07 E 4.4

WEI-CHOU TAO 21 03 N 109 07 E 4.4

WEI-T'SUI LING 21 02 N 110 31 E 3.13

WEIZHOU DAO 21 03 N 109 07 E 4.4

WENCHANG OIL TERMINAL 19 37 N 112 03 E 3.42

WEN-WEI CHOU 21 49 N 113 56 E 2.12

WENWEI ZHOU 21 49 N 113 56 E 2.12
Index—Gazetteer 167

Pub. 161

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

WENWEI ZHOU LIGHTHOUSE 21 49 N 113 56 E 2.32

WEST LAMMA CHANNEL 22 11 N 114 03 E 2.21

WEST REEF 8 51 N 112 11 E 1.41

WEST YORK ISLAND 11 05 N 115 00 E 1.27

WESTERN REEF 10 16 N 113 37 E 1.26

WHITE POINT 22 19 N 114 08 E 2.23

WHITSUN REEF 9 58 N 114 39 E 1.35

WOODY ISLAND 16 50 N 112 20 E 1.10

WU CHOU 23 29 N 111 19 E 2.68

WU-CH'I CHOU 18 19 N 109 45 E 3.44

WU-LEI CHIAO 20 36 N 108 44 E 4.7

WUZHU ZHOU 21 36 N 112 53 E 3.2

X

XIACHUAN DAO 21 40 N 112 36 E 3.4

XIAOHU JIAO 22 50 N 113 34 E 2.48

XIAOZHU ZHOU 21 26 N 111 22 E 3.9

XIDAN DAO 21 58 N 114 08 E 2.11

XIEYANG DAO 20 54 N 109 13 E 4.5

XIJIANG TERMINAL 21 18 N 114 59 E 1.4

XUAM HAI PIER 18 40 N 105 42 E 4.18

Y

YA MEN WAN 22 20 N 113 04 E 2.69

YA-LUNG CHIAO 18 12 N 109 42 E 3.44

YANG-P'U WAN 19 42 N 109 06 E 3.55

YANTIAN 22 35 N 114 16 E 2.4

YI BLUFF 22 16 N 114 18 E 2.7

YING-KO TSUI 18 30 N 108 41 E 3.50

YUANGANGSHA ZUI 23 02 N 113 21 E 2.51

YUBAO JIAO 19 59 N 109 53 E 3.38

YU-CHI SHAN 22 12 N 113 27 E 2.57

YUCHU 23 06 N 113 26 E 2.50

YUEH-CH’ENG 23 04 N 112 00 E 2.65

YU-LIN CHIANG 18 11 N 109 31 E 3.47

YU-LIN CHIAO 19 06 N 108 36 E 3.51

YU-LIN CHOU 19 06 N 108 36 E 3.51

YUTSHING 23 04 N 112 E 2.65

Z

ZERO BUOY 13 44 N 109 15 E 5.22

ZHANJIANG 21 12 N 110 24 E 3.21

ZHANJIANG GANG 21 10 N 110 25 E 3.15

ZHUJIANG KOU 22 30 N 113 35 E 2.32